initial commit of ebook 9613HEADmain

4 files changed, 22474 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/old/7ybug10.txt b/old/7ybug10.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5386537
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/7ybug10.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11237 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty
+
+Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the
+copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing
+this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook.
+
+This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project
+Gutenberg file.  Please do not remove it.  Do not change or edit the
+header without written permission.
+
+Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the
+eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file.  Included is
+important information about your specific rights and restrictions in
+how the file may be used.  You can also find out about how to make a
+donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved.
+
+
+**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts**
+
+**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971**
+
+*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!*****
+
+
+Title: The Young Buglers
+
+Author: G.A. Henty
+
+Release Date: January, 2006 [EBook #9613]
+[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule]
+[This file was first posted on October 10, 2003]
+
+Edition: 10
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis,
+and PG Distributed Proofreaders
+
+
+
+
+THE YOUNG BUGLERS
+
+by G.A. Henty
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE
+
+
+To my Young Readers.
+
+I remember that, as a boy, I regarded any attempt to mix instruction
+with amusement as being as objectionable a practice as the
+administration of powder in jam; but I think that this feeling arose
+from the fact that in those days books contained a very small share
+of amusement and a very large share of instruction. I have endeavored
+to avoid this, and I hope that the accounts of battles and sieges,
+illustrated as they are by maps, will be found as interesting
+as the lighter parts of the story. As in my tale, "_The Young
+Franc-Tireurs_," I gave the outline of the Franco-German war, so
+I have now endeavored to give the salient features of the great
+Peninsular struggle. The military facts, with the names of generals
+and regiments, the dates and places, are all strictly accurate, and
+any one who has read with care the story of "The Young Buglers" could
+pass an examination as to the leading events of the Peninsular war.
+
+Yours truly,
+
+THE AUTHOR.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+      CHAPTER I. A Coaching Adventure
+
+     CHAPTER II. The Young Pickles
+
+    CHAPTER III. Enlisted
+
+     CHAPTER IV. A Tough Customer
+
+      CHAPTER V. Overboard
+
+     CHAPTER VI. Portugal
+
+    CHAPTER VII. The Passage of the Douro--Talavera
+
+   CHAPTER VIII. A Pause in Operations
+
+     CHAPTER IX. "With the Guerillas"
+
+      CHAPTER X. Madrid
+
+     CHAPTER XI. The Fight on the Coa
+
+    CHAPTER XII. Busaco and Torres Vedras
+
+   CHAPTER XIII. Albuera
+
+    CHAPTER XIV. Invalided Home
+
+     CHAPTER XV. Ciudad Rodrigo and Badajos
+
+    CHAPTER XVI. Salamanca
+
+   CHAPTER XVII. Caught in a Trap
+
+  CHAPTER XVIII. Just in Time
+
+    CHAPTER XIX. Vittoria
+
+     CHAPTER XX. Toulouse
+
+
+
+
+THE YOUNG BUGLERS.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+A COACHING ADVENTURE.
+
+
+Had any of the boys in the lower forms of Eton in the year 1808, been
+asked who were the most popular boys of their own age, they would have
+been almost sure to have answered, without the slightest hesitation,
+Tom and Peter Scudamore, and yet it is probable that no two boys
+were more often in disgrace. It was not that they were idle, upon the
+contrary, both were fairly up in their respective forms, but they were
+constantly getting into mischief of one sort or another; yet even
+with the masters they were favorites, there was never anything low,
+disgraceful, or ungentlemanly in their escapades, and they could be
+trusted never to attempt to screen themselves from the consequences
+by prevarication, much less by lying. If the masters heard that a
+party of youngsters had been seen far out of bounds, they were pretty
+sure that the Scudamores were among them; a farmer came in from a
+distance to complain that his favorite tree had been stripped of
+its apples--for in those days apples were looked upon by boys as
+fair objects of sport,--if the head-master's favorite white poodle
+appeared dyed a deep blue, if Mr. Jones, the most unpopular master
+in the school, upon coming out of his door trod upon a quantity of
+tallow smeared all over the doorstep, and was laid up for a week in
+consequence, there was generally a strong suspicion that Tom and Peter
+Scudamore were concerned in the matter. One of their tricks actually
+came to the ears of the Provost himself, and caused quite a sensation
+in the place, but in this case, fortunately for them, they escaped
+undetected.
+
+One fine summer afternoon they were out on the water with two or three
+other boys of their own age, when a barge was seen ahead at some short
+distance from the shore. She was apparently floating down with the
+stream, and the fact that a horse was proceeding along the towing-path
+a little way ahead was not noticed, as the rope was slack and was
+trailing under water. The boys, therefore, as they were rowing against
+stream, steered their boat to pass inside of her. Just as they came
+abreast of the horse a man on the barge suddenly shouted to the rider
+of the horse to go on. He did so, the rope tightened, rose from the
+water just under the bow of the boat, and in another minute the boys
+were struggling in the water. All were good swimmers, and would
+have cared little for the ducking had it occurred accidentally, but
+the roars of laughter of the bargeman, and the chaff with which he
+assailed them as they scrambled up the bank, showed clearly enough
+that they had been upset maliciously. The boys were furious, and one
+or two proposed that they should report the case, but Tom Scudamore
+pointed out that the bargeman would of course declare that it was
+a pure accident, and that the boys were themselves in fault in not
+looking out whether the barge was being towed, before going inside
+her, and so nothing would come of reporting.
+
+The boat was dragged ashore and emptied, and in a few minutes they
+were rowing back towards the town. The distance was but short, and
+they did not repass the barge before they reached their boat-house.
+The brothers had exchanged a few words in a low voice on the way, and
+instead of following the example of the others, and starting at a run
+for the house where they boarded to change their clothes, they walked
+down by the river and saw that the barge had moored up against the
+bank, at a short distance below the bridge. They watched for a time,
+and saw the bargeman fasten up the hatch of the little cabin and go
+ashore.
+
+That night two boys lowered themselves with a rope from the window
+of one of the dames-houses, and walked rapidly down to the river.
+There were a few flickering oil lamps burning, and the one or two
+old watchmen were soundly asleep in their boxes. They did not meet a
+soul moving upon their way to the object of the expedition, the barge
+that had run them down. Very quietly they slipped on board, satisfied
+themselves by listening at the half-open hatch to the snoring within
+that their enemy was there, then loosened the moorings so that they
+could be thrown off at a moment's notice.
+
+"Now, Peter," the elder brother said, "open our lantern. The night is
+quite still. You hold your hand behind it, so that the light will not
+fall on our faces, and I will look whether he is only wrapped up in a
+blanket or has a regular bed; we must not risk setting the place on
+fire. Get the crackers ready."
+
+A dark lantern was now taken out from under Tom's jacket, and was
+found to be still alight, an important matter, for striking a light
+with flint and steel was in those days a long and tedious business,
+and then opening it Tom threw the light into the cabin. It was a
+tiny place, and upon a bench, wrapped up in a blanket, the bargeman
+was lying. As the light fell on his eyes, he moved, and a moment
+afterwards started up with an oath, and demanded who was there.
+
+No answer came in words, but half a dozen lighted crackers were thrown
+into the cabin, when they began to explode with a tremendous uproar.
+In an instant the hatch was shut down and fastened outside. The rope
+was cast off, and in another minute she was floating down stream with
+the crackers still exploding inside her, but with their noise almost
+deadened by the tremendous outcry of shouts and howls, and by a
+continued and furious banging at the hatch.
+
+"There is no fear of his being choked, Tom, I hope?"
+
+"No, I expect he's all right," Tom said, "it will be pretty stifling
+for a bit no doubt, but there's a chimney hole and the smoke will find
+its way out presently. The barge will drift down to the weir before it
+brings up, there is not enough stream out for there to be any risk of
+her upsetting, else we daren't have turned her adrift."
+
+The next day the whole town was talking of the affair, and in the
+afternoon the bargeman went up to the head-master and accused one of
+the boys of an attempt to murder him.
+
+Greatly surprised, the Provost demanded what reason the man had for
+suspecting the boys, and the bargeman acknowledged that he had that
+afternoon upset a boat with four or five boys in her. "They would not
+bear you malice on that account," the Provost said; "they don't think
+much of a swim such weather as this, unless indeed you did it on
+purpose."
+
+The man hesitated in his answer, and the Provost continued, "You
+evidently did do it on purpose, and in that case, although it was
+carried too far, for I hear you had a very narrow escape of being
+stifled, still you brought it upon yourself, and I hope it will be a
+lesson to you not to risk the lives of Eton boys for your amusement. I
+know nothing about this affair, but if you can point out the boys you
+suspect I will of course inquire into it."
+
+The bargeman departed, grumbling that he did not know one of the young
+imps from another, but if he did find them, he'd wring their necks for
+them to a certainty. The Provost had some inquiries made as to the
+boys who had been upset, and whether they had all been in at lock-up
+time; finding that they had all answered to their names, he made no
+further investigation.
+
+This affair had taken place in the summer before this story begins,
+on the 15th of October, 1808. On that day a holiday was granted in
+consequence of the head-master's birthday, and the boys set off, some
+to football, some for long walks in the country.
+
+The Scudamores, with several of their friends, strolled down the
+towing-path for some miles, and walked back by the road. As they
+entered their dames-house on their return, Tom Scudamore said for the
+twentieth time, "Well, I would give anything to be a soldier, instead
+of having to go in and settle down as a banker--it's disgusting!"
+
+As they entered a boy came up. "Oh, Scudamore, Jackson's been asking
+for you both. It's something particular, for he has been out three or
+four times, and he wanted to send after you, but no one knew where you
+had gone."
+
+The boys at once went into the master's study, where they remained all
+the afternoon. A short time after they went in, Mr. Jackson came out
+and said a word or two to one of the senior boys, and the word was
+quickly passed round, that there was to be no row, for the Scudamores
+had just heard of the sudden death of their father. That evening, Mr.
+Jackson had beds made up for them in his study, so that they might not
+have the pain of having to talk with the other boys. The housekeeper
+packed up their things, and next morning early they started by the
+coach for London.
+
+Mr. Scudamore, the father of the young Etonians, was a banker. He was
+the elder of two brothers, and had inherited his father's business,
+while his brother had gone into the army. The banker had married the
+daughter of a landowner in the neighborhood, and had lived happily and
+prosperously until her death, seven years before this story begins.
+She had borne him three children, the two boys, now fifteen and
+fourteen years old respectively, and a girl, Rhoda, two years younger
+than Peter. The loss of his wife afflicted him greatly, and he
+received another shock five years later by the death of his brother,
+Colonel Scudamore, to whom he was much attached. From the time of his
+wife's death he had greatly relaxed in his attention to his business,
+and after his brother's death he left the management almost entirely
+in the hands of his cashier, in whom he had unlimited confidence.
+This confidence was wholly misplaced. For years the cashier had
+been carrying on speculation upon his own account with the monies
+of the bank. Gradually and without exciting the least suspicion he
+had realized the various securities held by the bank, and at last
+gathering all the available cash he, one Saturday afternoon, locked up
+the bank and fled.
+
+On Monday it was found that he was missing; Mr. Scudamore went down
+to the bank, and had the books taken into his parlor for examination.
+Some hours afterwards a clerk went in and found his master lying back
+in his chair insensible. A doctor on arriving pronounced it to be
+apoplexy. He never rallied, and a few hours afterwards the news spread
+through the country that Scudamore, the banker, was dead, and that the
+bank had stopped payment.
+
+People could believe the former item of news, but were incredulous as
+to the latter. Scudamore's bank was looked upon in Lincolnshire as at
+least as safe as the Bank of England itself. But the sad truth was
+soon clear to all, and for awhile there was great distress of mind
+among the people, for many miles round, for most of them had entrusted
+all their savings of years to the Scudamores' bank. When affairs were
+wound up, however, it was found that things were not quite so bad as
+had been feared. Mr. Scudamore had a considerable capital employed
+in the bank, and the sale of his handsome house and estate realized
+a large sum, so that eventually every one received back the money
+they had entrusted to the bank; but the whole of the capital and the
+profits of years of successful enterprise had vanished, and it was
+calculated by the executors that the swindler must have appropriated
+at least 80,000_l._
+
+For the first month after their father's death the boys stayed with
+the doctor who had long attended the family and had treated all their
+ailments since they were born. In the great loss of their father the
+loss of their fortune affected them but little, except that they were
+sorry to be obliged to leave Eton; for the interest of the little
+fortune which their mother had brought at her marriage, and which was
+all that now remained to them, would not have been sufficient to pay
+for their expenses there, and indeed such an education would have been
+out of place for two boys who had to make their own way in life. At
+the end of this month it was arranged that they were to go to their
+only existing relative, an elder sister of Mr. Scudamore. The boys had
+never seen her, for she had not for many years been friends with her
+brother.
+
+The letter which she had written to the doctor, announcing her
+willingness to receive them, made the boys laugh, although it did not
+hold out prospects of a very pleasant future. "I am, of course," she
+said, "prepared to do my duty. No one can say that I have ever failed
+in my duty. My poor brother quarreled with me. It was his duty to
+apologize. He did not do so. Had it been my duty to apologize I should
+have done so. As I was right, and he was wrong, it was clearly not my
+duty. I shall now do my duty to my niece and nephews. Yet I may be
+allowed to say that I regret much that they are not all nieces. I do
+not like boys. They are always noisy, and not always clean. They do
+not wipe their shoes, they are always breaking things, they go about
+with all sorts of rubbish and dirt in their pockets, their hair is
+always rough, they are fond of worrying cats, and other cruel games.
+Altogether they are objectionable. Had my brother made up his mind to
+leave his children in my charge, it was clearly his duty to have had
+girls instead of boys. However, it is not because other people fail
+in their duty that I should fail in mine. Therefore, let them come to
+me this day fortnight. By that time I shall have got some strong and
+suitable furniture in the room that my nephews will occupy, and shall
+have time to make other arrangements. This letter will, if all goes
+well, reach you, I believe, in three days after the date of posting,
+and they will take the same time coming here. Assure them that I am
+prepared to do my duty, and that I hope that they will make a serious
+effort at doing theirs. Ask my nephews, upon the occasion of their
+first arrival, to make as little noise as they can, because my cat,
+Minnie, is very shy, and if she is scared at the first meeting,
+she will take a very long time to get accustomed to them. I also
+particularly beg that they do not, as they come up to the house, throw
+stones at any of the pigeons who may be resting upon the roof, for the
+slates were all set right a few weeks ago, and I am sure I do not wish
+to have the slater here again; they were hanging about for ten days
+the last time they came. I do not know that I have anything else to
+say."
+
+The boys received the reading of this singular epistle with shouts of
+laughter.
+
+"Poor aunt," Tom said. "What does she think of us that she can suppose
+that, upon our very first arrival, we should come in like wild
+Indians, throwing stones at her pigeons, and frightening her Minnie
+into fits. Did you ever hear such an extraordinary idea, Doctor
+Jarvis?"
+
+"At any rate, boys," the doctor said, when the laughter had ceased,
+"you may find your aunt a little peculiar, but she is evidently
+determined to do her duty to you, and you must do yours to her, and
+not play more pranks than you can help. As to you, Rhoda, you will
+evidently be in high favor, and as you are fortunately a quiet little
+lady, you will, I have no doubt, get on with her very well."
+
+"I hope so," Rhoda said, smiling, "you see she means to be kind,
+though she does write funny letters, and, at any rate, there are
+Minnie and the pigeons; it sounds nice, you know. Do you know what
+aunt's place is like, Dr. Jarvis, and how to get there from here."
+
+"No, my dear, I never was in that part of England. It is close to
+Marlborough that she lives, a very pretty country, I believe. There
+is, of course, no way to go across from here. You must go up to London
+by coach from here, and then to Marlborough by the western coach. I
+will write to my brother James in town, where you stopped at night as
+you came through, boys, and I know that he will take you all in for
+the night, and see that you go off right in the morning."
+
+"You're very kind, indeed, Doctor Jarvis. I do not know how to thank
+you for all you have done for us," Tom said earnestly, and the others
+cordially echoed the sentiment.
+
+The day before starting the doctor had a long talk with the boys. He
+pointed out to them that their future now depended upon themselves
+alone. They must expect to find many unpleasantnesses in their way,
+but they must take their little trials pleasantly, and make the best
+of everything. "I have no fear as to Rhoda," their kind friend said.
+"She has that happy, amiable, and quiet disposition that is sure to
+adapt itself to all circumstances. I have no doubt she will become a
+favorite with your aunt. Try to keep out of scrapes, boys. You know
+you are rather fond of mischief, and your aunt will not be able to
+understand it. If you get into any serious difficulty write to me, you
+can rely upon always finding a friend in me."
+
+The journey to London was no novelty to the boys, but Rhoda enjoyed it
+immensely. Her place had been taken inside, but most of the journey
+she rode outside with her brothers. She was greatly amazed at the
+bustle and noise of London, and was quite confused at the shouting and
+crowd at the place where the coach drew up, for two or three other
+coaches had just arrived from other directions. Mr. Jarvis had sent
+his man-servant to meet them, their luggage was sent direct to the
+booking-office from which the coach started for Marlborough, and the
+servant carried a small bag containing their night things. It was
+evening when they got in, and Rhoda could scarcely keep her eyes open
+long enough to have tea, for the coach had been two days and nights
+upon the road. The next day they stayed in town, and Mrs. Jarvis took
+them out to see the sights of London--the Tower and St. Paul's, and
+Westminster Abbey, and the beasts at Exeter Change. The boys had twice
+before spent a whole day in London, their father having, upon two
+occasions, made his visits to town to fit in with their going up to
+school, but to Rhoda it was all new, and very, very wonderful.
+
+The next day the coach started early for Marlborough. It was to
+take rather over twenty-four hours on the way. As before, Rhoda rode
+outside with her brothers until the evening, but then, instead of
+going inside, where there were five passengers already, she said, as
+the night was so fine and warm, she would rather remain with them.
+They were sitting behind the coachman, there were two male passengers
+upon the same seat with them, and another in the box seat by the
+coachman. The conversation turned, as in those days it was pretty sure
+to turn, upon highwaymen. Several coaches had been lately stopped by
+three highwaymen, who worked together, and were reported to be more
+reckless than the generality of their sort. They had shot a coachman
+who refused to stop, the week before on Hounslow Heath, they had
+killed a guard on the great north road, and they had shot two
+passengers who resisted, near Exeter.
+
+Tom and Peter were greatly amused by observing that the passenger who
+sat next to them, and who, at the commencement of the conversation,
+showed a brace of heavy pistols with which he was provided, with much
+boasting as to what he should do if the coach were attacked, when he
+heard of the fate of the passengers who had resisted, became very
+quiet indeed, and presently took an opportunity, when he thought that
+he was not observed, of slipping his pistols under the tarpaulin
+behind him.
+
+"I hope those dreadful men won't stop our coach," Rhoda said.
+
+"They won't hurt you if they do, Rhoda," Tom said assuringly. "I think
+it would be rather a lark. I say, Peter," he went on in a whisper, "I
+think we might astonish them with those pistols that coward next to
+you has hid behind him."
+
+"I should just think so," Peter said; "the bargee at Eton would be
+nothing to it."
+
+The hours went slowly on. Rhoda and the boys dozed uncomfortably
+against each other and the baggage behind them, until they were
+suddenly roused by a shout in the road beside them: "Stand for your
+lives!"
+
+The moon was up, and they could see that there were three horsemen.
+One galloped to the horses' heads, and seized the rein of one of the
+leaders, the others rode by the coach.
+
+The first answer to the challenge was a discharge from the blunderbuss
+of the guard, which brought one of the highwaymen from his horse.
+
+The other, riding up to the side of the coach, fired at the guard, and
+a loud cry told that the shot had taken effect. In another moment the
+fellow was by the side of the coachman.
+
+"Hold up!" he said, "or I will blow your brains out!"
+
+The coachman did as he was ordered, and indeed the man at the leader's
+head had almost succeeded in stopping them. The passenger next to the
+boys had, at the first challenge, again seized his pistols, and the
+boys thought that he was going to fire after all.
+
+"Lie down at our feet, Rhoda, quick!" Tom said, "and don't move
+till I tell you." The fate of the guard evidently frightened away
+the short-lived courage of the passenger, for, as the coachman again
+pulled up, he hastily thrust the pistols in behind him.
+
+"Get down, every one of you," the highwayman shouted.
+
+"Lie still, Rhoda," Tom whispered. "Now, Peter, get in underneath the
+tarpaulin."
+
+This was done as the passengers descended. The luggage was not so
+heavily piled as usual, and the boys found plenty of room beneath the
+tarpaulin.
+
+"Now, Peter, you take one of these pistols and give me the other. Now
+peep out. The moon is hidden, which is a good thing; now, look here,
+you shall shoot that fellow standing down below, who is swearing at
+the ladies inside for not getting out quicker. I'll take a shot at
+that fellow standing in front of the horse's heads."
+
+"Do you think you can hit him, Tom?"
+
+"I have not the least idea, but I can try; and if you hit the other
+one, the chances are he'll bolt, whether I hit him or not. Open the
+tarpaulin at the side so as to see well, and rest the pistol upon
+something. You must take a good shot, Peter, for if you miss him we
+shall be in a mess."
+
+"All right," Peter said, in a whisper, "I can almost touch him with
+the pistol."
+
+In loud and brutal tones the highwayman now began to order the
+frightened ladies to give up their watches and rings, enforcing his
+commands with terrible curses. When suddenly a pistol flashed out
+just behind him, and he fell off his horse with a ball through his
+shoulder.
+
+Tom's shot, though equally well intended, was not so truly aimed.
+The highwayman had dismounted, and was standing just in front of the
+leaders, so that Tom had a fair view of him between them. The boys had
+both occasionally fired their father's pistols, for, in those days,
+each householder in the country always kept loaded pistols in his
+room, but his skill was not sufficient to make sure of a man at that
+distance. The bullet flew past at two feet to the left of his head.
+But its effect was scarcely less startling than if it had actually hit
+him, for, in its passage, it passed through the ear of the off leader.
+The horse made a start at the sudden pain, and then dashed forward.
+The rest of the team, already alarmed by the shot, followed her lead;
+before the startled highwayman could get out of the way they were upon
+him, in another instant he was under their heels, and the coach gave a
+sudden lurch as it passed over his body.
+
+"Lie still, Rhoda, a little longer; it's all right, but the horses
+have run away," Tom exclaimed, as he scrambled forward, and caught
+hold of the reins, which the coachman had tied to the rail of the seat
+as he got down. "Catch hold of the reins, Peter, and help me pull."
+
+Peter did so; but the united strength of the boys was wholly unequal
+to arresting the headlong flight of the horses.
+
+Fortunately the highwaymen had chosen a low bottom between two hills,
+to arrest the coach, consequently the road was up a hill of moderate
+steepness. The boys hoped that the horses would stop when they got to
+the top; but they went on with redoubled speed.
+
+"This is something like going it," Peter said.
+
+"Isn't it, Peter? They know their way, and we ain't lively to meet
+anything in the road. They will stop at their stable. At any rate,
+it's no use trying to steer them. Here, Rhoda dear, get up; are you
+very much frightened?"
+
+Rhoda still lay quite still, and Peter, holding on with difficulty,
+for the coach quite rocked with the speed at which they were going,
+climbed over to her, and stooped, down. "Shall I help you up, Rhoda?"
+
+"No, please, I would rather stop here till it's all over."
+
+Fortunately the hill, up to the Tillage where they made the change,
+was a steep one, and the horses broke into a trot before they reached
+the top, and, in another minute drew up at the door of the inn.
+The astonishment of the ostlers at seeing the horses covered with
+lather, and coachbox tenanted only by two boys, behind whom a little
+white face now peered out, was extreme, and they were unable to get
+beyond an ejaculation of hallo! expressive of a depth of incredulous
+astonishment impossible to be rendered by words.
+
+"Look here," Tom said, with all the composure, and much of the
+impudence, which then, as now, characterized the young Etonian, "don't
+be staring like a pack of stuck pigs. You had better get the fresh
+horses in, and drive back to the bottom, about four miles from here.
+There has been regular row with some fellows, and I expect two or
+three are killed. Now, just put up the ladder; I want to get my sister
+down."
+
+Almost mechanically the men put the ladder up to the coach, and the
+boys and Rhoda got down.
+
+"Do you say the coach has been attacked by highwaymen in Burnet
+bottom?"
+
+"I don't know anything about Burnet bottom," Tom said. "It was a
+bottom about four miles off. There were three of them. The guard shot
+one of them, and the others shot the guard. Then we were stopped by
+them, and every one had to get down. Then the horses ran away, and
+here we are."
+
+"Then there are two of those highwayman chaps with the passengers,"
+one of the men said.
+
+"You need not be afraid of them," Tom said carelessly; "one got shot,
+and I don't know about the other, but the wheel of the coach went over
+him, so I do not suppose he will be much trouble. Now, if I were you,
+I should not stand staring any more, but should make haste and take
+the coach back."
+
+"Hullo, look at this grey," one of the men exclaimed, as, at last
+understanding what had taken place, they began to bustle about to
+change horses. "He's got blood all over the side of his head. One of
+those scoundrels has shot him through the ear."
+
+Tom burst out laughing. "I am the scoundrel!" he said. "Peter, that
+explains why we went off so suddenly. I missed the fellow, and hit the
+leader in the ear. However, it comes to the same thing. By the way, we
+may as well take the pistols."
+
+So saying, he ran up the ladder and brought down the pistols. By this
+time the fresh horses were in.
+
+"I can't make nought of it," one of the ostlers said, climbing up into
+the coachman's seat. "Jump up, Bill and Harry. It's the rummiest go I
+ever heard of in coaching."
+
+"Landlady, can you get us some tea at once, please," Tom said, going
+up to the landlady, who was looking on from the door of the house
+with an astonishment equal to that of the men at the whole affair;
+"as quickly as you can, for my sister looks regularly done up with
+fatigue, and then, please let her lie down till the coach is ready to
+start again. It will be three quarters of an hour before it is back,
+and then, I daresay, there will be a lot of talking before they go on.
+I should think they will be wanting breakfast. At any rate, an hour's
+rest will do you good, Rhoda."
+
+Rhoda was too worn out with the over-excitement even to answer.
+Fortunately there was hot water in order to make hot grog for the
+outriders of the coach, some tea was quickly made, and in ten minutes
+Rhoda was fast asleep on the landlady's bed.
+
+Tom and Peter expressed their desire for something substantial in the
+way of eating, for the morning had now fairly broken. The landlady
+brought in some cold meat, upon which the boys made a vigorous attack,
+and then, taking possession of two benches, they dozed off until the
+coach arrived.
+
+It had but three horses, for one had been sent off to carry Bill,
+the ostler, at full speed to the town at which they had last changed
+horses, to fetch a doctor and the constable. The other two men had
+remained with the guard, who was shot in the hip, and the highwayman,
+whose collar-bone was broken by Peter's shot. The fellow shot by the
+guard, and the other one, whom the coach wheels had passed over, were
+both dead.
+
+"There's the coach, Tom."
+
+"What a nuisance, Peter, they'll all be wanting to talk now, and I am
+just so comfortably off. Well, I suppose it's no use trying to get any
+more sleep."
+
+So saying, they roused themselves, and went out to the door just as
+the coach drew up.
+
+There was a general shout of greeting from the passengers, which was
+stopped, however, by a peremptory order from the coachman.
+
+He was a large, stout man, with a face red from the effects of wind
+and exposure. "Jack," he said, to a man who was standing near, for
+the news of the attack upon the coach had quickly spread, and all
+the villagers were astir to see it come in. "Jack, hold the leader's
+head. Thomas, open the door, and let the insides out. Gents," he said
+solemnly, when this was done, "I'm going to do what isn't a usual
+thing by no means, in fact, I ain't no precedence for doing it; but
+then, I do not know any precedence for this here business altogether.
+I never did hear of a coachman standing up on his box to give a cheer,
+no, not to King George himself; but, then, King George never polished
+off two highwaymen all to himself, leastway, not as I've heard tell
+of. Now, these two young gents have done this. They have saved my
+coach and my passengers from getting robbed, and so I'm going to give
+'em three cheers. I'll trouble you to help me up into the box seat,
+gentlemen."
+
+Assisted by the other passengers, the driver now gravely climbed up
+into the box seat, steadied himself there by placing one hand upon
+the shoulder of the passenger next him, took off his low-crowned hat,
+and said. "Follow me, gents, with three cheers for those young gents
+standing there; better plucked ones I never came across, and I've
+traveled a good many miles in my day."
+
+So saying, he gave three stentorian cheers, which were echoed by all
+the passengers and villagers.
+
+Then there was a momentary silence, and Tom, who, with his brother,
+had been feeling very uncomfortable, although rather inclined to
+laugh, seeing that he was expected to say something, said, "Thank you
+all very much; but we'd much rather you hadn't done it."
+
+Then there was a general laugh and movement, and a general pressing
+forward of the passengers to shake the boys by the hand. The driver
+was assisted down from his elevated position, and got off the coach
+and came up to them. "That's the first speech I ever made, young
+gentlemen, and, if I know myself, it will be the last; but, you see,
+I was druv to it. You're a good sort, that's certain. What will you
+drink?"
+
+The boys declared for beer, and drank solemnly with the driver,
+imitating him in finishing their mugs at a draught, and turning them
+topsy-turvy. There was now a great deal of talking, and many questions
+were asked. Tom and Peter modestly said that there was really nothing
+to tell. They saw that the gentleman next to them intended to use his
+pistols; but, not seeing a good opportunity, put them down behind the
+tarpaulin, and the thought occurred to them that, by slipping behind
+it, they would get a good chance of a certain shot. Accordingly, they
+had fired, and then the horse had run away; and there was an end of
+it. There was nothing extraordinary in the whole matter.
+
+"At any rate, my boys, you have saved me from a loss of a couple
+of hundred pounds which I had got hid in my boots, but which those
+fellows would have been sure to have have discovered," one of the
+passengers said.
+
+There was a general chorus of satisfaction at many watches and
+trinkets saved, and then the first passenger went on,--
+
+"I propose, gentlemen and ladies, that when we get to the end of our
+journey we make a subscription, according to the amount we have saved,
+and that we get each of these young gentlemen a brace of the very best
+pistols that can be bought. If they go on as they have begun, they
+will find them useful."
+
+There was a general exclamation of approval, and one of the ladies,
+who had been an inside passenger, said, "And I think we ought to give
+a handsome ring to their sister as a memorial through life. Of course,
+she had not so much to do as her brothers, but she had the courage to
+keep still, and she had to run the risk, both of being shot, and of
+being upset by the coach just as they did."
+
+This also was unanimously approved, and, after doing full justice to
+the breakfast set before them, the party again took their places.
+Rhoda being carried down asleep, by the landlady, and placed in the
+coach, one of the inside passengers getting out to make room for her,
+and she was laid, curled up, on the seat, with her head in a lady's
+lap, and slept quietly, until, to her astonishment, she was woke up,
+and told that she was in Marlborough.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+TWO YOUNG PICKLES.
+
+
+An old-fashioned open carriage, drawn by a stiff, old-fashioned horse,
+and driven by a stiff, old-fashioned man, was in waiting at the inn at
+which the coach drew up at Marlborough. Into this the young Scudamores
+were soon transferred, and, after a hearty good-bye from their
+fellow-passengers, and an impressive one from the coachman, they
+started upon the concluding part of their journey.
+
+"How far is it to aunt's?" Tom asked.
+
+"About six miles, young sir," the driver said gravely.
+
+The young Scudamores had great difficulty to restrain their laughter
+at Tom's new title; in fact, Peter nearly choked himself in his
+desperate efforts to do so, and no further questions were asked for
+some time.
+
+The ride was a pleasant one, and Rhoda, who had never been out of
+Lincolnshire before, was delighted with the beautiful country through
+which they were passing. The journey, long as it was--for the road
+was a very bad one, and the horse had no idea of going beyond a slow
+trot--passed quickly to them all; but they were glad when the driver
+pointed to a quaint old-fashioned house standing back from the road,
+and said that they were home.
+
+"There are the pigeons, Rhoda, and there is Minnie asleep on that open
+window-sill."
+
+Very many times had the young Scudamores talked about their aunt, and
+had pictured to themselves what she would be like; and their ideas of
+her so nearly approached the truth, that she almost seemed to be an
+old acquaintance as she came to the door as the carriage stopped. She
+was a tall, upright, elderly lady, with a kind, but very decided face,
+and a certain prim look about her manner and dress.
+
+"Well, niece Rhoda and nephews, I am glad to see that you have arrived
+safely," she said in a clear, distinct voice. "Welcome to the Yews. I
+hope that we shall get on very well together. Joseph, I hope that you
+have not driven Daisy too fast, and that you did not allow my nephews
+to use the whip. You know I gave you very distinct instructions not to
+let them do so."
+
+"No, my lady, they never so much as asked."
+
+"That is right," Miss Scudamore said, turning round and shaking hands
+with the boys, who had now got out of the carriage and had helped
+Rhoda down. "I am glad to hear what Joseph tells me, for I know that
+boys are generally fond of furious driving and like lashing horses
+until they put them into a gallop. And now, how are you, niece Rhoda!
+Give me a kiss. That is right. You look pale and tired, child; you
+must have something to eat, and then go to bed. Girls can't stand
+racketing about as boys can. You look quiet and nice, child, and I
+have no doubt we shall suit very well. It is very creditable to you
+that you have not been spoilt by your brothers. Boys generally make
+their sisters almost as noisy and rude as they are themselves."
+
+"I don't think we are noisy and rude, aunt," Tom said, with a smile.
+
+"Oh, you don't, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said, looking at him sharply,
+and then shaking her head decidedly two or three times. "If your looks
+do not belie you both sadly, you are about as hair-brained a couple of
+lads as my worst enemies could wish to see sent to plague me; but,"
+she added to herself, as she turned to lead the way indoors, "I must
+do my duty, and must make allowances; boys will be boys, boys will be
+boys, so they say at least, though why they should be is more than I
+can make out. Now, Rhoda, I will take you up with me. Your bedroom
+leads out of mine, dear. Hester," she said to a prim-looking servant
+who had come out after her to the door; "will you show my nephews to
+their room? Dinner will be ready at two; it is just a quarter to the
+hour now. I see that you have got watches, so that you will be able
+to be punctual; and I must request you, when you have done washing,
+not to throw the water out of the window, because my flower-beds are
+underneath."
+
+Tom had great difficulty in keeping his countenance, while he assured
+his aunt that his brother and himself never did empty their basins out
+of the window.
+
+"That is right," Miss Scudamore said doubtfully; "but I have heard
+that boys do such things."
+
+Once fairly in their room and the door shut, the boys had a great
+laugh over their aunt's ideas as to boys.
+
+"There is one comfort," Tom said at last; "whatever we do we shall
+never surprise her."
+
+"I think we shall get on very well with her," Peter said. "She means
+to be kind, I am sure. This is a jolly room, Tom."
+
+It was a low wainscoted room, with a very wide window divided into
+three by mullions, and fitted with latticed panes. They were open, and
+a delicious scent of flowers came in from the garden. The furniture
+was all new and very strong, of dark stained wood, which harmonized
+well with the paneling. There were no window curtains, but a valance
+of white dimity hung above the window. There was a piece of carpet
+between the beds; the rest of the floor was bare, but the boards were
+of old oak, and looked as well without it. Several rows of pegs had
+been put upon the walls, and there was a small chest of drawers by
+each bed.
+
+"This is very jolly, Peter; but it is a pity that there are bars to
+the window."
+
+When they came down to dinner they found that Rhoda, quite done up
+with her journey, had gone to bed.
+
+"You like your room, I hope, nephews," Miss Scudamore said, after they
+had taken their seats.
+
+"Yes, aunt, very much. There is only one drawback to it."
+
+"What is that, Thomas?"
+
+"Oh, please, aunt, don't call me Thomas; it is a dreadful name; it is
+almost as bad as Tommy. Please call me Tom. I am always called Tom by
+every one."
+
+"I am not fond of these nicknames," Miss Scudamore said. "There is a
+flippancy about them of which I do not approve."
+
+"Yes, aunt, in nicknames; but Tom is not a nickname; it is only a
+short way of speaking. We never hear of a man being called Thomas,
+unless he is a footman or an archbishop, or something of that sort."
+
+"What do you mean by archbishop?" Miss Scudamore asked severely.
+
+"Well, aunt, I was going to say footman, and then I thought of Thomas
+a Becket; and there was Thomas the Rhymer. I have heard of him, but
+I never read any of his rhymes. I wonder why they did not call them
+poems. But I expect even Thomas a Becket was called Tom in his own
+family."
+
+Miss Scudamore looked sharply at Tom, but he had a perfect command of
+his face, and could talk the greatest nonsense with the most serious
+face. He went on unmoved with her scrutiny.
+
+"I have often wondered why I was not christened Tom, It would have
+been much more sensible. For instance, Rhoda is christened Rhoda and
+not Rhododendron."
+
+"Rhododendron?" Miss Scudamore said, mystified.
+
+"Yes, aunt, it is an American plant, I believe. We had one in the
+green-house at home; it was sent poor papa by some friend who went out
+there, I don't see anything else Rhoda could come from."
+
+"You are speaking very ignorantly, nephew," Miss Scudamore said
+severely. "I don't know anything about the plant you speak of, but the
+name of Rhoda existed before America was ever heard of. It is a very
+old name."
+
+"I expect," Peter said, "it must have meant originally a woman of
+Rhodes. You see Crusaders and Templars were always having to do with
+Rhodes, and they no doubt brought the name home, and so it got settled
+here."
+
+"The name is mentioned in Scripture," Miss Scudamore said severely.
+
+"Yes, aunt, and that makes it still more likely that it meant a woman
+of Rhodes; you see Rhodes was a great place then."
+
+Miss Scudamore was silent for some time. Then she went back to the
+subject with which the conversation had commenced. "What is the
+objection you spoke of to the room?"
+
+"Oh! it is the bars to the window, aunt."
+
+"I have just had them put up," Miss Scudamore said calmly.
+
+"Just put up, aunt!" Tom repeated in surprise, "what for?"
+
+"To prevent you getting out at night."
+
+The boys could not help laughing this time, and then Peter said, "But
+why should we want to get out at night, aunt?"
+
+"Why should boys always want to do the things they ought not?" Miss
+Scudamore said. "I've heard of boys being let down by ropes to go and
+buy things. I dare say you have both done it yourselves."
+
+"Well, aunt," Tom said, "perhaps we have; but then, you see, that was
+at school."
+
+"I do not see any difference, nephew. If you will get out at one
+window, you will get out at another. There is mischief to be done in
+the country as well as in towns; and so long as there is mischief to
+do, so long will boys go out of their way to do it. And now I will
+tell you the rules of this house, to which you will be expected to
+adhere. It is well to understand things at once, as it prevents
+mistakes. We breakfast at eight, dine at two, have tea at half-past
+six, and you will go to bed at half-past eight. These hours will be
+strictly observed. I shall expect your hands and faces to be washed,
+and your hairs brushed previous to each meal. When you come indoors
+you will always take off your boots and put on your shoes in the
+little room behind this. And now, if you have done dinner I think
+that you had better go and lie down on your bed, and get two or three
+hours' sleep. Take your boots off before you get into the bed."
+
+"She means well, Peter," the elder brother said, as they went
+upstairs, "but I am afraid she will fidget our lives out."
+
+For two or three days the boys wandered about enjoying the beautiful
+walks, and surprising and pleasing their aunt by the punctuality
+with which they were in to their meals. Then she told them that she
+had arranged for them to go to a tutor, who lived at Warley, a large
+village a mile distant, and who had some eight or ten pupils. The very
+first day's experience at the school disgusted them. The boys were
+of an entirely different class to those with whom they had hitherto
+associated, and the master was violent and passionate.
+
+"How do you like Mr. Jones, nephews?" Miss Scudamore asked upon their
+return after their first day at school.
+
+"We do not like him at all, aunt. In the first place, he is a good
+deal too handy with that cane of his."
+
+"'He who spares the rod--'"
+
+"Yes, we know that, aunt, 'spoils the child,'" broke in Tom, "but we
+would not mind so much if the fellow were a gentleman."
+
+"I don't know what you may call a gentleman," Miss Scudamore said
+severely. "He stands very high here a schoolmaster, while he visits
+the vicar, and is well looked up to everywhere."
+
+"He's not a gentleman for all that," Tom muttered; "he wouldn't be if
+he visited the Queen. One does not mind being trashed by a gentleman;
+one is used to that at Eton; but to be knocked about by a fellow like
+that! Well, we shall see."
+
+For a week the boys put up with the cruelty of their tutor, who at
+once took an immense dislike to them on finding that they did not,
+like the other boys, cringe before him, and that no trashing could
+extract a cry from them.
+
+It must not be supposed that they did not meditate vengeance, but they
+could hit upon no plan which could be carried out without causing
+suspicion that it was the act of one of the boys; and in that case
+they knew that he would question them all round, and they would not
+tell a lie to screen themselves.
+
+Twice they appealed to their aunt, but she would not listen to them,
+saying that the other boys did not complain, and that if their master
+was more severe with them than with others, it could only be because
+they behaved worse. It was too evident that they were boys of very
+violent dispositions, and although she was sorry that their master
+found it necessary to punish them, it was clearly her duty not to
+interfere.
+
+The remark about violence arose from Miss Scudamore having read in the
+little paper which was published once a week at Marlborough an account
+of the incident of the stopping of the coach, about which the boys
+had agreed to say nothing to her. The paper had described the conduct
+of her nephews in the highest terms, but Miss Scudamore was terribly
+shocked. "The idea", she said, "that she should have to associate with
+boys who had take a fellow-creature's life was terrible to her, and
+their conduct in resisting, when grown-up men had given up the idea
+as hopeless, showed a violent spirit, which, in boys so young, was
+shocking."
+
+A few days after this, as the boys were coming from school, they
+passed the carrier's cart, coming in from Marlborough.
+
+"Be you the young gentlemen at Miss Scudamore's?" the man asked.
+"Because, if you be, I have got a parcel for you."
+
+Tom answered him that they were, and he then handed them over a heavy
+square parcel. Opening it after the cart had gone on, the boys, to
+their great delight, found that it consisted of two cases, each
+containing a brace of very handsome pistols.
+
+"This is luck, Peter," Tom said. "If the parcel had been sent to the
+house, aunt would never have let us have them; now we can take them in
+quietly, get some powder and balls, and practice shooting every day in
+some quiet place. That will be capital. Do you know I have thought of
+a plan which will enrage old Jones horribly, and he will never suspect
+us?"
+
+"No; have you, Tom? What is that?"
+
+"Look here, Peter. I can carry you easily standing on my shoulders. If
+you get a very long cloak, so as to fall well down on me, no one would
+suspect in the dark that there were two of us; we should look like
+one tremendously tall man. Well, you know, he goes every evening to
+Dunstable's to sing with Miss Dunstable. They say he's making love to
+her. We can waylay him in the narrow lane, and make him give up that
+new watch he has just bought, that he's so proud of. I heard him say
+he had given thirty guineas for it. Of course, we don't want to keep
+it, but we would smash it up between a couple of big stones, and send
+him all the pieces."
+
+"Capital, Tom; but where should we get the cloak?"
+
+"There is that long wadded silk cloak of aunt's that she uses when she
+goes out driving. It always hangs up in the closet in the hall."
+
+"But how are we to get in again, Tom? I expect that he does not come
+back till half-past nine or ten. We can slip out easily enough after
+we are supposed to have gone to bed; but how are we to get back?"
+
+"The only plan, Peter, is to get in through Rhoda's window. She is
+very angry at that brute Jones treating us so badly, and if I take her
+into the secret I feel sure she will agree."
+
+Rhoda was appealed to, and although at first she said it was quite,
+quite impossible, she finally agreed, although with much fear and
+trembling, to assist them. First, the boys were to buy some rope and
+make a rope ladder, which Rhoda was to take up to her room; she was to
+open the window wide when she went to bed, but to pull the blind down
+as usual, so that if her aunt came in she would not notice it. Then,
+when she heard her aunt come tip to bed at half-past nine, she was to
+get up very quietly, drop the rope ladder out, fastening it as they
+instructed her, and then get into bed again, and go to sleep if she
+could, as the boys would not try to come in until after Miss Scudamore
+was asleep.
+
+Two nights after this the schoolmaster was returning from his usual
+visit to Mr. Dunstable, when, to his horror, he saw a gigantic figure
+advance from under a tree which overshadowed the lawn, and heard a
+deep voice say, "Your money or your life!"
+
+Like all bullies, the schoolmaster was a coward, and no sooner did he
+see this terrible figure, and his ears caught the ominous click of
+a pistol which accompanied the words, than his teeth chattered, his
+whole figure trembled with fear, and he fell on his knees, crying,
+"Spare my life!--take all that I have, but spare my life!"
+
+"You miserable coward!" the giant said, "I do not want to take your
+wretched life. What money have you?"
+
+"I have only two shillings," he exclaimed; "I swear to you that I have
+only two shillings."
+
+"What is the use of two shillings to me?--give them to the first
+beggar you see."
+
+"Yes, sir," the schoolmaster said; "I swear to you that I will."
+
+"Give me your watch."
+
+The schoolmaster took out his watch, and, getting upon his feet,
+handed it to the giant.
+
+"There now, you can go; but see," he added, as the schoolmaster turned
+with great alacrity to leave--"look here."
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"Look here, and mark my words well. Don't you go to that house where
+you have been to-night, or it will be the worse for you. You are a
+wretch, and I won't see that poor little girl marry you and be made
+miserable. Swear to me you will give her up."
+
+The schoolmaster hesitated, but there was again the ominous click of
+the pistol.
+
+"Yes, yes, I swear it," he said hastily. "I will give her up
+altogether."
+
+"You had better keep your oath," the giant said, "for if you break it,
+if I hear you go there any more--I shall be sure to hear of it--I will
+put an ounce of lead in you, if I have to do it in the middle of your
+school. Do you hear me? Now you may go."
+
+Only too glad to escape, the schoolmaster walked quickly off, and in a
+moment his steps could be heard as he ran at the top of his speed down
+the lane.
+
+In a moment the giant appeared to break in two, and two small figures
+stood where the large one had been.
+
+"Capital, Peter. Now, I'll take the cloak, and you keep the pistol,
+and now for a run home--not that I'm afraid of that coward getting
+up a pursuit. He'll be only too glad to get his head under the
+bedclothes."
+
+Rhoda had carried out her brother's instructions with great exactness,
+and was in a great fright when her aunt came in to see her in bed,
+lest she should notice that the window was open. However, the night
+was a quiet one, and the curtains fell partly across the blind, so
+that Miss Scudamore suspected nothing, but Rhoda felt great relief
+when she said good-night, took the candle, and left the room. She had
+had hard work to keep herself awake until she heard her aunt come up
+to bed; and then, finding that she did not again come into the room,
+she got up, fastened one end of the rope ladder to a thick stick long
+enough to cross two of the mullions, let the other end down very
+quietly, and then slipped into bed again. She did not awake until
+Hester knocked at her door and told her it was time to get up. She
+awoke with a great start, and in a, fright at once ran to the window.
+Everything looked as usual. The rope ladder was gone, the window was
+closed, and Rhoda knew that her brothers must have come in safely.
+
+Great was the excitement in Warley next day, when it became known that
+the schoolmaster had been robbed of his watch by a giant fully eight
+feet high. This height of the robber was, indeed, received with much
+doubt, as people thought that he might have been a tall man, but
+that the eight feet must have been exaggerated by the fear of the
+schoolmaster.
+
+Two or three days afterwards the surprise rose even higher, when a
+party of friends who had assembled at Mr. Jones' to condole with him
+upon his misfortune, were startled by the smashing of one of the
+windows by a small packet, which fell upon the floor in their midst.
+
+There was a rush to the door, but the night was a dark one, and no one
+was to be seen; then they returned to the sitting-room, and the little
+packet was opened, and found to contain some watchworks bent and
+broken, some pulverized glass, and a battered piece of metal, which,
+after some trouble, the schoolmaster recognized as the case of his
+watch. The head-constable was sent for, and after examining the relics
+of the case, he came to the same conclusion at which the rest had
+already arrived, namely, that the watch could not have been stolen by
+an ordinary footpad, but by some personal enemy of the schoolmaster's,
+whose object was not plunder, but annoyance and injury.
+
+To the population of Warley this solution was a very agreeable one.
+The fact of a gigantic footpad being in the neighborhood was alarming
+for all, and nervous people were already having great bolts and bars
+placed upon their shutters and doors. The discovery, therefore, that
+the object of this giant was not plunder, but only to gratify a spite
+against the master, was a relief to the whole place. Every one was, of
+course, anxious to know who this secret foe could be, and what crime
+Mr. Jones could have committed to bring such a tremendous enemy upon
+him. The boys at the school assumed a fresh importance in the eyes of
+the whole place, and being encouraged now to tell all they knew of
+him, they gave such a picture of the life that they had led at school,
+that a general feeling of disgust was aroused against him.
+
+The parents of one or two of the boys gave notice to take their sons
+away, but the rest of the boys were boarders, and were no better off
+than before.
+
+Miss Scudamore was unshaken in her faith in Mr. Jones and considered
+the rumor current about him to be due simply to the vindictive nature
+of boys.
+
+"Well, aunt," Tom said one day, after a lecture of this sort from her,
+"I know you mean to be kind to us, but Peter and I have stood it on
+that account, but we can't stand it much longer, and we shall run away
+before long."
+
+"And where would you run to, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said calmly.
+
+"That is our affair," Tom said quite as coolly, "only I don't like to
+do it without giving you warning. You mean kindly, I know, aunt, but
+the way you are always going on at us from morning to night whenever
+we are at home, and the way in which you allow us to be treated by
+that tyrannical brute, is too much altogether."
+
+Miss Scudamore looked steadily at them.
+
+"I am doing, nephew, what I consider to be for your good. You are
+willful, and violent, and headstrong. It is my duty to cure you, and
+although it is all very painful to me, at my time of life, to have
+such a charge thrust upon me, still, whatever it costs, it must be
+done."
+
+For the next month Mr. Jones' life was rendered a burden to him. The
+chimney-pots were shut up with sods placed on them, and the fireplaces
+poured volumes of smoke into the rooms and nearly choked him. Night
+after night the windows of his bedroom were smashed; cats were let
+down the chimney; his water-butts were found filled with mud, and the
+cord of the bucket of his well was cut time after time; the flowers
+in his garden were dug up and put in topsy-turvy. He himself could not
+stir out after dark without being tripped up by strings fastened a
+few inches above the path; and once, coming out of his door, a string
+fastened from scraper to scraper brought him down the steps with such
+violence that the bridge of his nose, which came on the edge of a
+step, was broken, and he was confined to his bed for three or four
+days. In vain he tried every means to discover and punish the authors
+of these provocations. A savage dog, the terror of the neighborhood,
+was borrowed and chained up in the garden, but was found poisoned next
+morning.
+
+Watchmen were hired, but refused to stay for more than one night, for
+they were so harassed and wearied out that they came to the conclusion
+that they were haunted. If they were on one side of the house a voice
+would be heard on the other. After the first few attempts, they no
+longer dared venture to run, for between each round strings were tied
+in every direction, and they had several heavy falls, while as they
+were carefully picking their way with their lanterns, stones struck
+them from all quarters. If one ventured for a moment from the other's
+side his lantern was knocked out, and his feet were struck from under
+him with a sharp and unexpected blow from a heavy cudgel; and they
+were once appalled by seeing a gigantic figure stalk across the grass,
+and vanish in a little bush.
+
+At the commencement of these trials the schoolmaster had questioned
+the boys, one by one, if they had any hand in the proceeding.
+
+All denied it. When it came to Tom Scudamore's turn, he said. "You
+never do believe me, Mr. Jones, so it is of no use my saying that I
+didn't do it; but if you ask Miss Scudamore, she will bear witness
+that we were in bed hours before, and that there are bars on our
+windows through which a cat could hardly get."
+
+The boys had never used Rhoda's room after the first night's
+expedition, making their escape now by waiting until the house was
+quiet, and then slipping along the passage to the spare room, and
+thence by the window, returning in the same way.
+
+Under this continued worry, annoyance, and alarm, the schoolmaster
+grew thin and worn, his school fell off more and more; for many of
+the boys, whose rest was disturbed by all this racket, encouraged by
+the example of the boys of the place who had already been taken away,
+wrote privately to their friends.
+
+The result was that the parents of two or three more wrote to say
+that their boys would not return after the holidays, and no one was
+surprised when it became known that Mr. Jones was about to close his
+school and leave the neighborhood.
+
+The excitement of the pranks that they had been playing had enabled
+the boys to support the almost perpetual scoldings and complaints of
+their aunt; but school once over, and their enemy driven from the
+place, they made up their minds that they could no longer stand it.
+
+One day, therefore, when Rhoda had, as an extraordinary concession,
+been allowed to go for a walk with them, they told her that they
+intended to run away.
+
+Poor Rhoda was greatly distressed.
+
+"You see, Rhoda dear," Tom said, "although we don't like leaving you,
+you will really be happier when we are gone. It is a perpetual worry
+to you to hear aunt going on, on, on--nagging, nagging, nagging for
+ever and ever at us. She is fond of you and kind to you, and you
+would get on quietly enough without us, while now she is in a fidget
+whenever you are with us, and is constantly at you not to learn
+mischief and bad ways from us. Besides you are always in a fright now,
+lest we should get into some awful scrape, as I expect we should if
+we stopped here. If it weren't for you, we should not let her off as
+easily as we do. No, no, Rhoda, it is better for us all that we should
+go."
+
+Poor Rhoda, though she cried bitterly at the thought of losing her
+brothers, yet could not but allow to herself that in many respects she
+should be more happy when she was freed from anxiety, lest they should
+get into some scrape, and when her aunt would not be kept in a state
+of continued irritation and scolding. She felt too that, although she
+herself could get on well enough in her changed life, that it was very
+hard indeed for the boys, accustomed as they had been to the jolly and
+independent life of a public school, and to be their own master during
+the holidays, with their ponies, amusements, and their freedom to come
+and go when they chose. Rhoda was a thoughtful child, and felt that
+nothing that they could go through could do them more harm or make
+them more unhappy than they now were. She had thought it all over day
+after day, for she was sure that the boys would, sooner or later come
+to it, and she had convinced herself that it was better for them.
+Still it was with a very sad heart that she found that the time had
+come.
+
+For some time she cried in silence, and then, drying her eyes, she
+said, trying to speak bravely, though her lips quivered.
+
+"I shall miss you dreadfully, boys; but I will not say a word to keep
+you here, for I am sure it is very, very bad for you. What do you mean
+to do? Do you mean to go to sea?"
+
+"No, Rhoda; you see uncle was in the army, and used to talk to us
+about that; and, as we have never seen the sea, we don't care for it
+as some boys do. No, we shall try and go as soldiers."
+
+"But my dear Tom, they will never take you as soldiers; you are too
+little."
+
+"Yes, we are not old enough to enlist at present," Tom said; "but we
+might go in as buglers. We have thought it all over, and have been
+paying old Wetherley, who was once in the band of a regiment, to teach
+us the bugle, and he says we can sound all the calls now as well as
+any bugler going. We did not like to tell you till we had made up our
+minds to go; but we have gone regularly to him every day since the
+first week we came here."
+
+"Then you won't have to fight, Tom," Rhoda said joyfully.
+
+"No," Tom said, in a rather dejected tone; "I am afraid they won't let
+us fight; still we shall see fighting, which is the next best thing."
+
+"I heard in Warley yesterday that there will be a movement of the
+army in Spain soon, and that some more troops will be sent out, and
+we shall try and get into a regiment that is going."
+
+They talked very long and earnestly on their plans, and were so
+engrossed that they quite forgot how time went, and got in late for
+tea, and were terribly scolded in consequence. For once none of
+them cared for the storm; the boys exulted over the thought that it
+would be the last scolding they would have to suffer; and Rhoda had
+difficulty in gasping down her tears at the thought that it was the
+last meal that she would take with them, for they had settled that
+they would start that very night.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+ENLISTED.
+
+
+It was a bright moonlight night when the boys, after a sad farewell
+from Rhoda, let themselves down from the window, and started upon
+their journey. Each carried a bundle on a stick; each bundle contained
+a suit of clothes, a few shirts and stockings, a pair of shoes, and a
+pistol. The other pistols were carried loaded inside their jackets,
+for there was no saying whom they might meet upon the road. They had
+put on the oldest suit of clothes they possessed, so as to attract as
+little attention as possible by the way. After they had once recovered
+from their parting with Rhoda their spirits rose, and they tramped
+along lightly and cheerfully. It was eleven o'clock when they started,
+and through the night they did not meet a single person. Towards
+morning they got under a haystack near the road, and slept for some
+hours; then they walked steadily on until they had done twenty miles
+since their start. They went into a small inn, and had some breakfast,
+and then purchasing some bread and cold ham, went on through the town,
+and leaving the London road, followed that leading to Portsmouth, and
+after a mile or two again took up their quarters until evening, in a
+haystack.
+
+It is not necessary to give the details of the journey to Portsmouth.
+After the first two days' tramp, having no longer any fear of the
+pursuit, which, no doubt, had been made for them when first missed,
+they walked by day, and slept at night in sheds, or under haystacks,
+as they were afraid of being questioned and perhaps stopped at inns.
+They walked only short distances now, for the first night's long
+journey had galled their feet, and, as Tom said, they were not pressed
+for time, and did not want to arrive at Portsmouth like two limping
+tramps. Walking, therefore, only twelve miles a day after the first
+two days, they arrived at Portsmouth fresh and in high spirits.
+They had met with no adventures upon the road, except that upon one
+occasion two tramps had attempted to seize their bundles, but the
+production of the pistols, and the evident determination of the boys
+to use them if necessary, made the men abandon their intention and
+make off, with much bad language and many threats, at which the boys
+laughed disdainfully.
+
+Arrived at Portsmouth, their first care was to find a quiet little
+inn, where they could put up. This they had little difficulty in
+doing, for Portsmouth abounded with public-houses, and people were so
+much accustomed to young fellows tramping in with their bundles, to
+join their ships, that their appearance excited no curiosity whatever.
+Tom looked older than he really was, although not tall for his age,
+while Peter, if anything, overtopped his brother, but was slighter,
+and looked fully two years younger. Refreshed by a long night's sleep
+between sheets, they started out after breakfast to see the town, and
+were greatly impressed and delighted by the bustle of the streets,
+full of soldiers and sailors, and still more by the fortifications and
+the numerous ships of war lying in the harbor, or out at Spithead.
+A large fleet of merchantmen was lying off at anchor, waiting for a
+convoy, and a perfect fleet of little wherries was plying backwards
+and forwards between the vessels and the shore.
+
+"It makes one almost wish to be a sailor," Peter said, as they sat
+upon the Southsea beach, and looked out at the animated ocean.
+
+"It does, Peter; and if it had been ten years back, instead of at
+present, I should have been ready enough to change our plans. But what
+is the use of going to sea now? The French and Spanish navies skulk in
+harbor, and the first time our fellows get them out they will he sure
+to smash them altogether, and then there is an end to all fighting.
+No, Peter, it looks tempting, I grant, but we shall see ten times as
+much with the army. We must go and settle the thing to-morrow. There
+is no time to be lost if the expedition starts in a fortnight or three
+weeks."
+
+Returning into the town, the boys were greatly amused at seeing a
+sailor's wedding. Four carriages and pair drove along; inside were
+women, while four sailors sat on each roof, waving their hats to the
+passers-by, and refreshing themselves by repeated pulls at some black
+bottles, with which they were well supplied. Making inquiries, the
+boys found that the men belonged to a fine frigate which had come in a
+day or two before, with several prizes.
+
+The next morning they went down to the barracks. Several
+non-commissioned officers, with bunches of gay ribbons in their caps,
+were standing about. Outside the gates were some boards, with notices,
+"Active young fellows required. Good pay, plenty of prize-money, and
+chances, of promotion!"
+
+The boys read several of these notices, which differed only from each
+other in the name of the regiment; and then Tom gave an exclamation of
+satisfaction as he glanced at a note at the foot of one of them, "Two
+or three active lads wanted as buglers."
+
+"There we are, Peter; and, oh, what luck! it is Uncle Peter's
+regiment! Look here, Peter," he said, after a pause, "we won't say
+anything about being his nephews, unless there is no other way of
+getting taken; for if we do it won't be nice. We shall be taken notice
+of, and not treated like other fellows, and that will cause all sorts
+of ill-feeling and jealousy, and rows. It will be quite time to say
+who we are when we have done something to show that we shan't do
+discredit to him. You see it isn't much in our favor that we are here
+as two runaway boys. If we were older we could go as volunteers, but
+of course we are too young for that."
+
+It should be mentioned that in those days it was by no means unusual
+for young men who had not sufficient interest to get commissions to
+obtain permission to accompany a regiment as volunteers. They paid
+their own expenses, and lived with the officers, but did duty as
+private soldiers. If they distinguished themselves, they obtained
+commissions to fill up vacancies caused in action.
+
+"There is our sergeant, Tom; let's get it over at once."
+
+"If you please," Tom said, as they went up to the sergeant, "are you
+the recruiting sergeant of the Norfolk Rangers?"
+
+"By Jove, Summers, you are in luck to-day," laughed one of the other
+sergeants; "here are two valuable recruits for the Rangers. The
+Mounseers will have no chance with the regiment with such giants as
+those in it. Come, my fine fellows, let me persuade you to join the
+15th. Such little bantams as you are would be thrown away upon the
+Rangers."
+
+There was a shout of laughter from the other non-commissioned
+officers.
+
+Tom was too much accustomed to chaffing bargees at Eton to be put out
+of countenance.
+
+"We may be bantams," he said, "but I have seen a bantam lick a big
+dunghill cock many a time. Fine feathers don't always make fine birds,
+my man."
+
+"Well answered, young one," the sergeant of the Rangers said, while
+there was a general laugh among the others, for the sergeant of the
+15th was not a favorite.
+
+"You think yourself sharp, youngster," he said angrily. "You want a
+licking, you do; and if you were in the 15th, you'd get it pretty
+quickly."
+
+"Oh! I beg your pardon," Tom said gravely; "I did not know that the
+15th were famous for thrashing boys. Thank you; when I enlist it shall
+be in a regiment where men hit fellows their own size."
+
+There was a shout of laughter, and the sergeant, enraged, stepped
+forward, and gave Tom a swinging box on the ear.
+
+There was a cry of "shame" from the others; but before any of them
+could interfere, Tom suddenly stooped, caught the sergeant by the
+bottom of the trousers, and in an instant he fell on his back with a
+crash.
+
+For a moment he was slightly stunned, and then, regaining his feet, he
+was about to rush at Tom, when the others threw themselves in between
+them, and said he should not touch the boy. He struck him first, and
+the boy had only given him what served him right.
+
+The sergeant was furious, and an angry quarrel was going on, when an
+officer of the Rangers came suddenly out of barrack.
+
+"Hullo, Summers, what is all this about? I am surprised at you. A lot
+of non-commissioned officers, just in front of the barrack gates,
+quarreling like drunken sailors in a pothouse. What does it all mean?"
+
+"The fact is this, Captain Manley," the sergeant said, saluting,
+"these two lads came up to speak to me, when Sergeant Billow chaffed
+them. The lad gave the sergeant as good as he got, and the sergeant
+lost his temper, and hit him a box on the ear, and in a moment the
+young one tripped him up, and pretty nigh stunned him; when he got up
+he was going at the boy, and, of course, we wouldn't have it."
+
+"Quite right," Captain Manley said. "Sergeant Billow, I shall forward
+a report to your regiment. Chaffing people in the street, and then
+losing your temper, striking a boy, and causing a disturbance. Now,
+sergeant," he went on, as the others moved away, "do you know those
+boys?"
+
+"No, sir; they are strangers to me."
+
+"Do you want to see the sergeant privately, lads, or on something
+connected with the regiment?"
+
+"I see that you have vacancies for buglers, sir," Tom said, "and my
+brother and myself want to enlist if you will take us."
+
+Captain Manley smiled. "You young scamps, you have got 'runaway from
+home' as plainly on your faces as if it was printed there. If we
+were to enlist you, we should be having your friends here after you
+to-morrow, and get into a scrape for taking you."
+
+"We have no friends who will interfere with us, sir, I can give you my
+word of honor as a gentleman." Captain Manley laughed. "I mean," Tom
+said confused, "my word of honor, as--as an intending bugler."
+
+"Indeed we have no one to interfere with us in any way, sir," Peter
+put in earnestly. "We wouldn't tell a lie even to enlist in the
+Rangers."
+
+Captain Manley was struck by the earnestness of the boys' faces, and
+after a pause he said to the sergeant,--
+
+"That will do, Summers; I will take these lads up to my quarters and
+speak to them."
+
+Then, motioning to the boys to follow him, he re-entered the barracks,
+and led the way up to his quarters.
+
+"Sit down," he said, when they had entered his room. "Now, boys, this
+is a foolish freak upon your part, which you will regret some day. Of
+course you have run away from school."
+
+"No, sir, we have run away from home," Tom said.
+
+"So much the worse," Captain Manley said gravely. "Tell me frankly,
+why did you do so? No unkindness at home can excuse boys from running
+away from their parents."
+
+"We have none, sir," Tom said. "We have lost them both--our mother
+many years ago, our father six months. Our only living relation,
+except a younger sister, is an aunt, who considers us as nuisances,
+and who, although meaning to do her duty, simply drives us out of our
+minds."
+
+Captain Manley could not resist a smile. "Do you not go to school?"
+
+"We did go to a school near, but unfortunately it is broken up."
+
+Captain Manley caught a little look of amusement between the boys. "I
+should not be surprised if you had something to do with its breaking
+up," he said with a laugh. "But to return to your coming here. There
+is certainly less reason against your joining than I thought at first,
+but you are too young."
+
+"We are both strong, and are good walkers," Tom said.
+
+"But you cannot be much over fifteen," Captain Manley said, "and your
+brother is younger."
+
+"We are accustomed to strong exercise, sir, and can thrash most
+fellows of our own size."
+
+"Very likely," Captain Manley said, "but we can't take that into
+consideration. You are certainly young for buglers for service work;
+however, I will go across with you to the orderly-room, and hear what
+the colonel says."
+
+Crossing the barrack-yard, they found the colonel was in and
+disengaged.
+
+"Colonel Tritton," Captain Manley said, "these lads want to enlist as
+buglers."
+
+The colonel looked up and smiled. "They look regular young pickles,"
+he said. "I suppose they have run away from school."
+
+"Not from school, colonel. They have lost both parents, and live with
+an aunt, with whom they don't get on well. There does not seem to be
+much chance of their being claimed."
+
+"You are full young," the colonel said, "and I think you will be
+sorry, boys, for the step you want to take."
+
+"I don't think so, sir," Tom said.
+
+"Of course, you don't at present," the colonel said. "However, that is
+your business. Mind, you will have a rough time of it; you will have
+to fight your way, you know."
+
+"I'll back them to hold their own," Captain Manley said, laughing.
+"When I went out at the barrack-gate just now there was a row among a
+lot of recruiting sergeants, and when I went up to put a stop to it, I
+found that a fellow of the 15th had chaffed these boys when they went
+up to speak to Summers, and that they had got the best of it in that
+line; and the fellow having lost his temper and struck one of them, he
+found himself on his back on the pavement. The boy had tripped him up
+in an instant."
+
+The colonel laughed, and then said suddenly and sharply to Peter,
+"Where did you learn that trick, youngster?"
+
+"At Eton," Peter answered promptly, and then colored up hotly at his
+brother's reproachful glance.
+
+"Oh, ho! At Eton, young gentlemen, eh!" the colonel said. "That
+alters the matter. If you were at Eton your family must be people of
+property, and I can't let you do such a foolish thing as enlist as
+buglers."
+
+"Our father lost all his money suddenly, owing to a blackguard he
+trusted cheating him. He found it out, and it killed him," Tom said
+quietly.
+
+The colonel saw he was speaking the truth. "Well, well," he said
+kindly, "we must see what we can do for you, boys. They are young,
+Manley, but that will improve, and by the time that they have been a
+year at the depot--"
+
+"Oh, if you please, colonel," Tom said, "we want to go on foreign
+service, and it's knowing that your regiment was under orders for
+foreign service we came to it."
+
+"Impossible!" the colonel said shortly.
+
+"I am very sorry for that, sir," Tom said respectfully, "for we would
+rather belong to this regiment than any in the service; but if you
+will not let us go with it we must try another."
+
+"Why would you rather belong to us than to any other?" the colonel
+asked, as the boys turned to leave the room.
+
+"I had rather not say, sir," Tom said. "We have a reason, and a very
+good one, but it is not one we should like to tell."
+
+The colonel was silent for a minute. He was struck with the boys'
+appearance and manner, and was sorry at the thought of losing them,
+partly from interest in themselves, partly because the sea service was
+generally so much more attractive to boys, that it was not easy to get
+them to enlist as buglers and drummers.
+
+"You see, lads, I should really like to take you, but we shall be
+starting in a fortnight, and it would be altogether impossible for you
+to learn to sound the bugle, to say nothing of learning the calls, by
+that time."
+
+"We can't play well, sir," Tom answered, his spirits rising again,
+"but we have practiced for some time, and know a good many of the
+calls."
+
+"Oh, indeed!" the colonel said, pleased; "that alters the case. Well,
+lads, I should like to take you with the regiment, for you look
+straightforward, sharp young fellows. So I will enlist you. Work hard
+for the next fortnight, and if I hear a favorable report of you by
+that time, you shall go."
+
+"Thank you very much," the boys said warmly, delighted to find their
+hopes realized.
+
+"What are your names?" the colonel asked.
+
+"Tom and Peter," Tom answered.
+
+"Tom and Peter what?" the colonel said.
+
+The boys looked at each other. The fact that they would of course
+be asked their names had never occurred to them, and they not had
+therefore consulted whether to give their own or another name.
+
+"Come, boys," Colonel Tritton said good-temperedly, "never be ashamed
+of your names; don't sail under false colors, lads. I am sure you will
+do nothing to disgrace your names."
+
+Tom looked at Peter, and saw that he agreed to give their real names,
+so he said, "Tom and Peter Scudamore."
+
+"Peter Scudamore! Why, Manley, these boys must be relations of the
+dear old colonel. That explains why they chose the regiment. Now,
+boys, what relation was he of yours?"
+
+"I do not admit that he was a relation at all, colonel," Tom said
+gravely, "and I hope that you will not ask the question. Supposing
+that he had been a relation of ours, we should not wish it to be
+known. In the first place, it would not be altogether creditable to
+his memory that relations of his should be serving as buglers in
+his old regiment; and in the second place, it might be that, from
+a kindness towards him, some of the officers might, perhaps, treat
+us differently to other boys, which would make our position more
+difficult by exciting jealousy among others. Should there be any
+relation between him and us, it will be time enough for us to claim
+it when we have shown ourselves worthy of it."
+
+"Well said, boys," the officers both exclaimed. "You are quite right,"
+the colonel went on, "and I respect your motive for keeping silence.
+What you say about jealousy which might arise is very sensible and
+true. At the same time, I will promise you that I will keep my eye
+upon you, and that if an opportunity should occur in which I can give
+you a chance of showing that there is more in you than in other boys,
+be sure you shall have the chance."
+
+"Thank you very much indeed, colonel," both boys exclaimed.
+
+"Now, Manley, I shall be obliged if you will take them to the
+adjutant, and tell him to swear them in and attest them in regular
+form; the surgeon will, of course, examine them. Please tell the
+quartermaster to get their uniforms made without loss of time; and
+give a hint to the bugle-major that I should be pleased if he will pay
+extra attention to them, and push them on as fast as possible."
+
+Captain Manley carried out these instructions, the boys were duly
+examined by the surgeon and passed, and in half an hour became His
+Majesty's servants.
+
+"Now, boys," Captain Manley said as he crossed with them to the
+quarters of the bandmaster, "you will have rather a difficult course
+to steer, but I have no doubt you will get through it with credit.
+This is something like a school, and you will have to fight before you
+find your place. Don't be in a hurry to begin; take all good-natured
+chaff good-naturedly; resent any attempt at bullying. I have no doubt
+you will be popular, and it is well that you should be so, for then
+there will be no jealousy if your luck seems better than that of
+others. They will, of course, know that you are differently born and
+educated to themselves, but they will not like you any the worse for
+that, if they find that you do not try to keep aloof from them or give
+yourselves airs. And look here, boys, play any tricks you like with
+the men, but don't do it with the non-commissioned officers. There is
+nothing they hate so much as impudence from the boys, and they have
+it in their power to do you a great deal of good or of harm. You will
+not have much to do with the bandmaster. Only a portion of the band
+accompanies us, and even that will be broken up when we once enter
+upon active campaigning. Several of the company buglers have either
+left lately, or have got their stripes and given up their bugles, and
+I do not fancy that their places will be filled up before we get out
+there. Now, your great object will be to get two of these vacancies. I
+am afraid you are too young, still there will be plenty more vacancies
+after we are once in the field, for a bullet has no respect for
+buglers; and you see the better you behave the better your chance of
+being chosen."
+
+"What is the difference exactly, sir?" Tom asked.
+
+"The company bugler ranks on the strength of the company, messes,
+marches, and goes into action with them; the other buglers merely form
+part of the band, are under the bandmaster, play at the head of the
+regiment on its march, and help in the hospitals during a battle."
+
+"Macpherson," he said as he entered the bandmaster's quarters, where a
+number of men and a few lads were practicing, "I have brought you two
+lads who have entered as buglers."
+
+The bandmaster was a Scotchman--a stiff-looking, elderly man.
+
+"Weel, Captain Manley, I'm wanting boys, but they look vera young, and
+I misdoubt they had better have been at school than here. However,
+I'll do my best with them; they look smart lads, and we shall have
+plenty of time at the depot to get them into shape."
+
+"Lots of time, Macpherson, lots of time. They say they know a few
+calls on the bugle, so perhaps they had better stick to the calls at
+present; you will have plenty of time to begin with them regularly
+with the notes when all the bustle is over."
+
+"Eh, ye know the calls, boys? Hardy and Graves, give them your bugles,
+and let us hear them. Now for the advance."
+
+Tom and Peter felt very nervous, but they had really practiced hard
+for an hour a day for the last four months, and could play all the
+calls they knew steadily and well. The bandmaster made no remark until
+they had sounded some half a dozen calls as he named them, and then
+he said, "The lads have a vera gude idea of it, Captain Manley. They
+are steadier and clearer than mony a one of the boys already. Will ye
+begin at once, lads, or will ye wait till ye get your uniform?"
+
+"We had rather begin at once," the boys answered together.
+
+"Vera gude. Hardy, take two bugles out of the chest, and then take
+these lads--What's your name, boys? Eh? Scudamore? A vera gude
+name--take them over to Corporal Skinner, he will be practicing with
+the others on the ramp."
+
+With a word of grateful thanks to Captain Manley as he went out before
+them, the boys followed their new guide out to the ramparts. A guide
+was hardly necessary, for an incessant bugling betokened the place,
+where, in one of the bastions behind the barracks, seven or eight
+buglers were sounding the various calls under the direction of
+Corporal Skinner.
+
+The corporal was a man of few words, for he merely nodded when the
+boy--who had not opened his lips on the way, indeed, he was too busy
+wondering who these young swells were, and what they had run away for,
+to say a word--gave the bandmaster's message to the effect that the
+new-comers knew some of the calls and were to be under his tuition for
+the present, pointed to them where to stand, and in another minute Tom
+and Peter were hard at work adding to the deafening din. After half
+an hour's practice they were pleased at seeing Captain Manley stroll
+up and call their instructor aside, and they felt sure that he was
+speaking to him of them. This was so, for the officer was carrying out
+the instructions he had received from Colonel Tritton.
+
+"Corporal," he said, "I want to say a word to you about those boys who
+have just joined. They seem to have a fair idea of the calls."
+
+"Yes, sir, they only know a few, but those they do know they can sound
+as well as any of them."
+
+"That is right, corporal. Now look here, what I am going to say is not
+to go farther, you understand."
+
+"Yes, sir, I will keep my mouth shut."
+
+"Very well. You can see the lads are not like most of our band boys.
+They are a gentleman's sons who have got into some scrape or other and
+run away from school."
+
+"I was thinking as much, sir."
+
+"The colonel believes that he knows their family, Skinner; but of
+course, that will not make any difference in regard to them. Still he
+would be pleased, I know, if they could sound the calls well enough to
+go with the regiment. They are most anxious to learn. Now I shall be
+glad if you can get them up to the mark. It will, of course, entail a
+lot of extra trouble upon you, but if you can get them fit in time, I
+will pay you a couple of guineas for your extra time."
+
+"Thank you, sir," the corporal saluted. "I think I can manage it--at
+any rate if I don't it won't be for want of trying."
+
+"Who are those nice-looking lads I saw with you, Manley?" Major James
+asked as the captain came into the messroom to lunch.
+
+"Those are two buglers in his Majesty's Norfolk Rangers."
+
+There was a general laugh.
+
+"No, but really, Manley, who are they? I was quite struck with them;
+good style of boys."
+
+"It is a fact, major. Harding will tell you so," and he nodded to the
+adjutant.
+
+"Yes, Manley is saying the thing that's right," the adjutant answered.
+"The doctor passed them, and I swore them in."
+
+"I am sorry for it," the major said. "There were three or four of us
+standing on the mess-room steps and we all noticed them. They were
+gentlemen, if I ever saw one, and a hard life they will have of it
+with the band boys. However, they are not likely to stay there. They
+have run away from school, of course, and will be claimed. I wonder
+you enlisted them."
+
+"The colonel's orders, major," the adjutant said. "Manley took them to
+him, I believe, and then brought them to me."
+
+"I don't think you need feel anxious about them among the boys,
+major," Captain Manley said. "I fancy they can hold their own. I
+found them outside the gate where a row was going on among some of
+the recruiting sergeants, and one of those boys had just tripped up
+a sergeant of the 15th and nearly broken his head."
+
+There was a general laugh.
+
+"They are quite interesting, these prodigies of yours, Manley. How did
+the boy do it? I should not have thought him strong enough to have
+thrown a man off his balance."
+
+"I asked Summers about it afterwards," Captain Manley said, "the
+fellow gave one of the boys a box on the ear, and in an instant the
+boy stooped, caught his foot and pulled it forward and up. The thing
+was done in a moment, and the sergeant was on his back before he knew
+what's what."
+
+"By Jove," a young ensign said, "I have seen that trick done at Eton."
+
+"That is just where the boy said he learnt it," Captain Manley said.
+"The colonel asked him suddenly, and it slipped out."
+
+"If they're Etonians, I ought to know them," the ensign said. "I only
+left six months ago. What are their names?"
+
+"Their name is Scudamore."
+
+"By Jove, they were in the same house with me. Uncommonly sharp little
+fellows, and up to no end of mischief. It was always believed, though
+no one could prove it, that they were the boys who nearly suffocated
+the bargee."
+
+There was a roar of laughter.
+
+"Tell us all about, Carruthers."
+
+"Well, there was not very much known about it. It seems the fellow
+purposely upset a boat with four or five of our fellows in it, and
+that night a dozen lighted crackers were thrown down into the little
+cabin where the fellow was asleep; the hatch was fastened and he
+was sent drifting down stream with the crackers exploding all about
+him. The smoke nearly suffocated the fellow, I believe There was a
+tremendous row about it, but they could not bring it home to any one.
+We always put it down to the Scudamores, though they never would own
+to it; but they were the only fellows in the boat who would have done
+it, and they were always up to mischief."
+
+"But what makes them come here as buglers?" the major asked.
+
+"Their father was a banker, I believe, down in the Eastern Counties
+somewhere. He died suddenly in the middle of the half before I left,
+and they went away to the funeral and never came back again."
+
+"The fact is," Captain Manley said, "I fancy by what they say, though
+they did not mention their father was a banker, that he lost all his
+money suddenly and died of the shock. At any rate they are alone
+in the world, and the colonel has no doubt that they are some
+relation--nephews, I should imagine--of Peter Scudamore, who was our
+colonel when I joined. One of them is called Peter. They acknowledged
+that they had a particular reason for choosing this regiment; but
+they would neither acknowledge or deny that he was a relation. Now
+that we know their father was a banker, we shall find out without
+difficulty--indeed I have no doubt the colonel will know whether Peter
+Scudamore had a brother a banker."
+
+"What's to be done, Manley?" Major James said. "I don't like the
+thought of poor old Peter's nephews turning buglers. All of us field
+officers, and the best part of you captains, served under him, and
+a better fellow never stepped. I think between us we might do
+something."
+
+"I would do anything I could," Carruthers said, "and there are Watson
+and Talbot who were at Eton too. Dash it, I don't like to think of two
+Etonians in a band," "You are all very good," Captain Manley said,
+"but from what I see of the boys they will go their own way. They have
+plenty of pride, and they acknowledge that their reason for refusing
+to say whether they are any relation of the colonel was that they
+did not want to be taken notice of or treated differently from other
+boys, because it would cause jealousy, and make their position more
+difficult. All they asked was that they might accompany the regiment,
+and not remain behind at the depot; and as, fortunately, they have
+both been practising with the bugle, and can sound most of the calls
+as well as the others, the colonel was able to grant their request.
+Had they been older, of course, we could have arranged for them to go
+with us as volunteers, we who knew the colonel, paying their expenses
+between us: as it is, the only thing we can do for them--and that is
+what they would like best is to treat them just like the other boys,
+but to give them every chance of distinguishing themselves. If they
+don't get knocked over, they ought to win a commission before the
+campaign is over."
+
+In the meantime Tom and Peter had been introducing themselves to the
+regiment. The exercise over, they had returned to dinner. It was a
+rough meal, but the boys enjoyed it, and after it was over a number
+of the men of the band, with whom they messed, crowded round to ask
+the usual questions of new-comers--their curiosity heightened in the
+present instance by the fact that the boys differed so widely from
+ordinary recruits.
+
+"Look here," Tom said, laughing, "I can't answer you all at once, but
+if you put me on the table I will tell you all about us."
+
+There was a general laugh, and many of the soldiers other than the
+band sauntered up to see what was going on.
+
+"The first thing to tell you," Tom said, "is our names. We go by the
+names of Tom and Peter Scudamore, but I need scarcely tell you that
+these are not our real names. The fact is--but this is quite a
+secret--we are the eldest sons of Sir Arthur Wellesley--"
+
+Here Tom was interrupted by a shout of laughter.
+
+"Sir Arthur," Tom went on calmly, "wished to make us colonels of two
+of the Life Guard regiments, but as they were not going on foreign
+service we did not see it, and have accordingly entered the regiment
+which Sir Arthur, our father, in speaking to a friend, said was the
+finest in the service--namely, the Norfolk Rangers. We believe that
+it is the custom, upon entering a regiment, to pay our footing, and I
+have given a guinea to Corporal Skinner, and asked him to make it go
+as far as he could."
+
+There was great laughter over Tom's speech, which was just suited to
+soldiers, and the boys from that moment were considered part of the
+regiment.
+
+"There's good stuff in those boys," an old sergeant said to another,
+"plucky and cool. I shouldn't be surprised if what Tom Dillon said
+was about right; he was waiting at mess just now, and though he didn't
+hear all that was said, he picked up that there was an idea that
+these boys are related to the old colonel. He was a good fellow, he
+was, and, though I say nothing against Colonel Tritton, yet we missed
+Colonel Scudamore terribly. Strict, and yet kind, just the sort of
+fellow to serve under. If the boys take after him they will be a
+credit to the regiment, and mark my words, we shan't see them in the
+band many years."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+A TOUGH CUSTOMER.
+
+
+Like most boys who are fond of play, Tom and Peter Scudamore were
+capable of hard work at a pinch, and during the three weeks that
+they spent at Portsmouth they certainly worked with a will. They had
+nothing to do in the way of duty, except to practice the bugle, and
+this they did with a zeal and perseverance that quite won the heart
+of Corporal Skinner, and enabled him to look upon Captain Manley's
+two guineas as good as earned. But even with the best will and the
+strongest lungs possible, boys can only blow a bugle a certain number
+of hours a day. For an hour before breakfast, for two hours before
+dinner, and for an hour and a half in the evening they practiced, the
+evening work being extra, alone with their instructor. There remained
+the whole afternoon to themselves. Their employment of those hours had
+been undertaken at Peter's suggestion.
+
+"Look here, Tom," he said, at the end of the first day's work, "from
+what the corporal says, we shall have from one till about five to
+ourselves. Now, we are going to Spain, and it seems to me that it
+would be of great use to us, and might do us a great deal of good, to
+know something of Spanish. We have got four pounds each left, and I
+don't think that we could lay it out better than in getting a Spanish
+master and some books, and in setting to in earnest at it. If we work
+with all our might for four hours a day with a master, we shall have
+made some progress, and shall pick up the pronunciation a little. I
+dare say we shall be another ten days or a fortnight on the voyage,
+and shall have lots of time on our hands. It will make it so much
+easier to pick it up when we get there if we know a little to start
+with."
+
+"I think it is a capital idea, Peter; I should think we are pretty
+sure to find a master here."
+
+There was no difficulty upon that score, for there were a large number
+of Spanish in England at the time; men who had left the country rather
+than remain under the French yoke, and among them were many who were
+glad to get their living by teaching their native language. There were
+two or three in this condition in Portsmouth, and to one of these the
+boys applied. He was rather surprised at the application from the two
+young buglers--for the uniforms were finished twenty-four hours after
+their arrival--but at once agreed to devote his whole afternoons to
+them. Having a strong motive for their work, and a determination
+to succeed in it, the boys made a progress that astonished both
+themselves and their teacher, and they now found the advantage of
+their grounding in Latin at Eton. Absorbed in their work, they saw
+little of the other boys, except at meals and when at practice.
+
+One evening when at supper, one of the buglers, named Mitcham, a lad
+of nearly eighteen, made some sneering remark about boys who thought
+themselves above others, and gave themselves airs. Tom saw at once
+that this allusion was meant for them, and took the matter up.
+
+"I suppose you mean us, Mitcham. You are quite mistaken; neither my
+brother nor myself think ourselves better than any one, nor have we
+any idea of giving ourselves airs. The fact is--and I am not surprised
+that you should think us unsociable--we are taking lessons in Spanish.
+If we go with the regiment it will be very useful, and I have heard
+it said that any one who lands in a foreign country, and who knows a
+little of the grammar and pronunciation, will learn it in half the
+time that he would were he altogether ignorant of both. I am sorry
+that I did not mention it before, because I can understand that it
+must seem as if we did not want to be sociable. I can assure you that
+we do; and that after this fortnight is over we shall be ready to be
+as jolly as any one. You see we are altogether behindhand with our
+work now, and have got to work hard to put ourselves on your level."
+
+Tom spoke so good-temperedly that there was a general feeling in his
+favor, and several of them who had before thought with Mitcham, that
+the new-comers were not inclined to be sociable, felt that they had
+been mistaken. There was, however, a general feeling of surprise
+and amusement at the idea of two boys voluntarily taking lessons in
+Spanish. Mitcham, however, who was a surly-tempered young fellow, and
+who was jealous of the progress which the boys were making, and of the
+general liking with which they seemed to be regarded, said,--
+
+"I believe that's only an excuse for getting away from us."
+
+"Do you mean to say that you think that I am telling a lie?" Tom asked
+quietly.
+
+"Yes, if you put it in that way, young 'un," Mitcham said.
+
+"Hold your tongue, Mitcham, or I'll pull your ears for you," Corporal
+Skinner said: but his speech was cut short by Tom's putting one hand
+on the barrack table, vaulting across it, and striking Mitcham a heavy
+blow between the eyes.
+
+There was a cry of "a fight!" among the boys, but the men interfered
+at once.
+
+"You don't know what you are doing, young 'un," one said to Tom;
+"when you hit a fellow here, you must fight him. That's the rule, and
+you can't fight Mitcham; he's two years older, at least, and a head
+taller."
+
+"Of course I will fight him," Tom said. "I would fight him if he were
+twice as big, if he called me a liar."
+
+"Nonsense, young 'un!" another said, "it's not possible. He was wrong,
+and if you had not struck him I would have licked him myself; but as
+you have done so, you had better put up with a thrashing, and have
+done with it."
+
+"I should think so, indeed!" Tom said disdainfully. "I may get a
+licking; I dare say I shall; but it won't be all on one side. Look
+here, Mitcham, we will have it out to-morrow, on the ramparts behind
+the barracks. But, if you will apologize to me for calling me a liar,
+I'll say I am sorry I hit you."
+
+"Oh, blow your sorrow!" the lad said. "I'll give you the heartiest
+licking you ever had in your life, my young cock."
+
+"Oh, all right," Tom said cheerfully. "We will see all about it when
+the time comes."
+
+As it was evident now that there was no way out of it, no one
+interfered further in the matter. Quarrels in the army are always
+settled by a fair fight, as at school; but several of the older men
+questioned among themselves whether they ought to let this go on,
+considering that Tom Scudamore was only between fifteen and sixteen,
+while his opponent was two years older, and was so much heavier and
+stronger. However, as it was plain that Tom would not take a thrashing
+for the blow he had struck, and there did not seem any satisfactory
+way out of it, nothing was done, except that two or three of them went
+up to Mitcham, and strongly urged him to shake hands with Tom, and
+confess that he had done wrong in giving him the lie. This Mitcham
+would not hear of, and there was nothing further to be done.
+
+"I am afraid, Tom, you have no chance with that fellow." Peter said,
+as they were undressing.
+
+"No chance in the world, Peter; but I can box fairly, you know, and am
+pretty hard. I shall be able to punish him a bit, and you may be sure
+I shall never give in. It's no great odds getting a licking, and I
+suppose that they will stop it before I am killed. Don't bother about
+it. I had rather get knocked about in a fight than get flogged at Eton
+any day. I would rather you did not come to see it, Peter, if you
+don't mind. When you fought Evans it hurt me ten times as much as if I
+had been fighting, and, although you licked him, it made me feel like
+a girl. I can stand twice the punishment if I don't feel that any blow
+is hitting you as well as myself."
+
+Tom's prediction about the fight turned out to be nearly correct. He
+was more active, and a vastly better boxer than his antagonist, and
+although he was constantly knocked down, he punished him very heavily
+about the face. In fact, the fight was exactly similar to that great
+battle, fifty years afterwards, between Sayers and Heenan. Time after
+time Tom was knocked down, and even his second begged him to give in,
+but he would not hear of it. Breathless and exhausted, but always
+cool and smiling, he faced his heavy antagonist, eluding his furious
+rushes, and managing to strike a few straight blows at his eyes before
+being knocked down. By the time that they had fought a quarter of
+an hour half the regiment was assembled, and loud were the cheers
+which greeted Tom each time he came up, very pale and bleeding, but
+confident, against his antagonist.
+
+At last an old sergeant came forward. "Come," he said, "there has been
+enough of this. You had better stop."
+
+"Will he say he was sorry he called me a liar?" Tom asked.
+
+"No, I won't," Mitcham answered.
+
+The sergeant was about to use his authority to stop it, when Tom said
+to him, in a low voice:
+
+"Look, sergeant! please let us go on another five minutes. I think I
+can stand that, and he can hardly see out of his eyes now. He won't
+see a bit by that time."
+
+The sergeant hesitated, but a glance at Tom's antagonist convinced him
+that what he said was correct. Mitcham had at all times a round and
+rather puffy face, and his cheeks were now so swollen with the effect
+of Tom's straight, steady hitting, that he could with difficulty see.
+
+It was a hard five minutes for Tom, for his antagonist, finding that
+he was rapidly getting blind, rushed with fury upon him, trying to end
+the fight. Tom had less difficulty in guarding the blows, given wildly
+and almost at random, but he was knocked down time after time by the
+mere force and weight of the rush. He felt himself getting weak, and
+could hardly get up from his second's knee upon the call of time.
+He was not afraid of being made to give in, but he was afraid of
+fainting, and of so being unable to come up to time.
+
+"Stick a knife into me; do anything!" he said to his second, "if I go
+off, only bring me up to time. He can't hold out much longer."
+
+Nor could he. His hitting became more and more at random, until at
+last, on getting up from his second's knee, Mitcham cried in a hoarse
+voice, "Where is he? I can't see him!"
+
+Then Tom went forward with his hands down. "Look here, Mitcham, you
+can't see, and I can hardly stand. I think we have both done enough.
+We neither of us can give in, well because--because I am a gentleman,
+you because you are bigger than I am; so let's shake hands, and say no
+more about it."
+
+Mitcham hesitated an instant, and then held out his hand. "You are a
+good fellow, Scudamore, and there's my hand; but you have licked me
+fairly. I can't come up to time, and you can. There, I am sorry I
+called you a liar."
+
+Tom took the hand, and shook it, and then a mist came over his eyes,
+and his knees tottered, as, with the ringing cheers of the men in his
+ears, he fainted into his second's arms.
+
+"What a row the men are making!" the major said, as the sound of
+cheering came through the open window of the mess-room, at which the
+officers were sitting at lunch. "It's a fight of course, and a good
+one, judging by the cheering. Does any one know who it is between?"
+
+No one had heard.
+
+"It's over now," the adjutant said, looking out of the window, "Here
+are the men coming down in a stream. They look very excited over it. I
+wonder who it has been. Stokes," he said, turning to one of the mess
+servants, "go out, and find out who has been fighting, and all about
+it."
+
+In a minute or two the man returned. "It's two of the band boys, sir."
+
+"Oh, only two boys! I wonder they made such a fuss over that. Who are
+they?"
+
+"One was one of the boys who have just joined, sir. Tom Scudamore,
+they call him."
+
+"I guessed as much," Captain Manley laughed; "I knew they would not be
+long here without a fight. Who was the other?"
+
+"Well, sir, I almost thought it must be a mistake when they told me,
+seeing they are so unequally matched, but they all say so, so in
+course it's true--the other was Mitcham, the bugler of No. 3 Company."
+
+"What a shame!" was the general exclamation, while Captain Manley got
+up and called for his cap.
+
+"A brutal shame, I call it," he said hotly. "Mitcham's nearly a man.
+It ought not to have been allowed. I will go and inquire after the
+boy. I will bet five pounds he was pretty nearly killed before he gave
+in."
+
+"He didn't give in, Captain Manley," the servant said. "He won the
+fight. They fought till Mitcham couldn't see, and then young Scudamore
+went up and offered to draw it, but Mitcham acknowledged he was fairly
+licked. It was a close thing, for the boy fainted right off; but he's
+come round now, and says he's all right."
+
+"Hurrah for Eton!" Carruthers shouted enthusiastically. "Hurrah! By
+Jove, he is game, and no mistake. He won a hard fight or two at Eton,
+but nothing like this. I call it splendid."
+
+"The boy might have been killed," the major said gravely; while the
+younger officers joined in Carruthers's exclamation at Tom's pluck.
+"It is shameful that it was allowed. I suppose the quarrel began in
+their quarters. Sergeant Howden is in charge of the room, and ought to
+have stopped it at once. Every non-commissioned officer ought to have
+stopped it. I will have Howden up before the colonel to-morrow."
+
+"I think, major," Captain Manley said, "if you will excuse me, the
+best plan, as far as the boy is concerned, is to take no notice of
+it. As it is, he must have won the hearts of all the regiment by his
+pluck, and if he is not seriously hurt, it is the very best thing, as
+it has turned out, that could have happened. If any one gets into a
+scrape about it, it might lessen the effect of the victory. I think if
+you call Howden up, and give him a quiet wigging, it will do as well,
+and won't injure the boys. What do you think?"
+
+"Yes, you are right, Manley, as it has turned out; but the boy might
+have been killed. However, I won't do more than give Howden a hearty
+wigging, and will then learn how the affair begun. I think, Dr.
+Stathers, that it would be as well if you went round and saw both of
+them. You had better, I think, order them into hospital for the night,
+and then the boy can go to bed at once, and come out again to-morrow,
+if he has, as I hope, nothing worse than a few bruises. Please come
+back, and tell us how you find them."
+
+The report was favorable, and the next morning Tom came out of
+hospital, and took his place as usual, with the party upon the
+ramparts--pale, and a good deal marked, but not much the worse for his
+battle; but it was some days before the swelling of his adversary's
+face subsided sufficiently for him to return to duty.
+
+Tom's victory--as Captain Manley had predicted--quite won the hearts
+of the whole regiment, and the nicknames of "Sir Tom," and "Sir
+Peter"--which had been given to them in jest after Tom's speech
+about Sir Arthur Wellesley--were now generally applied to them. The
+conversation in the mess-room had got about, and the old soldiers who
+had served under Colonel Scudamore would have done anything for the
+lads, although, as yet, they were hardly known personally except to
+the band, as their devotion to work kept them quite apart from the
+men.
+
+It was just three weeks after they had joined before the order came
+for embarkation, and a thrill of pleasure and excitement ran through
+the regiment when it was known that they were to go on board in four
+days. Not the least delighted were Tom and Peter. It had already been
+formally settled that they were to accompany the regiment, and it
+was a proof of the popularity that they had gained, that every one
+looked upon their going as a matter of course, and that no comment
+was excited even among those who were left behind. Three days before
+starting they had met Captain Manley in the barrack-yard, and after
+saluting, Tom said, "If you please, sir, we wanted to ask you a
+question."
+
+"What is that, lads?"
+
+"If you please, sir, we understand that the boys of the band have
+their bags carried for them, but the company buglers carry knapsacks,
+like the men?"
+
+"Yes, boys; the company buglers carry knapsacks and muskets."
+
+"I am afraid we could not carry muskets and do much marching, sir, but
+we have each a brace of pistols."
+
+Captain Manley smiled. "Pistols would not look the thing on a
+parade-ground, boys; but in a campaign people are not very particular,
+and I have no doubt the colonel will overlook any little breach of
+strict uniformity in your cases, as it is evident you can't carry
+muskets. You can use your pistols, I hope," he said with a smile. "Hit
+a penny every time at twenty paces!"
+
+"No, sir, we can't do that," Tom said seriously. "We can hit a
+good-sized apple nineteen times out of twenty."
+
+"The deuce you can!" Captain Manley said. "How did you learn to do
+that?"
+
+"We have practiced twelve shots a day for the last six months, sir. We
+were thinking of asking you, sir, if you would like to carry a brace
+of them through the campaign. They are splendid weapons; and we shall
+only carry one each. They would get rusty and spoil, if we left them
+behind, and we should be very pleased to think they might be useful to
+you, after your great kindness to us."
+
+"It is not a very regular thing, boys," Captain Manley said, "for a
+captain to be borrowing a brace of pistols from two of his buglers;
+but you are exceptional buglers, and there is something in what you
+say about rusting. Besides, it is possible you may lose yours, so I
+will accept your offer with thanks, with the understanding that I will
+carry the pistols, and you shall have them again if anything happens
+to yours. But how about the knapsacks?"
+
+"We were thinking of having two made of the regimental pattern, sir,
+but smaller and lighter, if you think that it would be allowed."
+
+"Well, I think, boys, if you are allowed to carry pistols instead of
+muskets, no great objection will be made as to the exact size of the
+knapsacks. Yes, you can get them made, and I will speak to the colonel
+about it."
+
+"Perhaps," he hesitated, "you may be in want of a little money; do
+not hesitate if you do. I can let you have five pounds, and you
+can pay me," he said with a laugh, "out of your share of our first
+prize-money."
+
+The boys colored hotly.
+
+"No, thank you, Captain Manley; we have plenty of money. Shall we
+bring the pistols to your quarters?"
+
+"Do, lads, I am going in to lunch now, and will be in in half an
+hour."
+
+The boys at once went out and ordered their knapsacks. They had just
+sold their watches, which were large, handsome, and of gold, and had
+been given to them by their father when they went to Eton. They were
+very sorry to part with them, but they agreed that it would be folly
+to keep gold watches when the twenty pounds which they obtained for
+them would buy two stout and useful silver watches and would leave
+them twelve pounds in money. They then returned to barracks, took out
+a brace of their pistols, carefully cleaned them, and removed the
+silver plates upon the handles, and then walked across to Captain
+Manley's quarters.
+
+Rather to their surprise and confusion they found five or six other
+officers there, for Captain Manley had mentioned at lunch to the
+amusement of his friends that he was going to be unexpectedly provided
+with a brace of pistols, and several of them at once said that they
+would go up with him to his quarters, as they wanted to see the boys
+of whom they had spoken so much during the last fortnight. Tom and
+Peter drew themselves up and saluted stiffly.
+
+"You need not be buglers here, boys," Captain Manley said. "This is
+my room, we are all gentlemen, and though I could not, according
+to the regulations, walk down the street with you, the strictest
+disciplinarian would excuse my doing as I like here."
+
+The boys flushed with pleasure at Captain Manley's kind address, and
+as he finished Carruthers stepped forward and shook them warmly by the
+hand.
+
+"How are you both?" he said. "You have not forgotten me, I hope."
+
+"I had not seen you before. I did not know you were in the regiment,
+Carruthers," the boys said warmly, pleased to find a face they
+had known before; and then breaking off:--"I beg your pardon--Mr.
+Carruthers."
+
+"There are no misters here as far as I am concerned, Scudamore. There
+were no misters at Eton. This is a change, isn't it? Better than
+grinding away at Greek by a long way. Well, I congratulate you on your
+fight. You showed there was some good in dear old Eton still. I wish
+you had let me know it was coming off. I would have given anything
+to have seen it--from a distance, you know. If it had been the right
+thing, I would have come and been your backer."
+
+There was a general laugh, and then the officers all began to talk to
+the boys. They were quiet and respectful in their manners, and fully
+confirmed the favorable report which Captain Manley had given of them.
+
+"Where are the pistols, boys?" their friend asked presently.
+
+"Here, sir," and the boys produced them from under their jackets. "We
+have no case, sir; we were obliged to leave it behind us when we--"
+
+"Ran away," one of the officers said, laughing.
+
+"They are a splendid pair of pistols," Captain Manley said, examining
+them; "beautifully finished, and rifled. They look quite new, too,
+though, of course, they are not."
+
+"They are new, sir," Tom said; "we have only had them six months, and
+they were new then."
+
+"Indeed," Captain Manley said surprised; "I thought, of course, they
+were family pistols. Why, how on earth, if it is not an impertinent
+question, did you boys get hold of two brace of such pistols as these?
+I have no right to ask the question, boys. I see there has been a
+plate on the handles. But you said you had no relations, and I was
+surprised into asking."
+
+The boys colored.
+
+"The question was quite natural, sir; the pistols were presented to us
+by some people we traveled with once; we took the plates off because
+they made a great fuss about nothing, and we thought that it would
+look cockey."
+
+There was a laugh among the officers at the boys' confusion.
+
+"No one would suspect you of being cockey, Scudamore," Captain Manley
+said kindly; "come, let me see the plates."
+
+The boys took the little silver plates from their pockets and handed
+them silently to Captain Manley, who read aloud, to the surprise of
+those around him,--"'To Tom' and 'Peter,' they are alike except the
+names. 'To Tom Scudamore, presented by the passengers in the Highflyer
+coach on the 4th of August, 1808, as a testimony of their appreciation
+of his gallant conduct, by which their property was saved from
+plunder.' Why, what is this, you young pickles, what were you up to on
+the 4th of August last year?"
+
+"There was nothing in it at all, sir," Tom said; "we were on the coach
+and were stopped by highwaymen. One of the passengers had pistols,
+but was afraid to use them, and hid them among the boxes. So when the
+passengers were ordered to get down to be searched, we hid ourselves,
+and when the highwaymen were collecting their watches, Peter shot one,
+and I drove the coach over another. The matter was very simple indeed;
+but the passengers saved their money, so made a great fuss about it."
+
+There was much laughter over Tom's statement, and then he had to
+give a detailed account of the whole affair, which elicited many
+expressions of approval.
+
+"It does you credit, boys," Captain Manley said, "and shows that you
+are cool as well as plucky. One quality is as valuable as the other.
+There is every hope that you will do the regiment credit, boys, and
+you may be sure that we shall give you every chance. And now good-bye
+for the present."
+
+"Good-bye, sir," Tom and Peter again drew themselves up, gave the
+military salute, and went off to their comrades.
+
+For when the order came to prepare for the embarkation, both Spanish
+and bugling were given up, and the boys entered into the pleasure
+of the holiday with immense zest. They had no regimental duties to
+perform beyond being present at parade. They had no packing to do, and
+fewer purchases to make. A ball or two of stout string, for, as Peter
+said, string is always handy, and a large pocket-knife, each with
+a variety of blades, were the principal items. They had a ring put
+to the knives, so that they could sling them round the waist. They
+had, therefore, nothing to do but to amuse themselves, and this they
+did with a heartiness which astonished the other boys, and proved
+conclusively that they did not want to be unsociable. They hired a
+boat for a sail and took five or six other boys across to Ryde, only
+just returning in time for tattoo, and they played such a number of
+small practical jokes, such as putting a handful of peas into the
+bugles and other wind instruments, that the band-master declared that
+he thought that they were all bewitched, and he threatened to thrash
+the boys all round, because he could not find out who had done it.
+
+Especially angry was the man who played the big drum. This was a
+gigantic negro, named Sam, a kind-hearted fellow, constantly smiling,
+except when the thought of his own importance made him assume a
+particularly grave appearance. He was a general favorite, although the
+boys were rather afraid of him, for he was apt to get into a passion
+if any jokes were attempted upon him, and of all offences the greatest
+was to call him Sambo. Now none of the men ventured upon this, for
+when he first joined, Sam had fought two or three desperate battles on
+this ground, and his great strength and the insensibility of his head
+to blows had invariably given him the victory. But, treated with what
+he conceived proper respect, Sam was one of the best-tempered and
+best-natured fellows in the regiment; and he himself, when he once
+cooled down, was perfectly ready to join in the laugh against himself,
+even after he had been most put out by a joke.
+
+The day before the regiment was to embark, the officers gave a lawn
+party; a large number of ladies were present, and the band was, of
+course, to play. The piece which the bandmaster had selected for the
+commencement began with four distinct beats of the big drum. Just
+before it began, Captain Manley saw Tom and Peter, who with some of
+the other boys had brought the music-stands into the ground, with
+their faces bright with anticipated fun.
+
+"What is the joke, boys?" he asked good-humoredly, as he passed them.
+
+"I can't tell you, sir," Tom said; "but if you walk up close to the
+band, and watch Sam's face when he begins, you will be amused, I
+think."
+
+"Those are regular young pickles," Captain Manley said to the lady
+he was walking with; "they are Etonians who have run away from home,
+and are up to all kinds of mischief, but are the pluckiest and most
+straightforward youngsters imaginable. I have no doubt that they are
+up to some trick with our black drummer."
+
+On their way to where the band was preparing to play, Captain Manley
+said a word or two to several of the other officers, consequently
+there was quite a little party standing watching the band when their
+leader lifted his baton for the overture to begin.
+
+There was nothing that Sam liked better than for the big drum to
+commence, and with his head thrown well back and an air of extreme
+importance, he lifted his arm and brought it down with what should
+have been a sounding blow upon the drum. To his astonishment and to
+the surprise of all the band, no deep boom was heard, only a low
+muffled sound. Mechanically Sam raised his other arm and let it fall
+with a similar result. Sam looked a picture of utter astonishment and
+dismay, with his eyes opened to their fullest, and he gave vent to a
+loud cry, which completed the effect produced by his face, and set
+most of those looking on, and even the band themselves, into a roar of
+laughter. Sam now examined his sticks, they appeared all right to the
+eye, but directly he felt them his astonishment was turned into rage.
+They were perfectly soft. Taking out his knife he cut them open, and
+found that the balls were merely filled with a wad of soft cotton, the
+necessary weight being given by pieces of lead fastened round the end
+of the stick inside the ball with waxed thread.
+
+Sam was too enraged to say more than his usual exclamation of
+astonishment, "Golly!" and he held out his drumsticks to be examined
+with the face of a black statue of surprise.
+
+Even the band-master was obliged to laugh as he took the sticks from
+Sam's hand to examine them.
+
+"These are not your sticks at all, Sam," he said, looking closely at
+them. "Here, boy," he called to Tom, who might have been detected from
+the fact of his being the only person present with a serious face,
+"run to the band-room and see if you can find the sticks."
+
+In a few minutes Tom returned with the real drumsticks, which, he
+said truly, he had found on the shelf where they were usually kept.
+After that things went on as usual; Sam played with a sulky fury. His
+dignity was injured, and he declared over and over again that if he
+could "find de rascal who did it, by jingo, I pound him to squash!"
+and there was no doubt from his look that he thoroughly meant what he
+said. However, no inquiries could bring to light the author of the
+trick.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+OVERBOARD.
+
+
+There were no lighter hearts than those of Tom and Peter Scudamore
+on board the transport "Nancy," as, among the hearty cheers of the
+troops on board, and the waving of hats and handkerchiefs from friends
+who had come out in small boats to say good-bye for the last time,
+she weighed anchor, and set sail in company with some ten or twelve
+other transports, and under convoy of two ships of war. It would be
+difficult to imagine a prettier scene. The guns fired, the bands of
+the various regiments played, and the white sails opened out bright
+in the sun as the sailors swarmed into the rigging, anxious to outvie
+each other. Even the soldiers pulled and hauled at the ropes, and ran
+round with the capstan bars to get the anchors apeak. Tom and Peter,
+of course, had, like the other boys, got very much in the way in their
+desire to assist, and, having been once or twice knocked over by the
+rush of men coming along with ropes, they wisely gave it up, and
+leaned over the side to enjoy the scene.
+
+"This is splendid, Tom, isn't it?"
+
+"Glorious, Peter; but it's blowing pretty strong. I am afraid that we
+sha'n't find it quite so glorious when we get out of the shelter of
+the island."
+
+Peter laughed. "No; I suppose we sha'n't all look as jolly as we do
+now by night-time. However, the wind is nor'-westerly, which will help
+us along nicely, if, as I heard one of the sailors say just now, it
+does not go round to the south."
+
+"Bugler, sound companies one, two, and three to breakfast."
+
+The order interrupted the conversation, and, for the next hour,
+the boys had little time for talk. Half the regiment was on board
+the "Nancy," and, after breakfast, the men were divided into three
+watches, of which one was always to be on deck, for the ship was very
+crowded, and there was scarcely room for all the men to be below
+together. The boys were in the same watch, for the day previous to
+starting Tom had been appointed bugler to the 2d Company, Peter to the
+3d. The 1st Company, or Grenadiers, were in the watch with the band,
+the 2d and 3d Companies were together, and the 4th and 5th.
+
+Tom was very ill for the first two days of the voyage, while Peter did
+not feel the slightest effects from the motion. Upon the third day the
+wind dropped suddenly, and the vessels rolled heavily in the swell,
+with their sails flapping against the masts. Tom came up that morning
+upon deck feeling quite well again, and the boys were immensely amused
+at seeing the attempts of the soldiers to move about, the sudden
+rushes, and the heavy falls. A parade had been ordered to take place;
+but as no one could have stood steady without holding on, it was
+abandoned as impossible. The men sat about under the bulwarks, and a
+few amused themselves and the rest by trying to play various games,
+such as laying a penny on the deck, and seeing which would pitch
+another to lay nearest to it, from a distance of five yards. The
+difficulty of balancing oneself in a heavily rolling vessel, and of
+pitching a penny with any degree of accuracy, is great, and the manner
+in which the coins, instead of coming down flat and remaining there,
+rolled away into the scuppers, the throwers not unfrequently following
+them, produced fits of laughter.
+
+Tom was still feeling weak from his two days' illness, and was not
+disposed actively to enter into the fun; but Peter enjoyed the heavy
+rolling, and was all over the ship. Presently he saw Sam, the black
+drummer, sitting in a dark corner below quietly asleep; his cap was
+beside him, and the idea at once occurred to Peter that here was a
+great opportunity for a joke. He made his way to the caboose, and
+begged the cook to give him a handful of flour. The cook at first
+refused, but was presently coaxed into doing so, and Peter stole to
+where Sam was asleep, and put the flour into his cap, relying that, in
+the darkness, Sam would put it on without noticing it. Then, going up
+to the deck above, Peter put his head down the hatchway, and shouted
+loudly, "Sam!"
+
+The negro woke at the sound of his name. "What is it?" he asked.
+Receiving no reply, he got on to his feet, muttering, "Some one call
+Sam, that for certain, can't do without Sam, always want here, want
+there. I go up and see."
+
+So saying, he put on his cap, and made his way up to the upper deck.
+As he stood at the hatchway and looked round, there was, first a
+titter, and then a roar of laughter from the men sitting or standing
+along by the bulwarks. In putting on his cap some of the flour had
+fallen out, and had streaked his face with white. Sam was utterly
+unconscious that he was the object of the laughter, and said to one of
+the men nearest to him, "Who call Sam?"
+
+The man could not reply, but Tom, who was sitting close by, said, "It
+was no one here, Sam, it must have been the bandmaster; there he is,
+close to the quarter-deck."
+
+Sam made his way along towards the point indicated, and as he did so
+some of the officers upon the quarter-deck caught sight of him. "Just
+look at Sambo," Carruthers exclaimed, "somebody has been larking with
+him again. Look how all the men are laughing, and he evidently has no
+suspicion of the figure he is."
+
+The sergeant, who, the bandmaster having remained at the depot, was
+now acting as chief of the band, did not see Sam until the latter was
+close to him. "You want me, sergeant?"
+
+Sergeant Wilson looked up, and was astonished.
+
+"What on earth have you been doing to yourself, Sam?" he asked.
+
+"Me been having little nap down below," Sam said.
+
+"Yes; but your face, man. What have you been doing to your face?"
+
+Sam, in his turn, looked astonished. "Nothing whatsomeber, sargeant."
+
+"Take off your cap, man, and look inside it." Sam did as ordered; and
+as he removed the cap, and the powder fell from it all over his face
+and shoulders, there was a perfect shout of laughter from the soldiers
+and crew, who had been looking on, and the officers, looking down from
+the rail of the quarter-deck, retired to laugh unnoticed.
+
+The astonishment and rage of Sam were unbounded, and he gave a perfect
+yell of surprise and fury. He stamped wildly for a minute or two, and
+then, with a sudden movement rushed up on to the quarter-deck with
+his cap in his hand. The colonel, who was holding on by the shrouds,
+and talking with the major, in ignorance of what was going on, was
+perfectly astounded at this sudden vision of the irate negro, and
+neither he nor the major could restrain their laughter.
+
+"Scuse me, colonel, sah, for de liberty," Sam burst out; "but look at
+me, sah; is dis right, sah, is it right to make joke like dis on de
+man dat play de big drum of de regiment?"
+
+"No, no, Sam; not at all right," the colonel said, with difficulty.
+"If you report who has played the trick upon you, I shall speak to him
+very seriously; but, Sam, I should have thought that you were quite
+big enough to take the matter in your own hands."
+
+"Me big enough, Massah Colonel, me plenty big; but me not able to find
+him."
+
+"Well, Sam, it is carrying a joke too far; still, it is only a trick
+off duty, and I am afraid that it is beyond my power to interfere."
+
+Sam thought for a moment, and, having by this time cooled down from
+his first paroxysm of rage, he said, "Beg pardon, massa, you quite
+right, no business of any one but Sam; but Sam too angry to 'top to
+think. Scuse liberty, colonel," and Sam retired from the quarter-deck,
+and made a bolt below down the nearest hatchway, when he plunged his
+head into a bucket of water, and soon restored it to its usual ebony
+hue.
+
+Then he went to the cook and tried to find out to whom he had given
+flour, but the cook replied at once, "Lor, I've given flour to the men
+of each mess to make puddings of, about thirty of them," and Sam felt
+as far off as ever.
+
+Presently, however, a big sailor began to make fun of him, and Sam
+retorted by knocking him down, after which there was a regular fight,
+which was carried on under the greatest difficulty, owing to the
+rolling of the ship. At last Sambo got the best of it, and this
+restored him so thoroughly to a good temper that he was able to join
+in the laugh at himself, reserving, however, his right to "knock de
+rascal who did it into a squash."
+
+The following day the weather changed, a wind sprang up nearly from
+the north, which increased rapidly, until toward afternoon it was
+blowing half a gale, before which the whole fleet, with their main
+and topsails set, ran southward at great speed. A heavy cross sea was
+running, the wares raised by the gale clashing with the heavy swell
+previously rolling in from the westward, and so violent and sudden
+were the lurches and rolls of the "Nancy" that the master feared that
+her masts would go.
+
+"How tremendously she rolls, Tom."
+
+"Tremendously; the deck seems almost upright, and the water right
+under our feet each time she goes over. She feels as if she were going
+to turn topsy-turvy each roll. It's bad enough on deck; but it will be
+worse down below."
+
+"A great deal worse, Peter, it's nearly dark already; it will strike
+eight bells in a minute or two, and then we shall have to go down.
+There's no danger, of course, of the ship turning over, but it won't
+be pleasant down below. Look out, Peter!"
+
+The exclamation was caused by an awful crash. The ship had given a
+tremendous lurch, when the long-boat, which was stowed amidships,
+suddenly tore away from its fastenings and came crashing down.
+It passed within three feet of where the boys were sitting, and
+completely tore away the bulwark, leaving a great gap in the side,
+where it had passed through. "Look, Tom, Sam's overboard!" Peter
+exclaimed.
+
+Sam had been sitting on the bulwark, a few feet from them, holding on
+by a shroud, when the boat came down upon him; with a cry he had let
+go of the shroud and started back, falling into the water just as the
+boat struck the bulwark. "There he is, Tom," Peter said, as he saw the
+black only a few yards from the side. "He is hurt, come on," catching
+up the end of a long rope coiled up on the deck close to their feet,
+the boys jumped overboard together. A dozen strokes took them up to
+Sam; but the black hull of the ship had already glanced past them.
+They could hear loud shouts, but could not distinguish a word.
+
+"Quick, round him, Peter!" and, in a moment, the boys twisted the rope
+round the body of the black, and knotted it just as the drag of the
+ship tightened it. Thus Sam's safety was secured, but the strain was
+so tremendous as they tore through the water, that it was impossible
+for the boys to hold on, and, in a moment, they were torn from their
+hold.
+
+"All right, Peter," Tom said cheerily, as they dashed the water from
+their eyes, "there is the boat."
+
+The remains of the boat were not ten yards distant, and in a few
+strokes they had gained it. It was stove in and broken, but still held
+together, floating on a level with the water's edge. With some trouble
+the boys got inside her, and sat down on the bottom, so that their
+heads were just out of water.
+
+Then they had time to look round. The ship was already disappearing in
+the gathering darkness.
+
+"This boat will soon go to pieces, Tom," was Peter's first remark.
+
+"I expect it will, Peter; but we must stick to its pieces. We had
+better get off our boots. The water is pretty warm, that's one
+comfort."
+
+"Do you think the ship will come back for us, Tom?"
+
+"I don't think she can, Peter; at any rate, it is certain she can't
+find us, it would take a long time to bring her round, and then, you
+see, she could not sail straight back against the wind."
+
+"Look here, Tom, I remember when I climbed up to look into the boats
+yesterday that there were some little casks lashed under the seats,
+and a sailor told me they were always kept full of water in case the
+boats were wanted suddenly. If they are still there we might empty
+them out, and they could keep us afloat any time."
+
+"Hurrah! Peter, capital, let's see."
+
+To their great delight the boys found four small water-kegs fastened
+under the seats. Three of these they emptied, and fastening one of
+them to that which they had left full, and then each taking hold of
+one of the slings which were fastened to the kegs for convenience of
+carriage, they waited quietly. In less than ten minutes from the time
+when they first gained their frail refuge, a great wave broke just
+upon them, and completely smashed up the remains of the boat. They had
+cut off some rope from the mast, which they found with its sail furled
+ready for use in the boat, and now roughly lashed themselves together,
+face to face, so that they had a keg on each side. They had also
+fastened a long piece of rope to the other kegs, so that they would
+float near them.
+
+It was a long and terrible night for them, generally their heads and
+chests were well above the water, but at times a wave would break with
+its white crest, and, for a time, the foam would be over their heads.
+Fortunately the water was warm, and the wind fell a good deal. The
+boys talked occasionally to each other, and kept up each other's
+courage. Once or twice, in spite of the heavy sea, they were so much
+overcome with exhaustion that they dozed uneasily for a while, with
+their heads upon each other's shoulders, and great was their feeling
+of relief and pleasure when morning began to break.
+
+"It is going to be a splendid day, Peter, and the wind is dropping
+fast."
+
+"Look, Tom," Peter said, "there are some of the planks of the boat
+jammed in with the kegs."
+
+It was as Peter said; the two kegs, one empty and the other full, were
+floating about ten yards off, at the length of the rope by which they
+were attached to the boys, while with them was a confused mass of
+wreckage of the boat.
+
+"That is capital, Peter, we will see if we can't make a raft
+presently."
+
+As the sun rose and warmed the air, the boys strength and spirits
+revived, and in a few hours they were so refreshed that they
+determined to set about their raft. The wind had now entirely dropped,
+the waves were still very high, but they came in long, smooth, regular
+swells, over which they rose and fell almost imperceptibly.
+
+"They must be rolling a good deal more in the 'Nancy' than we are
+here, Peter. Now, the first thing is to have a drink. What a blessing
+it is we have water." With their knives they soon got the bung out of
+the water-keg, and each took a long drink, and then carefully closed
+it up again.
+
+"There, Peter, we have drunk as much as we wanted this time; but we
+must be careful, there is no saying how long we may be before we are
+picked up. Hurrah, Peter, here are the masts and sails, so we shall
+have plenty of cord."
+
+It took the boys nearly three hours to complete their task to their
+satisfaction. When it was concluded they had the three empty kegs
+lashed in a triangle about five feet apart, while two planks crossing
+the triangle, assisted to keep all firm and tight; floating in the
+center of the triangle was the keg of water. "There, I don't think
+we can improve that, Peter," Tom said at last, "now, let us get on
+and try it." They did so, and, to their great delight, found that
+it floated a few inches above water. "We may as well get the masts
+on board, Peter, and let the sails tow alongside. They may come in
+useful; and now the first thing is to dry ourselves and our clothes."
+
+The clothes were soon spread out to dry, and the boys luxuriated in
+the warmth of the sun.
+
+"What great, smooth waves these are, Tom, sometimes we are down in a
+valley which runs miles long, and then we are up on a hill."
+
+"Here we lay, all the day, in the bay of Biscay, oh!" Tom laughed.
+"I only hope that the wished-for morrow may bring the sail in sight,
+Peter. However, we can hold on for a few days, I suppose. That is a
+four-gallon keg, so that we have got a quart of water each for eight
+days, and hunger isn't so bad to bear as thirst. We have pretty well
+done for our uniforms, our bugles are the only things that have not
+suffered."
+
+For the boys' companies being on deck at the time of the accident,
+they both had their bugles on when they jumped overboard.
+
+"Our last upset was when that bargee canted us over at Eton, rather a
+different business that, Peter."
+
+"My shirt is not dry yet, Tom; but I shall put it on again, for the
+sun is too hot to be pleasant."
+
+Tom followed Peter's example.
+
+"Do you think, Tom, that we had better try to get up a sort of sail
+and make for land, or remain where we are?"
+
+"Remain where we are, Peter, I should say. I suppose we must be a
+hundred miles from the French coast, and even if the wind blew fair
+we should be a long time getting there, and with the certainty of a
+prison when we arrived. Still, if there were a strong west wind, I
+suppose it would be our best way; as it is we have nothing to do but
+to wait quietly, and hope for a ship. We are in the right line, and
+there must be lots of vessels on their way, besides those which sailed
+with us, for Portsmouth. So we must keep watch and watch. Now, Peter,
+you lie down on that plank, it is just about long enough, you shall
+have two hours' sleep, and then I'll have two, after that we will have
+four hours each."
+
+"How are we to count time?" Peter said laughing.
+
+"I never thought of that," Tom said, looking at his watch. "Of course
+it has stopped. We must guess as near as we can; at any rate, you go
+to sleep first, and, when I am too sleepy to keep watch any longer, I
+will wake you up."
+
+So passed that day and the next night. A light breeze sprung up from
+the southwest, and the sun again shone out brightly.
+
+"I feel as if I wanted breakfast horribly," Peter said, with an
+attempt at a smile. "Do you think that there is any possibility of
+catching anything?"
+
+"We have nothing to make hooks with, Peter, and nothing to bait them
+with if we had."
+
+"There are lots of tiny fish swimming all about, Tom, if we could but
+catch them."
+
+Tom was silent for awhile; then he said, "Look here, Peter. Let us cut
+a piece off the sail about five feet long, and say three feet wide,
+double it longways, and sew up the ends so as to make a bag; we can
+unravel some string, and make holes with our knives. Then we can sink
+it down two or three feet, and watch it; and when we see that some
+little fish have got in it, we can draw it up very gently, and, by
+raising it gradually from the sea, the water will run out, and we
+shall catch the fish."
+
+Peter agreed that at any rate it was worth trying; for, even if it did
+not succeed, it was better for them to be doing something than sitting
+idle. The sail and the floating wreckage were pulled alongside, and
+the boys set to work. In three hours a large and shallow bag was made,
+with some improvements upon Tom's original plan. The mouth was kept
+open by two crossed pieces of wood, and four cords from the corners
+were attached to the end of the oar which formed their fishing-rod. At
+last it was finished, and the bag lowered.
+
+To the horror of the boys, it was discovered that it would not sink.
+They were ready to cry with vexation, for the want of food had made
+them feel faint and weak.
+
+"What have we got that is heavy?" Tom asked in despair.
+
+"I have got fourpence in halfpence, Tom, and there are our knives and
+watches."
+
+Their pockets were ransacked, and the halfpence, knives, and watches
+were placed in the bottom of the bag and lowered. Still the wood-work
+kept afloat.
+
+"There are the bugles, Tom," Peter cried in delight. These had been
+fastened to the raft, and were now hastily untied and placed in the
+canvas bag.
+
+It sank now, and the boys lowered it five or six feet, so that they
+could partly see into it. "There are lots of little fish swimming
+about, Tom," Peter said in a whisper. "Some are almost as long as
+one's hand. Do you think that they will go in, Tom?"
+
+"I hope the glitter of the bugles and watches will attract them,
+Peter."
+
+"There, Tom, there--I saw a whole swarm of little ones go in."
+
+"Wait a minute or two, Peter, to let them get well down, and then draw
+up as quietly as possible."
+
+Very cautiously the boys raised the point of their rod until the
+top of the square-mouthed bag was level with the surface; then they
+brought it close to them and looked in, and as they did so gave a
+simultaneous cheer. There, in the bottom of the canvas, two feet below
+them, were a number of little fish moving about. Raising the rod
+still higher, they gradually lifted the net out of the sea, the water
+running quickly off as they did so, and then they proceeded to examine
+their prize.
+
+"We will take out one and one, Peter; give them a nip as you take them
+up, that will kill them." There were two fish of about three inches
+long, another three or four of two inches, and some thirty or forty
+the size of minnows. It was scarcely more than a mouthful each, but
+it was a stay for a moment to their stomachs, and no one ever said a
+thanksgiving with deeper feeling and heartiness than did the boys when
+they had emptied their canvas net.
+
+"We need not be anxious about food now, Peter; if we can catch these
+in five minutes, we can get enough each day to satisfy us. They quench
+the thirst too. We must limit ourselves to half a pint of water a day,
+and we can hold on for a fortnight. We are safe to be picked up before
+that."
+
+All the afternoon and evening the boys continued to let down and draw
+up their net, sometimes bringing in only a few tiny fish, sometimes
+getting half a dozen of the larger kind. By nightfall they had
+satisfied the cravings of hunger, and felt stronger and better. One or
+two sails had been seen during the day, but always at such distances
+that it was evident at once that they could not pass within hail. That
+night, fatigued with their exertions, both laid down and went to sleep
+until morning, and slept more comfortably than before; for they had
+fastened a piece of the sail tightly on the top of the raft, and lay
+softly suspended in that, instead of being balanced upon a narrow and
+uncomfortable plank. They felt new creatures when they woke, pulled
+up their net, had a mouthful of raw fish, took off their clothes, and
+had a swim, and then set to earnestly to fish. The sun was brighter,
+and the fish in consequence kept deeper than upon the preceding day;
+still by evening they had caught enough to take the edge off, if not
+to satisfy, their hunger. The fishing, however, during the last hours
+of daylight was altogether neglected, for behind them they could see
+a sail, which appeared as if it might possibly come close enough to
+observe them. There was still the long, steady swell coming in from
+the Atlantic, and a light breeze was blowing from the north. The boys
+had been so intent upon their fishing, that they had not noticed her
+until she was within nine or ten miles of them. "She will not be up
+for an hour and a half, Peter," Tom said, "and the sun will be down
+long before that. I fear that the chance of their seeing us is very
+small indeed. However, we will try. Let us get the net out of the
+water, and hold it and the oar up. It is possible that some one may
+see the canvas with a telescope before the sun goes down. Take the
+things out of the net."
+
+The oar with the canvas bag was elevated, and the boys anxiously
+watched the course of the vessel. She was a large ship, but they could
+only see her when they rose upon the top of the long smooth waves. "I
+should think that she will pass within a mile of us, Peter," Tom said,
+after half an hour's watching, "but I fear that she will not be much
+closer. How unfortunate she had not come along an hour earlier. She
+would have been sure to see us if it had been daylight. I don't think
+that there is much chance now, for there is no moon. However, thank
+God, we can hold on very well now, and next time we may have better
+luck."
+
+The sun had set more than half an hour before the ship came abreast of
+them. They had evidently not been seen.
+
+"Now, Peter," Tom said, "let us both hallo together; the wind is very
+light, and it is just possible they may hear us."
+
+Again and again the boys shouted, but the ship sailed steadily on.
+Peter dashed the tears aside, and Tom said, with a quiver in his
+voice, "Never mind, Peter; better luck next time, old boy. God has
+been so good to us, that I feel quite confident we shall be saved."
+
+"So do I, Tom," Peter said. "It was only a disappointment for a
+minute. We may as well put the oar down, for my arm and back ache
+holding it."
+
+"Mind how you do it, Peter. If we let the end go through the canvas,
+we shall lose our watches and bugles, and then we shall not be able to
+fish."
+
+"Oh, Tom, the bugles!"
+
+"What, Peter?" Tom said, astonished.
+
+"We can make them hear, Tom, don't you see?"
+
+"Hurrah, Peter! so we can. What a fool I was to forget it!"
+
+In a moment the bugles rang out the assembly across the water. Again
+and again the sharp, clear sound rose on the quiet evening air.
+
+"Look, Peter, there are men going up the rigging to look round. Sound
+again!"
+
+Again and again they sounded the call, and then they saw the ship's
+head come round, and her bow put towards them, and then they fell on
+their knees and thanked God that they were saved.
+
+In ten minutes the ship was close to them, thrown up into the wind, a
+boat was lowered, and in another minute or two was alongside.
+
+"Hallo!" the officer in charge exclaimed, "two boys, all alone. Here,
+help them in, lads--that's it; now pull for the ship. Here, boys, take
+a little brandy from this flask. How long have you been on that raft?"
+
+"It is three days since we went overboard, sir; but we were in the
+water for about eighteen hours before we made the raft."
+
+Tom and Peter drank a little brandy, and felt better for it; but they
+were weaker than they thought, for they had to be helped up the side
+of the ship. A number of officers were grouped round the gangway, and
+the boys saw that they were on board a vessel of war.
+
+"Only these boys?" asked the captain in surprise of the officer who
+had brought them on board.
+
+"That is all, sir."
+
+"Doctor, you had better see to them," the captain said. "If they are
+strong enough to talk, after they have had some soup, let them come
+to my cabin; if not, let them turn in in the sick bay, and I will see
+them in the morning. One question though, boys. Are there any others
+about--any one for me to look for or pick up?"
+
+"No one else, sir," Tom said, and then followed the doctor aft. A
+basin of soup and a glass of sherry did wonders for the boys, and in
+an hour they proceeded to the captain's cabin, dressed in clothes
+which the doctor had borrowed from two of the midshipmen for them,
+for their own could never be worn again; indeed, they had not brought
+their jackets from the raft, those garments having shrunk so from the
+water, that the boys had not been able to put them on again, after
+first taking them off to dry.
+
+The doctor accompanied them, and in the captain's cabin they found the
+first lieutenant, who had been in charge of the boat which picked them
+up.
+
+"I am glad to see you looking so much better," the captain said as
+they entered. "Sit down. Do you know," he went on with a smile, "I
+do not think that any of us would have slept had you not recovered
+sufficiently to tell your story to-night. We have been puzzling over
+it in vain. How you two boys came to be adrift alone on a raft, made
+up of three water-kegs, as Mr. Armstrong tells me, and how you came to
+have two bugles with you on the raft, is altogether beyond us."
+
+"The last matter is easily explained, sir," Tom said. "My brother and
+myself are buglers in H.M.'s Regiment of Norfolk Rangers, and as we
+were on duty when we went overboard, we had our bugles slung over our
+shoulders."
+
+"Buglers!" the captain said in surprise. "Why from your appearance and
+mode of expressing yourselves, I take you to be gentlemen's sons."
+
+"So we are, sir," Tom said quietly, "and I hope gentlemen--at any
+rate we have been Etonians. But we have lost our father, and are now
+buglers in the Rangers."
+
+"Well, lads," the captain said after a pause, "and now tell us how you
+came upon this little raft?"
+
+Tom related modestly the story of their going overboard from the
+"Nancy," of the formation of the raft, and of their after proceedings.
+Their hearers were greatly astonished at the story; and the captain
+said, "Young gentlemen, you have done a very gallant action, and have
+behaved with a coolness and bravery which would have done credit to
+old sailors. Had your father been alive he might have been proud
+indeed of you. I should be proud had you been my sons. If you are
+disposed to change services I will write directly we reach the Tagus
+to obtain your discharge, and will give you midshipmen's berths on
+board this ship. Don't answer now; you can think it over by the time
+we reach Portugal. I will not detain you now; a night's rest will set
+you up. Mr. Armstrong will introduce you to the midshipmen to-morrow;
+you are passengers here now, and will mess with them. Good-night."
+
+It was not many minutes before the boys were asleep in their hammocks.
+If people's ears really tingle when they are being spoken about,
+Tom and Peter would have had but little sleep that night. The first
+lieutenant related the circumstances to the other lieutenants; the
+second lieutenant, whose watch it was, told the gunner, who related
+it to the petty officers; the doctor told his mates, who retailed the
+story to the midshipmen; and so gradually it went over the whole ship,
+and officers and men agreed that it was one of the pluckiest and
+coolest things ever done.
+
+The boys slept until nearly breakfast time, and were just dressed when
+Mr. Armstrong came for them and took them to the midshipmen's berth,
+where they were received with a warmth and heartiness which quite
+surprised them. The midshipmen and mates pressed forward to shake
+hands with them, and the stiflingly close little cock-pit was the
+scene of an ovation. The boys were quite glad when the handshaking was
+over, and they sat down to the rough meal which was then usual among
+midshipmen. As the vessel had only left England four days before,
+the fare was better than it would have been a week later, for there
+was butter, cold ham and tongue upon the table. After breakfast they
+were asked to tell the story over again, and this they did with great
+modesty. Many questions were asked, and it was generally regretted
+that they were not sailors. Upon going up on deck there was quite an
+excitement among the sailors to get a look at them, and the gunner and
+other petty officers came up and shook hands with them heartily, and
+the boys wished from the depths of their hearts that people would not
+make such a fuss about nothing; for, as Tom said to Peter, "Of course
+we should not have jumped overboard if we had thought that we could
+not have kept hold of the rope."
+
+That day they dined in the cabin with the captain, who, after the
+officers present had withdrawn, asked them if they would tell him
+about their past lives. This the boys did frankly, and took the
+opportunity of explaining that they had chosen the army because the
+enemies' fleet having been destroyed, there was less chance of active
+service in the navy than with the army just starting for Lisbon, and
+that their uncle having commanded the regiment that they were in, they
+had entered it, and had received so much kindness that they had fair
+reason to hope that they would eventually obtain commissions. Hence,
+while thanking him most warmly for his offer, they had decided to go
+on in the path that they had chosen.
+
+The captain remarked that, after what they had said, although he
+should have been glad to have them with him, he thought that they had
+decided rightly.
+
+The next morning, when the boys woke, they were surprised at the
+absence of any motion of the vessel, and upon going on deck they found
+that they were running up the Tagus, and that Lisbon was in sight.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+PORTUGAL.
+
+
+The boys were delighted with the appearance of the Tagus, covered as
+it now was with a fleet of transports and merchantmen. As they were
+looking at it, the officer commanding the marines on board, who had
+talked a good deal to them upon the preceding day, came up to them. "I
+thought that you would be in a fix about clothes, my lads," he said.
+"You could not very well join in these midshipman's uniforms, so I set
+the tailor yesterday to cut down a couple of spare suits of my corps.
+The buttons will not be right, but you can easily alter that when you
+join. You had better go below at once and see if the things fit pretty
+well. I have told the tailor to take them to the cock-pit and if they
+do not fit they can alter them at once."
+
+Thanking the officer very much for his thoughtful kindness, and much
+relieved in mind--for they had already been wondering what they should
+do--the boys ran below, and found that the tailor had guessed their
+sizes pretty correctly, aided as he had been by the trousers they
+had worn when they came on board. A few alterations were necessary,
+and these he promised to get finished in a couple of hours. They had
+scarcely gone on deck again when the anchor was let fall, and a boat
+was lowered, in order that the captain might proceed to shore with the
+despatches of which he was the bearer.
+
+Just as he was upon the point of leaving the deck, his eye fell upon
+the boys. "I shall be back again in an hour or two," he said; "do not
+leave until I return. I will find out where your regiment is, and if
+it has marched I will give you a certificate of how I picked you up,
+otherwise you may be stopped on the way, and get into a scrape as two
+boys who have strayed away from their regiment."
+
+So saying, the captain got into his boat and rowed to shore. It was
+one o'clock before he returned. The boys had dinner with the gunroom
+officers, then changed their dress, and had now the appearance of
+buglers in the marines.
+
+The captain at once sent for them. "Your regiment went on yesterday
+with the rest of the division. It halts to-day ten miles out of the
+town. There is the certificate I spoke of. Mr. Armstrong is just going
+off with two boats' crew to assist in unloading stores; I have asked
+him to hand you over to the charge of some officer going up with a
+convoy. And now good-bye, lads. I wish you every luck, and hope that
+some day or other you may win your epaulets."
+
+With renewed thanks for his kindness, the boys went up on deck. There
+they shook hands and said good-bye to all the officers and midshipmen.
+As they were waiting while the boats were being lowered, two of the
+sailors went aft to the captain, who had come up from below and was
+walking alone on the quarter-deck, and, with a touch of the hat, the
+spokesman said, "Your honor, we're come to ax as how, if your honor
+has no objection, we might just give a parting cheer to those 'ere
+youngsters."
+
+"Well, Jones," the captain said, smiling, "it's rather an unusual
+thing for the crew of one of His Majesty's ships to cheer two young
+soldiers."
+
+"It is unusual, your honor, mighty unusual, because soldiers ain't in
+general of much account at sea; but you see, your honor, this ain't a
+usual circumstance, nohow. These here boys, which ain't much more than
+babbies, have done what there ain't many men, not even of those who
+are born and bred to the sea, would have done; and we should just like
+to give them a bit of a cheer for good luck."
+
+"Very well, Jones, tell the men they can do as they like."
+
+Accordingly, as the boys took their seats in the boat they were
+surprised at seeing the crew clustering to the side of the ship, while
+some of the men ran up the rigging.
+
+"What can the men be up to?" Tom asked Mr. Armstrong in surprise.
+
+The lieutenant smiled, for he knew what was coming.
+
+"Sheer off, men," he said, and as he did so the boatswain of the ship
+gave the word, "Now, lads, three cheers for them boys; may they have
+the luck they deserve."
+
+Three thundering cheers burst from the whole crew, the men in the
+boats tossing their oars in the naval fashion of acknowledgment of
+the salute. Tom and Peter, astonished and affected, stood up, took
+off their caps, and waved their hands in thanks to the crowd of faces
+looking down upon them, and then sat down again and wiped their eyes.
+
+"Row on," the lieutenant said, and the oars fell in the water with
+a splash; one more cheer arose, and then the boats rowed for the
+landing-place. The boys were too much affected to look up or speak,
+until they reached the shore, nor did they notice a boat which rowed
+past them upon its way to the vessel they had left, just after they
+had started. It contained an officer in a general's uniform. The boat
+steered to the ship's side, and the officer ascended the ladder. The
+captain was on deck. "Ah, Craufurd," he said, "this is an unexpected
+pleasure."
+
+"I have just come back from my division for a few hours, Merivale;
+there are a lot of stores which are essential, and some of my
+artillery is not landed, so I thought I could hurry things up a bit.
+My spare charger, and most of the chargers of my staff, are being
+landed, too; the ship they came in was a day or two late; and as I had
+to confer with the Portuguese Minister of War, I am killing a good
+many birds with one stone. I heard you had just come in, and as I was
+on board the "Clio" about my charger, I thought it would not be much
+out of my way to run round and shake hands with you."
+
+"I am very glad you did. Come into my cabin; you can spare time to
+take some lunch, I hope."
+
+While they were at lunch General Craufurd remarked, "So you have just
+lost one of your officers, I see; promoted to another ship, eh?"
+
+"Lost an officer!" Captain Merivale said in surprise. "No, not that I
+have heard of. What makes you think so?"
+
+"I thought so by the cheering the ship's crew gave that boat that left
+the ship just before I came up. There was only a naval lieutenant in
+her, and I supposed that he had just got his ship, and I thought by
+the heartiness of the cheering what a good fellow he must be."
+
+"But it was not the lieutenant the men were cheering," Captain
+Merivale said with a smile.
+
+"No!" General Craufurd said, surprised. "Why, there was no one else
+in the boat. I looked attentively as I passed. There was only a
+lieutenant, a midshipman who was steering, the men rowing, and two
+little marine buglers, who had their handkerchiefs up to their faces.
+So you see I took a very minute survey."
+
+"You did indeed," Captain Merivale said, laughing. "Well, it was just
+these little buglers that the crew of the ship were cheering."
+
+General Craufurd looked up incredulously. "You're joking, Merivale.
+The crew of His Majesty's frigate 'Latona' cheer two buglers of
+marines! No, no, that won't do."
+
+"It is a fact, though, Craufurd, unlikely as it seems, except that the
+buglers belong to the Norfolk Rangers, and not to the Marines."
+
+"The Rangers! They are in Hill's division. What is it all about? There
+must be something very strange about it."
+
+"There is indeed," Captain Merivale said, "very strange." And he then
+related the whole story to his visitor.
+
+"They are trumps indeed," the general said when the narrative was
+ended, "and I am very glad that I happened to hear it. I will speak to
+Hill about it, and will keep my eye upon them. Be assured they shall
+have their epaulets as soon as possible--that is, if their conduct is
+at all equal to their pluck. It is the least we can do when, as you
+say, they have refused midshipmen's berths to stick to us. And now I
+must be off."
+
+The boat landed General Craufurd at the same landing-place at which
+Tom and Peter had disembarked half an hour before. Lieutenant
+Armstrong had spoken a few words to the officer who was superintending
+the landing of stores and horses, and he, being far too busy to stop
+to talk, briefly said that the boys could go up to join their regiment
+with a convoy of stores which would start that night.
+
+After saying good-bye to their friend the lieutenant, the boys sat
+down upon some bales, and were watching with much amusement and
+interest the busy scene before them. As General Craufurd passed they
+rose and saluted.
+
+"You are the boys from the 'Latona,' are you not?"
+
+"Yes, sir," the boys answered in surprise.
+
+"Can you ride?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"Follow me, then."
+
+Much surprised, the boys followed the general until he made his way
+through the confusion to a group of newly landed horses. Near them
+were a couple of mounted Hussars, who, at the sight of the general,
+rode forward with his charger. He made a sign to them to wait a
+moment, and walked up to the men who were holding the newly landed
+horses.
+
+"Which of you have got charge of two horses?"
+
+Several of the men answered at once.
+
+"Which of you are servants of officers on my staff?"
+
+Three of those who had answered before replied now.
+
+"Very well; just put saddles on to two of them. These lads will ride
+them; they are going out with me at once; they will hand them over to
+your masters."
+
+In another five minutes Tom and Peter, to their surprise and
+delight, were clattering along through the streets of Lisbon upon
+two first-rate horses in company with the two Hussars, while, twenty
+lengths ahead, trotted General Craufurd with two officers who had been
+down to Lisbon upon duty similar to his own. Once outside the town,
+the general put his horse into a gallop, and his followers of course
+did the same. Once or twice General Craufurd glanced back to see how
+the boys rode, for a doubt had crossed his mind as to whether he had
+been wise in putting them upon such valuable horses, but when he saw
+that they were evidently accustomed to the work, he paid no further
+attention to them.
+
+The officers riding beside him, however, looked back several times.
+
+"What luck we have, to be sure, Tom," Peter said, "and I can't
+understand this a bit. How could the general know that we came from
+the 'Latona'; as he evidently did, and by the way these officers have
+looked back twice, I can't help thinking that he is talking about us."
+
+Tom was as puzzled as Peter, but they soon forgot the subject, and
+engaged in an animated conversation with the Hussars as to the
+situation and position of the army, and the supposed strength and
+locality of the French, concerning which they were, of course, in
+complete ignorance. An hour and a half's sharp riding took them to
+Torres Vedras, a small town which afterwards became celebrated for
+the tremendous lines which Wellington erected there. The troops were
+encamped in its vicinity, the general having his quarters at the house
+of the Alcalde, or Mayor.
+
+"Your regiment is a mile and a half distant, lads," General Craufurd
+said as they drew up at his quarters; "you will have difficulty in
+finding it this evening. Sergeant, take these lads round to the house
+where my orderlies are quartered, and give them some supper. They can
+join their regiment in the morning. I have heard of you, lads, from
+Captain Merivale, and shall mention your conduct to General Hill, and
+be assured I will keep my eye upon you."
+
+The boys were soon asleep upon a heap of straw, and at six next
+morning were upon the road, having already had some coffee and bread
+for breakfast. They had no difficulty in finding their way, for
+orderlies were already galloping about, and the bugle calls came sharp
+upon their ears. The division was to march at seven. The Rangers
+happened to be the first in advance, so that they passed through the
+other regiments to arrive at theirs.
+
+The tents were down when they arrived, and packed in readiness for the
+bullock carts which stood by. The boys paused a little distance off,
+and looked on with delight at the busy scene. At a note on the bugle
+the tents and other baggage were stowed in the carts, and then the men
+hitched on their knapsacks, unpiled arms, and began to fall into rank.
+
+No one noticed the boys as they passed between the groups and
+approached the band, who were mustering by the colors, which were as
+usual placed in front of the guard tent.
+
+"There's Sambo," Tom said; "I am glad they got him safe on board."
+
+The negro was the first to perceive the boys as they came close up
+to him. As he saw them he gave a sudden start, his eyes opened wider
+and wider until the whites showed all round, his teeth chattered, the
+shiny black of his face turned to a sort of dirty gray, and he threw
+up his hands with a loud cry, "oh, golly, here's dose boys' spirits!"
+
+He stepped back, heedless that the big drum was behind him, and the
+next moment went back with a crash into it, and remained there with
+his knees doubled up and his face looking out between them, too
+frightened and horror-struck to make the least movement to extricate
+himself.
+
+For a moment no one noticed him, for at his cry they had all turned to
+the boys, and stood as if petrified at seeing those whom they believed
+had been drowned before their eyes a week before. The silence did
+not last long, the boys bursting into a shout of laughter at Sam's
+appearance.
+
+"Spirits! Sam," Tom said; "not by a long way yet, man. How are you
+all? Come, get out of that, Sam and shake hands." And as the band with
+a shout crowded round them, the boys helped Sam, who was trembling all
+over from the shock and fright, from the drum.
+
+For a moment the boys were quite confused and bewildered, for as they
+hauled Sam to his feet their comrades of the band pressed round them
+cheering, every one trying to shake them by the hand.
+
+The news spread like wildfire among the troops, and there was at once
+a general rush to the spot. The boys were seized in an instant, and
+each raised on the shoulders of two of the grenadiers, and as they
+made their appearance above the heads of the crowd a tremendous cheer
+broke from the whole regiment.
+
+"What can be the matter?" was the general exclamation of the colonel
+and officers, who were just finishing their breakfasts in a cottage
+which stood close behind the spot where their tents had been pitched
+in the rear of the regiment. "What can be the matter?"--and as the
+cheering continued there was a general rush to the door. There they
+stood astonished at seeing the whole of the men clustered in one spot,
+shouting and waving their caps.
+
+"What can be the matter?" the colonel said again; "the whole regiment
+seems to have gone mad."
+
+"We shall know in a minute," Captain Manley said; "they are coming in
+this direction."
+
+"Look at that fellow Sambo," exclaimed Carruthers; "he looks madder
+than all the rest."
+
+In spite of the intense surprise which all were feeling, there was a
+general laugh, for the black was performing antics like one possessed;
+his cap was gone, he jumped, he yelled, he waved his arms, with a
+drumstick in each hand, wildly over his head, he twisted round and
+round; he seemed really out of his mind. Suddenly he left the crowd,
+and rushed on ahead at full speed towards the group of officers, still
+leaping and yelling and waving his drumsticks.
+
+The officers instinctively drew together as he approached, for they
+thought that the gigantic negro was really out of his mind. He stopped
+suddenly as he came up to them, and tried to fall into his usual
+attitude of attention.
+
+"Oh, Massa Colonel," he said in hoarse, sobbing tones, "only to
+think, only to think. Scuse Sam, sar, but Sam feel he's going to bust
+right up wid joy, massa. Dat no matter, but only to think. Bress de
+Almighty, sar! only to think!"
+
+None of the officers spoke for a minute in answer to these disjointed
+exclamations. They were affected at the man's great emotion. His black
+skin was still strangely pale, his eyes were distended, his lips
+quivered, tears were rolling down his cheeks, and his huge frame was
+shaken with sobs.
+
+"Calm yourself, Sam--be calm, my man," the colonel said kindly. "Try
+and tell us what has happened. What are the men so excited about? What
+is the matter with them?"
+
+"Oh, Massa Colonel," Sam said, "me try tell you all 'boat it. Only to
+think, sar, dose boys cum back again; dose boys, sar, bress dem, dat
+jumped into de water and got drowned just to save dis poor niggar,
+sar. Dey cum back again; only tink ob dat!"
+
+The officers looked at one another in surprise.
+
+"I do believe he means the Scudamores! colonel," Captain Manley
+exclaimed; "but no, it is impossible, no one could have lived five
+minutes in that sea, and we know that they could not have been picked
+up, for we were the last ship in the fleet."
+
+"Yes, yes, sar, dat's dem, dey cum back sure enuff," Sam said.
+
+Then Carruthers exclaimed, "I do believe it is so; there are a couple
+of boys on the shoulders of the men in the middle of the crowd. Yes,
+and, by Jove, it is the Scudamores. Hurrah! I am glad."
+
+There was a general exclamation of pleasure from the whole group, for
+the regret for the boys, who had, as was believed, perished in the
+performance of such a gallant action, had been general and sincere,
+and Captain Manley lifted his cap and said reverently, "Thank God,
+these gallant lads are saved;" and those around, although some of them
+were but little addicted to prayer, repeated the words and imitated
+the action.
+
+Carruthers would have stepped forward in his eagerness to greet his
+former school-fellows, but Captain Manley laid his hand quietly on his
+shoulder and said in a low tone, "Wait, Carruthers, let the colonel
+welcome them."
+
+And now the crowd came up to the cottage, those in front falling back
+as they approached, so as to let the grenadiers come forward with
+their burden. The boys were lowered to the ground, and stood at once
+at attention; their faces were both flushed with excitement, and their
+eyes swollen with tears, so much were they both moved by the welcome
+which had greeted them.
+
+There was a dead silence for a moment, and then Colonel Tritton said
+in a loud, clear voice, which was heard all over the throng of men, "I
+am glad, lads, to see you back again. I never expected to have seen
+you again after we caught a glimpse of you as the sea washed you away.
+You have seen how the men have welcomed you, and I can assure you
+that the pleasure of the officers that two such gallant young fellows
+should have been saved is no less than that of your comrades. A braver
+act than that which you performed was never done. I shake hands with
+you, and congratulate you in the name of the whole regiment." And,
+suiting the action to the words, Colonel Tritton stepped forward and
+shook the boys warmly by the hand, amidst a great cheer upon the part
+of the whole regiment. Then he held up his hand for silence again.
+"Bugler, sound the assembly; fall in, my lads, or we shall be late.
+Come in here, boys; you can get something to eat, and tell us in a few
+words how you were saved, for, even now that I see you it seems almost
+impossible."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+THE PASSAGE OF THE DUORO--TALAVERA.
+
+
+Very severe was the drill and discipline, and not very abundant was
+the food, and there was a general feeling of pleasure when, by the
+general concentration of the army at Coimbra, it was evident that
+active operations were about to commence. On the 5th of May 9000
+Portuguese, 3000 Germans, and 13,000 British troops were assembled.
+Sir Arthur was already there, and upon the 6th General Beresford
+marched with 10,000 men, and orders were issued for the rest of the
+army to march out early the next day.
+
+The Norfolk Rangers were in high glee that night, and many were the
+tales told by the old soldiers of former engagements in which they
+had taken part. Next morning, at daybreak, the tents were struck, the
+baggage packed, and the wagons loaded. The people of Coimbra came out
+in crowds to see the troops march, and many were the blessings and
+good wishes poured out as the long line wound through the streets of
+the city.
+
+Hill's division was the last, and the rain was pouring down with great
+force by the time they started. The march, however, was not a very
+long one, for Beresford's division, which was to operate upon the
+Upper Duoro, had a long distance to make, and it was necessary that
+all should be ready for simultaneous action. For this purpose the army
+halted the next day, and upon the 9th marched to Aveiro on the River
+Vonga. Here a large flotilla of boats was found, and the Norfolk
+Rangers with two other regiments were ordered to embark at once. The
+Portuguese fishermen entered heart and soul into the business, and in
+perfect silence the little flats were rowed up the lake of Ovar.
+
+The soldiers were greatly crowded in the boats, and were glad, indeed,
+when just as morning dawned they landed at the town of Ovar.
+
+By this movement they were placed upon the right flank of Francheschi,
+the general who commanded the advanced division of the French army.
+Soon after they had landed the French were attacked in front, and
+finding their flank turned, and the whole British force, which they
+had believed to be seven days' march away, in their front, they fell
+back hastily.
+
+To their great disappointment, the Rangers took no share in this the
+first skirmish of the war. But Hill's orders were not to press on the
+enemy's rear. Three days more of marching and skirmishing brought them
+close to the Duoro on the evening of the 11th. The enemy crossed that
+evening and destroyed the bridge, and during the night the British
+troops were all brought up, and massed behind the hill called the
+Serra. This hill stood upon a sharp elbow which the river makes just
+above the town of Oporto, and the British were here completely hidden
+from Marshal Soult, who had no idea that they were so close at hand.
+Indeed, knowing that the bridge was broken and that all the boats
+had been carefully taken over to that side of the river, the Marshal
+dreamt not that Sir Arthur would attempt to cross, but imagined that
+he would take boats lower down near the mouth of the river and there
+endeavor to cross. To prevent such an attempt Soult had massed his
+army below Oporto.
+
+The troops were ordered to pile arms, and eat their breakfast, but to
+keep in position. "I wonder how we are to cross the river, Tom?" Peter
+said. "It is three hundred yards across, with a rapid current, no man
+in the world could swim that, and carry his musket and ammunition
+across."
+
+"I expect Sir Arthur is reconnoitering, Peter; I saw him go up the
+hill to that convent there; he must be able to see from there right
+over Oporto."
+
+An hour passed, and then two or three officers were seen coming down
+from the hill; one went up to General Hill, who happened at that
+moment to be talking to Colonel Tritton. "You are to prepare to cross,
+sir, Colonel Waters has discovered a small boat brought across by a
+Portuguese in the night. They are going to cross to that great convent
+you see upon the other side. They will bring back boats with them, and
+you will cross at once, take possession of the convent, and hold it
+against any force that may be brought against you until reinforcements
+arrive."
+
+Very quickly were the orders passed, and with a smile of satisfaction
+the men took their arms and fell in. They were moved near the river,
+and kept under shelter of some houses.
+
+"Keep near me," Colonel Tritton said to Tom and Peter, "I may want you
+to carry messages, there will be no sounding of bugles to-day."
+
+Keeping under the shade of some trees so that they could command a
+view of the river without being seen from the opposite side, Colonel
+Tritton with two of his officers and his two buglers, watched what
+was going on. A few paces ahead of them were Generals Paget and Hill,
+like themselves, watching the daring experiment. Behind, under shelter
+of the houses, were the troops in dense masses. The Rangers, as the
+first regiment in General Hill's division, were in front, and would
+naturally be the first to cross. It was a most anxious moment, as
+Colonel Waters and two Portuguese pushed the tiny boat from shore and
+pulled across stream. The bulk of the Serra Hill hid the river at this
+point, and even the convent opposite, from the sight of the French
+army formed up below the town, but there were no doubt stragglers all
+over the city, and the whole baggage of the French army was in retreat
+by the road to Valarga which ran at a short distance behind the
+convent.
+
+Most anxiously their eyes were strained upon the opposite bank, from
+which they expected to see the flash of musketry, as the little boat
+neared the convent. All, however, was as still as death. Behind them
+they heard a rumble, and looking round saw eighteen guns on their way
+up the hill. From this eminence they could command the ground around
+the Seminary, as the convent across the water was called, and thus
+afford some aid to the troops as they crossed.
+
+There was a murmur of satisfaction as the boat neared the opposite
+shore, and after lying still for a moment to reconnoiter the convent,
+pulled boldly up to the landing-place, where its occupants disembarked
+and entered the Seminary. Their absence was not long. In a few minutes
+they reappeared with eight or ten men, and then at once entered and
+cast off three large boats moored along side.
+
+The boys could hardly repress a cheer as they saw them fairly under
+weigh. An officer now left the side of the General, and came to
+Colonel Tritton, "You will get your first company in readiness to
+embark, sir; do not let them show themselves until the last moment."
+
+Colonel Tritton joined his men. "Captain Manley, take your company
+forward, when the first boat touches the shore embark. Let there be no
+noise or confusion."
+
+"God bless you, Peter," Tom said, as they separated; "your company
+won't be many minutes after us;" for the bugler of the first company
+was ill, and Tom was ordered to take his place.
+
+As the boat touched the shore Captain Manley ordered the leading files
+of his company to come from under cover and take their place in the
+boat. Twenty-four men entered, and when the other boats were also full
+Captain Manley took his place, followed by his bugler, and the boats
+pushed off again.
+
+There was a dead silence in the boat, broken only by the sound of
+the oars as the Portuguese tugged manfully at them, each oar being
+double-banked by a soldier. The rest sat with their muskets in their
+hands, their pouches open ready for use, and their eyes fixed upon the
+shore. All was quiet, and with a sigh of relief, and a hearty hurrah
+muttered under their breath, the men leapt from the boat and ran up to
+the Seminary.
+
+It was a large building with a flat roof, and the enclosure around it
+was surrounded by a high wall which swept round to the water's edge
+on either side. The only entrance was through a stout gate studded
+with iron. This was already closed and barred; the captain at once
+distributed his men at the upper windows of the Seminary, with orders
+not to show themselves until the alarm was given.
+
+They had scarcely taken their places when they were joined by the
+occupants of the second boat, while those of the third, in which
+General Paget himself crossed, were but a minute or two later. Just as
+they touched the shore, however, there was a sudden shout heard, this
+was followed by others, and in five minutes a wild hubbub was heard in
+the town. Drums beat to arms, and it was evident that the enemy were
+at last awake to the fact that the British had effected a lodgment
+upon their side of the stream.
+
+"We shall have it hot presently," Captain Manley said to Tom. "They
+will be a quarter of an hour before they can get round here, and we
+shall have the three boats back by that time. The one we came in is
+half-way across already."
+
+Seven or eight minutes later a heavy column of men was seen pouring
+out of the upper gate of the town. As they got into the open ground,
+they threw out clouds of skirmishers, and pushed down towards the
+convent. A heavy fire was at once opened upon them by the English guns
+upon the Serra Hill. There was no longer any need for concealment. The
+soldiers in the convent took their places at the windows, and as they
+did so could hear the loud hurrahs of their comrades as they crowded
+down to the bank upon the other side of the river to await their turn
+to embark. Before the enemy were within musket-shot, three boat loads
+more had been landed, and there were, therefore, 150 men now in the
+convent. From the gates of the city the French artillery came pouring
+out, and, taking up a position upon an eminence, opened fire upon the
+convent just as the infantry had got within musket-range.
+
+So suddenly did the noise of the enemy's cannonade, the crashing of
+the balls against the thick walls of the Seminary, the rattle of the
+enemy's musketry, and the louder roar of the muskets of the defenders,
+blended on both sides with shouts and cheers, break out, that for a
+minute or two Tom felt almost bewildered. He had no time, however, to
+think, for an officer came up to Captain Manley. "The general is up on
+the roof; he wants a bugler sent up to him."
+
+Captain Manley nodded to Tom, who followed the aide-de-camp on to the
+roof. Here he could see all that was passing, and an exciting sight
+it was. Crowds of French soldiers were approaching the wall, keeping
+up a tremendous musketry fire, whilst behind them three batteries of
+field-guns were sending their messengers of death. From every upper
+window of the convent the answering flashes came thick and fast, while
+overhead hummed the shot from the British guns, on the Serra Hill.
+Oporto itself was in a state of uproar. Drums were beating, trumpets
+sounding, bells clanging, while from the house-tops the population,
+men and women, were waving their handkerchiefs to the English,
+gesticulating and making all sorts of pantomimic expression of joy.
+
+Looking at the river behind, Tom saw with pleasure that some more
+boats had been obtained, and that strong reinforcements would soon be
+across. The whistling of the bullets and the hum of the round shot
+were incessant, and Tom acknowledged to himself that he felt horribly
+uncomfortable--much more uncomfortable than he had any idea that he
+should feel under fire. Had he been actively engaged, he would have
+hardly experienced this feeling; but to stand impassive under a heavy
+fire is trying to the nerves of the oldest soldier. He was angry with
+himself that he was not more indifferent to the whizzing of the balls;
+but the sensation of discomfort under fire is beyond the control of
+the will, and it is no unusual thing to see a young soldier who, later
+in the day, may display an almost reckless courage, yet at first
+flinch whenever balls hiss close by him, in spite of all his efforts
+to the contrary. Tom was able, however, to control any outward
+manifestation of his feelings, and took his place a few paces behind
+General Paget, who was standing with one of his officers by his side,
+watching the force which, momentarily increasing, was, in spite of the
+British fire, making its way onward towards the gate.
+
+It was evident that the general considered the danger to be pressing,
+as he once or twice looked back to see how quickly the reinforcements
+were crossing the river. The first time that he did so, his eye fell
+on Tom. "Get behind those big chimneys, lad. There is no use in
+exposing yourself unnecessarily."
+
+Tom obeyed the order with alacrity, and, once in shelter, was soon
+able to bring his nerves under control, and to look round the corner
+of his shelter without flinching when the bullets sang past. In five
+minutes General Hill joined Paget on the roof, and just as he did so
+the latter was severely wounded and fell.
+
+Tom ran forward to assist him, and, kneeling beside him, partially
+supported him until four men came up and carried him below. The
+position of the little garrison was now very precarious, the artillery
+fire concentrated upon them was heavy, and the French swarmed up
+to the wall, which they in vain endeavored to climb. The English
+kept up a tremendous fire upon them, cheering constantly as fresh
+reinforcements arrived, or as the enemy was momentarily repulsed.
+
+Tom had now lost all nervousness, and was standing eagerly watching
+the fight, when a ball knocked his shako off. The general happened to
+turn around at the moment. "That was a narrow escape," he said with a
+smile. "What is your name, lad?"
+
+"Scudamore, sir," Tom answered.
+
+"Scudamore--Scudamore. Yes, I remember the name now. You are one of
+the lads General Craufurd spoke to me about. I want to see you. Come
+to me to-morrow with your brother. Go down now and join your company;
+I do not want you here."
+
+Tom gladly went down, for he longed to be doing something. He soon
+found his company, and, taking up a firelock of one of the men who had
+fallen, was soon hard at work loading and firing into the assailants.
+For an hour the strife continued. Fortunately General Murray had
+found some boats three miles higher up the stream, and had crossed,
+thus menacing the enemy's line of retreat. Suddenly a great pealing
+of bells were heard in Oporto, with shouting and cheering, and the
+house-tops were covered with people waving their handkerchiefs. The
+French were evacuating the town. The inhabitants at once took across
+some large barges to Villa Neva, a suburb lying across the river and
+just below the Serra Hill. Here Sherbrooke began to cross.
+
+It was now the time for the English to take the offensive. There were
+now three battalions in the seminary, and as the French drew sullenly
+off to join the column now flowing steadily out from Oporto along the
+Valonga road, the gates were thrown open, and the English passing out
+formed outside the walls, and poured volley after volley into the
+retreating foe. Had Murray fallen upon their flank, the disaster of
+the French would have been complete; but this general feared that the
+enemy would turn upon him, and destroy his division before assistance
+could arrive, and he therefore remained inactive, and allowed the long
+column of fugitives to pass unmolested.
+
+For the next eight days the English army followed hotly in pursuit,
+and several skirmishes occurred; but Soult effected a most masterly
+retreat, saving his army, when it seemed upon the brink of
+destruction, by leaving his guns and baggage behind him, and leading
+his men by paths over mountains supposed to be impassable for any
+large body of men. He lost altogether 6000 men in this short campaign.
+This included 3600 prisoners either captured in action or left behind
+in the hospitals, and 1400 killed. The number of guns left behind was
+fifty-eight. The English had only 300 killed and wounded.
+
+Sir Arthur's plans for the invasion of Spain were not yet
+complete, and he accordingly halted his army to await supplies and
+reinforcements. During this time the young buglers had no opportunity
+of calling upon Major-General Hill. The transport supplied by the
+Spanish Government had failed grossly, and the troops were badly fed
+at a time when, taking long marches, they most required support. The
+first day after they halted the boys determined that they would, as
+soon as they were off duty, call upon General Hill. While parade was
+going on, however, they saw the general ride up to Colonel Tritton,
+and enter into conversation with him. The bugler, who was standing
+near, was ordered to sound the call for the officers to assemble in
+front; and when they did so, Colonel Tritton left the general's side
+and spoke a few words with them. There was a short conversation,
+and then the colonel rejoined the general's side, and the officers
+returned to their places. The colonel now rode forward to the center
+of the line, and said in loud tones, "Men, I have a piece of news to
+tell you which I think that you will be glad to hear. Upon my arrival
+at Lisbon I reported the gallant conduct of Tom and Peter Scudamore
+in rescuing one of their comrades when washed overboard in the Bay
+of Biscay. Captain Merivale, of the "Latona," also reported it, and
+General Hill, when he heard the circumstances, was also good enough to
+send home a report recommending them for promotion. He has received
+an answer from the Commander-in-Chief announcing that they are both
+granted commissions in this regiment as a reward for their act of
+distinguished gallantry. The regiment is dismissed."
+
+As the men fell out they gave a loud and general cheer, and Tom and
+Peter were surrounded by their comrades, who shook them by the hand,
+and congratulated them upon their promotion. The boys were too much
+surprised and affected to speak, and they had scarcely recovered from
+their bewilderment, when Carruthers came up to them, and led them
+to the colonel. Here General Hill first, and then all the officers,
+warmly shook hands with them. The boys were much touched by the warmth
+with which they were received, and were soon hurried off to the tents
+of the officers. Several of the ensigns were slight young men, and
+they insisted upon rigging the boys out in uniform, and the boys
+had the less scruple in accepting the kind offer, inasmuch as they
+expected every day to enter Spain, when the baggage would be cut down
+to the smallest possible proportion, and the officers as well as
+the men be obliged to leave almost everything behind them. Sam was
+delighted at the promotion of his friends, and asked to be appointed
+their servant, a request which was at once acceded to. The regiment
+had now been three months in Spain, and the boys had continued to
+work hard at Spanish, devoting several hours a day to its study, and
+talking it whenever they could find an opportunity--no difficult
+matter, as Portugal was full of Spanish who had crossed the frontier
+to avoid the hated yoke of the French.
+
+The delay in invading Spain was caused partly from want of
+transport, but more by the utter incapacity of the Spanish Junta or
+government, and by the arrogance and folly of Cuesta, the Spanish
+Commander-in-Chief, who was always proposing impracticable schemes to
+Wellington, and, inflated with Spanish pride and obstinacy, believed
+that his own worthless troops were fully a match for the French, and
+was jealous in the highest degree of the British general.
+
+At last, on the 27th of June, the British army advanced. Scarcely had
+they made a day's march, however, when the utter faithlessness of the
+Spaniards became manifest. The provisions and transport promised were
+not forthcoming, and from the very day of their advance the British
+were badly fed, and indeed often not fed at all; and so great were
+their sufferings during the campaign--sufferings caused by the
+heartlessness of the people whom they had come to deliver from a
+foreign yoke, that the British soldiers came to cherish a deep and
+bitter hatred against the Spanish; and it was this intense feeling of
+animosity which had no little to do with the cruel excesses of the
+English soldiery upon the capture of Burgos and San Sebastian.
+
+After many delays from these causes, the British army reached Oropesa
+upon the 20th July, and there formed a junction with Cuesta's army.
+Upon the 22d the allied armies moved forward, and upon the same
+day the Spaniards came in contact with the French, and should have
+inflicted a severe blow upon them, but the ignorance and timidity of
+the Spanish generals enabled the enemy to draw off and concentrate
+without loss.
+
+The British troops had now been for many days upon half rations, and
+Sir Arthur gave notice to the Junta, that unless his requisitions were
+complied with, he should retire from Spain. Cuesta, however, believing
+that the French were retreating in haste, pushed his army across the
+river Alberche, with the vain idea of defeating them, and entering
+Madrid in triumph. Sir Arthur, seeing the fatal consequences which
+would ensue, were the Spaniards attacked alone, laid aside his
+previously-formed resolution, and put his army in motion across
+the Alberche. The position of the allied armies was now most
+dangerous--far more so, indeed, than the English general supposed.
+Badly informed by the Spanish, he greatly underrated the enemy's
+forces. Taking advantage of the delay caused by the want of provisions
+and carriage, Soult, Victor, and Ney were marching their forces from
+various points, and concentrating to crush the invading army. Upon the
+26th the French met the Spanish army. General Zayas, who commanded
+the Spanish advance of 4000 infantry and 2000 cavalry, scarcely
+offered any resistance, his men broke and fled in disorder, and the
+panic would have spread to the whole Spanish army, had not General
+Albuquerque brought up 3000 more cavalry and held the French at
+bay, while Cuesta retreated in great disorder. The Spanish loss by
+dispersion and flight was no less than 4000 men, and the whole army
+would have been broken up had not General Sherbrooke advanced with his
+division, and placed it between the French and the flying Spaniards.
+
+The allies now recrossed the Alberche and took up a position to cover
+Talavera. Sir Arthur chose a strong defensive position, as it was
+evident that the Spanish were worse than useless in the open field.
+The Spaniards were placed with their right resting upon Talavera,
+their left upon a mound whereon a large field-redoubt was constructed.
+Their front was covered by a convent, by ditches, stone walls,
+breastworks, and felled trees; and thus, worthless as were the troops,
+they could scarcely be driven from a position almost impregnable.
+
+The line beyond the Spanish was continued by Campbell's division, next
+to which came that of Sherbrooke, its left extending to a steep hill.
+Mackenzie and Donkin had not yet fallen hack from the Alberche. Hill
+was in rear. The British troops, including the German legion, were
+19,000 strong, with thirty guns. The Spaniards had 33,000 men and
+seventy guns. The Spanish contingent could, however, be in no way
+relied upon, and were, indeed, never seriously engaged. The real
+battle was between the 19,000 British troops and 50,000 French.
+The French attacked the British outposts with great impetuosity,
+and Mackenzie and Donkin were driven in with a loss of 4000 men.
+The latter took up his position with his brigade on the hill on
+Sherbrooke's left; the former took post with Campbell's division, to
+which he belonged. The French cavalry now galloped up towards the
+portion of the line held by the Spanish, and discharged their pistols
+at them, whereupon 10,000 Spanish infantry and the whole of their
+artillery broke and fled in wild confusion. For miles they continued
+their flight, but in the evening the Spanish cavalry were sent round
+in pursuit, and drove some 4000 of these cowards back to their lines.
+Seeing the wild confusion which was raging on the allies' right,
+Victor resolved, although evening was at hand, to make a sudden dash
+upon the hill upon their left, which, held only by Donkin's brigade,
+was the key of the position. The hill was very steep upon the front,
+or French side, while towards the rear it sloped gradually. Ruffin's
+division was ordered to the attack, followed by Villette in support,
+while Lapisse was ordered to engage the German legion, which was on
+the left of Sherbrooke's division.
+
+Hill's division was lying down behind the hill when Ruffin's troops
+advanced to the attack. There was no expectation of an attack that
+evening, and the woods and increasing darkness covered the movements
+of the French troops. Weary and hungry, the English soldiers,
+disgusted at the inhuman neglect of the Spaniards, and furious
+at their cowardice, were chatting over the events of the day and
+discussing the chances, by no means bright, of the expected battle
+to-morrow. All that day they had had no food whatever save a small
+portion of grain, served out raw and unground. Tom and Peter had been
+chatting with the officers, who were grouped under a tree, when Sambo
+came up to them and beckoned them aside.
+
+"Look here, Massa Tom, here six eggs; tree for you, tree for Massa
+Peter."
+
+"Thank you, Sam, that is capital; but you know you will get into a row
+if you get caught taking things."
+
+"Me no take 'em, massa. Old hen give them to me."
+
+Tom laughed.
+
+"How was that, Sam?"
+
+"Well, Massa, me saw her sitting on nest. Me went up and said to her,
+'Give me some eggs, old girl.' She say 'Cluck.' I says, 'Cluck means
+yes, I suppose?' She say 'Cluck' again. Clear 'nuff that, so me take
+eggs, eat tree, bring six, young massa."
+
+"I am afraid, Sam," Tom said, laughing, "your story would hardly save
+you from the triangles, if you had been caught. However, as it is rude
+to return a present, of course you cannot take them back to the hen. I
+suppose they are raw?"
+
+"Yes, massa; no good make fire; make hole bofe ends, suck 'em."
+
+"All right, Sam; it is not the nicest way, but, under the
+circumstances, perhaps it is the best; at any rate, I am too hungry to
+wait till we can get a fire lighted."
+
+So saying, the boys sucked the raw eggs, and then joined the men,
+when, just as they did so, first a dropping rifle shot, and then a
+perfect roar of musketry broke out upon the hill above them. It needed
+no order to be given. The men fell into their places and prepared to
+climb the hill and assist Donkin's brigade, which was evidently unable
+alone to resist the attack. Knapsacks were thrown off, firelocks
+tightly grasped, and the regiment impatiently awaited orders to
+advance. None were more impatient than the colonel, who after a few
+minutes, seeing by the fire that the English were falling back, and
+that the French had gained the crest of the hill, waited no longer for
+orders, but gave the word for the regiment to advance. They were but
+half way up the hill when General Hill himself galloped down to meet
+them, and then turning, led the way beside Colonel Tritton.
+
+General Hill had had a narrow escape. Donkin had repulsed the French
+who attacked him in front, but his force was insufficient to guard the
+whole crest of the hill. Consequently, the enemy had come up round
+his flank, and were now in actual possession of the crest. General
+Hill, ignorant of this, had ridden with his brigade-major right
+into the midst of the French before he found out his mistake. His
+brigade-major, Fordyce, was killed, his own horse wounded, and his
+bridle seized by a French grenadier. He had, however, broken away, and
+had ridden off under a storm of bullets.
+
+With a cheer the Norfolk Rangers followed their gallant leader. They
+reached the crest, poured a tremendous volley into the enemy, and
+charged with the bayonet. The French, of whom but a small portion
+had as yet gained the crest, were unable to resist the impetuous
+onslaught, and at once gave way.
+
+The Rangers were now joined by the 48th and the 29th, so that these,
+with Donkin's brigade, formed a strong body of troops. The French,
+who had fallen back, now united with their main body, and the attack
+was renewed with all the force of Ruffin's division. The heavy mass
+pressed upwards, in spite of the destructive fire of the British, and
+were within twenty yards of the crest, when, with a hearty cheer, the
+English troops burst upon them with the bayonet, and the French again
+fell back, broken and disheartened.
+
+This ended the fighting on the 27th of July. Long lines of bivouac
+fires soon blazed upon either side. The wounded were carried down the
+hill to the field-hospital, which had been erected under its cover,
+and the men, eating their scanty supper, wrapped themselves in their
+great coats, and were soon asleep. The officers chatted for a short
+time longer, but as all were tired, and the next day was sure to be a
+severe one, they, too, soon lay down by their fire.
+
+When morning broke, it was seen that the enemy had massed a large
+force of artillery upon a hill just opposite to the one held by the
+English. Soon afterwards Ruffin's division, as before supported by
+Villette, advanced to the attack, covered by the tremendous fire from
+his artillery. The British had no adequate force of artillery to reply
+to the iron storm, and the balls swept through their lines, mowing
+down their ranks, and causing great loss. The regiments in reserve lay
+down to avoid the iron shower, while the Rangers and 48th prepared to
+resist the French when they came within fighting distance.
+
+As their men approached the summit of the hill, the French artillery
+was obliged to cease playing in that direction, and turned its
+attention to the British center, while a fierce musketry contest took
+place between the French and Hill and Donkin's men.
+
+The ground was rough, and the troops on both sides, broken up into
+small bodies, fought desperately. General Hill was wounded, and the
+British troops fell fast. The French, however, suffered even more,
+and, as Hill brought up his reserve, the English gained ground foot by
+foot, until they drove them again down the steep side of the hill. As
+the French retired, their artillery once more opened fire to cover
+their retreat.
+
+A pause now ensued; the French in this brief contest had lost 1400
+men, and the British had suffered severely. The French then held a
+council of war, and determined to attack along the whole line in
+force. Hours passed away; the English munched their corn, smoked their
+pipes, and watched the enemy scattered over the plain. The weather
+was very hot, and the men of both sides went down to a little stream
+which divided their positions, drank, and filled their water-bottles
+in perfect amity. Some of the officers, who spoke French conversed
+with the French officers, exchanged cigars for brandy, and joked and
+laughed as if they had been the best of friends.
+
+At one o'clock the French drums were heard to beat, and the men were
+soon formed in order. Tom and Peter stood with a group of officers on
+the brow of the hill. Nothing could be finer than the sight. Far away
+the view stretched over the country, thickly wooded, and with chateau
+and farm-houses scatted here and there. Through the trees the dense
+masses of the French could be seen, as they moved in columns towards
+the positions from which they were to attack. Upon an eminence,
+nearly opposite to their position, the boys could see a long line of
+the French artillery. Far away, to the right, rose the churches of
+Talavera, while behind the hill were the British and Spanish cavalry,
+ready to charge should the French endeavor to turn the British left by
+pushing round its foot. Fifty paces from the officers of the Norfolk
+Rangers sat Sir Arthur Wellesley, on horseback, watching attentively
+through a field-glass the movements of the enemy, and at a short
+distance behind him were his staff. The British troops were standing
+in easy order, a little behind the crest of the hill, so as to be
+sheltered from the artillery fire with which the French were sure to
+cover the advance of their column of attack.
+
+"This is a grand sight, Peter," Tom said, "but I wish they would
+begin; it makes one fidgety waiting for it."
+
+Scarcely had Tom spoken when, as if in answer to his wish, a series
+of jets of white smoke puffed out from the opposite hill, and two or
+three seconds later came the thunder of eighty guns, and the whizzing
+sound of as many balls. Instinctively the group drew back a pace, but
+it was not upon them that this tremendous fire was opened. It was
+directed against the right of the British line, and almost at the same
+moment a cloud of skirmishers appeared among the trees, followed by
+the dark columns of Sebastiani's division.
+
+Upon these the English guns at once opened fire; but rushing forward
+with their usual impetuosity, they cleared away the obstacles which
+had been raised across the British front, and charged with fury
+against the British position. Campbell's division, however, assisted
+by Mackenzie's brigade and two Spanish battalions, stood firm, and
+driving back the skirmishers, advanced in line, cheering loudly. The
+head of the French column withered away under their tremendous fire,
+and, pushing forward, they overlapped it, and drove them back with
+terrible loss, capturing ten guns. Then Campbell prudently recalled
+his men to their first position, and the British artillery, which had
+necessarily been silent while friend and foe were mingled together,
+opened furiously upon the French as they tried to re-form upon their
+supports. A Spanish cavalry regiment dashed down upon their flank, and
+they retired again in great disorder.
+
+Every incident of the fight could be seen from the British position on
+the hill, and the troops almost held their breath with excitement as
+the British lines clashed against the head of the French column, and a
+loud shout of triumph burst out spontaneously as the French broke and
+fled.
+
+But it was now the turn of the left. Already Villette's division,
+preceded by the Grenadiers and supported by Ruffin's division, was
+advancing, and the British cavalry were ordered to charge them. The
+ground was, however, quite unfit for cavalry. Colonel Arentschild, a
+very experienced officer, who commanded the German Hussars, drew up
+his regiment at the edge of a deep cleft which crossed their front,
+and refused to take his men to certain destruction. The 23d Dragoons,
+however, dashed into the ravine. Men and horses rolled over in all
+directions; still, they got across, and, charging furiously between
+the French infantry regiments, which poured in a terrible fire,
+fell upon a brigade of Chasseurs in their rear. Victor sent up his
+Polish lancers and Westphalian light horse to the assistance of the
+Chasseurs, who already outnumbered the 23d, and this gallant regiment
+was completely broken, the survivors escaping to the shelter of
+Bassecourt's Spanish division, which lay beyond the hill, having lost
+257 men and officers.
+
+Tom and Peter did not see this disastrous affair, for on the approach
+of the enemy's column they fell into their places in the ranks. It
+was, however, in vain that the French tried to gain the crest of the
+hill, their efforts at this point being indeed far more feeble than
+they had been either in the morning or upon the previous night. It was
+in the center that their great effort was made. Here Lapisse threw his
+division against that of Sherbrooke, and, covered by his own artillery
+and by the guns upon the hill, charged right up to the position. The
+British, however, repulsed them, and the guards, carried away by the
+excitement of the moment, followed them with reckless ardor. The
+French reserves of infantry and cavalry came up, the artillery plied
+the British with shot and shell, the fugitives rallied and again came
+to the attack, and the Guards fell back in confusion. The Germans next
+to them, severely pressed, began to waver, and for a time it seemed
+that the British, victorious upon both flanks, were yet to lose the
+battle by being broken in the center.
+
+Now, however, the 48th, which Sir Arthur had ordered down from the
+hill when he saw the rash advance of the Guards, was seen advancing
+in line through the disordered masses. Wheeling back, it allowed the
+retreating regiments to pass through it and then again formed and fell
+upon the flank of the victorious French column. The French paused in
+their advance, the Guards and Germans rallied and came back again to
+the fight, the shots of the British guns plowed lines in the column,
+the French wavered, and, as the British light cavalry trotted up with
+the intention of charging them, fell back, and drew off to their
+first position amidst shouts of victory along the whole length of the
+British line.
+
+Thus the battle ceased, each party occupying the ground it had held in
+the morning. The British loss in killed, wounded, and missing, in the
+two days' fighting, was 6200; that of the French 7400. Had the British
+been in a condition to have sallied from their position and pursued
+the retiring enemy, the victory would have had far greater results;
+but, exhausted and half-starved, the British were incapable of
+following up their advantage.
+
+The next morning at daybreak, the French army quitted its position,
+and, retiring across the Alberche, formed line of battle there, and
+awaited the attack, should the English take the offensive. This they
+were in no position to do, although in the course of the day Craufurd
+had come up with the 43d, 52d, and 95th Regiments. These three
+regiments had heard of the first day's fighting from the Spanish
+fugitives, and had marched with all speed to the assistance of their
+friends. They had, carrying their kit and ammunition, weighing from 50
+lb. to 60 lb., actually marched sixty-two miles in twenty-six hours in
+the hottest season of the year, one of the greatest feats recorded in
+military history.
+
+The Rangers had suffered heavily, and in the two days' fighting had
+lost thirty-eight killed and 109 wounded. Among the former were two
+officers, while several others were wounded. The Scudamores had,
+fortunately, both escaped without a scratch. The inhumanity of the
+Spaniards was now more markedly shown than ever. Although both in
+Cuesta's army, and in the town of Talavera provisions were abundant,
+yet the inhabitants carefully concealed them, while both the wounded
+and fighting men of the British army were in want. So great was the
+misery and indignation of the soldiers at this shameful treatment,
+from those for whom they were doing so much, that they would willingly
+have attacked the Spanish army and plundered the town; and from this
+period to the end of the war the British hated the Spanish with a deep
+and bitter hatred.
+
+Wellesley now received news that Soult had crossed the mountains
+through the pass of Banos, which had been left undefended by the
+Spanish, and was marching upon his rear. Believing that Soult had only
+13,000 men with him--whereas in fact, he had 50,000--Sir Arthur left
+the Spanish army at Talavera in charge of the hospitals, with 6000
+sick and wounded, and retraced his steps, with the intention of giving
+battle to this new enemy.
+
+Upon the 3d, however, he learned the real strength of Soult's army,
+and upon the same day heard that General Cuesta had basely retreated
+from Talavera, without having provided any transport whatever,
+according to his promise, for the British sick and wounded. All of
+these who had strength to crawl rejoined the British army, but 1500,
+who were unable to walk, were left behind, and fell into the hands
+of the French, by whom they were treated with far greater kindness
+and attention than they had been by the Spanish. Upon the 4th Cuesta
+joined Sir Arthur, and at six o'clock next morning the only possible
+course for safety was adopted. Victor was advancing from Talavera,
+Soult was hurrying from Placentia to cut off the retreat of the
+British, and accordingly Sir Arthur fell back upon Arzobispo, on the
+Tagus.
+
+The artillery, the baggage and wounded, first crossed the bridge, and
+at two o'clock the entire army was across. So great was the hunger of
+the men that a herd of swine happening to be seen close to the line
+of march, the soldiers ran upon them, shot and bayoneted them, and
+devoured them raw. Taking up a strong position, guarding the bridges
+of the Tagus, the British army remained quiet until the end of August.
+During this time they became so weakened by starvation that they could
+scarcely walk; a great portion of the cavalry horses, and nearly all
+the baggage animals died of hunger, and at last, Sir Arthur, finding
+that no remonstrances availed with the Junta, fell back again to the
+Portuguese frontier by slow marches, for the army was so utterly
+enfeebled that it resembled a vast body of invalids, rather than an
+army of unbeaten soldiers.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+A PAUSE IN OPERATIONS.
+
+
+Talavera was fought in July, 1809, and for four months longer Sir
+Arthur Wellesley kept his troops on the Spanish frontier, where his
+presence served as a check against any invasion, even by a very
+formidable army, of Portugal. After the utter bad faith and cowardice
+shown by the Spanish, the great commander was determined never again
+to trust in their promises, or to undertake any movement dependent
+for success upon their co-operation. The Junta then declared that
+the Spaniards would alone and unaided sweep the French beyond the
+Pyrenees, and a Spanish army of 45,000 infantry, 7000 cavalry, and 60
+guns advanced in November against Madrid. It was met by a French army
+of 24,000 infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 50 guns. The battle began at
+eleven in the morning, and by three the French, with a loss of only
+1700 killed and wounded, had utterly routed the Spanish, with a loss
+of 5000 killed and wounded, 45 guns, and 26,000 prisoners! After this
+signal and disgraceful defeat, Lord Wellington--for he had now been
+raised to the peerage--felt that nothing whatever could be done at
+present in Spain, and so fell back into Portugal, where for many
+months he occupied himself in preparing to meet the storm which would,
+he knew, fall ere long upon that country. The Portuguese authorities
+were as incapable, as untrustworthy, and as intractable as were those
+of Spain; but here, happily, Lord Wellington had more power. England
+was paying large subsidies towards keeping up the Portuguese army,
+which was commanded by Lord Beresford, having under him many British
+officers. The Portuguese troops were hardy, obedient, and far braver
+than the Spaniards; but difficulties often arose in keeping the army
+together, because the Portuguese Government, although England was
+paying the principal expenses of the army, yet starved their soldiers,
+and often kept them for months without pay. It was only by the
+strongest remonstrances, and by the oft-repeated threat that he would
+embark the British troops, and abandon Portugal altogether, unless
+these and other abuses were done away with, that Lord Wellington
+succeeded in reducing this incapable and insolent Government to
+reason.
+
+Reinforcements arrived but slowly from England, for a considerable
+portion of the available troops of England were frittered away in
+holding Cadiz and in an expedition to Sicily. In these two places some
+25,000 English troops were wasted--a force, which, had it been added
+to Wellington's army, would have enabled him to take the field against
+the French, instead of being forced to remain in Portugal for upwards
+of a year without discharging a single shot against the enemy. Tom and
+Peter Scudamore, however, were not destined to remain inactive all
+these weary months. One day in November, just before the army fell
+back from the Spanish frontier, General Hill was dining at mess with
+the regiment; for, rough as was the accommodation, the officers had
+succeeded in establishing a general mess. The conversation turned upon
+the difficulty of discovering what force the various French generals
+had at their disposal, the reports received by the Commander-in-Chief
+being often ridiculously incorrect. There was also an immense
+difficulty in communicating with the guerilla chiefs who, almost
+always beaten when they came to blows with any considerable bodies
+of the French, yet managed to harass them terribly by cutting off
+convoys, falling upon small parties, and attacking outposts and bands
+of foragers. Knowing every mountain pass and road, these men could,
+if they would, keep Lord Wellington informed of every considerable
+movement of the enemy, and might in return receive instruction for
+acting, when required, in concert before the communication of an
+advancing army, or might create a diversion by uniting their bands,
+and threatening some important post.
+
+The next day the boys went to Colonel Tritton's quarters, and,
+referring to the conversation of the day before, said that they were
+willing to carry any messages that the general might require sent, and
+to obtain any information wanted.
+
+"Nonsense, boys, you would be hung as spies before you had been gone a
+week."
+
+"I don't think so, sir," Tom said; "we have had very little to do
+during the six months we have been out here except to learn the
+language of the country, and I think now we could pass very well as
+Spanish boys. Besides, who would suspect boys? We are quite ready to
+chance detection if we can be allowed to go."
+
+"I don't like it, boys; you are too young. Well, if not too young," he
+said, in answer to a movement of Tom's to speak, "we all like you too
+well to run the risk of hearing you have been hung like a couple of
+young puppies."
+
+"You are very kind, colonel; but you know you promised to give us a
+chance if you could, and having a chance of course means having extra
+danger; but I really don't think that there would be any great danger
+in it."
+
+"Well, boys," Colonel Tritton said, after a few moments' thought, "I
+do not feel justified in refusing your application, and will mention
+it to General Hill. There are very few officers in the army who
+speak Spanish fluently, and you being boys would, as you say, avert
+suspicion. But I tell you fairly that I hope General Hill will at once
+refuse to entertain the idea."
+
+"Thank you, sir," the boys said. "Of course that is all we could ask
+you to do."
+
+The next day, after parade was over, Colonel Tritton walked on
+to General Hill's quarters at a sort of half farm-house, half
+country-seat, a short distance from the village, round which the
+Rangers were encamped. As he came up to the house, General Hill came
+out from his door talking to a Spanish officer, who had the day before
+brought some despatches from one of the Spanish generals to Lord
+Wellington.
+
+Colonel Tritton joined them, and they stood talking together upon the
+state of affairs in Spain, and of the advance of the Spanish army on
+Madrid, which was then just taking place. As they did so two very
+ragged, unkempt Spanish boys, shoeless and wretched-looking, limped
+up, and began to beg. General Hill shook his head, and the Spaniard
+impatiently motioned them away.
+
+"Por Dios," one whined; "give us something; we are starving. The
+French have burnt down our houses, and killed our fathers and
+mothers--we are starving. 'Por l'amor de Dios!'"
+
+"What's the poor little beggar say?" General Hill asked the Spaniard.
+
+"The usual story--house burnt, father and mother killed, starving. I
+dare say it's all a lie."
+
+"Where did you live?" he asked in Spanish.
+
+"In the village of Oros, near Valencia."
+
+"And how did you come here?"
+
+"The French burnt the village because the guerillas had killed a party
+of theirs in it, and they killed all the people, and then carried off
+the mules and horses, and took us to drive some of them. That was four
+months ago. We had to drive till the other day at Tamanes, when our
+men beat the French; our mules were taken, and, as they did not want
+us as drivers we had nothing to do but to come on in hopes that the
+kind English would give us food."
+
+The Spanish officer translated what the boy said, and General Hill
+remarked, "Yes, that was a brilliant affair of the Duke del Pasque's.
+Here," he called to an orderly, "give these boys some bread. I will
+see what can be done for them afterwards. I am afraid nothing. Poor
+little wretches! their story is a very common one."
+
+The boys received the bread with a great show of thankfulness, and,
+sitting down by the roadside, began to munch it with great appetite.
+The Spanish officer now mounted his horse and rode off, while General
+Hill and Colonel Tritton remained standing where he had left them.
+Colonel Tritton then told General Hill of the Scudamores' request to
+be allowed to penetrate into Spain as spies or with dispatches.
+
+"The young pickles!" General Hill laughed. "What will they be wanting
+to do next? Pooh, pooh! it would be out of the question."
+
+"I believe they do really speak Spanish exceedingly well." Colonel
+Tritton said. "They generally act as interpreters for us, and none of
+the officers speak Spanish with anything like the same fluency."
+
+"As far as the language goes, they might get on, perhaps," General
+Hill said; "but they look as thorough English boys as you could see.
+They would be detected at once."
+
+"Yes," Colonel Tritton said, "they are both thorough English boys; I
+should know them anywhere. What a contrast to the miserable, limping,
+hang-dog lads there! Poor little chaps! Why, upon my word, I believe
+the fellows are laughing."
+
+General Hill looked sharply at them, and, as he looked from one to the
+other, he said sarcastically, "Poor little chaps indeed! You said that
+very naturally, Tritton. It really does you credit as an actor."
+
+Colonel Tritton looked at the general with an expression of blank
+astonishment.
+
+"What," said the general, "were you really taken in too"
+
+"Taken in?" repeated Colonel Tritton vaguely.
+
+"Don't you see, Tritton, those poor little chaps you are pitying so
+are those two young scamps we were talking about."
+
+Colonel Tritton stared in astonishment at the boys, and then, as he
+recognized them, he joined the general in a shout of laughter, while
+the two boys stood up and saluted with an attempt at gravity which was
+only partially successful, so amused were they at the astonishment of
+their colonel, as well as pleased at the success of their disguise.
+
+Just at this moment there was a sound of tramping horses, and directly
+afterwards an officer rode up, followed by four or five others, and
+at a short distance in the rear by an escort of orderlies. The boys
+needed not the exclamation of General Hill, "Here is Wellington." They
+knew who the rider was, who checked his horse as he reached the gate,
+for they had often seen him as he rode through the camp. A slight man,
+very careful and neat in his dress, with an aquiline nose and piercing
+eyes. Peter was rising as he drew up his horse, when Tom said, "Don't
+get up, Peter; go on with your bread. It would look absurd for us
+to salute now, and would draw attention to us," he went on, as Lord
+Wellington dismounted, threw the bridle off his horse to an orderly,
+and saying to General Hill, "I wanted to see you; come in." Colonel
+Tritton went into the house, followed by the two officers. "We'll
+stop here till they come out again, Peter. Perhaps General Hill may
+speak to him about us. At any rate, we will keep up our disguise till
+they've gone. Let us play at odd and even." It was a game of which
+Spanish boys are very fond, and they may be seen in any of the Spanish
+towns sitting by the houses on door-steps in the sun playing. It was
+half an hour before the general came out again. He was about to mount
+his horse, when he glanced at the boys, who were sitting against the
+wall a few paces off, seemingly absorbed in their play, and paying no
+attention whatever to him. Suddenly he changed his mind, dropped his
+rein, and walked up to them.
+
+"What are you playing for?" he asked abruptly in Spanish.
+
+"Reals, senor," Tom said looking up, but not moving.
+
+"You are poor; how can you pay?" asked the general.
+
+"Oh! we don't pay," Tom laughed. "We keep count. I owe him twelve
+thousand now. I will pay him when I get rich. He can wait." And he
+held out his closed hand again for Peter to guess the number of stones
+it contained.
+
+"Come inside," Lord Wellington said abruptly, and, turning led the way
+into the house again, followed by General Hill, Colonel Tritton, and
+the two boys.
+
+"It is not often I change my mind," he said to General Hill; "but for
+once I do so now. When you told me about these lads, I refused to
+employ them on such dangerous service, even when you told me of the
+courage and coolness which they exhibited on the voyage. Now I have
+tried them myself, I see that they will do. If they could keep up
+their disguise when I spoke to them suddenly, and answer without
+hesitation or any excitement which could have shown that they were
+not what they pretended to be, they can do so with a French general.
+I am no judge of the purity of their Spanish; but as you tell me they
+deceived a Spanish officer just now, they will be able to pass with
+Frenchmen. Now, lads," he went on turning to them, "you have thought
+over, of course, the risks you are going to run, and are prepared, if
+detected, to be hung like dogs." The boys bowed.
+
+"You will receive detailed instructions through Colonel Tritton,
+together with such despatches as I may wish sent. They will be written
+as small as possible. You will not go for a week; devote all your time
+to studying the map. The largest size we have shall be sent to your
+colonel this afternoon. Of course you will be supplied with money, and
+for anything you can think of likely to assist you, speak to Colonel
+Tritton. You are beginning well, young sirs. If you like, you ought to
+made a noise in the world. Now, Hill, I must be off."
+
+And the general left the room with the officers, while the boys were
+stammering out their thanks.
+
+"Where did you dress up, boys?" Colonel Tritton asked them after the
+general had ridden off. "You did not come out from camp like this I
+hope?"
+
+"No, colonel; we changed in that little wood there."
+
+"What have you colored your skins with?"
+
+"We got some iodine from the doctor, sir, and mixed it with water till
+it was just thick enough to tinge our skin. It will wash pretty well
+off with plenty of scrubbing, but we mean to use walnut juice when we
+start; it lasts much longer, and is a better brown."
+
+"I am not sure, boys, that you had not better leave your faces alone,
+they and your hands are so sunburnt that you would pass well enough,
+though you must dye your arms and legs. Fortunately, your hair is
+pretty dark, for you can't well carry dye. Think well over all these
+things, for your lives may depend on some trifle of this kind. I shall
+see you at mess."
+
+So saying, Colonel Tritton walked on, leaving the boys to follow at
+their leisure. Just as they were about to turn off to make for the
+woods they saw a soldier coming along the road.
+
+"That's Sam, if I am not mistaken, Peter, we will have some fun with
+him. We can trust him to say nothing in the regiment about meeting us
+like this."
+
+The two boys accordingly sat down by a low wall by the roadside, and
+as Sam came up talked away to each other in Spanish. He passed without
+paying any attention to them. After he had gone a few yards, Tom said
+in a deep, loud voice, "Sambo." The black halted suddenly, and turned
+round. First he looked angrily at the boys, then he went to the side
+of the road and looked over the wall. Then with a very perplexed air
+he looked up and down the road.
+
+"Who dat have impudence to call dis colored gentleman Sambo," he said
+to himself. "Some fellow did, dat for sartin, not dose little Spanish
+trash, dey not know Sam's name, some rascal in regiment; he's hid
+somewhere. I pound him to squash when I find him."
+
+Muttering thus he turned to proceed on his way, but before he had gone
+twenty yards, he again heard a deep shout. "Here, you, Sambo."
+
+The black jumped as if he was shot, "My golly," he exclaimed, and then
+walked back to the boys, who were talking together, shook his head
+and again looked over the wall. Then he stooped down to the boys, and
+shook his fist in their faces, "You little debils, you call Sambo, I
+pound you to squash." The boys both leapt to their feet with an air of
+intense surprise and alarm, and began to cry out in Spanish.
+
+"No, can't be you," Sam said, "dis chile must be witched, no place for
+men to hide, sartin not dem boys. Stone wall can't call Sambo all by
+self, Sam's going out of mind. Oh! Lor, dis berry bad affair," and Sam
+sat down by the roadside with a face of such perfect bewilderment and
+dismay that the boys could stand it no longer, but went off together
+into a scream of laughter, which caused Sam to jump to his feet again.
+"What you larf for, what you larf for, you little rascals, you play
+trick, eh? you call Sambo, who taught you dat name?" and he seized the
+two boys and shook them furiously.
+
+"Oh! Sam, Sam, you will kill us with laughing," Tom got out at last.
+"Do leave go, man, or we shall choke," and as Sam, astonished, loosed
+his hold, the boys sat down and laughed till their sides ached.
+
+"Golly," exclaimed the negro, as he looked at them, "Dose boys again.
+What on earth you do, Massa Tom, Massa Peter, in dose ragged close,
+what you dress up like two beggars for? Lor! how you take in dis
+chile, me tink you little Spanish trash, sure enuff." It was some time
+before the boys could compose themselves, and then Tom made Sam sit
+close by his side.
+
+"Look here, Sam, this isn't a joke, this is a serious business and
+before I tell you anything about it, you must promise to keep the
+secret strictly, as it would do us a great deal of harm if it was
+known." Sam declared at once that if they tore him to pieces with wild
+horses he would say nothing. Tom then explained the whole thing to him
+and Sam at once declared that he would go too.
+
+"Quite impossible, Sam. You do not speak a word of Spanish and
+although at any of the seaport towns you could pass as a runaway
+sailor, there could be no possible reason for your wandering about the
+country with two Spanish boys."
+
+Sam thought for some time. "Now dat berry unlucky Massa Tom, dat Sam
+play big drum. Big drum fine music, but big drum not go well by self.
+If Sam had played fiddle, Sam could go, but Sam couldn't go nohow with
+big drum."
+
+"I should think not, Sam, with the name of the regiment painted on it.
+No, no, you must stay behind. There won't be any fighting now till the
+spring, and by that time we shall be back with the regiment."
+
+"But what you do without Sam? who black Massa's boots? who brush his
+clothes?"
+
+Tom laughed. "These clothes would fall all to pieces, if they were
+brushed much, Sam, and at present we have no boots to be blacked."
+
+"Where you get dose clothes, Massa Tom," Sam asked, examining with
+great disgust the rags the boys had on.
+
+"We bought some peasant's clothes about our size, and the first beggar
+boys we saw we offered to exchange. You should have seen their faces
+of astonishment. When we got the clothes we made them into a bundle,
+and took them to the bakehouse, and got the baker to put them into
+the oven for a few hours to kill anything there might be in them.
+Now, Sam, it is time for us to be going. It will take us an hour's
+scrubbing to get the color off us. Be sure you keep our secret."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+WITH THE GUERILLAS.
+
+
+It was on a fine morning at the end of March that a cortege of
+muleteers and mules left the little town of Alonqua. It was now four
+months since the Scudamores left the army, and in the intervening time
+they had tramped through a large portion of Spain. They had carried
+with them only a dozen or so little despatches done up in tiny rolls
+of the length and about the thickness of a bodkin, These were sewn
+inside the lining of their coats, in the middle of the cloth where
+it was doubled in at the seams, so that, even were the clothes to be
+examined carefully and felt all over, the chances of detection were
+slight indeed. They had each, on starting, half a dozen pieces of
+Spanish gold coin sewn between the thicknesses of leather of the soles
+of each of their shoes, for they did not start in the beggar clothes
+in which they had first disguised themselves. Their clothes were,
+indeed, worn and somewhat patched, but were of stout material, and
+they wore shoes, but no stockings. They had, indeed, the appearance of
+Spanish boys of the peasant class. The weather in the north of Spain
+is often very cold in winter, and the boys felt that, with rags and
+bare feet, they should suffer severely. All that they had to say and
+do had been learned by heart. The names and addresses of the agents
+of the British Government at every town had been laboriously learned
+before starting, and, as Peter said ruefully, it was worse than a
+dozen Greek impositions.
+
+At each place of any importance they would find the person to whom
+they were instructed to apply, would accost him with some password,
+and would be put up by him while they remained there. When they had
+gained the intelligence they required--of the number of French troops
+in the place and its neighborhood, a knowledge always obtained by
+going round, counting the men on parade, or, in the case of small
+villages, finding out easily enough from a peasant the number,
+quartered there, they would write a report on the number the
+intentions as far as they could learn them, the amount of food
+in store, and the sentiments of the population, would enclose
+the despatch in a goose-quill and give it to their host, who was
+responsible for forwarding it.
+
+In a great number of cases, indeed, the man to whom they were
+accredited was a muleteer. These men hated the French with a hatred
+even more deep and deadly than that of other Spaniards, for, in
+addition to the national causes of hatred, their mules were constantly
+being requisitioned or seized by the troops and they themselves forced
+to accompany the army for long distances at a nominal rate of pay for
+themselves and their animals. Then, too, they were in close connection
+with the guerillas, for whom they carried goods up into the mountains
+from the towns, and when the chance came would leave their animals in
+the mountains and join in cutting off an enemy's convoy. They acted as
+messengers and spies too, and took their friends in the hills early
+news of intended movements of the enemy. Many a day had the boys
+traveled in the company of these muleteers, merry, careless fellows,
+singing and talking to their mules, apparently the best-natured of
+men, until something would be said which would recall the hated foe,
+and then their black eyes would flash, their fingers clutch their
+knife-handles, and they would pour out long strings of deep Spanish
+oaths. Great was the surprise of these men on receiving the password
+from two boys, but they never hesitated an instant in taking them in,
+in giving them hospitality as long as they remained, and in either
+accompanying them to the next town, or handing them over to the charge
+of some comrade going in that direction. Not even to them did the
+Scudamores ever betray that they were not what they were taken to be,
+two Spanish boys employed by the English commander as messengers.
+Often they were questioned how the English had come to entrust
+important communications to two boys, and their reply always was that
+their father and mother had fled to Portugal from the French, and were
+living there near the English lines, and that they had offered their
+lives in case of their sons' treachery.
+
+This system of hostages seemed probable enough to their questioners,
+and if the boys' fare was rather harder, and their treatment more
+unceremonious than it would have been had they said that they were
+British officers in disguise, they ran far less risk of detection
+from an accidental word or sign. Indeed it would have been next to
+impossible for them, had they desired it, to convince any one of their
+identity. There was no fear now of their accent betraying them. Since
+they had left the army they had never, even when alone together,
+spoken in English. They made the rule and kept to it for two reasons,
+the one being that they found that if they did not get into this habit
+of always speaking Spanish, they might inadvertently address each
+other in English, and thus betray themselves; the second, that they
+wanted to learn to speak absolutely like natives. This they had in the
+four months thoroughly learned to do. At first their pronunciation
+and occasional mistakes excited curiosity when asked questions as
+to the part of Spain from which they had come, but their constant
+communication with their muleteer friends had quite removed this, and
+for the last two months not one person had doubted that they were not
+only Spanish, but that they came from the northern provinces.
+
+Hitherto they had journeyed principally between large towns and over
+country held by the French, but that part of their work was finished;
+they had accurately computed the number of the army with which Massena
+was to advance shortly to besiege Ciudad Rodrigo, and they had now to
+carry the despatches to the guerilla leaders. Hitherto they had not in
+a single instance excited suspicion. Not a Frenchman had asked them
+a question, and no adventure of anything like an exciting nature had
+taken place. They were now, however, entering into a country entirely
+different from that which they had hitherto traversed. The northeast
+of Spain is wild and mountainous, and offers immense natural
+facilities for irregular warfare. Through the various passes of the
+Pyrenees lead all the roads from France, whether to Vittoria on the
+great road to Madrid, or through Navarre to Catalonia. Here and there
+fortified towns still held out against the French, and the town of
+Gerona, in Catalonia, had only fallen after a six months' regular
+siege, and a desperate defense which fully rivals that of Saragossa.
+Is it not a little singular that the Spaniards, who in the open field
+were, with a few remarkable exceptions, absolutely contemptible, yet
+frequently defended towns with wonderful fortitude, courage, and
+desperation. It may, indeed, be said that in every siege where the
+Spaniards were commanded by brave and resolute chiefs they behaved
+admirably. This great range of hill country was the stronghold of the
+guerillas, and every convoy from France had to be protected by a large
+force, and even then often suffered greatly from the harassing attacks
+of their active enemies.
+
+The bands of the guerilla chiefs differed greatly in strength, varying
+from merely ten or a dozen men to three or four thousand, and indeed
+each band varied continually. The men, when not required, would
+scatter to their homes, cultivate their little patches of ground, and
+throw down the spade and take up the rifle again when they heard of a
+convoy to cut off, or an invading column to beat back. The bands, too,
+would vary in proportion to the renown of their chiefs. An energetic
+man, who, at the head of a handful, had performed some daring feats,
+would find himself a week afterwards the leader of many hundreds,
+while a chief who was slow and dilatory would find his band melt away
+like snow in summer.
+
+The character of the warfare depended much upon the character of the
+French generals. A few of these kept the troops under their command
+sternly in hand, would permit no plundering, and insisted upon their
+fair treatment of the Spaniards. These in turn wanted nothing better
+than to remain quietly in their homes, and the guerilla bands would
+melt away to nothing. Other generals, furious at the savage nature
+of the warfare, and the incessant toil and loss entailed upon their
+troops, allowed the latter to do as they pleased, and burning houses
+and dead bodies marked their course. Then the peasantry, now turned
+guerillas, retaliated as savagely, giving no quarter, sacrificing all
+prisoners, and putting the wounded to death, sometimes with torture.
+On both sides horrible atrocities were committed.
+
+The guerillas were armed partly with rifles and carbines, partly with
+muskets landed on the coast by the British Government, who also, from
+time to time, sent powder and money to assist them to continue their
+resistance to the French. Although nowhere really formidable, yet,
+being scattered over a great extent of country, these bands occupied
+very large bodies of French troops, who would otherwise have
+been disposable for general operations in the field. The English
+commander-in-chief had, of course, no shadow of authority over the
+guerillas, or, indeed, over any of the Spanish troops, and his
+communication to them simply asked what arms and ammunition they
+required, and begged them to send him a list of the number of men they
+could each throw on the French communications and lines of retreat in
+case he should find himself in a position to make a general advance
+against them. He also recommended most strongly the bearers of the
+despatch to their care. It was to the chief known as Nunez that they
+were now bound. The mule train was nominally destined for Vittoria, to
+which town the leader had got a pass, specifying the number of mules
+and the nature of the goods they carried, from the French commandant
+at Alonqua, for no one was allowed to take the goods about the country
+without a pass, in order to prevent supplies being forwarded to the
+mountains. This pass, however, only mentioned twelve mules with four
+drivers, and this was the number which started from Alonqua. Another
+score of mules, however, joined them at a short distance from the town
+where a by-road turned off. Some of these had gone out from the town
+unloaded, as if taken out to graze, others had not entered the town,
+but had come direct from the sea-coast by by-paths with powder, and
+had been awaiting the departure of Garcias, the name of the leader of
+the party. They had eight men with them, all armed to the teeth.
+
+"Is it all right, Garcias?"
+
+"All right," the leader said; "they have sent out their squadrons on
+the other road, so I think we are safe for to-day."
+
+"What boys have you got there with you?"
+
+"They have business with Nunez; letter from the coast."
+
+The cavalcade was now in motion again, and wound gradually up into the
+hills. Presently they came to a point where four roads met. A clump of
+trees grew hard by, and the boys gave a start of horror at seeing the
+bodies of six French soldiers swinging from them. "Ay, that's Nunez's
+work, I expect," Garcias said coolly. "There were three of his men
+swinging there last week, so as a lesson he has hung up six of the
+French. He is a rough boy to play with, is Nunez."
+
+At sunset the party slept in a small farm, and at daybreak continued
+their journey. They were now in the heart of the mountains, and their
+path lay sometimes up deep ravines, sometimes along rocky ledges.
+At last, about midday, they entered a valley in which stood a small
+village. "That's Nunez's head-quarters to-day," Garcias said;
+"to-morrow he may be no one knows where."
+
+"But does he have to sally out by the wretched road by which we have
+come?" Tom asked.
+
+"No, no," Garcias replied; "he would not catch much prey that way.
+There are three other ways out of the valley. That winding path you
+see there leads up to Santona. That road on the other side leads out
+on to the plain, and thence to Vittoria; while the footpath over the
+brow opposite leads right down into the wide valley through which the
+main north road runs. So you see this is a handy spot. From that brow
+we can see the convoys going to and from France, and can pour down
+upon them if they are weak; while, if a column is sent in search of
+us, we can vanish away long before they can catch us. Nunez does not
+use the direct road over the brow for his attack, but follows the
+Santona or Vittoria road for a while, and then makes a swoop round. He
+does not want to bring the French up to this village, for his family
+and the families of many of the men live here."
+
+As they approached the village, they found that there was a good deal
+of bustle going on. Armed men were coming out of the cottages, and
+gathering in a group round a rough stone cross, which stood in the
+center of a sort of green. "We are just in time," Garcias said; "Nunez
+is starting on some expedition or other."
+
+When they reached the spot there were nearly two hundred men
+assembled. They greeted Garcias with shouts of welcome as he arrived.
+"Ah, ah! Garcias, just in time. Our last skin of wine was emptied last
+night; we will bring some more up to-morrow; but if you had not come
+we should have had to start thirsty, and that's unlucky besides being
+unpleasant."
+
+"Where is Nunez!" Garcias asked.
+
+"Here he comes," was the reply; and the boys turning saw a figure
+approaching, which by no means answered to the expectation of the
+celebrated guerilla chief. He was small and almost humpbodied, but
+very broad. His head seemed too large for his body, and a pair of
+fierce eyes gleamed out from beneath his shaggy eyebrows. His mustache
+was thin and bristly and his month wide, but with thin lips. The boys
+could understand the reputation for cruelty and mercilessness which
+attached to this sinister-looking figure, but there was none of the
+savage power which they had expected to see in so celebrated a leader.
+
+"Any news, Garcias?" he asked shortly, as he came up.
+
+"None, captain, except that these boys have brought some despatches
+for you from the English Lord."
+
+Nunez looked sharply at them, and held out his hand without speaking.
+Tom gave him the little quill.
+
+The guerilla opened it, read the contents, and, saying briefly, "An
+answer to-morrow," strode on to his men, and in a few minutes they
+were defiling out at the end of the valley.
+
+"That hardly seems a strong enough body to attack a French convoy,
+Garcias," Tom remarked.
+
+"No, it would not be, but there is only a part of his band here; the
+rest will join him at some place agreed on--perhaps ten miles from
+here. I believe he has about thousand men under his orders. Now come
+along; we shall be none the worse for dinner," and, leaving his men to
+unload the mules, he led the way into the little posada, or inn.
+
+"Ah! Mother Morena," he said to an old woman who was crouching near a
+blazing wood fire, "warming yourself as usual; it's well you've a good
+fire, for you will be able to get us some dinner all the more quickly.
+Twelve of us altogether, and all as hungry as wolves."
+
+"Ah!" exclaimed the old woman crossly; "it seems as if I were never to
+have an hour's quiet, just as all that roaring, greedy lot, with their
+Mother Morena here and Mother Morena there, and their grumbling at
+the olla, and their curses and their quarrels, are off, and I think I
+am going to have a quiet afternoon, then you come in with your twelve
+hungry wolves."
+
+"Ah! mother, but wolves don't pay, and we do, you see."
+
+The frugal supper over, the boys laid down on the benches, and were
+soon asleep. The next day passed slowly, for the band were not
+expected to return until late at night--perhaps not until the next
+morning, as the pass where the attack would be made was some fifteen
+miles off, and the convoy might not pass there until late in the
+afternoon. The boys soon made friends with some of the women and
+children of the place, to whom they told stories of the great cities
+of the plain, and of the great water which washed the shores of Spain.
+The greater portion of the Spanish peasantry are incredibly ignorant,
+and very few of the inhabitants of this village had ever gone beyond
+the mountains. Walking about in the village, but apparently mixing but
+very little in the games of the other children, were two little girls,
+whose gay dress of rich silk seemed strangely out of place in such a
+spot.
+
+Tom asked one of the women who they were, and she replied, with a toss
+of the head, "They are the captain's children. The last time the band
+went out they found among the baggage and brought up here, the dresses
+of the children of some fine lady, and the captain kept them all as
+part of his share, just as if there were no children in the village
+whom it would become a great deal better than those stuck-up little
+things. Not," she said, softening a little, "that they were not nice
+enough before they got these things; but since they came their heads
+have been quite turned by the finery and they are almost too grand to
+speak to their old playfellows."
+
+"Is their mother alive?"
+
+"No, poor thing, she was killed by the French when the village she
+lived in was burned by them, because some of them were found hung in
+the neighborhood. The captain was away at the time and the children
+were out in the woods. When he came back he found them crying by the
+side of their mother's body, in the middle of the burning village. So
+then he took to the mountains, and he never spares a Frenchman who
+falls into his hands. He has suffered, of course, but he brought it
+upon himself, for he had a hand in hanging the French soldiers, and
+now he is a devil. It will be bad for us all; for some day, when the
+French are not busy with other things, they will rout us out here, and
+then who can blame them if they pay us for all the captain's deeds?
+Ah! me, they are terrible times, and Father Predo says he thinks the
+end of the world must be very near. I hope it will come before the
+French have time to hunt us down."
+
+The boys had a hard struggle not to smile, but the woman spoke so
+earnestly and seriously, that they could only shake their heads in
+grave commiseration for her trouble; and then Tom asked, "Is the
+captain very fond of the children?"
+
+"He worships them," the woman said; "he has no heart and no pity for
+others. He thinks no more of blood than I do of water; but he is as
+tender as a woman with them. One of them was ill the other day--a mere
+nothing, a little fever--and he sat by her bedside for eight days
+without ever lying down."
+
+"I suppose," Tom said, "they never bring prisoners up here?"
+
+"Yes, they do," the woman said; "not common soldiers; they kill them
+at once; but sometimes officers, if they want to exchange them for
+some of ours who may have been taken, or if they think they are likely
+to get a high ransom for them. But there, it always comes to the same
+thing; there, where you see that mound on the hillside, that's where
+they are. They blindfold them on their way up here, lest they might
+find their way back after all. Only one or two have ever gone down
+again. I wish they would finish with them all down below; they are
+devils and heretics these French; but I don't care about seeing them
+killed. Many of us do, though, and we have not many diversions up
+here, so I suppose it's all for the best."
+
+"I wish that fellow had given us our answer before he went away,"
+Tom said to Peter when they were alone. "I hope he won't bring any
+prisoners up here; these massacres are frightful, and one side seems
+as bad as the other. Well, in another month we shall have finished
+with all this work, and be making for the frontier again. Shan't I be
+glad when we catch sight of the first red-coats!"
+
+In the middle of the night the boys were roused by a general bustle,
+and found that a messenger had just arrived, saying that the
+expedition had been successful, that a portion of the enemy had been
+cut off, their rear-guard destroyed, and that the whole band would be
+up soon after daylight. The village was astir early, but it was not
+until nine o'clock that the guerilla band arrived. The boys saw at a
+glance that they were stronger in numbers than when they started, and
+that with them were some twenty or thirty baggage animals.
+
+The women flocked out to meet them with shrill cries of welcome. The
+booty taken was not of any great value in money, but was more valuable
+than gold to the guerillas.
+
+Each one of the band carried, in addition to his own piece, a new
+French musket, while in the barrels on the mules were powder and ball;
+there were bales of cloth, and some cases of brandy and champagne, and
+a few boxes and portmanteaus of officers' baggage. In the rear of all,
+under a strong guard, were two French officers, both wounded, a lady
+and a child of some seven or eight years old.
+
+After a boisterous greeting to their wives, the band broke up, and
+scattered over the village, three or four men remaining to guard the
+captives, who were told to sit down against a wall.
+
+The whole band were soon engaged in feasting, but no one paid the
+least attention to the prisoners. The lady had sunk down exhausted,
+with the little girl nestled close to her, the officers faint and pale
+from loss of blood, leaned against the wall. One of them asked the
+guards for some water, but the men paid no attention to the request,
+answering only with a savage curse. Tom and Peter, who were standing
+by, immediately went to the inn, filled a jug with water, and, taking
+a drinking horn and some bread, went back. One of the guards angrily
+ordered them back as they approached.
+
+"I am not going to free them," Tom said, soothingly; "there can be no
+reason why they should die of thirst, if they are enemies."
+
+"I am thirsty myself," one of the guard said, "and it does us good to
+see them thirst."
+
+"What, has no one brought you anything to drink?" Tom said, in a tone
+of surprise. "Here, Peter, you give this bread and water to these
+prisoners; I will run to Mother Morena's and bring some wine for the
+guard."
+
+The guard would not allow Peter to approach the captives until Tom
+arrived with a large jug of wine, and a cold fowl, which he had
+obtained at the inn. These the Spaniards accepted, and allowed the
+boys to give the water to the prisoners. All drank eagerly, with every
+expression of thankfulness, the lady seizing Peter's hand and kissing
+it as he handed the horn to the child. The lady was a very bright,
+pretty woman, though now pale and worn with fatigue and emotion, and
+the child was a lovely little creature.
+
+The boys, on leaving the prisoners, hurried to Garcias.
+
+"What are they going to do with the prisoners, Garcias?"
+
+"They have brought them up here to exchange for Nunez's lieutenant,
+who was taken last week. One of the men went off last night to
+Vittoria with a letter to offer to exchange. One of the officers is a
+colonel, and the young one a captain. The lady is, they say, the wife
+of General Reynier."
+
+"Then they are safe," Tom said joyfully, "for, of course the French
+would exchange a guerilla against three such prisoners."
+
+"Yes," Garcias said, "they are safe if Vagas has not been shot before
+the messenger gets to Vittoria. The messenger will hear directly he
+gets there, and if they have finished Vagas, he will come straight
+back, for his letter will be of no use then."
+
+"But the French would pay a ransom for them."
+
+"Yes; but the captain is never fond of ransoming, and if the news
+comes that Vagas is shot it is all up with them."
+
+"But they will never murder a woman and child in cold blood!" Tom
+said, in tones of indignant horror.
+
+"Women are killed on both sides," the muleteer said, placidly. "I
+don't hold to it myself, but I don't know, after all, why a woman's
+life is a bit more precious than a man's. Vagas's wife and children
+are here, too, and if the news comes of his death, she would stir the
+band up to kill the prisoners, even if the captain wanted to save
+them, which he certainly will not do."
+
+"When is the messenger expected back?"
+
+"If he goes to Vittoria and finds Vagas is alive, and arranges for
+the exchange, he won't be back till late to-night, perhaps not till
+to-morrow; but, if he hears, either on the way or directly he gets
+there, that he is dead, he may be back this afternoon." Soon after
+this conversation Garcias was sent for to the chief, and returned
+with a small note, which he handed to the boys as the answer to the
+despatch, and urged them to go at once. The boys said that they could
+not leave until they saw the end of this terrible drama which was
+passing before their eyes. It was early in the afternoon when a man
+was seen coming along the path from Vittoria. A hundred eager eyes
+examined him, and ere long it was declared as certain that it was the
+messenger. The boys' heart sank within them as they saw the fierce
+look cast by the Spaniards in the direction of the prisoners, for
+every one in the village was well aware of the meaning of this early
+return. The boys had arranged upon the course they would pursue, and
+they at once hurried to Garcias.
+
+"Please come with us at once to Nunez. We want to see him before the
+messenger arrives."
+
+"I will come with you," Garcias said; "but if you think that any
+talking of yours will persuade Nunez to move out of his way, you are
+mistaken. It is more likely to cost you your own lives, I can tell
+you; however, I gave you the promise I would do my best for you when
+you started with me, and I will go with you now, though what you want
+to interfere for here is more than I can make out. Pshaw! what matters
+two or three of these accursed French, more or less?"
+
+As they neared the chief's house they saw him coming towards them. His
+brow was as black as thunder; he was evidently prepared for the news
+of his lieutenant's death.
+
+"These messengers want to speak to you for a moment," Garcias said.
+
+The chief stopped with an impatient gesture.
+
+"Senor," Tom said, with a dignity which surprised the chief; "we are
+not what we seem. We are two English officers, and we have come to beg
+of you, to implore you, not to tarnish the cause for which you fight
+by shedding the blood of women and children."
+
+The boys had agreed that it would be altogether hopeless to try to
+save the French officers.
+
+"British officers, indeed," exclaimed Nunez, "a likely story. Do you
+know them as such, Garcias?"
+
+"No," Garcias said bluntly, "I never guessed at it; but now they say
+so, I think it's likely enough, for they don't seem to see things in
+the same way as other people."
+
+"I can give you proof of it," Tom said, calmly, pulling up the sleeve
+of his coat, and showing a cicatrix in his forearm. Taking a knife
+from his pocket, he cut into the skin, and drew forth a tiny silver
+tube. This he opened, and handed to Nunez a paper signed by Lord
+Wellington, declaring the bearers to be British officers, and
+requesting all loyal Spaniards to give them every assistance.
+
+The captain read it through, and flung it down. "You may be officers,"
+he said contemptuously; "but if you were Lord Wellington himself, I
+would not spare these accursed French. Listen!" and as he spoke a howl
+of rage ran from the other end of the village, and told too plainly
+the nature of the tidings the messenger had brought.
+
+"I again protest," Tom said firmly. "I protest, as a British officer,
+and in the name of humanity, against this cold-blooded murder of a
+woman and child. It is a disgrace to Spain, a disgrace to the cause,
+it is a brutal and cowardly act."
+
+The guerilla furiously drew a pistol; but Garcias placed himself
+between him and Tom. "I have promised him a safe conduct," he said,
+"and have given my word for his safety. He is only a boy, and a young
+fool; don't trouble with him."
+
+Fortunately at this moment, for the guerilla was still irresolutely
+handling his pistol, a crowd was seen coming towards them, headed by
+a woman who seemed frantic with rage and grief. All were shouting,
+"Death to the assassins! death to the French!" The chief at once moved
+forward to meet them.
+
+Tom and Peter gave a significant glance towards each other, and then
+Tom turned to go back towards the house which Nunez inhabited, while
+Peter hurried towards the spot where the prisoners were kept. Already
+a crowd was assembling who were talking threateningly at the French
+officers. Peter made his way through them until he stood by the lady,
+who, with her child clinging to her neck, looked in terror at the
+angry crowd, whose attention, however, was directed to the officers,
+who stood looking calmly indifferent to their threats and insults.
+
+"Do you speak Spanish, madam?" Peter asked, leaning over her.
+
+She shook her head.
+
+"Do you speak English?" he asked, in that tongue.
+
+"Yes, yes, a little." the lady said, eagerly; "who are you? What is
+this fierce crowd about?"
+
+"Hush!" Peter said. "I am a friend. Listen. In a few minutes they are
+going to shoot you all." The lady gave a stifled cry, and pressed
+her child close to her. "Remember, when they come to you, ask for a
+priest; gain a few minutes, and I hope to save you and the child."
+
+So saying, he slipped away into the crowd again. He had scarcely done
+so when Nunez arrived, accompanied by many of his men. The crowd fell
+back, and he strode up to the French officers. "French dogs," he said,
+"you are to die. I spared you to exchange, but your compatriots have
+murdered my lieutenant, and so now it's your turn. You may think
+yourselves lucky that I shoot you, instead of hanging you. Take them
+to that wall," he said, pointing to one some twenty yards off.
+
+The Frenchmen understood enough Spanish to know that their fate was
+sealed. Without a word they took each other's hands, and marched
+proudly to the spot pointed out. Here, turning round, they looked with
+calm courage at the Spaniards, who formed up with leveled muskets at
+a few paces distance. "Vive la France! Tirez," said the elder, in a
+firm, voice, and in a moment they fell back dead, pierced with a dozen
+balls.
+
+Peter had turned away when Nunez appeared on the scene, to avoid
+seeing the murder, and with his eyes fixed in the direction in which
+Tom had gone, he listened almost breathlessly to what should come.
+The French lady had sat immovable, cowering over her child, while her
+countrymen were taken away and murdered. As Nunez passed where she
+crouched, he said to two of his men, "Put your muskets to their heads,
+and finish them!" As the men approached, she lifted up her face, pale
+as death, and said,--
+
+"Un pretre, uno padre!"
+
+"She wants a priest," the men said, drawing back; "she has a right to
+absolution."
+
+There was a murmur of assent from those around, and two or three
+started to the priest's house, situated only a few yards away, being
+one of the end houses of the village. The priest soon appeared, came
+up to the spot, and received orders to shrive the Frenchwoman. He
+attempted a remonstrance, but was silenced by a threat from Nunez,
+and knowing from experience of such scenes that his influence went
+for nothing with Nunez and his fierce band, he bent over her, and the
+crowd drew back, to let them speak unheard. At this moment, to Peter's
+intense relief, he saw Tom approaching with the captain's two children
+walking beside him. Absorbed in what was passing before them, no one
+else looked round, and Peter slipped away and joined his brother. They
+came within twenty yards of the crowd, and then paused.
+
+"Wait a minute," Tom said to the children, "your father is busy."
+
+In another minute Nunez shouted roughly, "There that will do; finish
+with it and have done! I want to be off to my dinner."
+
+Tom and Peter simultaneously drew out a large Spanish knife, and each
+took one of the children firmly by the shoulder.
+
+"Stop! Senor Nunez!" Tom shouted in a loud, clear tone. "Stop! or by
+heaven there will be four victims instead of two! Let one of you lift
+a finger against these captives--let one of you come one step nearer
+to us--and, by the Holy Virgin, we will drive our knives into these
+children's hearts!"
+
+A cry of astonishment broke from the crowd, and one of agony and rage
+from Nunez, who tottered against a wall in horror at the danger in
+which his daughters were placed.
+
+"Listen! all of you," Tom said, "we are English officers, we have
+shown our papers to Nunez, and he knows it is so. We will not suffer
+this murder of a mother and her child. If they are to die, we will die
+with them; but these two children shall die too! Now, what is it to
+be?"
+
+A dozen of the guerillas leveled their guns at the two daring boys.
+
+"No! no!" Nunez shrieked; "lower your guns. Don't hurt the children,
+senors. The captives shall not be hurt; I swear it! They shall go
+free. Give me my children."
+
+"Not if I know it," Tom said; "Do you think I could trust the word of
+a man who would murder women and children in cold blood? No; these
+girls shall go with us as hostages, till we are safe under French
+guard."
+
+"They will tell them the way up here," said one of the woman in the
+group, "and then we shall be all killed."
+
+"No," Tom said; "the lady shall swear not to tell the way up here. She
+shall swear on your priest's crucifix. We will give you our words as
+British officers."
+
+"But how are the children to get back here again?" another asked, for
+Nunez was so paralyzed that he could only gaze on the children, who
+were crying bitterly, and implore them to stand quiet, and not try to
+get away. After more parleying the arrangements were completed. The
+crowd fell back on either side, so as to leave a large space round the
+French lady. Tom and Peter then went up to them with the little girls.
+The lady was sobbing with joy and excitement at this unexpected
+relief.
+
+"Can you walk?" Tom asked her in English.
+
+"Yes," she said, getting up hastily, but almost falling again.
+
+"Garcias will go first, as guide. The priest will give you his arm,"
+Tom went on, "these two young women will go with you and carry your
+child if necessary. You will walk on, twenty yards ahead of us. We
+follow with these girls. No one is to follow us, or accompany us. We
+are to go on like that till we come upon your outposts, and then the
+priest and the two women will bring back Nunez's children."
+
+"You will send them safe back, you swear?" asked Nunez, in tremulous
+tones.
+
+"Psha!" Tom said contemptuously, "you don't suppose we are
+child-murderers, like yourself."
+
+"Remember!" the guerilla said, in a sudden burst of passion, "if you
+ever cross my path again, I will--"
+
+"Do terrible things no doubt," Tom said scornfully; "and do you
+beware, too. It is wild beasts like yourself who have brought disgrace
+and ruin on Spain. No defeat could dishonor and disgrace her as much
+as your fiendish cruelty. It is in revenge for the deeds that you and
+those like you do, that the French carry the sword and fire to your
+villages. We may drive the French out, but never will a country which
+fights by murder and treachery become a great nation. Are you ready,
+Garcias!"
+
+"I am ready," the muleteer said, stepping forward from the silent and
+scowling throng.
+
+"We can trust you," Tom said heartily; "take us the short way straight
+down into the valley; we may have the luck to come upon a passing
+French troop in an hour. Think of that, madam," he said to the French
+lady, "let that give you strength and courage."
+
+So saying, the procession set out in the order Tom had indicated,
+amidst the curses of the guerillas, who were furious at seeing
+themselves thus bearded. At the brow of the hill Tom looked back, and
+saw that the guerillas were still standing in a group, in front of
+which he could distinguish the figure of Nunez. Taking off his hat,
+he waved an ironical farewell, and then followed the party down
+the hillside into the broad valley below. They could see the road
+stretching like a thread along it, but to their disappointment, not
+a figure was visible upon it. Now that there was no longer danger of
+treachery, the party closed up together.
+
+"How far is it to Vittoria, Garcias?"
+
+"Twenty good miles, senor."
+
+"But we shall never get there," Tom said in dismay. "I am sure the
+lady could not walk another five miles; she is quite exhausted now."
+
+"You will not have to go five miles, senor. There is a body of four
+or five hundred French in that large village you see there; it is not
+more than three miles at most."
+
+It was a weary journey, for the French lady, exhausted by fatigue
+and excitement, was often obliged to stop and sit down to rest, and,
+indeed, could not have got on at all had not Garcias on one side and
+the padre on the other helped her on. At last, just as the sun was
+setting, they approached the village, and could see the French
+sentries at its entrance. When within a hundred yards they paused.
+
+"We are safe now," Tom said; "it is not necessary for you to go
+farther. Good-by, little ones; I am sorry we have given you such a
+fright, but it was not our fault. Good-by, padre; I know that you will
+not grudge your walk, for the sake of its saving the lives of these
+unfortunates. Good-by, Garcias; thanks for your kindness and fidelity.
+I will report them when I return, and will, if I get a chance, send
+you a remembrance of our journey together."
+
+"Good-by, senors," Garcias said, shaking them by the hand; "you
+English are different to us, and I am not surprised now at your
+General holding Portugal against all the French armies." Then he
+lowered his voice, so that the Spanish women standing by could not
+hear him. "Be on your guard, senors; don't move on from the village
+without a strong convoy is going on; change your disguise, if
+possible; distrust every one you come across, and, in heaven's name,
+get back to your lines as soon as possible, for you may be assured
+that your steps will be dogged, and that you will be safe nowhere in
+Spain from Nunez's vengeance. The guerillas communicate with each
+other, and you are doomed if you fall into the hands of any, except,
+perhaps, one or two of the greater chiefs. Be always on your guard;
+sleep with your eyes open. Remember, except in the middle of a French
+regiment, you will never be really safe."
+
+"Thanks, Garcias!" the boys said earnestly, "we will do our best to
+keep our throats safe. At any rate, if we go down, it shall not be for
+want of watchfulness!"
+
+Another shake of the hands, and the party separated. The Spanish woman
+who was carrying the sleeping French child handed her over to Tom, who
+took her without waking her while Peter lent his arm to the French
+lady.
+
+"Madam," Tom said in English, "you will soon be among your friends. I
+know that you will keep your promise not to divulge the situation of
+the village you have left. I must ask you, also, to promise me not
+to say that we speak English, or to say anything which may create a
+suspicion that we are not what we seem. You will, of course, relate
+your adventures, and speak of us merely as Spanish boys, who acted as
+they did being moved by pity for you. We must accompany you for some
+time, for Nunez will move heaven and earth to get us assassinated, and
+all we want is that you shall obtain permission for us to sleep in the
+guard-room, so as to be under shelter of French bayonets until we can
+decide upon our course of action."
+
+The lady assented with a gesture, for she was too exhausted to speak,
+and as they reached the French sentries she tottered and sank down on
+the ground insensible.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+MADRID.
+
+
+The French sentries, who had been watching with surprise the slow
+approach of two peasant boys, the one carrying a child, the other
+assisting a woman clad in handsome, but torn and disheveled clothes,
+on seeing the latter fall, called to their comrades, and a sergeant
+and some soldiers came out from a guard-room close by.
+
+"Hallo!" said the sergeant. "What's all this? Who is this woman? And
+where do you come from?"
+
+The boys shook their heads.
+
+"Of course," the sergeant said, lifting the lady, "they don't
+understand French; how should they? She looks a lady, poor thing. Who
+can she be, I wonder?"
+
+"General Reynier," Tom said, touching her.
+
+"General Reynier!" exclaimed the sergeant to his comrades. "It must be
+the general's wife. I heard she was among those killed or carried off
+from that convoy that came through last night. Jacques, fetch out
+Captain Thibault, and you, Noel, run for Dr. Pasques."
+
+The officer on guard came out, and, upon hearing the sergeant's
+report, had Madame Reynier at once carried into a house hard by, and
+sent a message to the colonel of the regiment. The little girl, still
+asleep, was also carried in and laid down, and the regimental doctor
+and the colonel soon arrived. The former went into the house, the
+latter endeavored in vain to question the boys in French. Finding it
+useless, he walked up and down impatiently until a message came down
+from the doctor that the lady had recovered from her fainting fit, and
+wished to see him at once.
+
+Tom and Peter, finding that no one paid any attention to them, sat,
+quietly down by the guard-house.
+
+In a few minutes the French colonel came down. "Where are those boys?"
+he exclaimed hastily. There was quite a crowd of soldiers round the
+house, for the news of the return of General Reynier's wife and child
+had circulated rapidly and created quite an excitement. "Where are
+those boys?" he shouted again.
+
+The sergeant of the guard came forward.
+
+"I had no orders to keep them prisoners, sir," he said in an
+apologetic tone, for he had not noticed the boys, and thought that
+he was going to get into a scrape for not detaining them; but he
+was interrupted by one of the soldiers who had heard the question,
+bringing them forward.
+
+To the astonishment of the soldiers, the colonel rushed forward, and,
+with a Frenchman's enthusiasm, actually kissed them. "Mes braves
+garcons!" he exclaimed. "Mes braves garcons! Look you, all of you,"
+he exclaimed to the soldiers, "you see these boys, they are heroes,
+they have saved, at the risk of their own lives, mark you, General
+Reynier's wife and daughter; they have braved the fury of that
+accursed Nunez and his band, and have brought them out from that den
+of wolves." And then, in excited tones, he described the scene as he
+had heard it from Madame Reynier.
+
+At this relation the enthusiasm of the French soldiers broke out in
+a chorus of cheers and excited exclamations. The men crowded round
+the boys, shook them by the hands, patted them on the back, and in a
+hundred strange oaths vowed an eternal friendship for them.
+
+After a minute or two, the colonel raised his hand for silence. "Look
+you," he said to the men. "You can imagine that, after what these boys
+have done, their life is not safe for a moment. This accursed Nunez
+will dog them and have them assassinated if he can. So I leave them to
+you; you will take care of them, my children, will you not?"
+
+A chorus of assurances was the reply, and the boys found themselves as
+it were adopted into the regiment. The soldiers could not do enough
+for them, but, as neither party understood the other's language,
+the intercourse did not make much progress. They had, however, real
+difficulty in refusing the innumerable offers of a glass of wine or
+brandy made to them by every group of soldiers as they moved about
+through the village.
+
+The boys felt that their position was a false one; and although, in
+point of fact, they had no report to make upon the regiment, still
+the possibility that if discovered they might be thought to have been
+acting as spies on men who treated them with so much friendliness was
+repugnant to them. However, their stay was not to be prolonged, for
+the regiment had already been stationed for a month at the village,
+and was to be relieved by another expected hourly from France, and was
+then to go on to Madrid. This they learned from one of the soldiers
+who could speak a few words of Spanish.
+
+It was upon the third day after their arrival that the expected
+regiment came in, and next morning the boys started soon after
+daybreak with their friends. They had not seen Madame Reynier during
+their stay in the village, for she was laid up with a sharp attack of
+illness after the excitement she had gone through. She was still far
+from fit to travel, but she insisted on going on, and a quantity of
+straw was accordingly laid in a cart, pillows and cushions were heaped
+on this, and an awning was arranged above to keep off the sun. The
+regiment had taken on the transport animals which had come in with the
+baggage of the troops the night before; hence the mule drivers and
+other followers were all strangers. The boys were marching beside the
+regiment, talking with one of the sergeants who had been previously
+for two years in Spain, and spoke a little Spanish, when the colonel,
+who had been riding alongside Madame Reynier, told them as he passed
+on to the head of the regiment, that she wished to speak to them.
+
+The boys fell out, and allowed the troops and the line of baggage
+animals and carts to pass them. As the latter came along, Tom observed
+one of the Spanish drivers glance in their direction, and immediately
+avert his head.
+
+"Peter, that fellow is one of Nunez's band; I will almost swear to his
+face. No doubt he has joined the convoy for the purpose of stabbing us
+on the first opportunity. I expected this. We must get rid of them at
+once."
+
+The boys had both been furnished with heavy cavalry pistols by order
+of the colonel, to defend themselves against any sudden attack, and,
+placing his hand on the butt in readiness for instant use, Tom,
+accompanied by his brother walked up to the Spaniard.
+
+"You and those with you are known," he said. "Unless you all fall out
+at the next village we come to, I will denounce you, and you haven't
+five minutes to live after I do so. Mind, if one goes on you all
+suffer."
+
+The Spaniard uttered a deep execration, and put his hand on his knife,
+but seeing that the boys were in readiness, and that the French
+baggage guard marching alongside would certainly shoot him before he
+could escape, he relinquished his design.
+
+"Mind," Tom said, "the first village; it is only a mile ahead, and
+we shall probably halt there for five minutes; if one of you goes a
+single foot beyond it, you will swing in a row."
+
+So saying, the boys dropped behind again until Madame Reynier's cart
+came along. The sides were open, and the lady, who was sitting up,
+supported by pillows, with her child beside her, saw them, and called
+to them to climb up to her. They did so at once, and she then poured
+forth her thanks in tones of the deepest gratitude.
+
+"My husband is not at Madrid," she said when she saw by the boys'
+confusion that they would be really glad if she would say no more;
+"but when he hears of it he will thank you for saving his wife and
+child. Of course," she went on, "I can see that you are not what you
+seem. Spanish boys would not have acted so. Spanish boys do not speak
+English. That makes it impossible for me in any way to endeavor to
+repay my obligation. Had you been even Spanish peasants, the matter
+would have been comparatively easy; then my husband could have made
+you rich and comfortable for life; as it is--"
+
+She paused, evidently hoping that they would indicate some way in
+which she could serve them.
+
+"As it is, madam," Tom said, "you can, if you will, be of great
+service to us by procuring for us fresh disguises in Madrid, for I
+fear that after what happened with Nunez our lives will not be safe
+from his vengeance anywhere in Spain. Already we have discovered that
+some of his band are accompanying this convoy with the intention of
+killing us at the first opportunity."
+
+"Why do you not denounce them instantly?" Madame Reynier said, rising
+in her excitement and looking round.
+
+"We cannot well do that," Tom said, "at least not if it can be
+avoided. They know already that we have recognized them, and will
+leave at the next village; so we are safe at present, but in Madrid we
+shall be no longer so. We cannot remain permanently under the guard of
+the bayonets of the 63d Line; and indeed our position is as you may
+guess, a false and unpleasant one, from which we would free ourselves
+at the first opportunity. We shall therefore ask you, when you get to
+Madrid, to provide us with fresh disguises and a pass to travel west
+as far as the limits of the French lines."
+
+"You can consider that as done," Madame Reynier answered; "I only
+regret that it is so slight a return. And now," she said lightly, to
+change the conversation, "I must introduce you to this young lady.
+Julie," she asked in French, "do you remember those boys?"
+
+"Yes," Julie said; "these are the boys who gave mamma and Julie water
+when those wicked men would not give us anything to drink when we were
+thirsty; and it was these boys that mamma said prevented the wicked
+men from killing us. They are good boys, nice boys, but they are very
+ragged and dirty."
+
+Madame Reynier smiled, and translated Julie's answer.
+
+"You know," she went on, hesitatingly, "that I know that--that you are
+English officers. I heard you say so when you saved us. But how is it
+that you can be officers so very young?"
+
+Tom explained that in England the officers entered for the most part
+directly, and not, as in the French army, by promotion from the ranks,
+and that, consequently, the junior officers were much younger than
+those of equal rank in the French service.
+
+The convoy had now reached the village, and a halt was ordered,
+and the boys alighting, walked forward to see that their unwelcome
+attendants quitted them. As the soldiers fell out from their order of
+march and sat down under the shade of the houses many of the Spaniards
+with the baggage-train followed their example, and the boys saw the
+man to whom they had spoken go up to four others, and in a short time
+these separated themselves from the rest, went carelessly round a
+corner, and when the order came to continue the march, failed to make
+their appearance. Their absence passed unnoticed save by the boys,
+for the natives frequently took advantage of the passage of troops
+and convoys to travel from one part of the country to another, for
+the guerillas were for the most part little better than brigands,
+and would plunder their own countrymen without scruple whenever the
+opportunity was favorable.
+
+The march to Madrid was accomplished without adventure, and the boys
+improved the occasion by endeavoring to pick up as many French phrases
+as they could, as they marched along by the side of the sergeant who
+had specially taken them under his charge. He knew a little Spanish,
+so they managed to keep up a conversation with him in a strange medley
+of the two languages, which helped to pass the time away merrily. At
+Madrid they took up their quarters in the barracks with the regiment;
+they had already explained their plan of disguise to Madame Reynier,
+and she had promised to provide all that was necessary and to obtain
+the military pass for them.
+
+They had soon reason to congratulate themselves that their stay
+in Madrid was under the protection of French bayonets. During the
+day after their arrival they remained quietly in barracks, as the
+appearance of two Spanish peasants walking about the street with
+French soldiers would have excited comments. In the evening, however,
+they agreed with their friend the sergeant, who was going into the
+town with three or four of his comrades, that they should accompany
+them, not, however, walking actually with them, but following a few
+paces behind, so as to be within reach of their assistance should any
+one molest them.
+
+They reached the Piazza del Sol, the great central square of Madrid,
+without incident, and amused themselves with the sight of the constant
+stream of people passing to and fro, the ladies in their graceful
+black mantillas, the men in cloaks and Spanish sombreros, or round
+felt hats. Presently the sergeant and his companions left the square,
+and turning down one of the narrow streets which run into it, amused
+themselves by looking into the shops, with their gay fans, bright
+handkerchiefs, and other articles of Spanish manufacture.
+
+Tom and Peter followed their example, keeping some ten paces behind
+them. It was now nearly dark, and the streets were but badly lighted
+except by the lamps in the shop windows.
+
+"It may be all fancy, Tom," Peter said, "but I can't help thinking
+that we are followed. There are three follows who have passed us
+twice, and I am pretty sure they are particularly noticing us. Keep
+your hand on your pistol."
+
+As the boys paused at another shop window, the three men again
+approached, this time from ahead.
+
+"Look out, Tom," Peter said sharply.
+
+As the men came up to them, one of them exclaimed,
+
+"Now!"
+
+The boys faced round, pistol in hand, with a cry to their friends,
+just as the three Spaniards, with drawn knives, were upon them.
+
+The sudden movement disconcerted them, and two sprang back from the
+leveled tubes of the pistols, with fierce oaths of surprise, the
+third, however, rushed in and struck at Tom; the latter instinctively
+moved aside, and the knife inflicted a heavy gash on the shoulder, and
+almost at the same moment Peter's bullet crashed through the fellow's
+skull.
+
+His comrades, with a cry of rage, rushed in, but before they could
+strike, the sergeant was up and ran one through the body with his
+sword, whereon the other fled. The whole affair lasted only three
+or four seconds. In less than a minute the street was absolutely
+deserted, for rows and fights were so common between the soldiers and
+the people, that all prudent people got out of the way the moment a
+knife was drawn.
+
+"Well done, lad," the sergeant said to Peter, "I thought your brother
+was done for. Luckily I had faced your way when the fellow attacked
+you, and was on my way to help you before they began, but I feared I
+should be too late. That was a wonderfully pretty snap shot of yours,
+and you were as cool as old hands. Peste! I don't know what to make
+of you boys. Now come along, we had better get away from this carrion
+before any one comes up and asks questions. First, though, let me tie
+up your shoulder."
+
+This was soon done, and while the sergeant was engaged upon it, his
+comrades, old soldiers, turned over the dead Spaniards, searched their
+pockets, and chuckled as they found several gold pieces.
+
+One or two French soldiers alone came near them before they left the
+spot, attracted by the sound of the pistol. A word from the sergeant,
+"These scoundrels attacked us, they have got their _coup_," satisfied
+them, and the boys and their friend soon regained the crowded main
+street, leaving the bodies for the watch to find and bury.
+
+Arrived at the barracks, Tom's arm was examined by the surgeon, and
+the cut pronounced a deep flesh wound, but of no consequence; it was
+soon strapped up, and with his arm in a sling Tom went down to the
+sergeant's quarters, where they slept. Here they had to go through
+much patting on the back, for their friend had described the readiness
+and coolness with which they stood at bay, and popular as they were
+before they were now more so than ever. For the rest of their stay in
+Madrid the boys did not stir out of barracks. One at least of Nunez's
+envoys they knew to be alive, and he could enlist any number of the
+lower class against them, so they resolved not to go out until they
+should finally start.
+
+After a fortnight's stay they were sent for to the colonel's quarters,
+where they found Madame Reynier and her child. "I had a letter from my
+husband this morning," she said, "from his camp near Cordova, thanking
+you with all his heart for the inestimable service you rendered him,
+and begging me to tell you that you can count on his gratitude to the
+extent of his life at any and all times. You need no assurance of
+mine. And now about your journey. All is prepared for you to leave
+to-morrow morning. You are to come here to the colonel's quarters soon
+after daybreak. Here are your two disguises, for the one as a young
+bachelor of medicine, for the other as a young novice. Here is your
+pass, signed by the minister, authorizing you both to pass on to your
+relations at Ciudad Rodrigo, and to go unmolested thence where you
+choose, also recommending you to the care of all French and Spanish
+authorities. A regiment marches to-morrow morning for the frontier;
+the colonel is a cousin of my husband. I have told him that some
+friends of yours rendered me much kindness and service on my way down,
+and that I particularly commend you to his care. He has promised to
+allow you to follow the regiment, and to see that you get quarters at
+each halting-place. He does not know you for anything but what you
+appear to be. When you have put on these dresses to-morrow morning,
+step out by the private door from these quarters, looking carefully
+when you start to see that there is no one in the street. Then go
+boldly to No. 15, Rue St. Geronimo; go into the courtyard, there you
+will see two stout mules with all necessaries, under charge of a
+soldier, who will have instructions to hand them over to you without
+asking any questions; then go down to the Retiro and wait till the
+16th come along. The Colonel will be on the look-out for you, and you
+will ride up to him and hand him this note. And now farewell, dear
+boys; never shall I forget you, or cease to pray for you, and may be
+when this terrible war is over we may meet as friends again. Keep
+these little tokens of remembrance of your grateful friends." So
+saying, Madame Reynier pressed into the boys' hands two magnificent
+gold watches and chains, held her child up for each of them to kiss,
+threw her arms round their necks and kissed them herself, and then
+drawing down her veil to conceal the tears which were standing in her
+eyes, left them hastily.
+
+That night the boys said good-by to their friend the sergeant, and
+to those soldiers with whom they had most companionship. "You have
+guessed, no doubt, sergeant," Tom said, in his mixture of Spanish and
+French, "that we are not exactly what we seem to be, but if we should
+ever meet again, under different circumstances, I want you to remember
+that our connection with the regiment has been in a way forced upon
+us. I should not like you to think, that is that under the pretence
+of friendship, we have been treacherously learning things. Do you
+understand?"
+
+"I understand, mes braves," the sergeant said, "Jacques Pinteau is no
+fool, and he saw from the first that you were not two ragged Spanish
+peasant boys by birth. I daresay I can guess what you are, but there
+need be no ill-will for that, and as you only came among us by
+accident, as it were, there is no more to be said either way. There is
+one thing certain, wherever or however we meet, we shall be friends."
+
+So well were Madame Reynier's plans arranged that the boys passed from
+Madrid to the frontier without a single hitch or unpleasantness. Tom
+was soberly attired as a student at the university, Peter was muffled
+up to the eyes as a timid young novice, going from school to enter a
+convent, of which his aunt was lady superior, at Ciudad Rodrigo. The
+colonel, and, following his example, the officers of the regiment were
+polite and civil. The marches were of easy length, the mules stout
+and smooth-going, with well-filled traveling sacks. The weather was
+delightful, and the boys enjoyed the fortnight's march exceedingly.
+Upon the road they learned that Massena had laid siege to Ciudad
+Rodrigo, and that the 16th was on its way to join the besieging army.
+
+It was the end of June, 1810, when the 16th joined Massena's force
+before Ciudad Rodrigo. The siege had continued for some time, the
+British light division, under General Craufurd, lay upon the other
+side of the river Agueda, which separated them alike from the town and
+the French army. The colonel of the 16th politely expressed to Tom his
+regret that he could not, for the present, conduct them to their final
+destination, but that he hoped that the gate would soon be open for
+them. Tom thanked him for the civility which he had shown them upon
+the road, and said that he would, with his sister, take up his abode
+for the present a few miles from the beleaguered fortress. On leaving
+the regiment the boys went higher up the Agueda to the little town of
+Villar, where there was a bridge. This however, was watched by the
+troops of both armies, and there was, at present, no chance of
+affecting a passage.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+THE FIGHT ON THE COA.
+
+
+All through the winter of 1809-1810, Wellington had remained quietly
+on the frontier of Portugal, engaged in disciplining his troops, many
+of whom were raw drafts from the militia, in urging upon the home
+Government the necessity of fresh reinforcements, if the war was to be
+carried on with the smallest hopes of success, and in controversies
+and disputes with the Portuguese regency. This body of incapables
+starved their own army, refused supplies and transport to the British,
+and behaved with such arrogance and insolence that Wellington was
+several times driven to use the threat that, unless measures were
+taken to keep the Portuguese troops from starving, and to supply food
+to the British, he would put his army on board the transports at
+Lisbon, and give up the struggle altogether.
+
+Spring found the army still on the frontier, and when the French
+advanced in force in May to lay siege to the Spanish frontier fortress
+of Ciudad Rodrigo, Wellington to the intense disappointment of his own
+troops, and the bitter anger of the Portuguese and Spaniards, refused
+to fight a battle to save the fortress, which, under its gallant old
+governor, Andrea Hernati, was defending itself nobly.
+
+Wellington's position was, however, a very difficult one, and his
+responsibilities were immense. Allowing for the detachments which were
+massing to check three other French columns advancing in different
+directions, he had but 25,000 men with which to attempt to raise the
+siege of Ciudad Rodrigo, or to draw off the besieged garrison. Massena
+had under him 60,000 French veterans, and was desiring nothing more
+than that Wellington should attack him. The chances of victory then
+were by no means strong, and in any case victory could only have been
+purchased by a loss of men which would have completely crippled the
+British general, and would have rendered it absolutely necessary for
+him to fall back again at once. A defeat or even a heavy loss of
+men, would have so dispirited the faint-hearted Government at home
+that they would undoubtedly have recalled the whole expedition, and
+resigned Portugal to its fate. Thus Wellington decided not to risk the
+whole fate of the British army and of Portugal for merely a temporary
+advantage, and so stood firm against the murmurs of his own troops,
+the furious reproaches of the Portuguese and Spaniards, and the moving
+entreaties for aid of the gallant governor of the besieged town.
+
+At the same time that he refused to risk a general battle, he kept
+Craufurd's division in advance of the Coa, and within two hours' march
+of the enemy, thereby encouraging the garrison of Ciudad Rodrigo, and
+preventing Massena from pushing forward a portion of his army while
+the rest pursued the siege.
+
+Craufurd's front was guarded by the Agueda, a river only passable by
+two or three bridges and fords in wet weather, but fordable in many
+places in the dry season. At the commencement of June the Agueda
+fell, and the French crossed in strength at various places. Craufurd,
+however, still maintained his position in front of the Coa with great
+skill and boldness. He had under his command only 4000 infantry, 1100
+cavalry, and six guns, and his maintenance of his position, almost
+within gun-shot of an enemy's army, 60,000 strong, for three months,
+is one of the finest feats of military audacity and ability ever
+performed.
+
+Until the 11th of July the boys remained quietly at a cottage occupied
+by peasants, who believed their story that they were only waiting
+to proceed when the French army advanced. They were freed from
+molestation or inquiry upon the part of the French by the pass with
+which Madame Reynier had supplied them.
+
+Upon that day Ciudad Rodrigo surrendered, and Massena prepared at once
+to enter Portugal. Upon the 21st the cavalry advanced in great force,
+and upon the following day the boys resolved upon endeavoring to
+rejoin the British army. The Agueda was now easily fordable in many
+places, but the boys determined to swim across, at a distance from the
+point at which the French army was now pouring forward.
+
+As evening came on they left the cottage, and walked two miles up
+the stream, and, as soon as night fell, took off the costumes which
+had proved of such service to them and left them on the bank; then
+fastening their peasants' suits upon two bundles of rushes to keep
+them dry, entered the little river, and were soon upon the opposite
+shore. They knew, from what they had heard in the afternoon, that
+Craufurd had fallen back upon Almeida, a fortified town, and that it
+was probable he would at once cross the Coa, as resistance to the
+force now approaching him seemed nothing short of madness.
+
+No good, indeed, could be gained by a fight in such a position, with a
+deep river in the rear, crossed by only a narrow bridge, and commanded
+by both banks, and Wellington's orders had been imperative "that, upon
+no account whatever was Craufurd to fight beyond the Coa."
+
+Craufurd, however, a rash and obstinate, although a skilful general,
+was determined upon having a brush with the enemy before he fell back.
+He anticipated, no doubt, that only an advanced guard of the enemy
+would come up at first, and his intention was to inflict a severe
+check upon them with the magnificent little division under his
+command, and then fall back triumphantly across the Coa. Massena,
+however, was well aware of the fighting powers of the light division,
+and was preparing to hurl suddenly upon him a force more than
+sufficient to crush it.
+
+The Scudamores had but little fear of meeting with any large body of
+the enemy, as the main French advance was direct from Ciudad Rodrigo;
+their cavalry would, however, be scattered all over the country, and
+were they to fall into the hands of any of these parties they would
+have been shot instantly, upon suspicion of endeavoring to convey news
+of the French movements to Craufurd.
+
+The point where they crossed the river was between Villar and Naves
+Frias, and, after an hour's walking, they struck the little rivulet
+called Duas Casas. This they crossed at once, as they knew that by
+following its southern bank until they saw some high ground to their
+left they would find themselves near Almeida, which they hoped to
+reach before the English retreated.
+
+All night they tramped through the fields of stubble, where the corn
+had been long since cut for the use of Craufurd's cavalry, but walking
+at night through an unknown country is slow work, and when day began
+to break they entered a small wood just beyond the point where the
+Turones, as the southern arm of the Duas Casas is called, branches off
+from the main stream. Several times in the course of the day bodies
+of the enemy's cavalry came near their place of concealment, and the
+Scudamores congratulated themselves that they had not given way to
+their impatience, and tried to push on across the twenty miles that
+alone separated them from their friends.
+
+At nightfall the wind rose, and a heavy rain began to fall. They had
+no stars by which to steer their course, and were, therefore, forced
+to follow the bank of the Turones, although they knew that it would
+lead them some distance to the north of Almeida. It was slow work,
+indeed, for they had to grope their way along in the storm, following
+every turn and bend of the river, which formed their only guide. After
+several hours' toil they came into a road running north and south.
+This they knew was the road leading from Guarda to Almeida, and it
+gave them a clue as to the distance they had come. Still following the
+river, they continued their course until they approached San Pedro,
+whence they knew that a road ran directly to the British position
+in front of Almeida, that is if the British still maintained their
+position there.
+
+As they approached the village, they heard a deep, hollow sound,
+and stopping to listen, and laying their ears to the ground, could
+distinguish the rumble of heavy carriages.
+
+"The French are advancing in force, Peter; we are just in time;
+they are going to attack us in the morning at daybreak. We know the
+direction now; let us turn to the left, and try to get on in advance
+of them. They probably will not push on much farther until there
+is light enough to permit them to form order of battle; they are
+evidently, by the sound, going to the left, rather than straight on."
+
+The Scudamores now hurried on, and presently the rumbling of the
+artillery died away, and they ventured to push to their left, and to
+get on the road, which they found deserted. Half an hour's run, for
+they knew that every minute was of importance, and they heard the
+welcome challenge, "Who comes there?" "Two British officers," they
+answered, and in a few minutes they were taken to the officer in
+charge of the picket, and having once convinced him of their identity,
+were heartily greeted and welcomed.
+
+"The French are advancing in great force to attack," Tom said; "please
+forward us instantly to the general."
+
+The matter was too important for an instant's delay, and a sergeant
+was at once told off to accompany them.
+
+The first faint blush of daylight was in the east when they arrived
+at the cottage which served as General Craufurd's quarters, and, upon
+their speaking to the sentinel at the door, a window was thrown open,
+and a deep voice demanded "What is it?"
+
+"We have just arrived through the French lines," Tom said, "the enemy
+are at hand in force."
+
+The casement closed, and an instant afterwards the general came out.
+"Who are you?"
+
+"We belong to the Norfolk Rangers, general, and have been detached on
+service in the interior; we have only just made our way back."
+
+"How am I to know your story is true?" the general asked sharply.
+
+"You may, perhaps, remember, sir, we landed from the 'Latona,' and you
+kindly lent us horses to accompany you."
+
+"Aha! I remember," the general said. "Well, your news?"
+
+"The French have crossed the Turones in force, sir; at least they have
+a good many guns with them."
+
+"Which way were they going?"
+
+"As far as we could judge by the sound, sir, they were taking up a
+position between Villa Formosa and Fort Conception."
+
+"Good," the general said shortly; then turning to three or four of his
+staff who had followed him from the cottage, "Get the troops under
+arms at once. Come in here, gentlemen."
+
+The Scudamores entered, and as they came into the light of a candle
+which stood on the table the general smiled grimly.
+
+"It is lucky you were able to recall yourselves to my memory, for
+I should have needed some strong evidence to persuade me you were
+British officers had I seen you before you spoke. You are wet to the
+skin; there is a brandy bottle, and you will find some bread and cold
+fowl in that cupboard."
+
+Five minutes later the boys followed General Craufurd from his hut.
+
+Short as was the time which had elapsed since their arrival, the
+troops were already under arms, for three months of incessant alarm
+and watchfulness had enabled this splendid division to act as one man,
+and to fall in at any hour of the day or night in an incredibly short
+time. Ten minutes later and the ramble of the baggage wagons was
+heard along the road towards the bridge. The morning was clearing
+fast, the clouds lifted, and the daylight seemed to break with unusual
+suddenness.
+
+The dark masses of the French became visible forming up before the
+Turones, and Craufurd hurried forward his cavalry and guns to check
+their advance.
+
+"Hurry the infantry up, hurry them up," the general said urgently to
+the officers by him. "Let them take post along the ridge, and then
+fall back fighting towards the bridge. Major MacLeod," he said to an
+officer of the 43d, "take these gentlemen with you; they are officers
+of the Norfolk Rangers. They will join your regiment for the present.
+When your regiment falls back, occupy that stone inclosure a little
+way down the slope at the left of the road, and hold the enemy in
+check while the troops file over the bridge."
+
+The officer addressed looked with surprise at the boys, and signing to
+them to follow, hurried off to his regiment, which was on the left of
+the British line.
+
+Next to them came a regiment of Portuguese riflemen, with a wing of
+the 95th upon either flank, while the 52d formed the right of the
+line.
+
+Upon reaching the regiment, Major MacLeod briefly introduced the boys
+to the colonel, who said, "As you have no arms, gentlemen, I think you
+had better make for the bridge at once."
+
+"Thank you, sir," Tom replied, "there will be some muskets disposable
+before long, and directly they are so we will take our place in the
+ranks."
+
+They had now leisure to look round and examine their position, and a
+glance was sufficient to show how great was the peril in which General
+Craufurd's obstinacy had placed his little force. In front of them
+were 24,000 French infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 30 pieces of artillery.
+An overwhelming force indeed, and one which could scarcely have been
+withstood by the 4000 British infantry, even under the most favorable
+conditions of position. The position, however, was here wholly against
+the British. They stood at the edge of a plateau, and behind them the
+ground fell away in a steep hillside to the Coa, a mile distant, and
+across the Coa there was but a single bridge.
+
+The enemy was approaching fast. Ney's great brigade of cavalry swept
+the British horse before them, and the infantry were following at a
+run.
+
+Resistance on the edge of the plateau was hopeless, and Craufurd
+ordered the infantry to fall back at once. The 43d filed into the
+inclosure, rapidly cut loopholes in the wall, and as the enemy
+appeared on the crest above opened a tremendous fire, under cover of
+which the cavalry and artillery trotted briskly and in good order down
+the road to the bridge.
+
+The Scudamores, having no duty, stood at the entrance to the inclosure
+and watched the fight on their right. As the masses of French infantry
+appeared on the edge of the plateau they made no pause, but opening
+a heavy fire pressed forward on the retiring British troops, who
+were falling back in open order, contesting every inch of ground. So
+rapidly and hotly, however, did the French press after them that the
+British were soon pushed back beyond the line of the inclosure, and as
+the French followed closely, it was evident that the 43d would be cut
+oft and surrounded.
+
+Their colonel saw their danger, and called upon them to fall in and
+retreat, but the entrance was so narrow that it was clear at a glance
+that ere one company could pass through it the French would be upon
+them, and the regiment caught like rats in a trap.
+
+Officers and men alike saw the danger, and there was a pause of
+consternation.
+
+Peter was standing next to the colonel, and said suddenly as the idea
+flashed across him, "The wall is not very strong, sir, if the men mass
+against it and push together I think it will go."
+
+The colonel caught at the idea. "Now, lads, steady, form against the
+rear wall four deep, close together, shoulder to shoulder, as close
+as you can pack; now get ready, one, two, three!" and at the word the
+heavy mass of men swung themselves against the wall; it swayed with
+the shock, and many stones were displaced; another effort and the
+wall tottered and fell, and with a glad shout the 43d burst out, and
+trotting on at the double soon joined the rifles and 95th.
+
+The ground was rough and broken with rocks, vineyards and inclosures,
+and the troops, fighting with admirable coolness and judgment, took
+advantage of every obstacle and fell back calmly and in good order
+before the overwhelming force opposed to them.
+
+Fortunately the jealousies of the French generals, which throughout
+the campaign contributed in no slight degree to the success of
+the British, was now the cause of their safety, for Montbrun, who
+commanded the French heavy cavalry, refused to obey Ney's order to
+charge straight down to the bridge, in which case the whole English
+infantry would have been cut off; the French hussars, however, being
+on the British rear, charged among them whenever the ground permitted
+them to do so.
+
+Upon the British right the ground was more open than upon the left,
+and the 52d was therefore obliged to fall back more quickly than the
+rest of the line, and were the first to arrive at the bridge head,
+which was still choked with artillery and cavalry. This was the most
+dangerous moment, the rest of the infantry could not retreat until the
+bridge was clear, and the French with exulting shouts pressed hard
+upon them to drive them back upon the river.
+
+Major MacLeod, seeing the urgent danger, rallied four companies of his
+regiment upon the little hill on the right of the road, while Major
+Rowan collected two companies on another to the left. Here they were
+joined by many of the riflemen, and for a while the French advance was
+checked.
+
+The Scudamores had remained throughout close to Major MacLeod, and had
+long since armed themselves with the muskets and pouches of fallen
+men, and with 43d shakoes on their heads, were fighting among the
+ranks.
+
+The cloud of French skirmishers pressed hotly forward, and MacLeod,
+seeing that the bridge was still blocked, resolved suddenly upon
+a desperate measure. Taking off his cap, he pointed to the enemy,
+and calling upon his men to follow him, rode boldly at them. Peter
+Scudamore caught up a bugle which had fallen from a dead bugler by his
+side, blew the charge, and the soldiers, cheering loudly, followed
+MacLeod against the enemy.
+
+Astounded at this sudden and unexpected attack, the French skirmishers
+paused, and then fell back before the furious charge of the 43d, who
+pressed after them with loud and continuous cheering. Looking back,
+MacLeod saw that the bridge was now clear, and recalled the troops,
+who fell back rapidly again before the French infantry had recovered
+sufficiently from their surprise to press them.
+
+The hussars were, however, again forward, and were galloping down the
+road, which was here sunken between somewhat high banks. Tom and Peter
+were with the last company, which turned and prepared to receive them,
+when Tom, pointing to a coil of rope upon a cart which had broken
+down, shouted, "Quick, tie it to these posts across the road." Two or
+three men sprang to assist him, and in a minute the rope was stretched
+across the road at a foot from the ground, and fastened round a stone
+post on either side. They had scarcely seized their muskets and leapt
+on the bank again, when the French cavalry came thundering down the
+road. "Fire, a few of you," Tom said, "so as to call their attention
+up here," and in accordance with his order a dropping fire was opened.
+The French came along at a gallop; a few of the leading horses saw
+the rope and leapt it, but those behind caught it and fell, the mass
+behind pressed on, and in an instant the lane was choked with a
+confused mass of men and horses. "Now a volley," Tom cried, "and then
+to the bridge."
+
+Every musket was emptied in to the struggling mass, and then with a
+cheer, the men ran briskly down to the bridge, and crossed--the last
+of the British troops over the Coa.
+
+The rest of the infantry and artillery had already taken ground on the
+heights behind the river, and these opened fire upon the French as
+they approached the head of the bridge in pursuit. The British were
+now, however, safe in the position which they ought to have taken up
+before the advance of the French, and had General Craufurd obeyed his
+orders not to fight beyond the Coa, the lives of 306 of his gallant
+troops, including the officers, would have been saved.
+
+The battle, however, was not yet over. The artillery on both sides
+played across the ravine, the French skirmishers swarmed down to the
+river bank, and between them and the British infantry a rapid fire was
+exchanged, while a heavy column marched down to the bridge. With a
+deep-sounding cheer they advanced upon it, while with answering cheers
+the British opened fire upon them. The depth of the ravine at first
+deceived the British marksmen, and the column pressed on until its
+head was three-quarters across the bridge. Then the shower smote it,
+and beneath that terrible fire the head of the column melted away.
+Still it pressed on until across the bridge the corpses lay piled in a
+mass as high as the parapet, and beyond this heap, this terrible line,
+there was no living. Then sullenly and slowly the French fell back,
+while the British cheers rose exultingly along the hillside.
+
+Twice again did fresh columns pour on to the bridge, but only to melt
+away under the British fire, neither of them reaching the dreadful
+line which marked the point reached by the head of the first. The
+artillery and musketry fire on both sides continued until four in the
+afternoon, when a heavy rain set in, and the fire ceased altogether.
+
+As the Coa was fordable at several points lower down, and the French
+could therefore have turned the position next day, the British troops
+fell back during the night behind the Pinhel river, where Picton's
+division was also encamped.
+
+Next morning the boys exchanged their Spanish suits for the uniform
+of British officers, which they obtained from the effects of some of
+those who had fallen upon the previous day, these being, as is usual
+in a campaign, at once sold by auction, the amount realized being
+received by the paymaster for the benefit of the dead men's relatives.
+Major MacLeod had witnessed their ready presence of mind in throwing
+the rope across the road, and so checking the French charge, and
+giving time to the rear-guard to cross the bridge, and had made a very
+favorable report upon the subject.
+
+Two days later and they joined the Rangers, who were stationed at
+Guarda, and were received with the greatest heartiness by their
+brother officers, with warm but respectful greetings by the men, and
+with uproarious demonstrations of gladness on the part of Sambo.
+
+"The betting was two to one that you had gone down, boys," Captain
+Manley said, after the first greetings; "but Carruthers and myself
+have taken up all offers, and win I don't know how many dinners and
+bottles of wine. I had the strongest faith you would get through
+somehow. You will take up your quarters with me. I have two bedrooms
+upstairs there, which Sam has taken possession of in your name. He
+would have it that you were sure to be back in time for the first
+fight. Dinner will be ready at six, and after that there will be a
+general gathering round the fire in the open to hear your adventures.
+No doubt you would be dining with the colonel, but I know he is
+engaged to the general."
+
+"Yes, he told us so," Tom said, "and we are to dine with him
+to-morrow."
+
+"All right, then; we'll make a night of it. Carruthers is coming to
+dine, and Burke and Lethbridge; but the room won't hold more than six.
+We are going to have a feast, for Sam has got hold of a sucking-pig;
+where he got it from I dare not inquire, and Lethbridge said his
+fellow had, somehow or other, found a turkey; as to wine, we shall
+have it of the best, for Burke is quartered at the monastery, and the
+monks are so delighted at finding him a good Catholic that they have
+given him the run of their cellar."
+
+It was a jovial dinner, and no words can express the satisfaction and
+delight which beamed on Sam's face as he stood behind his master, or
+the grin of pride with which he placed the sucking-pig on the table.
+
+"Sam, Sam!" Captain Manley said reprovingly, "I fear that pig is not
+honestly come by, and that one of these days we shall hear that you
+have come to a bad end."
+
+"No, no, Massa Captain Manley, sar," Sam said, "dat pig come quite
+honest, dat pig made present to Sam."
+
+"A likely story that, Sam. Come, out with it. I have no doubt it was
+quite as honest as Lethbridge's turkey anyhow. Come, tell us how it
+was."
+
+Thus invoked, Sam's face assumed the pompons air with which he always
+related a story, and he began,--
+
+"Well, sar, de affair happened in dis way. When de massas arribe, two
+o'clock, and went in for long talk wid de colonel, dis chile said to
+himself, 'Now what am I going to get them for dinner?' De rations
+sarve out dis morning war all skin and bone, and war pretty nigh
+finished at lunch. Sam say to himself, 'Captain Manley's sure to say,
+'You dine wid me;' but as Captain Manley hadn't got no food himself,
+de invitation was berry kind, berry kind indeed; but massa wasn't
+likely to get fat on dat invitation."
+
+Sam's narrative was interrupted by a perfect shout of laughter upon
+the part of all at table, Captain Manley joining heartily in the laugh
+against himself. When they had a little recovered again, Sam went on
+as gravely as ever. "Dis struck Sam berry serious, not to have nothing
+for dinner after being away seben months; presently idea occur to dis
+chile, and he stroll permiscuous up to big farm-house on hill. When
+Sam got near house, kept out of sight of window; at last got quite
+close, took off shako, and put head suddenly in at window. Sure
+enough, just what Sam expected, dere sat missus of farm, fat ole
+woman, wid fat ole servant opposite her. De door was open, and dis
+little pig and several of his broders and sisters was a frisking in
+and out. De old women look up bofe togeder, and dey give a awful
+shriek when dey saw dis chile's head; dey fought it were de debil,
+sure enough. Dey drop down on dere knees, and begin to pray as fast as
+maybe. Den I give a loud 'Yah! yah!' and dey screams out fresh. 'Oh!
+good massa debil!' says the ole woman, 'what you want? I been berry,
+berry bad, but don't take me away.' You see, Massa Tom, I pick up
+little Spanish, 'nuff to understand since you been gone. I not say
+nuffin, and de ole woman den go on, 'If you want one soul Massa Debil,
+take dis here,' pointing to her serbant;' she been much more wicked
+nor me.' Den de serbant she set up awful shriek, and I says, 'Dis time
+I hab pity on you, next time I come, if you not good I carry you bofe
+away. But must take soul away to big debil 'else he neber forgibe me.
+Dere, I will carry off soul of little pig. Gib it me.' De serbant she
+gives cry ob joy, jump up, seize little pig, and berry much afraid,
+bring him to window. Before I take him I say to old missus, 'Dis a
+free gibt on your part?' and she say, 'Oh, yes, oh, yes, good Massa
+Debil, you can take dem all if you like.' I say, 'No; only one--and
+now me gib you bit advice. My Massa down below hear you very bad ole
+women, never gib noting to de poor, berry hard, berry hard. Me advise
+you change your conduct, or, as sure as eggs is eggs, he send me up
+again for you no time.' Den I gave two great 'Yah! yah's!' again berry
+loud, and showed de white ob my eyes, and dey went down on to knees
+again, and I go quietly round corner ob house, and walk home wid de
+pig which was giben to me. Noting like stealing about dat, Massa
+Manley, sar!"
+
+Sam's story was received with roars of laughter, and when they had
+recovered themselves a little, Captain Manley said, "It is lucky we
+march to-morrow, Sam, for if the good woman were to catch a glimpse of
+you in uniform, and were to find she had been tricked, she might lay
+a complaint against you, and although, as you say, the pig was freely
+given to you, I imagine the Provost Marshal might consider that it was
+obtained under false pretences. But here are the other men outside, we
+had better adjourn, for every one is longing to hear your adventures."
+
+It was a lovely evening, and as the officers of the Norfolk Rangers
+sat or lay round the fire, which was lit for light and cheerfulness
+rather than warmth, the boys, after their long wanderings among
+strangers, felt how pleasant and bright life was among friends
+and comrades. They had first to relate their adventures with the
+guerillas, after which it was agreed that they had earned the right to
+be silent for the rest of the evening, and song, and jest, and merry
+story went round the ring.
+
+Sam was installed under the direction of the doctor, a jovial
+Irishman, as concocter of punch, and his office was by no means a
+sinecure.
+
+"Now, major, give us the song of the regiment," Captain Manley said,
+and, as he spoke, there was a general cry round the circle of "The
+Rangers, the Rangers." "I'm agreeable," the major said. "Give me
+another tumbler of punch to get my pipes in order. Make it a little
+sweeter than the last brew, Sam; yes, that's better. Well, here
+goes--full chorus, and no shirking."
+
+THE RANGERS.
+
+  "Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah!
+    Here's to the corps that we love so well;
+  Ever the first in the deadly fray,
+    Steady and firm amid shot and shell.
+  Scattered as skirmishers out in the front,
+    Contesting each foot of the ground we hold,
+  Nor yielding a step though we bear the brunt
+    Of the first attack of the foeman bold.
+
+      Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah!
+      Here's to the corps that we love so well;
+      Ever the first in the deadly fray,
+      Steady and firm amid shot and shell.
+
+  "Steady boys, steady, the foe falls back,
+    Sullenly back to the beat of the drum,
+  Hark to the thunder that nears our flank
+    Rally in square, boys, their cavalry come.
+  Squadron on squadron, wave upon wave,
+    Dashing along with an ocean's force,
+  But they break into spray on our bayonets' points,
+    And we mock at the fury of rider and horse.
+
+      Hurrah for the Rangers, &c.
+
+  "The gunner may boast of the death he deals
+    As he shatters the foe with his iron hail,
+  And may laugh with pride as he checks the charge,
+    Or sees the dark column falter and quail.
+  But the gunner fights with the foe afar,
+    In the rear of the line is the battery's place,
+  The Ranger fights with a sterner joy
+    For he strives with his foemen face to face.
+
+      Hurrah for the Rangers, &c.
+
+  "The cavalry man is dashing and gay,
+    His steed is fast, and his blade is fine,
+  He blithely rides to the fiercest fray,
+    And cuts his way through the foeman's line,
+  But the wild, fierce joys of the deadly breach,
+    Or the patient pluck of the serried square
+  Are far away from the horseman's reach,
+    While the Norfolk Rangers are sure to be there.
+
+      Hurrah for the Rangers, &c."
+
+Long, loud, and hearty was the cheering as the last chorus concluded.
+"Very good song, very well sung, jolly companions every one," shouted
+the doctor. "Now, Manley, keep the ball rolling, give us the 'The
+Bivouac,'" Captain Manley emptied his glass, and, without hesitation,
+began--
+
+THE BIVOUAC.
+
+  "The weary march is over, boys, the camp fire's burning bright,
+  So gather round the blazing logs, we'll keep high feast to-night,
+  For every heart is full of joy, and every cheek aglow,
+  That after months of waiting, at last we meet the foe.
+  To-morrow's sun will see the fight, and ere that sun goes down,
+  Our glorious flag another wreath of victory shall crown.
+
+    Hurrah, hurrah for the bivouac,
+    With comrades tried and true,
+    With faces bright, and spirits light,
+    And the foemen's fires in view.
+
+  "Then fill your cups with Spanish wine, and let the toast go round,
+  Here's a health to all who love us on dear old England's ground.
+  Be their tresses gold or auburn, or black as ebon's hue,
+  Be their eyes of witching hazel, loving gray, or heaven's blue,
+  Here's to them all, the girls we love, God bless them every one;
+  May we all be here to toast them when to-morrow's work is done.
+
+    Hurrah, hurrah, &c.
+
+  "But whate'er to-morrow bring us, it shall shed no gloom to-night,
+  For a British soldier does not flinch from thought of death in fight;
+  No better ending could we wish, no worthier do we know,
+  Than to fall for King and country, with our face towards the foe;
+  And if we go, our friends who stay will keep our memory bright,
+  And will drink to us in silence by many a camp-fire's light.
+
+    Hurrah, hurrah, &c."
+
+When the last chorus had ceased, the boys, who had had a long march
+that morning, and were thoroughly tired, stole quietly off to bed,
+but it was not till long after they had gone to sleep that the jovial
+party round the fire broke up, and that Sam was relieved from his
+duties of concocter of punch.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+BUSACO AND TORRES VEDRAS.
+
+
+Instead of pressing forward upon his invasion of Portugal, Massena
+prepared to besiege Almeida, and for a month the British and
+Portuguese army remained in their position within a few hours' march
+of that town. Wellington expected that Almeida would be able to
+resist for two months, and hoped to find some opportunity for falling
+suddenly upon the besiegers; but even a resistance of two months would
+have made it so late in the season that Massena must have postponed
+his invasion until the next spring.
+
+Upon the morning of the 26th of August the French batteries opened
+fire, and from Guarda the dull, heavy roar of artillery could be heard
+all day. As darkness fell, the officers of the Rangers were, as usual,
+assembling round their fire, when the earth seemed to shake beneath
+their feet, and a flash like that of summer lightning lit the eastern
+sky. "What can that be?" was the general exclamation. A minute later,
+and a deep, heavy, prolonged roar sounded in their ears--then all was
+quiet.
+
+"That is a big magazine," Captain Manley said, "and I'm afraid it's
+the town, for it sounded too heavy for a mere field magazine. If it be
+the town, you'll see it won't hold out much longer; even if the actual
+damage is not very great, a great explosion always damages the morale
+of a defense, and in that case we shall have Massena upon us, and
+there will be wigs on the green ere many days are over."
+
+Captain Manley's conclusions were correct. The magazine of Almeida had
+exploded with terrific effect. Only six houses were left standing in
+the town, a considerable portion of the ramparts was thrown down, and
+five hundred people killed on the spot. The stones were hurled in all
+directions with such force that forty of the besiegers were hurt in
+the trenches.
+
+Colonel Cox, who commanded, endeavored to rally the panic-stricken
+garrison, and upon the following morning attempted to negotiate with
+Massena, who sent an officer to demand instant surrender.
+
+Defense was, in fact, impossible, but Colonel Cox attempted to
+negotiate, because he hoped that Wellington would at once advance to
+his rescue. His intentions were frustrated, however, by the treachery
+and mutiny of the principal Portuguese officers under him, and the
+French at once took possession of the ruins.
+
+The British army fell back a short distance when the news of the
+disaster arrived, and a fortnight of great anxiety and watchfulness
+passed, as it was not certain by which road or roads Massena would
+advance.
+
+It was not until the 18th of September that Massena fairly commenced
+his march, having chosen the road from Visen through Martagoa, and the
+next day the news reached the Rangers that the British army was to
+concentrate on the heights of Busaco.
+
+"So we are going to have a fight for it," Carruthers said to the boys,
+as the officers assembled in readiness to take their places when the
+troops had fallen in. "What will be the end of it?"
+
+"We shall lick them," an old captain said, "though they are two to
+one, and then they will march round us somehow, and then we shall have
+to fall back in all haste on Lisbon, and embark there, and we shall
+eat our Christmas dinner in England."
+
+There was a general murmur of assent, for at that time the belief was
+almost universal in the British army that they would be forced to
+abandon Portugal.
+
+"I do not know," Major Fanshawe said. "I heard last night, from a
+man who has just returned from sick leave at Lisbon, that there are
+thousands of peasants employed under our engineers in getting up some
+tremendous works some fifteen miles this side of Lisbon. I should not
+be surprised yet if Massena finds the chief a nut too hard to crack,
+with all his force."
+
+"I have heard something about these works at Torres Vedras," Captain
+Manley said, "a mere rumor; still I believe there must be something in
+it. Wellington has only some twenty-five thousand British troops, and
+as many Portuguese, while Massena has over a hundred thousand veterans
+at his command. Our game would be hopeless unless we have something to
+fall back on. No; I have every faith in our general. But there goes
+the bugle."
+
+On the 24th the Rangers, with the rest of Picton's division, arrived
+on the crest of Busaco, where Cole's and Craufurd's divisions arrived
+on the same day. This position was one of immense strength, being a
+long ridge, with a very deep valley in front. Upon the opposite side
+of this ravine the slope was as steep and sharp as that of Busaco
+itself, so that the opposite crest was within easy cannon shot.
+The enemy, in order to attack the British position, would have to
+descend into the bottom of this steep ravine, and then climb up the
+precipitous ascent, to meet the British soldiers awaiting them, fresh
+and unshaken, at the top. So strong, indeed, was the position that
+the English generals were doubtful whether Massena would venture to
+attack.
+
+Upon the 25th Craufurd moved his division forward, and would have
+repeated his mistake of the Coa had not Wellington himself gone
+forward and recalled the troops, bringing them off with difficulty
+in the face of the advancing masses of the French. By three in the
+afternoon, 40,000 French infantry were on the ridge opposite Busaco,
+and it appeared probable that the battle would take place that
+afternoon, in which case the British position would have been
+precarious, for neither Spencer's, Hill's, nor Leith's divisions were
+up.
+
+Massena, however, was miles behind, and Ney, who commanded the
+advance, could not attack without orders; thus, the moment favorable
+for the French passed by. When Massena arrived next day, the British
+divisions were all up and in their places, and the long crest of
+Busaco swarmed with troops. Hill occupied the right across the road to
+Pena Cova, then came Leith's 5th division, then came Picton with the
+3d division, with Spencer's division, the 1st, next to him. On a
+plateau in front of a convent lay Craufurd and Pack, while Cole, with
+the 4th division, was on the left.
+
+The 27th and 28th were passed in comparative tranquillity, the rival
+armies surveying each other across the chasm. From the woods far below
+came up the constant crack of the rifle, as the skirmishers on either
+side pushed each other backwards; and on the evening of the 28th this
+fighting increased so much in strength and intensity, that the British
+troops were some time under arms in expectation of a night attack, for
+the enemy's riflemen had pressed far up on the hill-side towards the
+British lines. As the night went on, however, the fire ceased, and the
+dark ravine between the two long lines of bright watch-fires became
+hushed and still.
+
+The Rangers were with Picton's division, and were out as an advance
+half way down the ravine, two companies being down in the bottom as
+skirmishers. Morning was but just breaking when a heavy fire burst out
+in front. The regiment sprang to its feet, and prepared for action.
+It was not long in coming, for the fire rolled rapidly up the hill
+towards them, and the skirmishing companies came running back, pressed
+by a heavy column of the enemy. Reynier had formed in two divisions,
+one of which was now pressing forward against Picton's right, while
+the object of the other was to gain the crest still farther to the
+right, and so place themselves between Picton and Leigh. The whole
+regiment was at once engaged, but the French assault was too powerful
+to be resisted, and the Rangers and the other regiments of the
+advanced brigade gave way sullenly, while the French eagerly pressed
+up the hill, although a battery opened upon them from the crest, while
+they were unsupported by their own artillery.
+
+"Golly, Massa Peter, dese fellows fight berry hard; look as if dey
+lick us dis time," the black, who was in Peter's company, said to him
+as the regiment retreated.
+
+"The battle has only begun yet, Sam. We have plenty of fresh troops at
+the top of the hill."
+
+"Good ting, dat, Massa Peter. Berry hard work, dis--climb hill, carry
+kit, fire gun, dodge de bullets, all sam time."
+
+"You didn't dodge that bullet sharp enough, Sam," Peter said with a
+laugh, as the negro's shako was carried off with a ball.
+
+"Him cum too fast. Dere, you frog-eating thief." he said angrily as he
+fired his musket at an advancing foe. "Dat serve you right," he went
+on to himself as the Frenchman fell. "You spoil Sam's hat. Dis colored
+gentleman catch cold first time him come on to rain."
+
+The French continued their impetuous advance. Picton's right, as they
+climbed the hill, fell back towards his center, and in half an hour
+from the first shot being fired the head of the French column had won
+the crest, and, being between Leigh and Picton's divisions, had cut
+the British position. Then the column nearest to Picton's division
+began to wheel to its right, so as to sweep the crest.
+
+"Lie down, the Rangers; every man down," shouted the colonel, and the
+breathless men threw themselves panting on the ground. A wild Irish
+shout was heard behind them as they did so, and a tremendous volley of
+musketry rang over their heads, and then the 88th and a wing of the
+45th dashed across them, and, with fierce cheers, charged that portion
+of the column engaged in wheeling. Breathless and in disorder from
+their prodigious efforts, the French were unable to resist this fresh
+attack. In an instant the British were among them, and mixed up in
+wild confusion, fighting hand to hand, the mass of combatants went
+mingled together down the hill. Nor was the success of the French
+column which had gained the crest of long duration, for Leith brought
+up one of his brigades; Colonel Cameron, with the 9th Regiment, dashed
+at the enemy with the bayonet, without firing a single shot, while
+the 38th attacked their flank; and the French, unable to resist the
+onslaught, relinquished their position and retreated down the hill.
+Nor upon the French right had Ney's attack proved more successful.
+
+Napier thus describes the combat in this quarter of the field:--"When
+the light broke, three heavy masses detached from the sixth corps were
+seen to enter the woods below, and to throw forward a profusion of
+skirmishers; one of them, under General Marchand, emerging from the
+dark chasm and following the main road, seemed intent to turn the
+right of the light division; a second, under Loison, made straight up
+the mountain against the front; the third remained in reserve. Simon's
+brigade, leading Loison's attack, ascended with a wonderful alacrity,
+and though the light troops plied it incessantly with musketry, and
+the artillery bullets swept through it from the first to the last
+section, its order was never disturbed, nor its speed in the least
+abated. Ross's guns were worked with incredible quickness, yet their
+range was palpably contracted every round; the enemy's shots came
+ringing up in a sharper key, the English skirmishers, breathless
+and begrimed with powder, rushed over the edge of the ascent, the
+artillery drew back, and the victorious cries of the French were heard
+within a few yards of the summit. Craufurd, standing alone on one of
+the rocks, had been intently watching the progress of their attack,
+and now, with a shrill tone, ordered the two regiments in reserve to
+charge. The next moment a horrid shout startled the French column, and
+eighteen hundred British bayonets went sparkling over the hill. Yet so
+brave, so hardy were the leading French, that each man of the first
+section raised his musket, and two officers and ten men fell before
+them. Not a Frenchman had missed his mark. They could do no more. The
+head of their column was violently thrown back upon the rear, both
+flanks were overlapped at the same time by the English wings, three
+terrible discharges at five yards' distance shattered the wavering
+mass, and a long line of broken arms and bleeding carcases marked the
+line of flight."
+
+Ney did not renew the attack, and with some desultory skirmishing the
+battle ended at two o'clock, and an hour's truce enabled both parties
+to carry off their wounded.
+
+Small parties of the French came in contact with the English
+skirmishers during the afternoon, but the battle of Busaco was over.
+
+"Don't call dat much of battle," Sam said discontentedly. "Just little
+fierce fight, berry out of bref, and den, just as second wind came,
+all ober."
+
+The battle of Busaco was indeed one of secondary importance. The
+losses were not great on either side, although that of the French was
+fully threefold greater than that of the British, as the former were
+exposed during their attack to the grape and shell of the British
+guns, while the French guns afforded no assistance to their infantry.
+The French loss, in killed and wounded and prisoners, did not exceed
+4000, of which only 800 were killed. Nor was any strategical advantage
+gained by the battle, for the French, upon the following day, found
+a road across the hills to the British left from Martagoa through
+Bonzalva.
+
+Throughout the day they made feints of renewing the attack upon the
+English position, and it was not until late in the afternoon that long
+columns of men were seen crossing the hill to the left; and Wellington
+discovered that Busaco had been won in vain, for that his flank was
+turned, and there was nothing for it but to fall back upon Torres
+Vedras. Before night the whole British army was in retreat.
+
+"What a horrible scene of confusion," Tom remarked, as they marched
+into the town of Coimbra next day.
+
+"Confusion!" Captain Manley said; "it is enough to drive a
+commander-in-chief out of his mind. Here Wellington has for weeks
+been endeavoring to get the Portuguese Government to compel all the
+population to retire upon Lisbon, carrying all they can, destroying
+the mills, and burning all the corn they could not carry off. The
+Government did issue the order, but it has taken no steps whatever to
+carry it out, although they knew all along that we could never repel
+the invasion in the open. As it is, the greater portion of these poor
+wretches will lose all they possess, which they might have carried
+off quietly enough during the last two months. Many of them will lose
+their lives, and they will block the roads so that we shall have the
+French down on us to a certainty."
+
+Nothing could be more sad than the scene. The streets of Coimbra were
+crowded with fugitives from the country round, and these, as well as
+the inhabitants, were all preparing to push onwards towards Lisbon.
+Bullock carts and carriages, mules, donkeys, and horses were crowded
+together, all laden with the aged, the children, the sick, and such
+property as was most portable and valuable. Happily Massena had
+a circuitous detour to make; the road in the mountain defile was
+scarcely passable, and throughout the march he displayed but little
+energy; consequently it was not until the morning of the first of
+October that his cavalry engaged those of the light division which was
+covering the retreat. The division fell back through the town, and the
+inhabitants, who had lingered to the last in some vague hope that the
+French would not come, now rushed out again. The bridge behind the
+town was choked, and the troops had to halt for some time. In the rear
+the pistol shots of the cavalry told of the approach of the French,
+and the din made by the panic-stricken fugitives was increased by the
+yells of the prisoners shut up and forgotten in the prison hard by.
+Their cries and supplications were too painful to be resisted, and the
+British forced the prison doors and let them free. Once across the
+bridge, the troops found the defile of Condeixa so choked up that it
+was impossible to effect a passage, and, had the French pressed them
+the division must have been destroyed.
+
+The French infantry, however, had not arrived, and by night the road
+was cleared, and the troops passed on.
+
+There was no pursuit, for Massena allowed his troops to halt and
+plunder Coimbra, and the British by easy marches, fell back to
+Torres Vedras; but though unpursued, the disorder and relaxation of
+discipline which always marks a retreat, showed itself, and Wellington
+was obliged to hang several plunderers, and to resort to other severe
+measures to restore to discipline that army which, only a week before,
+had repulsed the best troops of France. Towards the end of the march
+the French pressed them again, and Craufurd, with his light division,
+had a narrow escape of being cut off.
+
+Great was the satisfaction of the British troops when they took up the
+position so carefully prepared for them; equally great the surprise of
+Massena and the French army when they beheld the almost impregnable
+line of redoubts and fortresses of whose very existence they had only
+heard a confused rumor two or three days before. And yet formidable
+as was the chain of forts occupied by the British, this was weak in
+comparison to the second line, some five or six miles in the rear,
+to which Wellington would have fallen back if driven from his first
+position. This second position was indeed that which he had originally
+intended to have taken up, the redoubts on the exterior range of hills
+being intended as outposts; but, while Massena delayed his advance,
+the outside line of fortifications had so grown and increased in
+strength, that Wellington resolved to hold them in the first place.
+
+There were, therefore, as will be seen by the plan, three lines of
+defense. The first from Alhandra on the Tagus to Zizandre on the
+sea-coast. This, following the windings of the hills, was twenty-nine
+miles long; the second and main line was from Quintella on the Tagus
+to the mouth of the San Lorenza, twenty-four miles in length; the
+third, intended to cover an embarkation, in case of necessity,
+extended from Passo d'Arcos on the Tagus to the town of Junquera on
+the coast.
+
+Massena spent some days in surveying the British position, and came to
+the conclusion that it was too strong to be attacked. Had the order
+of Wellington been carried out, and the whole country wasted of
+provisions, the French army must have made a precipitate retreat to
+avoid starvation, for they had no provisions or connection with Spain.
+Wilson and Trant, with Portuguese levies, hung upon their rear, and
+captured Coimbra, where Massena had left his sick and wounded, 5000 in
+number, upon the very day after the main French army advanced from the
+town. So vast were the supplies, however, left in the country that
+Massena was able to take up his position, first immediately in front
+of the British lines, and afterwards at Santarem, within a day's march
+of them, and to maintain his army in food throughout the winter until
+the beginning of March.
+
+"Have you seen the _Gazette_, Scudamore?" Carruthers asked, rushing
+into the tent one morning about a week after the regiment had settled
+down in its tents on the heights of Torres Vedras.
+
+"No; what's up?" Tom replied.
+
+"There you are; you have both got your steps. Thomas Scudamore,
+ensign, Norfolk Rangers, to be lieutenant, for distinguished services
+in the field. Peter Scudamore, ditto, ditto. I wondered the chief had
+done nothing for you after your journey through Spain."
+
+"I am sure I did not expect anything," Tom answered, "and was quite
+content when the colonel told us that Lord Wellington had said he was
+pleased with the manner we had done our work. However, I am very glad;
+but it is not pleasant going over five or six fellows' heads."
+
+"Fortune of war," Carruthers said laughing. "Besides, two of them are
+at the depot, Sankey is away on sick leave, and none of the three who
+are senior to you here will ever set the Thames on fire. No, no, you
+have fairly earned your step and no one can say a word against it."
+
+The news soon spread, and the boys were heartily congratulated by all
+the officers of the regiment on their promotion, which placed them
+next on the list to Carruthers, who had previously been the junior
+lieutenant. Promotion in those days was rapid, and after a severe
+engagement an ensign only joined upon the previous week might find
+himself a lieutenant, from the number of death vacancies caused in
+the ranks above him. The Norfolk Rangers had not suffered heavily at
+Talavera, or the boys might have had their lieutenant's rank before
+this, without performing any exceptional services.
+
+"I wish we could get two months' leave, Tom," Peter said that night.
+"Of course it is impossible, but it would be jolly to drop in upon
+Rhoda. By her letter she seems well and happy, and aunt is very kind
+to her. It would be nice; and now we are lieutenants, aunt wouldn't
+tell us to rub our shoes."
+
+"No," Tom laughed, "or be afraid of our pelting her pigeons and
+Minnie."
+
+"No," Peter said. "Evidently she is coming round. Rhoda said that
+since she has heard that we have got our commissions she has given
+up prophesying once or twice a day that we shall come to a bad
+end--probably hanging."
+
+"Yes, and Rhoda said in her letter yesterday that aunt was quite
+touched with those lace mantillas we got at Madrid, and sent off the
+day after we rejoined, and actually remarked that, although we could
+no longer be looked upon as boys, and seemed really as hair-brained
+and fond of getting into scrapes as ever, yet it was evident that we
+were good, kindly lads, and meant well at heart."
+
+"I wish," Tom said, with a sudden burst of laughter, "that we could
+dress in our old disguises, I as a student of theology you as a mild
+young novice; what a lark we would have with her!" and the boys went
+off into such shouts of laughter, that their aunt would have thought
+them more scatter-brained than ever if she had heard them, while from
+the tent of Captain Manley on one side, and of Carruthers and another
+young officer on the other, came indignant expostulations, and
+entreaties that they would keep quiet, and let other people go to
+sleep.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+ALBUERA.
+
+
+Very heavily did five months in the lines of Torres Vedras pass to the
+Norfolk Rangers. When, in the beginning of November, Massena fell back
+to Sautarem, the greater portion of the army followed him in readiness
+for attack should any openings be found. Massena, however, entrenched
+himself in a very strong position, and Wellington could no more attack
+him than he could attack the lines of Torres Vedras; so that both
+armies faced each other in inactivity until the beginning of March,
+when Massena broke up his camp and began to retreat.
+
+The Norfolk Rangers had been one of the regiments which had remained
+in their quarters on Torres Vedras throughout the winter, and great
+was the joy with which they received orders to strike their tents
+and push on in pursuit. The retreat of Massena was masterly. Ney's
+division covered the rear, and several sharp fights took place which
+are known in history as the combats of Pombal, Redinha, Cazal Nova,
+Foz d'Aronce, and Sabugal.
+
+In most of these the enemy were driven from their position by the
+British outflanking them and threatening their line of retreat; but in
+the last, by a mistake of General Erskine, a portion of his division
+attacked the enemy in rear, and, although vastly outnumbered, drove
+him off from the crest he held with desperate valor. Wellington
+himself said, "This was one of the most glorious actions British
+troops were ever engaged in."
+
+The next day the French crossed the Coa and Turones, and took up their
+position under the guns of Ciudad Rodrigo, which they had left six
+months before with the full assurance that they were going to conquer
+Portugal, and drive the British into the sea. The invasion cost
+Massena thirty thousand men, killed in battle, taken prisoners, or
+dead from hardships, fatigues and fevers.
+
+The Scudamores were not present at the battle of Sabugal, for on the
+afternoon after the combat of Foz d'Aronce an orderly rode up to the
+regiment and handed a note to the colonel. He read it, and at once
+summoned the Scudamores at his side.
+
+"An order from the commander-in-chief," he said, "for you to go to him
+at once."
+
+Following the orderly, the boys soon arrived at the cottage at which
+Lord Wellington had established his headquarters.
+
+"His lordship is with Lord Beresford," the aide-de-camp to whom they
+gave their names said, "but the orders are that you are to be shown in
+at once."
+
+The lads were ushered into a small room, where, seated at a table,
+were the commanders-in-chief of the British and the Portuguese troops.
+
+"Young gentlemen," the former said, looking up with his keen piercing
+eyes, "I have not seen you since your return from Spain. I am content
+with what you did, and with the detailed report you sent me in. I
+shall keep my eye upon you. Lord Beresford has asked me for two
+officers as aides-de-camp, and he specially requires them to have a
+perfect knowledge of Spanish. I have mentioned your names to him. It
+is not often that I confidently recommend young officers, but from
+what I know of you I have felt able to do so in the present case. You
+will, with him, have opportunities of distinguishing yourselves
+such as you could not have with your regiment. You accept the
+appointments?"
+
+Tom and Peter would far rather have remained with their regiment,
+but they felt that, after what Lord Wellington had said, they could
+not refuse; they consequently expressed at once their willingness
+to serve, and their thanks to the general for his kindness in
+recommending them.
+
+"You can ride, I hope?" Lord Beresford, a powerfully-built,
+pleasant-looking man, said.
+
+"Yes, sir, we can both ride, but at present--"
+
+"You have no horses, of course?" Lord Beresford put in. "I will
+provide you with horses, and will assign servants to you from one of
+the cavalry regiments with me. Will you join me at daybreak to-morrow?
+we shall march at once."
+
+There was a general expression of regret when the Scudamores informed
+their comrades that they were again ordered on detached duty. As
+to Sam, when Tom told him that he could not accompany them, he was
+uproarious in his lamentations, and threatened to desert from his
+regiment in order to follow them. At this the boys laughed, and told
+Sam that he would be arrested and sent back before he had gone six
+hours.
+
+"I tink, Massa Tom, dat you might hab told de general dat you hab got
+an fust-class serbent, and dat you bring him wid you."
+
+"But we shall be mounted now, Sam, and must have mounted men with us.
+You can't ride, you know."
+
+"Yes, massa, dis child ride first-rate, he can."
+
+"Why, Sam, I heard you say not long ago you had never ridden on a
+horse all your life."
+
+"Never hab, massa, dat's true 'nuff; but Sam sure he can ride. Berry
+easy ting dat. Sit on saddle, one leg each side--not berry difficult
+dat. Sam see tousand soldiers do dat ebery day; dey sit quite easy on
+saddle; much more easy dat dan beat big drum."
+
+The boys laughed heartily at Sam's notion of riding without practice,
+and assured him that it was not so easy as he imagined.
+
+"Look here, Sam," Peter said at last, "you practice riding a little,
+and then next time we get away we will ask for you to go with us." And
+with this Sam was obliged to be content.
+
+Half an hour later, when the boys were chatting with Captain Manley,
+Carruthers, and two or three other officers, in the tent of the
+first-named officer, they heard a commotion outside, with shouts of
+laughter, in which they joined as soon as they went out and saw what
+was going on.
+
+Sam, upon leaving the Scudamores, determined at once upon trying the
+experiment of riding, in order that he might--for he had no doubt all
+would be easy enough--ride triumphantly up to his masters' tent and
+prove his ability to accompany them at once. He was not long before
+he saw a muleteer coming along sitting carelessly on his mule, with
+both legs on one side of the animal, side-saddle fashion, as is the
+frequent custom of muleteers. It was evident, by the slowness of his
+pace, that he was not pressed for time.
+
+Sam thought that this was a fine opportunity.
+
+"Let me have a ride?" he said to the muleteer in broken Portuguese.
+
+The man shook his head. Sam held out a quarter of a dollar. "There,"
+he said, "I'll give you that for a hour's ride."
+
+The muleteer hesitated, and then said, "The mule is very bad tempered
+with strangers."
+
+"Oh, dat all nonsense," Sam thought, "he only pretend dat as excuse;
+any one can see de creature as quiet as lamb; don't he let his master
+sit on him sideways?"
+
+"All right," he said aloud, "I try him."
+
+The muleteer dismounted, and Sam prepared to take his place on the
+saddle. By this time several of the Rangers had gathered round, and
+these foreseeing, from the appearance of the mule and the look of sly
+amusement in the face of the muleteer, that there was likely to be
+some fun, at once proposed to assist, which they did by giving advice
+to Sam of the most opposite nature. Sam was first going to mount on
+the off side, but this irregularity was repressed, and one wag, taking
+the stirrup of the near side in his hand, said, "Now, Sam, up you go,
+never mind what these fellows say, you put your right foot in the
+stirrup, and lift your left over the saddle."
+
+Sam acted according to these instructions, and found himself, to his
+intense amazement and the delight of the bystanders, sitting with his
+face to the mule's tail.
+
+"Hullo," he exclaimed in astonishment, "dis all wrong; you know noting
+about de business, you Bill Atkins."
+
+And Sam prepared to descend, when, at his first movement, the mule put
+down his head and flung his heels high in the air. Sam instinctively
+threw himself forward, but not recovering his upright position before
+the mule again flung up her hind quarters, he received a violent
+blow on the nose. "Golly!" exclaimed the black in a tone of extreme
+anguish, as, with water streaming from his eyes, he instinctively
+clutched the first thing which came to hand, the root of the mule's
+tail, and held on like grim death. The astonished mule lashed out
+wildly and furiously, but Sam, with his body laid close on her back,
+his hands grasping her tail, and his legs and feet pressing tight to
+her flanks, held on with the clutch of despair.
+
+"Seize de debil!--seize him!--he gone mad!"--he shouted frantically,
+but the soldiers were in such fits of laughter that they could do
+nothing.
+
+Then the mule, finding that he could not get rid of this singular
+burden by kicking, started suddenly off at full gallop.
+
+"Stop him--stop him," yelled Sam. "Gracious me, dis am drefful."
+
+This was the sight which met the eyes of the Scudamores and their
+brother officers as they issued from their tents. The soldiers were
+all out of their tents now, and the air rang with laughter mingled
+with shouts of "Go it, moke!" "Hold on, Sam!"
+
+"Stop that mule," Captain Manley shouted, "or the man will be killed."
+
+Several soldiers ran to catch at the bridle, but the mule swerved and
+dashed away out of camp along the road.
+
+"Look, look," Tom said, "there are the staff, and Lord Wellington
+among them. The mule's going to charge them."
+
+The road was somewhat narrow, with a wall of four feet high on either
+side, and the general, who was riding at the head of the party, drew
+his rein when he saw the mule coming along at a furious gallop. The
+staff did the same, and a general shout was raised to check or divert
+her wild career. The obstinate brute, however, maddened by the shouts
+which had greeted her from all sides, and the strange manner in which
+she was being ridden, never swerved from her course. When she was
+within five yards of the party, the general turned his horse, touched
+him with his spur, and leaped him lightly over the wall; one or two
+others followed his example, but the others had not time to do so
+before the mule was among them. Two horses and riders were thrown
+down, one on either side, with the impetus of the shock, and then,
+kicking, striking and charging, the animal made its way past the
+others and dashed on in despite of the attempts to stop her, and
+the cries of "Shoot the brute," "Ride him down," and the angry
+ejaculations of those injured in its passage. Thirty yards behind the
+group of officers were the escort, and these prepared to catch the
+mule, when turning to the left she leaped the wall, eliciting a scream
+of terror from Sam, who was nearly shaken from his hold by the sudden
+jerk.
+
+The anger of the officers was changed into a burst of amusement at
+seeing Sam's dark face and staring eyes over the mule's crupper, and
+even Lord Wellington smiled grimly. An order was hastily given, and
+four troopers detached themselves from the escort and started off in
+pursuit. The mule was, however, a fast one, and maddened by fright,
+and it was some time before the foremost of the troopers was up to
+her. As he came alongside, the mule suddenly swerved round and lashed
+out viciously, one of her heels coming against the horse's ribs, and
+the other against the leg of the rider, who, in spite of his thick
+jack-boot, for some time thought that his leg was broken.
+
+He fell behind, and the others, rendered cautious by the lesson, came
+up but slowly, and prepared to close upon the animal's head, one
+from each side. Just as they were going to do so, however, they were
+startled by a scattered fire of musketry, and by the sound of balls
+whizzing about their ears, and discovered that in the ardor of the
+chase they had passed over the space which separated the French from
+the English lines, and that they were close to the former. At the same
+moment they saw a party of cavalry stealing round to cut off their
+retreat. Turning their horses, the dragoons rode off at full speed,
+but the French cavalry, on fresher horses, would have caught them
+before they reached the English lines had not a troop of British horse
+dashed forward to meet them upon seeing their danger. As to the mule,
+she continued her wild gallop into the French lines, where she was
+soon surrounded and captured.
+
+The boys were greatly vexed at the loss of their faithful black, but
+they had little time for grieving, for an hour after they rode off
+with General Beresford's division. Three days' march brought them
+to Campo Mayor, a town which had, two days before, surrendered to
+the French, who, surprised by the sudden appearance of the British,
+evacuated the place hastily and retreated, after suffering much from
+a brilliant charge of the 13th Hussars, who, although unsupported,
+charged right through the French cavalry, and Beresford then prepared
+to lay siege to Badajos. Had he pushed forward at once, he would have
+found the place unprepared for a siege, but, delaying a few days at
+Elvas to give his tired troops repose, the French repaired the walls,
+and were in a position to offer a respectable defense, when he made
+his appearance under its walls. The army was very badly provided with
+heavy guns, but the approaches were opened and the siege commenced in
+regular form, when the news arrived that Soult was marching with a
+powerful army to its relief. The guns were therefore withdrawn, the
+siege raised, and Beresford marched to meet Soult at Albuera.
+
+On the 15th of May he took up his position on rising ground looking
+down on Albuera, having the river in his front. Acting with him, and
+nominally under his orders, was a Spanish force under Blake. This
+was intended to occupy the right of the position, but with the usual
+Spanish dilatoriness, instead of being upon the ground, as he had
+promised, by noon, Blake did not arrive until past midnight; the
+French accordingly crossed the river unmolested, and the British
+general found his right turned.
+
+Beresford's position was now a very faulty one, as the woods
+completely hid the movements of the enemy, and a high hill, which they
+had at once seized, flanked the whole allied position and threatened
+its line of retreat.
+
+When the morning of the 16th dawned the armies were numerically very
+unequal. The British had 30,000 infantry, 2,000 cavalry, and 38 guns;
+the French, 19,000 infantry, 4,000 cavalry, and 40 guns; but of these
+the French were all veteran troops, while Beresford had but 6,000
+British troops, the remainder being Spanish and Portuguese, upon
+whom no reliance whatever was to be placed. The British officers
+present were all of opinion that their chances of success, under
+the circumstances, were slight indeed.
+
+The battle commenced at nine in the morning by an attack by the French
+general Godinot upon the bridge of Albuera. Their columns were,
+however, so completely plowed by the guns of the Portuguese upon
+the eminence behind it, that they made no progress, and Beresford
+perceived at once that the main attack would be made on his right. He
+despatched Tom Scudamore with orders to Blake to throw back his troops
+at right angles to the main front. The pig-headed Spaniard refused to
+obey, asserting that the main attack was in front. Colonel Hardinge
+was sent to insist upon the order being carried out, but Blake still
+refused, and Beresford himself rode furiously across and took the
+command just as the French column debouched from the wood on the
+right.
+
+Before the Spanish movement was completed the French were among them.
+Their cavalry swept round to the right rear, and menaced the line of
+retreat, the infantry charged the wavering Spanish battalions, and the
+latter at once fell into confusion and began to fall back. William
+Stewart now arrived with a brigade of the second division to endeavor
+to retrieve the day; but as they were advancing into position, four
+regiments of French cavalry, whose movements were hidden in the
+driving rain until they were close at hand, fell upon them and rode
+down two-thirds of the brigade, the 31st regiment alone having time
+to form square and repulse the horsemen.
+
+Beresford himself, with his staff, was in the middle of the melee, and
+the lads found themselves engaged in hand-to-hand combats with the
+French troopers. All was confusion. Peter was unhorsed by the shock
+of a French hussar, but Tom shot the trooper before he could cut Peter
+down. Free for a moment, he looked round, and saw a French lancer
+charging, lance at rest, at Lord Beresford. "Look out, sir!" he
+shouted, and the general, turning round, swept aside the lance thrust
+with his arm; and as the lancer, carried on by the impetus of his
+charge, dashed against him, he seized him by the throat and waist,
+lifted him bodily from his saddle, and hurled him insensible to
+the ground. Just at this moment General Lumley arrived with some
+Portuguese cavalry, and the French lancers galloped off.
+
+The Spanish cavalry, who had orders to charge the French cavalry in
+flank, galloped up until within a few yards of them, and then turned
+and fled shamefully.
+
+Beresford, now furious at the cowardice of the Spanish infantry,
+seized one of their ensigns by the shoulder, and dragged him, with his
+colors, to the front by main force, but the infantry would not even
+then advance.
+
+The driving rain saved the allied army at this critical moment, for
+Soult was unable to see the terrible confusion which reigned in their
+ranks, and kept his heavy columns in hand when an attack would have
+carried with it certain victory.
+
+In the pause which ensued, the British regiments began to make their
+way to the front. Colbourn, with the 31st Regiment, was already there;
+Stewart brought up Haughton's brigade; and the 29th burst its way
+through the flying Spaniards and joined the 31st, these movements
+being made under a storm of shot and shell from the French artillery.
+Colonel Hartman brought up the British artillery, and the Spanish
+generals Zayas and Ballesteros succeeded in checking and bringing
+forward again some of the Spanish infantry.
+
+The French advanced in great force, the artillery on both sides poured
+in grape at short distance, and the carnage was terrible. Still the
+little band of British held their ground. Stewart was twice wounded,
+Haughton and Colonels Duckworth and Inglis slain. Of the 57th Regiment
+twenty-two officers and four hundred men fell out of the five hundred
+that had mounted the hill, and the other regiments had suffered nearly
+as severely. Not a third were standing unhurt, and fresh columns of
+the French were advancing.
+
+The battle looked desperate, and Beresford made preparations for a
+retreat. At this moment, however, Colonel Hardinge brought up General
+Cole with the fourth division, and Colonel Abercrombie with the third
+brigade of Colbourn's second division. Beresford recalled his order
+for retreat, and the terrible fight continued. The fourth division was
+composed of two brigades, the one, a Portuguese under General Harvey,
+was pushed down to the right to keep off the French cavalry, while the
+Fusilier brigade, composed of the 7th and 23rd fusilier regiments,
+under Sir William Myers, climbed the desperately contested hill, which
+Abercombie ascended also, more on the left.
+
+It was time, for the whole of the French reserves were now coming into
+action; six guns were already in the enemy's possession, the remnant
+of Haughton's brigade could no longer sustain its ground, and the
+heavy French columns were advancing exultantly to assured victory.
+
+Suddenly, through the smoke, Cole's fusilier brigade appeared on
+the right of Haughton's brigade, just as Abercrombie came up on its
+left. Startled by the sight, and by the heavy fire, the French column
+paused, and, to quote Napier's glowing words, "hesitated, and then,
+vomiting forth a storm of fire, hastily endeavored to enlarge their
+front, while a fearful discharge of grape from all their artillery
+whistled through the British ranks. Myers was killed, Cole and the
+three colonels, Ellis, Blakeney and Hawkshawe, fell wounded; and the
+fusilier battalions, struck by the iron tempest, reeled and staggered
+like sinking ships; but suddenly and sternly recovering, they closed
+with their terrible enemies, and then was seen with what a strength
+and majesty the British soldier fights. In vain did Soult with voice
+and gesture animate his Frenchmen; in vain did the hardiest veterans
+break from the crowded columns and sacrifice their lives to gain time
+for the mass to open out on such a fair field; in vain did the mass
+itself bear up, and, fiercely striving, fire indiscriminately upon
+friends and foes, while the horsemen hovering on its flank threatened
+to charge the advancing line. Nothing could stop that astonishing
+infantry; no sudden burst of undisciplined valor, no nervous
+enthusiasm weakened the stability of their order; their flashing eyes
+were bent on the dark columns in their front, their measured tread
+shook the ground, their dreadful volleys swept away the head of every
+formation, their deafening shouts overpowered the dissonant cries that
+broke from all parts of the tumultuous crowd, as, slowly and with
+horrid carnage, it was pushed by the incessant vigor of the attack to
+the farthest edge of the hill. In vain did the French reserves mix
+with the struggling multitude to sustain the fight; their efforts only
+increased the irremediable confusion, and the mighty mass breaking off
+like a loosened cliff, went headlong down the steep; the rain flowed
+after in streams discolored with blood, and eighteen hundred unwounded
+men, the remnant of six thousand unconquerable British soldiers, stood
+triumphant on the fatal hill."
+
+While this dreadful fight was going on, Hamilton's and Collier's
+Portuguese divisions, ten thousand strong, marched to support the
+British, but they did not reach the summit of the hill until the
+battle was over; they suffered, however, a good deal of loss from the
+French artillery, which, to cover the retreat, opened furiously upon
+them.
+
+The French were in no position to renew the attack, the allies quite
+incapable of pursuit, and when night fell the two armies were in the
+same position they had occupied twenty-four hours before.
+
+Never was British valor more conspicuously displayed than at the
+battle of Albuera. Out of 6,000 infantry they lost 4,200 killed and
+wounded, while the Spanish and Portuguese had but 2,600 killed and
+wounded out of a total of 34,000; the French loss was over 8,000.
+
+This desperate fight had lasted but four hours, but to all engaged
+it seemed an age. The din, the whirl, the storm of shot, the fierce
+charges of the cavalry, the swaying backwards and forwards of the
+fight, the disastrous appearance of the battle from the first, all
+combined to make up a perfectly bewildering confusion.
+
+The Scudamores, after its commencement, had seen but little of each
+other. Whenever one or other of them found their way to the general,
+who was ever in the thickest of the fray, it was but to remain there
+for a moment or two before being despatched with fresh messages.
+
+Tom's horse was shot under him early in the day, but he obtained a
+remount from an orderly and continued his duty until, just as the day
+was won, he received a musket ball in the shoulder. He half fell, half
+dismounted, and, giddy and faint, lay down and remained there until
+the cessation of the fire told him that the battle was over. Then he
+staggered to his feet and sought a surgeon. He presently found one
+hard at work under a tree, but there was so large a number of wounded
+men lying or sitting round, that Tom saw that it would be hours before
+he could be attended to. As he turned to go he saw an officer of the
+staff ride by.
+
+"Ah, Scudamore! Are you hit too?--not very badly, I hope? The chief
+was asking after you just now."
+
+"My shoulder is smashed, I think," Tom said, "and the doctor has his
+hands full at present; but if you will tie my arm tight across my
+chest with my sash, I shall be able to get on."
+
+The officer at once leapt from his horse, and proceeded to bind Tom's
+arm in the position he requested.
+
+"Have you seen my brother," Tom asked.
+
+"No, I have not; he was close to Beresford when the fusiliers dashed
+up the hill; his horse fell dead, but he was not hit, for I saw him
+jump up all right. I did not see him afterwards. As he could not have
+got a fresh mount then, I expect he joined the fusiliers and went up
+the hill."
+
+"Is the loss heavy?" Tom asked.
+
+"Awful--awful," the officer said. "If it had lasted another quarter of
+an hour, there would have been nobody left alive; as it is, there are
+not 2,000 men at the outside on their feet."
+
+"What, altogether?" Tom exclaimed.
+
+"Altogether," the officer answered sadly. "We have lose two men out of
+every three who went into it."
+
+"Thank you," Tom said. "Now where shall I find the general?"
+
+"Up on the hill. I shall see you there in a few minutes. I hope you
+will find your brother all right."
+
+Very slowly did Tom make his way up the steep slope, sitting down to
+rest many times, for he was faint from loss of blood and sick with the
+pain of his wound, and it was a long half hour before he joined the
+group of officers clustered round the commander-in-chief.
+
+He was heartily greeted; but in answer to his question as to whether
+any one had seen his brother, no one could give a satisfactory reply.
+One, however, was able to confirm what had been before told to him,
+for he had seen Peter on foot advancing with the fusilier brigade.
+Tom's heart felt very heavy as he turned away towards the front, where
+the fusiliers were standing on the ground they had so hardly won.
+The distance he had to traverse was but short, but the journey was a
+ghastly one. The ground was literally heaped with dead. Wounded men
+were seen sitting up trying to stanch their wounds, others lay feebly
+groaning, while soldiers were hurrying to and fro from the water
+carts, with pannikins of water to relieve their agonizing thirst.
+
+"Do you know, sergeant, whether they have collected the wounded
+officers, and, if so, where they are?"
+
+"Yes, sir, most of them are there at the right flank of the regiment."
+
+Tom made his way towards the spot indicated, where a small group of
+officers were standing, while a surgeon was examining a long line of
+wounded laid side by side upon the ground. Tom hardly breathed as
+he ran his eye along their faces, and his heart seemed to stop as
+he recognized in the very one the surgeon was then examining the
+dead-white face of Peter.
+
+He staggered forward and said in a gasping voice, "He is my
+brother--is he dead?"
+
+The surgeon looked up. "Sit down," he said sharply, and Tom, unable to
+resist the order, sank rather than sat down, his eyes still riveted on
+Peter's face.
+
+"No," the surgeon said, answering the question, "he has only fainted
+from loss of blood, but he is hit hard, the bullet has gone in just
+above the hip, and until I know its course I can't say whether he has
+a chance or not."
+
+"Here, sergeant, give me the probe," and with this he proceeded
+cautiously to examine the course of the ball. As he did so his anxious
+face brightened a little.
+
+"He was struck slantingly," he said, "the ball has gone round by the
+back; turn him over, sergeant. Ah, I thought so; it has gone out on
+the other side. Well, I think it has missed any vital part, and in
+that case I can give you hope. There," he said after he had finished
+dressing the wound and fastening a bandage tightly round the body;
+"now pour some brandy-and-water down his throat, sergeant, and
+sprinkle his face with water. Now, sir, I will look at your shoulder."
+
+But he spoke to insensible ears, for Tom, upon hearing the more
+favorable report as to Peter's state, had fainted dead off.
+
+The surgeon glanced at him. "He'll come round all right," he said.
+"I will go on in the mean time," and set to work at the next in the
+ghastly line.
+
+It was some time before Tom recovered his consciousness; when he did
+so, it was with a feeling of intense agony in the shoulder.
+
+"Lie quiet," the surgeon said, "I shan't be long about it."
+
+It seemed to Tom, nevertheless, as if an interminable time passed
+before the surgeon spoke again.
+
+"You'll do," he said. "It is an awkward shot, for it has broken the
+shoulder bone and carried a portion away, but with quiet and care you
+will get the use of your arm again. You are lucky, for if it had gone
+two inches to the left it would have smashed the arm at the socket,
+and two inches the other way and it would have been all up with you.
+Now lie quiet for awhile; you can do nothing for your brother at
+present. It may be hours before he recovers consciousness."
+
+Tom was too faint and weak to argue, and a minute later he dropped off
+to sleep, from which he did not wake until it was dusk. Sitting up, he
+saw that he had been aroused by the approach of an officer, whom he
+recognized as one of General Beresford's staff.
+
+"How are you, Scudamore?" he asked. "The general has just sent me to
+inquire."
+
+"He is very kind," Tom said. "I think that I am all right, only I am
+horribly thirsty."
+
+The officer unslung a flask from his shoulder. "This is weak
+brandy-and-water. I have brought it over for you. I am sorry to hear
+your brother is so bad, but the doctor gives strong hopes of him in
+his report."
+
+Tom bent down over Peter. "He is breathing quietly," he said. "I hope
+it is a sort of sleep he has fallen into. What are we doing?"
+
+"Nothing," the officer answered; "there is nothing to do; every
+unbounded man is under arms in case the French attack us in the night.
+I expect, however, they will wait till morning, and if they come on
+then, I fear our chance is a slight one indeed. We have only 1,800 of
+our infantry; the German regiments and the Portuguese will do their
+best; but the Spanish are utterly useless. Soult has lost more men
+than we have, but we are like a body which has lost its back-bone; and
+if the French, who are all good soldiers, renew the battle, I fear it
+is all up with us."
+
+"Have you got all our wounded in?" Tom asked.
+
+"No," the officer said bitterly. "Our unwounded men must stand to
+arms, and Lord Beresford sent over to Blake just now to ask for the
+assistance of a battalion of Spaniards to collect our wounded, and the
+brute sent back to say that it was the custom in allied armies for
+each army to attend to its own wounded."
+
+"The brute!" Tom repeated with disgust. "How the poor fellows must be
+suffering!"
+
+"The men who are but slightly wounded have been taking water to all
+they can find, and the doctors are at work now, and will be all night
+going about dressing wounds. The worst of it is, if the fight begins
+again to-morrow, all the wounded who cannot crawl away must remain
+under fire. However, the French wounded are all over the hill too, and
+perhaps the French will avoid a cannonade as much as possible, for
+their sake. It is a bad look-out altogether; and between ourselves,
+Beresford has written to Lord Wellington to say that he anticipates a
+crushing defeat."
+
+"Is there any chance of reinforcements?" Tom asked.
+
+"We hope that the third brigade of the fourth division will be up
+to-morrow by midday; they are ordered to come on by forced marches.
+If Soult does not attack till they arrive, it will make all the
+difference, for 1,500 fresh men will nearly double our strength. But I
+must be going now. Good-bye."
+
+The surgeon presently came round again to see how the wounded officers
+were getting on. Tom asked him whether there was anything he could do
+for Peter; but the surgeon, after feeling his pulse, said: "No, not as
+long as he breathes quietly like this; but if he moves pour a little
+brandy-and-water down his throat. Now gentlemen, all who can must look
+after the others, for there is not an available man, and I must be at
+work all night on the field."
+
+There were many of the officers who were not hit too severely to move
+about, and these collected some wood and made a fire, so as to enable
+them to see and attend to their more severely wounded comrades.
+Tom took his place close to Peter, where he could watch his least
+movement, and once or twice during the night poured a little
+brandy-and-water between his lips. The other officers took it by turns
+to attend to their comrades, to keep up the fire, and to sleep. Those
+whose turn it was to be awake sat round the fire smoking, and talking
+as to the chances of the morrow, getting up occasionally to give drink
+to such of the badly wounded as were awake.
+
+Tom, faint with his wound, found it, towards morning, impossible to
+keep awake, and dozed off, to wake with a start and find that it was
+broad daylight. Soon afterwards, to his intense satisfaction, Peter
+opened his eyes. Tom bent over him. "Don't try to move, Peter; lie
+quiet, old boy."
+
+"What's the matter?" Peter asked with a puzzled look.
+
+"You have been hit in the body, Peter, but the doctor means to get you
+round in no time. Yes," he continued, seeing Peter's eyes fixed on his
+bandaged shoulder, "I have had a tap too, but there's no great harm
+done. There, drink some brandy-and-water, and go off to sleep again,
+if you can."
+
+The morning passed very slowly, the troops being all under arms,
+expecting the renewed attack of Soult, but it came not; and when early
+in the afternoon, the third brigade of the fourth division marched
+into camp, they were received with general cheering. A heavy load
+seemed taken off every one's heart, and they felt now that they could
+fight, if fight they must, with a hope of success.
+
+The new-comers, wearied as they were with their long forced marches,
+at once took the outpost duties, and those relieved set about the duty
+of collecting and bringing in all the wounded.
+
+Next morning the joyful news came that Soult was retiring, and all
+felt with a thrill of triumph that their sacrifices and efforts had
+not been in vain, and that the hard-fought battle of Albuera was
+forever to take its place among the great victories of the British
+army.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+INVALIDED HOME.
+
+
+Two days after the battle of Albuera, Lord Wellington himself arrived,
+and from the officers of his staff Tom heard the details of the battle
+of Fuentes d'Onoro, which had been fought a few days previously, and
+which had been nearly as hardly contested as had Albuera itself, both
+sides claiming the victory.
+
+The next day, the bulk of Beresford's army returned to the
+neighborhood of Badajos, which they again invested, while a long
+convoy of wounded started for Lisbon. The Scudamores accompanied it
+as far as Campo Major, where a large hospital had been prepared for
+those too ill to bear the journey. Peter was still unconscious. Fever
+had set in upon the day after the battle, and for three weeks he lay
+between life and death. Tom's arm was mending very slowly, and he
+would have had hard work indeed in nursing Peter had it not been for
+the arrival of unexpected assistance. A large villa had been taken
+close to the main hospital for the use of officers, and one of the
+rooms was allotted to the Scudamores.
+
+Upon the evening of the second day after their arrival, Tom was
+sitting by Peter's bedside, when, after a preliminary tap, the door
+opened, and to Tom's perfect amazement Sambo entered. The negro
+hurried forward, threw himself on his knees, seized Tom's hand and
+kissed it passionately, and then looking at the thin and fever-flushed
+face of Peter, he hid his face in his hands and sobbed unrestrainedly.
+
+"Hush, Sam, hush," Tom said soothingly. "My poor fellow, why, where
+have you come from? I thought you were a prisoner with the French."
+
+"I knew how it would be, Massa Tom," the black said, paying no
+attention to the questions. "First thing Sam said to himself when he
+got among French fellows, 'Dere, dose young gentlemen dey get into
+all sorts of danger widout Sam, sartin sure dey get hurt widout Sam
+to look after dem.' Dat idea troubled Sam berry much, took away Sam's
+sleep altogether."
+
+"Well it turned out so, as you see, Sam," Tom said with a smile, "but
+tell me how did you get away? But first give me some lemonade out of
+that jug, then you can tell me all about it."
+
+"Why, Massa Tom," Sam said, when he had complied with the request,
+"you didn't think dat dis chile was going to stop prisoner with dose
+French chaps; Sam not such a fool as dat, nohow. When dat cussed
+mule--I tell you fair, Massa Tom, dis chile conclude dat riding not
+such a berry easy ting after all--when dat cussed mule ran into French
+camp, de soldiers dey catch him, and dey take Sam off, and den dey
+jabber and laugh for all de world like great lots of monkeys. Well,
+for some time Sam he didn't say nothing, all de wind shook out of his
+body. Besides which he couldn't understand what dey say. Den all of
+a sudden, to Sam's surprise, up came a colored soldier, and he speak
+to Sam in de English tongue. 'Holla, broder, how you come here?" I
+ask. 'I been cook on board English merchant ship,' he say. 'Ship she
+taken by French privateer. When dey come to port dey say to me, "You
+not Englishman, you hab choice, you go to prison, or you be French
+soldier." Natural, I not want go prison, so I conclude be French
+soldier. I daresay dey gib you choice too.' Well, massa, a wink as
+good as a nod to blind hoss. So dey take me to tent, put me under
+guard, and next day a French officer come dat speak English. He ask
+me all sorts ob questions, and at last he ask me why I list English
+soldier. So you see I had got a little lie all ready, and me tell him,
+me one poor Melican negro man, cook on board Melican ship. Ship taken
+by English man-ob-war. Put Sam in prison and give him choice to go as
+soldier. "Den you not care about English,' de officer say, and Sam
+draw hisself up and pat his chest and say, 'Me Melican citizen, me no
+Britisher's slave, some day me go back States, go on board Melican
+man-ob-war, me pay out dese Britishers for make Sam slave.' Den de
+officer laugh, and say dat if I like I could fight dem now; and if I
+prefer French uniform to French prison, me could have him. Ob course
+I accep' offer, and harp an hour after me in French uniform. French
+officer try to make joke ob Sam, and ask whether I like cavalry or
+foot soldier. Sam say he had enuff of quadruples at present. Me remain
+French soldier three weeks, den cum great battle, dey call him Fuentes
+donory. Sam's regiment fight. Sam not like fire at red coats, so break
+bullet off catridge, neber put him in gun. We charge right into middle
+of village full of English soldiers, de bullets fly all about. Sam not
+see de point ob getting kill by mistake, so he tumble down, pretend to
+be dead. Presently French beaten back; when English soldier wid doctor
+cum look at wounded, dey turn Sam ober, and dey say, 'Hullo, here dead
+nigger.' 'Nigger yourself, John Atkins,' I say for sure enuff it's de
+ole regiment--'you say dat once again me knock your head off;' me jump
+up, and all de world call out, 'Hullo, why it's Sam.' Den me splain
+matter, and all berry glad, cept John Atkins, and next morning me gib
+him licking he member all his life, me pound him most to a squash.
+Four days ago colonel send for Sam, say, 'Sam, berry bad job, bofe
+Massas wounded bad, send you to nurse dem;' so dis chile come. Dat
+all, Massa Tom. Here letter for you from colonel, now you read dis
+letter, den you get in bed, you sleep all night, Sam watch Massa
+Peter."
+
+Greatly relieved to have his faithful servant again, and to know that
+Peter would be well cared for, instead of being left in charge of the
+Spanish hospital orderly, whenever weakness and pain obliged him to
+lie down, Tom abandoned his place by the bedside, and prepared for a
+tranquil night's rest, first reading the colonel's letter.
+
+"We are all grieved, my dear Scudamore, at hearing that you are both
+wounded, and that your brother is at present in a serious state. We
+trust, however, that he will pull through. I hear that Beresford has
+praised you both most highly in despatches, and that your names are
+sent home for companies. I heartily congratulate you. We have had some
+tough work at Fuentes d'Onoro, although nothing to what yours must
+have been at Albuera, still it was hot enough in all conscience, and
+we had over a hundred casualties in the regiment. Carruthers and
+Manley were both slightly wounded. Jones, Anstruther, Palmer, and
+Chambers were killed, and several of the others hit more or less hard.
+Sam has leave to remain with you until you rejoin, which will not, I
+fear, be for some little time. Every one sends kind messages. Yours
+truly, J. Tritton."
+
+Nothing could exceed the care and devotion with which Sam nursed his
+two masters, and Tom had the greatest difficulty in persuading him to
+lie down and get a short sleep each day while he sat by Peter's bed.
+At the end of three weeks Peter took a favorable turn. His fever
+abated, and he awoke to consciousness. Another fortnight and he was
+sufficiently convalescent to be moved, and accordingly they started to
+travel by very easy stages to Lisbon, there to take ship for England,
+as the doctor ordered Tom as well as his brother to go home for a
+while to recruit. Tom was the less reluctant to do so, as it was
+evident that with the force at his command Wellington would not be
+able to undertake any great operation, and that the siege and capture
+of Badajoz was the utmost likely to be accomplished in that season's
+campaign. The mails in due course had brought out the _Gazette_,
+and in it Tom and Peter Scudamore were promoted to be captains,
+unattached.
+
+Colonel Tritton, upon being applied to, readily gave leave for Sam
+to accompany his masters. It was a long journey to Lisbon, but the
+jolting of the country cart was made bearable by a layer of hay,
+two feet deep, upon which the mattresses were laid, Sam seeing that
+at each night's halt the hay was taken out, well shaken, and then
+returned to the cart, so as to preserve it light and elastic. A thick
+canopy of boughs kept off the heat of the sun, and under it, within
+reach of the invalids hung a gourd of fresh water, and a basket of
+fruit. Several other cart-loads of wounded officers accompanied them,
+and at night they would draw up by a grove of trees where water was
+handy, those who could walk would get out, the others would be lifted
+out on their mattresses, a great fire made, and round it the beds laid
+in a circle, and then the evening would be spent in pleasant chat,
+with many an anecdote and an occasional song, until the fire burnt
+low, the talk died away, and each, covered in his blankets to keep off
+the night dew, fell asleep. Pleasant as was the journey, however, it
+was with a thrill of delight that they caught their first sight of
+Lisbon, with its broad river, and the blue line of the sea beyond. A
+few days later, and they embarked on board a transport, which seven
+days afterwards, after a calm passage, arrived at Spithead.
+
+Peter was by this time gaining strength fast, but his back was so
+stiff and sore that he was unable to move it, and was obliged to swing
+himself along on crutches. The next day the coach took them to London,
+and they started the morning after for Marlborough. This time they had
+to go inside the coach, two gentlemen, who had previously secured the
+seats, kindly giving them up in favor of the wounded young officers,
+while Sam took his place on the roof, and amused his fellow-passengers
+with wonderful accounts of his adventures at the war. At the inn
+at which they took dinner, they alighted, and Tom recognized in the
+driver the same coachman who had driven them upon the memorable
+occasion of their being stopped by highwaymen three years before. "You
+don't remember us, coachman, do you?"
+
+"No, gentlemen, I can't say as how,--but eh! no, why you're the werry
+boys as shot the highwaymen. Well, I am glad to see you again, though
+you do look white and bad, both of you. I heard as how there were
+two wounded officers inside, and that black soldier has been telling
+all sorts of tales of the wonderful things as his masters had done,
+but not knowing as how it was you, I didn't much believe all he was
+telling. Now I quite see as how it was true; and how are you both?"
+
+"Getting on all right," Tom said, returning the warm shake of the
+coachman's hand, "and do you know, those pistols have saved our lives
+more than once."
+
+"Have they now," the coachman said, in high admiration, "but there, we
+most be moving, we are three minutes after time as it is; I shall see
+you again next time we stop, gentlemen."
+
+During the next stage the coachman and guard recounted to the outside
+passengers the affair of the stopping the coach, and Sam's black face
+shone with delight at the tale. Then he had his say, and related the
+story of his falling overboard and being rescued, and in consequence
+the lads were quite embarrassed when they next halted, by the
+attention of their fellow-travelers, who could scarcely understand how
+it was possible that two mere boys should have performed such feats of
+bravery.
+
+Arrived at Marlborough they looked round in vain for the one-horsed
+vehicle which had before met them. "I expect that aunt has not got
+our letter, Peter," Tom said. "It would probably go up to town in the
+coach with us, and is likely enough in the letter-bag in the boot.
+Well, we must have a post-chaise. Won't aunt and Rhoda be surprised;
+but they must be expecting us, because they will have had our letter
+from Lisbon."
+
+The horses were soon in, Sam took his seat in the rumble, and in a few
+minutes they were bounding over the road at a very different pace to
+that at which they had before traversed it. "There's the house among
+the trees," Peter said at last, "with aunt's pigeons on the roof as
+usual, and there's Minnie asleep on the window-sill, and there! yes,
+there's Rhoda."
+
+As he spoke a girl, who was sitting reading under a tree, leapt to her
+feet, on hearing a carriage stop, and then, catching sight of Peter
+waving his hat, while Tom made frantic efforts to open the door, gave
+a scream of delight, and rushed towards them, threw her arms round
+Tom's neck as he jumped out, and then leapt into the chaise and hugged
+and cried over Peter. He was soon helped out, and as they turned to go
+towards the house they saw their aunt coming out to meet them.
+
+Tom ran forward and throwing his arms round her neck kissed her
+heartily, and before she could recover from her surprise, Peter was
+alongside. "Please, aunt, you must kiss me," he said, "for I want my
+arms for my crutches." His aunt leaned forward and kissed him, and
+then wiped the tears from her eyes.
+
+"I am glad to see you back, my dear nephews," she said. "We did not
+understand each other very well before, but we shan't make any more
+mistakes. This is your black servant, I suppose," she said, as Sam
+came along, with a trunk in each hand. "Dear! dear! what a dreadfully
+ugly man."
+
+"How do you do, Sam?" Rhoda said, when he came up. "We have heard so
+much of you, and how kindly you nursed my brothers."
+
+"Sam quite well, tank you, little missy," Sam said, grinning all over
+his face and showing his white teeth.
+
+Miss Scudamore shrank towards Tom as Sam passed on, "Dear me, what
+sharp-looking teeth he has, Tom. They don't eat curious things, these
+black men, do they?"
+
+"What sort of curious things, aunt?"
+
+"Well, my dear, I know that these outlandish people do eat strange
+things, and I have heard the Chinese eat dogs and cats. Now, if he has
+a fancy for cats, I daresay I could buy him some in the village, only
+he will have to cook them himself, I could never ask Hannah to cook
+cats; but please ask him not to touch Minnie."
+
+Peter had to stop in his walk and grasp his crutches tightly, not
+to burst into a scream of laughter, while Tom answered with great
+gravity, "My dear aunt, do not alarm yourself, I will answer for the
+safety of Minnie as far as Sam is concerned."
+
+When they reached the house, Miss Scudamore said--
+
+"I think you young people will enjoy yourselves more if you go and sit
+under the shade of the elm there, you will have a deal to say to each
+other, and had better be alone." They were all glad at the suggestion,
+as they were longing to be alone together.
+
+Sam, by Miss Scudamore's directions, carried out a great easy chair,
+of which Peter took possession. Rhoda sat on the grass at his feet,
+and Tom threw himself down at full length. They were all too happy
+to speak much for a time, and could only look fondly at each other.
+"You have grown a great deal, Rhoda, but I do not think that you are
+altered a bit otherwise."
+
+"You are neither of you altered so much as I expected," Rhoda said. "I
+had made up my mind that you would be changed a great deal. It sounds
+so grand--Captains, indeed! I expected to have curtsey to you and
+treat you with great respect; instead of that you look regular boys,
+both of you. Of course you are big, and Peter looks very tall; how
+tall are you, Peter?"
+
+"Just over six feet," Peter said.
+
+"Yes," Rhoda said, "you are tall enough, and Tom is broad enough for
+men, but somehow you look regular boys still."
+
+"This is very disrespectful Rhoda, to two Captains in His Majesty's
+service."
+
+"It seems ridiculous, doesn't it," Rhoda said.
+
+"It does," Tom said heartily, and the three went off into a shout of
+laughter.
+
+"It isn't really ridiculous you know," Rhoda said, when they had
+recovered their gravity. "To think of all the dangers you have gone
+through. Aunt was as proud as could be when she saw your names over
+and over again in despatches, and I have been like a little peacock.
+Your doings have been the talk of every one round here, and I am sure
+that if they had known you had been coming, the village would have put
+up a triumphal arch, and presented you with an address."
+
+"Thank goodness, they did not know it then," Tom said, "for it would
+have been a deal worse to stand than the fire of a French battery.
+Well, Rhoda, and now as to yourself; so you have really been always
+very happy with aunt?"
+
+"Very happy," Rhoda said; "she is most kind and indulgent, and so that
+I attend to her little fancies, I can do just as I like. I have had
+lessons regularly from the rector's eldest daughter, who has been
+educated for a governess; and in every respect, aunt is all that is
+kind. Fancy her being afraid of Sam eating Minnie."
+
+After chatting for upwards of an hour, they went into the house, and
+the rest of the day was spent in talking over all that had happened
+since they left. Sam was in the kitchen where he made himself very
+much at home, and although Hannah and the cook were at first rather
+awed by his size, his black face and rolling eyes, they were soon
+pacified by his good humor and readiness to make himself useful, and
+were wonderfully interested by his long stories about what "Massas"
+had done in the war.
+
+Miss Scudamore, who was a little uneasy as to how things would go on
+in the kitchen, made some excuse for going in once or twice in the
+course of the evening. She found things going on much better that she
+had expected, indeed so much better, that after Rhoda had gone up to
+bed, where Peter had two hours before betaken himself, she said to Tom
+as he was lighting his candle, "One minute, nephew; I could not speak
+before Rhoda, but I wanted to say something to you about your negro.
+I have heard that all soldiers are very much given to make love, and
+we know from Shakespeare, that Othello, who was black too, you will
+remember, nephew, made love to Desdemona, which shows that color does
+not make so much difference as one would think. Now I do hope your
+man will not make love to Hannah, I don't think she would like it,
+my dear, and yet you know she might; one never knows what women will
+do; they are always making fools of themselves," she added angrily,
+thinking at the moment how a young girl she had trained up as a cook
+had, after being with her three years, left a few weeks before to
+marry the village blacksmith, "and I should be sorry to lose Hannah.
+She has been with us more than twenty years. If he must fall in love
+with one, my dear, let it be the cook."
+
+Tom had a great command of his countenance, but he had great
+difficulty in steadying his muscles. After a moment or two he said,
+"I will give Sam a hint, aunt, if it becomes necessary, but I do not
+think you need fear. I do not fancy Sam is matrimonially inclined at
+present, and he wouldn't leave us even to marry Desdemona herself.
+Good night, aunt."
+
+So saying, Tom went upstairs, where he repeated to Peter, who was
+still awake, his conversation with his aunt, and the two went into
+shouts of laughter over the idea of Sam making love to the prim
+Hannah.
+
+The next six months passed over quietly and happily. The boys
+were made a great deal of by the whole county, and Miss Scudamore
+was greatly gratified at the name and credit they had gained for
+themselves. She no longer worried about them, but as Rhoda declared,
+quite spoiled them, and as Sam made no attempt to win the love of
+the faithful Hannah, there was no cloud to mar the pleasure of the
+holiday.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+CIUDAD RODRIGO AND BADAJOS.
+
+
+It was in the beginning of December, 1811, that the Scudamores again
+sailed up the Tagus to Lisbon, after an absence of just six months.
+When they had passed the medical board, they were transferred from the
+unattached list to the 52d Regiment, which was, fortunately for them,
+also in Spain. No events of great importance had taken place during
+their absence. Wellington, after the battles of Fuentes d'Onoro and
+Albuera, had been compelled to fall back again to the frontier in the
+face of greatly superior forces, and had maintained his old position
+on the Coa till the approach of winter compelled the French to retire
+into the interior, where they had their magazines and depots.
+
+The Scudamores found that the 52d were encamped on the Agueda,
+and they at once prepared to go up country to join them. Their
+chargers--presents from their aunt on leaving--were fresh and
+vigorous, and they purchased a strong country horse for Sambo, who,
+thanks to some practice which he had had in England, was now able to
+cut a respectable figure on horseback. A few hours were sufficient to
+make their preparations, and at noon on the day after landing, they
+mounted, and, followed by Sam, accompanied by a muleteer and two mules
+carrying their baggage, they started from the hotel at which they had
+put up.
+
+As they rode down the main street they saw several mounted
+officers approaching, and at once recognized in the leader the
+commander-in-chief, who had just arrived from the front to pay one
+of his flying visits, to endeavor to allay the jealousies in the
+Portuguese Council, and to insist upon the food which the British
+Government was actually paying for, being supplied to the starving
+Portuguese soldiers. Drawing their horses aside, they saluted Lord
+Wellington as he rode past. He glanced at them keenly, as was his
+custom, and evidently recognized them as he returned the salute.
+
+When he had passed, they turned their horses and continued their way.
+They had not gone fifty yards, however, when an officer came up at
+a gallop. Lord Wellington wished them to call at his quarters in an
+hour's time.
+
+There are few things more annoying than, after having got through all
+the trouble of packing and getting fairly on the road, to be stopped;
+but there was no help for it, and the boys rode back to their hotel
+again, where, putting up their horses, they told Sam not to let the
+muleteer leave, for they should probably be on the road again in an
+hour.
+
+At the appointed time they called at the head-quarters, and giving
+their cards to two officers on duty, took their seats in the anteroom.
+It now became evident to them that their chance of an early interview
+was not great, and that they would in all probability be obliged to
+pass another night in Madrid. Portuguese grandees passed in and out,
+staff officers of rank entered and left, important business was being
+transacted, and the chance of two Line captains having an interview
+with the commander-in-chief appeared but slight. Two hours passed
+wearily, and then an orderly sergeant came into the room and read out
+from a slip of paper the names "Captain Thomas Scudamore; Captain
+Peter Scudamore. This way, if you please," he added, as the boys rose
+in answer to their names, and he led the way into a room where a
+colonel on the staff was seated before a table covered with papers.
+
+"Gentlemen," he said, "I have news which I think will be pleasant to
+you both. Lord Wellington has not forgotten the services you rendered
+in carrying his communications to the guerilla chiefs. Your reports
+were clear and concise, and your knowledge of Spanish especially
+valuable. Lord Beresford, too, has reported most favorably of your
+conduct while with him. There happen to be two vacancies on his staff,
+and he has desired me to fill them up with your names."
+
+Although the Scudamores would in some respects rather have remained
+with their regiment, yet they could not refuse an honor which was
+generally coveted as being a post in which an active officer had
+plenty of opportunities of distinguishing himself, and which was
+certain to lead to speedy promotion. They accordingly expressed their
+warm thanks for the honor which Lord Wellington had done them.
+
+"Are you well mounted?" Colonel Somerset asked.
+
+"We have one capital charger each," Tom said.
+
+"You will want another," Colonel Somerset remarked. "There are a lot
+of remounts landed to-day. Here is an order to Captain Halket, the
+officer in charge. Choose any two you like. The amount can be stopped
+from your pay. How about servants; you are entitled to two each?"
+
+"We have one man of the Norfolk Rangers--a very faithful fellow, who
+has returned with us from leave; if he could be transferred, he would
+do for us both if we had a cavalry man each for our horses."
+
+The colonel at once wrote an order for Sam's transfer from his
+regiment on detached service, and also one to the officer commanding a
+cavalry regiment stationed in Madrid, to supply them with two troopers
+as orderlies.
+
+"May I ask, sir, if we are likely to stay in Madrid long--as, if so,
+we will look out for quarters?" Tom asked.
+
+"No; the general returns to-morrow, or next day at latest, to Almeida,
+and of course you will accompany him. Oh, by-the-by, Lord Wellington
+will be glad if you will dine with him to-day--sharp six. By-the-way,
+you will want to get staff uniform. There is the address of a Spanish
+tailor, who has fitted out most of the men who have been appointed
+here. He works fast, and will get most of the things you want ready
+by to-morrow night. Don't get more things than are absolutely
+necessary--merely undress suits. Excuse my asking how are you off for
+money? I will give you an order on the paymaster if you like."
+
+Tom replied that they had plenty of money, which indeed they had,
+for their aunt had given them so handsome a present upon starting,
+that they had tried to persuade her to be less generous, urging that
+they really had no occasion for any money beyond their pay. She had
+insisted, however, upon their accepting two checks, saying that one
+never knew what was wanted, and it was always useful to have a sum to
+fall back on in case of need.
+
+Two days later the Scudamores, in their new staff uniforms, were,
+with some six or eight other officers, riding in the suite of Lord
+Wellington on the road to the Coa. The lads thought they had never
+had a more pleasant time, the weather was fine and the temperature
+delightful, their companions, all older somewhat than themselves, were
+yet all young men in high health and spirits. The pace was good, for
+Lord Wellington was a hard rider, and time was always precious with
+him. At the halting-places the senior officers of the staff kept
+together, while the aides-de-camp made up a mess of their own, always
+choosing a place as far away as possible from that of the chief, so
+that they could laugh, joke, and even sing, without fear of disturbing
+his lordship.
+
+Sam soon became a high favorite with the light-hearted young fellows,
+and his services as forager for the mess were in high esteem.
+
+Three days of hard riding took them to Almeida, where the breaches
+caused by the great explosion had been repaired, and the place put
+into a defensible position. Tom and Peter had been afraid that
+there would be at least four months of enforced inactivity before
+the spring; but they soon found that the post of aide-de-camp to
+Wellington was no sinecure. For the next month they almost lived in
+the saddle. The greater portion of the English army was indeed lying
+on the Agueda, but there were detached bodies of British and large
+numbers of Portuguese troops at various points along the whole line
+of the Portuguese frontier, and with the commanders of these Lord
+Wellington was in constant communication.
+
+Towards the end of December some large convoys of heavy artillery
+arrived at Almeida, but every one supposed that they were intended to
+fortify this place, and none, even of those most in the confidence of
+the commander-in-chief, had any idea that a winter campaign was about
+to commence. The French were equally unsuspicious of the truth. Twice
+as strong as the British, they dreamt not that the latter would take
+the offensive, and the French marshals had scattered their troops at
+considerable distances from the frontier in winter quarters.
+
+Upon the last day of the year the Scudamores both happened to have
+returned to the front--Tom from Lisbon, and Peter from a long ride to
+a distant Portuguese division. There was a merry party gathered round
+a blazing fire in the yard of the house where they, with several other
+aides-de-camp, were quartered. Some fifty officers of all ranks were
+present, for a general invitation had been issued to all unattached
+officers in honor of the occasion. Each brought in what liquor he
+could get hold of, and any provisions which he had been able to
+procure, and the evening was one of boisterous fun and jollity. In
+the great kitchen blazed a fire, before which chickens and ducks
+were roasting, turkeys and geese cut up in pieces for greater
+rapidity of cooking, were grilling over the fire, and as they came
+off the gridiron they were taken round by the soldier-servants to
+their masters as they sat about on logs of wood, boxes, and other
+substitutes for chairs. Most of the officers present had already
+supped, and the late-comers were finishing their frugal meal, after
+which the soldiers would take their turn. There was a brewing of punch
+and an uncorking of many a bottle of generous wine; then the song and
+laugh went round, and all prepared to usher in the new year joyously,
+when a colonel of the staff, who had been dining with Lord Wellington,
+entered. "Here's a seat, colonel," was shouted in a dozen places, but
+he shook his head and held up his hand.
+
+"Gentlemen, I am sorry to disturb you, but orders must be obeyed.
+Villiers, Hogan, Scudamores both, Esdaile, Cooper, and Johnson, here
+are despatches which have to be taken off at once. Gentlemen, I
+should recommend you all to look to your horses. All attached to the
+transport had better go to their head-quarters for orders."
+
+"What is up, colonel?" was the general question.
+
+"The army moves forward at daybreak. We are going to take Ciudad."
+
+A cheer of surprise and delight burst from all. There was an emptying
+of glasses, a pouring out of one more bumper to success, and in
+five minutes the court was deserted save by some orderlies hastily
+devouring the interrupted supper, and ere long the tramp of horses
+could be heard, as the Scudamores and their comrades dashed off in
+different directions with their despatches.
+
+The next morning a bridge was thrown over the Agueda at Marialva,
+six miles below Ciudad, but the investment was delayed, owing to the
+slowness and insufficiency of the transport. Ciudad Rodrigo was but
+a third-class fortress, and could have been captured by the process
+of a regular siege with comparatively slight loss to the besiegers.
+Wellington knew, however, that he could not afford the time for a
+regular siege. Long before the approaches could have been made, and
+the breaches effected according to rule, the French marshals would
+have been up with overwhelming forces.
+
+Beginning the investment on the 7th, Wellington determined that it
+must be taken at all costs in twenty-four days, the last day of
+the month being the very earliest date at which, according to his
+calculations, any considerable body of French could come up to its
+relief.
+
+Ciudad lies on rising ground on the bank of the Agueda. The
+fortifications were fairly strong, and being protected by a very high
+glacis, it was difficult to effect a breach in them. The glacis is the
+smooth ground outside the ditch. In well-constructed works the walls
+of the fortification rise but very little above the ground beyond,
+from which they are separated by a broad and deep ditch. Thus the
+ground beyond the ditch, that is, the glacis, covers the walls from
+the shot of a besieger, and renders it extremely difficult to reach
+them. In the case of Ciudad, however, there were outside the place
+two elevated plateaux, called the great and small Teson: Guns placed
+on these could look down upon Ciudad, and could therefore easily
+breach the walls. These, then, were the spots from which Wellington
+determined to make the attack. The French, however, were aware of the
+importance of the position, and had erected on the higher Teson an
+inclosed and palisadoed redoubt, mounting two guns and a howitzer. A
+great difficulty attending the operation was that there were neither
+fuel nor shelter to be obtained on the right bank of the river, and
+the weather set in very cold, with frost and snow, at the beginning
+of the siege. Hence the troops had to be encamped on the left bank,
+and each division, as its turn came, to occupy the trenches for
+twenty-four hours, took cooked provisions with it, and waded across
+the Agueda.
+
+On the 8th, Pack's division of Portuguese and the light division waded
+the river three miles above the fortress, and, making a circuit took
+up a place near the great Teson. There they remained quiet all day.
+The French seeing that the place was not yet entirely invested paid
+but little heed to them. At nightfall, however, Colonel Colborne,
+with two companies from each of the regiments of the light division,
+attacked the redoubt of San Francisco with such a sudden rush that it
+was carried with the loss of only twenty-four men, the defenders, few
+and unprepared, being all taken prisoners. Scarcely, however, was the
+place captured than every gun of Ciudad which could be brought to bear
+upon it opened with fury. All night, under a hail of shot and shell,
+the troops labored steadily, and by daybreak the first parallel, that
+is to say, a trench protected by a bank of earth six hundred yards
+in length was sunk three feet deep. The next day the first division,
+relieved the light division.
+
+Tom and Peter, now that the army was stationary, had an easier time of
+it, and obtained leave to cross the river to see the operations. The
+troops had again to wade through the bitter cold water, and at any
+other time would have grumbled rarely at the discomfort. When they
+really engage in the work of war, however, the British soldier cares
+for nothing, and holding up their rifles, pouches and haversacks, to
+keep dry, the men crossed the river laughing and joking. There was but
+little done all day, for the fire of the enemy was too fast and deadly
+for men to work under it in daylight. At night the Scudamores left
+their horses with those of the divisional officers, and accompanied
+the troops into the trenches, to learn the work which had there to
+be done. Directly it was dusk twelve hundred men fell to work to
+construct their batteries. The night was dark, and it was strange to
+the Scudamores to hear the thud of so many picks and shovels going,
+to hear now and then a low spoken order, but to see nothing save when
+the flash of the enemy's guns momentarily lit up the scene. Every half
+minute or so the shot, shell, and grape came tearing through the air,
+followed occasionally by a low cry or a deep moan. Exciting as it was
+for a time, the boys having no duty, found it difficult long to keep
+awake, and presently dozed off--at first to wake with a start whenever
+a shell fell close, but presently to sleep soundly until dawn. By that
+time the batteries, eighteen feet thick, were completed.
+
+On the 10th the fourth division, and on the 11th the third, carried
+on the works, but were nightly disturbed, not only by the heavy fire
+from the bastions, but from some guns which the French had mounted on
+the convent of San Francisco in the suburb on the left. Little was
+effected in the next two days, for the frost hardened the ground and
+impeded the work. On the night of the 13th the Santa Cruz convent was
+carried and the trenches pushed forward, and on the next afternoon the
+breaching batteries opened fire with twenty-five guns upon the points
+of the wall at which it had been determined to make the breaches,
+while two cannons kept down the fire of the French guns at the convent
+of San Francisco. The French replied with more than fifty pieces,
+and all night the tremendous fire was kept up on both sides without
+intermission. Just at daybreak the sound of musketry mingled with the
+roar of cannon, as the 40th Regiment attacked and carried the convent
+of San Francisco. Through the 16th, 17th, and 18th the artillery
+duel continued, some times one side, sometimes the other obtaining
+the advantage; but during each night the trenches of the besiegers
+were pushed forward, and each day saw the breaches in the ramparts
+grow larger and larger. On the 19th the breaches were reported as
+practicable--that is, that it would be possible for men to scramble up
+the fallen rubbish to the top, and orders were therefore given for the
+assault for that night.
+
+The attack was to be made at four points simultaneously; the 5th,
+94th, and 77th were to attack from the convent of Santa Cruz, to make
+for the ditch, enter it, and work their way along to the great breach;
+Mackinnon's brigade of the third division was to attack the great
+breach from the front; the light division posted behind the convent
+of San Francisco were to attack from the left, and make their way to
+the small breach; while a false attack, to be converted into a real
+one if the resistance was slight, was to be made by Pack's Portuguese
+at the St. Jago gate at the opposite side of the town. As night fell
+the troops moved into their position, and Lord Wellington went to
+the convent of San Francisco, from whose roof he could survey the
+operations. The Scudamores, with the rest of the staff, took up
+their places behind him. Suddenly there was a shout on the far right,
+followed by a sound of confused cheering and firing, while flashes of
+flame leapt out along the walls, and the guns of the place opened fire
+with a crash. Now the 5th, 94th, and 77th rushed with great swiftness
+along the ditch, when, at the foot of the great breach, they were
+met by the third division. Together they poured up the breach, and
+the roar of musketry was tremendous. Once at the top of the breach,
+however, they made no progress. From a trench which had been cut
+beyond it, a ring of fire broke out, while muskets flashed from every
+window in the houses near. It was evident that some serious obstacle
+had been encountered, and that the main attack was arrested.
+
+"This is terrible," Peter said, as almost breathless they watched the
+storm of fire on and around the breach. "This is a thousand times
+worse than a battle. It is awful to think how the shot must be telling
+on that dense mass. Can nothing be done?"
+
+"Hurrah! There go the light division at the small breach," Tom
+exclaimed, as the French fire broke out along the ramparts in that
+quarter. A violent cheer came up even above the din from the great
+breach, but no answering fire lights the scene, for Major Napier,
+who commanded, had forbidden his men to load, telling them to trust
+entirely to the bayonet. There was no delay here; the firing of the
+French ceased almost immediately, as with a fierce rush the men of the
+light division bounded up the ruins and won the top of the breach. For
+a moment or two there was a pause, for the French opened so fierce a
+fire from either side, that the troops wavered. The officers sprang
+to the front, the soldiers followed with the bayonet, and the French,
+unable to stand the fierce onslaught, broke and fled into the town.
+Then the men of the light division, rushing along the walls, took
+the French who were defending the great breach in rear, and as these
+gave way, the attacking party swept across the obstacles which, had
+hitherto kept them, and the town was won. Pack's Portuguese had
+effected an entrance at the St. Jago gate, which they found almost
+deserted, for the garrison was weak, and every available man had been
+taken for the defence of the breaches.
+
+Thus was Ciudad Rodrigo taken after twelve days' siege, with a loss
+of twelve hundred men and ninety officers, of which six hundred and
+fifty men and sixty officers fell in that short, bloody fight at the
+breaches. Among the killed was General Craufurd, who had commanded at
+the fight on the Coa.
+
+Upon entering the town three days afterwards, at the termination of
+the disgraceful scene of riot and pillage with which the British
+soldier, there as at other places, tarnished the laurels won by his
+bravery in battle, the boys went to the scene of the struggle, and
+then understood the cause of the delay upon the part of the stormers.
+From the top of the breach there was a perpendicular fall of sixteen
+feet, and the bottom of this was planted with sharp spikes, and strewn
+with the fragments of shells which the French had rolled down into
+it. Had it not been for the light division coming up, and taking the
+defenders--who occupied the loopholed and fortified houses which
+commanded this breach--in rear, the attack here could never have
+succeeded.
+
+The next few days were employed in repairing the breaches, and putting
+the place again in a state of defence, as it was probable that Marmont
+might come up and besiege it. The French marshal, however, when
+hurrying to the relief of the town, heard the news of its fall, and
+as the weather was very bad for campaigning, and provisions short,
+he fall back again to his winter quarters, believing that Wellington
+would, content with his success, make no fresh movement until the
+spring. The English general, however, was far too able a strategist
+not to profit by the supineness of his adversary, and, immediately
+Ciudad Rodrigo was taken, he began to make preparations for the siege
+of Badajos, a far stronger fortress than Ciudad, and defended by
+strong detached forts. Three days after the fall of Rodrigo General
+Hill came up with his division; to this the Norfolk Rangers now
+belonged, and the Scudamores had therefore the delight of meeting all
+their old friends again. They saw but little of them, however, for
+they were constantly on the road to Lisbon with despatches, every
+branch of the service being now strained to get the battering-train
+destined for the attack on Badajos to the front, while orders were
+sent to Silviera, Trant, Wilson, Lecca, and the other partisan
+leaders, to hold all the fords and defiles along the frontier, so as
+to prevent the French from making a counter-invasion of Portugal.
+
+On the 11th of March the army arrived at Elvas, and on the 15th a
+pontoon bridge was thrown across the Guadiana. The following day the
+British troops crossed the river, and invested Badajos, with fifteen
+thousand men, while Hill and Graham, with thirty thousand more moved
+forward, so as to act as a covering army, in case the French should
+advance to raise the siege. Badajos was defended by five thousand men,
+under General Phillipson, a most able and energetic commander, who had
+in every way strengthened the defences, and put them in a position to
+offer an obstinate resistance.
+
+Before attacking the fortress it was necessary to capture one of the
+outlying forts, and that known as the Picurina was selected, because
+the bastion of the Trinidad, which lay behind it, was the weakest
+portion of the fortress. The trenches were commenced against this on
+the night of the 17th, and, although the French made some vigorous
+sorties, the works progressed so rapidly that all was ready for an
+assault on the forts on the 25th, a delay of two days having been
+occasioned by the French taking guns across the river, which swept
+the trenches, and rendered work impossible, until a division was sent
+round to drive in the French guns and invest the fortress on that
+side. The Picurina was strong, and desperately defended, but it was
+captured after a furious assault, which lasted one hour, and cost
+nineteen officers and three hundred men. It was not, however, until
+next evening that the fort could be occupied, for the guns of the town
+poured such a hail of shot and shell into it, that a permanent footing
+could not be obtained in it. Gradually, day by day, the trenches were
+driven nearer to the doomed city, and the cannon of the batteries
+worked day and night to establish a breach. Soult was known to be
+approaching, but he wanted to gather up all his available forces, as
+he believed the town capable of holding out for another month, at
+least. Still he was approaching, and, although the three breaches
+were scarcely yet practicable, and the fire of the town by no means
+overpowered, Wellington determined upon an instant assault, and on the
+night of the 6th of April the troops prepared for what turned out to
+be the most terrible and bloody assault in the annals of the British
+army. There were no less than six columns of attack, comprising in all
+eighteen thousand men. Picton, on the right with the third division
+was to cross the Rivillas and storm the castle. Wilson, with the
+troops in the trenches, was to attack San Roque. In the center the
+fourth and light division, under Colville and Barnard, were to assault
+the breaches; and on the left Leith, with the fifth division, was to
+make a false attack upon the fort of Pardaleras, and a real attack
+upon the bastion of San Vincente by the river side. Across the river
+the Portugese division, under Power, was to attack the works at the
+head of the bridge. The night was dark and clouded, and all was as
+still as death outside the town, when a lighted carcass, that is a
+large iron canister filled with tar and combustibles, fell close to
+the third division, and, exposing their ranks, forced them to commence
+the attack before the hour appointed. Crossing the Rivillas by a
+narrow bridge, under a tremendous fire, the third division assaulted
+the castle, and, although their scaling-ladders were over and over
+again hurled down, the stormers at last obtained a footing, and the
+rest of the troops poured in and the castle was won. A similar and
+more rapid success attended the assault on San Roque, which was
+attacked so suddenly and violently, that it was taken with scarce
+any resistance. In the mean time the assaults upon the breaches had
+commenced, and it is best to give the account of this terrible scene
+in the words of its eloquent and graphic historian, as the picture is
+one of the most vivid that was ever drawn.
+
+"All this time the tumult at the breaches was such as if the very
+earth had been rent asunder, and its central fires bursting upwards
+uncontrolled. The two divisions had reached the glacis just as the
+firing at the castle commenced, and the flash of a single musket,
+discharged from the covered-way as a signal, showed them that the
+French were ready; yet no stir was heard and darkness covered the
+breaches. Some hay-packs were thrown, some ladders placed, and the
+forlorn hopes and storming parties of the light division, five hundred
+in all, descended into the ditch without opposition; but then a bright
+flame shooting upwards displayed all the terrors of the scene. The
+ramparts, crowded with dark figures and glittering arms were on one
+side, on the other the red columns of the British, deep and broad,
+were coming on like streams of burning lava. It was the touch of the
+magician's wand, for a crash of thunder followed, and with incredible
+violence the storming parties were dashed to pieces by the explosion
+of hundreds of shells and powder-barrels. For an instant the light
+division stood on the brink of the ditch, amazed at the terrific
+sight; but then, with a shout that matched even the sound of the
+explosion, the men flew down the ladders, or, disdaining their aid,
+leaped, reckless of the depth, into the gulf below--and at the same
+moment, amidst a blaze of musketry that dazzled the eyes, the fourth
+division came running in, and descended with a like fury. There were
+only five ladders for the two columns, which were close together;
+and a deep cut, made in the bottom of the ditch as far as the
+counter-guard of the Trinidad, was filled with water from the
+inundation. Into that watery snare the head of the fourth division
+fell, and it is said above a hundred of the fusiliers, the men of
+Albuera, were there smothered. Those who followed checked not, but,
+as if such a disaster had been expected, turned to the left, and thus
+came upon the face of the unfinished ravelin, which, being rough and
+broken, was mistaken for the breach, and instantly covered with men;
+yet a wide and deep chasm was still between them and the ramparts,
+from whence came a deadly fire, wasting their ranks. Thus baffled,
+they also commenced a rapid discharge of musketry and disorder ensued;
+for the men of the light division, whose conducting engineer had been
+disabled early and whose flank was confined by an unfinished ditch
+intended to cut off the bastion of Santa Maria, rushed towards the
+breaches of the curtain and the Trinidad, which were, indeed, before
+them, but which the fourth division had been destined to storm. Great
+was the confusion, for the ravelin was quite crowded with men of both
+divisions; and while some continued to fire, others jumped down and
+ran towards the breach; many also passed between the ravelin and
+the counterguard of the Trinidad, the two divisions got mixed, the
+reserves, which should have remained at the quarries, also came
+pouring in, until the ditch was quite filled, the rear still crowding
+forward, and all cheering vehemently. The enemy's shouts also were
+loud and terrible, and the bursting of shells, and of grenades, and
+the roaring of guns from the flanks, answered by the iron howitzers
+from the battery of the parallel, the heavy roll, and horrid explosion
+of the powder-barrels, the whizzing flight of the blazing splinters,
+the loud exhortations of the officers, and the continual clatter
+of the muskets, made a maddening din. Now a multitude bounded up
+the great breach, as if driven by a whirlwind, but across the top
+glittered a range of sword-blades, sharp-pointed, keen-edged on both
+sides, and firmly fixed in ponderous beams chained together, and set
+deep in the ruins; and for ten feet in front the ascent was covered
+with loose planks, studded with sharp iron points, on which, feet
+being set, the planks moved, and the unhappy soldiers, falling forward
+on the spikes, rolled down upon the ranks behind. Then the Frenchmen,
+shouting at the success of their stratagem, and, leaping forward,
+plied their shot with terrible rapidity, for every man had several
+muskets, and each musket, in addition to its ordinary charge,
+contained a small cylinder of wood, stuck full of wooden slugs,
+which scattered like hail when they were discharged. Once and again
+the assailants rushed up the breaches, but always the sword-blades,
+immovable and impassable, stopped their charge, and the hissing shells
+and thundering powder-barrels exploded unceasingly. Hundreds of men
+had fallen, hundreds more were dropping, still, the heroic officers
+called aloud for new trials, and sometimes followed by many, sometimes
+by a few, ascended the ruins; and so furious were the men themselves,
+that, in one of these charges, the rear strove to push the foremost on
+to the sword-blades, willing even to make a bridge of their writhing
+bodies, but the others frustrated the attempt by dropping down; and
+men fell so fast from the shot, it was hard to know who went down
+voluntarily, who were stricken and many stooped unhurt that never rose
+again. Vain also would it have been to break through the sword-blades,
+for the trench and parapet behind the breach were finished, and the
+assailants, crowded into even a narrower space than the ditch was,
+would still have been separated from their enemies, and the slaughter
+would have continued. At the beginning of this dreadful conflict
+Andrew Barnard had, with prodigious efforts, separated his division
+from the other, and preserved some degree of military array; but now
+the tumult was such, no command would be heard distinctly except by
+those close at hand, and the mutilated carcasses heaped on each other,
+and the wounded struggling to avoid being trampled upon, broke the
+formations; order was impossible! Officers of all ranks, followed more
+or less numerously by the men, were seen to start out as if struck
+by sudden madness, and rash into the breach, which, yawning and
+glittering with steel, seemed like the mouth of a huge dragon belching
+forth smoke and flame. In one of these attempts, Colonel Macleod, of
+the 43rd, a young man whose feeble body would have been quite unfit
+for war if it had not been sustained by an unconquerable spirit, was
+killed; wherever his voice was heard his soldiers had gathered, and
+with such a strong resolution did he lead them up the fatal ruins
+that, when one behind him, in falling, plunged a bayonet into his
+back, he complained, not; but, continuing his course, was shot dead
+within a yard of the sword-blades. Yet there was no want of gallant
+leaders, or desperate followers, until two hours passed in these
+vain efforts had convinced the troops the breach of the Trinidad was
+impregnable; and, as the opening in the curtain, although less strong,
+was retired, and the approach to it impeded by deep holes and cuts
+made in the ditch, the soldiers did not much notice it after the
+partial failure of one attack which had been made early. Gathering in
+dark groups, and leaning on their muskets, they looked up with sullen
+desperation at the Trinidad, while the enemy, stepping out on the
+ramparts, and aiming their shots by the light of the fire-balls which
+they threw over, asked, as their victims fell, 'Why they did not come
+into Badajos?' In this dreadful situation, while the dead were lying
+in heaps, and others continually falling, the wounded crawling about
+to get some shelter from the merciless shower above, and withal a
+sickening stench from the burnt flesh of the slain, Captain Nicholas,
+of the engineers, was observed by Lieutenant Shaw, of the 43rd, making
+incredible efforts to force his way with a few men into the Santa
+Maria Bastion. Shaw immediately collected fifty soldiers, of all
+regiments, and joined him, and although there was a deep cut along
+the foot of that breach also, it was instantly passed, and these two
+young officers led their gallant band, with a rush, up the ruins; but
+when they had gained two-thirds of the ascent, a concentrated fire
+of musketry and grape dashed nearly the whole dead to the earth.
+Nicholas was mortally wounded, and the intrepid Shaw stood alone! With
+inexpressible coolness he looked at his watch, and saying it was too
+late to carry the reaches, rejoined the masses at the other attack.
+After this no further effort was made at any point, and the troops
+remained passive but unflinching beneath the enemy's shot, which
+streamed without intermission; for, of the riflemen on the glacis many
+leaped early into the ditch and joined in the assault, and the rest,
+raked by a cross-fire of grape from the distant bastions, baffled in
+their aim by the smoke and flames from the explosions, and too few in
+number, entirely failed to quell the French musketry. About midnight,
+when two thousand brave men had fallen, Wellington, who was on a
+height close to the quarries, ordered the remainder to retire and
+re-form for a second assault; he had heard the castle was taken,
+but thinking the enemy would still resist in the town, was resolved
+to assail the breaches again. This retreat from the ditch was not
+effected without further carnage and confusion. The French fire never
+slackened. A cry arose that the enemy was making a sally from the
+distant flanks, and there was a rush towards the ladders. Then the
+groans and lamentations of the wounded, who could not move and
+expected to be slain, increased, and many officers who had not heard
+of the order, endeavored to stop the soldiers from going back; some
+would even have removed the ladders but were unable to break the
+crowd."
+
+While this terrible scene was passing, the victory had been decided
+elsewhere. The capture of the castle by Picton would, in itself, have
+caused the fall of the town upon the following day, but Leith, with
+the fifth division, after hard fighting, scaled the St. Vincente
+bastion, and came up through the town and took the defenders of the
+breaches in the rear. Then the French gave way, the British poured in,
+and the dreadful scenes which had marked the fall of Ciudad Rodrigo
+were repeated, and even surpassed. Up to the present day the name of
+an Englishman is coupled with a curse in the town of Badajos. At this
+siege, as at the last, the Scudamores acted the part of lookers on,
+and although they bitterly regretted it, it was well for them that it
+was so. The capture of Badajos cost the allied army five thousand men,
+of whom three thousand five hundred fell on the night of the assault.
+Each of the divisions which attacked the breaches lost over twelve
+hundred men, and the 52nd Regiment, who formed part of the light
+division, lost their full share. Among the ranks of the officers the
+slaughter was particularly great, and scarce one escaped without
+a wound. The Scudamores would fain have volunteered to join their
+regiment in the assault, but it was well known that Lord Wellington
+would not allow staff officers to go outside their own work. Therefore
+they had looked on with beating hearts and pale faces, and with
+tears in their eyes, at that terrible fight at the Triudad, and had
+determined that when morning came they would resign their staff
+appointments and ask leave to join their regiment. But when morning
+came, and the list of the killed and wounded was sent in, and they
+went down with a party to the breach to collect the wounded, they
+could not but feel that they had in all probability escaped death, or
+what a soldier fears more, mutilation. "After all, Tom," Peter said,
+"we have done some active service, and our promotion shows that we
+are not cowards; there can be no reason why we should not do our duty
+as the chief has marked it out for us, especially when it is quite
+as likely to lead to rapid promotion as is such a murderous business
+as this." After this no more was said about resigning the staff
+appointment, which gave them plenty of hard work, and constant change
+of scene, whereas had they remained with the regiment they would often
+have been stationed for months in one place without a move.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+SALAMANCA.
+
+
+The great triumphs of Ciudad Rodrigo and Badajos did not lead to the
+rapid successes which Wellington had hoped. The French generals,
+on hearing of the loss of the latter fortress, again fell back,
+and Wellington was so much hampered by shortness of money, by the
+inefficiency, obstinacy, and intrigues of the Portuguese Government,
+and by want of transport, that it was nearly three months before he
+could get everything in readiness for an advance into Spain. At last
+all was prepared, and on the 13th of June the army once more crossed
+the Agueda and marched towards the Tamar in four columns. On the 17th
+it was within six miles of Salamanca, and Marshal Marmont, unable for
+the moment to stem the tide of invasion, evacuated the city, which
+that evening blazed with illuminations, the people being half wild
+with joy at their approaching deliverance. The French, however, had
+not entirely departed, for eight hundred men still held some very
+strong forts overlooking and guarding the city.
+
+These forts held out desperately; the British battering train
+was weak, and upon the 23d Marmont, having received considerable
+reinforcements, advanced to raise the siege. Wellington, however,
+refused to be tempted to leave his trenches to deliver a general
+battle, but faced the enemy with a portion of his army while he
+continued the siege.
+
+Marmont, upon his part, believing that the forts could hold out for
+fifteen days, put off the attack, as he knew that large reinforcements
+were coming up. His calculations were frustrated by one of the forts
+taking fire on the 27th, when an assault was delivered, and the whole
+of the forts surrendered; Marmont at once fell back across the Douro,
+there to await the arrival of his reinforcements.
+
+Wellington, on his part, followed slowly, and his army took up a
+position between Canizal and Castrejon, thereby covering the roads
+from Toro and Tordesillas, the only points at which the French could
+cross the river. The reports of the spies all agreed that the former
+was the place at which the crossing would be made.
+
+On the 16th of July an officer rode into Canizal, at headlong pace,
+with the news that a reconnoitering party had crossed the Douro that
+morning near Tordesillas, and had found that place deserted, except by
+a garrison; and an hour later the news came in that three divisions of
+the enemy were already across the river at Toro. Five minutes later
+the Scudamores were on horseback, carrying orders that the whole of
+the army, with the exception of the fourth and light divisions, which
+were on the Trabancos, under General Cotton, were to concentrate at
+Canizal that night. By the morning the movement was accomplished.
+
+The day wore on in somewhat anxious expectation, and towards afternoon
+Wellington, accompanied by Lord Beresford, and escorted by Alten's,
+Bock's and Le Marchant's brigades of cavalry, started to make a
+reconnaissance of the enemy's movements. Caution was needed for the
+advance, as it was quite uncertain whether the French were pushing
+on through the open country towards Canizal, or whether they were
+following the direct road from Toro to Salamanca. Evening closed in,
+but no signs of the French army were seen, and the party halted about
+six miles from Toro, and small parties of cavalry were despatched
+right and left to scour the country, and find out where the enemy had
+gone.
+
+"It's very strange where the French can have got to," was the remark
+made, for the fiftieth time among the staff.
+
+The detached parties returned, bringing no news whatever, and Lord
+Wellington again advanced slowly and cautiously towards Toro. Small
+parties were pushed on ahead, and presently an officer rode back
+with the news that he had been as far as the river, and that not a
+Frenchman was to be seen. It was too late to do any more, and they
+remained in uncertainty whether the enemy had recrossed the river
+after making a demonstration, or whether they had marched to their
+right, so as to make a circuit, and throw themselves between Ciudad
+Rodrigo and Salamanca, upon the line of communication of the British
+army.
+
+Lord Wellington, with his staff, took possession of a deserted
+farm-house, the cavalry picketed their horses round it, and the
+Scudamores, who had been more than twenty-four hours in the saddle,
+wrapped themselves in their cloaks, and stretching themselves on the
+floor, were soon asleep. Just at midnight the sound of a horse's
+footfall approaching at a gallop was heard, and an officer, who had
+ridden, without drawing rein, from Canizal, dashed up to the farm.
+
+Five minutes later the whole party were in the saddle again. The news
+was important, indeed. Marmont had drawn his whole army back across
+the Toro on the night of the 16th, had marched to Tordesillas, crossed
+there, and in the afternoon, after a march of fifty miles, had fallen
+upon Cotton's outposts, and driven them across the Trabancos.
+
+Not a moment's time was lost by Wellington after he received the news;
+but, unfortunately, six precious hours had already been wasted, owing
+to the despatches not having reached him at Canizal. With the three
+brigades of cavalry he set off at once towards Alaejos, while an
+officer was despatched to Canizal, to order the fifth division to
+march with all speed to Torrecilla de la Orden, six miles in the rear
+of Cotton's position at Castrejon.
+
+Four hours' riding brought them to Alaejos, where a halt for two or
+three hours was ordered, to rest the weary horses and men. Soon after
+daybreak, however, all thought of sleep was banished by the roar of
+artillery, which told that Marmont was pressing hard upon Cotton's
+troops. "To horse!" was the cry, and Lords Wellington and Beresford,
+with their staff, rode off at full speed towards the scene of action,
+with the cavalry following hard upon their heels. An hour's ride
+brought them to the ground. Not much could be seen, for the country
+was undulating and bare, like the Brighton Downs, and each depression
+was full of the white morning mist, which wreathed and tossed
+fantastically from the effects of the discharges of firearms, the
+movements of masses of men, and the charges of cavalry hidden within
+it. Upon a crest near at hand were a couple of British guns, with a
+small escort of horse.
+
+Suddenly, from the mist below, a party of some fifty French horsemen
+dashed out and made for the guns. The supporting squadron, surprised
+by the suddenness of the attack, broke and fled; the French followed
+hard upon them, and just as Lord Wellington, with his staff, gained
+the crest, pursuers and pursued came upon them, and in pell-mell
+confusion the whole were borne down to the bottom of the hill. For
+a few minutes it was a wild melee. Lords Wellington, Beresford, and
+their staff, with their swords drawn, were in the midst of the fight,
+and friends and foes were mingled together, when the leading squadrons
+of the cavalry from Alaejos came thundering down, and very few of the
+Frenchmen who had made that gallant charge escaped to tell the tale.
+
+The mists were now rapidly clearing up, and in a short time the whole
+French army could be seen advancing. They moved towards the British
+left, and Wellington ordered the troops at once to retire. The British
+fell back in three columns, and marched for the Guarena, through
+Torrecilla de la Orden. The French also marched straight for the
+river, and now one of the most singular sights ever presented in
+warfare was to be seen.
+
+The hostile armies were marching abreast, the columns being but a few
+hundred yards apart, the officers on either side waving their hands to
+each other. For ten miles the armies thus pressed forward the officers
+urging the men, and these straining every nerve to get first to the
+river. From time to time the artillery of either side, finding a
+convenient elevation, would pour a few volleys of grape into the
+opposing columns, but the position of the two armies, did not often
+admit of this. Gradually Cotton's men, fresher than the French, who
+had, in the two previous days, marched fifty miles, gained ground,
+and, reaching the river, marched across by the ford, the winners of
+the great race by so little that one division, which halted for a
+moment to drink, was swept by forty pieces of French artillery, which
+arrived on the spot almost simultaneously with it.
+
+On the Guarena the British found the remaining divisions of the army,
+which had been brought up from Canizal. These checked Marmont in an
+attempt to cross at Vallesa, while the 29th and 40th Regiments, with
+a desperate bayonet charge, drove Carier's French division back as it
+attempted to push forward beyond Castrillo. Thus the two armies faced
+each other on the Guarena, and Marmont had gained absolutely nothing
+by his false movement at Toro, and his long and skillful detour by
+Tordesillas.
+
+Quickly the rest of the day passed, as did the one which followed, the
+troops on both sides resting after their fatigues. Wellington expected
+to be attacked on the next morning and his army was arranged in two
+lines ready for the combat. At daybreak, however, Marmont moved his
+army up the river, crossed at a ford there, and marched straight
+for Salamanca, thus turning Wellington's right, and threatening his
+communications. The British at once fell back, and the scene of the
+previous day was repeated the armies marching along the crest of two
+parallel hills within musket shot distance of each other.
+
+This time however, the French troops, although they had marched
+considerably farther than the English proved themselves the best
+marchers, and when night fell Wellington had the mortification of
+seeing them in possession of the ford of Huerta on the Tormes, thus
+securing for Marmont the junction with an army which was approaching
+under King Joseph, and also the option of either fighting or refusing
+battle. Wellington felt his position seriously threatened, and sent
+off a despatch to the Spanish General Castanos, stating his inability
+to hold his ground, and the probability that he should be obliged to
+fall back upon Portugal. This letter proved the cause of the victory
+of Salamanca for it was intercepted by the French, and Marmont,
+fearing that Wellington would escape him, prepared at once to throw
+himself upon the road to Ciudad Rodrigo, and thus cut the British line
+of retreat, in spite of the positive order which he had received from
+King Joseph not to fight until he himself arrived with his army.
+
+Upon the 21st both armies crossed the Tormes, the French at Alba and
+Huerta, the British at Aldea Lengua, and San Marta. Upon that day the
+news reached Wellington that General Chauvel, with 2000 cavalry, and
+20 guns, would reach Marmont on the evening of the 22d, or the morning
+of the 23d, and the English general therefore resolved to retreat,
+unless Marmont should, by some mistake, give him a chance of fighting
+to advantage.
+
+Close to the British right, and the French left, were two steep and
+rugged hills, called the Hermanitos, or Brothers, and soon after
+daybreak on the 22d, the French seized upon the one nearest to them,
+while the British took possession of the other. Then, watching each
+other, the two armies remained until noon, for Wellington could not
+commence his retreat by daylight; but a long cloud of dust along the
+road to Ciudad Rodrigo showed that the baggage of the army was already
+_en route_ for Portugal. Marmont now determined to make a bold stroke
+to cut off Wellington's retreat, and, although all his troops had not
+yet arrived, he ordered Maucune, with two divisions, to march round by
+the left and menace the Ciudad road. It was at three o'clock in the
+afternoon, and Wellington, who had been up all night, thinking that
+Marmont would make no move that day, had gone to lie down for an hour
+or two, when Tom Scudamore who, from an elevated point, was watching
+the movements of the enemy, hurried in with the news that the French
+were pushing their left round towards the Ciudad Road.
+
+Wellington leaped to his feet, and hurried to the high ground, where
+he beheld, with stern satisfaction, that Marmont, in his eagerness
+to prevent the British escape, had committed the flagrant error of
+detaching his wing from his main body. Instantly he issued orders
+for an attack, and the great mass of men upon the British Hermanito
+moved down upon the plain to attack Maucune in flank, while the third
+division was ordered to throw itself across his line of march, and to
+attack him in front. As the advance across the plain would be taken in
+flank by the fire from the French Hermanito, General Pack was ordered
+to assail that position directly the British line had passed it.
+
+Marmont, standing on the French Hermanito, was thunder-struck at
+beholding the plain suddenly covered with enemies, and a tremendous
+fire was at once opened upon the advancing British. Officer after
+officer was despatched to hurry up the French troops still upon the
+march, and when Marmont saw the third division dash across Maucune's
+path, he was upon the point of hurrying himself to the spot, when a
+shell burst close to him, and he was dashed to the earth with a broken
+arm, and two deep wounds in his side.
+
+Thus, at the critical point of the battle, the French army was left
+without a head.
+
+It was just five o'clock when Pakenham, with the third division, fell
+like a thunderbolt upon the head of Maucune's troops. These, taken by
+surprise by this attack, on the part of an enemy whom they had thought
+to see in full flight, yet fought gallantly, and strove to gain time
+to open out into order of battle. Bearing onwards, however, with
+irresistible force, the third division broke the head of the column,
+and drove it back upon its supports. Meanwhile, the battle raged all
+along the line; in the plain the fourth division carried the village
+of Arapiles, and drove back Bonnet's division with the bayonet, and
+the fifth division attacked Maucune's command in flank, while Pakenham
+was destroying its front.
+
+Marmont was succeeded in his command by Bonnet, who was also wounded,
+and Clausel, an able general, took the command. He reinforced Maucune
+with his own divisions, which had just arrived, and, for a while,
+restored the battle. Then, past the right and left of Pakenham's
+division, the British cavalry, under Le Marchant, Anson, and D'Urban,
+burst through the smoke and dust, rode down twelve hundred of the
+French infantry, and then dashed on at the line behind. Nobly the
+charge was pressed, the third division following at a run, and the
+charge ceased not until the French left was entirely broken and five
+guns, and two thousand prisoners taken.
+
+But forty minutes had passed since the first gun was fired, and the
+French defeat was already all but irretrievable, and the third,
+fourth, and fifth divisions now in line, swept forward as to assured
+victory. Clausel, however, proved equal to the emergency. He
+reinforced Bonnet's division with that of Fereij, as yet fresh and
+unbroken, and, at the same moment, Sarrut's and Brennier's divisions
+issued from the forest, and formed in the line of battle. Behind them
+the broken troops of Maucune's two divisions re-formed, and the battle
+was renewed with terrible force.
+
+Pack, at the same moment, attempted unsuccessfully to carry the French
+Hermanito by assault with his Portuguese division, and the fate of the
+battle was again in the balance; the British divisions outnumbered,
+and outflanked, began to fall back, Generals Cole, Leith, and Spry,
+were all wounded, and the French cavalry threatened the flank of the
+line. Wellington, however, had still plenty of reserves in hand, and
+at this critical moment he launched them at the enemy. The sixth
+division was brought up from the second line, and hurled at the center
+of the enemy in a fierce and prolonged charge, while the light and
+first divisions were directed against the French divisions which were
+descending from the French Hermanito, and against that of Foy, while
+the seventh division and the Spaniards were brought up behind the
+first line. Against so tremendous an assault as this the French could
+make no stand, and were pushed back in ever increasing disorder to the
+edge of the forest, where Foy's and Maucune's divisions stood at bay,
+and covered their retreat in the fast gathering darkness.
+
+Wellington believed that he should capture a great portion of the
+beaten army, for he relied upon the Castle of Alba de Formes,
+commanding the ford at that place, being held by the Spaniards, but
+these had evacuated the place on the preceding day, and had not even
+informed Wellington that they had done so.
+
+Thus, hidden by the night, the French retreated with but slight loss
+from the pursuing columns. In the battle the French had forty-two
+thousand men and seventy-four guns; the Allies forty-six thousand and
+sixty guns, but of the infantry a division were composed of Spaniards,
+and these could not be relied upon in any way. It was probably the
+most rapidly fought action ever known, and a French officer described
+it as the defeat of forty thousand men in forty minutes. The French
+loss was over twelve thousand in killed, wounded, and prisoners, and
+so completely were they dispersed that Clausel a week afterwards
+could only collect twenty thousand to their standards. It was a great
+victory, and celebrated as the first which Wellington had gained over
+the French, for although at Talavera and Busaco he had repulsed the
+French attack, he was not in either case in a position to do more than
+hold his ground.
+
+Throughout this short and desperate fight the Scudamores had been
+fully engaged in conveying orders from one part of the field to
+another. Shot and shell flew around them in all directions, and yet
+when they met at the end of the action they found that they had
+escaped without a scratch. The day following the battle the pursuit
+began. Had King Joseph's advancing army united with Clausel's broken
+troops, he could have opposed Wellington's advance with a force far
+superior in numbers to that defeated at Salamanca. But Joseph, after
+hesitating, fell back in one direction, Clausel retreated in another,
+the opportunity for concentration was lost, and Wellington found no
+foe to bar his way on his triumphant march upon Madrid.
+
+Joseph fell back from the capital as the English approached, leaving
+some thousands of men in the strong place known as the Retiro,
+together with an immense amount of arms, ammunition, and military
+stores of all kinds, all of which, including the troops, fell into the
+hands of the English within a few days of their arrival at Madrid.
+
+It was a proud moment for the Scudamores, as riding behind Lord
+Wellington they entered Madrid on the 14th August.
+
+The city was half mad with joy. Crowds lined the streets, while every
+window and balcony along the route was filled with ladies, who waved
+their scarves, clapped their hands, and showered flowers upon the
+heads of their deliverers. Those below, haggard and half-starved,
+for the distress in Madrid was intense, thronged round the general's
+horse, a shouting, weeping throng, kissing his cloak, his horse, any
+portion of his equipments which they could touch. Altogether it was
+one of the most glorious, most moving, most enthusiastic welcomes ever
+offered to a general.
+
+The next fortnight was spent in a round of fetes, bull fights, and
+balls, succeeding each other rapidly, but these rejoicings were but a
+thin veil over the distress which was general throughout the town. The
+people were starving, and many deaths occurred daily from hunger. The
+British could do but little to relieve the suffering which they saw
+around them, for they themselves were--owing to the utter breakdown of
+all the arrangements undertaken by the Portuguese government, and to
+the indecision and incapacity of the Home Government--badly fed, and
+much in arrears of their pay. Nevertheless, the officers did what they
+could, got up soup kitchens, and fed daily many hundreds of starving
+wretches.
+
+The heat was excessive and a very great deal of illness took place
+among the troops. The French were gathering strength in the South,
+and Wellington determined upon marching north and seizing Burgos, an
+important place, but poorly fortified. Leaving General Hill with two
+divisions at Madrid, he marched with the rest of the army upon Burgos.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+CAUGHT IN A TRAP.
+
+
+So much had passed between the first visit of the Scudamores to Madrid
+as Spanish peasant boys, and their second entry as captains upon Lord
+Wellington's staff, that they had scarcely given a thought to the
+dangers they had at that time run, or to the deadly hatred with which
+they had inspired the guerilla chief Nunez. When they first rode
+into the town, indeed, they had spoken of it one to the other, and
+had agreed that it would be pleasant to be able to walk through the
+streets without fear of assassination; for even, as Tom said, if the
+scoundrel had any of his band there, they would not be likely to
+recognize them in their uniforms.
+
+One evening, however, when they had been in Madrid about a fortnight,
+an incident happened which caused them to doubt whether their security
+from the hatred of the guerilla was as complete as they had fancied.
+They were sitting with a number of other officers in a large cafe in
+the Puerta del Sol, the principal square in Madrid, when a girl came
+round begging; instead of holding out her hand silently with a murmur
+for charity in the name of the holy Virgin, she began a long story,
+poured out in rapid language.
+
+Several of the officers present knew more or less Spanish, but they
+were unable to follow her quick utterances, and one of them said
+laughingly, "Scudamore, this is a case for you, she is beyond us
+altogether."
+
+The girl followed the direction of the speaker's eye, and moved across
+to the brothers, who happened to be sitting next to each other, and
+began her story again. It was a complicated tale of French oppression,
+and the boys, interrupting her here and there to ask for details,
+talked with her for some minutes.
+
+"I believe she is lying," Tom said, in English, "she tells her story
+as if she had learned it by heart, and gets confused whenever we
+cross-question her; there, give her a few coppers, I am out of
+change."
+
+As Peter put his hand into his pocket for the money, Tom glanced
+up sharply at the girl. She was not, as might have been expected,
+watching Peter's movements with interest, but was looking inquiringly
+at some one in the crowd of promenaders. Tom followed her glance, and
+saw a peasant, standing half-hidden behind a group of passers, nod to
+her, and motion her to come to him. She waited until Peter put the
+coins into her hand; then, with a brief word of thanks, she moved away
+into the crowd.
+
+"Peter, I believe those scoundrels are up to their old game, and
+that we are watched. Once or twice since we have been sitting here I
+have noticed a heavy-looking fellow glance at us very closely as he
+passed, and I just saw the same fellow, who was evidently hiding from
+observation, nod to that girl, and beckon her away."
+
+"Her story was a lie from beginning to end," Peter said, "and it is
+quite possible that it was a got-up thing, on purpose to see whether
+we could talk Spanish well. I don't think any one could swear to us
+who only saw us then; but the fact of our speaking Spanish so well
+would go a long way towards settling the point in the mind of any one
+who suspected us!"
+
+"We must be careful in future, Peter, and avoid quiet streets after
+dark, and keep a sharp look-out at all times, or we shall get a knife
+between our ribs, as sure as fate."
+
+Time, however, passed on without anything occurring to give any
+support to their suspicion, they could not discover that they were
+being watched, or their footsteps dogged. They, nevertheless,
+continued to be, to a certain extent, upon their guard after dark; in
+the daytime the number of English soldiers about the streets was so
+large that there was very little danger of any attack.
+
+On the evening before the army marched for Burgos, Tom, whose turn it
+was for duty at head-quarters, received a despatch, to carry to one of
+the generals of division encamped a mile or two out of the town. He
+did not need to go round to his quarters, as his horse was standing
+saddled in readiness in the courtyard. He was but an hour away, and,
+as he knew that he would not be farther required, he rode round to the
+house where he was quartered. His orderly came forward at his shout,
+and took his horse, and he mounted the broad stairs of the house,
+which was a very handsome one, and rang at the door on the second
+floor; for in Spain, as indeed almost all over the Continent, each
+floor is a separate dwelling.
+
+Sam opened it.
+
+"Nothing new, Sam?"
+
+"No, sar, nothing new."
+
+Tom passed through the sitting-room, and entered Peter's bedroom. It
+was in darkness.
+
+"Asleep, old man?" he asked.
+
+There was no answer. He came back into the sitting room, where two
+lamps were burning, and looked at his watch. "Half-past eleven. He is
+off to bed early. Sam, bring me some supper if you have got anything,
+I am hungry."
+
+Sam came in, in a minute, with a small tray.
+
+"How long has my brother been gone to bed?"
+
+"Me did not know he gone to bed at all," Sam said, in surprise. "Me
+thought Massa Peter been reading book."
+
+Tom took up a light, and went into the bedroom, it was empty. "Sam,
+there's something wrong here!" Tom said sharply, for a sudden
+sensation of alarm seized him. "Peter is not here."
+
+Sam came into the bedroom, and looked round in astonishment. "What
+become of him?" he said. "Where de debil he got to?"
+
+"That's what I want to know, Sam. Now, then, just give all your
+attention. What time did he come in?"
+
+"He came in at about nine o'clock, sar, with three other officers,
+Captain Farquharson, Major Heriot, and Captain Brown. Dey have bottle
+wine, and sit here and smoke. Well, Massa Tom, Sam sit in his room,
+and smoke him pipe, and he doze off a little; after a bit, may be
+ten o'clock, Sam hear dem move, and go to door; they were saying
+good-night, when Massa Peter said, 'I will just go down to see that
+the horses are all right.' Den dey all go down togeder."
+
+"Did they shut the door?" Tom asked.
+
+"No, Massa Tom, dey did not shut de door, because, a little while
+after, Sam, he wake up wid little start; he hear de door bang, and
+'spose Massa Peter come back. Sam go off to sleep again till you ring
+bell."
+
+Tom looked very grave. "What can Peter have gone off with Farquharson
+at this time of night for?"
+
+Then he looked round the room, and said, almost with a cry, "Sam,
+look there, there are his cap and sword. He has not gone out with the
+others at all. What can have happened?"
+
+Tom first glanced into his own room, and then ran downstairs in haste,
+followed by Sam, who was now also thoroughly alarmed. The orderly had
+just made the horse comfortable for the night, and was leaving the
+stable.
+
+"Johnstone, when did you see my brother?"
+
+"Well, it may be an hour, or an hour and a half back, sir. He came
+down with some other officers; I did not see them, but I heard them
+talking for a minute or two before he came in to look at the horses,
+and he asked if they were all right, and said they must be saddled by
+half-past five, and then he went up again--at least, I suppose he went
+up, for he had not got his cap on. Is anything wrong, sir?"
+
+"I don't know, I am afraid to think," Tom said, in a dazed way. "He is
+not upstairs; he has not gone out; what can have become of him?"
+
+He stood quiet for a minute or two, and then, with a great effort,
+brought his thoughts within control again. "The first thing is to
+assure ourselves whether he returned upstairs. Sam, fetch a lamp, the
+stairs are not lighted, and I want to examine them."
+
+Sam soon returned with the lamp, and Tom, beginning at the street
+door, examined every step carefully all the way up, Sam and the
+soldier following him.
+
+"There has been no scuffle on the stairs," he said; then he went
+through the little hall into the sitting-room again. Nothing appeared
+to have been disturbed. Then he looked at the floor, which was of
+polished oak, and knelt down to examine it more closely. "There have
+been men with dirty shoes standing here," he cried. "Do you see the
+marks on each side of the door, and there, do you see that scratch and
+that? There has been a scuffle. Good heavens! what has taken place
+here?"
+
+Sam's face was pale with apprehension that something had happened to
+Peter; but, he said, "How dat be, Massa Tom, with Sam in the next room
+all the time?"
+
+Tom made no reply; but was closely examining the floor--back across
+the hall. "There is a mark; there is another," he said, "not made by
+boots, but by their native sandals." Then he went out from the door,
+and up the next flight of stairs.
+
+"There," he said, "just as I thought." Just round the angle of the
+stairs two steps were dirty and stained, as if dirty feet had been
+trampling upon them for some time. "I suppose they knew I was out, and
+watched here, for hours, perhaps. Then, when Peter went down, they
+slipped in through the open door, and then"--without completing the
+sentence, Tom went back into the room, and threw himself into a chair
+in tearless despair.
+
+Sam sobbed loudly. For some time there was silence. "There is no
+blood, sir, that I can see, not a speck," the orderly said. "They
+can't have killed Captain Scudamore, and, if they had, why should they
+have carried his body away?"
+
+This was the question Tom had been asking himself. Assassinations
+were, in Madrid, every-day occurrences, and that Peter and he were
+especially liable to be murdered, owing to the hatred of Nunez and his
+gang, was clear; but, so far as he could see, not a drop of blood had
+been shed here. Presently Sam began to sob more loudly. "Dis break
+my heart, Massa Tom, to tink dat Sam be next door all de time, and,
+instead of watching, he sleep so sound dat Massa Peter carried
+straight away."
+
+"You are not to blame, Sam, there was, probably, no noise whatever.
+But, what can it all mean? Johnstone, you had better go to bed, you
+can do no good now. Sam, give me my pistols; take that big stick of
+yours, and come round with me to head-quarters, we will call in at
+Captain Farquharson's on the way."
+
+That officer, on being roused, and made to understand what was the
+matter, confirmed the account given by the orderly; he and his
+companions had parted at the street door, and Peter had gone down the
+yard to the stable.
+
+"It is clear that Peter has been carried off," Tom said, "and I have
+not the least doubt that it has been done by some of the band of
+Nunez. As you have heard me say, they owe us a grudge, and have, no
+doubt, been on the look-out ever since we came here. We have been
+on guard, and never gave them a chance, and, I suppose, they got
+desperate when they found the army was moving again, and so carried
+out this audacious plan."
+
+"If your brother had been found murdered I should understand it,"
+Captain Farquharson said; "but, what on earth did they carry him off
+for?"
+
+Tom was silent for a minute.
+
+"That fiend, Nunez, would have had us stabbed if he could do nothing
+else; but he would, if I judge him rightly, be really contented with
+nothing short of putting us to death himself in some horrible manner.
+My own idea is, that Peter is hidden away somewhere near, will be kept
+in concealment until the road is clear, and will then be taken to
+Nunez. I must go off and try and save him at all hazards."
+
+Captain Farquharson was silent, while Tom walked up and down the room
+thoughtfully.
+
+"I don't suppose the chief would refuse me leave," Tom said. "If he
+does, I must throw up my commission."
+
+"No, no; you are sure to get leave for such a thing as this, but the
+difficulty of the affair will be to know how to proceed. The country
+will swarm with French, the guerillas are sure to keep a sharp
+look-out, and if you find him, how are you going to rescue him?"
+
+"I don't know," Tom said, "but it's got to be done; that's clear. I
+can't set out as a Spanish peasant," he went on after a pause. "They
+know me as that now. At least, if I do I must get up as an old man
+and change my appearance. I might go as a woman, but I am too tall in
+the first place, and then women don't go wandering over the country
+in such times as this. But there, I have time to think it over before
+morning. I suppose the general will be moving about five o'clock;
+I will see him the first thing, and tell him the whole story.
+Good-night."
+
+And so Tom went back to his quarters, and sat thinking deeply until
+morning, while Sam sat gloomily in his little room, sometimes with
+tears rolling down his cheeks, sometimes muttering terrible threats
+against the guerillas, at other times cursing himself for having been
+asleep instead of watching over his young master's safety. Tom had
+briefly told him that he intended to get leave in order to search
+for Peter. At daybreak, when he heard Tom moving, he went into the
+sitting-room.
+
+"Look here, Massa Tom, Sam only one word to say. He going to look for
+Massa Peter. Sam know dat him color berry spicuous, dat people look
+at him and tink he de debil. Sam don't spect he going wid you. Dat
+wouldn't do. Dese fellows watch him, know dat black fellow here. Only
+Sam go somehow. He trabel night, hide up at day time. He join you de
+last ting when you go to mash up dem guerillas like squash. Anyhow,
+Sam must go. If can get leave, berry well, if not he desert. Anyhow he
+go, dat sartin. Sam kill himself if he stay behind."
+
+Tom had already thought over this. He was sure that the faithful negro
+would not remain behind, but he had seen that his companionship would
+be fatal. He had, therefore, formed some plan in his head similar to
+that which Sam proposed, and he knew that when the moment for action
+came his courage, strength, and devotion would be invaluable.
+
+"You shall go, Sam," he said, holding out his hand to his attached
+follower. "As you say, you can't go with me, but you shall go
+somehow."
+
+"Thank you, Massa Tom," the negro said gratefully, "You berry sure if
+Massa Peter die Sam die too."
+
+Tom now went to head-quarters, and found that Lord Wellington was
+just up. Sending in to say that he wished to speak with him for a few
+minutes on a matter of urgent personal importance, he was admitted,
+and related as concisely as he could Peter's disappearance, and told
+the story of the affair with the guerillas, which accounted for the
+intense desire for vengeance on the part of Nunez. He ended by asking
+for leave of absence.
+
+The general heard him to the end, asking a brief question here and
+there.
+
+"You can have the leave certainly, Captain Scudamore, I know that it
+is needless for me to point out the risks that you will run, both from
+the French and guerillas. I think that it might be an advantage if I
+give you a note which you can, in case of absolute necessity, show to
+any French officer."
+
+So saying, the general sat down and wrote as follows:--
+
+"To the French officer commanding.--The Earl of Wellington,
+commander-in-chief of His Britannic Majesty's forces in Spain, gives
+his assurance that the bearer of this, Captain Scudamore, although not
+in English uniform, is not engaged upon any mission connected with the
+army, or to obtain information respecting the strength and position of
+the French forces. His business is entirely private, and he is engaged
+in an attempt to discover and rescue a brother who has been carried
+off by the guerilla chief Nunez in order to gratify private vengeance.
+The Earl of Wellington, confiding in the natural courtesy of the
+French nation, trusts that officers of that service will, if applied
+to, assist Captain Scudamore in any way in their power, and he will
+feel personally obliged to them by their so doing."
+
+Tom expressed his deep gratitude for this, which might, he foresaw, be
+of inestimable advantage to him.
+
+"I am taking my servant with me, sir--the negro; he will not travel
+with me by day, but will join me wherever I tell him; he is very
+strong and brave, and is deeply attached to us."
+
+"Yes, I remember," the general said; "that is the man whose life you
+saved. Do you leave at once?"
+
+"No, sir; I am thinking of riding with you to-morrow at any rate. The
+route lies on the way I have to go, and I am sure to be watched here."
+
+"Very well," the general said; "I wish you good fortune; but you have
+a difficult, almost a desperate, service before you."
+
+Upon leaving head-quarters, Tom again called on Captain Farquharson.
+
+"Farquharson, I hear that it will be eleven before the chief leaves. I
+wish you would go to that little shop opposite the opera-house; they
+have got wigs and all that sort of thing there. Please get me two
+old men's wigs and beards, and one set of those mutton-chop shaped
+whiskers, and a woman's wig. I haven't made up my mind yet what I am
+going to wear, but I want these things to choose from. I am sure to be
+watched, and if I were to go there they would find out, five minutes
+afterwards, what I had bought. In the meantime I am going to the head
+of the police to give notice of Peter's disappearance, and to ask him
+to have the carts leaving the town for the next few days searched.
+I have no doubt the fellows will outwit the police, but it's no use
+throwing away a chance."
+
+It was six days after this that an old man, with long white hair
+and gray beard, and with a box containing cheap trinkets, beads,
+necklaces, earrings, knives, scissors, and other like articles, was
+sitting at the junction of two roads near the lower slopes of the
+Pyrenees, some twenty miles north of Vittoria. He had one of his
+sandals off, and appeared to have just risen from a bed of leaves in
+the forest behind him. The dawn had broken, but it was still twilight.
+Presently he heard a footstep coming along the road, and at once
+applied himself to wrapping the bandages, which serve for stockings
+to the Spanish peasant, round his leg, looking eagerly from under his
+wide sombrero to see who was approaching. As the new-comer came in
+sight, the pedlar at once ceased his employment and rose to meet him.
+He had recognized the figure, but the face was hidden, the Spanish
+cloak, worn as is usual by peasant and noble alike, with one end
+thrown over the shoulder, hiding the chin and lower part of the face,
+while the wide felt hat, pressed well down in front, allowed scarcely
+a glimpse even of the nose. That, however, would have been sufficient
+in the present case, for the man was a negro.
+
+Upon seeing the pedlar rise, he ran forward to meet him.
+
+"Ah, Massa Tom, tank de Lord me find you safe and sound. I always
+keep on tinking you taken prisoner or killed eider by de French or de
+robbers--one as bad as de oder."
+
+"I have thought the same of you, Sam, for your risk has been far
+greater than mine. Well, thank God, it is all right thus far. But come
+back into the wood, I have got some food there, and here any one might
+come along."
+
+They were soon deep in the wood, where, by a pile of grass and leaves
+which had evidently been used as a bed, was an open wallet, with some
+bread, cheese, cold meat and a small skin of wine.
+
+"Are you hungry, Sam?"
+
+"Downright starving, sar; dis chile eat noting for two days."
+
+"Why, how is that, Sam; you had six days' provision with you when you
+started?"
+
+"Dat true enough, sar, but Sam's appetite bigger than usual, noting to
+do all day sitting in de woods, waiting for night to come so as to go
+on again; so had to eat, and de food all went before Sam thought dat
+dere was two more days before he meet you."
+
+"Well, sit down now, Sam, and eat away; we have plenty of time."
+
+They had much to tell each other. They had traveled by the same road,
+one by night, the other by day--Sam passing the days sleeping in the
+woods, his master traveling by day and at night sleeping in wretched
+village posadas. He, too, would far rather have slept in the woods,
+for the insects and filth made sleep almost impossible in these
+places, besides which he ran a good deal of risk as to the discovery
+of his disguise. He had, however, chosen the inns in hopes of hearing
+something which might give him a clue as to the object of his search.
+The only information, which he had gained was to the effect that Nunez
+still had his quarters at the old place. He had been driven out of it,
+and the village had been burned by the French, but the position was
+a convenient one, and the houses had been cleared and roughly roofed
+with boughs of trees and straw, and the band was still there. This
+much was satisfactory, and he could hardly have expected to learn
+more, unless he had happened to meet some of the members of the band
+itself. They had not traveled by the main road, as upon that large
+forces of the French were collected; and even if Tom could have
+passed through, boldly, Sam could not have made his way. Even by the
+road they had chosen Tom had met several bodies of French, while at
+Vittoria a very large force was assembling, destined for the relief of
+Burgos.
+
+Sam had but few incidents to relate. He had been carefully instructed
+by Tom before starting as to the road he should take, and the position
+and distances apart of the towns and villages upon it. He had traveled
+only at night, and had but once or twice exchanged a word with passers
+by. People did not travel much at night in so disturbed a country,
+and when Sam heard a foot-passenger approaching, or, as was more
+frequently the case, a party of French cavalry, he left the road and
+lay down, until they had passed. The one or two foot-passengers he had
+met suddenly he had passed with the usual Spanish muttered salutation,
+and the darkness and the disguise prevented any recognition of his
+color.
+
+"Now, sar," Sam said, when they had finished breakfast, "what am to be
+done next?"
+
+"I do not think, Sam, that the party who have got Peter have arrived
+yet. They could only have started on the day that we did; they have as
+long a road to go, and most likely they have got a bullock-cart, which
+won't travel more than fifteen miles a day at the outside. They have
+got Peter in a cart covered up with something, we may be sure. I don't
+think they will be here for another day or so at the earliest. If we
+knew what sort of cart it was, we could attack them on the way if
+there are not too many of them; but unfortunately we don't know that;
+and as there are three or four roads up to the village, and they are
+sure to make a detour, we don't know which they will come by. I hope
+to learn at the village. We will stay where we are till dark, then we
+will push on; it is only a couple of miles or so from here. I will
+steal into the place after dark, and try and overhear what is going
+on. You shall remain at a point where you can see down into the
+village and can hear a shout. I will give you this letter of Lord
+Wellington, and if you hear a pistol shot and hear me shout 'Sam!' you
+will know I am caught, and must make off as hard as you can to that
+small town in the plain, where there is a French garrison; ask for the
+commanding-officer, show this letter, and offer to guide them so as
+to surprise Nunez and his band. That is our sole chance. But I don't
+think there is much risk of being caught. I shall be very careful, you
+may rely upon it; and as I know the position of the house, I shall be
+able to make my way about. Once night has fallen they go off to bed;
+and even if I walked boldly about the place I should likely enough
+meet no one all night."
+
+That evening Tom entered the village as soon as it was fairly dark. He
+knew, from his former experience, that sentries were always placed at
+points whence they could get a view of the roads, and he made his way
+so as to avoid any risk of observation by them; but when he reached a
+place whence he could in turn view the posts of the watchers, he found
+that they were deserted, and concluded that the brigands had become
+careless, from the belief that, now the French had once destroyed the
+village, they would not be likely to come up to search for them there
+a second time; besides which, they might reckon that the French had
+their hands much too full with the advance of the Allied Army to spare
+either men or time in raids upon the guerillas. In this particular,
+indeed, they would have argued wrongly, for the French during the
+whole war, however much they were pressed by Wellington, always kept
+sufficient forces in hand to scatter the guerillas as fast as they
+become formidable.
+
+Tom had now taken off his beard and wig, and had put on the small
+whisker, which is the general fashion of wearing the hair throughout
+Spain. Thus he trusted, if surprised in the dark, to pass as one of
+the band. So quiet was the village when he entered, that he at first
+thought it was deserted; at last, however, he saw a light in one of
+the houses in the center of the village. Approaching carefully and
+noiselessly he saw a group of five men sitting and drinking round a
+fire made on the ground, in the center of one of the windowless rooms,
+the smoke finding its way out through the roof.
+
+"I tell you," one said, "I am getting sick of this life; I am ready to
+go and kill the French, but to be left up here, where there is nothing
+to do, no one to talk to, not a roof to cover one; bah! I am sick of
+it. But Nunez will be back in three days, and we shall be merry enough
+then."
+
+"Not we," another said, "this was a pleasant village in the old days,
+what is it now? There are no women, not even old mother Morena, who
+used to cook well, if she was free of her tongue. There is not even a
+priest now to shrive us if one is brought in to die."
+
+"Nunez will come back in a good temper if it is true what Lope said
+yesterday when he came through, that the lads at Madrid had got one
+of those English boys who made a fool of him two years ago. That was
+a go. Demonio! but it was a fine thing. If it is true that they have
+got him and are bringing him here I would not be in his skin for all
+the treasures of King Joseph. Yes, Nunez was always a devil, but he is
+worse now. Somehow we always have bad luck, and the band gets smaller
+and smaller, I don't suppose there's above fifty with him now. I
+expect we shall have them pretty well all here this week."
+
+"No fear of a visit from the French?"
+
+"None; Reynier at Vittoria is busy now in sending every man he can
+spare forward to the army that's gathering near Burgos."
+
+This was enough for Tom, who stole silently away to the spot where Sam
+was anxiously awaiting him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+JUST IN TIME.
+
+
+"I shall go straight back to Vittoria, Sam. By what they say, General
+Reynier is in command there, and as it was through his wife that all
+this terrible business has come about, we have a right to expect him
+to do his best to get us out of it. I will start at once. Now look
+here, Sam. You must put yourself where you can keep watch over the
+village. If you see any party come in, either to-night or to-morrow,
+you must try and discover if Peter is among them. If he is, light a
+fire down in that hollow where it can't be seen from above, but where
+we can see it on that road. It's twenty miles to Vittoria; if I can
+get to see General Reynier to-morrow, I may be back here with cavalry
+by night; if he is out or anything prevents it, I will be here next
+night, as soon after dusk as it will be safe. I will dismount the men
+and take them over the hill, so as to avoid the sentinel who is sure
+to be posted on the road when Nunez arrives. If they come in the
+afternoon, Sam, and you find that anything is going to be done at
+once, do everything you can to delay matters."
+
+"All right, Massa Tom, if, when you come back you find Massa Peter
+dead, you be berry sure you find dis chile gone down too."
+
+It was seven o'clock next morning when Tom entered Vittoria, and
+a few cautious inquiries proved the fact that General Reynier was
+really in command of the French division there. He at once sought his
+head-quarters, and after some talk with a woman selling fruit near the
+house, heard that the general and his staff had started at daybreak,
+but whither of course she knew not. Tom hesitated for some time, and
+then, seeing an officer standing at the door, went up to him and asked
+if the general would be back soon.
+
+"He will be back in an hour or two," the officer replied in Spanish,
+"but it is no use your waiting to see him. He has his hands full and
+can't be bothered with petitions as to cattle stolen or orchards
+robbed. Wait till we have driven the English back, and then we shall
+have time to talk to you."
+
+"Your pardon," Tom said humbly. "It is not a complaint that I have to
+make, it is something of real importance which I have to communicate
+to him."
+
+"You can tell me, I am Colonel Decamps; it will be all the same thing
+if your news is really important."
+
+"Thank you very kindly, senor, it must be the general himself; I will
+wait here." Thereupon Tom sat down with his back to the wall a short
+distance off, pulled out some bread and fruit he had bought in the
+town, and began quietly to eat his breakfast. An hour later a pretty
+carriage with two fine horses drew up to the door. It was empty,
+and was evidently intended for some one in the house. Suddenly, the
+thought flashed across his mind, perhaps Madame Reynier and her child
+were there. It was curious that the thought had not occurred to him
+before, but it had not, and he drew near, when a sentry at the door
+roughly ordered him to stand further back. Presently a lady came to
+the door, accompanied by a little girl. There she stood for a minute
+talking with the officer with whom Tom had spoken. At the moment a
+young officer passed Tom on his way to the house.
+
+"Monsieur," Tom said, in French, "do me the favor to place that ring
+in the hands of Madame Reynier. It is a matter of life and death.
+She will recognize the ring, it is her own," he added, as the young
+officer in surprise hesitated. He was a bright handsome young fellow,
+and after a moment's, pause, he went up to the lady. "My dear aunt,"
+he said, "here is a mystery. An old Spanish beggar speaks French, not
+very good French, but enough to make out, and he begs me to give you
+this ring, which he says is yours, and which, by the way, looks a
+valuable one." Madame Reynier, in some surprise, held out her hand
+for the ring. "It is not mine," she began, when a sudden thought
+struck her, and turning it round she saw "a Louise Reynier, tumors
+reconnaissance," which she had had engraved on it, before giving it to
+Tom. "Who gave it to you, Jules?" she asked eagerly.
+
+"That old pedler," Jules said.
+
+"Bring him in," Madame Reynier said, "the carriage must wait; I must
+speak to him and alone."
+
+"My dear aunt," began her nephew.
+
+"Don't be afraid, Jules, I am not going to run away with him, and if
+you are a good boy you shall know all about it afterwards, wait here,
+Louise, with your cousin;" and beckoning to Tom to follow her, she
+went into the house, the two officers looking astounded at each other
+as the supposed Spanish pedler followed her into her sitting-room.
+
+"What is your message?" she asked.
+
+Tom's answer was to remove his wide hat, wig, and beard.
+
+"Himself!" Madame Reynier exclaimed, "my preserver," and she held out
+both her hands to him. "How glad I am, but oh! how foolish to come
+here again, and--and"--she hesitated at the thought that he, an
+English spy, ought not to come to her, the wife of a French general.
+
+Tom guessed her thought. "Even General Reynier might succor us without
+betraying the interests of his country. Read that, madame; it is an
+open letter," and he handed her Lord Wellington's letter.
+
+She glanced through it and turned pale. "Your brother! is he in the
+hands of the guerillas? Where? How?"
+
+"He is in the hands of that scoundrel Nunez; he swore he would be
+revenged for that day's work, and he has had Peter carried off. No
+doubt to kill him with torture."
+
+"Oh! and it is through me," Madame Reynier exclaimed, greatly
+distressed. "What can we do! Please let me consult with my friends,
+every soldier shall be at your service," and she opened the door.
+"Colonel Deschamps, Jules, come here directly, and bring Louise with
+you." These officers, on entering, were struck dumb with astonishment
+on finding a young peasant instead of an old pedler, and at seeing
+tears standing in Madame Reynier's eyes. "Louise," she said to her
+daughter, "look at this gentleman, who is he?"
+
+The child looked hard at Tom; he was dressed nearly as when she first
+saw him--and as he smiled she recognized him. "Oh, it is the good
+boy!" she cried, and leaped into Tom's arms, and kissed him heartily.
+
+"Do you think we have gone mad, Jules, Louise and I? This is one of
+the young English officers who saved our lives, as you have often
+heard me tell you."
+
+Jules stepped forward, and shook Tom's hand heartily, but Colonel
+Deschamps looked very serious. "But, madame," he began, "you are wrong
+to tell me this."
+
+"No, Colonel;" Madame Reynier said, "here is a letter, of which this
+gentleman is the bearer, from Lord Wellington himself, vouching for
+him, and asking for the help of every Frenchman."
+
+Colonel Deschamps read it, and his brow cleared, and he held out his
+hand to Tom. "Pardon my hesitation, sir," he said in Spanish; "but I
+feared that I was placed in a painful position, between what I owe
+to my country, and what all French soldiers owe to you, for what you
+did for Madame Reynier. I am, indeed, glad to find that this letter
+absolves me from the former duty, and leaves me free to do all I can
+to discharge the latter debt. Where is your brother, and why has he
+been carried off? I have known hundreds of our officers assassinated
+by these Spanish wolves, but never one carried away. An English
+officer, too, it makes it the more strange!"
+
+Tom now related the story of Peter's abduction; the previous attempts
+of members of Nunez's band to assassinate them, and the reasons he
+had for believing that Peter was close to, if not already at, the
+headquarters of that desperado.
+
+"Is he still there?" Jules asked. "We routed him out directly the
+general came up here. My aunt declared herself bound by a promise, and
+would give us no clue as to the position of the village, but he had
+made himself such a scourge, that there were plenty of others ready to
+tell; if we had known the roads, we would have killed the whole band,
+but unfortunately they took the alarm and made off. So he has gone
+back there again. Ah! there is the general."
+
+Madame Reynier went out to meet her husband, and drawing him aside
+into another room, explained the whole circumstance to him, with
+difficulty detaining him long enough to tell her story, as the moment
+he found that his wife and child's deliverer was in the next room, he
+desired to rush off to see him. The story over, he rushed impetuously
+into the room, where Tom was explaining his plans to his French
+friends, seized him in his arms, and kissed him on both cheeks, as if
+he had been his son.
+
+"I have longed for this day!" he said, wiping his eyes. "I have prayed
+that I might some day meet you, to thank you for my wife and child,
+who would have been lost to me, but for you. And now I hear your
+gallant brother is paying with his life for that good deed. Tell me
+what to do, and if necessary I will put the whole division at your
+orders."
+
+"I do not think that he will have above fifty men with him, general;
+say eighty, at the outside. Two squadrons of cavalry will be
+sufficient. They must dismount at the bottom of the hill, and I will
+lead them up. We must not get within sight of the hill till it is too
+dark for their look-out to see us, or the alarm would be given, and we
+should catch no one. We shall know if they have arrived, by a fire my
+man is to light. If they have not come, then I would put sentries on
+guard upon every road leading there, and search every cart that comes
+up; they are sure to have got him hid under some hay, or something of
+that sort, and there are not likely to be more than two or three men
+actually with it, so as not to attract attention. It will be all right
+if they do not arrive there to-day."
+
+"It is about five hours' ride for cavalry," the general said, "that
+is at an easy pace; it will not be dark enough to approach the hill
+without being seen till eight o'clock. Two squadrons shall be paraded
+here at three o'clock. I will go with you myself; yes, and you shall
+go too, Jules," he said, in answer to an anxious look from his nephew.
+"In the mean time you can lend our friend some clothes; you are about
+the same size."
+
+"Come along," Jules said laughing; "I think we can improve your
+appearance," and, indeed, he did so, for in half an hour Tom returned
+looking all over a dashing young French hussar, and little Louise
+clapped her hands and said--
+
+"He does look nice, mamma, don't he? Why can't he stay with us always,
+and dress like that? and we know he's brave, and he would help papa
+and Jules to kill the wicked English."
+
+There was a hearty laugh, and Jules was about to tell her that Tom was
+himself one of the wicked English, but Madame Reynier shook her head,
+for, as she told him afterwards, it was as well not to tell her, for
+little mouths would talk, and there was no occasion to set everyone
+wondering and talking about the visit of an English officer to General
+Reynier. "There is no treason in it, Jules, still one does not want to
+be suspected of treason, even by fools."
+
+Sam watched all night, without hearing any sound of vehicles, but in
+the morning he saw that several more guerillas had come in during the
+night. In the morning parties of twos and threes began to come in
+from the direction of Vittoria, and it was evident from the shouting
+and noise in the village that these brought satisfactory news of
+some kind. In the afternoon most of them went out again in a body
+to the wood at the foot of the hill, and soon afterwards Sam saw a
+cart coming along across the plain. Two men walked beside it, and
+Sam could see one, if not two more perched upon the top of the load.
+Three others walked along at a distance of some fifty yards ahead, and
+as many more at about the same distance behind. He could see others
+making their way through the fields. "Dis berry bad job," Sam said
+to himself; "me berry much afraid dat Massa Tom he not get back in
+time. Der's too many for Sam to fight all by himself, but he must
+do someting." Whereupon Sam set to to think with all his might, and
+presently burst into a broad grin. "Sure enough dat do," he said; "now
+let me arrange all about what dey call de pamerphernalia." First, he
+emptied out the contents of a couple of dozen pistol cartridges; he
+wetted the powder and rolled it up in six cartridges, like squibs,
+three short ones and three much longer. Then he opened Tom's kit,
+and took out a small box of paints, which Tom had carried with him
+for making dark lines on his face, and in other ways to assist his
+disguise. Taking some white paint, Sam painted his eyelids up to his
+eyebrows, and a circle on his cheeks, giving the eyes at a short
+distance the appearance of ghastly saucers.
+
+"Dat will do for de present," he said; "now for business. If dey wait
+till it get dark, all right; if not, Sam do for Nunez and two or three
+more, and den go down with Massa Peter!"
+
+Then carefully examining the priming of the pair of pistols, which
+he carried--the very pistols given to Peter by the passengers of the
+Marlborough coach--he prepared to set out.
+
+It was now six o'clock, and he calculated that the waggon would by
+this time have mounted the hill, and reached the village; he had
+already collected a large heap of dry sticks and some logs, at the
+point Tom had pointed out, these he now lit, and then started for the
+top of the hill. Looking back, just as he reached the crest, he could
+see, knowing where it was, a very light smoke curling up over a clump
+of trees which intervened between him and the fire, but it was so
+slight that he was convinced that it would not be noticed by an
+ordinary observer. Sam saw at once, on reaching the top of the hill,
+that the guerillas were crowded round the waggon, which stood at the
+edge of a small clump of trees in the middle of the village. The
+moment was favourable, and he at once started forward, sometimes
+making a detour, so as to have the shelter of a tree, sometimes
+stooping behind a low stone wall, until he reached the first house
+in the village. It was now comparatively easy work, for there were
+enclosures and walls, the patches of garden-ground were breast-high
+with weeds, and, stooping and crawling, Sam soon reached a house close
+to the waggon. It was a mere hut, and had not been repaired. The roof
+was gone, but the charred shutters and doors still hung on their
+hinges. It was the very place from which to see without being seen.
+Sam entered by a door from behind, and found that, through a slight
+opening in the window-shutter, he could see all that was going on.
+Some fifty guerillas were standing or sitting in groups at a distance
+of twenty yards.
+
+In the centre of the groups, lying on the ground, was a figure which
+he at once recognized as Peter. It was wound round and round with
+ropes; beside it stood, or rather danced, Nunez pouring forth strings
+of abuse, of threats, and of curses, and enforcing them with repeated
+kicks at the motionless figure.
+
+"De debil!" muttered Sam, "me neber able to stand dis. If you not stop
+dat, Massa Nunez, me put a bullet through dat ugly head of yours, as
+sure as you stand dere. But me mustn't do it till last ting; for,
+whether I kill him or not, it's all up with Massa Peter and me if I
+once fire."
+
+Fortunately Nunez was tired, and in a short time he desisted, and
+threw himself down on the ground. "Take off his ropes, one of you," he
+said: "there would be no fear of his running away had he three or four
+days to live, instead of as many hours. Take the gag out of his mouth,
+throw some water over him to bring him round, and pour some wine down
+his throat. I want him to be fresh, so as to be able to enjoy the
+pleasure we have in store for him. And now let's have dinner."
+
+Sam felt that for another hour at least Peter was safe, and
+therefore, with the same precaution as before, he crept away from his
+hiding-place, through the village, and over the hill-crest, to the
+place where he had made his fire. The logs were burning well, but gave
+out but little smoke. Sam looked at the sky. "Dusk cum on berry fast,"
+he said; "another hour Massa Tom come on with soldiers. If he see
+fire, he hurry up sharp." So saying, Sam heaped on a pile of wood,
+and then made his way back. He knew that Tom would not approach until
+it was too dark for the movements of the troops to be seen by the
+look-outs, and that he could not be expected to reach the village
+until fully an hour after dark. "Just another hour and a half," he
+said to himself; "ebery thing depend upon what happen before dat
+time." It was quite dusk before he regained the shelter of the
+cottage. He had gone round by the wagon, and had taken from it a large
+stable-fork, muttering as he did so. "Golly! dis de berry ting."
+Close by he saw the carcase of a bullock which the guerillas had just
+slaughtered, and from this he cut off the horns and tail.
+
+When Sam peeped out through the shutter he saw that something was
+going to be done. Nunez was sitting smoking a cigarette, with a look
+of savage pleasure in his face, while the men heaped up a large fire
+in front of the trees.
+
+"I don't like dat gentleman's look," Sam said to himself. "It's time
+dis chile begin to dress for de pantomime, dat quite plain. Massa Tom
+get here too late." Thus saying, Sam began to deliberately undress.
+
+Peter, his arms and feet still bound, was sitting with his back
+against a tree, watching what were, he was convinced, the preparations
+for his death. For the last ten days he had lived in a sort of
+confused and painful dream. From the moment, when, upon entering his
+room two hands suddenly gripped his throat, others thrust a gag in the
+mouth, and then blindfolded him, while some one from behind lashed his
+arms to his side, and then altogether, lifting him like a log, carried
+him downstairs and threw him into a cart, he had not till now seen
+anything. The bandage had never been removed from his eyes, or the
+cords from his limbs. Sometimes he had been made to sit up, and soup
+and wine had been poured down his throat, or a piece of bread thrust
+into his mouth; then he had been again gagged and thrown into a cart.
+Over him brushwood and fagots had been piled, and there he had lain,
+until at night a stop was made, when he was taken out, fed, and then
+thrust back again and covered over.
+
+From the first he had never doubted who were his captors, or what was
+his destination, and he therefore experienced no surprise whatever,
+when, on his arrival at the village, on the bandage being taken off
+his eyes, he saw where he was. That it was useless to beg for mercy of
+the savages into whose power he had fallen he knew well enough, and he
+looked as calm and indifferent, as if he did not hear a word of the
+threats and imprecations which Nunez was heaping on him.
+
+"You see that fire," the enraged guerilla said, "there you shall be
+roasted! English pig that you are! But not yet. That were too quick
+a death! Here," he said to his followers, "make a little fire by the
+side of the big one--there under the arm of that tree; and put on
+plenty of green leaves: we will smoke our pig a bit before we roast
+him!"
+
+Peter still eyed him unflinchingly. He was determined that no pain
+should wring a complaint or prayer for mercy. Even now he did not
+quite despair, for he thought that he had just one chance of life. He
+was sure that Tom would move heaven and earth to save him. He reckoned
+that he would at once guess who had carried him off, and with what
+object; and he felt that Tom would be certain to set off to his
+rescue. All this he had reflected over in his long days of weary
+suffering, and from the moment that he was unbandaged, and propped
+against the tree, he had listened attentively for any unusual sound.
+How Tom could rescue him he did not see. He was so utterly crippled,
+from his long confinement, that he knew that it would be hours,
+perhaps days, before he could walk a step; yet, still he thought it
+possible that Tom might try; and he feared more than he hoped, for he
+trembled lest, if Tom were really there, that he would do some rash
+thing, which would involve him in his fate. "Whether Tom is here or
+not," Peter thought as he looked unflinchingly at Nunez, "one thing
+is certain, if I know my brother, you will not have many days to live
+after me, for Tom will follow you all over Spain, but he will avenge
+me at last!" Such were Peter's thoughts, and so likely did he think it
+that Tom was present, that he was scarcely surprised when he heard, as
+from the ground behind him, a well-known voice.
+
+"Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam here, Massa Tom he be here
+in another half hour with French soldiers. If dey go to kill you
+before dat, Sam play dem trick. Can you run, Massa Peter, if I cut de
+cord?"
+
+"No, Sam."
+
+"Dat bad job. Neber mind, Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam
+keep quiet as long as he can, but when de worst come Sam do de trick
+all right."
+
+"Don't show yourself, Sam. It would only cost you your life, and
+couldn't help me; besides, it would put them on their guard. They
+won't kill me yet. They will smoke me, and so on, but they will make
+it last as long as they can."
+
+Peter was able to say this, for at the moment Nunez was occupied in
+rolling and lighting a second cigarette. Peter received no answer, for
+Sam, seeing some guerillas bringing sticks and leaves to make a fire,
+as Nunez, had ordered, crept back again into the deep shadow behind.
+The fire was now giving out volumes of smoke, a guerilla climbed up
+the tree and slung a rope over it, and three others approached Peter.
+His heart beat rapidly; but it was with hope, not fear. He knew, from
+the words of Nunez, that at present he was not going to be burned,
+but, as he guessed, to be hung over the smoke until he was insensible,
+and then brought to life again with buckets of water, only to have the
+suffocation repeated, until it pleased Nunez to try some fresh mode of
+torture.
+
+It was as he imagined. The rope was attached to his legs, and amid
+the cheers of the guerillas, two men hauled upon the other end until
+Peter swung, head downwards, over the fire. There was no flame, but
+dense volumes of pungent smoke rose in his face. For a moment his eyes
+smarted with agony, then a choking sensation seized him, his blood
+seemed to rush into his head, and his veins to be bursting: and there
+was a confused din in his ears and a last throb of pain, and then he
+was insensible.
+
+"That's enough for the present," Nunez said; "cut him down."
+
+The men advanced to do so, but paused, with astonishment, for from
+behind the great fire was a loud yell--"Yah, yah, yah!"--each louder
+than the last, and then, leaping through the flames appeared, as they
+supposed, the devil. Sam's appearance was indeed amply sufficient to
+strike horror in the minds of a band of intensely superstitious men.
+He had entirely stripped himself, with the exception of his sandals,
+which he had retained in order to be able to run freely; on his head
+were two great horns; in one hand he held a fork, and in the other
+what appeared to be his tail, but which really belonged to the
+slaughtered bullock. From his month, his horns, and the end of his
+tail poured volumes of fire, arising, it needs not to say, from the
+squibs he had prepared. The great white circles round the eyes added
+to the ghastliness of his appearance, and seeing the terrible figure
+leap apparently from the flames, it is no wonder that a scream of
+terror rose from the guerillas. Whatever a Spanish peasant may believe
+about saints and angels, he believes yet more implicitly in a devil.
+Black, with horns, and a tail--and here he was--with these appendages
+tipped with fire! Those who were able turned and fled in terror, those
+who were too frightened to run fell on their knees and screamed for
+mercy, while one or two fell insensible from fear. Taking the squibs
+from his mouth, and giving one more startling yell, to quicken the
+fugitives, Sam made two strides to where Peter was hanging, cut the
+rope, and lowered him down.
+
+Nunez had at first joined in the flight, but looking over his shoulder
+he saw what Sam was doing. His rage and frenzy, at the thought of
+being cheated of his victim, even by the evil one himself, overcame
+his fear, and he rushed back, shouting, "He is mine! He is mine! I
+won't give him to you!" and fired a pistol almost in Sam's face. The
+ball carried away a portion of one of Sam's ears, and with a yell,
+even more thrilling than those he had given before, he plunged his
+pitchfork into the body of the guerilla, then, exerting all his
+immense strength, he lifted him upon it, as if he had been a truss of
+straw, took three steps to the great bonfire and cast the brigand into
+it.
+
+There was a volume of sparks, a tumbling together of big logs, and the
+most cruel of the Spanish guerillas had ceased to exist.
+
+This awful sight completed the discomfiture of the guerillas--some
+hearing their chief's shouts and the sound o his pistol had looked
+round, but the sight of the gigantic fiend casting him into the fire
+was too much for them. With cries of horror and fear they continued
+their flight; a few of them, who had fallen on their knees, gained
+strength enough, from fear, to rise and fly; the rest lay on their
+faces. Sam saw that for the present all was clear, and lifting up
+Peter's still insensible body, as if it had no weight whatever, he
+turned and went at a brisk trot out of the village, then over the
+crest and down towards the fire.
+
+Then he heard a ring of metal in front of him, and a voice said, "_Qui
+vive_!" while another voice said, "Is that you, Sam?"
+
+"Bress de Lord! Massa Tom, dis is me sure enough: and what is much
+better, here is Massa Peter."
+
+"Thank God!" Tom said fervently. "Is he hurt? Why don't you speak,
+Peter?"
+
+"He all right, Massa Tom. He talk in a minute or two. Now smoke choke
+him, he better presently. Here, massa, you take him down to fire, pour
+a little brandy down his throat. Now, massa officer, I lead de way
+back to village."
+
+As Tom took Peter in his arms a sudden fire of musketry was heard down
+on the road.
+
+"Our fellows have got them," Jules said. "I don't know what has
+alarmed them, but they are running away!"
+
+"Push forward," General Reynier said, "and give no quarter! Jules,
+keep by the negro, and see that he comes to no harm. The men might
+mistake him for a guerilla."
+
+The night was pitch dark, and the extraordinary appearance of Sam
+could not be perceived until after scouring the village and shooting
+the few wretches whom they found there, they gathered round the
+fire. Before reaching it, however, Sam had slipped away for a moment
+into the hut where he had stripped; here he quickly dressed himself,
+removed the paint from his face, and rejoined the group, who were not
+a little surprised at seeing his black face.
+
+In a short time the parties who had been posted on all the various
+roads came in, and it was found that they had between them killed
+some thirty or forty of the brigands, and had brought in two or three
+prisoners.
+
+"Have you killed or taken Nunez?" General Reynier asked. "Our work is
+only half done if that scoundrel has escaped."
+
+"I have asked the prisoners," one of the officers said, "and they tell
+an extraordinary story, that the devil has just thrown him into the
+fire!"
+
+"What do they mean by such folly as that," the general asked angrily.
+"Were they making fun of you?"
+
+"No, sir, they were certainly serious enough over it, and they were
+all running for their lives when they fell into our hands; they had
+been horribly frightened at something."
+
+"Ask that fellow there," the general said, pointing to a prisoner who
+had been brought in by another detachment, "he cannot have spoken to
+the others."
+
+The man was brought forward, and then Jules asked him in Spanish:
+"What were you all running away for?"
+
+The man gave a glance of horror at the fire. "The devil came with his
+pitchfork, fire came out of his mouth, his tail and his horns were
+tipped with sparks, the captain fired at him, of course the bullet did
+no good, and the devil put his fork into him, carried him to the fire,
+and threw him in."
+
+Jules and some of the other young officers burst out laughing, but the
+general said:--
+
+"Humph! We can easily prove a portion of the story. See if there are
+any human remains in that fire."
+
+The wind was blowing the other way, but as a sergeant went up to the
+fire in obedience to the general's order, he said:--
+
+"There is a great smell of burnt flesh here, and, sapristi, yes," as
+he tossed over the logs with his foot "there is a body here, sir,
+pretty well burnt up."
+
+"It's a curious story," the general said. "Where is that negro,
+perhaps he can enlighten us?"
+
+But Sam had already left to look after Peter.
+
+"Jules, put these fellows against that wall and give them a volley,
+then march the men down to the wood where their horses are. We will
+bivouac here for the night."
+
+A party now brought up Peter, who had quite come round, but was unable
+to stand, or indeed to move his arms, so injured was he by the ropes,
+which had completely cut their way into his flesh. However, he was
+cheerful and bright, and able really to enjoy the supper which was
+soon prepared. That done, General Reynier said:--
+
+"Captain Scudamore, will you call your black man when he has finished
+his supper, which, no doubt, he needs? I want him to tell me what took
+place before we arrived. The prisoners were full of some cock-and-bull
+story, that the devil had stuck his fork into their captain and
+pitched him into the fire, and the story is corroborated, at least to
+the extent of the fact that, on turning the fire over, we found a body
+there."
+
+Sam, called and questioned, told the whole story, which Tom translated
+as he went on to the French officers, and it was received with a
+chorus of laughter at the thought of the oddity of Sam's appearance,
+and of the brigands' terror, and with warm admiration for the able
+stratagem and courage shown by the black.
+
+Tom was delighted, and Peter, who had until now been entirely ignorant
+of the manner in which he had been saved, feebly pressed Sam's hand
+and said a few words of gratitude and thanks, which so delighted Sam
+that he retired to cry quietly.
+
+The next day they moved down to Vittoria, where Peter was tenderly
+nursed by Madame Reynier. A week later he was fit to sit on horseback,
+and the next day, after a hearty and affectionate parting, they
+started to rejoin their own army. Both were now dressed as Spanish
+gentlemen, and Jules, with four troopers accompanied them as an
+escort.
+
+They made a long detour to avoid the French army in the field under
+Clausel, and at last came within sight of the British outposts. Here
+Jules and his escort halted, and after a warm embrace with the merry
+young Frenchman, they rode forward, and, after the usual parleying
+with the pickets, were passed forward to the officer commanding the
+post. He happened to be well known to them, and after the first
+surprise, and a few words of explanation, they rode on towards the
+head-quarters of the army besieging Burgos.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+VITTORIA.
+
+
+General Clausel fell back as Wellington advanced to Burgos, and the
+British laid siege to the castle of that place. Like all Wellington's
+sieges this was commenced with a wholly insufficient train of
+artillery, and without the time necessary to carry out regular siege
+operations. A considerable portion of the army were posted so as to
+watch Clausel. The place was badly fortified, but the French under
+Governor Dubreton defended themselves with immense skill and courage,
+the English assaults were repulsed, successful sorties were made by
+the garrison, and at last, after the failure of the fourth assault,
+the siege was given up, and the allied armies turned their faces once
+more towards Portugal.
+
+It was time; the operations in the south upon which Wellington had
+relied to keep at least a portion of the French forces engaged, had
+failed signally, and the French generals were bringing up their
+troops from all parts of Spain, and General Souham, having under him
+Generals Clausel, Maucune, and Foy, with a force far superior to
+that of the British, advanced to give battle. Then Wellington, whose
+Anglo-Portuguese troops were much weakened by sickness, fell back
+rapidly, sending orders to General Hill, who commanded the troops left
+behind in Madrid, to evacuate that city, and to fall back and unite
+with him on the Tormes.
+
+It was only by some masterly maneuvering and some stiff fighting at
+Venta de Pozo, on the Carrion, and on the Huebra, that Wellington drew
+off his army to Ciudad Rodrigo.
+
+During the retreat the British suffered very severely, and the
+discipline of the army became greatly impaired, so much so that Lord
+Wellington issued a general order rebuking the army, saying that
+"discipline had deteriorated during the campaign in a greater degree
+than he had ever witnessed or read of in any army, and this without
+any unusual privation or hardship, or any long marches."
+
+The number of stragglers may be imagined by the fact that the loss of
+the allied army was upwards of nine thousand, of whom not more than
+two thousand were killed and wounded at Burgos, and in the combats
+during the retreat. This number includes the Spanish as well as the
+Anglo-Portuguese loss.
+
+It was the beginning of December when the allied army reached their
+winter quarters around Ciudad Rodrigo. It was fortunate that the
+season of the year, and the necessity which the French had to refill
+their magazines, and collect food, gave breathing time and rest to
+the British. Although strengthened by his junction with Hill, and by
+the arrival of reinforcements from the coast, Wellington was not in a
+position to have made a stand against such a force as the French could
+have brought against him.
+
+Tom and Peter Scudamore had rejoined the army at the hottest part
+of the siege of Burgos, and had taken up their work at once. Lord
+Wellington heard from Tom a brief account of what had taken place,
+and said a few kind words expressive of his pleasure at their both
+having escaped from so great a peril, and, grave and preoccupied as
+he was with the position of his army, he yet laughed at the account
+of the scare Sam had given the guerillas. Among their friends nothing
+was talked of for a day or two but their adventure. The times were
+stirring, however, and one event rapidly drove out another. Sam
+became a greater favorite than ever among the officers of the staff,
+while the orderlies were never tired of hearing how he pretty nearly
+frightened a band of guerillas to death by pretending to be the evil
+one in person.
+
+The next four months were passed in preparations for the grand attack
+with which Wellington confidently hoped to drive the French out of
+Spain. The news of the defeat of Napoleon in Russia had cheered the
+hearts of the enemies of France, and excited them to make a great
+effort to strike a decisive blow. The French army was weakened by the
+withdrawal of several corps to strengthen the armies which Napoleon
+was raising for his campaign in Germany, and British gold had been so
+freely spent, that the Portuguese army was now in a really efficient
+state; a portion of the Spanish army had been handed over to
+Wellington, and were now in a far more trustworthy condition than
+they had been heretofore, while the whole of the north of Spain was
+in a state of insurrection, which the French, in spite of all their
+efforts, were unable to repress.
+
+The invasion was delayed until the end of May, in order that the crops
+might be in a fit state for the subsistence of the cavalry and baggage
+animals; but in the last week in that month all was ready, and, in
+several columns, the allied army poured into Spain nearly a hundred
+thousand strong. The French, ignorant alike of Wellington's intentions
+and preparations, were in no position to stem effectually this mighty
+wave of war, and were driven headlong before it, with many fierce
+skirmishes, until their scattered forces were, for the most part,
+united on the Ebro.
+
+Here Joseph occupied a strong position, which he thought to hold until
+the whole of his troops could come up; but Wellington made a detour,
+swept round his right, and the French fell back in haste, and took
+up their position in the basin of Vittoria, where all the stores and
+baggage which had been carried off as the army retreated from Madrid,
+Valladolid, Burgos, and other towns, were collected. At Vittoria were
+gathered the Court, and an enormous mass of fugitives, as all the
+Spaniards who had adhered to the cause of Joseph had, with their
+wives and families, accompanied the French in their retreat. Hence
+the accumulation of baggage animals, and carts, of stores of all
+descriptions, of magazines, of food and artillery, of helpless,
+frightened people, was enormous, and, for the retreat of the army in
+case of defeat, there was but one good road, already encumbered with
+baggage and fugitives!
+
+This terrible accumulation arose partly from the fault of Joseph, who
+was wholly unequal to the supreme command in an emergency like the
+present. Confused and bewildered by the urgency of the danger, he had
+hesitated, wavered, and lost precious time. By resistance at any of
+the rivers, which Wellington had passed unopposed, he might easily
+have gained a few days, and thus have allowed time for the great mass
+of fugitives to reach the French frontier, and for Foy and Clausel,
+each of whom were within a day's march upon the day of the battle, to
+have arrived with a reinforcement of 20,000 good fighting men. Instead
+of this, he had suffered himself to be outflanked day after day, and
+his army forced into retreat, without an effort at resistance--a
+course of action irritating and disheartening to all troops, but
+especially to the French, who, admirable in attack, are easily
+dispirited, and are ill suited to defensive warfare.
+
+The position which he had now chosen for the battle, on which his
+kingdom was to be staked, was badly selected for the action. The front
+was, indeed, covered by the river Zadora, but this was crossed by
+seven available bridges, none of which had been broken down, while
+there was but the one good line of retreat, and this, besides being
+already encumbered with baggage-wagons, could be easily turned by the
+allies. The French army, weakened by 5000 men, who had marched upon
+the preceding days, in charge of convoys for France, were still about
+70,000 strong, the allies--British, Portuguese, and Spanish--about
+80,000. The French were the strongest in artillery.
+
+Wellington, seeing that Joseph had determined to stand at bay, made
+his arrangements for the battle. On the left, Graham, with 20,000 men,
+was to attempt to cross the Zadora at Gamara Mayor, when he would
+find himself on the main road, behind Vittoria, and so cut the French
+line of retreat. Hill, with a like force, was to attack on the right,
+through the defile of Puebla, and so, entering the basin of Vittoria,
+to threaten the French right, and obtain possession of the bridge of
+Nanclares. In the center, Wellington himself, with 30,000 troops,
+would force the four bridges in front of the French center, and attack
+their main position.
+
+At daybreak on the 21st of June, 1813, the weather being rainy with
+some mist, the troops moved from their quarters on the Bayas, passed
+in columns over the bridges in front, and slowly approached the
+Zadora. About ten o'clock, Hill seized the village of Puebla, and
+commenced the passage of the defile, while one of the Portuguese
+battalions scaled the heights above. Here the French met them, and a
+fierce fight ensued; the French were reinforced on their side, while
+the 71st Regiment and a battalion of light infantry joined the
+Portuguese.
+
+Villette's division was sent from the French center to join the fray,
+while Hill sent up reinforcements. While the fight on the heights
+still raged, the troops in the defile made their way through, and,
+driving the French back, won the village of Subijano de Alava, in
+front of the French main position.
+
+Meanwhile, far to the left, Graham came into action with Reille's
+division at Gamara Mayor. The French here, knowing the vital
+importance of the position, fought desperately, and the village of
+Gamara was taken and retaken several times, but no effort upon the
+part of the allies sufficed to carry either the bridge at this place
+or that by which the main road crossed the river higher up. A force,
+however, was pushed still farther to the left, and there took up a
+position on the road at Durana, drove back a Franco-Spanish force
+which occupied it, and thus effectively cut the main line of retreat
+to France for Joseph's army. The main force under Wellington himself
+was later in coming into action, the various columns being delayed by
+the difficulties of making their way through the defiles.
+
+While waiting, however, for the third and seventh divisions, which
+were the last to arrive, a peasant informed Wellington that the bridge
+of Tres Puentes was unbroken and unguarded. Kempt's brigade of the
+light division were immediately ordered to cross, and, being concealed
+by the inequalities of the ground, they reached it and passed over
+unobserved, taking their place under shelter of a crest within a few
+hundred yards of the French main line of battle, and actually in rear
+of his advanced posts.
+
+Some French cavalry now advanced, but no attack was made upon this
+isolated body of British troops, for the French were virtually without
+a commander.
+
+Joseph, finding his flank menaced by the movements of Graham and Hill,
+now ordered the army to fall back to a crest two miles in the rear,
+but at this moment the third and seventh divisions advanced at a run
+towards the bridge of Mendoza, the French artillery opened upon them,
+the British guns replied, a heavy musketry fire broke out on both
+sides, and the battle commenced in earnest. Now the advantage gained
+by the passage of Kempt's brigade became manifest, for the riflemen
+of his division advanced and took the French advanced cavalry and
+artillery in flank. These, thus unexpectedly attacked, fell back
+hastily, and a brigade of the third division took advantage of the
+moment and crossed the bridge of Mendoza. The other brigade forded the
+river a little higher up, the seventh division and Vandeleur's brigade
+of the light division followed, Hill pushed the enemy farther back,
+and the fourth division crossed by the bridge of Nanclares; other
+troops forded the river, and the battle became general all along the
+line.
+
+Seeing that the hill in front of Arinez was nearly denuded of troops
+by the withdrawal of Villette's division earlier in the day to oppose
+Hill, Wellington launched Picton with the third division and Kempt's
+brigade against it, and the French, thus attacked with great strength
+and fury, and dispirited by the order to retreat, began to fall back.
+Fifty pieces of artillery and a cloud of skirmishers covered the
+movement, and the British guns answering, the whole basin became
+filled with a heavy smoke, under cover of which the French retired
+to the heights in front of Gomecha, upon which their reserves were
+posted. Picton and Kempt carried the village of Arinez with the
+bayonet, Vandeleur captured the village of Margarita, and the 87th
+Regiment won that of Hermandad.
+
+This advance turned the flank of the French troops near Subijana de
+Alava, and of those on the Puebla mountain, and both fell back in
+disorder for two miles, until they made a junction with the main body
+of their army. Still the British troops pressed forward, the French
+again fell back, and for six miles a running fight of musketry and
+artillery was kept up, the ground being very broken, and preventing
+the concerted action of large bodies of troops. At six o'clock in the
+afternoon the French stood at bay on the last heights before Vittoria,
+upon which stood the villages of Ali and Armentia. Behind them was
+the plain upon which the city stood, and beyond the city thousands
+of carriages, animals, and non-combatants, women, and children, were
+crowded together in the extremity of terror as the British shots rang
+menacingly over their heads.
+
+The French here defended themselves desperately, and for a while the
+allied advance was checked by the terrible fire of shot and shell.
+Then the fourth division with a rush carried a hill on the left, and
+the French again commenced their retreat. Joseph, finding the great
+road absolutely blocked up, gave orders for a retreat by the road to
+Salvatierra, and the army, leaving the town of Vittoria on its left,
+moved off in a compact mass towards the indicated road. This, however,
+like the other, was choked with carriages. It led through a swamp,
+and had deep ditches on each side; the artillery, therefore, had to
+cut their traces and leave their guns behind them, the infantry and
+cavalry thrust aside the encumbrances and continued their march.
+Reille, who had defended the upper bridges nobly until the last
+moment, now came up, and his division acting as a rear guard, covered
+the retreat, and the French retired with little further loss.
+
+They had lost the battle solely and entirely from the utter incapacity
+of their general, for their loss had been but little greater than
+that of the allies, and they fell back in perfect order and full of
+fighting. The French loss, including prisoners, was not more than
+6000, and that of the allies exceeded 5000. The French loss, however,
+in material was enormous. They carried off two guns only, and 143
+fell into the hands of the British. They lost all their parks of
+ammunition, all their baggage, all their stores, all their treasures,
+all their booty. Last of all, they lost Spain.
+
+The British pursued the French army for some days, and then invested
+the two fortresses of San Sebastian and Pampeluna.
+
+Ten days after the battle of Vittoria, Napoleon despatched Soult, one
+of the best of his generals, to displace Joseph and assume the supreme
+command of the French troops. Traveling with great speed, he reached
+the frontier upon the 11th of July and took command. He soon collected
+together the divisions which had retired beaten but not routed from
+Vittoria, drew together the troops from Bayonne and the surrounding
+towns, and in a few days found himself at the head of an army,
+including the garrisons, of 114,000 men. Besides these there were the
+armies of Aragon and Catalonia, numbering 60,000 men.
+
+After spending a few days in organizing the army, Soult moved forward
+to relieve Pampeluna, and then in the heart of the Pyrenees were
+fought those desperate combats at Maya, Roncevalles, Buenza, Sauroren,
+and Dona Maria, which are known in history as the battles of the
+Pyrenees. In these terrible nine days' fighting there were ten serious
+combats, in which the allies lost 7300 men, the French, including
+prisoners, over 15,000, and Soult fell back baffled and beaten across
+the frontier.
+
+Throughout this account of the short and sanguinary campaign by which
+in two short months Wellington shattered the power of the French and
+drove them headlong from the Peninsula, but little has been said
+respecting the doings of the Scudamores. Their duties had been heavy,
+but devoid of any personal achievements or events. Wellington, the
+incarnation of activity himself, spared no one around him, and from
+early dawn until late at night they were on horseback, carrying orders
+and bringing back reports. At night their quarters were sometimes
+in a village hut, sometimes in a straggling chateau, which afforded
+accommodation to the commander-in-chief and his whole staff.
+
+Sam, a good horseman now, was in the highest of spirits at being able
+to accompany his masters, and, although the Spanish women crossed
+themselves in horror when they first saw his black face, the boys
+would hear shouts of laughter arising before they had been a quarter
+of an hour in fresh quarters. He was a capital cook, and a wonderful
+hand at hunting up provisions.
+
+There might not be a sign of a feathered creature in a village when
+the staff came in, but in half an hour Sam would be sure to return
+from foraging with a couple of fowls and his handkerchief full of
+eggs. These were, of course, paid for, as the orders against pillaging
+were of the strictest character, and the army paid, and paid
+handsomely for everything it ate.
+
+It was, however, difficult to persuade the peasants that payment was
+intended, and they would hide everything away with vigilant care at
+the approach of the troops. When by the display of money they were
+really persuaded that payment was intended, they would produce all
+that they had willingly enough, but the number of officers wanting
+to purchase was so great and the amount of live stock so small in
+the war-ravaged country, that few indeed could obtain even for money
+anything beside the tough rations of freshly-killed beef issued by the
+commissariat.
+
+Let the supply be ever so short, however, Sam never returned
+empty-handed, and the fowls were quickly plucked and on the fire
+before any one else had succeeded in discovering that there was a bird
+in the village.
+
+Sam's foraging powers passed into a joke with the staff, and the
+Scudamores became so curious to discover the reason of his success,
+that after repeated questioning they persuaded him to tell them.
+
+"Well, massa, de matter berry simple--just easy as fallin' off log.
+Sam go along, look into yard ob de cottages, presently see feather
+here, feather there. Dat sign ob fowl. Den knock at door. Woman open
+always, gib little squeak when she see dis gentleman's colored face.
+Den she say, 'What you want? Dis house full. Quarter-master take him
+up for three, four officer.' Den Sam say, 'Illustrious madam, me want
+to buy two fowls and eggs for master,' and Sam show money in hand. Den
+she hesitate a little, and not believe Sam mean to pay. Den she say,
+'No fowls here.' Den Sam point to de feathers. Den she get in rage and
+tell lie and say, 'Dem birds all stole yesterday.' Den Sam see it time
+to talk to de birds--he know dem shut up somewhere in de dark, and Sam
+he begin to crow berry loud; Sam berry good at dat. He crow for all
+de world like de cock. Dis wake dem up, and a minute one, two, three,
+half a dozen cock begin to answer eider from a loft ober house, or
+from shed, or from somewhere. Den de woman in terrible fright, she
+say, 'Me sell you two quick, if you will go away and swear you tell no
+one.' Den Sam swear. Den she run away, come back wid de fowls and some
+eggs, and always berry much astonished when Sam pay for dem. After dat
+she lose her fear, she see me pay, and she sells de chickens to oders
+when they come till all gone. Dat how dis chile manage de affairs,
+Massa Tom."
+
+The Scudamores had a hearty laugh, and were well pleased to find that
+Sam's method was one to which not even the strictest disciplinarian
+could object, a matter concerning which they had previously had grave
+doubts.
+
+While the battles of the Pyrenees were being fought, the siege of
+St. Sebastian had continued, and once again the British troops had
+suffered a terrible loss, from the attempt to carry a fortress with
+an insufficient siege-train, and without the time necessary to drive
+the trenches forward in regular form. St. Sebastian stood upon a
+peninsula. In front of the neck of this peninsula was the hill of San
+Bartholomeo, on which stood the convent of that name. At the narrowest
+part of the neck stood a redoubt, which was called the Cask Redoubt,
+because it was constructed of casks filled with stand. Behind this
+came the horn-work and other fortifications. Then came the town, while
+at the end of the peninsula rose a steep rock, called Mount Orgullo,
+on which stood the citadel. Upon its left side this neck of land was
+separated from the mainland by the River Urumea; and upon the heights
+of Mount Olia and the Chofres, across the Urumea, were placed the
+British batteries, which breached the fortifications facing the river.
+
+General Graham commanded the allied forces, which were detached to
+undertake the siege, and on the 10th of July batteries were commenced
+against the convent of San Bartholomeo, which had been fortified by
+the French. On the 17th the convent was in ruins, and an assault was
+made upon the position. The 9th Regiment took the place in gallant
+style, but an attempt being made to carry the cask redoubt, with a
+rush, the assault was repulsed, the British remaining possessors of
+San Bartholomeo.
+
+On the 24th the batteries on Mount Olia, having effected what was
+believed to be a practicable breach, 2000 men of the fifth division,
+consisting of the 3d battalion of the Royals, the 38th, and the 9th,
+made an assault at night. To arrive at the breach they had to make
+their way along the slippery rocks on the bed of the Urumea, exposed
+to a flank-fire from the river-wall of the town. The breachers had
+been isolated from the town, and guns placed to take the stormers in
+flank. The confusion and slaughter were terrible, and at daybreak the
+survivors fell back, with a loss of forty-nine officers and 520 men.
+
+The whole arrangement of the siege was bad. The plan of Major Smith,
+of the engineers, a most excellent officer, which had been approved
+by Wellington, was not followed, and the assault, contrary to
+Wellington's explicit order, took place at night, instead of by day,
+the consequence being confusion, delay, and defeat. The total loss to
+the allies of this first siege of St. Sebastian was 1300 men.
+
+Neither of the Scudamores were present at the first siege, but both
+witnessed the second assault, of the 31st of August, as Wellington
+himself was present on the 30th, to see to the execution of the
+preparation for attack, and they obtained leave to remain for the next
+day to witness the assault. The siege had been resumed on the 5th of
+that month, and on the 23d the batteries had opened fire in earnest,
+and immense damage was done to the defenses and garrison. But upon
+this occasion, as upon the former one, the proper precautions were not
+taken; no lodgment had been effected in the horn-work, and, worst of
+all, the blockade had been so negligently conducted by the fleet, that
+large bodies of fresh troops, guns, and ammunition had been passed
+in, and the defense was even stronger than it had been when the first
+assault was delivered.
+
+General Graham took up his position on the heights of the Chofres to
+view the assault, and the Scudamores stationed themselves near him.
+A dense mist hid the fortress from view, and it was not until eight
+o'clock that the batteries were able to open. Then for three hours
+they poured a storm of shot and shell upon the defences. The
+Scudamores sat down in one of the trenches, where they were a little
+sheltered from the blazing heat of the sun, and Sam took his place at
+a short distance from them.
+
+As the clock struck eleven the fire slackened, and at that moment Sam
+exclaimed, "Grolly, Massa Tom, dere dey go." As he spoke Robinson's
+brigade poured out from the trenches, and, passing through the
+openings in the sea-wall, began to form on the beach.
+
+It was known that the French had mined the angle of the wall
+overhanging the beach, and a sergeant, followed by twelve men, dashed
+gallantly forward to try to cut the train leading to the mine. He was
+unsuccessful, but the suddenness of the rush startled the French, who
+at once fired the mine, which exploded, destroying the brave sergeant
+and his party, and thirty of the leading men of the column, but not
+doing a tithe of the damage which it would have inflicted had the
+column been fairly under it.
+
+"Hurrah! dere dey go," Sam exclaimed as the column clambered over
+the ruins and pursued its way unchecked along the beach. They had,
+however, to make their way under a storm of fire.
+
+The French, as before, lined the wall, and poured a tremendous
+musketry fire into their flank, and the batteries of Mount Orgullo and
+St. Elmo plied them with shot and shell, while two pieces of cannon on
+the cavalier and one on the horn-work raked them with grape.
+
+Still the column neither halted nor faltered, but dashed, like a wave,
+up the breach. When, however, they reached the top they could go no
+farther. A deep gulf separated them from the town, while from every
+loop-hole and wall behind, the French musketry swept the breach. The
+troops could not advance and would not retreat, but sullenly stood
+their ground, heaping the breach with their dead. Fresh bodies of men
+came up, and each time a crowd of brave men mounted the breach, only
+to sink down beneath the storm of fire.
+
+"This is awful, horrible, Tom!" Peter said in a choked voice. "Come
+away, I can't look at this slaughter, it is a thousand times worse
+than any battle."
+
+Tom made no reply, his own eyes were dim with tears, and he rose to
+go, taking one more look at the deadly breach, at whose foot the
+survivors of the last attempt had sunk down, and whence the mass of
+soldiers were keeping up a musketry fire against the guns and unseen
+foes who were sweeping them away, when an officer ran up from General
+Graham's side, and in a minute fifty guns from the Chofres batteries
+opened a storm of fire upon the curtain and the traverses behind the
+breach.
+
+It was a terrible trial to the nerves of the assaulting columns when
+this terrific fire was poured upon a spot only twenty feet above them;
+but they were not men to shrink, and the men of the light division
+seized the opportunity to pull up the broken masonry and make a
+breastwork, known in military terms as a lodgment.
+
+For half an hour the iron storm poured overhead unchecked, smashing
+the traverse, knocking down the loop-holed walls, and killing numbers
+of the defenders. Then it ceased, and the troops leapt to their feet,
+and again rushed up the breach, while the 13th Portuguese Regiment,
+followed by a detachment of the 24th, waded across the Urumea under a
+heavy fire from the castle, and attacked the third breach.
+
+But still no entry could be effected. The French fire was as heavy as
+ever, and the stormers again sank baffled to the foot of the great
+breach. The assault seemed hopeless, the tide was rising, the reserves
+were all engaged, and the men had done all that the most desperate
+courage could do. For five hours the battle had raged, when, just as
+all appeared lost, one of those circumstances occurred which upset all
+calculations and decide the fate of battles.
+
+Behind the traverses the French had accumulated a great store of
+powder barrels, shells, and other combustibles. Just at this moment
+these caught fire. A bright flame wrapped the whole wall, followed by
+a succession of loud explosions; hundreds of French grenadiers were
+destroyed, and before the smoke had cleared away, the British burst
+like a flood through the first traverse.
+
+Although bewildered by this sudden disaster, the French rallied, and
+fought desperately; but the British, desperate with the long agony
+of the last five hours, would not be denied; the light division
+penetrated on the left, the Portuguese on the right. The French, still
+resisting obstinately, were driven through the town to the line of
+defense at the foot of Mount Orgullo, and the town of St. Sebastian
+was won.
+
+"Will you go across, Peter, and enter the town?"
+
+"No, no, Tom; the sight of that horrible breach is enough for me.
+Let us mount, and ride off at once. I am quite sick after this awful
+suspense."
+
+It was as well that the Scudamores did not enter the town, as, had
+they done so, they might have shared the fate of several other
+officers, who were shot down while trying to stop the troops in their
+wild excesses. No more disgraceful atrocities were ever committed by
+the most barbarous nations of antiquity than those which disgraced the
+British name at the storming of St. Sebastian. Shameful, monstrous as
+had been the conduct of the troops at the storming of Ciudad Rodrigo
+and at Badajos, it was infinitely worse at St. Sebastian. As Rapin
+says, hell seemed to have broken loose.
+
+The castle held out until the 9th, when it surrendered, and the
+governor and his heroic garrison marched out with the honors of war.
+The British loss in the second siege exceeded 2500 men and officers.
+
+There was a pause of two months after the fall of St. Sebastian,
+and it was not until the 10th of November that Wellington hurled
+his forces against the lines which, in imitation of those of Torres
+Vedras, Soult had formed and fortified on the river Nivelle to
+withstand the invasion of France. After a few hours' desperate
+fighting the French were turned out of their position with a loss of
+killed, wounded, and prisoners, of 4265 men and officers, the loss of
+the allies being 2694.
+
+Now the army of invasion poured into France. The French people,
+disheartened by Napoleon's misfortunes in Germany, and by the long and
+mighty sacrifices which they had for years been compelled to make, in
+order to enable Napoleon to carry out his gigantic wars, showed but
+slight hostility to the invaders.
+
+Wellington enforced the severest discipline, paid for everything
+required for the troops, hanging marauders without mercy, and, finding
+that it was impossible to keep the Spanish troops in order, he sent
+the whole Spanish contingent, 20,000 strong, back across the Pyrenees.
+
+He then with the Anglo-Portuguese army moved on towards Bayonne, and
+took up a position on both sides of the river Nive, driving the French
+from their position on the right bank on December 9th. On the 13th,
+however, Soult attacked that portion of the army on the right of the
+river, and one of the most desperate conflicts of the war took place,
+known as the battle of St. Pierre. General Hill commanded at this
+battle, and with 14,000 Anglo-Portuguese, with 14 guns, repulsed the
+furious and repeated attacks of 16,000 French, with 22 guns.
+
+In five days' fighting on the river the French lost more than as many
+thousand men.
+
+The weather now for a time interrupted operations, but Wellington was
+preparing for the passage of the Adour. Soult guarded the passages
+of the river above Bayonne, and never dreamed that an attempt would
+be made to bridge so wide and rough a river as is the Adour below
+the town. With the assistance of the sailors of the fleet the great
+enterprise was accomplished on the 13th of February, and leaving
+General Hope to contain the force in the entrenched camp at Bayonne,
+Wellington marched the rest of the army to the Gave.
+
+Behind this river Soult had massed his army. The British crossed by
+pontoon bridges, and before the operation was concluded, and the
+troops united, Soult fell upon them near Orthes.
+
+At first the French had the best of the fight, driving back both
+wings of the allied forces, but Wellington threw the third and sixth
+divisions upon the left flank of the attacking column and sent the
+52nd Regiment to make a detour through a marsh and fall upon their
+other flank. Taken suddenly between two fires the French wavered,
+the British pressed forward again, and the French fell back fighting
+obstinately, and in good order. The allies lost 2300 men, and the
+French 4000. Soult fell back towards Toulouse, laying Bordeaux open to
+the British.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+TOULOUSE.
+
+
+Promotion for those who have the good fortune to have a post upon the
+commander-in-chief's staff is rapid. They run far less risk than do
+the regimental officers, and they have a tenfold better chance of
+having their names mentioned in despatches. The Scudamores were so
+mentioned for their conduct at Vittoria, the Pyrenees, and Orthes,
+and shortly after the last-named battle the _Gazette_ from England
+announced their promotion to majorities. This put an end to
+their service as aides-de-camp, and they were attached to the
+quarter-master's branch of the staff of Lord Beresford, who was upon
+the point of starting with a small force to Bordeaux, where the
+authorities, thinking more of party than of patriotism, had invited
+the English to enter and take possession, intending to proclaim their
+adhesion to the Bourbon dynasty.
+
+The boys were sorry at the exchange, as they feared that they should
+lose the crowning battle of the campaign. It was evident that the
+resistance of France was nearly at an end, the allies were approaching
+Paris in spite of the almost superhuman efforts of Napoleon; the
+people, sick of the war, refused all assistance to the military
+authorities, and were longing for peace, and the end of the struggle
+was rapidly approaching.
+
+Lord Beresford, however, divining their thoughts, assured them that
+his stay at Bordeaux would be but short, and that they might rely
+upon being present at the great battle which would probably be fought
+somewhere near Toulouse, towards which town Soult had retreated after
+the battle of Orthes.
+
+Upon the 8th of March, Beresford marched with 12,000 men for Bordeaux,
+and meeting with no opposition by the way, entered that city on the
+12th. The mayor, a royalist, came out to meet them, and by the upper
+classes of the town they were received as friends rather than foes.
+Handsome quarters were assigned to Lord Beresford and his staff, and
+the Scudamores for a day or two enjoyed the luxury of comfortable
+apartments and of good food after their hard fare for nine months.
+
+The day after they entered Bordeaux Tom had occasion to call at
+the office of a banker in order to get a government draft cashed,
+to pay for a number of wagons which had been purchased for the
+quarter-master's department. The banker's name was Weale, an American,
+said to be the richest man in Bordeaux. His fortune had been made, it
+was said, by large government contracts.
+
+When Tom returned, Peter was surprised to see him looking pale and
+excited.
+
+"What is the matter, Tom?"
+
+"Do you know, Peter, I am convinced that that American banker I have
+been to see to-day is neither more nor less than that scoundrel,
+Walsh, who bolted with all the bank funds, and was the cause of our
+father's death."
+
+"You don't say so, Tom."
+
+"It is a fact, Peter, I could swear to him."
+
+"What shall we do, Tom?"
+
+"I only cashed one of the two drafts I had with me this morning;
+Peter, you go this afternoon with the other, and, if you are as
+certain as I feel about it, we will speak to Beresford at dinner."
+
+Peter returned in the afternoon satisfied that his brother's surmises
+were correct, and that in the supposed American Weale they had really
+discovered the English swindler Walsh.
+
+After dinner they asked Lord Beresford to speak to them for a few
+minutes alone.
+
+The general was greatly surprised and interested at their
+communication.
+
+"Of how much did this fellow rob your father's bank?" he asked.
+
+"The total defalcation, including money borrowed on title-deeds
+deposited in the bank, which had to be made good, was, I heard, from
+75,000_l._ to 80,000_l._," Tom said.
+
+"Very well," said Lord Beresford, "we will make the scoundrel pay up
+with interest. Order out thirty men of the 13th."
+
+While the men were mustering, the general returned to the dining-room
+and begged the officers who were dining with him to excuse him for
+half an hour, as he had some unexpected business to perform. Then he
+walked across with the Scudamores to the banker's house, which was
+only in the next street.
+
+Twenty of the men were then ordered to form a cordon round the house
+and to watch the various entrances. The other ten, together with the
+officer in command, the general told to follow him into the house. The
+arrangements completed, he rang at the bell, and the porter at once
+opened the gate.
+
+He started and would have tried to shut it again, on seeing the armed
+party. But Lord Beresford said, "I am the general commanding the
+British troops here. Make no noise, but show me directly to your
+master."
+
+The man hesitated, but seeing that the force was too great to be
+resisted, led the way through the courtyard into the house itself.
+
+Some servants in the hall started up with amazement, and would have
+run off, but Lord Beresford cried, "Stay quiet for your lives. No one
+will be hurt; but if any one moves from the hall, he will be shot."
+Then, followed by Tom and Peter only, he opened the door which the
+porter pointed out to him as that of the room where the banker was
+sitting.
+
+He was alone, and started to his feet upon beholding three British
+officers enter unannounced. "What means this?" he demanded angrily.
+"I am a citizen of the United States, and for any outrage upon me
+satisfaction will be demanded by my Government."
+
+"I am Lord Beresford," the general said quietly, "and quite know what
+I am doing. I do not quite agree with you that the Government of the
+United States will make any demand for satisfaction for any outrage
+upon your person, nor, if they do so, will it benefit you greatly;
+for I am about, in five minutes' time, to order you to be shot, Mr.
+Walsh."
+
+As the name was uttered the banker, who had listened with increasing
+pallor to the stern words of the general, started violently, and
+turned ghastly white. For a minute or so he was too surprised and
+confounded to speak. Then he said, in a husky tone, "It is false; I am
+an American citizen. I know nothing whatever about James Walsh."
+
+"James Walsh!" the general said; "I said nothing about James. It is
+you who have told us his Christian name, which is, I have no doubt,
+the correct one."
+
+He looked to Tom, who nodded assent.
+
+"I know nothing about any Walsh," the banker said doggedly. "Who says
+I do?"
+
+"We do, James Walsh," Tom said, stepping forward. "Tom and Peter
+Scudamore, the sons of the man you robbed and ruined."
+
+The banker stared at them wildly, and then, with a hoarse cry, dropped
+into his chair.
+
+"James Walsh," the general said sternly, "your life is doubly forfeit.
+As a thief and a swindler, the courts of law will punish you with
+death;" for in those days death was the penalty of a crime of this
+kind. "In the second place, as a traitor. As a man who has given aid
+and assistance to the enemies of your country, your life is forfeit,
+and I, as the general in command here, doom you to death. In five
+minutes you will be shot in your courtyard as a thief and a traitor."
+
+"Spare me!" the wretched man said, slipping off his chair on to his
+knees. "Spare my life, and take all that I have. I am rich, and can
+restore much of that which I took. I will pay 50,000_l._"
+
+"Fifty thousand pounds!" the general said; "you stole 80,000_l._,
+which, with interest, comes up to 100,000_l._, besides which you must
+pay for acting as a traitor. The military chest is empty, and we want
+money. I will value your wretched life at 25,000_l._ If you make that
+sum a present to our military chest, and pay Major Scudamore the
+100,000_l._ of which you swindled his father, I will spare you."
+
+"One hundred and twenty-five thousand pounds!" the banker said
+fiercely. "Never, I will die first."
+
+"Very well," Lord Beresford said quietly. "Major Scudamore, please
+call in the officer and four men." Tom did as requested, and Lord
+Beresford then addressed the officer. "You will take this man, who is
+an Englishman, who has been acting as a traitor, and giving assistance
+to the French army, you will take a firing party, place him against
+the wall of the yard, give him five minutes to make his peace with
+God, and when the five minutes are up, unless he tells you before that
+that he wishes to see me, shoot him."
+
+Pale and desperate, the banker was led out.
+
+"He will give way, I hope," Tom said, as the door closed behind him.
+
+"He will give way before the time is up," Lord Beresford said. "He is
+a coward; I saw it in his face."
+
+Four minutes passed on, the door opened again, and the officer
+returned with his prisoner. "He says he agrees to your terms, sir"
+
+"Very well" Lord Beresford answered; "remain outside with your men;
+they may be wanted yet."
+
+The prisoner, without a word, led the way into an adjoining room,
+which communicated with the public office. This was his private
+parlor, and in a corner stood a safe. He unlocked it, and, taking out
+some books and papers, sat down to the table.
+
+His mood had evidently changed. "I was a fool to hold out," he said,
+"for I had my name for wealth against me, and might have known you
+would not give way. After all, I do not know that I am altogether
+sorry, for I have always had an idea that some day or other the thing
+would come out, and now I can go back and be comfortable for the rest
+of my life. How will you have the money, gentlemen? I have 50,000_l._
+in cash, and can give you a draft on the Bank of England for the rest.
+You look surprised, but I have always been prepared to cut and run
+from this country at the shortest notice, and every penny I have
+beyond the cash absolutely required is in England or America."
+
+"I will take 25,000_l._ in cash for the use of the army," Lord
+Beresford said. "I will send an officer of the commissariat to-morrow
+for it. The 100,000_l._ you may pay these gentlemen in drafts on
+England. Until I hear that these drafts are honored, I shall keep you
+under surveillance, and you will not be suffered to leave your house."
+
+"It will be all right," Walsh said. "There--is my Bank of England
+pass-book; you will see that I have 120,000_l._ standing to the credit
+of J. Weale there. I have as much in America. I should not tell you
+this did I not know that you are a gentleman, and therefore will not
+raise terms now that you see I can pay higher. There, Mr. Scudamore,
+is the draft, and, believe me or not, I am glad to repay it, and to
+feel, for the first time for many years, a free man. Please to give
+me a receipt for the 80,000_l._ due by me to the Bank, and for
+20,000_l._, five years' interest on the same."
+
+Tom did as he was desired without speaking. There was a tone of
+effrontery mingled with the half-earnestness of this successful
+swindler that disgusted him.
+
+"There," the general said, as the receipts were handed over; "come
+along, lads, the business is over, and I do not think that we have any
+more to say to Mr. Weale."
+
+So saying, without further word, the three went out.
+
+Upon rejoining the officer without, Lord Beresford directed that a
+sergeant and ten men were to be quartered in the house, and that a
+sentry was to be placed at each entrance night and day, and that the
+banker was not to be permitted to stir out under any pretence whatever
+until further orders.
+
+"There, lads, I congratulate you heartily," he said as they issued
+from the gate, in answer to the warm thanks in which the boys
+expressed their gratitude to him; "it is a stroke of luck indeed that
+you came with me to Bordeaux. It was rough-and-ready justice, and I
+don't suppose a court of law in England would approve of it; but we
+are under martial law, so even were that fellow disposed to question
+the matter, which you may be very sure he will not, we are safe
+enough. They say 'ill-gotten gains fly fast' but the scamp has
+prospered on the money he stole. He owned to having another hundred
+thousand safe in the States, and no doubt he has at least as much more
+in securities of one sort or other here. I daresay he was in earnest
+when he said that he did not mind paying the money to get rid of the
+chance of detection and punishment, which must have been ever in his
+mind. The best thing you can do, Scudamore, is to write to James
+Pearson--he's my solicitor in London--and give him authority to
+present this draft, and invest the sum in your joint names in good
+securities. Inclose the draft. I shall be sending off an orderly with
+despatches and letters at daybreak, and if you give me your letter
+to-night, I will inclose it in a note of my own to Pearson."
+
+Five days later an order arrived for Lord Beresford to leave the
+seventh division under Lord Dalhousie, in Bordeaux, and to march with
+the fourth division to join the Commander-in-Chief, who was gradually
+drawing near to Toulouse, beneath whose walls Soult was reorganizing
+his army. The position was a very strong one, and had been rendered
+almost impregnable by fortifications thrown upon the heights.
+Wellington had, too, the disadvantage of having to separate his army,
+as the town lay upon both sides of the Garonne.
+
+On the 10th of April the allied army attacked. Hill attacked the
+defences of the town on the left bank, while Freyre's Spaniards,
+Picton, with the third and light divisions, and Beresford with the
+fourth and the sixth divisions, assaulted a French position. The
+entrenchments in front of Picton were too strong to be more than
+menaced. Freyre's Spaniards were repulsed with great loss, and the
+brunt of the battle fell upon Beresford's division, which nobly
+sustained the character of the British soldier for stubborn valor
+in this the last battle of the war. The French fought stubbornly
+and well, but fort by fort the British drove them from their strong
+positions, and at five in the afternoon Soult withdrew the last of his
+troops in good order across the canal which separated the position
+they had defended from the town itself. The French lost five generals
+and 3000 killed and wounded; the allies four generals and 4659 killed
+and wounded, of which 2000 were Spaniards, for they upon this occasion
+fought bravely, though unsuccessfully.
+
+On the 11th all was quiet, Wellington preparing for an attack upon the
+city on the following day. Soult, however, finding that the British
+cavalry had been sent off so as to menace his line of retreat,
+evacuated the city in the night, drew off his army with great order
+and ability, and by a march of twenty-two miles placed it in safety.
+Upon the morning of the 12th Wellington entered Toulouse, and the
+same afternoon two officers, one British, the other French, arrived
+together from Paris, with the news of the abdication of Napoleon, and
+the termination of the war.
+
+These officers had been detained for two days at Blois by the
+officials there, and this delay had cost the blood of 8000 men, among
+whom was Tom Scudamore, who had his left arm carried away by a cannon
+ball. Sam, in the act of carrying his master from the field, was also
+severely wounded in the head with a musket ball.
+
+Before the battle was fought they had received news from England that
+the draft had been paid at the Bank of England, and that their future
+was in consequence secure. The war being over, officers unattached to
+regiments had little difficulty in getting leave of absence, as the
+troops were to be embarked for England as soon as possible. Peter's
+application, therefore, to accompany his brother was acceded to
+without hesitation, and ten days after the battle of Toulouse he was
+on board ship with Tom and Sam, both of whom were doing well. Three
+days afterwards they landed in England.
+
+Rhoda met them, with Miss Scudamore, at Portsmith, having received a
+letter telling them of Tom's wound, and of their being upon the point
+of sailing. There was a great reduction of the army at the end of the
+war, and the Scudamores were both placed upon half pay. This was a
+matter of delight to Rhoda, and of satisfaction to themselves. They
+had had enough of adventure to last for a life-time; and with the
+prospect of a long peace the army no longer offered them any strong
+attraction.
+
+When they returned to Miss Scudamore's their old friend Dr. Jarvis
+came to visit them, and a happier party could not have been found in
+England. The will of Mr. Scudamore, made before he was aware of his
+ruin, was now acted upon. He had left 20,000_l._ to Rhoda, and the
+rest of his fortune in equal parts between his boys. Both Tom and
+Peter were fond of a country life, and they bought two adjoining
+estates near Oxford, Rhoda agreeing to stop with them and Miss
+Scudamore alternately.
+
+For a brief time there was a break in their happiness, Napoleon
+escaped from Elba, and Europe was in a flame again. All the officers
+on half pay were ordered to present themselves for duty, and the
+Scudamores crossed with the army to Belgium, and fought at Waterloo.
+Neither were hurt, nor was Sam, who had of course accompanied them.
+Waterloo gave them another step in rank, and the Scudamores returned
+as colonels to England.
+
+It was their last war. A few years afterwards they married sisters,
+and Rhoda having the year previous married a gentleman whose estate
+was in the same county, they remained as united as ever. Sambo held
+for many a year the important position of butler to Tom, then he found
+that one of the housemaids did not regard his color as any insuperable
+obstacle, and they were accordingly married. It was difficult to say
+after this exactly the position which Sam held. He lived at a cottage
+on the edge of the estate, where it joined that of Peter, and his time
+was spent in generally looking after things at both houses, and as
+years went on his great delight was, above all things, to relate to
+numerous young Scudamores the adventures of their father and uncle
+when he first knew them as the Young Buglers.
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS ***
+
+This file should be named 7ybug10.txt or 7ybug10.zip
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, 7ybug11.txt
+VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 7ybug10a.txt
+
+Produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis,
+and PG Distributed Proofreaders
+
+Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we usually do not
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance
+of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing.
+Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections,
+even years after the official publication date.
+
+Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til
+midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement.
+The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at
+Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month.  A
+preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment
+and editing by those who wish to do so.
+
+Most people start at our Web sites at:
+http://gutenberg.net or
+http://promo.net/pg
+
+These Web sites include award-winning information about Project
+Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new
+eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!).
+
+
+Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement
+can get to them as follows, and just download by date.  This is
+also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the
+indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an
+announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter.
+
+http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or
+ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03
+
+Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90
+
+Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want,
+as it appears in our Newsletters.
+
+
+Information about Project Gutenberg (one page)
+
+We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work.  The
+time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours
+to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright
+searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc.   Our
+projected audience is one hundred million readers.  If the value
+per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2
+million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text
+files per month:  1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+
+We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002
+If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total
+will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end.
+
+The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks!
+This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers,
+which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users.
+
+Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated):
+
+eBooks Year Month
+
+    1  1971 July
+   10  1991 January
+  100  1994 January
+ 1000  1997 August
+ 1500  1998 October
+ 2000  1999 December
+ 2500  2000 December
+ 3000  2001 November
+ 4000  2001 October/November
+ 6000  2002 December*
+ 9000  2003 November*
+10000  2004 January*
+
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created
+to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people
+and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut,
+Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois,
+Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts,
+Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New
+Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio,
+Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South
+Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West
+Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming.
+
+We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones
+that have responded.
+
+As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list
+will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states.
+Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state.
+
+In answer to various questions we have received on this:
+
+We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally
+request donations in all 50 states.  If your state is not listed and
+you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have,
+just ask.
+
+While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are
+not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting
+donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to
+donate.
+
+International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about
+how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made
+deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are
+ways.
+
+Donations by check or money order may be sent to:
+
+Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+PMB 113
+1739 University Ave.
+Oxford, MS 38655-4109
+
+Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment
+method other than by check or money order.
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by
+the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN
+[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154.  Donations are
+tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law.  As fund-raising
+requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be
+made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+You can get up to date donation information online at:
+
+http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html
+
+
+***
+
+If you can't reach Project Gutenberg,
+you can always email directly to:
+
+Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com>
+
+Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message.
+
+We would prefer to send you information by email.
+
+
+**The Legal Small Print**
+
+
+(Three Pages)
+
+***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START***
+Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers.
+They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with
+your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from
+someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our
+fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement
+disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how
+you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to.
+
+*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK
+By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
+eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept
+this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive
+a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by
+sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person
+you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical
+medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request.
+
+ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS
+This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks,
+is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart
+through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project").
+Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright
+on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and
+distribute it in the United States without permission and
+without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth
+below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook
+under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark.
+
+Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market
+any commercial products without permission.
+
+To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable
+efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain
+works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any
+medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other
+things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
+intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged
+disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer
+codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
+
+LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES
+But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below,
+[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may
+receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims
+all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including
+legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR
+UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT,
+INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE
+OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of
+receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any)
+you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that
+time to the person you received it from. If you received it
+on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and
+such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement
+copy. If you received it electronically, such person may
+choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to
+receive it electronically.
+
+THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS
+TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
+PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or
+the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the
+above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you
+may have other legal rights.
+
+INDEMNITY
+You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation,
+and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated
+with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
+texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including
+legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the
+following that you do or cause:  [1] distribution of this eBook,
+[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook,
+or [3] any Defect.
+
+DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm"
+You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by
+disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this
+"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg,
+or:
+
+[1]  Only give exact copies of it.  Among other things, this
+     requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the
+     eBook or this "small print!" statement.  You may however,
+     if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable
+     binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form,
+     including any form resulting from conversion by word
+     processing or hypertext software, but only so long as
+     *EITHER*:
+
+     [*]  The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and
+          does *not* contain characters other than those
+          intended by the author of the work, although tilde
+          (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may
+          be used to convey punctuation intended by the
+          author, and additional characters may be used to
+          indicate hypertext links; OR
+
+     [*]  The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at
+          no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent
+          form by the program that displays the eBook (as is
+          the case, for instance, with most word processors);
+          OR
+
+     [*]  You provide, or agree to also provide on request at
+          no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the
+          eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC
+          or other equivalent proprietary form).
+
+[2]  Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this
+     "Small Print!" statement.
+
+[3]  Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the
+     gross profits you derive calculated using the method you
+     already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  If you
+     don't derive profits, no royalty is due.  Royalties are
+     payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation"
+     the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were
+     legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent
+     periodic) tax return.  Please contact us beforehand to
+     let us know your plans and to work out the details.
+
+WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO?
+Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of
+public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
+in machine readable form.
+
+The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time,
+public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses.
+Money should be paid to the:
+"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or
+software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at:
+hart@pobox.com
+
+[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only
+when distributed free of all fees.  Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by
+Michael S. Hart.  Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be
+used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be
+they hardware or software or any other related product without
+express permission.]
+
+*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END*
+
diff --git a/old/7ybug10.zip b/old/7ybug10.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a54dc17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/7ybug10.zip
diff --git a/old/8ybug10.txt b/old/8ybug10.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..462dd3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/8ybug10.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11237 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty
+
+Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the
+copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing
+this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook.
+
+This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project
+Gutenberg file.  Please do not remove it.  Do not change or edit the
+header without written permission.
+
+Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the
+eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file.  Included is
+important information about your specific rights and restrictions in
+how the file may be used.  You can also find out about how to make a
+donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved.
+
+
+**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts**
+
+**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971**
+
+*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!*****
+
+
+Title: The Young Buglers
+
+Author: G.A. Henty
+
+Release Date: January, 2006 [EBook #9613]
+[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule]
+[This file was first posted on October 10, 2003]
+
+Edition: 10
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis,
+and PG Distributed Proofreaders
+
+
+
+
+THE YOUNG BUGLERS
+
+by G.A. Henty
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE
+
+
+To my Young Readers.
+
+I remember that, as a boy, I regarded any attempt to mix instruction
+with amusement as being as objectionable a practice as the
+administration of powder in jam; but I think that this feeling arose
+from the fact that in those days books contained a very small share
+of amusement and a very large share of instruction. I have endeavored
+to avoid this, and I hope that the accounts of battles and sieges,
+illustrated as they are by maps, will be found as interesting
+as the lighter parts of the story. As in my tale, "_The Young
+Franc-Tireurs_," I gave the outline of the Franco-German war, so
+I have now endeavored to give the salient features of the great
+Peninsular struggle. The military facts, with the names of generals
+and regiments, the dates and places, are all strictly accurate, and
+any one who has read with care the story of "The Young Buglers" could
+pass an examination as to the leading events of the Peninsular war.
+
+Yours truly,
+
+THE AUTHOR.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+      CHAPTER I. A Coaching Adventure
+
+     CHAPTER II. The Young Pickles
+
+    CHAPTER III. Enlisted
+
+     CHAPTER IV. A Tough Customer
+
+      CHAPTER V. Overboard
+
+     CHAPTER VI. Portugal
+
+    CHAPTER VII. The Passage of the Douro--Talavera
+
+   CHAPTER VIII. A Pause in Operations
+
+     CHAPTER IX. "With the Guerillas"
+
+      CHAPTER X. Madrid
+
+     CHAPTER XI. The Fight on the Coa
+
+    CHAPTER XII. Busaco and Torres Vedras
+
+   CHAPTER XIII. Albuera
+
+    CHAPTER XIV. Invalided Home
+
+     CHAPTER XV. Ciudad Rodrigo and Badajos
+
+    CHAPTER XVI. Salamanca
+
+   CHAPTER XVII. Caught in a Trap
+
+  CHAPTER XVIII. Just in Time
+
+    CHAPTER XIX. Vittoria
+
+     CHAPTER XX. Toulouse
+
+
+
+
+THE YOUNG BUGLERS.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+A COACHING ADVENTURE.
+
+
+Had any of the boys in the lower forms of Eton in the year 1808, been
+asked who were the most popular boys of their own age, they would have
+been almost sure to have answered, without the slightest hesitation,
+Tom and Peter Scudamore, and yet it is probable that no two boys
+were more often in disgrace. It was not that they were idle, upon the
+contrary, both were fairly up in their respective forms, but they were
+constantly getting into mischief of one sort or another; yet even
+with the masters they were favorites, there was never anything low,
+disgraceful, or ungentlemanly in their escapades, and they could be
+trusted never to attempt to screen themselves from the consequences
+by prevarication, much less by lying. If the masters heard that a
+party of youngsters had been seen far out of bounds, they were pretty
+sure that the Scudamores were among them; a farmer came in from a
+distance to complain that his favorite tree had been stripped of
+its apples--for in those days apples were looked upon by boys as
+fair objects of sport,--if the head-master's favorite white poodle
+appeared dyed a deep blue, if Mr. Jones, the most unpopular master
+in the school, upon coming out of his door trod upon a quantity of
+tallow smeared all over the doorstep, and was laid up for a week in
+consequence, there was generally a strong suspicion that Tom and Peter
+Scudamore were concerned in the matter. One of their tricks actually
+came to the ears of the Provost himself, and caused quite a sensation
+in the place, but in this case, fortunately for them, they escaped
+undetected.
+
+One fine summer afternoon they were out on the water with two or three
+other boys of their own age, when a barge was seen ahead at some short
+distance from the shore. She was apparently floating down with the
+stream, and the fact that a horse was proceeding along the towing-path
+a little way ahead was not noticed, as the rope was slack and was
+trailing under water. The boys, therefore, as they were rowing against
+stream, steered their boat to pass inside of her. Just as they came
+abreast of the horse a man on the barge suddenly shouted to the rider
+of the horse to go on. He did so, the rope tightened, rose from the
+water just under the bow of the boat, and in another minute the boys
+were struggling in the water. All were good swimmers, and would
+have cared little for the ducking had it occurred accidentally, but
+the roars of laughter of the bargeman, and the chaff with which he
+assailed them as they scrambled up the bank, showed clearly enough
+that they had been upset maliciously. The boys were furious, and one
+or two proposed that they should report the case, but Tom Scudamore
+pointed out that the bargeman would of course declare that it was
+a pure accident, and that the boys were themselves in fault in not
+looking out whether the barge was being towed, before going inside
+her, and so nothing would come of reporting.
+
+The boat was dragged ashore and emptied, and in a few minutes they
+were rowing back towards the town. The distance was but short, and
+they did not repass the barge before they reached their boat-house.
+The brothers had exchanged a few words in a low voice on the way, and
+instead of following the example of the others, and starting at a run
+for the house where they boarded to change their clothes, they walked
+down by the river and saw that the barge had moored up against the
+bank, at a short distance below the bridge. They watched for a time,
+and saw the bargeman fasten up the hatch of the little cabin and go
+ashore.
+
+That night two boys lowered themselves with a rope from the window
+of one of the dames-houses, and walked rapidly down to the river.
+There were a few flickering oil lamps burning, and the one or two
+old watchmen were soundly asleep in their boxes. They did not meet a
+soul moving upon their way to the object of the expedition, the barge
+that had run them down. Very quietly they slipped on board, satisfied
+themselves by listening at the half-open hatch to the snoring within
+that their enemy was there, then loosened the moorings so that they
+could be thrown off at a moment's notice.
+
+"Now, Peter," the elder brother said, "open our lantern. The night is
+quite still. You hold your hand behind it, so that the light will not
+fall on our faces, and I will look whether he is only wrapped up in a
+blanket or has a regular bed; we must not risk setting the place on
+fire. Get the crackers ready."
+
+A dark lantern was now taken out from under Tom's jacket, and was
+found to be still alight, an important matter, for striking a light
+with flint and steel was in those days a long and tedious business,
+and then opening it Tom threw the light into the cabin. It was a
+tiny place, and upon a bench, wrapped up in a blanket, the bargeman
+was lying. As the light fell on his eyes, he moved, and a moment
+afterwards started up with an oath, and demanded who was there.
+
+No answer came in words, but half a dozen lighted crackers were thrown
+into the cabin, when they began to explode with a tremendous uproar.
+In an instant the hatch was shut down and fastened outside. The rope
+was cast off, and in another minute she was floating down stream with
+the crackers still exploding inside her, but with their noise almost
+deadened by the tremendous outcry of shouts and howls, and by a
+continued and furious banging at the hatch.
+
+"There is no fear of his being choked, Tom, I hope?"
+
+"No, I expect he's all right," Tom said, "it will be pretty stifling
+for a bit no doubt, but there's a chimney hole and the smoke will find
+its way out presently. The barge will drift down to the weir before it
+brings up, there is not enough stream out for there to be any risk of
+her upsetting, else we daren't have turned her adrift."
+
+The next day the whole town was talking of the affair, and in the
+afternoon the bargeman went up to the head-master and accused one of
+the boys of an attempt to murder him.
+
+Greatly surprised, the Provost demanded what reason the man had for
+suspecting the boys, and the bargeman acknowledged that he had that
+afternoon upset a boat with four or five boys in her. "They would not
+bear you malice on that account," the Provost said; "they don't think
+much of a swim such weather as this, unless indeed you did it on
+purpose."
+
+The man hesitated in his answer, and the Provost continued, "You
+evidently did do it on purpose, and in that case, although it was
+carried too far, for I hear you had a very narrow escape of being
+stifled, still you brought it upon yourself, and I hope it will be a
+lesson to you not to risk the lives of Eton boys for your amusement. I
+know nothing about this affair, but if you can point out the boys you
+suspect I will of course inquire into it."
+
+The bargeman departed, grumbling that he did not know one of the young
+imps from another, but if he did find them, he'd wring their necks for
+them to a certainty. The Provost had some inquiries made as to the
+boys who had been upset, and whether they had all been in at lock-up
+time; finding that they had all answered to their names, he made no
+further investigation.
+
+This affair had taken place in the summer before this story begins,
+on the 15th of October, 1808. On that day a holiday was granted in
+consequence of the head-master's birthday, and the boys set off, some
+to football, some for long walks in the country.
+
+The Scudamores, with several of their friends, strolled down the
+towing-path for some miles, and walked back by the road. As they
+entered their dames-house on their return, Tom Scudamore said for the
+twentieth time, "Well, I would give anything to be a soldier, instead
+of having to go in and settle down as a banker--it's disgusting!"
+
+As they entered a boy came up. "Oh, Scudamore, Jackson's been asking
+for you both. It's something particular, for he has been out three or
+four times, and he wanted to send after you, but no one knew where you
+had gone."
+
+The boys at once went into the master's study, where they remained all
+the afternoon. A short time after they went in, Mr. Jackson came out
+and said a word or two to one of the senior boys, and the word was
+quickly passed round, that there was to be no row, for the Scudamores
+had just heard of the sudden death of their father. That evening, Mr.
+Jackson had beds made up for them in his study, so that they might not
+have the pain of having to talk with the other boys. The housekeeper
+packed up their things, and next morning early they started by the
+coach for London.
+
+Mr. Scudamore, the father of the young Etonians, was a banker. He was
+the elder of two brothers, and had inherited his father's business,
+while his brother had gone into the army. The banker had married the
+daughter of a landowner in the neighborhood, and had lived happily and
+prosperously until her death, seven years before this story begins.
+She had borne him three children, the two boys, now fifteen and
+fourteen years old respectively, and a girl, Rhoda, two years younger
+than Peter. The loss of his wife afflicted him greatly, and he
+received another shock five years later by the death of his brother,
+Colonel Scudamore, to whom he was much attached. From the time of his
+wife's death he had greatly relaxed in his attention to his business,
+and after his brother's death he left the management almost entirely
+in the hands of his cashier, in whom he had unlimited confidence.
+This confidence was wholly misplaced. For years the cashier had
+been carrying on speculation upon his own account with the monies
+of the bank. Gradually and without exciting the least suspicion he
+had realized the various securities held by the bank, and at last
+gathering all the available cash he, one Saturday afternoon, locked up
+the bank and fled.
+
+On Monday it was found that he was missing; Mr. Scudamore went down
+to the bank, and had the books taken into his parlor for examination.
+Some hours afterwards a clerk went in and found his master lying back
+in his chair insensible. A doctor on arriving pronounced it to be
+apoplexy. He never rallied, and a few hours afterwards the news spread
+through the country that Scudamore, the banker, was dead, and that the
+bank had stopped payment.
+
+People could believe the former item of news, but were incredulous as
+to the latter. Scudamore's bank was looked upon in Lincolnshire as at
+least as safe as the Bank of England itself. But the sad truth was
+soon clear to all, and for awhile there was great distress of mind
+among the people, for many miles round, for most of them had entrusted
+all their savings of years to the Scudamores' bank. When affairs were
+wound up, however, it was found that things were not quite so bad as
+had been feared. Mr. Scudamore had a considerable capital employed
+in the bank, and the sale of his handsome house and estate realized
+a large sum, so that eventually every one received back the money
+they had entrusted to the bank; but the whole of the capital and the
+profits of years of successful enterprise had vanished, and it was
+calculated by the executors that the swindler must have appropriated
+at least 80,000_l._
+
+For the first month after their father's death the boys stayed with
+the doctor who had long attended the family and had treated all their
+ailments since they were born. In the great loss of their father the
+loss of their fortune affected them but little, except that they were
+sorry to be obliged to leave Eton; for the interest of the little
+fortune which their mother had brought at her marriage, and which was
+all that now remained to them, would not have been sufficient to pay
+for their expenses there, and indeed such an education would have been
+out of place for two boys who had to make their own way in life. At
+the end of this month it was arranged that they were to go to their
+only existing relative, an elder sister of Mr. Scudamore. The boys had
+never seen her, for she had not for many years been friends with her
+brother.
+
+The letter which she had written to the doctor, announcing her
+willingness to receive them, made the boys laugh, although it did not
+hold out prospects of a very pleasant future. "I am, of course," she
+said, "prepared to do my duty. No one can say that I have ever failed
+in my duty. My poor brother quarreled with me. It was his duty to
+apologize. He did not do so. Had it been my duty to apologize I should
+have done so. As I was right, and he was wrong, it was clearly not my
+duty. I shall now do my duty to my niece and nephews. Yet I may be
+allowed to say that I regret much that they are not all nieces. I do
+not like boys. They are always noisy, and not always clean. They do
+not wipe their shoes, they are always breaking things, they go about
+with all sorts of rubbish and dirt in their pockets, their hair is
+always rough, they are fond of worrying cats, and other cruel games.
+Altogether they are objectionable. Had my brother made up his mind to
+leave his children in my charge, it was clearly his duty to have had
+girls instead of boys. However, it is not because other people fail
+in their duty that I should fail in mine. Therefore, let them come to
+me this day fortnight. By that time I shall have got some strong and
+suitable furniture in the room that my nephews will occupy, and shall
+have time to make other arrangements. This letter will, if all goes
+well, reach you, I believe, in three days after the date of posting,
+and they will take the same time coming here. Assure them that I am
+prepared to do my duty, and that I hope that they will make a serious
+effort at doing theirs. Ask my nephews, upon the occasion of their
+first arrival, to make as little noise as they can, because my cat,
+Minnie, is very shy, and if she is scared at the first meeting,
+she will take a very long time to get accustomed to them. I also
+particularly beg that they do not, as they come up to the house, throw
+stones at any of the pigeons who may be resting upon the roof, for the
+slates were all set right a few weeks ago, and I am sure I do not wish
+to have the slater here again; they were hanging about for ten days
+the last time they came. I do not know that I have anything else to
+say."
+
+The boys received the reading of this singular epistle with shouts of
+laughter.
+
+"Poor aunt," Tom said. "What does she think of us that she can suppose
+that, upon our very first arrival, we should come in like wild
+Indians, throwing stones at her pigeons, and frightening her Minnie
+into fits. Did you ever hear such an extraordinary idea, Doctor
+Jarvis?"
+
+"At any rate, boys," the doctor said, when the laughter had ceased,
+"you may find your aunt a little peculiar, but she is evidently
+determined to do her duty to you, and you must do yours to her, and
+not play more pranks than you can help. As to you, Rhoda, you will
+evidently be in high favor, and as you are fortunately a quiet little
+lady, you will, I have no doubt, get on with her very well."
+
+"I hope so," Rhoda said, smiling, "you see she means to be kind,
+though she does write funny letters, and, at any rate, there are
+Minnie and the pigeons; it sounds nice, you know. Do you know what
+aunt's place is like, Dr. Jarvis, and how to get there from here."
+
+"No, my dear, I never was in that part of England. It is close to
+Marlborough that she lives, a very pretty country, I believe. There
+is, of course, no way to go across from here. You must go up to London
+by coach from here, and then to Marlborough by the western coach. I
+will write to my brother James in town, where you stopped at night as
+you came through, boys, and I know that he will take you all in for
+the night, and see that you go off right in the morning."
+
+"You're very kind, indeed, Doctor Jarvis. I do not know how to thank
+you for all you have done for us," Tom said earnestly, and the others
+cordially echoed the sentiment.
+
+The day before starting the doctor had a long talk with the boys. He
+pointed out to them that their future now depended upon themselves
+alone. They must expect to find many unpleasantnesses in their way,
+but they must take their little trials pleasantly, and make the best
+of everything. "I have no fear as to Rhoda," their kind friend said.
+"She has that happy, amiable, and quiet disposition that is sure to
+adapt itself to all circumstances. I have no doubt she will become a
+favorite with your aunt. Try to keep out of scrapes, boys. You know
+you are rather fond of mischief, and your aunt will not be able to
+understand it. If you get into any serious difficulty write to me, you
+can rely upon always finding a friend in me."
+
+The journey to London was no novelty to the boys, but Rhoda enjoyed it
+immensely. Her place had been taken inside, but most of the journey
+she rode outside with her brothers. She was greatly amazed at the
+bustle and noise of London, and was quite confused at the shouting and
+crowd at the place where the coach drew up, for two or three other
+coaches had just arrived from other directions. Mr. Jarvis had sent
+his man-servant to meet them, their luggage was sent direct to the
+booking-office from which the coach started for Marlborough, and the
+servant carried a small bag containing their night things. It was
+evening when they got in, and Rhoda could scarcely keep her eyes open
+long enough to have tea, for the coach had been two days and nights
+upon the road. The next day they stayed in town, and Mrs. Jarvis took
+them out to see the sights of London--the Tower and St. Paul's, and
+Westminster Abbey, and the beasts at Exeter Change. The boys had twice
+before spent a whole day in London, their father having, upon two
+occasions, made his visits to town to fit in with their going up to
+school, but to Rhoda it was all new, and very, very wonderful.
+
+The next day the coach started early for Marlborough. It was to
+take rather over twenty-four hours on the way. As before, Rhoda rode
+outside with her brothers until the evening, but then, instead of
+going inside, where there were five passengers already, she said, as
+the night was so fine and warm, she would rather remain with them.
+They were sitting behind the coachman, there were two male passengers
+upon the same seat with them, and another in the box seat by the
+coachman. The conversation turned, as in those days it was pretty sure
+to turn, upon highwaymen. Several coaches had been lately stopped by
+three highwaymen, who worked together, and were reported to be more
+reckless than the generality of their sort. They had shot a coachman
+who refused to stop, the week before on Hounslow Heath, they had
+killed a guard on the great north road, and they had shot two
+passengers who resisted, near Exeter.
+
+Tom and Peter were greatly amused by observing that the passenger who
+sat next to them, and who, at the commencement of the conversation,
+showed a brace of heavy pistols with which he was provided, with much
+boasting as to what he should do if the coach were attacked, when he
+heard of the fate of the passengers who had resisted, became very
+quiet indeed, and presently took an opportunity, when he thought that
+he was not observed, of slipping his pistols under the tarpaulin
+behind him.
+
+"I hope those dreadful men won't stop our coach," Rhoda said.
+
+"They won't hurt you if they do, Rhoda," Tom said assuringly. "I think
+it would be rather a lark. I say, Peter," he went on in a whisper, "I
+think we might astonish them with those pistols that coward next to
+you has hid behind him."
+
+"I should just think so," Peter said; "the bargee at Eton would be
+nothing to it."
+
+The hours went slowly on. Rhoda and the boys dozed uncomfortably
+against each other and the baggage behind them, until they were
+suddenly roused by a shout in the road beside them: "Stand for your
+lives!"
+
+The moon was up, and they could see that there were three horsemen.
+One galloped to the horses' heads, and seized the rein of one of the
+leaders, the others rode by the coach.
+
+The first answer to the challenge was a discharge from the blunderbuss
+of the guard, which brought one of the highwaymen from his horse.
+
+The other, riding up to the side of the coach, fired at the guard, and
+a loud cry told that the shot had taken effect. In another moment the
+fellow was by the side of the coachman.
+
+"Hold up!" he said, "or I will blow your brains out!"
+
+The coachman did as he was ordered, and indeed the man at the leader's
+head had almost succeeded in stopping them. The passenger next to the
+boys had, at the first challenge, again seized his pistols, and the
+boys thought that he was going to fire after all.
+
+"Lie down at our feet, Rhoda, quick!" Tom said, "and don't move
+till I tell you." The fate of the guard evidently frightened away
+the short-lived courage of the passenger, for, as the coachman again
+pulled up, he hastily thrust the pistols in behind him.
+
+"Get down, every one of you," the highwayman shouted.
+
+"Lie still, Rhoda," Tom whispered. "Now, Peter, get in underneath the
+tarpaulin."
+
+This was done as the passengers descended. The luggage was not so
+heavily piled as usual, and the boys found plenty of room beneath the
+tarpaulin.
+
+"Now, Peter, you take one of these pistols and give me the other. Now
+peep out. The moon is hidden, which is a good thing; now, look here,
+you shall shoot that fellow standing down below, who is swearing at
+the ladies inside for not getting out quicker. I'll take a shot at
+that fellow standing in front of the horse's heads."
+
+"Do you think you can hit him, Tom?"
+
+"I have not the least idea, but I can try; and if you hit the other
+one, the chances are he'll bolt, whether I hit him or not. Open the
+tarpaulin at the side so as to see well, and rest the pistol upon
+something. You must take a good shot, Peter, for if you miss him we
+shall be in a mess."
+
+"All right," Peter said, in a whisper, "I can almost touch him with
+the pistol."
+
+In loud and brutal tones the highwayman now began to order the
+frightened ladies to give up their watches and rings, enforcing his
+commands with terrible curses. When suddenly a pistol flashed out
+just behind him, and he fell off his horse with a ball through his
+shoulder.
+
+Tom's shot, though equally well intended, was not so truly aimed.
+The highwayman had dismounted, and was standing just in front of the
+leaders, so that Tom had a fair view of him between them. The boys had
+both occasionally fired their father's pistols, for, in those days,
+each householder in the country always kept loaded pistols in his
+room, but his skill was not sufficient to make sure of a man at that
+distance. The bullet flew past at two feet to the left of his head.
+But its effect was scarcely less startling than if it had actually hit
+him, for, in its passage, it passed through the ear of the off leader.
+The horse made a start at the sudden pain, and then dashed forward.
+The rest of the team, already alarmed by the shot, followed her lead;
+before the startled highwayman could get out of the way they were upon
+him, in another instant he was under their heels, and the coach gave a
+sudden lurch as it passed over his body.
+
+"Lie still, Rhoda, a little longer; it's all right, but the horses
+have run away," Tom exclaimed, as he scrambled forward, and caught
+hold of the reins, which the coachman had tied to the rail of the seat
+as he got down. "Catch hold of the reins, Peter, and help me pull."
+
+Peter did so; but the united strength of the boys was wholly unequal
+to arresting the headlong flight of the horses.
+
+Fortunately the highwaymen had chosen a low bottom between two hills,
+to arrest the coach, consequently the road was up a hill of moderate
+steepness. The boys hoped that the horses would stop when they got to
+the top; but they went on with redoubled speed.
+
+"This is something like going it," Peter said.
+
+"Isn't it, Peter? They know their way, and we ain't lively to meet
+anything in the road. They will stop at their stable. At any rate,
+it's no use trying to steer them. Here, Rhoda dear, get up; are you
+very much frightened?"
+
+Rhoda still lay quite still, and Peter, holding on with difficulty,
+for the coach quite rocked with the speed at which they were going,
+climbed over to her, and stooped, down. "Shall I help you up, Rhoda?"
+
+"No, please, I would rather stop here till it's all over."
+
+Fortunately the hill, up to the Tillage where they made the change,
+was a steep one, and the horses broke into a trot before they reached
+the top, and, in another minute drew up at the door of the inn.
+The astonishment of the ostlers at seeing the horses covered with
+lather, and coachbox tenanted only by two boys, behind whom a little
+white face now peered out, was extreme, and they were unable to get
+beyond an ejaculation of hallo! expressive of a depth of incredulous
+astonishment impossible to be rendered by words.
+
+"Look here," Tom said, with all the composure, and much of the
+impudence, which then, as now, characterized the young Etonian, "don't
+be staring like a pack of stuck pigs. You had better get the fresh
+horses in, and drive back to the bottom, about four miles from here.
+There has been regular row with some fellows, and I expect two or
+three are killed. Now, just put up the ladder; I want to get my sister
+down."
+
+Almost mechanically the men put the ladder up to the coach, and the
+boys and Rhoda got down.
+
+"Do you say the coach has been attacked by highwaymen in Burnet
+bottom?"
+
+"I don't know anything about Burnet bottom," Tom said. "It was a
+bottom about four miles off. There were three of them. The guard shot
+one of them, and the others shot the guard. Then we were stopped by
+them, and every one had to get down. Then the horses ran away, and
+here we are."
+
+"Then there are two of those highwayman chaps with the passengers,"
+one of the men said.
+
+"You need not be afraid of them," Tom said carelessly; "one got shot,
+and I don't know about the other, but the wheel of the coach went over
+him, so I do not suppose he will be much trouble. Now, if I were you,
+I should not stand staring any more, but should make haste and take
+the coach back."
+
+"Hullo, look at this grey," one of the men exclaimed, as, at last
+understanding what had taken place, they began to bustle about to
+change horses. "He's got blood all over the side of his head. One of
+those scoundrels has shot him through the ear."
+
+Tom burst out laughing. "I am the scoundrel!" he said. "Peter, that
+explains why we went off so suddenly. I missed the fellow, and hit the
+leader in the ear. However, it comes to the same thing. By the way, we
+may as well take the pistols."
+
+So saying, he ran up the ladder and brought down the pistols. By this
+time the fresh horses were in.
+
+"I can't make nought of it," one of the ostlers said, climbing up into
+the coachman's seat. "Jump up, Bill and Harry. It's the rummiest go I
+ever heard of in coaching."
+
+"Landlady, can you get us some tea at once, please," Tom said, going
+up to the landlady, who was looking on from the door of the house
+with an astonishment equal to that of the men at the whole affair;
+"as quickly as you can, for my sister looks regularly done up with
+fatigue, and then, please let her lie down till the coach is ready to
+start again. It will be three quarters of an hour before it is back,
+and then, I daresay, there will be a lot of talking before they go on.
+I should think they will be wanting breakfast. At any rate, an hour's
+rest will do you good, Rhoda."
+
+Rhoda was too worn out with the over-excitement even to answer.
+Fortunately there was hot water in order to make hot grog for the
+outriders of the coach, some tea was quickly made, and in ten minutes
+Rhoda was fast asleep on the landlady's bed.
+
+Tom and Peter expressed their desire for something substantial in the
+way of eating, for the morning had now fairly broken. The landlady
+brought in some cold meat, upon which the boys made a vigorous attack,
+and then, taking possession of two benches, they dozed off until the
+coach arrived.
+
+It had but three horses, for one had been sent off to carry Bill,
+the ostler, at full speed to the town at which they had last changed
+horses, to fetch a doctor and the constable. The other two men had
+remained with the guard, who was shot in the hip, and the highwayman,
+whose collar-bone was broken by Peter's shot. The fellow shot by the
+guard, and the other one, whom the coach wheels had passed over, were
+both dead.
+
+"There's the coach, Tom."
+
+"What a nuisance, Peter, they'll all be wanting to talk now, and I am
+just so comfortably off. Well, I suppose it's no use trying to get any
+more sleep."
+
+So saying, they roused themselves, and went out to the door just as
+the coach drew up.
+
+There was a general shout of greeting from the passengers, which was
+stopped, however, by a peremptory order from the coachman.
+
+He was a large, stout man, with a face red from the effects of wind
+and exposure. "Jack," he said, to a man who was standing near, for
+the news of the attack upon the coach had quickly spread, and all
+the villagers were astir to see it come in. "Jack, hold the leader's
+head. Thomas, open the door, and let the insides out. Gents," he said
+solemnly, when this was done, "I'm going to do what isn't a usual
+thing by no means, in fact, I ain't no precedence for doing it; but
+then, I do not know any precedence for this here business altogether.
+I never did hear of a coachman standing up on his box to give a cheer,
+no, not to King George himself; but, then, King George never polished
+off two highwaymen all to himself, leastway, not as I've heard tell
+of. Now, these two young gents have done this. They have saved my
+coach and my passengers from getting robbed, and so I'm going to give
+'em three cheers. I'll trouble you to help me up into the box seat,
+gentlemen."
+
+Assisted by the other passengers, the driver now gravely climbed up
+into the box seat, steadied himself there by placing one hand upon
+the shoulder of the passenger next him, took off his low-crowned hat,
+and said. "Follow me, gents, with three cheers for those young gents
+standing there; better plucked ones I never came across, and I've
+traveled a good many miles in my day."
+
+So saying, he gave three stentorian cheers, which were echoed by all
+the passengers and villagers.
+
+Then there was a momentary silence, and Tom, who, with his brother,
+had been feeling very uncomfortable, although rather inclined to
+laugh, seeing that he was expected to say something, said, "Thank you
+all very much; but we'd much rather you hadn't done it."
+
+Then there was a general laugh and movement, and a general pressing
+forward of the passengers to shake the boys by the hand. The driver
+was assisted down from his elevated position, and got off the coach
+and came up to them. "That's the first speech I ever made, young
+gentlemen, and, if I know myself, it will be the last; but, you see,
+I was druv to it. You're a good sort, that's certain. What will you
+drink?"
+
+The boys declared for beer, and drank solemnly with the driver,
+imitating him in finishing their mugs at a draught, and turning them
+topsy-turvy. There was now a great deal of talking, and many questions
+were asked. Tom and Peter modestly said that there was really nothing
+to tell. They saw that the gentleman next to them intended to use his
+pistols; but, not seeing a good opportunity, put them down behind the
+tarpaulin, and the thought occurred to them that, by slipping behind
+it, they would get a good chance of a certain shot. Accordingly, they
+had fired, and then the horse had run away; and there was an end of
+it. There was nothing extraordinary in the whole matter.
+
+"At any rate, my boys, you have saved me from a loss of a couple
+of hundred pounds which I had got hid in my boots, but which those
+fellows would have been sure to have have discovered," one of the
+passengers said.
+
+There was a general chorus of satisfaction at many watches and
+trinkets saved, and then the first passenger went on,--
+
+"I propose, gentlemen and ladies, that when we get to the end of our
+journey we make a subscription, according to the amount we have saved,
+and that we get each of these young gentlemen a brace of the very best
+pistols that can be bought. If they go on as they have begun, they
+will find them useful."
+
+There was a general exclamation of approval, and one of the ladies,
+who had been an inside passenger, said, "And I think we ought to give
+a handsome ring to their sister as a memorial through life. Of course,
+she had not so much to do as her brothers, but she had the courage to
+keep still, and she had to run the risk, both of being shot, and of
+being upset by the coach just as they did."
+
+This also was unanimously approved, and, after doing full justice to
+the breakfast set before them, the party again took their places.
+Rhoda being carried down asleep, by the landlady, and placed in the
+coach, one of the inside passengers getting out to make room for her,
+and she was laid, curled up, on the seat, with her head in a lady's
+lap, and slept quietly, until, to her astonishment, she was woke up,
+and told that she was in Marlborough.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+TWO YOUNG PICKLES.
+
+
+An old-fashioned open carriage, drawn by a stiff, old-fashioned horse,
+and driven by a stiff, old-fashioned man, was in waiting at the inn at
+which the coach drew up at Marlborough. Into this the young Scudamores
+were soon transferred, and, after a hearty good-bye from their
+fellow-passengers, and an impressive one from the coachman, they
+started upon the concluding part of their journey.
+
+"How far is it to aunt's?" Tom asked.
+
+"About six miles, young sir," the driver said gravely.
+
+The young Scudamores had great difficulty to restrain their laughter
+at Tom's new title; in fact, Peter nearly choked himself in his
+desperate efforts to do so, and no further questions were asked for
+some time.
+
+The ride was a pleasant one, and Rhoda, who had never been out of
+Lincolnshire before, was delighted with the beautiful country through
+which they were passing. The journey, long as it was--for the road
+was a very bad one, and the horse had no idea of going beyond a slow
+trot--passed quickly to them all; but they were glad when the driver
+pointed to a quaint old-fashioned house standing back from the road,
+and said that they were home.
+
+"There are the pigeons, Rhoda, and there is Minnie asleep on that open
+window-sill."
+
+Very many times had the young Scudamores talked about their aunt, and
+had pictured to themselves what she would be like; and their ideas of
+her so nearly approached the truth, that she almost seemed to be an
+old acquaintance as she came to the door as the carriage stopped. She
+was a tall, upright, elderly lady, with a kind, but very decided face,
+and a certain prim look about her manner and dress.
+
+"Well, niece Rhoda and nephews, I am glad to see that you have arrived
+safely," she said in a clear, distinct voice. "Welcome to the Yews. I
+hope that we shall get on very well together. Joseph, I hope that you
+have not driven Daisy too fast, and that you did not allow my nephews
+to use the whip. You know I gave you very distinct instructions not to
+let them do so."
+
+"No, my lady, they never so much as asked."
+
+"That is right," Miss Scudamore said, turning round and shaking hands
+with the boys, who had now got out of the carriage and had helped
+Rhoda down. "I am glad to hear what Joseph tells me, for I know that
+boys are generally fond of furious driving and like lashing horses
+until they put them into a gallop. And now, how are you, niece Rhoda!
+Give me a kiss. That is right. You look pale and tired, child; you
+must have something to eat, and then go to bed. Girls can't stand
+racketing about as boys can. You look quiet and nice, child, and I
+have no doubt we shall suit very well. It is very creditable to you
+that you have not been spoilt by your brothers. Boys generally make
+their sisters almost as noisy and rude as they are themselves."
+
+"I don't think we are noisy and rude, aunt," Tom said, with a smile.
+
+"Oh, you don't, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said, looking at him sharply,
+and then shaking her head decidedly two or three times. "If your looks
+do not belie you both sadly, you are about as hair-brained a couple of
+lads as my worst enemies could wish to see sent to plague me; but,"
+she added to herself, as she turned to lead the way indoors, "I must
+do my duty, and must make allowances; boys will be boys, boys will be
+boys, so they say at least, though why they should be is more than I
+can make out. Now, Rhoda, I will take you up with me. Your bedroom
+leads out of mine, dear. Hester," she said to a prim-looking servant
+who had come out after her to the door; "will you show my nephews to
+their room? Dinner will be ready at two; it is just a quarter to the
+hour now. I see that you have got watches, so that you will be able
+to be punctual; and I must request you, when you have done washing,
+not to throw the water out of the window, because my flower-beds are
+underneath."
+
+Tom had great difficulty in keeping his countenance, while he assured
+his aunt that his brother and himself never did empty their basins out
+of the window.
+
+"That is right," Miss Scudamore said doubtfully; "but I have heard
+that boys do such things."
+
+Once fairly in their room and the door shut, the boys had a great
+laugh over their aunt's ideas as to boys.
+
+"There is one comfort," Tom said at last; "whatever we do we shall
+never surprise her."
+
+"I think we shall get on very well with her," Peter said. "She means
+to be kind, I am sure. This is a jolly room, Tom."
+
+It was a low wainscoted room, with a very wide window divided into
+three by mullions, and fitted with latticed panes. They were open, and
+a delicious scent of flowers came in from the garden. The furniture
+was all new and very strong, of dark stained wood, which harmonized
+well with the paneling. There were no window curtains, but a valance
+of white dimity hung above the window. There was a piece of carpet
+between the beds; the rest of the floor was bare, but the boards were
+of old oak, and looked as well without it. Several rows of pegs had
+been put upon the walls, and there was a small chest of drawers by
+each bed.
+
+"This is very jolly, Peter; but it is a pity that there are bars to
+the window."
+
+When they came down to dinner they found that Rhoda, quite done up
+with her journey, had gone to bed.
+
+"You like your room, I hope, nephews," Miss Scudamore said, after they
+had taken their seats.
+
+"Yes, aunt, very much. There is only one drawback to it."
+
+"What is that, Thomas?"
+
+"Oh, please, aunt, don't call me Thomas; it is a dreadful name; it is
+almost as bad as Tommy. Please call me Tom. I am always called Tom by
+every one."
+
+"I am not fond of these nicknames," Miss Scudamore said. "There is a
+flippancy about them of which I do not approve."
+
+"Yes, aunt, in nicknames; but Tom is not a nickname; it is only a
+short way of speaking. We never hear of a man being called Thomas,
+unless he is a footman or an archbishop, or something of that sort."
+
+"What do you mean by archbishop?" Miss Scudamore asked severely.
+
+"Well, aunt, I was going to say footman, and then I thought of Thomas
+à Becket; and there was Thomas the Rhymer. I have heard of him, but
+I never read any of his rhymes. I wonder why they did not call them
+poems. But I expect even Thomas à Becket was called Tom in his own
+family."
+
+Miss Scudamore looked sharply at Tom, but he had a perfect command of
+his face, and could talk the greatest nonsense with the most serious
+face. He went on unmoved with her scrutiny.
+
+"I have often wondered why I was not christened Tom, It would have
+been much more sensible. For instance, Rhoda is christened Rhoda and
+not Rhododendron."
+
+"Rhododendron?" Miss Scudamore said, mystified.
+
+"Yes, aunt, it is an American plant, I believe. We had one in the
+green-house at home; it was sent poor papa by some friend who went out
+there, I don't see anything else Rhoda could come from."
+
+"You are speaking very ignorantly, nephew," Miss Scudamore said
+severely. "I don't know anything about the plant you speak of, but the
+name of Rhoda existed before America was ever heard of. It is a very
+old name."
+
+"I expect," Peter said, "it must have meant originally a woman of
+Rhodes. You see Crusaders and Templars were always having to do with
+Rhodes, and they no doubt brought the name home, and so it got settled
+here."
+
+"The name is mentioned in Scripture," Miss Scudamore said severely.
+
+"Yes, aunt, and that makes it still more likely that it meant a woman
+of Rhodes; you see Rhodes was a great place then."
+
+Miss Scudamore was silent for some time. Then she went back to the
+subject with which the conversation had commenced. "What is the
+objection you spoke of to the room?"
+
+"Oh! it is the bars to the window, aunt."
+
+"I have just had them put up," Miss Scudamore said calmly.
+
+"Just put up, aunt!" Tom repeated in surprise, "what for?"
+
+"To prevent you getting out at night."
+
+The boys could not help laughing this time, and then Peter said, "But
+why should we want to get out at night, aunt?"
+
+"Why should boys always want to do the things they ought not?" Miss
+Scudamore said. "I've heard of boys being let down by ropes to go and
+buy things. I dare say you have both done it yourselves."
+
+"Well, aunt," Tom said, "perhaps we have; but then, you see, that was
+at school."
+
+"I do not see any difference, nephew. If you will get out at one
+window, you will get out at another. There is mischief to be done in
+the country as well as in towns; and so long as there is mischief to
+do, so long will boys go out of their way to do it. And now I will
+tell you the rules of this house, to which you will be expected to
+adhere. It is well to understand things at once, as it prevents
+mistakes. We breakfast at eight, dine at two, have tea at half-past
+six, and you will go to bed at half-past eight. These hours will be
+strictly observed. I shall expect your hands and faces to be washed,
+and your hairs brushed previous to each meal. When you come indoors
+you will always take off your boots and put on your shoes in the
+little room behind this. And now, if you have done dinner I think
+that you had better go and lie down on your bed, and get two or three
+hours' sleep. Take your boots off before you get into the bed."
+
+"She means well, Peter," the elder brother said, as they went
+upstairs, "but I am afraid she will fidget our lives out."
+
+For two or three days the boys wandered about enjoying the beautiful
+walks, and surprising and pleasing their aunt by the punctuality
+with which they were in to their meals. Then she told them that she
+had arranged for them to go to a tutor, who lived at Warley, a large
+village a mile distant, and who had some eight or ten pupils. The very
+first day's experience at the school disgusted them. The boys were
+of an entirely different class to those with whom they had hitherto
+associated, and the master was violent and passionate.
+
+"How do you like Mr. Jones, nephews?" Miss Scudamore asked upon their
+return after their first day at school.
+
+"We do not like him at all, aunt. In the first place, he is a good
+deal too handy with that cane of his."
+
+"'He who spares the rod--'"
+
+"Yes, we know that, aunt, 'spoils the child,'" broke in Tom, "but we
+would not mind so much if the fellow were a gentleman."
+
+"I don't know what you may call a gentleman," Miss Scudamore said
+severely. "He stands very high here a schoolmaster, while he visits
+the vicar, and is well looked up to everywhere."
+
+"He's not a gentleman for all that," Tom muttered; "he wouldn't be if
+he visited the Queen. One does not mind being trashed by a gentleman;
+one is used to that at Eton; but to be knocked about by a fellow like
+that! Well, we shall see."
+
+For a week the boys put up with the cruelty of their tutor, who at
+once took an immense dislike to them on finding that they did not,
+like the other boys, cringe before him, and that no trashing could
+extract a cry from them.
+
+It must not be supposed that they did not meditate vengeance, but they
+could hit upon no plan which could be carried out without causing
+suspicion that it was the act of one of the boys; and in that case
+they knew that he would question them all round, and they would not
+tell a lie to screen themselves.
+
+Twice they appealed to their aunt, but she would not listen to them,
+saying that the other boys did not complain, and that if their master
+was more severe with them than with others, it could only be because
+they behaved worse. It was too evident that they were boys of very
+violent dispositions, and although she was sorry that their master
+found it necessary to punish them, it was clearly her duty not to
+interfere.
+
+The remark about violence arose from Miss Scudamore having read in the
+little paper which was published once a week at Marlborough an account
+of the incident of the stopping of the coach, about which the boys
+had agreed to say nothing to her. The paper had described the conduct
+of her nephews in the highest terms, but Miss Scudamore was terribly
+shocked. "The idea", she said, "that she should have to associate with
+boys who had take a fellow-creature's life was terrible to her, and
+their conduct in resisting, when grown-up men had given up the idea
+as hopeless, showed a violent spirit, which, in boys so young, was
+shocking."
+
+A few days after this, as the boys were coming from school, they
+passed the carrier's cart, coming in from Marlborough.
+
+"Be you the young gentlemen at Miss Scudamore's?" the man asked.
+"Because, if you be, I have got a parcel for you."
+
+Tom answered him that they were, and he then handed them over a heavy
+square parcel. Opening it after the cart had gone on, the boys, to
+their great delight, found that it consisted of two cases, each
+containing a brace of very handsome pistols.
+
+"This is luck, Peter," Tom said. "If the parcel had been sent to the
+house, aunt would never have let us have them; now we can take them in
+quietly, get some powder and balls, and practice shooting every day in
+some quiet place. That will be capital. Do you know I have thought of
+a plan which will enrage old Jones horribly, and he will never suspect
+us?"
+
+"No; have you, Tom? What is that?"
+
+"Look here, Peter. I can carry you easily standing on my shoulders. If
+you get a very long cloak, so as to fall well down on me, no one would
+suspect in the dark that there were two of us; we should look like
+one tremendously tall man. Well, you know, he goes every evening to
+Dunstable's to sing with Miss Dunstable. They say he's making love to
+her. We can waylay him in the narrow lane, and make him give up that
+new watch he has just bought, that he's so proud of. I heard him say
+he had given thirty guineas for it. Of course, we don't want to keep
+it, but we would smash it up between a couple of big stones, and send
+him all the pieces."
+
+"Capital, Tom; but where should we get the cloak?"
+
+"There is that long wadded silk cloak of aunt's that she uses when she
+goes out driving. It always hangs up in the closet in the hall."
+
+"But how are we to get in again, Tom? I expect that he does not come
+back till half-past nine or ten. We can slip out easily enough after
+we are supposed to have gone to bed; but how are we to get back?"
+
+"The only plan, Peter, is to get in through Rhoda's window. She is
+very angry at that brute Jones treating us so badly, and if I take her
+into the secret I feel sure she will agree."
+
+Rhoda was appealed to, and although at first she said it was quite,
+quite impossible, she finally agreed, although with much fear and
+trembling, to assist them. First, the boys were to buy some rope and
+make a rope ladder, which Rhoda was to take up to her room; she was to
+open the window wide when she went to bed, but to pull the blind down
+as usual, so that if her aunt came in she would not notice it. Then,
+when she heard her aunt come tip to bed at half-past nine, she was to
+get up very quietly, drop the rope ladder out, fastening it as they
+instructed her, and then get into bed again, and go to sleep if she
+could, as the boys would not try to come in until after Miss Scudamore
+was asleep.
+
+Two nights after this the schoolmaster was returning from his usual
+visit to Mr. Dunstable, when, to his horror, he saw a gigantic figure
+advance from under a tree which overshadowed the lawn, and heard a
+deep voice say, "Your money or your life!"
+
+Like all bullies, the schoolmaster was a coward, and no sooner did he
+see this terrible figure, and his ears caught the ominous click of
+a pistol which accompanied the words, than his teeth chattered, his
+whole figure trembled with fear, and he fell on his knees, crying,
+"Spare my life!--take all that I have, but spare my life!"
+
+"You miserable coward!" the giant said, "I do not want to take your
+wretched life. What money have you?"
+
+"I have only two shillings," he exclaimed; "I swear to you that I have
+only two shillings."
+
+"What is the use of two shillings to me?--give them to the first
+beggar you see."
+
+"Yes, sir," the schoolmaster said; "I swear to you that I will."
+
+"Give me your watch."
+
+The schoolmaster took out his watch, and, getting upon his feet,
+handed it to the giant.
+
+"There now, you can go; but see," he added, as the schoolmaster turned
+with great alacrity to leave--"look here."
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"Look here, and mark my words well. Don't you go to that house where
+you have been to-night, or it will be the worse for you. You are a
+wretch, and I won't see that poor little girl marry you and be made
+miserable. Swear to me you will give her up."
+
+The schoolmaster hesitated, but there was again the ominous click of
+the pistol.
+
+"Yes, yes, I swear it," he said hastily. "I will give her up
+altogether."
+
+"You had better keep your oath," the giant said, "for if you break it,
+if I hear you go there any more--I shall be sure to hear of it--I will
+put an ounce of lead in you, if I have to do it in the middle of your
+school. Do you hear me? Now you may go."
+
+Only too glad to escape, the schoolmaster walked quickly off, and in a
+moment his steps could be heard as he ran at the top of his speed down
+the lane.
+
+In a moment the giant appeared to break in two, and two small figures
+stood where the large one had been.
+
+"Capital, Peter. Now, I'll take the cloak, and you keep the pistol,
+and now for a run home--not that I'm afraid of that coward getting
+up a pursuit. He'll be only too glad to get his head under the
+bedclothes."
+
+Rhoda had carried out her brother's instructions with great exactness,
+and was in a great fright when her aunt came in to see her in bed,
+lest she should notice that the window was open. However, the night
+was a quiet one, and the curtains fell partly across the blind, so
+that Miss Scudamore suspected nothing, but Rhoda felt great relief
+when she said good-night, took the candle, and left the room. She had
+had hard work to keep herself awake until she heard her aunt come up
+to bed; and then, finding that she did not again come into the room,
+she got up, fastened one end of the rope ladder to a thick stick long
+enough to cross two of the mullions, let the other end down very
+quietly, and then slipped into bed again. She did not awake until
+Hester knocked at her door and told her it was time to get up. She
+awoke with a great start, and in a, fright at once ran to the window.
+Everything looked as usual. The rope ladder was gone, the window was
+closed, and Rhoda knew that her brothers must have come in safely.
+
+Great was the excitement in Warley next day, when it became known that
+the schoolmaster had been robbed of his watch by a giant fully eight
+feet high. This height of the robber was, indeed, received with much
+doubt, as people thought that he might have been a tall man, but
+that the eight feet must have been exaggerated by the fear of the
+schoolmaster.
+
+Two or three days afterwards the surprise rose even higher, when a
+party of friends who had assembled at Mr. Jones' to condole with him
+upon his misfortune, were startled by the smashing of one of the
+windows by a small packet, which fell upon the floor in their midst.
+
+There was a rush to the door, but the night was a dark one, and no one
+was to be seen; then they returned to the sitting-room, and the little
+packet was opened, and found to contain some watchworks bent and
+broken, some pulverized glass, and a battered piece of metal, which,
+after some trouble, the schoolmaster recognized as the case of his
+watch. The head-constable was sent for, and after examining the relics
+of the case, he came to the same conclusion at which the rest had
+already arrived, namely, that the watch could not have been stolen by
+an ordinary footpad, but by some personal enemy of the schoolmaster's,
+whose object was not plunder, but annoyance and injury.
+
+To the population of Warley this solution was a very agreeable one.
+The fact of a gigantic footpad being in the neighborhood was alarming
+for all, and nervous people were already having great bolts and bars
+placed upon their shutters and doors. The discovery, therefore, that
+the object of this giant was not plunder, but only to gratify a spite
+against the master, was a relief to the whole place. Every one was, of
+course, anxious to know who this secret foe could be, and what crime
+Mr. Jones could have committed to bring such a tremendous enemy upon
+him. The boys at the school assumed a fresh importance in the eyes of
+the whole place, and being encouraged now to tell all they knew of
+him, they gave such a picture of the life that they had led at school,
+that a general feeling of disgust was aroused against him.
+
+The parents of one or two of the boys gave notice to take their sons
+away, but the rest of the boys were boarders, and were no better off
+than before.
+
+Miss Scudamore was unshaken in her faith in Mr. Jones and considered
+the rumor current about him to be due simply to the vindictive nature
+of boys.
+
+"Well, aunt," Tom said one day, after a lecture of this sort from her,
+"I know you mean to be kind to us, but Peter and I have stood it on
+that account, but we can't stand it much longer, and we shall run away
+before long."
+
+"And where would you run to, nephew?" Miss Scudamore said calmly.
+
+"That is our affair," Tom said quite as coolly, "only I don't like to
+do it without giving you warning. You mean kindly, I know, aunt, but
+the way you are always going on at us from morning to night whenever
+we are at home, and the way in which you allow us to be treated by
+that tyrannical brute, is too much altogether."
+
+Miss Scudamore looked steadily at them.
+
+"I am doing, nephew, what I consider to be for your good. You are
+willful, and violent, and headstrong. It is my duty to cure you, and
+although it is all very painful to me, at my time of life, to have
+such a charge thrust upon me, still, whatever it costs, it must be
+done."
+
+For the next month Mr. Jones' life was rendered a burden to him. The
+chimney-pots were shut up with sods placed on them, and the fireplaces
+poured volumes of smoke into the rooms and nearly choked him. Night
+after night the windows of his bedroom were smashed; cats were let
+down the chimney; his water-butts were found filled with mud, and the
+cord of the bucket of his well was cut time after time; the flowers
+in his garden were dug up and put in topsy-turvy. He himself could not
+stir out after dark without being tripped up by strings fastened a
+few inches above the path; and once, coming out of his door, a string
+fastened from scraper to scraper brought him down the steps with such
+violence that the bridge of his nose, which came on the edge of a
+step, was broken, and he was confined to his bed for three or four
+days. In vain he tried every means to discover and punish the authors
+of these provocations. A savage dog, the terror of the neighborhood,
+was borrowed and chained up in the garden, but was found poisoned next
+morning.
+
+Watchmen were hired, but refused to stay for more than one night, for
+they were so harassed and wearied out that they came to the conclusion
+that they were haunted. If they were on one side of the house a voice
+would be heard on the other. After the first few attempts, they no
+longer dared venture to run, for between each round strings were tied
+in every direction, and they had several heavy falls, while as they
+were carefully picking their way with their lanterns, stones struck
+them from all quarters. If one ventured for a moment from the other's
+side his lantern was knocked out, and his feet were struck from under
+him with a sharp and unexpected blow from a heavy cudgel; and they
+were once appalled by seeing a gigantic figure stalk across the grass,
+and vanish in a little bush.
+
+At the commencement of these trials the schoolmaster had questioned
+the boys, one by one, if they had any hand in the proceeding.
+
+All denied it. When it came to Tom Scudamore's turn, he said. "You
+never do believe me, Mr. Jones, so it is of no use my saying that I
+didn't do it; but if you ask Miss Scudamore, she will bear witness
+that we were in bed hours before, and that there are bars on our
+windows through which a cat could hardly get."
+
+The boys had never used Rhoda's room after the first night's
+expedition, making their escape now by waiting until the house was
+quiet, and then slipping along the passage to the spare room, and
+thence by the window, returning in the same way.
+
+Under this continued worry, annoyance, and alarm, the schoolmaster
+grew thin and worn, his school fell off more and more; for many of
+the boys, whose rest was disturbed by all this racket, encouraged by
+the example of the boys of the place who had already been taken away,
+wrote privately to their friends.
+
+The result was that the parents of two or three more wrote to say
+that their boys would not return after the holidays, and no one was
+surprised when it became known that Mr. Jones was about to close his
+school and leave the neighborhood.
+
+The excitement of the pranks that they had been playing had enabled
+the boys to support the almost perpetual scoldings and complaints of
+their aunt; but school once over, and their enemy driven from the
+place, they made up their minds that they could no longer stand it.
+
+One day, therefore, when Rhoda had, as an extraordinary concession,
+been allowed to go for a walk with them, they told her that they
+intended to run away.
+
+Poor Rhoda was greatly distressed.
+
+"You see, Rhoda dear," Tom said, "although we don't like leaving you,
+you will really be happier when we are gone. It is a perpetual worry
+to you to hear aunt going on, on, on--nagging, nagging, nagging for
+ever and ever at us. She is fond of you and kind to you, and you
+would get on quietly enough without us, while now she is in a fidget
+whenever you are with us, and is constantly at you not to learn
+mischief and bad ways from us. Besides you are always in a fright now,
+lest we should get into some awful scrape, as I expect we should if
+we stopped here. If it weren't for you, we should not let her off as
+easily as we do. No, no, Rhoda, it is better for us all that we should
+go."
+
+Poor Rhoda, though she cried bitterly at the thought of losing her
+brothers, yet could not but allow to herself that in many respects she
+should be more happy when she was freed from anxiety, lest they should
+get into some scrape, and when her aunt would not be kept in a state
+of continued irritation and scolding. She felt too that, although she
+herself could get on well enough in her changed life, that it was very
+hard indeed for the boys, accustomed as they had been to the jolly and
+independent life of a public school, and to be their own master during
+the holidays, with their ponies, amusements, and their freedom to come
+and go when they chose. Rhoda was a thoughtful child, and felt that
+nothing that they could go through could do them more harm or make
+them more unhappy than they now were. She had thought it all over day
+after day, for she was sure that the boys would, sooner or later come
+to it, and she had convinced herself that it was better for them.
+Still it was with a very sad heart that she found that the time had
+come.
+
+For some time she cried in silence, and then, drying her eyes, she
+said, trying to speak bravely, though her lips quivered.
+
+"I shall miss you dreadfully, boys; but I will not say a word to keep
+you here, for I am sure it is very, very bad for you. What do you mean
+to do? Do you mean to go to sea?"
+
+"No, Rhoda; you see uncle was in the army, and used to talk to us
+about that; and, as we have never seen the sea, we don't care for it
+as some boys do. No, we shall try and go as soldiers."
+
+"But my dear Tom, they will never take you as soldiers; you are too
+little."
+
+"Yes, we are not old enough to enlist at present," Tom said; "but we
+might go in as buglers. We have thought it all over, and have been
+paying old Wetherley, who was once in the band of a regiment, to teach
+us the bugle, and he says we can sound all the calls now as well as
+any bugler going. We did not like to tell you till we had made up our
+minds to go; but we have gone regularly to him every day since the
+first week we came here."
+
+"Then you won't have to fight, Tom," Rhoda said joyfully.
+
+"No," Tom said, in a rather dejected tone; "I am afraid they won't let
+us fight; still we shall see fighting, which is the next best thing."
+
+"I heard in Warley yesterday that there will be a movement of the
+army in Spain soon, and that some more troops will be sent out, and
+we shall try and get into a regiment that is going."
+
+They talked very long and earnestly on their plans, and were so
+engrossed that they quite forgot how time went, and got in late for
+tea, and were terribly scolded in consequence. For once none of
+them cared for the storm; the boys exulted over the thought that it
+would be the last scolding they would have to suffer; and Rhoda had
+difficulty in gasping down her tears at the thought that it was the
+last meal that she would take with them, for they had settled that
+they would start that very night.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+ENLISTED.
+
+
+It was a bright moonlight night when the boys, after a sad farewell
+from Rhoda, let themselves down from the window, and started upon
+their journey. Each carried a bundle on a stick; each bundle contained
+a suit of clothes, a few shirts and stockings, a pair of shoes, and a
+pistol. The other pistols were carried loaded inside their jackets,
+for there was no saying whom they might meet upon the road. They had
+put on the oldest suit of clothes they possessed, so as to attract as
+little attention as possible by the way. After they had once recovered
+from their parting with Rhoda their spirits rose, and they tramped
+along lightly and cheerfully. It was eleven o'clock when they started,
+and through the night they did not meet a single person. Towards
+morning they got under a haystack near the road, and slept for some
+hours; then they walked steadily on until they had done twenty miles
+since their start. They went into a small inn, and had some breakfast,
+and then purchasing some bread and cold ham, went on through the town,
+and leaving the London road, followed that leading to Portsmouth, and
+after a mile or two again took up their quarters until evening, in a
+haystack.
+
+It is not necessary to give the details of the journey to Portsmouth.
+After the first two days' tramp, having no longer any fear of the
+pursuit, which, no doubt, had been made for them when first missed,
+they walked by day, and slept at night in sheds, or under haystacks,
+as they were afraid of being questioned and perhaps stopped at inns.
+They walked only short distances now, for the first night's long
+journey had galled their feet, and, as Tom said, they were not pressed
+for time, and did not want to arrive at Portsmouth like two limping
+tramps. Walking, therefore, only twelve miles a day after the first
+two days, they arrived at Portsmouth fresh and in high spirits.
+They had met with no adventures upon the road, except that upon one
+occasion two tramps had attempted to seize their bundles, but the
+production of the pistols, and the evident determination of the boys
+to use them if necessary, made the men abandon their intention and
+make off, with much bad language and many threats, at which the boys
+laughed disdainfully.
+
+Arrived at Portsmouth, their first care was to find a quiet little
+inn, where they could put up. This they had little difficulty in
+doing, for Portsmouth abounded with public-houses, and people were so
+much accustomed to young fellows tramping in with their bundles, to
+join their ships, that their appearance excited no curiosity whatever.
+Tom looked older than he really was, although not tall for his age,
+while Peter, if anything, overtopped his brother, but was slighter,
+and looked fully two years younger. Refreshed by a long night's sleep
+between sheets, they started out after breakfast to see the town, and
+were greatly impressed and delighted by the bustle of the streets,
+full of soldiers and sailors, and still more by the fortifications and
+the numerous ships of war lying in the harbor, or out at Spithead.
+A large fleet of merchantmen was lying off at anchor, waiting for a
+convoy, and a perfect fleet of little wherries was plying backwards
+and forwards between the vessels and the shore.
+
+"It makes one almost wish to be a sailor," Peter said, as they sat
+upon the Southsea beach, and looked out at the animated ocean.
+
+"It does, Peter; and if it had been ten years back, instead of at
+present, I should have been ready enough to change our plans. But what
+is the use of going to sea now? The French and Spanish navies skulk in
+harbor, and the first time our fellows get them out they will he sure
+to smash them altogether, and then there is an end to all fighting.
+No, Peter, it looks tempting, I grant, but we shall see ten times as
+much with the army. We must go and settle the thing to-morrow. There
+is no time to be lost if the expedition starts in a fortnight or three
+weeks."
+
+Returning into the town, the boys were greatly amused at seeing a
+sailor's wedding. Four carriages and pair drove along; inside were
+women, while four sailors sat on each roof, waving their hats to the
+passers-by, and refreshing themselves by repeated pulls at some black
+bottles, with which they were well supplied. Making inquiries, the
+boys found that the men belonged to a fine frigate which had come in a
+day or two before, with several prizes.
+
+The next morning they went down to the barracks. Several
+non-commissioned officers, with bunches of gay ribbons in their caps,
+were standing about. Outside the gates were some boards, with notices,
+"Active young fellows required. Good pay, plenty of prize-money, and
+chances, of promotion!"
+
+The boys read several of these notices, which differed only from each
+other in the name of the regiment; and then Tom gave an exclamation of
+satisfaction as he glanced at a note at the foot of one of them, "Two
+or three active lads wanted as buglers."
+
+"There we are, Peter; and, oh, what luck! it is Uncle Peter's
+regiment! Look here, Peter," he said, after a pause, "we won't say
+anything about being his nephews, unless there is no other way of
+getting taken; for if we do it won't be nice. We shall be taken notice
+of, and not treated like other fellows, and that will cause all sorts
+of ill-feeling and jealousy, and rows. It will be quite time to say
+who we are when we have done something to show that we shan't do
+discredit to him. You see it isn't much in our favor that we are here
+as two runaway boys. If we were older we could go as volunteers, but
+of course we are too young for that."
+
+It should be mentioned that in those days it was by no means unusual
+for young men who had not sufficient interest to get commissions to
+obtain permission to accompany a regiment as volunteers. They paid
+their own expenses, and lived with the officers, but did duty as
+private soldiers. If they distinguished themselves, they obtained
+commissions to fill up vacancies caused in action.
+
+"There is our sergeant, Tom; let's get it over at once."
+
+"If you please," Tom said, as they went up to the sergeant, "are you
+the recruiting sergeant of the Norfolk Rangers?"
+
+"By Jove, Summers, you are in luck to-day," laughed one of the other
+sergeants; "here are two valuable recruits for the Rangers. The
+Mounseers will have no chance with the regiment with such giants as
+those in it. Come, my fine fellows, let me persuade you to join the
+15th. Such little bantams as you are would be thrown away upon the
+Rangers."
+
+There was a shout of laughter from the other non-commissioned
+officers.
+
+Tom was too much accustomed to chaffing bargees at Eton to be put out
+of countenance.
+
+"We may be bantams," he said, "but I have seen a bantam lick a big
+dunghill cock many a time. Fine feathers don't always make fine birds,
+my man."
+
+"Well answered, young one," the sergeant of the Rangers said, while
+there was a general laugh among the others, for the sergeant of the
+15th was not a favorite.
+
+"You think yourself sharp, youngster," he said angrily. "You want a
+licking, you do; and if you were in the 15th, you'd get it pretty
+quickly."
+
+"Oh! I beg your pardon," Tom said gravely; "I did not know that the
+15th were famous for thrashing boys. Thank you; when I enlist it shall
+be in a regiment where men hit fellows their own size."
+
+There was a shout of laughter, and the sergeant, enraged, stepped
+forward, and gave Tom a swinging box on the ear.
+
+There was a cry of "shame" from the others; but before any of them
+could interfere, Tom suddenly stooped, caught the sergeant by the
+bottom of the trousers, and in an instant he fell on his back with a
+crash.
+
+For a moment he was slightly stunned, and then, regaining his feet, he
+was about to rush at Tom, when the others threw themselves in between
+them, and said he should not touch the boy. He struck him first, and
+the boy had only given him what served him right.
+
+The sergeant was furious, and an angry quarrel was going on, when an
+officer of the Rangers came suddenly out of barrack.
+
+"Hullo, Summers, what is all this about? I am surprised at you. A lot
+of non-commissioned officers, just in front of the barrack gates,
+quarreling like drunken sailors in a pothouse. What does it all mean?"
+
+"The fact is this, Captain Manley," the sergeant said, saluting,
+"these two lads came up to speak to me, when Sergeant Billow chaffed
+them. The lad gave the sergeant as good as he got, and the sergeant
+lost his temper, and hit him a box on the ear, and in a moment the
+young one tripped him up, and pretty nigh stunned him; when he got up
+he was going at the boy, and, of course, we wouldn't have it."
+
+"Quite right," Captain Manley said. "Sergeant Billow, I shall forward
+a report to your regiment. Chaffing people in the street, and then
+losing your temper, striking a boy, and causing a disturbance. Now,
+sergeant," he went on, as the others moved away, "do you know those
+boys?"
+
+"No, sir; they are strangers to me."
+
+"Do you want to see the sergeant privately, lads, or on something
+connected with the regiment?"
+
+"I see that you have vacancies for buglers, sir," Tom said, "and my
+brother and myself want to enlist if you will take us."
+
+Captain Manley smiled. "You young scamps, you have got 'runaway from
+home' as plainly on your faces as if it was printed there. If we
+were to enlist you, we should be having your friends here after you
+to-morrow, and get into a scrape for taking you."
+
+"We have no friends who will interfere with us, sir, I can give you my
+word of honor as a gentleman." Captain Manley laughed. "I mean," Tom
+said confused, "my word of honor, as--as an intending bugler."
+
+"Indeed we have no one to interfere with us in any way, sir," Peter
+put in earnestly. "We wouldn't tell a lie even to enlist in the
+Rangers."
+
+Captain Manley was struck by the earnestness of the boys' faces, and
+after a pause he said to the sergeant,--
+
+"That will do, Summers; I will take these lads up to my quarters and
+speak to them."
+
+Then, motioning to the boys to follow him, he re-entered the barracks,
+and led the way up to his quarters.
+
+"Sit down," he said, when they had entered his room. "Now, boys, this
+is a foolish freak upon your part, which you will regret some day. Of
+course you have run away from school."
+
+"No, sir, we have run away from home," Tom said.
+
+"So much the worse," Captain Manley said gravely. "Tell me frankly,
+why did you do so? No unkindness at home can excuse boys from running
+away from their parents."
+
+"We have none, sir," Tom said. "We have lost them both--our mother
+many years ago, our father six months. Our only living relation,
+except a younger sister, is an aunt, who considers us as nuisances,
+and who, although meaning to do her duty, simply drives us out of our
+minds."
+
+Captain Manley could not resist a smile. "Do you not go to school?"
+
+"We did go to a school near, but unfortunately it is broken up."
+
+Captain Manley caught a little look of amusement between the boys. "I
+should not be surprised if you had something to do with its breaking
+up," he said with a laugh. "But to return to your coming here. There
+is certainly less reason against your joining than I thought at first,
+but you are too young."
+
+"We are both strong, and are good walkers," Tom said.
+
+"But you cannot be much over fifteen," Captain Manley said, "and your
+brother is younger."
+
+"We are accustomed to strong exercise, sir, and can thrash most
+fellows of our own size."
+
+"Very likely," Captain Manley said, "but we can't take that into
+consideration. You are certainly young for buglers for service work;
+however, I will go across with you to the orderly-room, and hear what
+the colonel says."
+
+Crossing the barrack-yard, they found the colonel was in and
+disengaged.
+
+"Colonel Tritton," Captain Manley said, "these lads want to enlist as
+buglers."
+
+The colonel looked up and smiled. "They look regular young pickles,"
+he said. "I suppose they have run away from school."
+
+"Not from school, colonel. They have lost both parents, and live with
+an aunt, with whom they don't get on well. There does not seem to be
+much chance of their being claimed."
+
+"You are full young," the colonel said, "and I think you will be
+sorry, boys, for the step you want to take."
+
+"I don't think so, sir," Tom said.
+
+"Of course, you don't at present," the colonel said. "However, that is
+your business. Mind, you will have a rough time of it; you will have
+to fight your way, you know."
+
+"I'll back them to hold their own," Captain Manley said, laughing.
+"When I went out at the barrack-gate just now there was a row among a
+lot of recruiting sergeants, and when I went up to put a stop to it, I
+found that a fellow of the 15th had chaffed these boys when they went
+up to speak to Summers, and that they had got the best of it in that
+line; and the fellow having lost his temper and struck one of them, he
+found himself on his back on the pavement. The boy had tripped him up
+in an instant."
+
+The colonel laughed, and then said suddenly and sharply to Peter,
+"Where did you learn that trick, youngster?"
+
+"At Eton," Peter answered promptly, and then colored up hotly at his
+brother's reproachful glance.
+
+"Oh, ho! At Eton, young gentlemen, eh!" the colonel said. "That
+alters the matter. If you were at Eton your family must be people of
+property, and I can't let you do such a foolish thing as enlist as
+buglers."
+
+"Our father lost all his money suddenly, owing to a blackguard he
+trusted cheating him. He found it out, and it killed him," Tom said
+quietly.
+
+The colonel saw he was speaking the truth. "Well, well," he said
+kindly, "we must see what we can do for you, boys. They are young,
+Manley, but that will improve, and by the time that they have been a
+year at the depôt--"
+
+"Oh, if you please, colonel," Tom said, "we want to go on foreign
+service, and it's knowing that your regiment was under orders for
+foreign service we came to it."
+
+"Impossible!" the colonel said shortly.
+
+"I am very sorry for that, sir," Tom said respectfully, "for we would
+rather belong to this regiment than any in the service; but if you
+will not let us go with it we must try another."
+
+"Why would you rather belong to us than to any other?" the colonel
+asked, as the boys turned to leave the room.
+
+"I had rather not say, sir," Tom said. "We have a reason, and a very
+good one, but it is not one we should like to tell."
+
+The colonel was silent for a minute. He was struck with the boys'
+appearance and manner, and was sorry at the thought of losing them,
+partly from interest in themselves, partly because the sea service was
+generally so much more attractive to boys, that it was not easy to get
+them to enlist as buglers and drummers.
+
+"You see, lads, I should really like to take you, but we shall be
+starting in a fortnight, and it would be altogether impossible for you
+to learn to sound the bugle, to say nothing of learning the calls, by
+that time."
+
+"We can't play well, sir," Tom answered, his spirits rising again,
+"but we have practiced for some time, and know a good many of the
+calls."
+
+"Oh, indeed!" the colonel said, pleased; "that alters the case. Well,
+lads, I should like to take you with the regiment, for you look
+straightforward, sharp young fellows. So I will enlist you. Work hard
+for the next fortnight, and if I hear a favorable report of you by
+that time, you shall go."
+
+"Thank you very much," the boys said warmly, delighted to find their
+hopes realized.
+
+"What are your names?" the colonel asked.
+
+"Tom and Peter," Tom answered.
+
+"Tom and Peter what?" the colonel said.
+
+The boys looked at each other. The fact that they would of course
+be asked their names had never occurred to them, and they not had
+therefore consulted whether to give their own or another name.
+
+"Come, boys," Colonel Tritton said good-temperedly, "never be ashamed
+of your names; don't sail under false colors, lads. I am sure you will
+do nothing to disgrace your names."
+
+Tom looked at Peter, and saw that he agreed to give their real names,
+so he said, "Tom and Peter Scudamore."
+
+"Peter Scudamore! Why, Manley, these boys must be relations of the
+dear old colonel. That explains why they chose the regiment. Now,
+boys, what relation was he of yours?"
+
+"I do not admit that he was a relation at all, colonel," Tom said
+gravely, "and I hope that you will not ask the question. Supposing
+that he had been a relation of ours, we should not wish it to be
+known. In the first place, it would not be altogether creditable to
+his memory that relations of his should be serving as buglers in
+his old regiment; and in the second place, it might be that, from
+a kindness towards him, some of the officers might, perhaps, treat
+us differently to other boys, which would make our position more
+difficult by exciting jealousy among others. Should there be any
+relation between him and us, it will be time enough for us to claim
+it when we have shown ourselves worthy of it."
+
+"Well said, boys," the officers both exclaimed. "You are quite right,"
+the colonel went on, "and I respect your motive for keeping silence.
+What you say about jealousy which might arise is very sensible and
+true. At the same time, I will promise you that I will keep my eye
+upon you, and that if an opportunity should occur in which I can give
+you a chance of showing that there is more in you than in other boys,
+be sure you shall have the chance."
+
+"Thank you very much indeed, colonel," both boys exclaimed.
+
+"Now, Manley, I shall be obliged if you will take them to the
+adjutant, and tell him to swear them in and attest them in regular
+form; the surgeon will, of course, examine them. Please tell the
+quartermaster to get their uniforms made without loss of time; and
+give a hint to the bugle-major that I should be pleased if he will pay
+extra attention to them, and push them on as fast as possible."
+
+Captain Manley carried out these instructions, the boys were duly
+examined by the surgeon and passed, and in half an hour became His
+Majesty's servants.
+
+"Now, boys," Captain Manley said as he crossed with them to the
+quarters of the bandmaster, "you will have rather a difficult course
+to steer, but I have no doubt you will get through it with credit.
+This is something like a school, and you will have to fight before you
+find your place. Don't be in a hurry to begin; take all good-natured
+chaff good-naturedly; resent any attempt at bullying. I have no doubt
+you will be popular, and it is well that you should be so, for then
+there will be no jealousy if your luck seems better than that of
+others. They will, of course, know that you are differently born and
+educated to themselves, but they will not like you any the worse for
+that, if they find that you do not try to keep aloof from them or give
+yourselves airs. And look here, boys, play any tricks you like with
+the men, but don't do it with the non-commissioned officers. There is
+nothing they hate so much as impudence from the boys, and they have
+it in their power to do you a great deal of good or of harm. You will
+not have much to do with the bandmaster. Only a portion of the band
+accompanies us, and even that will be broken up when we once enter
+upon active campaigning. Several of the company buglers have either
+left lately, or have got their stripes and given up their bugles, and
+I do not fancy that their places will be filled up before we get out
+there. Now, your great object will be to get two of these vacancies. I
+am afraid you are too young, still there will be plenty more vacancies
+after we are once in the field, for a bullet has no respect for
+buglers; and you see the better you behave the better your chance of
+being chosen."
+
+"What is the difference exactly, sir?" Tom asked.
+
+"The company bugler ranks on the strength of the company, messes,
+marches, and goes into action with them; the other buglers merely form
+part of the band, are under the bandmaster, play at the head of the
+regiment on its march, and help in the hospitals during a battle."
+
+"Macpherson," he said as he entered the bandmaster's quarters, where a
+number of men and a few lads were practicing, "I have brought you two
+lads who have entered as buglers."
+
+The bandmaster was a Scotchman--a stiff-looking, elderly man.
+
+"Weel, Captain Manley, I'm wanting boys, but they look vera young, and
+I misdoubt they had better have been at school than here. However,
+I'll do my best with them; they look smart lads, and we shall have
+plenty of time at the depôt to get them into shape."
+
+"Lots of time, Macpherson, lots of time. They say they know a few
+calls on the bugle, so perhaps they had better stick to the calls at
+present; you will have plenty of time to begin with them regularly
+with the notes when all the bustle is over."
+
+"Eh, ye know the calls, boys? Hardy and Graves, give them your bugles,
+and let us hear them. Now for the advance."
+
+Tom and Peter felt very nervous, but they had really practiced hard
+for an hour a day for the last four months, and could play all the
+calls they knew steadily and well. The bandmaster made no remark until
+they had sounded some half a dozen calls as he named them, and then
+he said, "The lads have a vera gude idea of it, Captain Manley. They
+are steadier and clearer than mony a one of the boys already. Will ye
+begin at once, lads, or will ye wait till ye get your uniform?"
+
+"We had rather begin at once," the boys answered together.
+
+"Vera gude. Hardy, take two bugles out of the chest, and then take
+these lads--What's your name, boys? Eh? Scudamore? A vera gude
+name--take them over to Corporal Skinner, he will be practicing with
+the others on the ramp."
+
+With a word of grateful thanks to Captain Manley as he went out before
+them, the boys followed their new guide out to the ramparts. A guide
+was hardly necessary, for an incessant bugling betokened the place,
+where, in one of the bastions behind the barracks, seven or eight
+buglers were sounding the various calls under the direction of
+Corporal Skinner.
+
+The corporal was a man of few words, for he merely nodded when the
+boy--who had not opened his lips on the way, indeed, he was too busy
+wondering who these young swells were, and what they had run away for,
+to say a word--gave the bandmaster's message to the effect that the
+new-comers knew some of the calls and were to be under his tuition for
+the present, pointed to them where to stand, and in another minute Tom
+and Peter were hard at work adding to the deafening din. After half
+an hour's practice they were pleased at seeing Captain Manley stroll
+up and call their instructor aside, and they felt sure that he was
+speaking to him of them. This was so, for the officer was carrying out
+the instructions he had received from Colonel Tritton.
+
+"Corporal," he said, "I want to say a word to you about those boys who
+have just joined. They seem to have a fair idea of the calls."
+
+"Yes, sir, they only know a few, but those they do know they can sound
+as well as any of them."
+
+"That is right, corporal. Now look here, what I am going to say is not
+to go farther, you understand."
+
+"Yes, sir, I will keep my mouth shut."
+
+"Very well. You can see the lads are not like most of our band boys.
+They are a gentleman's sons who have got into some scrape or other and
+run away from school."
+
+"I was thinking as much, sir."
+
+"The colonel believes that he knows their family, Skinner; but of
+course, that will not make any difference in regard to them. Still he
+would be pleased, I know, if they could sound the calls well enough to
+go with the regiment. They are most anxious to learn. Now I shall be
+glad if you can get them up to the mark. It will, of course, entail a
+lot of extra trouble upon you, but if you can get them fit in time, I
+will pay you a couple of guineas for your extra time."
+
+"Thank you, sir," the corporal saluted. "I think I can manage it--at
+any rate if I don't it won't be for want of trying."
+
+"Who are those nice-looking lads I saw with you, Manley?" Major James
+asked as the captain came into the messroom to lunch.
+
+"Those are two buglers in his Majesty's Norfolk Rangers."
+
+There was a general laugh.
+
+"No, but really, Manley, who are they? I was quite struck with them;
+good style of boys."
+
+"It is a fact, major. Harding will tell you so," and he nodded to the
+adjutant.
+
+"Yes, Manley is saying the thing that's right," the adjutant answered.
+"The doctor passed them, and I swore them in."
+
+"I am sorry for it," the major said. "There were three or four of us
+standing on the mess-room steps and we all noticed them. They were
+gentlemen, if I ever saw one, and a hard life they will have of it
+with the band boys. However, they are not likely to stay there. They
+have run away from school, of course, and will be claimed. I wonder
+you enlisted them."
+
+"The colonel's orders, major," the adjutant said. "Manley took them to
+him, I believe, and then brought them to me."
+
+"I don't think you need feel anxious about them among the boys,
+major," Captain Manley said. "I fancy they can hold their own. I
+found them outside the gate where a row was going on among some of
+the recruiting sergeants, and one of those boys had just tripped up
+a sergeant of the 15th and nearly broken his head."
+
+There was a general laugh.
+
+"They are quite interesting, these prodigies of yours, Manley. How did
+the boy do it? I should not have thought him strong enough to have
+thrown a man off his balance."
+
+"I asked Summers about it afterwards," Captain Manley said, "the
+fellow gave one of the boys a box on the ear, and in an instant the
+boy stooped, caught his foot and pulled it forward and up. The thing
+was done in a moment, and the sergeant was on his back before he knew
+what's what."
+
+"By Jove," a young ensign said, "I have seen that trick done at Eton."
+
+"That is just where the boy said he learnt it," Captain Manley said.
+"The colonel asked him suddenly, and it slipped out."
+
+"If they're Etonians, I ought to know them," the ensign said. "I only
+left six months ago. What are their names?"
+
+"Their name is Scudamore."
+
+"By Jove, they were in the same house with me. Uncommonly sharp little
+fellows, and up to no end of mischief. It was always believed, though
+no one could prove it, that they were the boys who nearly suffocated
+the bargee."
+
+There was a roar of laughter.
+
+"Tell us all about, Carruthers."
+
+"Well, there was not very much known about it. It seems the fellow
+purposely upset a boat with four or five of our fellows in it, and
+that night a dozen lighted crackers were thrown down into the little
+cabin where the fellow was asleep; the hatch was fastened and he
+was sent drifting down stream with the crackers exploding all about
+him. The smoke nearly suffocated the fellow, I believe There was a
+tremendous row about it, but they could not bring it home to any one.
+We always put it down to the Scudamores, though they never would own
+to it; but they were the only fellows in the boat who would have done
+it, and they were always up to mischief."
+
+"But what makes them come here as buglers?" the major asked.
+
+"Their father was a banker, I believe, down in the Eastern Counties
+somewhere. He died suddenly in the middle of the half before I left,
+and they went away to the funeral and never came back again."
+
+"The fact is," Captain Manley said, "I fancy by what they say, though
+they did not mention their father was a banker, that he lost all his
+money suddenly and died of the shock. At any rate they are alone
+in the world, and the colonel has no doubt that they are some
+relation--nephews, I should imagine--of Peter Scudamore, who was our
+colonel when I joined. One of them is called Peter. They acknowledged
+that they had a particular reason for choosing this regiment; but
+they would neither acknowledge or deny that he was a relation. Now
+that we know their father was a banker, we shall find out without
+difficulty--indeed I have no doubt the colonel will know whether Peter
+Scudamore had a brother a banker."
+
+"What's to be done, Manley?" Major James said. "I don't like the
+thought of poor old Peter's nephews turning buglers. All of us field
+officers, and the best part of you captains, served under him, and
+a better fellow never stepped. I think between us we might do
+something."
+
+"I would do anything I could," Carruthers said, "and there are Watson
+and Talbot who were at Eton too. Dash it, I don't like to think of two
+Etonians in a band," "You are all very good," Captain Manley said,
+"but from what I see of the boys they will go their own way. They have
+plenty of pride, and they acknowledge that their reason for refusing
+to say whether they are any relation of the colonel was that they
+did not want to be taken notice of or treated differently from other
+boys, because it would cause jealousy, and make their position more
+difficult. All they asked was that they might accompany the regiment,
+and not remain behind at the depôt; and as, fortunately, they have
+both been practising with the bugle, and can sound most of the calls
+as well as the others, the colonel was able to grant their request.
+Had they been older, of course, we could have arranged for them to go
+with us as volunteers, we who knew the colonel, paying their expenses
+between us: as it is, the only thing we can do for them--and that is
+what they would like best is to treat them just like the other boys,
+but to give them every chance of distinguishing themselves. If they
+don't get knocked over, they ought to win a commission before the
+campaign is over."
+
+In the meantime Tom and Peter had been introducing themselves to the
+regiment. The exercise over, they had returned to dinner. It was a
+rough meal, but the boys enjoyed it, and after it was over a number
+of the men of the band, with whom they messed, crowded round to ask
+the usual questions of new-comers--their curiosity heightened in the
+present instance by the fact that the boys differed so widely from
+ordinary recruits.
+
+"Look here," Tom said, laughing, "I can't answer you all at once, but
+if you put me on the table I will tell you all about us."
+
+There was a general laugh, and many of the soldiers other than the
+band sauntered up to see what was going on.
+
+"The first thing to tell you," Tom said, "is our names. We go by the
+names of Tom and Peter Scudamore, but I need scarcely tell you that
+these are not our real names. The fact is--but this is quite a
+secret--we are the eldest sons of Sir Arthur Wellesley--"
+
+Here Tom was interrupted by a shout of laughter.
+
+"Sir Arthur," Tom went on calmly, "wished to make us colonels of two
+of the Life Guard regiments, but as they were not going on foreign
+service we did not see it, and have accordingly entered the regiment
+which Sir Arthur, our father, in speaking to a friend, said was the
+finest in the service--namely, the Norfolk Rangers. We believe that
+it is the custom, upon entering a regiment, to pay our footing, and I
+have given a guinea to Corporal Skinner, and asked him to make it go
+as far as he could."
+
+There was great laughter over Tom's speech, which was just suited to
+soldiers, and the boys from that moment were considered part of the
+regiment.
+
+"There's good stuff in those boys," an old sergeant said to another,
+"plucky and cool. I shouldn't be surprised if what Tom Dillon said
+was about right; he was waiting at mess just now, and though he didn't
+hear all that was said, he picked up that there was an idea that
+these boys are related to the old colonel. He was a good fellow, he
+was, and, though I say nothing against Colonel Tritton, yet we missed
+Colonel Scudamore terribly. Strict, and yet kind, just the sort of
+fellow to serve under. If the boys take after him they will be a
+credit to the regiment, and mark my words, we shan't see them in the
+band many years."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+A TOUGH CUSTOMER.
+
+
+Like most boys who are fond of play, Tom and Peter Scudamore were
+capable of hard work at a pinch, and during the three weeks that
+they spent at Portsmouth they certainly worked with a will. They had
+nothing to do in the way of duty, except to practice the bugle, and
+this they did with a zeal and perseverance that quite won the heart
+of Corporal Skinner, and enabled him to look upon Captain Manley's
+two guineas as good as earned. But even with the best will and the
+strongest lungs possible, boys can only blow a bugle a certain number
+of hours a day. For an hour before breakfast, for two hours before
+dinner, and for an hour and a half in the evening they practiced, the
+evening work being extra, alone with their instructor. There remained
+the whole afternoon to themselves. Their employment of those hours had
+been undertaken at Peter's suggestion.
+
+"Look here, Tom," he said, at the end of the first day's work, "from
+what the corporal says, we shall have from one till about five to
+ourselves. Now, we are going to Spain, and it seems to me that it
+would be of great use to us, and might do us a great deal of good, to
+know something of Spanish. We have got four pounds each left, and I
+don't think that we could lay it out better than in getting a Spanish
+master and some books, and in setting to in earnest at it. If we work
+with all our might for four hours a day with a master, we shall have
+made some progress, and shall pick up the pronunciation a little. I
+dare say we shall be another ten days or a fortnight on the voyage,
+and shall have lots of time on our hands. It will make it so much
+easier to pick it up when we get there if we know a little to start
+with."
+
+"I think it is a capital idea, Peter; I should think we are pretty
+sure to find a master here."
+
+There was no difficulty upon that score, for there were a large number
+of Spanish in England at the time; men who had left the country rather
+than remain under the French yoke, and among them were many who were
+glad to get their living by teaching their native language. There were
+two or three in this condition in Portsmouth, and to one of these the
+boys applied. He was rather surprised at the application from the two
+young buglers--for the uniforms were finished twenty-four hours after
+their arrival--but at once agreed to devote his whole afternoons to
+them. Having a strong motive for their work, and a determination
+to succeed in it, the boys made a progress that astonished both
+themselves and their teacher, and they now found the advantage of
+their grounding in Latin at Eton. Absorbed in their work, they saw
+little of the other boys, except at meals and when at practice.
+
+One evening when at supper, one of the buglers, named Mitcham, a lad
+of nearly eighteen, made some sneering remark about boys who thought
+themselves above others, and gave themselves airs. Tom saw at once
+that this allusion was meant for them, and took the matter up.
+
+"I suppose you mean us, Mitcham. You are quite mistaken; neither my
+brother nor myself think ourselves better than any one, nor have we
+any idea of giving ourselves airs. The fact is--and I am not surprised
+that you should think us unsociable--we are taking lessons in Spanish.
+If we go with the regiment it will be very useful, and I have heard
+it said that any one who lands in a foreign country, and who knows a
+little of the grammar and pronunciation, will learn it in half the
+time that he would were he altogether ignorant of both. I am sorry
+that I did not mention it before, because I can understand that it
+must seem as if we did not want to be sociable. I can assure you that
+we do; and that after this fortnight is over we shall be ready to be
+as jolly as any one. You see we are altogether behindhand with our
+work now, and have got to work hard to put ourselves on your level."
+
+Tom spoke so good-temperedly that there was a general feeling in his
+favor, and several of them who had before thought with Mitcham, that
+the new-comers were not inclined to be sociable, felt that they had
+been mistaken. There was, however, a general feeling of surprise
+and amusement at the idea of two boys voluntarily taking lessons in
+Spanish. Mitcham, however, who was a surly-tempered young fellow, and
+who was jealous of the progress which the boys were making, and of the
+general liking with which they seemed to be regarded, said,--
+
+"I believe that's only an excuse for getting away from us."
+
+"Do you mean to say that you think that I am telling a lie?" Tom asked
+quietly.
+
+"Yes, if you put it in that way, young 'un," Mitcham said.
+
+"Hold your tongue, Mitcham, or I'll pull your ears for you," Corporal
+Skinner said: but his speech was cut short by Tom's putting one hand
+on the barrack table, vaulting across it, and striking Mitcham a heavy
+blow between the eyes.
+
+There was a cry of "a fight!" among the boys, but the men interfered
+at once.
+
+"You don't know what you are doing, young 'un," one said to Tom;
+"when you hit a fellow here, you must fight him. That's the rule, and
+you can't fight Mitcham; he's two years older, at least, and a head
+taller."
+
+"Of course I will fight him," Tom said. "I would fight him if he were
+twice as big, if he called me a liar."
+
+"Nonsense, young 'un!" another said, "it's not possible. He was wrong,
+and if you had not struck him I would have licked him myself; but as
+you have done so, you had better put up with a thrashing, and have
+done with it."
+
+"I should think so, indeed!" Tom said disdainfully. "I may get a
+licking; I dare say I shall; but it won't be all on one side. Look
+here, Mitcham, we will have it out to-morrow, on the ramparts behind
+the barracks. But, if you will apologize to me for calling me a liar,
+I'll say I am sorry I hit you."
+
+"Oh, blow your sorrow!" the lad said. "I'll give you the heartiest
+licking you ever had in your life, my young cock."
+
+"Oh, all right," Tom said cheerfully. "We will see all about it when
+the time comes."
+
+As it was evident now that there was no way out of it, no one
+interfered further in the matter. Quarrels in the army are always
+settled by a fair fight, as at school; but several of the older men
+questioned among themselves whether they ought to let this go on,
+considering that Tom Scudamore was only between fifteen and sixteen,
+while his opponent was two years older, and was so much heavier and
+stronger. However, as it was plain that Tom would not take a thrashing
+for the blow he had struck, and there did not seem any satisfactory
+way out of it, nothing was done, except that two or three of them went
+up to Mitcham, and strongly urged him to shake hands with Tom, and
+confess that he had done wrong in giving him the lie. This Mitcham
+would not hear of, and there was nothing further to be done.
+
+"I am afraid, Tom, you have no chance with that fellow." Peter said,
+as they were undressing.
+
+"No chance in the world, Peter; but I can box fairly, you know, and am
+pretty hard. I shall be able to punish him a bit, and you may be sure
+I shall never give in. It's no great odds getting a licking, and I
+suppose that they will stop it before I am killed. Don't bother about
+it. I had rather get knocked about in a fight than get flogged at Eton
+any day. I would rather you did not come to see it, Peter, if you
+don't mind. When you fought Evans it hurt me ten times as much as if I
+had been fighting, and, although you licked him, it made me feel like
+a girl. I can stand twice the punishment if I don't feel that any blow
+is hitting you as well as myself."
+
+Tom's prediction about the fight turned out to be nearly correct. He
+was more active, and a vastly better boxer than his antagonist, and
+although he was constantly knocked down, he punished him very heavily
+about the face. In fact, the fight was exactly similar to that great
+battle, fifty years afterwards, between Sayers and Heenan. Time after
+time Tom was knocked down, and even his second begged him to give in,
+but he would not hear of it. Breathless and exhausted, but always
+cool and smiling, he faced his heavy antagonist, eluding his furious
+rushes, and managing to strike a few straight blows at his eyes before
+being knocked down. By the time that they had fought a quarter of
+an hour half the regiment was assembled, and loud were the cheers
+which greeted Tom each time he came up, very pale and bleeding, but
+confident, against his antagonist.
+
+At last an old sergeant came forward. "Come," he said, "there has been
+enough of this. You had better stop."
+
+"Will he say he was sorry he called me a liar?" Tom asked.
+
+"No, I won't," Mitcham answered.
+
+The sergeant was about to use his authority to stop it, when Tom said
+to him, in a low voice:
+
+"Look, sergeant! please let us go on another five minutes. I think I
+can stand that, and he can hardly see out of his eyes now. He won't
+see a bit by that time."
+
+The sergeant hesitated, but a glance at Tom's antagonist convinced him
+that what he said was correct. Mitcham had at all times a round and
+rather puffy face, and his cheeks were now so swollen with the effect
+of Tom's straight, steady hitting, that he could with difficulty see.
+
+It was a hard five minutes for Tom, for his antagonist, finding that
+he was rapidly getting blind, rushed with fury upon him, trying to end
+the fight. Tom had less difficulty in guarding the blows, given wildly
+and almost at random, but he was knocked down time after time by the
+mere force and weight of the rush. He felt himself getting weak, and
+could hardly get up from his second's knee upon the call of time.
+He was not afraid of being made to give in, but he was afraid of
+fainting, and of so being unable to come up to time.
+
+"Stick a knife into me; do anything!" he said to his second, "if I go
+off, only bring me up to time. He can't hold out much longer."
+
+Nor could he. His hitting became more and more at random, until at
+last, on getting up from his second's knee, Mitcham cried in a hoarse
+voice, "Where is he? I can't see him!"
+
+Then Tom went forward with his hands down. "Look here, Mitcham, you
+can't see, and I can hardly stand. I think we have both done enough.
+We neither of us can give in, well because--because I am a gentleman,
+you because you are bigger than I am; so let's shake hands, and say no
+more about it."
+
+Mitcham hesitated an instant, and then held out his hand. "You are a
+good fellow, Scudamore, and there's my hand; but you have licked me
+fairly. I can't come up to time, and you can. There, I am sorry I
+called you a liar."
+
+Tom took the hand, and shook it, and then a mist came over his eyes,
+and his knees tottered, as, with the ringing cheers of the men in his
+ears, he fainted into his second's arms.
+
+"What a row the men are making!" the major said, as the sound of
+cheering came through the open window of the mess-room, at which the
+officers were sitting at lunch. "It's a fight of course, and a good
+one, judging by the cheering. Does any one know who it is between?"
+
+No one had heard.
+
+"It's over now," the adjutant said, looking out of the window, "Here
+are the men coming down in a stream. They look very excited over it. I
+wonder who it has been. Stokes," he said, turning to one of the mess
+servants, "go out, and find out who has been fighting, and all about
+it."
+
+In a minute or two the man returned. "It's two of the band boys, sir."
+
+"Oh, only two boys! I wonder they made such a fuss over that. Who are
+they?"
+
+"One was one of the boys who have just joined, sir. Tom Scudamore,
+they call him."
+
+"I guessed as much," Captain Manley laughed; "I knew they would not be
+long here without a fight. Who was the other?"
+
+"Well, sir, I almost thought it must be a mistake when they told me,
+seeing they are so unequally matched, but they all say so, so in
+course it's true--the other was Mitcham, the bugler of No. 3 Company."
+
+"What a shame!" was the general exclamation, while Captain Manley got
+up and called for his cap.
+
+"A brutal shame, I call it," he said hotly. "Mitcham's nearly a man.
+It ought not to have been allowed. I will go and inquire after the
+boy. I will bet five pounds he was pretty nearly killed before he gave
+in."
+
+"He didn't give in, Captain Manley," the servant said. "He won the
+fight. They fought till Mitcham couldn't see, and then young Scudamore
+went up and offered to draw it, but Mitcham acknowledged he was fairly
+licked. It was a close thing, for the boy fainted right off; but he's
+come round now, and says he's all right."
+
+"Hurrah for Eton!" Carruthers shouted enthusiastically. "Hurrah! By
+Jove, he is game, and no mistake. He won a hard fight or two at Eton,
+but nothing like this. I call it splendid."
+
+"The boy might have been killed," the major said gravely; while the
+younger officers joined in Carruthers's exclamation at Tom's pluck.
+"It is shameful that it was allowed. I suppose the quarrel began in
+their quarters. Sergeant Howden is in charge of the room, and ought to
+have stopped it at once. Every non-commissioned officer ought to have
+stopped it. I will have Howden up before the colonel to-morrow."
+
+"I think, major," Captain Manley said, "if you will excuse me, the
+best plan, as far as the boy is concerned, is to take no notice of
+it. As it is, he must have won the hearts of all the regiment by his
+pluck, and if he is not seriously hurt, it is the very best thing, as
+it has turned out, that could have happened. If any one gets into a
+scrape about it, it might lessen the effect of the victory. I think if
+you call Howden up, and give him a quiet wigging, it will do as well,
+and won't injure the boys. What do you think?"
+
+"Yes, you are right, Manley, as it has turned out; but the boy might
+have been killed. However, I won't do more than give Howden a hearty
+wigging, and will then learn how the affair begun. I think, Dr.
+Stathers, that it would be as well if you went round and saw both of
+them. You had better, I think, order them into hospital for the night,
+and then the boy can go to bed at once, and come out again to-morrow,
+if he has, as I hope, nothing worse than a few bruises. Please come
+back, and tell us how you find them."
+
+The report was favorable, and the next morning Tom came out of
+hospital, and took his place as usual, with the party upon the
+ramparts--pale, and a good deal marked, but not much the worse for his
+battle; but it was some days before the swelling of his adversary's
+face subsided sufficiently for him to return to duty.
+
+Tom's victory--as Captain Manley had predicted--quite won the hearts
+of the whole regiment, and the nicknames of "Sir Tom," and "Sir
+Peter"--which had been given to them in jest after Tom's speech
+about Sir Arthur Wellesley--were now generally applied to them. The
+conversation in the mess-room had got about, and the old soldiers who
+had served under Colonel Scudamore would have done anything for the
+lads, although, as yet, they were hardly known personally except to
+the band, as their devotion to work kept them quite apart from the
+men.
+
+It was just three weeks after they had joined before the order came
+for embarkation, and a thrill of pleasure and excitement ran through
+the regiment when it was known that they were to go on board in four
+days. Not the least delighted were Tom and Peter. It had already been
+formally settled that they were to accompany the regiment, and it
+was a proof of the popularity that they had gained, that every one
+looked upon their going as a matter of course, and that no comment
+was excited even among those who were left behind. Three days before
+starting they had met Captain Manley in the barrack-yard, and after
+saluting, Tom said, "If you please, sir, we wanted to ask you a
+question."
+
+"What is that, lads?"
+
+"If you please, sir, we understand that the boys of the band have
+their bags carried for them, but the company buglers carry knapsacks,
+like the men?"
+
+"Yes, boys; the company buglers carry knapsacks and muskets."
+
+"I am afraid we could not carry muskets and do much marching, sir, but
+we have each a brace of pistols."
+
+Captain Manley smiled. "Pistols would not look the thing on a
+parade-ground, boys; but in a campaign people are not very particular,
+and I have no doubt the colonel will overlook any little breach of
+strict uniformity in your cases, as it is evident you can't carry
+muskets. You can use your pistols, I hope," he said with a smile. "Hit
+a penny every time at twenty paces!"
+
+"No, sir, we can't do that," Tom said seriously. "We can hit a
+good-sized apple nineteen times out of twenty."
+
+"The deuce you can!" Captain Manley said. "How did you learn to do
+that?"
+
+"We have practiced twelve shots a day for the last six months, sir. We
+were thinking of asking you, sir, if you would like to carry a brace
+of them through the campaign. They are splendid weapons; and we shall
+only carry one each. They would get rusty and spoil, if we left them
+behind, and we should be very pleased to think they might be useful to
+you, after your great kindness to us."
+
+"It is not a very regular thing, boys," Captain Manley said, "for a
+captain to be borrowing a brace of pistols from two of his buglers;
+but you are exceptional buglers, and there is something in what you
+say about rusting. Besides, it is possible you may lose yours, so I
+will accept your offer with thanks, with the understanding that I will
+carry the pistols, and you shall have them again if anything happens
+to yours. But how about the knapsacks?"
+
+"We were thinking of having two made of the regimental pattern, sir,
+but smaller and lighter, if you think that it would be allowed."
+
+"Well, I think, boys, if you are allowed to carry pistols instead of
+muskets, no great objection will be made as to the exact size of the
+knapsacks. Yes, you can get them made, and I will speak to the colonel
+about it."
+
+"Perhaps," he hesitated, "you may be in want of a little money; do
+not hesitate if you do. I can let you have five pounds, and you
+can pay me," he said with a laugh, "out of your share of our first
+prize-money."
+
+The boys colored hotly.
+
+"No, thank you, Captain Manley; we have plenty of money. Shall we
+bring the pistols to your quarters?"
+
+"Do, lads, I am going in to lunch now, and will be in in half an
+hour."
+
+The boys at once went out and ordered their knapsacks. They had just
+sold their watches, which were large, handsome, and of gold, and had
+been given to them by their father when they went to Eton. They were
+very sorry to part with them, but they agreed that it would be folly
+to keep gold watches when the twenty pounds which they obtained for
+them would buy two stout and useful silver watches and would leave
+them twelve pounds in money. They then returned to barracks, took out
+a brace of their pistols, carefully cleaned them, and removed the
+silver plates upon the handles, and then walked across to Captain
+Manley's quarters.
+
+Rather to their surprise and confusion they found five or six other
+officers there, for Captain Manley had mentioned at lunch to the
+amusement of his friends that he was going to be unexpectedly provided
+with a brace of pistols, and several of them at once said that they
+would go up with him to his quarters, as they wanted to see the boys
+of whom they had spoken so much during the last fortnight. Tom and
+Peter drew themselves up and saluted stiffly.
+
+"You need not be buglers here, boys," Captain Manley said. "This is
+my room, we are all gentlemen, and though I could not, according
+to the regulations, walk down the street with you, the strictest
+disciplinarian would excuse my doing as I like here."
+
+The boys flushed with pleasure at Captain Manley's kind address, and
+as he finished Carruthers stepped forward and shook them warmly by the
+hand.
+
+"How are you both?" he said. "You have not forgotten me, I hope."
+
+"I had not seen you before. I did not know you were in the regiment,
+Carruthers," the boys said warmly, pleased to find a face they
+had known before; and then breaking off:--"I beg your pardon--Mr.
+Carruthers."
+
+"There are no misters here as far as I am concerned, Scudamore. There
+were no misters at Eton. This is a change, isn't it? Better than
+grinding away at Greek by a long way. Well, I congratulate you on your
+fight. You showed there was some good in dear old Eton still. I wish
+you had let me know it was coming off. I would have given anything
+to have seen it--from a distance, you know. If it had been the right
+thing, I would have come and been your backer."
+
+There was a general laugh, and then the officers all began to talk to
+the boys. They were quiet and respectful in their manners, and fully
+confirmed the favorable report which Captain Manley had given of them.
+
+"Where are the pistols, boys?" their friend asked presently.
+
+"Here, sir," and the boys produced them from under their jackets. "We
+have no case, sir; we were obliged to leave it behind us when we--"
+
+"Ran away," one of the officers said, laughing.
+
+"They are a splendid pair of pistols," Captain Manley said, examining
+them; "beautifully finished, and rifled. They look quite new, too,
+though, of course, they are not."
+
+"They are new, sir," Tom said; "we have only had them six months, and
+they were new then."
+
+"Indeed," Captain Manley said surprised; "I thought, of course, they
+were family pistols. Why, how on earth, if it is not an impertinent
+question, did you boys get hold of two brace of such pistols as these?
+I have no right to ask the question, boys. I see there has been a
+plate on the handles. But you said you had no relations, and I was
+surprised into asking."
+
+The boys colored.
+
+"The question was quite natural, sir; the pistols were presented to us
+by some people we traveled with once; we took the plates off because
+they made a great fuss about nothing, and we thought that it would
+look cockey."
+
+There was a laugh among the officers at the boys' confusion.
+
+"No one would suspect you of being cockey, Scudamore," Captain Manley
+said kindly; "come, let me see the plates."
+
+The boys took the little silver plates from their pockets and handed
+them silently to Captain Manley, who read aloud, to the surprise of
+those around him,--"'To Tom' and 'Peter,' they are alike except the
+names. 'To Tom Scudamore, presented by the passengers in the Highflyer
+coach on the 4th of August, 1808, as a testimony of their appreciation
+of his gallant conduct, by which their property was saved from
+plunder.' Why, what is this, you young pickles, what were you up to on
+the 4th of August last year?"
+
+"There was nothing in it at all, sir," Tom said; "we were on the coach
+and were stopped by highwaymen. One of the passengers had pistols,
+but was afraid to use them, and hid them among the boxes. So when the
+passengers were ordered to get down to be searched, we hid ourselves,
+and when the highwaymen were collecting their watches, Peter shot one,
+and I drove the coach over another. The matter was very simple indeed;
+but the passengers saved their money, so made a great fuss about it."
+
+There was much laughter over Tom's statement, and then he had to
+give a detailed account of the whole affair, which elicited many
+expressions of approval.
+
+"It does you credit, boys," Captain Manley said, "and shows that you
+are cool as well as plucky. One quality is as valuable as the other.
+There is every hope that you will do the regiment credit, boys, and
+you may be sure that we shall give you every chance. And now good-bye
+for the present."
+
+"Good-bye, sir," Tom and Peter again drew themselves up, gave the
+military salute, and went off to their comrades.
+
+For when the order came to prepare for the embarkation, both Spanish
+and bugling were given up, and the boys entered into the pleasure
+of the holiday with immense zest. They had no regimental duties to
+perform beyond being present at parade. They had no packing to do, and
+fewer purchases to make. A ball or two of stout string, for, as Peter
+said, string is always handy, and a large pocket-knife, each with
+a variety of blades, were the principal items. They had a ring put
+to the knives, so that they could sling them round the waist. They
+had, therefore, nothing to do but to amuse themselves, and this they
+did with a heartiness which astonished the other boys, and proved
+conclusively that they did not want to be unsociable. They hired a
+boat for a sail and took five or six other boys across to Ryde, only
+just returning in time for tattoo, and they played such a number of
+small practical jokes, such as putting a handful of peas into the
+bugles and other wind instruments, that the band-master declared that
+he thought that they were all bewitched, and he threatened to thrash
+the boys all round, because he could not find out who had done it.
+
+Especially angry was the man who played the big drum. This was a
+gigantic negro, named Sam, a kind-hearted fellow, constantly smiling,
+except when the thought of his own importance made him assume a
+particularly grave appearance. He was a general favorite, although the
+boys were rather afraid of him, for he was apt to get into a passion
+if any jokes were attempted upon him, and of all offences the greatest
+was to call him Sambo. Now none of the men ventured upon this, for
+when he first joined, Sam had fought two or three desperate battles on
+this ground, and his great strength and the insensibility of his head
+to blows had invariably given him the victory. But, treated with what
+he conceived proper respect, Sam was one of the best-tempered and
+best-natured fellows in the regiment; and he himself, when he once
+cooled down, was perfectly ready to join in the laugh against himself,
+even after he had been most put out by a joke.
+
+The day before the regiment was to embark, the officers gave a lawn
+party; a large number of ladies were present, and the band was, of
+course, to play. The piece which the bandmaster had selected for the
+commencement began with four distinct beats of the big drum. Just
+before it began, Captain Manley saw Tom and Peter, who with some of
+the other boys had brought the music-stands into the ground, with
+their faces bright with anticipated fun.
+
+"What is the joke, boys?" he asked good-humoredly, as he passed them.
+
+"I can't tell you, sir," Tom said; "but if you walk up close to the
+band, and watch Sam's face when he begins, you will be amused, I
+think."
+
+"Those are regular young pickles," Captain Manley said to the lady
+he was walking with; "they are Etonians who have run away from home,
+and are up to all kinds of mischief, but are the pluckiest and most
+straightforward youngsters imaginable. I have no doubt that they are
+up to some trick with our black drummer."
+
+On their way to where the band was preparing to play, Captain Manley
+said a word or two to several of the other officers, consequently
+there was quite a little party standing watching the band when their
+leader lifted his baton for the overture to begin.
+
+There was nothing that Sam liked better than for the big drum to
+commence, and with his head thrown well back and an air of extreme
+importance, he lifted his arm and brought it down with what should
+have been a sounding blow upon the drum. To his astonishment and to
+the surprise of all the band, no deep boom was heard, only a low
+muffled sound. Mechanically Sam raised his other arm and let it fall
+with a similar result. Sam looked a picture of utter astonishment and
+dismay, with his eyes opened to their fullest, and he gave vent to a
+loud cry, which completed the effect produced by his face, and set
+most of those looking on, and even the band themselves, into a roar of
+laughter. Sam now examined his sticks, they appeared all right to the
+eye, but directly he felt them his astonishment was turned into rage.
+They were perfectly soft. Taking out his knife he cut them open, and
+found that the balls were merely filled with a wad of soft cotton, the
+necessary weight being given by pieces of lead fastened round the end
+of the stick inside the ball with waxed thread.
+
+Sam was too enraged to say more than his usual exclamation of
+astonishment, "Golly!" and he held out his drumsticks to be examined
+with the face of a black statue of surprise.
+
+Even the band-master was obliged to laugh as he took the sticks from
+Sam's hand to examine them.
+
+"These are not your sticks at all, Sam," he said, looking closely at
+them. "Here, boy," he called to Tom, who might have been detected from
+the fact of his being the only person present with a serious face,
+"run to the band-room and see if you can find the sticks."
+
+In a few minutes Tom returned with the real drumsticks, which, he
+said truly, he had found on the shelf where they were usually kept.
+After that things went on as usual; Sam played with a sulky fury. His
+dignity was injured, and he declared over and over again that if he
+could "find de rascal who did it, by jingo, I pound him to squash!"
+and there was no doubt from his look that he thoroughly meant what he
+said. However, no inquiries could bring to light the author of the
+trick.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+OVERBOARD.
+
+
+There were no lighter hearts than those of Tom and Peter Scudamore
+on board the transport "Nancy," as, among the hearty cheers of the
+troops on board, and the waving of hats and handkerchiefs from friends
+who had come out in small boats to say good-bye for the last time,
+she weighed anchor, and set sail in company with some ten or twelve
+other transports, and under convoy of two ships of war. It would be
+difficult to imagine a prettier scene. The guns fired, the bands of
+the various regiments played, and the white sails opened out bright
+in the sun as the sailors swarmed into the rigging, anxious to outvie
+each other. Even the soldiers pulled and hauled at the ropes, and ran
+round with the capstan bars to get the anchors apeak. Tom and Peter,
+of course, had, like the other boys, got very much in the way in their
+desire to assist, and, having been once or twice knocked over by the
+rush of men coming along with ropes, they wisely gave it up, and
+leaned over the side to enjoy the scene.
+
+"This is splendid, Tom, isn't it?"
+
+"Glorious, Peter; but it's blowing pretty strong. I am afraid that we
+sha'n't find it quite so glorious when we get out of the shelter of
+the island."
+
+Peter laughed. "No; I suppose we sha'n't all look as jolly as we do
+now by night-time. However, the wind is nor'-westerly, which will help
+us along nicely, if, as I heard one of the sailors say just now, it
+does not go round to the south."
+
+"Bugler, sound companies one, two, and three to breakfast."
+
+The order interrupted the conversation, and, for the next hour,
+the boys had little time for talk. Half the regiment was on board
+the "Nancy," and, after breakfast, the men were divided into three
+watches, of which one was always to be on deck, for the ship was very
+crowded, and there was scarcely room for all the men to be below
+together. The boys were in the same watch, for the day previous to
+starting Tom had been appointed bugler to the 2d Company, Peter to the
+3d. The 1st Company, or Grenadiers, were in the watch with the band,
+the 2d and 3d Companies were together, and the 4th and 5th.
+
+Tom was very ill for the first two days of the voyage, while Peter did
+not feel the slightest effects from the motion. Upon the third day the
+wind dropped suddenly, and the vessels rolled heavily in the swell,
+with their sails flapping against the masts. Tom came up that morning
+upon deck feeling quite well again, and the boys were immensely amused
+at seeing the attempts of the soldiers to move about, the sudden
+rushes, and the heavy falls. A parade had been ordered to take place;
+but as no one could have stood steady without holding on, it was
+abandoned as impossible. The men sat about under the bulwarks, and a
+few amused themselves and the rest by trying to play various games,
+such as laying a penny on the deck, and seeing which would pitch
+another to lay nearest to it, from a distance of five yards. The
+difficulty of balancing oneself in a heavily rolling vessel, and of
+pitching a penny with any degree of accuracy, is great, and the manner
+in which the coins, instead of coming down flat and remaining there,
+rolled away into the scuppers, the throwers not unfrequently following
+them, produced fits of laughter.
+
+Tom was still feeling weak from his two days' illness, and was not
+disposed actively to enter into the fun; but Peter enjoyed the heavy
+rolling, and was all over the ship. Presently he saw Sam, the black
+drummer, sitting in a dark corner below quietly asleep; his cap was
+beside him, and the idea at once occurred to Peter that here was a
+great opportunity for a joke. He made his way to the caboose, and
+begged the cook to give him a handful of flour. The cook at first
+refused, but was presently coaxed into doing so, and Peter stole to
+where Sam was asleep, and put the flour into his cap, relying that, in
+the darkness, Sam would put it on without noticing it. Then, going up
+to the deck above, Peter put his head down the hatchway, and shouted
+loudly, "Sam!"
+
+The negro woke at the sound of his name. "What is it?" he asked.
+Receiving no reply, he got on to his feet, muttering, "Some one call
+Sam, that for certain, can't do without Sam, always want here, want
+there. I go up and see."
+
+So saying, he put on his cap, and made his way up to the upper deck.
+As he stood at the hatchway and looked round, there was, first a
+titter, and then a roar of laughter from the men sitting or standing
+along by the bulwarks. In putting on his cap some of the flour had
+fallen out, and had streaked his face with white. Sam was utterly
+unconscious that he was the object of the laughter, and said to one of
+the men nearest to him, "Who call Sam?"
+
+The man could not reply, but Tom, who was sitting close by, said, "It
+was no one here, Sam, it must have been the bandmaster; there he is,
+close to the quarter-deck."
+
+Sam made his way along towards the point indicated, and as he did so
+some of the officers upon the quarter-deck caught sight of him. "Just
+look at Sambo," Carruthers exclaimed, "somebody has been larking with
+him again. Look how all the men are laughing, and he evidently has no
+suspicion of the figure he is."
+
+The sergeant, who, the bandmaster having remained at the depôt, was
+now acting as chief of the band, did not see Sam until the latter was
+close to him. "You want me, sergeant?"
+
+Sergeant Wilson looked up, and was astonished.
+
+"What on earth have you been doing to yourself, Sam?" he asked.
+
+"Me been having little nap down below," Sam said.
+
+"Yes; but your face, man. What have you been doing to your face?"
+
+Sam, in his turn, looked astonished. "Nothing whatsomeber, sargeant."
+
+"Take off your cap, man, and look inside it." Sam did as ordered; and
+as he removed the cap, and the powder fell from it all over his face
+and shoulders, there was a perfect shout of laughter from the soldiers
+and crew, who had been looking on, and the officers, looking down from
+the rail of the quarter-deck, retired to laugh unnoticed.
+
+The astonishment and rage of Sam were unbounded, and he gave a perfect
+yell of surprise and fury. He stamped wildly for a minute or two, and
+then, with a sudden movement rushed up on to the quarter-deck with
+his cap in his hand. The colonel, who was holding on by the shrouds,
+and talking with the major, in ignorance of what was going on, was
+perfectly astounded at this sudden vision of the irate negro, and
+neither he nor the major could restrain their laughter.
+
+"Scuse me, colonel, sah, for de liberty," Sam burst out; "but look at
+me, sah; is dis right, sah, is it right to make joke like dis on de
+man dat play de big drum of de regiment?"
+
+"No, no, Sam; not at all right," the colonel said, with difficulty.
+"If you report who has played the trick upon you, I shall speak to him
+very seriously; but, Sam, I should have thought that you were quite
+big enough to take the matter in your own hands."
+
+"Me big enough, Massah Colonel, me plenty big; but me not able to find
+him."
+
+"Well, Sam, it is carrying a joke too far; still, it is only a trick
+off duty, and I am afraid that it is beyond my power to interfere."
+
+Sam thought for a moment, and, having by this time cooled down from
+his first paroxysm of rage, he said, "Beg pardon, massa, you quite
+right, no business of any one but Sam; but Sam too angry to 'top to
+think. Scuse liberty, colonel," and Sam retired from the quarter-deck,
+and made a bolt below down the nearest hatchway, when he plunged his
+head into a bucket of water, and soon restored it to its usual ebony
+hue.
+
+Then he went to the cook and tried to find out to whom he had given
+flour, but the cook replied at once, "Lor, I've given flour to the men
+of each mess to make puddings of, about thirty of them," and Sam felt
+as far off as ever.
+
+Presently, however, a big sailor began to make fun of him, and Sam
+retorted by knocking him down, after which there was a regular fight,
+which was carried on under the greatest difficulty, owing to the
+rolling of the ship. At last Sambo got the best of it, and this
+restored him so thoroughly to a good temper that he was able to join
+in the laugh at himself, reserving, however, his right to "knock de
+rascal who did it into a squash."
+
+The following day the weather changed, a wind sprang up nearly from
+the north, which increased rapidly, until toward afternoon it was
+blowing half a gale, before which the whole fleet, with their main
+and topsails set, ran southward at great speed. A heavy cross sea was
+running, the wares raised by the gale clashing with the heavy swell
+previously rolling in from the westward, and so violent and sudden
+were the lurches and rolls of the "Nancy" that the master feared that
+her masts would go.
+
+"How tremendously she rolls, Tom."
+
+"Tremendously; the deck seems almost upright, and the water right
+under our feet each time she goes over. She feels as if she were going
+to turn topsy-turvy each roll. It's bad enough on deck; but it will be
+worse down below."
+
+"A great deal worse, Peter, it's nearly dark already; it will strike
+eight bells in a minute or two, and then we shall have to go down.
+There's no danger, of course, of the ship turning over, but it won't
+be pleasant down below. Look out, Peter!"
+
+The exclamation was caused by an awful crash. The ship had given a
+tremendous lurch, when the long-boat, which was stowed amidships,
+suddenly tore away from its fastenings and came crashing down.
+It passed within three feet of where the boys were sitting, and
+completely tore away the bulwark, leaving a great gap in the side,
+where it had passed through. "Look, Tom, Sam's overboard!" Peter
+exclaimed.
+
+Sam had been sitting on the bulwark, a few feet from them, holding on
+by a shroud, when the boat came down upon him; with a cry he had let
+go of the shroud and started back, falling into the water just as the
+boat struck the bulwark. "There he is, Tom," Peter said, as he saw the
+black only a few yards from the side. "He is hurt, come on," catching
+up the end of a long rope coiled up on the deck close to their feet,
+the boys jumped overboard together. A dozen strokes took them up to
+Sam; but the black hull of the ship had already glanced past them.
+They could hear loud shouts, but could not distinguish a word.
+
+"Quick, round him, Peter!" and, in a moment, the boys twisted the rope
+round the body of the black, and knotted it just as the drag of the
+ship tightened it. Thus Sam's safety was secured, but the strain was
+so tremendous as they tore through the water, that it was impossible
+for the boys to hold on, and, in a moment, they were torn from their
+hold.
+
+"All right, Peter," Tom said cheerily, as they dashed the water from
+their eyes, "there is the boat."
+
+The remains of the boat were not ten yards distant, and in a few
+strokes they had gained it. It was stove in and broken, but still held
+together, floating on a level with the water's edge. With some trouble
+the boys got inside her, and sat down on the bottom, so that their
+heads were just out of water.
+
+Then they had time to look round. The ship was already disappearing in
+the gathering darkness.
+
+"This boat will soon go to pieces, Tom," was Peter's first remark.
+
+"I expect it will, Peter; but we must stick to its pieces. We had
+better get off our boots. The water is pretty warm, that's one
+comfort."
+
+"Do you think the ship will come back for us, Tom?"
+
+"I don't think she can, Peter; at any rate, it is certain she can't
+find us, it would take a long time to bring her round, and then, you
+see, she could not sail straight back against the wind."
+
+"Look here, Tom, I remember when I climbed up to look into the boats
+yesterday that there were some little casks lashed under the seats,
+and a sailor told me they were always kept full of water in case the
+boats were wanted suddenly. If they are still there we might empty
+them out, and they could keep us afloat any time."
+
+"Hurrah! Peter, capital, let's see."
+
+To their great delight the boys found four small water-kegs fastened
+under the seats. Three of these they emptied, and fastening one of
+them to that which they had left full, and then each taking hold of
+one of the slings which were fastened to the kegs for convenience of
+carriage, they waited quietly. In less than ten minutes from the time
+when they first gained their frail refuge, a great wave broke just
+upon them, and completely smashed up the remains of the boat. They had
+cut off some rope from the mast, which they found with its sail furled
+ready for use in the boat, and now roughly lashed themselves together,
+face to face, so that they had a keg on each side. They had also
+fastened a long piece of rope to the other kegs, so that they would
+float near them.
+
+It was a long and terrible night for them, generally their heads and
+chests were well above the water, but at times a wave would break with
+its white crest, and, for a time, the foam would be over their heads.
+Fortunately the water was warm, and the wind fell a good deal. The
+boys talked occasionally to each other, and kept up each other's
+courage. Once or twice, in spite of the heavy sea, they were so much
+overcome with exhaustion that they dozed uneasily for a while, with
+their heads upon each other's shoulders, and great was their feeling
+of relief and pleasure when morning began to break.
+
+"It is going to be a splendid day, Peter, and the wind is dropping
+fast."
+
+"Look, Tom," Peter said, "there are some of the planks of the boat
+jammed in with the kegs."
+
+It was as Peter said; the two kegs, one empty and the other full, were
+floating about ten yards off, at the length of the rope by which they
+were attached to the boys, while with them was a confused mass of
+wreckage of the boat.
+
+"That is capital, Peter, we will see if we can't make a raft
+presently."
+
+As the sun rose and warmed the air, the boys strength and spirits
+revived, and in a few hours they were so refreshed that they
+determined to set about their raft. The wind had now entirely dropped,
+the waves were still very high, but they came in long, smooth, regular
+swells, over which they rose and fell almost imperceptibly.
+
+"They must be rolling a good deal more in the 'Nancy' than we are
+here, Peter. Now, the first thing is to have a drink. What a blessing
+it is we have water." With their knives they soon got the bung out of
+the water-keg, and each took a long drink, and then carefully closed
+it up again.
+
+"There, Peter, we have drunk as much as we wanted this time; but we
+must be careful, there is no saying how long we may be before we are
+picked up. Hurrah, Peter, here are the masts and sails, so we shall
+have plenty of cord."
+
+It took the boys nearly three hours to complete their task to their
+satisfaction. When it was concluded they had the three empty kegs
+lashed in a triangle about five feet apart, while two planks crossing
+the triangle, assisted to keep all firm and tight; floating in the
+center of the triangle was the keg of water. "There, I don't think
+we can improve that, Peter," Tom said at last, "now, let us get on
+and try it." They did so, and, to their great delight, found that
+it floated a few inches above water. "We may as well get the masts
+on board, Peter, and let the sails tow alongside. They may come in
+useful; and now the first thing is to dry ourselves and our clothes."
+
+The clothes were soon spread out to dry, and the boys luxuriated in
+the warmth of the sun.
+
+"What great, smooth waves these are, Tom, sometimes we are down in a
+valley which runs miles long, and then we are up on a hill."
+
+"Here we lay, all the day, in the bay of Biscay, oh!" Tom laughed.
+"I only hope that the wished-for morrow may bring the sail in sight,
+Peter. However, we can hold on for a few days, I suppose. That is a
+four-gallon keg, so that we have got a quart of water each for eight
+days, and hunger isn't so bad to bear as thirst. We have pretty well
+done for our uniforms, our bugles are the only things that have not
+suffered."
+
+For the boys' companies being on deck at the time of the accident,
+they both had their bugles on when they jumped overboard.
+
+"Our last upset was when that bargee canted us over at Eton, rather a
+different business that, Peter."
+
+"My shirt is not dry yet, Tom; but I shall put it on again, for the
+sun is too hot to be pleasant."
+
+Tom followed Peter's example.
+
+"Do you think, Tom, that we had better try to get up a sort of sail
+and make for land, or remain where we are?"
+
+"Remain where we are, Peter, I should say. I suppose we must be a
+hundred miles from the French coast, and even if the wind blew fair
+we should be a long time getting there, and with the certainty of a
+prison when we arrived. Still, if there were a strong west wind, I
+suppose it would be our best way; as it is we have nothing to do but
+to wait quietly, and hope for a ship. We are in the right line, and
+there must be lots of vessels on their way, besides those which sailed
+with us, for Portsmouth. So we must keep watch and watch. Now, Peter,
+you lie down on that plank, it is just about long enough, you shall
+have two hours' sleep, and then I'll have two, after that we will have
+four hours each."
+
+"How are we to count time?" Peter said laughing.
+
+"I never thought of that," Tom said, looking at his watch. "Of course
+it has stopped. We must guess as near as we can; at any rate, you go
+to sleep first, and, when I am too sleepy to keep watch any longer, I
+will wake you up."
+
+So passed that day and the next night. A light breeze sprung up from
+the southwest, and the sun again shone out brightly.
+
+"I feel as if I wanted breakfast horribly," Peter said, with an
+attempt at a smile. "Do you think that there is any possibility of
+catching anything?"
+
+"We have nothing to make hooks with, Peter, and nothing to bait them
+with if we had."
+
+"There are lots of tiny fish swimming all about, Tom, if we could but
+catch them."
+
+Tom was silent for awhile; then he said, "Look here, Peter. Let us cut
+a piece off the sail about five feet long, and say three feet wide,
+double it longways, and sew up the ends so as to make a bag; we can
+unravel some string, and make holes with our knives. Then we can sink
+it down two or three feet, and watch it; and when we see that some
+little fish have got in it, we can draw it up very gently, and, by
+raising it gradually from the sea, the water will run out, and we
+shall catch the fish."
+
+Peter agreed that at any rate it was worth trying; for, even if it did
+not succeed, it was better for them to be doing something than sitting
+idle. The sail and the floating wreckage were pulled alongside, and
+the boys set to work. In three hours a large and shallow bag was made,
+with some improvements upon Tom's original plan. The mouth was kept
+open by two crossed pieces of wood, and four cords from the corners
+were attached to the end of the oar which formed their fishing-rod. At
+last it was finished, and the bag lowered.
+
+To the horror of the boys, it was discovered that it would not sink.
+They were ready to cry with vexation, for the want of food had made
+them feel faint and weak.
+
+"What have we got that is heavy?" Tom asked in despair.
+
+"I have got fourpence in halfpence, Tom, and there are our knives and
+watches."
+
+Their pockets were ransacked, and the halfpence, knives, and watches
+were placed in the bottom of the bag and lowered. Still the wood-work
+kept afloat.
+
+"There are the bugles, Tom," Peter cried in delight. These had been
+fastened to the raft, and were now hastily untied and placed in the
+canvas bag.
+
+It sank now, and the boys lowered it five or six feet, so that they
+could partly see into it. "There are lots of little fish swimming
+about, Tom," Peter said in a whisper. "Some are almost as long as
+one's hand. Do you think that they will go in, Tom?"
+
+"I hope the glitter of the bugles and watches will attract them,
+Peter."
+
+"There, Tom, there--I saw a whole swarm of little ones go in."
+
+"Wait a minute or two, Peter, to let them get well down, and then draw
+up as quietly as possible."
+
+Very cautiously the boys raised the point of their rod until the
+top of the square-mouthed bag was level with the surface; then they
+brought it close to them and looked in, and as they did so gave a
+simultaneous cheer. There, in the bottom of the canvas, two feet below
+them, were a number of little fish moving about. Raising the rod
+still higher, they gradually lifted the net out of the sea, the water
+running quickly off as they did so, and then they proceeded to examine
+their prize.
+
+"We will take out one and one, Peter; give them a nip as you take them
+up, that will kill them." There were two fish of about three inches
+long, another three or four of two inches, and some thirty or forty
+the size of minnows. It was scarcely more than a mouthful each, but
+it was a stay for a moment to their stomachs, and no one ever said a
+thanksgiving with deeper feeling and heartiness than did the boys when
+they had emptied their canvas net.
+
+"We need not be anxious about food now, Peter; if we can catch these
+in five minutes, we can get enough each day to satisfy us. They quench
+the thirst too. We must limit ourselves to half a pint of water a day,
+and we can hold on for a fortnight. We are safe to be picked up before
+that."
+
+All the afternoon and evening the boys continued to let down and draw
+up their net, sometimes bringing in only a few tiny fish, sometimes
+getting half a dozen of the larger kind. By nightfall they had
+satisfied the cravings of hunger, and felt stronger and better. One or
+two sails had been seen during the day, but always at such distances
+that it was evident at once that they could not pass within hail. That
+night, fatigued with their exertions, both laid down and went to sleep
+until morning, and slept more comfortably than before; for they had
+fastened a piece of the sail tightly on the top of the raft, and lay
+softly suspended in that, instead of being balanced upon a narrow and
+uncomfortable plank. They felt new creatures when they woke, pulled
+up their net, had a mouthful of raw fish, took off their clothes, and
+had a swim, and then set to earnestly to fish. The sun was brighter,
+and the fish in consequence kept deeper than upon the preceding day;
+still by evening they had caught enough to take the edge off, if not
+to satisfy, their hunger. The fishing, however, during the last hours
+of daylight was altogether neglected, for behind them they could see
+a sail, which appeared as if it might possibly come close enough to
+observe them. There was still the long, steady swell coming in from
+the Atlantic, and a light breeze was blowing from the north. The boys
+had been so intent upon their fishing, that they had not noticed her
+until she was within nine or ten miles of them. "She will not be up
+for an hour and a half, Peter," Tom said, "and the sun will be down
+long before that. I fear that the chance of their seeing us is very
+small indeed. However, we will try. Let us get the net out of the
+water, and hold it and the oar up. It is possible that some one may
+see the canvas with a telescope before the sun goes down. Take the
+things out of the net."
+
+The oar with the canvas bag was elevated, and the boys anxiously
+watched the course of the vessel. She was a large ship, but they could
+only see her when they rose upon the top of the long smooth waves. "I
+should think that she will pass within a mile of us, Peter," Tom said,
+after half an hour's watching, "but I fear that she will not be much
+closer. How unfortunate she had not come along an hour earlier. She
+would have been sure to see us if it had been daylight. I don't think
+that there is much chance now, for there is no moon. However, thank
+God, we can hold on very well now, and next time we may have better
+luck."
+
+The sun had set more than half an hour before the ship came abreast of
+them. They had evidently not been seen.
+
+"Now, Peter," Tom said, "let us both hallo together; the wind is very
+light, and it is just possible they may hear us."
+
+Again and again the boys shouted, but the ship sailed steadily on.
+Peter dashed the tears aside, and Tom said, with a quiver in his
+voice, "Never mind, Peter; better luck next time, old boy. God has
+been so good to us, that I feel quite confident we shall be saved."
+
+"So do I, Tom," Peter said. "It was only a disappointment for a
+minute. We may as well put the oar down, for my arm and back ache
+holding it."
+
+"Mind how you do it, Peter. If we let the end go through the canvas,
+we shall lose our watches and bugles, and then we shall not be able to
+fish."
+
+"Oh, Tom, the bugles!"
+
+"What, Peter?" Tom said, astonished.
+
+"We can make them hear, Tom, don't you see?"
+
+"Hurrah, Peter! so we can. What a fool I was to forget it!"
+
+In a moment the bugles rang out the assembly across the water. Again
+and again the sharp, clear sound rose on the quiet evening air.
+
+"Look, Peter, there are men going up the rigging to look round. Sound
+again!"
+
+Again and again they sounded the call, and then they saw the ship's
+head come round, and her bow put towards them, and then they fell on
+their knees and thanked God that they were saved.
+
+In ten minutes the ship was close to them, thrown up into the wind, a
+boat was lowered, and in another minute or two was alongside.
+
+"Hallo!" the officer in charge exclaimed, "two boys, all alone. Here,
+help them in, lads--that's it; now pull for the ship. Here, boys, take
+a little brandy from this flask. How long have you been on that raft?"
+
+"It is three days since we went overboard, sir; but we were in the
+water for about eighteen hours before we made the raft."
+
+Tom and Peter drank a little brandy, and felt better for it; but they
+were weaker than they thought, for they had to be helped up the side
+of the ship. A number of officers were grouped round the gangway, and
+the boys saw that they were on board a vessel of war.
+
+"Only these boys?" asked the captain in surprise of the officer who
+had brought them on board.
+
+"That is all, sir."
+
+"Doctor, you had better see to them," the captain said. "If they are
+strong enough to talk, after they have had some soup, let them come
+to my cabin; if not, let them turn in in the sick bay, and I will see
+them in the morning. One question though, boys. Are there any others
+about--any one for me to look for or pick up?"
+
+"No one else, sir," Tom said, and then followed the doctor aft. A
+basin of soup and a glass of sherry did wonders for the boys, and in
+an hour they proceeded to the captain's cabin, dressed in clothes
+which the doctor had borrowed from two of the midshipmen for them,
+for their own could never be worn again; indeed, they had not brought
+their jackets from the raft, those garments having shrunk so from the
+water, that the boys had not been able to put them on again, after
+first taking them off to dry.
+
+The doctor accompanied them, and in the captain's cabin they found the
+first lieutenant, who had been in charge of the boat which picked them
+up.
+
+"I am glad to see you looking so much better," the captain said as
+they entered. "Sit down. Do you know," he went on with a smile, "I
+do not think that any of us would have slept had you not recovered
+sufficiently to tell your story to-night. We have been puzzling over
+it in vain. How you two boys came to be adrift alone on a raft, made
+up of three water-kegs, as Mr. Armstrong tells me, and how you came to
+have two bugles with you on the raft, is altogether beyond us."
+
+"The last matter is easily explained, sir," Tom said. "My brother and
+myself are buglers in H.M.'s Regiment of Norfolk Rangers, and as we
+were on duty when we went overboard, we had our bugles slung over our
+shoulders."
+
+"Buglers!" the captain said in surprise. "Why from your appearance and
+mode of expressing yourselves, I take you to be gentlemen's sons."
+
+"So we are, sir," Tom said quietly, "and I hope gentlemen--at any
+rate we have been Etonians. But we have lost our father, and are now
+buglers in the Rangers."
+
+"Well, lads," the captain said after a pause, "and now tell us how you
+came upon this little raft?"
+
+Tom related modestly the story of their going overboard from the
+"Nancy," of the formation of the raft, and of their after proceedings.
+Their hearers were greatly astonished at the story; and the captain
+said, "Young gentlemen, you have done a very gallant action, and have
+behaved with a coolness and bravery which would have done credit to
+old sailors. Had your father been alive he might have been proud
+indeed of you. I should be proud had you been my sons. If you are
+disposed to change services I will write directly we reach the Tagus
+to obtain your discharge, and will give you midshipmen's berths on
+board this ship. Don't answer now; you can think it over by the time
+we reach Portugal. I will not detain you now; a night's rest will set
+you up. Mr. Armstrong will introduce you to the midshipmen to-morrow;
+you are passengers here now, and will mess with them. Good-night."
+
+It was not many minutes before the boys were asleep in their hammocks.
+If people's ears really tingle when they are being spoken about,
+Tom and Peter would have had but little sleep that night. The first
+lieutenant related the circumstances to the other lieutenants; the
+second lieutenant, whose watch it was, told the gunner, who related
+it to the petty officers; the doctor told his mates, who retailed the
+story to the midshipmen; and so gradually it went over the whole ship,
+and officers and men agreed that it was one of the pluckiest and
+coolest things ever done.
+
+The boys slept until nearly breakfast time, and were just dressed when
+Mr. Armstrong came for them and took them to the midshipmen's berth,
+where they were received with a warmth and heartiness which quite
+surprised them. The midshipmen and mates pressed forward to shake
+hands with them, and the stiflingly close little cock-pit was the
+scene of an ovation. The boys were quite glad when the handshaking was
+over, and they sat down to the rough meal which was then usual among
+midshipmen. As the vessel had only left England four days before,
+the fare was better than it would have been a week later, for there
+was butter, cold ham and tongue upon the table. After breakfast they
+were asked to tell the story over again, and this they did with great
+modesty. Many questions were asked, and it was generally regretted
+that they were not sailors. Upon going up on deck there was quite an
+excitement among the sailors to get a look at them, and the gunner and
+other petty officers came up and shook hands with them heartily, and
+the boys wished from the depths of their hearts that people would not
+make such a fuss about nothing; for, as Tom said to Peter, "Of course
+we should not have jumped overboard if we had thought that we could
+not have kept hold of the rope."
+
+That day they dined in the cabin with the captain, who, after the
+officers present had withdrawn, asked them if they would tell him
+about their past lives. This the boys did frankly, and took the
+opportunity of explaining that they had chosen the army because the
+enemies' fleet having been destroyed, there was less chance of active
+service in the navy than with the army just starting for Lisbon, and
+that their uncle having commanded the regiment that they were in, they
+had entered it, and had received so much kindness that they had fair
+reason to hope that they would eventually obtain commissions. Hence,
+while thanking him most warmly for his offer, they had decided to go
+on in the path that they had chosen.
+
+The captain remarked that, after what they had said, although he
+should have been glad to have them with him, he thought that they had
+decided rightly.
+
+The next morning, when the boys woke, they were surprised at the
+absence of any motion of the vessel, and upon going on deck they found
+that they were running up the Tagus, and that Lisbon was in sight.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+PORTUGAL.
+
+
+The boys were delighted with the appearance of the Tagus, covered as
+it now was with a fleet of transports and merchantmen. As they were
+looking at it, the officer commanding the marines on board, who had
+talked a good deal to them upon the preceding day, came up to them. "I
+thought that you would be in a fix about clothes, my lads," he said.
+"You could not very well join in these midshipman's uniforms, so I set
+the tailor yesterday to cut down a couple of spare suits of my corps.
+The buttons will not be right, but you can easily alter that when you
+join. You had better go below at once and see if the things fit pretty
+well. I have told the tailor to take them to the cock-pit and if they
+do not fit they can alter them at once."
+
+Thanking the officer very much for his thoughtful kindness, and much
+relieved in mind--for they had already been wondering what they should
+do--the boys ran below, and found that the tailor had guessed their
+sizes pretty correctly, aided as he had been by the trousers they
+had worn when they came on board. A few alterations were necessary,
+and these he promised to get finished in a couple of hours. They had
+scarcely gone on deck again when the anchor was let fall, and a boat
+was lowered, in order that the captain might proceed to shore with the
+despatches of which he was the bearer.
+
+Just as he was upon the point of leaving the deck, his eye fell upon
+the boys. "I shall be back again in an hour or two," he said; "do not
+leave until I return. I will find out where your regiment is, and if
+it has marched I will give you a certificate of how I picked you up,
+otherwise you may be stopped on the way, and get into a scrape as two
+boys who have strayed away from their regiment."
+
+So saying, the captain got into his boat and rowed to shore. It was
+one o'clock before he returned. The boys had dinner with the gunroom
+officers, then changed their dress, and had now the appearance of
+buglers in the marines.
+
+The captain at once sent for them. "Your regiment went on yesterday
+with the rest of the division. It halts to-day ten miles out of the
+town. There is the certificate I spoke of. Mr. Armstrong is just going
+off with two boats' crew to assist in unloading stores; I have asked
+him to hand you over to the charge of some officer going up with a
+convoy. And now good-bye, lads. I wish you every luck, and hope that
+some day or other you may win your epaulets."
+
+With renewed thanks for his kindness, the boys went up on deck. There
+they shook hands and said good-bye to all the officers and midshipmen.
+As they were waiting while the boats were being lowered, two of the
+sailors went aft to the captain, who had come up from below and was
+walking alone on the quarter-deck, and, with a touch of the hat, the
+spokesman said, "Your honor, we're come to ax as how, if your honor
+has no objection, we might just give a parting cheer to those 'ere
+youngsters."
+
+"Well, Jones," the captain said, smiling, "it's rather an unusual
+thing for the crew of one of His Majesty's ships to cheer two young
+soldiers."
+
+"It is unusual, your honor, mighty unusual, because soldiers ain't in
+general of much account at sea; but you see, your honor, this ain't a
+usual circumstance, nohow. These here boys, which ain't much more than
+babbies, have done what there ain't many men, not even of those who
+are born and bred to the sea, would have done; and we should just like
+to give them a bit of a cheer for good luck."
+
+"Very well, Jones, tell the men they can do as they like."
+
+Accordingly, as the boys took their seats in the boat they were
+surprised at seeing the crew clustering to the side of the ship, while
+some of the men ran up the rigging.
+
+"What can the men be up to?" Tom asked Mr. Armstrong in surprise.
+
+The lieutenant smiled, for he knew what was coming.
+
+"Sheer off, men," he said, and as he did so the boatswain of the ship
+gave the word, "Now, lads, three cheers for them boys; may they have
+the luck they deserve."
+
+Three thundering cheers burst from the whole crew, the men in the
+boats tossing their oars in the naval fashion of acknowledgment of
+the salute. Tom and Peter, astonished and affected, stood up, took
+off their caps, and waved their hands in thanks to the crowd of faces
+looking down upon them, and then sat down again and wiped their eyes.
+
+"Row on," the lieutenant said, and the oars fell in the water with
+a splash; one more cheer arose, and then the boats rowed for the
+landing-place. The boys were too much affected to look up or speak,
+until they reached the shore, nor did they notice a boat which rowed
+past them upon its way to the vessel they had left, just after they
+had started. It contained an officer in a general's uniform. The boat
+steered to the ship's side, and the officer ascended the ladder. The
+captain was on deck. "Ah, Craufurd," he said, "this is an unexpected
+pleasure."
+
+"I have just come back from my division for a few hours, Merivale;
+there are a lot of stores which are essential, and some of my
+artillery is not landed, so I thought I could hurry things up a bit.
+My spare charger, and most of the chargers of my staff, are being
+landed, too; the ship they came in was a day or two late; and as I had
+to confer with the Portuguese Minister of War, I am killing a good
+many birds with one stone. I heard you had just come in, and as I was
+on board the "Clio" about my charger, I thought it would not be much
+out of my way to run round and shake hands with you."
+
+"I am very glad you did. Come into my cabin; you can spare time to
+take some lunch, I hope."
+
+While they were at lunch General Craufurd remarked, "So you have just
+lost one of your officers, I see; promoted to another ship, eh?"
+
+"Lost an officer!" Captain Merivale said in surprise. "No, not that I
+have heard of. What makes you think so?"
+
+"I thought so by the cheering the ship's crew gave that boat that left
+the ship just before I came up. There was only a naval lieutenant in
+her, and I supposed that he had just got his ship, and I thought by
+the heartiness of the cheering what a good fellow he must be."
+
+"But it was not the lieutenant the men were cheering," Captain
+Merivale said with a smile.
+
+"No!" General Craufurd said, surprised. "Why, there was no one else
+in the boat. I looked attentively as I passed. There was only a
+lieutenant, a midshipman who was steering, the men rowing, and two
+little marine buglers, who had their handkerchiefs up to their faces.
+So you see I took a very minute survey."
+
+"You did indeed," Captain Merivale said, laughing. "Well, it was just
+these little buglers that the crew of the ship were cheering."
+
+General Craufurd looked up incredulously. "You're joking, Merivale.
+The crew of His Majesty's frigate 'Latona' cheer two buglers of
+marines! No, no, that won't do."
+
+"It is a fact, though, Craufurd, unlikely as it seems, except that the
+buglers belong to the Norfolk Rangers, and not to the Marines."
+
+"The Rangers! They are in Hill's division. What is it all about? There
+must be something very strange about it."
+
+"There is indeed," Captain Merivale said, "very strange." And he then
+related the whole story to his visitor.
+
+"They are trumps indeed," the general said when the narrative was
+ended, "and I am very glad that I happened to hear it. I will speak to
+Hill about it, and will keep my eye upon them. Be assured they shall
+have their epaulets as soon as possible--that is, if their conduct is
+at all equal to their pluck. It is the least we can do when, as you
+say, they have refused midshipmen's berths to stick to us. And now I
+must be off."
+
+The boat landed General Craufurd at the same landing-place at which
+Tom and Peter had disembarked half an hour before. Lieutenant
+Armstrong had spoken a few words to the officer who was superintending
+the landing of stores and horses, and he, being far too busy to stop
+to talk, briefly said that the boys could go up to join their regiment
+with a convoy of stores which would start that night.
+
+After saying good-bye to their friend the lieutenant, the boys sat
+down upon some bales, and were watching with much amusement and
+interest the busy scene before them. As General Craufurd passed they
+rose and saluted.
+
+"You are the boys from the 'Latona,' are you not?"
+
+"Yes, sir," the boys answered in surprise.
+
+"Can you ride?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"Follow me, then."
+
+Much surprised, the boys followed the general until he made his way
+through the confusion to a group of newly landed horses. Near them
+were a couple of mounted Hussars, who, at the sight of the general,
+rode forward with his charger. He made a sign to them to wait a
+moment, and walked up to the men who were holding the newly landed
+horses.
+
+"Which of you have got charge of two horses?"
+
+Several of the men answered at once.
+
+"Which of you are servants of officers on my staff?"
+
+Three of those who had answered before replied now.
+
+"Very well; just put saddles on to two of them. These lads will ride
+them; they are going out with me at once; they will hand them over to
+your masters."
+
+In another five minutes Tom and Peter, to their surprise and
+delight, were clattering along through the streets of Lisbon upon
+two first-rate horses in company with the two Hussars, while, twenty
+lengths ahead, trotted General Craufurd with two officers who had been
+down to Lisbon upon duty similar to his own. Once outside the town,
+the general put his horse into a gallop, and his followers of course
+did the same. Once or twice General Craufurd glanced back to see how
+the boys rode, for a doubt had crossed his mind as to whether he had
+been wise in putting them upon such valuable horses, but when he saw
+that they were evidently accustomed to the work, he paid no further
+attention to them.
+
+The officers riding beside him, however, looked back several times.
+
+"What luck we have, to be sure, Tom," Peter said, "and I can't
+understand this a bit. How could the general know that we came from
+the 'Latona'; as he evidently did, and by the way these officers have
+looked back twice, I can't help thinking that he is talking about us."
+
+Tom was as puzzled as Peter, but they soon forgot the subject, and
+engaged in an animated conversation with the Hussars as to the
+situation and position of the army, and the supposed strength and
+locality of the French, concerning which they were, of course, in
+complete ignorance. An hour and a half's sharp riding took them to
+Torres Vedras, a small town which afterwards became celebrated for
+the tremendous lines which Wellington erected there. The troops were
+encamped in its vicinity, the general having his quarters at the house
+of the Alcalde, or Mayor.
+
+"Your regiment is a mile and a half distant, lads," General Craufurd
+said as they drew up at his quarters; "you will have difficulty in
+finding it this evening. Sergeant, take these lads round to the house
+where my orderlies are quartered, and give them some supper. They can
+join their regiment in the morning. I have heard of you, lads, from
+Captain Merivale, and shall mention your conduct to General Hill, and
+be assured I will keep my eye upon you."
+
+The boys were soon asleep upon a heap of straw, and at six next
+morning were upon the road, having already had some coffee and bread
+for breakfast. They had no difficulty in finding their way, for
+orderlies were already galloping about, and the bugle calls came sharp
+upon their ears. The division was to march at seven. The Rangers
+happened to be the first in advance, so that they passed through the
+other regiments to arrive at theirs.
+
+The tents were down when they arrived, and packed in readiness for the
+bullock carts which stood by. The boys paused a little distance off,
+and looked on with delight at the busy scene. At a note on the bugle
+the tents and other baggage were stowed in the carts, and then the men
+hitched on their knapsacks, unpiled arms, and began to fall into rank.
+
+No one noticed the boys as they passed between the groups and
+approached the band, who were mustering by the colors, which were as
+usual placed in front of the guard tent.
+
+"There's Sambo," Tom said; "I am glad they got him safe on board."
+
+The negro was the first to perceive the boys as they came close up
+to him. As he saw them he gave a sudden start, his eyes opened wider
+and wider until the whites showed all round, his teeth chattered, the
+shiny black of his face turned to a sort of dirty gray, and he threw
+up his hands with a loud cry, "oh, golly, here's dose boys' spirits!"
+
+He stepped back, heedless that the big drum was behind him, and the
+next moment went back with a crash into it, and remained there with
+his knees doubled up and his face looking out between them, too
+frightened and horror-struck to make the least movement to extricate
+himself.
+
+For a moment no one noticed him, for at his cry they had all turned to
+the boys, and stood as if petrified at seeing those whom they believed
+had been drowned before their eyes a week before. The silence did
+not last long, the boys bursting into a shout of laughter at Sam's
+appearance.
+
+"Spirits! Sam," Tom said; "not by a long way yet, man. How are you
+all? Come, get out of that, Sam and shake hands." And as the band with
+a shout crowded round them, the boys helped Sam, who was trembling all
+over from the shock and fright, from the drum.
+
+For a moment the boys were quite confused and bewildered, for as they
+hauled Sam to his feet their comrades of the band pressed round them
+cheering, every one trying to shake them by the hand.
+
+The news spread like wildfire among the troops, and there was at once
+a general rush to the spot. The boys were seized in an instant, and
+each raised on the shoulders of two of the grenadiers, and as they
+made their appearance above the heads of the crowd a tremendous cheer
+broke from the whole regiment.
+
+"What can be the matter?" was the general exclamation of the colonel
+and officers, who were just finishing their breakfasts in a cottage
+which stood close behind the spot where their tents had been pitched
+in the rear of the regiment. "What can be the matter?"--and as the
+cheering continued there was a general rush to the door. There they
+stood astonished at seeing the whole of the men clustered in one spot,
+shouting and waving their caps.
+
+"What can be the matter?" the colonel said again; "the whole regiment
+seems to have gone mad."
+
+"We shall know in a minute," Captain Manley said; "they are coming in
+this direction."
+
+"Look at that fellow Sambo," exclaimed Carruthers; "he looks madder
+than all the rest."
+
+In spite of the intense surprise which all were feeling, there was a
+general laugh, for the black was performing antics like one possessed;
+his cap was gone, he jumped, he yelled, he waved his arms, with a
+drumstick in each hand, wildly over his head, he twisted round and
+round; he seemed really out of his mind. Suddenly he left the crowd,
+and rushed on ahead at full speed towards the group of officers, still
+leaping and yelling and waving his drumsticks.
+
+The officers instinctively drew together as he approached, for they
+thought that the gigantic negro was really out of his mind. He stopped
+suddenly as he came up to them, and tried to fall into his usual
+attitude of attention.
+
+"Oh, Massa Colonel," he said in hoarse, sobbing tones, "only to
+think, only to think. Scuse Sam, sar, but Sam feel he's going to bust
+right up wid joy, massa. Dat no matter, but only to think. Bress de
+Almighty, sar! only to think!"
+
+None of the officers spoke for a minute in answer to these disjointed
+exclamations. They were affected at the man's great emotion. His black
+skin was still strangely pale, his eyes were distended, his lips
+quivered, tears were rolling down his cheeks, and his huge frame was
+shaken with sobs.
+
+"Calm yourself, Sam--be calm, my man," the colonel said kindly. "Try
+and tell us what has happened. What are the men so excited about? What
+is the matter with them?"
+
+"Oh, Massa Colonel," Sam said, "me try tell you all 'boat it. Only to
+think, sar, dose boys cum back again; dose boys, sar, bress dem, dat
+jumped into de water and got drowned just to save dis poor niggar,
+sar. Dey cum back again; only tink ob dat!"
+
+The officers looked at one another in surprise.
+
+"I do believe he means the Scudamores! colonel," Captain Manley
+exclaimed; "but no, it is impossible, no one could have lived five
+minutes in that sea, and we know that they could not have been picked
+up, for we were the last ship in the fleet."
+
+"Yes, yes, sar, dat's dem, dey cum back sure enuff," Sam said.
+
+Then Carruthers exclaimed, "I do believe it is so; there are a couple
+of boys on the shoulders of the men in the middle of the crowd. Yes,
+and, by Jove, it is the Scudamores. Hurrah! I am glad."
+
+There was a general exclamation of pleasure from the whole group, for
+the regret for the boys, who had, as was believed, perished in the
+performance of such a gallant action, had been general and sincere,
+and Captain Manley lifted his cap and said reverently, "Thank God,
+these gallant lads are saved;" and those around, although some of them
+were but little addicted to prayer, repeated the words and imitated
+the action.
+
+Carruthers would have stepped forward in his eagerness to greet his
+former school-fellows, but Captain Manley laid his hand quietly on his
+shoulder and said in a low tone, "Wait, Carruthers, let the colonel
+welcome them."
+
+And now the crowd came up to the cottage, those in front falling back
+as they approached, so as to let the grenadiers come forward with
+their burden. The boys were lowered to the ground, and stood at once
+at attention; their faces were both flushed with excitement, and their
+eyes swollen with tears, so much were they both moved by the welcome
+which had greeted them.
+
+There was a dead silence for a moment, and then Colonel Tritton said
+in a loud, clear voice, which was heard all over the throng of men, "I
+am glad, lads, to see you back again. I never expected to have seen
+you again after we caught a glimpse of you as the sea washed you away.
+You have seen how the men have welcomed you, and I can assure you
+that the pleasure of the officers that two such gallant young fellows
+should have been saved is no less than that of your comrades. A braver
+act than that which you performed was never done. I shake hands with
+you, and congratulate you in the name of the whole regiment." And,
+suiting the action to the words, Colonel Tritton stepped forward and
+shook the boys warmly by the hand, amidst a great cheer upon the part
+of the whole regiment. Then he held up his hand for silence again.
+"Bugler, sound the assembly; fall in, my lads, or we shall be late.
+Come in here, boys; you can get something to eat, and tell us in a few
+words how you were saved, for, even now that I see you it seems almost
+impossible."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+THE PASSAGE OF THE DUORO--TALAVERA.
+
+
+Very severe was the drill and discipline, and not very abundant was
+the food, and there was a general feeling of pleasure when, by the
+general concentration of the army at Coimbra, it was evident that
+active operations were about to commence. On the 5th of May 9000
+Portuguese, 3000 Germans, and 13,000 British troops were assembled.
+Sir Arthur was already there, and upon the 6th General Beresford
+marched with 10,000 men, and orders were issued for the rest of the
+army to march out early the next day.
+
+The Norfolk Rangers were in high glee that night, and many were the
+tales told by the old soldiers of former engagements in which they
+had taken part. Next morning, at daybreak, the tents were struck, the
+baggage packed, and the wagons loaded. The people of Coimbra came out
+in crowds to see the troops march, and many were the blessings and
+good wishes poured out as the long line wound through the streets of
+the city.
+
+Hill's division was the last, and the rain was pouring down with great
+force by the time they started. The march, however, was not a very
+long one, for Beresford's division, which was to operate upon the
+Upper Duoro, had a long distance to make, and it was necessary that
+all should be ready for simultaneous action. For this purpose the army
+halted the next day, and upon the 9th marched to Aveiro on the River
+Vonga. Here a large flotilla of boats was found, and the Norfolk
+Rangers with two other regiments were ordered to embark at once. The
+Portuguese fishermen entered heart and soul into the business, and in
+perfect silence the little flats were rowed up the lake of Ovar.
+
+The soldiers were greatly crowded in the boats, and were glad, indeed,
+when just as morning dawned they landed at the town of Ovar.
+
+By this movement they were placed upon the right flank of Francheschi,
+the general who commanded the advanced division of the French army.
+Soon after they had landed the French were attacked in front, and
+finding their flank turned, and the whole British force, which they
+had believed to be seven days' march away, in their front, they fell
+back hastily.
+
+To their great disappointment, the Rangers took no share in this the
+first skirmish of the war. But Hill's orders were not to press on the
+enemy's rear. Three days more of marching and skirmishing brought them
+close to the Duoro on the evening of the 11th. The enemy crossed that
+evening and destroyed the bridge, and during the night the British
+troops were all brought up, and massed behind the hill called the
+Serra. This hill stood upon a sharp elbow which the river makes just
+above the town of Oporto, and the British were here completely hidden
+from Marshal Soult, who had no idea that they were so close at hand.
+Indeed, knowing that the bridge was broken and that all the boats
+had been carefully taken over to that side of the river, the Marshal
+dreamt not that Sir Arthur would attempt to cross, but imagined that
+he would take boats lower down near the mouth of the river and there
+endeavor to cross. To prevent such an attempt Soult had massed his
+army below Oporto.
+
+The troops were ordered to pile arms, and eat their breakfast, but to
+keep in position. "I wonder how we are to cross the river, Tom?" Peter
+said. "It is three hundred yards across, with a rapid current, no man
+in the world could swim that, and carry his musket and ammunition
+across."
+
+"I expect Sir Arthur is reconnoitering, Peter; I saw him go up the
+hill to that convent there; he must be able to see from there right
+over Oporto."
+
+An hour passed, and then two or three officers were seen coming down
+from the hill; one went up to General Hill, who happened at that
+moment to be talking to Colonel Tritton. "You are to prepare to cross,
+sir, Colonel Waters has discovered a small boat brought across by a
+Portuguese in the night. They are going to cross to that great convent
+you see upon the other side. They will bring back boats with them, and
+you will cross at once, take possession of the convent, and hold it
+against any force that may be brought against you until reinforcements
+arrive."
+
+Very quickly were the orders passed, and with a smile of satisfaction
+the men took their arms and fell in. They were moved near the river,
+and kept under shelter of some houses.
+
+"Keep near me," Colonel Tritton said to Tom and Peter, "I may want you
+to carry messages, there will be no sounding of bugles to-day."
+
+Keeping under the shade of some trees so that they could command a
+view of the river without being seen from the opposite side, Colonel
+Tritton with two of his officers and his two buglers, watched what
+was going on. A few paces ahead of them were Generals Paget and Hill,
+like themselves, watching the daring experiment. Behind, under shelter
+of the houses, were the troops in dense masses. The Rangers, as the
+first regiment in General Hill's division, were in front, and would
+naturally be the first to cross. It was a most anxious moment, as
+Colonel Waters and two Portuguese pushed the tiny boat from shore and
+pulled across stream. The bulk of the Serra Hill hid the river at this
+point, and even the convent opposite, from the sight of the French
+army formed up below the town, but there were no doubt stragglers all
+over the city, and the whole baggage of the French army was in retreat
+by the road to Valarga which ran at a short distance behind the
+convent.
+
+Most anxiously their eyes were strained upon the opposite bank, from
+which they expected to see the flash of musketry, as the little boat
+neared the convent. All, however, was as still as death. Behind them
+they heard a rumble, and looking round saw eighteen guns on their way
+up the hill. From this eminence they could command the ground around
+the Seminary, as the convent across the water was called, and thus
+afford some aid to the troops as they crossed.
+
+There was a murmur of satisfaction as the boat neared the opposite
+shore, and after lying still for a moment to reconnoiter the convent,
+pulled boldly up to the landing-place, where its occupants disembarked
+and entered the Seminary. Their absence was not long. In a few minutes
+they reappeared with eight or ten men, and then at once entered and
+cast off three large boats moored along side.
+
+The boys could hardly repress a cheer as they saw them fairly under
+weigh. An officer now left the side of the General, and came to
+Colonel Tritton, "You will get your first company in readiness to
+embark, sir; do not let them show themselves until the last moment."
+
+Colonel Tritton joined his men. "Captain Manley, take your company
+forward, when the first boat touches the shore embark. Let there be no
+noise or confusion."
+
+"God bless you, Peter," Tom said, as they separated; "your company
+won't be many minutes after us;" for the bugler of the first company
+was ill, and Tom was ordered to take his place.
+
+As the boat touched the shore Captain Manley ordered the leading files
+of his company to come from under cover and take their place in the
+boat. Twenty-four men entered, and when the other boats were also full
+Captain Manley took his place, followed by his bugler, and the boats
+pushed off again.
+
+There was a dead silence in the boat, broken only by the sound of
+the oars as the Portuguese tugged manfully at them, each oar being
+double-banked by a soldier. The rest sat with their muskets in their
+hands, their pouches open ready for use, and their eyes fixed upon the
+shore. All was quiet, and with a sigh of relief, and a hearty hurrah
+muttered under their breath, the men leapt from the boat and ran up to
+the Seminary.
+
+It was a large building with a flat roof, and the enclosure around it
+was surrounded by a high wall which swept round to the water's edge
+on either side. The only entrance was through a stout gate studded
+with iron. This was already closed and barred; the captain at once
+distributed his men at the upper windows of the Seminary, with orders
+not to show themselves until the alarm was given.
+
+They had scarcely taken their places when they were joined by the
+occupants of the second boat, while those of the third, in which
+General Paget himself crossed, were but a minute or two later. Just as
+they touched the shore, however, there was a sudden shout heard, this
+was followed by others, and in five minutes a wild hubbub was heard in
+the town. Drums beat to arms, and it was evident that the enemy were
+at last awake to the fact that the British had effected a lodgment
+upon their side of the stream.
+
+"We shall have it hot presently," Captain Manley said to Tom. "They
+will be a quarter of an hour before they can get round here, and we
+shall have the three boats back by that time. The one we came in is
+half-way across already."
+
+Seven or eight minutes later a heavy column of men was seen pouring
+out of the upper gate of the town. As they got into the open ground,
+they threw out clouds of skirmishers, and pushed down towards the
+convent. A heavy fire was at once opened upon them by the English guns
+upon the Serra Hill. There was no longer any need for concealment. The
+soldiers in the convent took their places at the windows, and as they
+did so could hear the loud hurrahs of their comrades as they crowded
+down to the bank upon the other side of the river to await their turn
+to embark. Before the enemy were within musket-shot, three boat loads
+more had been landed, and there were, therefore, 150 men now in the
+convent. From the gates of the city the French artillery came pouring
+out, and, taking up a position upon an eminence, opened fire upon the
+convent just as the infantry had got within musket-range.
+
+So suddenly did the noise of the enemy's cannonade, the crashing of
+the balls against the thick walls of the Seminary, the rattle of the
+enemy's musketry, and the louder roar of the muskets of the defenders,
+blended on both sides with shouts and cheers, break out, that for a
+minute or two Tom felt almost bewildered. He had no time, however, to
+think, for an officer came up to Captain Manley. "The general is up on
+the roof; he wants a bugler sent up to him."
+
+Captain Manley nodded to Tom, who followed the aide-de-camp on to the
+roof. Here he could see all that was passing, and an exciting sight
+it was. Crowds of French soldiers were approaching the wall, keeping
+up a tremendous musketry fire, whilst behind them three batteries of
+field-guns were sending their messengers of death. From every upper
+window of the convent the answering flashes came thick and fast, while
+overhead hummed the shot from the British guns, on the Serra Hill.
+Oporto itself was in a state of uproar. Drums were beating, trumpets
+sounding, bells clanging, while from the house-tops the population,
+men and women, were waving their handkerchiefs to the English,
+gesticulating and making all sorts of pantomimic expression of joy.
+
+Looking at the river behind, Tom saw with pleasure that some more
+boats had been obtained, and that strong reinforcements would soon be
+across. The whistling of the bullets and the hum of the round shot
+were incessant, and Tom acknowledged to himself that he felt horribly
+uncomfortable--much more uncomfortable than he had any idea that he
+should feel under fire. Had he been actively engaged, he would have
+hardly experienced this feeling; but to stand impassive under a heavy
+fire is trying to the nerves of the oldest soldier. He was angry with
+himself that he was not more indifferent to the whizzing of the balls;
+but the sensation of discomfort under fire is beyond the control of
+the will, and it is no unusual thing to see a young soldier who, later
+in the day, may display an almost reckless courage, yet at first
+flinch whenever balls hiss close by him, in spite of all his efforts
+to the contrary. Tom was able, however, to control any outward
+manifestation of his feelings, and took his place a few paces behind
+General Paget, who was standing with one of his officers by his side,
+watching the force which, momentarily increasing, was, in spite of the
+British fire, making its way onward towards the gate.
+
+It was evident that the general considered the danger to be pressing,
+as he once or twice looked back to see how quickly the reinforcements
+were crossing the river. The first time that he did so, his eye fell
+on Tom. "Get behind those big chimneys, lad. There is no use in
+exposing yourself unnecessarily."
+
+Tom obeyed the order with alacrity, and, once in shelter, was soon
+able to bring his nerves under control, and to look round the corner
+of his shelter without flinching when the bullets sang past. In five
+minutes General Hill joined Paget on the roof, and just as he did so
+the latter was severely wounded and fell.
+
+Tom ran forward to assist him, and, kneeling beside him, partially
+supported him until four men came up and carried him below. The
+position of the little garrison was now very precarious, the artillery
+fire concentrated upon them was heavy, and the French swarmed up
+to the wall, which they in vain endeavored to climb. The English
+kept up a tremendous fire upon them, cheering constantly as fresh
+reinforcements arrived, or as the enemy was momentarily repulsed.
+
+Tom had now lost all nervousness, and was standing eagerly watching
+the fight, when a ball knocked his shako off. The general happened to
+turn around at the moment. "That was a narrow escape," he said with a
+smile. "What is your name, lad?"
+
+"Scudamore, sir," Tom answered.
+
+"Scudamore--Scudamore. Yes, I remember the name now. You are one of
+the lads General Craufurd spoke to me about. I want to see you. Come
+to me to-morrow with your brother. Go down now and join your company;
+I do not want you here."
+
+Tom gladly went down, for he longed to be doing something. He soon
+found his company, and, taking up a firelock of one of the men who had
+fallen, was soon hard at work loading and firing into the assailants.
+For an hour the strife continued. Fortunately General Murray had
+found some boats three miles higher up the stream, and had crossed,
+thus menacing the enemy's line of retreat. Suddenly a great pealing
+of bells were heard in Oporto, with shouting and cheering, and the
+house-tops were covered with people waving their handkerchiefs. The
+French were evacuating the town. The inhabitants at once took across
+some large barges to Villa Neva, a suburb lying across the river and
+just below the Serra Hill. Here Sherbrooke began to cross.
+
+It was now the time for the English to take the offensive. There were
+now three battalions in the seminary, and as the French drew sullenly
+off to join the column now flowing steadily out from Oporto along the
+Valonga road, the gates were thrown open, and the English passing out
+formed outside the walls, and poured volley after volley into the
+retreating foe. Had Murray fallen upon their flank, the disaster of
+the French would have been complete; but this general feared that the
+enemy would turn upon him, and destroy his division before assistance
+could arrive, and he therefore remained inactive, and allowed the long
+column of fugitives to pass unmolested.
+
+For the next eight days the English army followed hotly in pursuit,
+and several skirmishes occurred; but Soult effected a most masterly
+retreat, saving his army, when it seemed upon the brink of
+destruction, by leaving his guns and baggage behind him, and leading
+his men by paths over mountains supposed to be impassable for any
+large body of men. He lost altogether 6000 men in this short campaign.
+This included 3600 prisoners either captured in action or left behind
+in the hospitals, and 1400 killed. The number of guns left behind was
+fifty-eight. The English had only 300 killed and wounded.
+
+Sir Arthur's plans for the invasion of Spain were not yet
+complete, and he accordingly halted his army to await supplies and
+reinforcements. During this time the young buglers had no opportunity
+of calling upon Major-General Hill. The transport supplied by the
+Spanish Government had failed grossly, and the troops were badly fed
+at a time when, taking long marches, they most required support. The
+first day after they halted the boys determined that they would, as
+soon as they were off duty, call upon General Hill. While parade was
+going on, however, they saw the general ride up to Colonel Tritton,
+and enter into conversation with him. The bugler, who was standing
+near, was ordered to sound the call for the officers to assemble in
+front; and when they did so, Colonel Tritton left the general's side
+and spoke a few words with them. There was a short conversation,
+and then the colonel rejoined the general's side, and the officers
+returned to their places. The colonel now rode forward to the center
+of the line, and said in loud tones, "Men, I have a piece of news to
+tell you which I think that you will be glad to hear. Upon my arrival
+at Lisbon I reported the gallant conduct of Tom and Peter Scudamore
+in rescuing one of their comrades when washed overboard in the Bay
+of Biscay. Captain Merivale, of the "Latona," also reported it, and
+General Hill, when he heard the circumstances, was also good enough to
+send home a report recommending them for promotion. He has received
+an answer from the Commander-in-Chief announcing that they are both
+granted commissions in this regiment as a reward for their act of
+distinguished gallantry. The regiment is dismissed."
+
+As the men fell out they gave a loud and general cheer, and Tom and
+Peter were surrounded by their comrades, who shook them by the hand,
+and congratulated them upon their promotion. The boys were too much
+surprised and affected to speak, and they had scarcely recovered from
+their bewilderment, when Carruthers came up to them, and led them
+to the colonel. Here General Hill first, and then all the officers,
+warmly shook hands with them. The boys were much touched by the warmth
+with which they were received, and were soon hurried off to the tents
+of the officers. Several of the ensigns were slight young men, and
+they insisted upon rigging the boys out in uniform, and the boys
+had the less scruple in accepting the kind offer, inasmuch as they
+expected every day to enter Spain, when the baggage would be cut down
+to the smallest possible proportion, and the officers as well as
+the men be obliged to leave almost everything behind them. Sam was
+delighted at the promotion of his friends, and asked to be appointed
+their servant, a request which was at once acceded to. The regiment
+had now been three months in Spain, and the boys had continued to
+work hard at Spanish, devoting several hours a day to its study, and
+talking it whenever they could find an opportunity--no difficult
+matter, as Portugal was full of Spanish who had crossed the frontier
+to avoid the hated yoke of the French.
+
+The delay in invading Spain was caused partly from want of
+transport, but more by the utter incapacity of the Spanish Junta or
+government, and by the arrogance and folly of Cuesta, the Spanish
+Commander-in-Chief, who was always proposing impracticable schemes to
+Wellington, and, inflated with Spanish pride and obstinacy, believed
+that his own worthless troops were fully a match for the French, and
+was jealous in the highest degree of the British general.
+
+At last, on the 27th of June, the British army advanced. Scarcely had
+they made a day's march, however, when the utter faithlessness of the
+Spaniards became manifest. The provisions and transport promised were
+not forthcoming, and from the very day of their advance the British
+were badly fed, and indeed often not fed at all; and so great were
+their sufferings during the campaign--sufferings caused by the
+heartlessness of the people whom they had come to deliver from a
+foreign yoke, that the British soldiers came to cherish a deep and
+bitter hatred against the Spanish; and it was this intense feeling of
+animosity which had no little to do with the cruel excesses of the
+English soldiery upon the capture of Burgos and San Sebastian.
+
+After many delays from these causes, the British army reached Oropesa
+upon the 20th July, and there formed a junction with Cuesta's army.
+Upon the 22d the allied armies moved forward, and upon the same
+day the Spaniards came in contact with the French, and should have
+inflicted a severe blow upon them, but the ignorance and timidity of
+the Spanish generals enabled the enemy to draw off and concentrate
+without loss.
+
+The British troops had now been for many days upon half rations, and
+Sir Arthur gave notice to the Junta, that unless his requisitions were
+complied with, he should retire from Spain. Cuesta, however, believing
+that the French were retreating in haste, pushed his army across the
+river Alberche, with the vain idea of defeating them, and entering
+Madrid in triumph. Sir Arthur, seeing the fatal consequences which
+would ensue, were the Spaniards attacked alone, laid aside his
+previously-formed resolution, and put his army in motion across
+the Alberche. The position of the allied armies was now most
+dangerous--far more so, indeed, than the English general supposed.
+Badly informed by the Spanish, he greatly underrated the enemy's
+forces. Taking advantage of the delay caused by the want of provisions
+and carriage, Soult, Victor, and Ney were marching their forces from
+various points, and concentrating to crush the invading army. Upon the
+26th the French met the Spanish army. General Zayas, who commanded
+the Spanish advance of 4000 infantry and 2000 cavalry, scarcely
+offered any resistance, his men broke and fled in disorder, and the
+panic would have spread to the whole Spanish army, had not General
+Albuquerque brought up 3000 more cavalry and held the French at
+bay, while Cuesta retreated in great disorder. The Spanish loss by
+dispersion and flight was no less than 4000 men, and the whole army
+would have been broken up had not General Sherbrooke advanced with his
+division, and placed it between the French and the flying Spaniards.
+
+The allies now recrossed the Alberche and took up a position to cover
+Talavera. Sir Arthur chose a strong defensive position, as it was
+evident that the Spanish were worse than useless in the open field.
+The Spaniards were placed with their right resting upon Talavera,
+their left upon a mound whereon a large field-redoubt was constructed.
+Their front was covered by a convent, by ditches, stone walls,
+breastworks, and felled trees; and thus, worthless as were the troops,
+they could scarcely be driven from a position almost impregnable.
+
+The line beyond the Spanish was continued by Campbell's division, next
+to which came that of Sherbrooke, its left extending to a steep hill.
+Mackenzie and Donkin had not yet fallen hack from the Alberche. Hill
+was in rear. The British troops, including the German legion, were
+19,000 strong, with thirty guns. The Spaniards had 33,000 men and
+seventy guns. The Spanish contingent could, however, be in no way
+relied upon, and were, indeed, never seriously engaged. The real
+battle was between the 19,000 British troops and 50,000 French.
+The French attacked the British outposts with great impetuosity,
+and Mackenzie and Donkin were driven in with a loss of 4000 men.
+The latter took up his position with his brigade on the hill on
+Sherbrooke's left; the former took post with Campbell's division, to
+which he belonged. The French cavalry now galloped up towards the
+portion of the line held by the Spanish, and discharged their pistols
+at them, whereupon 10,000 Spanish infantry and the whole of their
+artillery broke and fled in wild confusion. For miles they continued
+their flight, but in the evening the Spanish cavalry were sent round
+in pursuit, and drove some 4000 of these cowards back to their lines.
+Seeing the wild confusion which was raging on the allies' right,
+Victor resolved, although evening was at hand, to make a sudden dash
+upon the hill upon their left, which, held only by Donkin's brigade,
+was the key of the position. The hill was very steep upon the front,
+or French side, while towards the rear it sloped gradually. Ruffin's
+division was ordered to the attack, followed by Villette in support,
+while Lapisse was ordered to engage the German legion, which was on
+the left of Sherbrooke's division.
+
+Hill's division was lying down behind the hill when Ruffin's troops
+advanced to the attack. There was no expectation of an attack that
+evening, and the woods and increasing darkness covered the movements
+of the French troops. Weary and hungry, the English soldiers,
+disgusted at the inhuman neglect of the Spaniards, and furious
+at their cowardice, were chatting over the events of the day and
+discussing the chances, by no means bright, of the expected battle
+to-morrow. All that day they had had no food whatever save a small
+portion of grain, served out raw and unground. Tom and Peter had been
+chatting with the officers, who were grouped under a tree, when Sambo
+came up to them and beckoned them aside.
+
+"Look here, Massa Tom, here six eggs; tree for you, tree for Massa
+Peter."
+
+"Thank you, Sam, that is capital; but you know you will get into a row
+if you get caught taking things."
+
+"Me no take 'em, massa. Old hen give them to me."
+
+Tom laughed.
+
+"How was that, Sam?"
+
+"Well, Massa, me saw her sitting on nest. Me went up and said to her,
+'Give me some eggs, old girl.' She say 'Cluck.' I says, 'Cluck means
+yes, I suppose?' She say 'Cluck' again. Clear 'nuff that, so me take
+eggs, eat tree, bring six, young massa."
+
+"I am afraid, Sam," Tom said, laughing, "your story would hardly save
+you from the triangles, if you had been caught. However, as it is rude
+to return a present, of course you cannot take them back to the hen. I
+suppose they are raw?"
+
+"Yes, massa; no good make fire; make hole bofe ends, suck 'em."
+
+"All right, Sam; it is not the nicest way, but, under the
+circumstances, perhaps it is the best; at any rate, I am too hungry to
+wait till we can get a fire lighted."
+
+So saying, the boys sucked the raw eggs, and then joined the men,
+when, just as they did so, first a dropping rifle shot, and then a
+perfect roar of musketry broke out upon the hill above them. It needed
+no order to be given. The men fell into their places and prepared to
+climb the hill and assist Donkin's brigade, which was evidently unable
+alone to resist the attack. Knapsacks were thrown off, firelocks
+tightly grasped, and the regiment impatiently awaited orders to
+advance. None were more impatient than the colonel, who after a few
+minutes, seeing by the fire that the English were falling back, and
+that the French had gained the crest of the hill, waited no longer for
+orders, but gave the word for the regiment to advance. They were but
+half way up the hill when General Hill himself galloped down to meet
+them, and then turning, led the way beside Colonel Tritton.
+
+General Hill had had a narrow escape. Donkin had repulsed the French
+who attacked him in front, but his force was insufficient to guard the
+whole crest of the hill. Consequently, the enemy had come up round
+his flank, and were now in actual possession of the crest. General
+Hill, ignorant of this, had ridden with his brigade-major right
+into the midst of the French before he found out his mistake. His
+brigade-major, Fordyce, was killed, his own horse wounded, and his
+bridle seized by a French grenadier. He had, however, broken away, and
+had ridden off under a storm of bullets.
+
+With a cheer the Norfolk Rangers followed their gallant leader. They
+reached the crest, poured a tremendous volley into the enemy, and
+charged with the bayonet. The French, of whom but a small portion
+had as yet gained the crest, were unable to resist the impetuous
+onslaught, and at once gave way.
+
+The Rangers were now joined by the 48th and the 29th, so that these,
+with Donkin's brigade, formed a strong body of troops. The French,
+who had fallen back, now united with their main body, and the attack
+was renewed with all the force of Ruffin's division. The heavy mass
+pressed upwards, in spite of the destructive fire of the British, and
+were within twenty yards of the crest, when, with a hearty cheer, the
+English troops burst upon them with the bayonet, and the French again
+fell back, broken and disheartened.
+
+This ended the fighting on the 27th of July. Long lines of bivouac
+fires soon blazed upon either side. The wounded were carried down the
+hill to the field-hospital, which had been erected under its cover,
+and the men, eating their scanty supper, wrapped themselves in their
+great coats, and were soon asleep. The officers chatted for a short
+time longer, but as all were tired, and the next day was sure to be a
+severe one, they, too, soon lay down by their fire.
+
+When morning broke, it was seen that the enemy had massed a large
+force of artillery upon a hill just opposite to the one held by the
+English. Soon afterwards Ruffin's division, as before supported by
+Villette, advanced to the attack, covered by the tremendous fire from
+his artillery. The British had no adequate force of artillery to reply
+to the iron storm, and the balls swept through their lines, mowing
+down their ranks, and causing great loss. The regiments in reserve lay
+down to avoid the iron shower, while the Rangers and 48th prepared to
+resist the French when they came within fighting distance.
+
+As their men approached the summit of the hill, the French artillery
+was obliged to cease playing in that direction, and turned its
+attention to the British center, while a fierce musketry contest took
+place between the French and Hill and Donkin's men.
+
+The ground was rough, and the troops on both sides, broken up into
+small bodies, fought desperately. General Hill was wounded, and the
+British troops fell fast. The French, however, suffered even more,
+and, as Hill brought up his reserve, the English gained ground foot by
+foot, until they drove them again down the steep side of the hill. As
+the French retired, their artillery once more opened fire to cover
+their retreat.
+
+A pause now ensued; the French in this brief contest had lost 1400
+men, and the British had suffered severely. The French then held a
+council of war, and determined to attack along the whole line in
+force. Hours passed away; the English munched their corn, smoked their
+pipes, and watched the enemy scattered over the plain. The weather
+was very hot, and the men of both sides went down to a little stream
+which divided their positions, drank, and filled their water-bottles
+in perfect amity. Some of the officers, who spoke French conversed
+with the French officers, exchanged cigars for brandy, and joked and
+laughed as if they had been the best of friends.
+
+At one o'clock the French drums were heard to beat, and the men were
+soon formed in order. Tom and Peter stood with a group of officers on
+the brow of the hill. Nothing could be finer than the sight. Far away
+the view stretched over the country, thickly wooded, and with château
+and farm-houses scatted here and there. Through the trees the dense
+masses of the French could be seen, as they moved in columns towards
+the positions from which they were to attack. Upon an eminence,
+nearly opposite to their position, the boys could see a long line of
+the French artillery. Far away, to the right, rose the churches of
+Talavera, while behind the hill were the British and Spanish cavalry,
+ready to charge should the French endeavor to turn the British left by
+pushing round its foot. Fifty paces from the officers of the Norfolk
+Rangers sat Sir Arthur Wellesley, on horseback, watching attentively
+through a field-glass the movements of the enemy, and at a short
+distance behind him were his staff. The British troops were standing
+in easy order, a little behind the crest of the hill, so as to be
+sheltered from the artillery fire with which the French were sure to
+cover the advance of their column of attack.
+
+"This is a grand sight, Peter," Tom said, "but I wish they would
+begin; it makes one fidgety waiting for it."
+
+Scarcely had Tom spoken when, as if in answer to his wish, a series
+of jets of white smoke puffed out from the opposite hill, and two or
+three seconds later came the thunder of eighty guns, and the whizzing
+sound of as many balls. Instinctively the group drew back a pace, but
+it was not upon them that this tremendous fire was opened. It was
+directed against the right of the British line, and almost at the same
+moment a cloud of skirmishers appeared among the trees, followed by
+the dark columns of Sebastiani's division.
+
+Upon these the English guns at once opened fire; but rushing forward
+with their usual impetuosity, they cleared away the obstacles which
+had been raised across the British front, and charged with fury
+against the British position. Campbell's division, however, assisted
+by Mackenzie's brigade and two Spanish battalions, stood firm, and
+driving back the skirmishers, advanced in line, cheering loudly. The
+head of the French column withered away under their tremendous fire,
+and, pushing forward, they overlapped it, and drove them back with
+terrible loss, capturing ten guns. Then Campbell prudently recalled
+his men to their first position, and the British artillery, which had
+necessarily been silent while friend and foe were mingled together,
+opened furiously upon the French as they tried to re-form upon their
+supports. A Spanish cavalry regiment dashed down upon their flank, and
+they retired again in great disorder.
+
+Every incident of the fight could be seen from the British position on
+the hill, and the troops almost held their breath with excitement as
+the British lines clashed against the head of the French column, and a
+loud shout of triumph burst out spontaneously as the French broke and
+fled.
+
+But it was now the turn of the left. Already Villette's division,
+preceded by the Grenadiers and supported by Ruffin's division, was
+advancing, and the British cavalry were ordered to charge them. The
+ground was, however, quite unfit for cavalry. Colonel Arentschild, a
+very experienced officer, who commanded the German Hussars, drew up
+his regiment at the edge of a deep cleft which crossed their front,
+and refused to take his men to certain destruction. The 23d Dragoons,
+however, dashed into the ravine. Men and horses rolled over in all
+directions; still, they got across, and, charging furiously between
+the French infantry regiments, which poured in a terrible fire,
+fell upon a brigade of Chasseurs in their rear. Victor sent up his
+Polish lancers and Westphalian light horse to the assistance of the
+Chasseurs, who already outnumbered the 23d, and this gallant regiment
+was completely broken, the survivors escaping to the shelter of
+Bassecourt's Spanish division, which lay beyond the hill, having lost
+257 men and officers.
+
+Tom and Peter did not see this disastrous affair, for on the approach
+of the enemy's column they fell into their places in the ranks. It
+was, however, in vain that the French tried to gain the crest of the
+hill, their efforts at this point being indeed far more feeble than
+they had been either in the morning or upon the previous night. It was
+in the center that their great effort was made. Here Lapisse threw his
+division against that of Sherbrooke, and, covered by his own artillery
+and by the guns upon the hill, charged right up to the position. The
+British, however, repulsed them, and the guards, carried away by the
+excitement of the moment, followed them with reckless ardor. The
+French reserves of infantry and cavalry came up, the artillery plied
+the British with shot and shell, the fugitives rallied and again came
+to the attack, and the Guards fell back in confusion. The Germans next
+to them, severely pressed, began to waver, and for a time it seemed
+that the British, victorious upon both flanks, were yet to lose the
+battle by being broken in the center.
+
+Now, however, the 48th, which Sir Arthur had ordered down from the
+hill when he saw the rash advance of the Guards, was seen advancing
+in line through the disordered masses. Wheeling back, it allowed the
+retreating regiments to pass through it and then again formed and fell
+upon the flank of the victorious French column. The French paused in
+their advance, the Guards and Germans rallied and came back again to
+the fight, the shots of the British guns plowed lines in the column,
+the French wavered, and, as the British light cavalry trotted up with
+the intention of charging them, fell back, and drew off to their
+first position amidst shouts of victory along the whole length of the
+British line.
+
+Thus the battle ceased, each party occupying the ground it had held in
+the morning. The British loss in killed, wounded, and missing, in the
+two days' fighting, was 6200; that of the French 7400. Had the British
+been in a condition to have sallied from their position and pursued
+the retiring enemy, the victory would have had far greater results;
+but, exhausted and half-starved, the British were incapable of
+following up their advantage.
+
+The next morning at daybreak, the French army quitted its position,
+and, retiring across the Alberche, formed line of battle there, and
+awaited the attack, should the English take the offensive. This they
+were in no position to do, although in the course of the day Craufurd
+had come up with the 43d, 52d, and 95th Regiments. These three
+regiments had heard of the first day's fighting from the Spanish
+fugitives, and had marched with all speed to the assistance of their
+friends. They had, carrying their kit and ammunition, weighing from 50
+lb. to 60 lb., actually marched sixty-two miles in twenty-six hours in
+the hottest season of the year, one of the greatest feats recorded in
+military history.
+
+The Rangers had suffered heavily, and in the two days' fighting had
+lost thirty-eight killed and 109 wounded. Among the former were two
+officers, while several others were wounded. The Scudamores had,
+fortunately, both escaped without a scratch. The inhumanity of the
+Spaniards was now more markedly shown than ever. Although both in
+Cuesta's army, and in the town of Talavera provisions were abundant,
+yet the inhabitants carefully concealed them, while both the wounded
+and fighting men of the British army were in want. So great was the
+misery and indignation of the soldiers at this shameful treatment,
+from those for whom they were doing so much, that they would willingly
+have attacked the Spanish army and plundered the town; and from this
+period to the end of the war the British hated the Spanish with a deep
+and bitter hatred.
+
+Wellesley now received news that Soult had crossed the mountains
+through the pass of Banos, which had been left undefended by the
+Spanish, and was marching upon his rear. Believing that Soult had only
+13,000 men with him--whereas in fact, he had 50,000--Sir Arthur left
+the Spanish army at Talavera in charge of the hospitals, with 6000
+sick and wounded, and retraced his steps, with the intention of giving
+battle to this new enemy.
+
+Upon the 3d, however, he learned the real strength of Soult's army,
+and upon the same day heard that General Cuesta had basely retreated
+from Talavera, without having provided any transport whatever,
+according to his promise, for the British sick and wounded. All of
+these who had strength to crawl rejoined the British army, but 1500,
+who were unable to walk, were left behind, and fell into the hands
+of the French, by whom they were treated with far greater kindness
+and attention than they had been by the Spanish. Upon the 4th Cuesta
+joined Sir Arthur, and at six o'clock next morning the only possible
+course for safety was adopted. Victor was advancing from Talavera,
+Soult was hurrying from Placentia to cut off the retreat of the
+British, and accordingly Sir Arthur fell back upon Arzobispo, on the
+Tagus.
+
+The artillery, the baggage and wounded, first crossed the bridge, and
+at two o'clock the entire army was across. So great was the hunger of
+the men that a herd of swine happening to be seen close to the line
+of march, the soldiers ran upon them, shot and bayoneted them, and
+devoured them raw. Taking up a strong position, guarding the bridges
+of the Tagus, the British army remained quiet until the end of August.
+During this time they became so weakened by starvation that they could
+scarcely walk; a great portion of the cavalry horses, and nearly all
+the baggage animals died of hunger, and at last, Sir Arthur, finding
+that no remonstrances availed with the Junta, fell back again to the
+Portuguese frontier by slow marches, for the army was so utterly
+enfeebled that it resembled a vast body of invalids, rather than an
+army of unbeaten soldiers.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+A PAUSE IN OPERATIONS.
+
+
+Talavera was fought in July, 1809, and for four months longer Sir
+Arthur Wellesley kept his troops on the Spanish frontier, where his
+presence served as a check against any invasion, even by a very
+formidable army, of Portugal. After the utter bad faith and cowardice
+shown by the Spanish, the great commander was determined never again
+to trust in their promises, or to undertake any movement dependent
+for success upon their co-operation. The Junta then declared that
+the Spaniards would alone and unaided sweep the French beyond the
+Pyrenees, and a Spanish army of 45,000 infantry, 7000 cavalry, and 60
+guns advanced in November against Madrid. It was met by a French army
+of 24,000 infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 50 guns. The battle began at
+eleven in the morning, and by three the French, with a loss of only
+1700 killed and wounded, had utterly routed the Spanish, with a loss
+of 5000 killed and wounded, 45 guns, and 26,000 prisoners! After this
+signal and disgraceful defeat, Lord Wellington--for he had now been
+raised to the peerage--felt that nothing whatever could be done at
+present in Spain, and so fell back into Portugal, where for many
+months he occupied himself in preparing to meet the storm which would,
+he knew, fall ere long upon that country. The Portuguese authorities
+were as incapable, as untrustworthy, and as intractable as were those
+of Spain; but here, happily, Lord Wellington had more power. England
+was paying large subsidies towards keeping up the Portuguese army,
+which was commanded by Lord Beresford, having under him many British
+officers. The Portuguese troops were hardy, obedient, and far braver
+than the Spaniards; but difficulties often arose in keeping the army
+together, because the Portuguese Government, although England was
+paying the principal expenses of the army, yet starved their soldiers,
+and often kept them for months without pay. It was only by the
+strongest remonstrances, and by the oft-repeated threat that he would
+embark the British troops, and abandon Portugal altogether, unless
+these and other abuses were done away with, that Lord Wellington
+succeeded in reducing this incapable and insolent Government to
+reason.
+
+Reinforcements arrived but slowly from England, for a considerable
+portion of the available troops of England were frittered away in
+holding Cadiz and in an expedition to Sicily. In these two places some
+25,000 English troops were wasted--a force, which, had it been added
+to Wellington's army, would have enabled him to take the field against
+the French, instead of being forced to remain in Portugal for upwards
+of a year without discharging a single shot against the enemy. Tom and
+Peter Scudamore, however, were not destined to remain inactive all
+these weary months. One day in November, just before the army fell
+back from the Spanish frontier, General Hill was dining at mess with
+the regiment; for, rough as was the accommodation, the officers had
+succeeded in establishing a general mess. The conversation turned upon
+the difficulty of discovering what force the various French generals
+had at their disposal, the reports received by the Commander-in-Chief
+being often ridiculously incorrect. There was also an immense
+difficulty in communicating with the guerilla chiefs who, almost
+always beaten when they came to blows with any considerable bodies
+of the French, yet managed to harass them terribly by cutting off
+convoys, falling upon small parties, and attacking outposts and bands
+of foragers. Knowing every mountain pass and road, these men could,
+if they would, keep Lord Wellington informed of every considerable
+movement of the enemy, and might in return receive instruction for
+acting, when required, in concert before the communication of an
+advancing army, or might create a diversion by uniting their bands,
+and threatening some important post.
+
+The next day the boys went to Colonel Tritton's quarters, and,
+referring to the conversation of the day before, said that they were
+willing to carry any messages that the general might require sent, and
+to obtain any information wanted.
+
+"Nonsense, boys, you would be hung as spies before you had been gone a
+week."
+
+"I don't think so, sir," Tom said; "we have had very little to do
+during the six months we have been out here except to learn the
+language of the country, and I think now we could pass very well as
+Spanish boys. Besides, who would suspect boys? We are quite ready to
+chance detection if we can be allowed to go."
+
+"I don't like it, boys; you are too young. Well, if not too young," he
+said, in answer to a movement of Tom's to speak, "we all like you too
+well to run the risk of hearing you have been hung like a couple of
+young puppies."
+
+"You are very kind, colonel; but you know you promised to give us a
+chance if you could, and having a chance of course means having extra
+danger; but I really don't think that there would be any great danger
+in it."
+
+"Well, boys," Colonel Tritton said, after a few moments' thought, "I
+do not feel justified in refusing your application, and will mention
+it to General Hill. There are very few officers in the army who
+speak Spanish fluently, and you being boys would, as you say, avert
+suspicion. But I tell you fairly that I hope General Hill will at once
+refuse to entertain the idea."
+
+"Thank you, sir," the boys said. "Of course that is all we could ask
+you to do."
+
+The next day, after parade was over, Colonel Tritton walked on
+to General Hill's quarters at a sort of half farm-house, half
+country-seat, a short distance from the village, round which the
+Rangers were encamped. As he came up to the house, General Hill came
+out from his door talking to a Spanish officer, who had the day before
+brought some despatches from one of the Spanish generals to Lord
+Wellington.
+
+Colonel Tritton joined them, and they stood talking together upon the
+state of affairs in Spain, and of the advance of the Spanish army on
+Madrid, which was then just taking place. As they did so two very
+ragged, unkempt Spanish boys, shoeless and wretched-looking, limped
+up, and began to beg. General Hill shook his head, and the Spaniard
+impatiently motioned them away.
+
+"Por Dios," one whined; "give us something; we are starving. The
+French have burnt down our houses, and killed our fathers and
+mothers--we are starving. 'Por l'amor de Dios!'"
+
+"What's the poor little beggar say?" General Hill asked the Spaniard.
+
+"The usual story--house burnt, father and mother killed, starving. I
+dare say it's all a lie."
+
+"Where did you live?" he asked in Spanish.
+
+"In the village of Oros, near Valencia."
+
+"And how did you come here?"
+
+"The French burnt the village because the guerillas had killed a party
+of theirs in it, and they killed all the people, and then carried off
+the mules and horses, and took us to drive some of them. That was four
+months ago. We had to drive till the other day at Tamanes, when our
+men beat the French; our mules were taken, and, as they did not want
+us as drivers we had nothing to do but to come on in hopes that the
+kind English would give us food."
+
+The Spanish officer translated what the boy said, and General Hill
+remarked, "Yes, that was a brilliant affair of the Duke del Pasque's.
+Here," he called to an orderly, "give these boys some bread. I will
+see what can be done for them afterwards. I am afraid nothing. Poor
+little wretches! their story is a very common one."
+
+The boys received the bread with a great show of thankfulness, and,
+sitting down by the roadside, began to munch it with great appetite.
+The Spanish officer now mounted his horse and rode off, while General
+Hill and Colonel Tritton remained standing where he had left them.
+Colonel Tritton then told General Hill of the Scudamores' request to
+be allowed to penetrate into Spain as spies or with dispatches.
+
+"The young pickles!" General Hill laughed. "What will they be wanting
+to do next? Pooh, pooh! it would be out of the question."
+
+"I believe they do really speak Spanish exceedingly well." Colonel
+Tritton said. "They generally act as interpreters for us, and none of
+the officers speak Spanish with anything like the same fluency."
+
+"As far as the language goes, they might get on, perhaps," General
+Hill said; "but they look as thorough English boys as you could see.
+They would be detected at once."
+
+"Yes," Colonel Tritton said, "they are both thorough English boys; I
+should know them anywhere. What a contrast to the miserable, limping,
+hang-dog lads there! Poor little chaps! Why, upon my word, I believe
+the fellows are laughing."
+
+General Hill looked sharply at them, and, as he looked from one to the
+other, he said sarcastically, "Poor little chaps indeed! You said that
+very naturally, Tritton. It really does you credit as an actor."
+
+Colonel Tritton looked at the general with an expression of blank
+astonishment.
+
+"What," said the general, "were you really taken in too"
+
+"Taken in?" repeated Colonel Tritton vaguely.
+
+"Don't you see, Tritton, those poor little chaps you are pitying so
+are those two young scamps we were talking about."
+
+Colonel Tritton stared in astonishment at the boys, and then, as he
+recognized them, he joined the general in a shout of laughter, while
+the two boys stood up and saluted with an attempt at gravity which was
+only partially successful, so amused were they at the astonishment of
+their colonel, as well as pleased at the success of their disguise.
+
+Just at this moment there was a sound of tramping horses, and directly
+afterwards an officer rode up, followed by four or five others, and
+at a short distance in the rear by an escort of orderlies. The boys
+needed not the exclamation of General Hill, "Here is Wellington." They
+knew who the rider was, who checked his horse as he reached the gate,
+for they had often seen him as he rode through the camp. A slight man,
+very careful and neat in his dress, with an aquiline nose and piercing
+eyes. Peter was rising as he drew up his horse, when Tom said, "Don't
+get up, Peter; go on with your bread. It would look absurd for us
+to salute now, and would draw attention to us," he went on, as Lord
+Wellington dismounted, threw the bridle off his horse to an orderly,
+and saying to General Hill, "I wanted to see you; come in." Colonel
+Tritton went into the house, followed by the two officers. "We'll
+stop here till they come out again, Peter. Perhaps General Hill may
+speak to him about us. At any rate, we will keep up our disguise till
+they've gone. Let us play at odd and even." It was a game of which
+Spanish boys are very fond, and they may be seen in any of the Spanish
+towns sitting by the houses on door-steps in the sun playing. It was
+half an hour before the general came out again. He was about to mount
+his horse, when he glanced at the boys, who were sitting against the
+wall a few paces off, seemingly absorbed in their play, and paying no
+attention whatever to him. Suddenly he changed his mind, dropped his
+rein, and walked up to them.
+
+"What are you playing for?" he asked abruptly in Spanish.
+
+"Reals, señor," Tom said looking up, but not moving.
+
+"You are poor; how can you pay?" asked the general.
+
+"Oh! we don't pay," Tom laughed. "We keep count. I owe him twelve
+thousand now. I will pay him when I get rich. He can wait." And he
+held out his closed hand again for Peter to guess the number of stones
+it contained.
+
+"Come inside," Lord Wellington said abruptly, and, turning led the way
+into the house again, followed by General Hill, Colonel Tritton, and
+the two boys.
+
+"It is not often I change my mind," he said to General Hill; "but for
+once I do so now. When you told me about these lads, I refused to
+employ them on such dangerous service, even when you told me of the
+courage and coolness which they exhibited on the voyage. Now I have
+tried them myself, I see that they will do. If they could keep up
+their disguise when I spoke to them suddenly, and answer without
+hesitation or any excitement which could have shown that they were
+not what they pretended to be, they can do so with a French general.
+I am no judge of the purity of their Spanish; but as you tell me they
+deceived a Spanish officer just now, they will be able to pass with
+Frenchmen. Now, lads," he went on turning to them, "you have thought
+over, of course, the risks you are going to run, and are prepared, if
+detected, to be hung like dogs." The boys bowed.
+
+"You will receive detailed instructions through Colonel Tritton,
+together with such despatches as I may wish sent. They will be written
+as small as possible. You will not go for a week; devote all your time
+to studying the map. The largest size we have shall be sent to your
+colonel this afternoon. Of course you will be supplied with money, and
+for anything you can think of likely to assist you, speak to Colonel
+Tritton. You are beginning well, young sirs. If you like, you ought to
+made a noise in the world. Now, Hill, I must be off."
+
+And the general left the room with the officers, while the boys were
+stammering out their thanks.
+
+"Where did you dress up, boys?" Colonel Tritton asked them after the
+general had ridden off. "You did not come out from camp like this I
+hope?"
+
+"No, colonel; we changed in that little wood there."
+
+"What have you colored your skins with?"
+
+"We got some iodine from the doctor, sir, and mixed it with water till
+it was just thick enough to tinge our skin. It will wash pretty well
+off with plenty of scrubbing, but we mean to use walnut juice when we
+start; it lasts much longer, and is a better brown."
+
+"I am not sure, boys, that you had not better leave your faces alone,
+they and your hands are so sunburnt that you would pass well enough,
+though you must dye your arms and legs. Fortunately, your hair is
+pretty dark, for you can't well carry dye. Think well over all these
+things, for your lives may depend on some trifle of this kind. I shall
+see you at mess."
+
+So saying, Colonel Tritton walked on, leaving the boys to follow at
+their leisure. Just as they were about to turn off to make for the
+woods they saw a soldier coming along the road.
+
+"That's Sam, if I am not mistaken, Peter, we will have some fun with
+him. We can trust him to say nothing in the regiment about meeting us
+like this."
+
+The two boys accordingly sat down by a low wall by the roadside, and
+as Sam came up talked away to each other in Spanish. He passed without
+paying any attention to them. After he had gone a few yards, Tom said
+in a deep, loud voice, "Sambo." The black halted suddenly, and turned
+round. First he looked angrily at the boys, then he went to the side
+of the road and looked over the wall. Then with a very perplexed air
+he looked up and down the road.
+
+"Who dat have impudence to call dis colored gentleman Sambo," he said
+to himself. "Some fellow did, dat for sartin, not dose little Spanish
+trash, dey not know Sam's name, some rascal in regiment; he's hid
+somewhere. I pound him to squash when I find him."
+
+Muttering thus he turned to proceed on his way, but before he had gone
+twenty yards, he again heard a deep shout. "Here, you, Sambo."
+
+The black jumped as if he was shot, "My golly," he exclaimed, and then
+walked back to the boys, who were talking together, shook his head
+and again looked over the wall. Then he stooped down to the boys, and
+shook his fist in their faces, "You little debils, you call Sambo, I
+pound you to squash." The boys both leapt to their feet with an air of
+intense surprise and alarm, and began to cry out in Spanish.
+
+"No, can't be you," Sam said, "dis chile must be witched, no place for
+men to hide, sartin not dem boys. Stone wall can't call Sambo all by
+self, Sam's going out of mind. Oh! Lor, dis berry bad affair," and Sam
+sat down by the roadside with a face of such perfect bewilderment and
+dismay that the boys could stand it no longer, but went off together
+into a scream of laughter, which caused Sam to jump to his feet again.
+"What you larf for, what you larf for, you little rascals, you play
+trick, eh? you call Sambo, who taught you dat name?" and he seized the
+two boys and shook them furiously.
+
+"Oh! Sam, Sam, you will kill us with laughing," Tom got out at last.
+"Do leave go, man, or we shall choke," and as Sam, astonished, loosed
+his hold, the boys sat down and laughed till their sides ached.
+
+"Golly," exclaimed the negro, as he looked at them, "Dose boys again.
+What on earth you do, Massa Tom, Massa Peter, in dose ragged close,
+what you dress up like two beggars for? Lor! how you take in dis
+chile, me tink you little Spanish trash, sure enuff." It was some time
+before the boys could compose themselves, and then Tom made Sam sit
+close by his side.
+
+"Look here, Sam, this isn't a joke, this is a serious business and
+before I tell you anything about it, you must promise to keep the
+secret strictly, as it would do us a great deal of harm if it was
+known." Sam declared at once that if they tore him to pieces with wild
+horses he would say nothing. Tom then explained the whole thing to him
+and Sam at once declared that he would go too.
+
+"Quite impossible, Sam. You do not speak a word of Spanish and
+although at any of the seaport towns you could pass as a runaway
+sailor, there could be no possible reason for your wandering about the
+country with two Spanish boys."
+
+Sam thought for some time. "Now dat berry unlucky Massa Tom, dat Sam
+play big drum. Big drum fine music, but big drum not go well by self.
+If Sam had played fiddle, Sam could go, but Sam couldn't go nohow with
+big drum."
+
+"I should think not, Sam, with the name of the regiment painted on it.
+No, no, you must stay behind. There won't be any fighting now till the
+spring, and by that time we shall be back with the regiment."
+
+"But what you do without Sam? who black Massa's boots? who brush his
+clothes?"
+
+Tom laughed. "These clothes would fall all to pieces, if they were
+brushed much, Sam, and at present we have no boots to be blacked."
+
+"Where you get dose clothes, Massa Tom," Sam asked, examining with
+great disgust the rags the boys had on.
+
+"We bought some peasant's clothes about our size, and the first beggar
+boys we saw we offered to exchange. You should have seen their faces
+of astonishment. When we got the clothes we made them into a bundle,
+and took them to the bakehouse, and got the baker to put them into
+the oven for a few hours to kill anything there might be in them.
+Now, Sam, it is time for us to be going. It will take us an hour's
+scrubbing to get the color off us. Be sure you keep our secret."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+WITH THE GUERILLAS.
+
+
+It was on a fine morning at the end of March that a cortége of
+muleteers and mules left the little town of Alonqua. It was now four
+months since the Scudamores left the army, and in the intervening time
+they had tramped through a large portion of Spain. They had carried
+with them only a dozen or so little despatches done up in tiny rolls
+of the length and about the thickness of a bodkin, These were sewn
+inside the lining of their coats, in the middle of the cloth where
+it was doubled in at the seams, so that, even were the clothes to be
+examined carefully and felt all over, the chances of detection were
+slight indeed. They had each, on starting, half a dozen pieces of
+Spanish gold coin sewn between the thicknesses of leather of the soles
+of each of their shoes, for they did not start in the beggar clothes
+in which they had first disguised themselves. Their clothes were,
+indeed, worn and somewhat patched, but were of stout material, and
+they wore shoes, but no stockings. They had, indeed, the appearance of
+Spanish boys of the peasant class. The weather in the north of Spain
+is often very cold in winter, and the boys felt that, with rags and
+bare feet, they should suffer severely. All that they had to say and
+do had been learned by heart. The names and addresses of the agents
+of the British Government at every town had been laboriously learned
+before starting, and, as Peter said ruefully, it was worse than a
+dozen Greek impositions.
+
+At each place of any importance they would find the person to whom
+they were instructed to apply, would accost him with some password,
+and would be put up by him while they remained there. When they had
+gained the intelligence they required--of the number of French troops
+in the place and its neighborhood, a knowledge always obtained by
+going round, counting the men on parade, or, in the case of small
+villages, finding out easily enough from a peasant the number,
+quartered there, they would write a report on the number the
+intentions as far as they could learn them, the amount of food
+in store, and the sentiments of the population, would enclose
+the despatch in a goose-quill and give it to their host, who was
+responsible for forwarding it.
+
+In a great number of cases, indeed, the man to whom they were
+accredited was a muleteer. These men hated the French with a hatred
+even more deep and deadly than that of other Spaniards, for, in
+addition to the national causes of hatred, their mules were constantly
+being requisitioned or seized by the troops and they themselves forced
+to accompany the army for long distances at a nominal rate of pay for
+themselves and their animals. Then, too, they were in close connection
+with the guerillas, for whom they carried goods up into the mountains
+from the towns, and when the chance came would leave their animals in
+the mountains and join in cutting off an enemy's convoy. They acted as
+messengers and spies too, and took their friends in the hills early
+news of intended movements of the enemy. Many a day had the boys
+traveled in the company of these muleteers, merry, careless fellows,
+singing and talking to their mules, apparently the best-natured of
+men, until something would be said which would recall the hated foe,
+and then their black eyes would flash, their fingers clutch their
+knife-handles, and they would pour out long strings of deep Spanish
+oaths. Great was the surprise of these men on receiving the password
+from two boys, but they never hesitated an instant in taking them in,
+in giving them hospitality as long as they remained, and in either
+accompanying them to the next town, or handing them over to the charge
+of some comrade going in that direction. Not even to them did the
+Scudamores ever betray that they were not what they were taken to be,
+two Spanish boys employed by the English commander as messengers.
+Often they were questioned how the English had come to entrust
+important communications to two boys, and their reply always was that
+their father and mother had fled to Portugal from the French, and were
+living there near the English lines, and that they had offered their
+lives in case of their sons' treachery.
+
+This system of hostages seemed probable enough to their questioners,
+and if the boys' fare was rather harder, and their treatment more
+unceremonious than it would have been had they said that they were
+British officers in disguise, they ran far less risk of detection
+from an accidental word or sign. Indeed it would have been next to
+impossible for them, had they desired it, to convince any one of their
+identity. There was no fear now of their accent betraying them. Since
+they had left the army they had never, even when alone together,
+spoken in English. They made the rule and kept to it for two reasons,
+the one being that they found that if they did not get into this habit
+of always speaking Spanish, they might inadvertently address each
+other in English, and thus betray themselves; the second, that they
+wanted to learn to speak absolutely like natives. This they had in the
+four months thoroughly learned to do. At first their pronunciation
+and occasional mistakes excited curiosity when asked questions as
+to the part of Spain from which they had come, but their constant
+communication with their muleteer friends had quite removed this, and
+for the last two months not one person had doubted that they were not
+only Spanish, but that they came from the northern provinces.
+
+Hitherto they had journeyed principally between large towns and over
+country held by the French, but that part of their work was finished;
+they had accurately computed the number of the army with which Massena
+was to advance shortly to besiege Ciudad Rodrigo, and they had now to
+carry the despatches to the guerilla leaders. Hitherto they had not in
+a single instance excited suspicion. Not a Frenchman had asked them
+a question, and no adventure of anything like an exciting nature had
+taken place. They were now, however, entering into a country entirely
+different from that which they had hitherto traversed. The northeast
+of Spain is wild and mountainous, and offers immense natural
+facilities for irregular warfare. Through the various passes of the
+Pyrenees lead all the roads from France, whether to Vittoria on the
+great road to Madrid, or through Navarre to Catalonia. Here and there
+fortified towns still held out against the French, and the town of
+Gerona, in Catalonia, had only fallen after a six months' regular
+siege, and a desperate defense which fully rivals that of Saragossa.
+Is it not a little singular that the Spaniards, who in the open field
+were, with a few remarkable exceptions, absolutely contemptible, yet
+frequently defended towns with wonderful fortitude, courage, and
+desperation. It may, indeed, be said that in every siege where the
+Spaniards were commanded by brave and resolute chiefs they behaved
+admirably. This great range of hill country was the stronghold of the
+guerillas, and every convoy from France had to be protected by a large
+force, and even then often suffered greatly from the harassing attacks
+of their active enemies.
+
+The bands of the guerilla chiefs differed greatly in strength, varying
+from merely ten or a dozen men to three or four thousand, and indeed
+each band varied continually. The men, when not required, would
+scatter to their homes, cultivate their little patches of ground, and
+throw down the spade and take up the rifle again when they heard of a
+convoy to cut off, or an invading column to beat back. The bands, too,
+would vary in proportion to the renown of their chiefs. An energetic
+man, who, at the head of a handful, had performed some daring feats,
+would find himself a week afterwards the leader of many hundreds,
+while a chief who was slow and dilatory would find his band melt away
+like snow in summer.
+
+The character of the warfare depended much upon the character of the
+French generals. A few of these kept the troops under their command
+sternly in hand, would permit no plundering, and insisted upon their
+fair treatment of the Spaniards. These in turn wanted nothing better
+than to remain quietly in their homes, and the guerilla bands would
+melt away to nothing. Other generals, furious at the savage nature
+of the warfare, and the incessant toil and loss entailed upon their
+troops, allowed the latter to do as they pleased, and burning houses
+and dead bodies marked their course. Then the peasantry, now turned
+guerillas, retaliated as savagely, giving no quarter, sacrificing all
+prisoners, and putting the wounded to death, sometimes with torture.
+On both sides horrible atrocities were committed.
+
+The guerillas were armed partly with rifles and carbines, partly with
+muskets landed on the coast by the British Government, who also, from
+time to time, sent powder and money to assist them to continue their
+resistance to the French. Although nowhere really formidable, yet,
+being scattered over a great extent of country, these bands occupied
+very large bodies of French troops, who would otherwise have
+been disposable for general operations in the field. The English
+commander-in-chief had, of course, no shadow of authority over the
+guerillas, or, indeed, over any of the Spanish troops, and his
+communication to them simply asked what arms and ammunition they
+required, and begged them to send him a list of the number of men they
+could each throw on the French communications and lines of retreat in
+case he should find himself in a position to make a general advance
+against them. He also recommended most strongly the bearers of the
+despatch to their care. It was to the chief known as Nunez that they
+were now bound. The mule train was nominally destined for Vittoria, to
+which town the leader had got a pass, specifying the number of mules
+and the nature of the goods they carried, from the French commandant
+at Alonqua, for no one was allowed to take the goods about the country
+without a pass, in order to prevent supplies being forwarded to the
+mountains. This pass, however, only mentioned twelve mules with four
+drivers, and this was the number which started from Alonqua. Another
+score of mules, however, joined them at a short distance from the town
+where a by-road turned off. Some of these had gone out from the town
+unloaded, as if taken out to graze, others had not entered the town,
+but had come direct from the sea-coast by by-paths with powder, and
+had been awaiting the departure of Garcias, the name of the leader of
+the party. They had eight men with them, all armed to the teeth.
+
+"Is it all right, Garcias?"
+
+"All right," the leader said; "they have sent out their squadrons on
+the other road, so I think we are safe for to-day."
+
+"What boys have you got there with you?"
+
+"They have business with Nunez; letter from the coast."
+
+The cavalcade was now in motion again, and wound gradually up into the
+hills. Presently they came to a point where four roads met. A clump of
+trees grew hard by, and the boys gave a start of horror at seeing the
+bodies of six French soldiers swinging from them. "Ay, that's Nunez's
+work, I expect," Garcias said coolly. "There were three of his men
+swinging there last week, so as a lesson he has hung up six of the
+French. He is a rough boy to play with, is Nunez."
+
+At sunset the party slept in a small farm, and at daybreak continued
+their journey. They were now in the heart of the mountains, and their
+path lay sometimes up deep ravines, sometimes along rocky ledges.
+At last, about midday, they entered a valley in which stood a small
+village. "That's Nunez's head-quarters to-day," Garcias said;
+"to-morrow he may be no one knows where."
+
+"But does he have to sally out by the wretched road by which we have
+come?" Tom asked.
+
+"No, no," Garcias replied; "he would not catch much prey that way.
+There are three other ways out of the valley. That winding path you
+see there leads up to Santona. That road on the other side leads out
+on to the plain, and thence to Vittoria; while the footpath over the
+brow opposite leads right down into the wide valley through which the
+main north road runs. So you see this is a handy spot. From that brow
+we can see the convoys going to and from France, and can pour down
+upon them if they are weak; while, if a column is sent in search of
+us, we can vanish away long before they can catch us. Nunez does not
+use the direct road over the brow for his attack, but follows the
+Santona or Vittoria road for a while, and then makes a swoop round. He
+does not want to bring the French up to this village, for his family
+and the families of many of the men live here."
+
+As they approached the village, they found that there was a good deal
+of bustle going on. Armed men were coming out of the cottages, and
+gathering in a group round a rough stone cross, which stood in the
+center of a sort of green. "We are just in time," Garcias said; "Nunez
+is starting on some expedition or other."
+
+When they reached the spot there were nearly two hundred men
+assembled. They greeted Garcias with shouts of welcome as he arrived.
+"Ah, ah! Garcias, just in time. Our last skin of wine was emptied last
+night; we will bring some more up to-morrow; but if you had not come
+we should have had to start thirsty, and that's unlucky besides being
+unpleasant."
+
+"Where is Nunez!" Garcias asked.
+
+"Here he comes," was the reply; and the boys turning saw a figure
+approaching, which by no means answered to the expectation of the
+celebrated guerilla chief. He was small and almost humpbodied, but
+very broad. His head seemed too large for his body, and a pair of
+fierce eyes gleamed out from beneath his shaggy eyebrows. His mustache
+was thin and bristly and his month wide, but with thin lips. The boys
+could understand the reputation for cruelty and mercilessness which
+attached to this sinister-looking figure, but there was none of the
+savage power which they had expected to see in so celebrated a leader.
+
+"Any news, Garcias?" he asked shortly, as he came up.
+
+"None, captain, except that these boys have brought some despatches
+for you from the English Lord."
+
+Nunez looked sharply at them, and held out his hand without speaking.
+Tom gave him the little quill.
+
+The guerilla opened it, read the contents, and, saying briefly, "An
+answer to-morrow," strode on to his men, and in a few minutes they
+were defiling out at the end of the valley.
+
+"That hardly seems a strong enough body to attack a French convoy,
+Garcias," Tom remarked.
+
+"No, it would not be, but there is only a part of his band here; the
+rest will join him at some place agreed on--perhaps ten miles from
+here. I believe he has about thousand men under his orders. Now come
+along; we shall be none the worse for dinner," and, leaving his men to
+unload the mules, he led the way into the little posada, or inn.
+
+"Ah! Mother Morena," he said to an old woman who was crouching near a
+blazing wood fire, "warming yourself as usual; it's well you've a good
+fire, for you will be able to get us some dinner all the more quickly.
+Twelve of us altogether, and all as hungry as wolves."
+
+"Ah!" exclaimed the old woman crossly; "it seems as if I were never to
+have an hour's quiet, just as all that roaring, greedy lot, with their
+Mother Morena here and Mother Morena there, and their grumbling at
+the olla, and their curses and their quarrels, are off, and I think I
+am going to have a quiet afternoon, then you come in with your twelve
+hungry wolves."
+
+"Ah! mother, but wolves don't pay, and we do, you see."
+
+The frugal supper over, the boys laid down on the benches, and were
+soon asleep. The next day passed slowly, for the band were not
+expected to return until late at night--perhaps not until the next
+morning, as the pass where the attack would be made was some fifteen
+miles off, and the convoy might not pass there until late in the
+afternoon. The boys soon made friends with some of the women and
+children of the place, to whom they told stories of the great cities
+of the plain, and of the great water which washed the shores of Spain.
+The greater portion of the Spanish peasantry are incredibly ignorant,
+and very few of the inhabitants of this village had ever gone beyond
+the mountains. Walking about in the village, but apparently mixing but
+very little in the games of the other children, were two little girls,
+whose gay dress of rich silk seemed strangely out of place in such a
+spot.
+
+Tom asked one of the women who they were, and she replied, with a toss
+of the head, "They are the captain's children. The last time the band
+went out they found among the baggage and brought up here, the dresses
+of the children of some fine lady, and the captain kept them all as
+part of his share, just as if there were no children in the village
+whom it would become a great deal better than those stuck-up little
+things. Not," she said, softening a little, "that they were not nice
+enough before they got these things; but since they came their heads
+have been quite turned by the finery and they are almost too grand to
+speak to their old playfellows."
+
+"Is their mother alive?"
+
+"No, poor thing, she was killed by the French when the village she
+lived in was burned by them, because some of them were found hung in
+the neighborhood. The captain was away at the time and the children
+were out in the woods. When he came back he found them crying by the
+side of their mother's body, in the middle of the burning village. So
+then he took to the mountains, and he never spares a Frenchman who
+falls into his hands. He has suffered, of course, but he brought it
+upon himself, for he had a hand in hanging the French soldiers, and
+now he is a devil. It will be bad for us all; for some day, when the
+French are not busy with other things, they will rout us out here, and
+then who can blame them if they pay us for all the captain's deeds?
+Ah! me, they are terrible times, and Father Predo says he thinks the
+end of the world must be very near. I hope it will come before the
+French have time to hunt us down."
+
+The boys had a hard struggle not to smile, but the woman spoke so
+earnestly and seriously, that they could only shake their heads in
+grave commiseration for her trouble; and then Tom asked, "Is the
+captain very fond of the children?"
+
+"He worships them," the woman said; "he has no heart and no pity for
+others. He thinks no more of blood than I do of water; but he is as
+tender as a woman with them. One of them was ill the other day--a mere
+nothing, a little fever--and he sat by her bedside for eight days
+without ever lying down."
+
+"I suppose," Tom said, "they never bring prisoners up here?"
+
+"Yes, they do," the woman said; "not common soldiers; they kill them
+at once; but sometimes officers, if they want to exchange them for
+some of ours who may have been taken, or if they think they are likely
+to get a high ransom for them. But there, it always comes to the same
+thing; there, where you see that mound on the hillside, that's where
+they are. They blindfold them on their way up here, lest they might
+find their way back after all. Only one or two have ever gone down
+again. I wish they would finish with them all down below; they are
+devils and heretics these French; but I don't care about seeing them
+killed. Many of us do, though, and we have not many diversions up
+here, so I suppose it's all for the best."
+
+"I wish that fellow had given us our answer before he went away,"
+Tom said to Peter when they were alone. "I hope he won't bring any
+prisoners up here; these massacres are frightful, and one side seems
+as bad as the other. Well, in another month we shall have finished
+with all this work, and be making for the frontier again. Shan't I be
+glad when we catch sight of the first red-coats!"
+
+In the middle of the night the boys were roused by a general bustle,
+and found that a messenger had just arrived, saying that the
+expedition had been successful, that a portion of the enemy had been
+cut off, their rear-guard destroyed, and that the whole band would be
+up soon after daylight. The village was astir early, but it was not
+until nine o'clock that the guerilla band arrived. The boys saw at a
+glance that they were stronger in numbers than when they started, and
+that with them were some twenty or thirty baggage animals.
+
+The women flocked out to meet them with shrill cries of welcome. The
+booty taken was not of any great value in money, but was more valuable
+than gold to the guerillas.
+
+Each one of the band carried, in addition to his own piece, a new
+French musket, while in the barrels on the mules were powder and ball;
+there were bales of cloth, and some cases of brandy and champagne, and
+a few boxes and portmanteaus of officers' baggage. In the rear of all,
+under a strong guard, were two French officers, both wounded, a lady
+and a child of some seven or eight years old.
+
+After a boisterous greeting to their wives, the band broke up, and
+scattered over the village, three or four men remaining to guard the
+captives, who were told to sit down against a wall.
+
+The whole band were soon engaged in feasting, but no one paid the
+least attention to the prisoners. The lady had sunk down exhausted,
+with the little girl nestled close to her, the officers faint and pale
+from loss of blood, leaned against the wall. One of them asked the
+guards for some water, but the men paid no attention to the request,
+answering only with a savage curse. Tom and Peter, who were standing
+by, immediately went to the inn, filled a jug with water, and, taking
+a drinking horn and some bread, went back. One of the guards angrily
+ordered them back as they approached.
+
+"I am not going to free them," Tom said, soothingly; "there can be no
+reason why they should die of thirst, if they are enemies."
+
+"I am thirsty myself," one of the guard said, "and it does us good to
+see them thirst."
+
+"What, has no one brought you anything to drink?" Tom said, in a tone
+of surprise. "Here, Peter, you give this bread and water to these
+prisoners; I will run to Mother Morena's and bring some wine for the
+guard."
+
+The guard would not allow Peter to approach the captives until Tom
+arrived with a large jug of wine, and a cold fowl, which he had
+obtained at the inn. These the Spaniards accepted, and allowed the
+boys to give the water to the prisoners. All drank eagerly, with every
+expression of thankfulness, the lady seizing Peter's hand and kissing
+it as he handed the horn to the child. The lady was a very bright,
+pretty woman, though now pale and worn with fatigue and emotion, and
+the child was a lovely little creature.
+
+The boys, on leaving the prisoners, hurried to Garcias.
+
+"What are they going to do with the prisoners, Garcias?"
+
+"They have brought them up here to exchange for Nunez's lieutenant,
+who was taken last week. One of the men went off last night to
+Vittoria with a letter to offer to exchange. One of the officers is a
+colonel, and the young one a captain. The lady is, they say, the wife
+of General Reynier."
+
+"Then they are safe," Tom said joyfully, "for, of course the French
+would exchange a guerilla against three such prisoners."
+
+"Yes," Garcias said, "they are safe if Vagas has not been shot before
+the messenger gets to Vittoria. The messenger will hear directly he
+gets there, and if they have finished Vagas, he will come straight
+back, for his letter will be of no use then."
+
+"But the French would pay a ransom for them."
+
+"Yes; but the captain is never fond of ransoming, and if the news
+comes that Vagas is shot it is all up with them."
+
+"But they will never murder a woman and child in cold blood!" Tom
+said, in tones of indignant horror.
+
+"Women are killed on both sides," the muleteer said, placidly. "I
+don't hold to it myself, but I don't know, after all, why a woman's
+life is a bit more precious than a man's. Vagas's wife and children
+are here, too, and if the news comes of his death, she would stir the
+band up to kill the prisoners, even if the captain wanted to save
+them, which he certainly will not do."
+
+"When is the messenger expected back?"
+
+"If he goes to Vittoria and finds Vagas is alive, and arranges for
+the exchange, he won't be back till late to-night, perhaps not till
+to-morrow; but, if he hears, either on the way or directly he gets
+there, that he is dead, he may be back this afternoon." Soon after
+this conversation Garcias was sent for to the chief, and returned
+with a small note, which he handed to the boys as the answer to the
+despatch, and urged them to go at once. The boys said that they could
+not leave until they saw the end of this terrible drama which was
+passing before their eyes. It was early in the afternoon when a man
+was seen coming along the path from Vittoria. A hundred eager eyes
+examined him, and ere long it was declared as certain that it was the
+messenger. The boys' heart sank within them as they saw the fierce
+look cast by the Spaniards in the direction of the prisoners, for
+every one in the village was well aware of the meaning of this early
+return. The boys had arranged upon the course they would pursue, and
+they at once hurried to Garcias.
+
+"Please come with us at once to Nunez. We want to see him before the
+messenger arrives."
+
+"I will come with you," Garcias said; "but if you think that any
+talking of yours will persuade Nunez to move out of his way, you are
+mistaken. It is more likely to cost you your own lives, I can tell
+you; however, I gave you the promise I would do my best for you when
+you started with me, and I will go with you now, though what you want
+to interfere for here is more than I can make out. Pshaw! what matters
+two or three of these accursed French, more or less?"
+
+As they neared the chief's house they saw him coming towards them. His
+brow was as black as thunder; he was evidently prepared for the news
+of his lieutenant's death.
+
+"These messengers want to speak to you for a moment," Garcias said.
+
+The chief stopped with an impatient gesture.
+
+"Señor," Tom said, with a dignity which surprised the chief; "we are
+not what we seem. We are two English officers, and we have come to beg
+of you, to implore you, not to tarnish the cause for which you fight
+by shedding the blood of women and children."
+
+The boys had agreed that it would be altogether hopeless to try to
+save the French officers.
+
+"British officers, indeed," exclaimed Nunez, "a likely story. Do you
+know them as such, Garcias?"
+
+"No," Garcias said bluntly, "I never guessed at it; but now they say
+so, I think it's likely enough, for they don't seem to see things in
+the same way as other people."
+
+"I can give you proof of it," Tom said, calmly, pulling up the sleeve
+of his coat, and showing a cicatrix in his forearm. Taking a knife
+from his pocket, he cut into the skin, and drew forth a tiny silver
+tube. This he opened, and handed to Nunez a paper signed by Lord
+Wellington, declaring the bearers to be British officers, and
+requesting all loyal Spaniards to give them every assistance.
+
+The captain read it through, and flung it down. "You may be officers,"
+he said contemptuously; "but if you were Lord Wellington himself, I
+would not spare these accursed French. Listen!" and as he spoke a howl
+of rage ran from the other end of the village, and told too plainly
+the nature of the tidings the messenger had brought.
+
+"I again protest," Tom said firmly. "I protest, as a British officer,
+and in the name of humanity, against this cold-blooded murder of a
+woman and child. It is a disgrace to Spain, a disgrace to the cause,
+it is a brutal and cowardly act."
+
+The guerilla furiously drew a pistol; but Garcias placed himself
+between him and Tom. "I have promised him a safe conduct," he said,
+"and have given my word for his safety. He is only a boy, and a young
+fool; don't trouble with him."
+
+Fortunately at this moment, for the guerilla was still irresolutely
+handling his pistol, a crowd was seen coming towards them, headed by
+a woman who seemed frantic with rage and grief. All were shouting,
+"Death to the assassins! death to the French!" The chief at once moved
+forward to meet them.
+
+Tom and Peter gave a significant glance towards each other, and then
+Tom turned to go back towards the house which Nunez inhabited, while
+Peter hurried towards the spot where the prisoners were kept. Already
+a crowd was assembling who were talking threateningly at the French
+officers. Peter made his way through them until he stood by the lady,
+who, with her child clinging to her neck, looked in terror at the
+angry crowd, whose attention, however, was directed to the officers,
+who stood looking calmly indifferent to their threats and insults.
+
+"Do you speak Spanish, madam?" Peter asked, leaning over her.
+
+She shook her head.
+
+"Do you speak English?" he asked, in that tongue.
+
+"Yes, yes, a little." the lady said, eagerly; "who are you? What is
+this fierce crowd about?"
+
+"Hush!" Peter said. "I am a friend. Listen. In a few minutes they are
+going to shoot you all." The lady gave a stifled cry, and pressed
+her child close to her. "Remember, when they come to you, ask for a
+priest; gain a few minutes, and I hope to save you and the child."
+
+So saying, he slipped away into the crowd again. He had scarcely done
+so when Nunez arrived, accompanied by many of his men. The crowd fell
+back, and he strode up to the French officers. "French dogs," he said,
+"you are to die. I spared you to exchange, but your compatriots have
+murdered my lieutenant, and so now it's your turn. You may think
+yourselves lucky that I shoot you, instead of hanging you. Take them
+to that wall," he said, pointing to one some twenty yards off.
+
+The Frenchmen understood enough Spanish to know that their fate was
+sealed. Without a word they took each other's hands, and marched
+proudly to the spot pointed out. Here, turning round, they looked with
+calm courage at the Spaniards, who formed up with leveled muskets at
+a few paces distance. "Vive la France! Tirez," said the elder, in a
+firm, voice, and in a moment they fell back dead, pierced with a dozen
+balls.
+
+Peter had turned away when Nunez appeared on the scene, to avoid
+seeing the murder, and with his eyes fixed in the direction in which
+Tom had gone, he listened almost breathlessly to what should come.
+The French lady had sat immovable, cowering over her child, while her
+countrymen were taken away and murdered. As Nunez passed where she
+crouched, he said to two of his men, "Put your muskets to their heads,
+and finish them!" As the men approached, she lifted up her face, pale
+as death, and said,--
+
+"Un prêtre, uno padre!"
+
+"She wants a priest," the men said, drawing back; "she has a right to
+absolution."
+
+There was a murmur of assent from those around, and two or three
+started to the priest's house, situated only a few yards away, being
+one of the end houses of the village. The priest soon appeared, came
+up to the spot, and received orders to shrive the Frenchwoman. He
+attempted a remonstrance, but was silenced by a threat from Nunez,
+and knowing from experience of such scenes that his influence went
+for nothing with Nunez and his fierce band, he bent over her, and the
+crowd drew back, to let them speak unheard. At this moment, to Peter's
+intense relief, he saw Tom approaching with the captain's two children
+walking beside him. Absorbed in what was passing before them, no one
+else looked round, and Peter slipped away and joined his brother. They
+came within twenty yards of the crowd, and then paused.
+
+"Wait a minute," Tom said to the children, "your father is busy."
+
+In another minute Nunez shouted roughly, "There that will do; finish
+with it and have done! I want to be off to my dinner."
+
+Tom and Peter simultaneously drew out a large Spanish knife, and each
+took one of the children firmly by the shoulder.
+
+"Stop! Señor Nunez!" Tom shouted in a loud, clear tone. "Stop! or by
+heaven there will be four victims instead of two! Let one of you lift
+a finger against these captives--let one of you come one step nearer
+to us--and, by the Holy Virgin, we will drive our knives into these
+children's hearts!"
+
+A cry of astonishment broke from the crowd, and one of agony and rage
+from Nunez, who tottered against a wall in horror at the danger in
+which his daughters were placed.
+
+"Listen! all of you," Tom said, "we are English officers, we have
+shown our papers to Nunez, and he knows it is so. We will not suffer
+this murder of a mother and her child. If they are to die, we will die
+with them; but these two children shall die too! Now, what is it to
+be?"
+
+A dozen of the guerillas leveled their guns at the two daring boys.
+
+"No! no!" Nunez shrieked; "lower your guns. Don't hurt the children,
+señors. The captives shall not be hurt; I swear it! They shall go
+free. Give me my children."
+
+"Not if I know it," Tom said; "Do you think I could trust the word of
+a man who would murder women and children in cold blood? No; these
+girls shall go with us as hostages, till we are safe under French
+guard."
+
+"They will tell them the way up here," said one of the woman in the
+group, "and then we shall be all killed."
+
+"No," Tom said; "the lady shall swear not to tell the way up here. She
+shall swear on your priest's crucifix. We will give you our words as
+British officers."
+
+"But how are the children to get back here again?" another asked, for
+Nunez was so paralyzed that he could only gaze on the children, who
+were crying bitterly, and implore them to stand quiet, and not try to
+get away. After more parleying the arrangements were completed. The
+crowd fell back on either side, so as to leave a large space round the
+French lady. Tom and Peter then went up to them with the little girls.
+The lady was sobbing with joy and excitement at this unexpected
+relief.
+
+"Can you walk?" Tom asked her in English.
+
+"Yes," she said, getting up hastily, but almost falling again.
+
+"Garcias will go first, as guide. The priest will give you his arm,"
+Tom went on, "these two young women will go with you and carry your
+child if necessary. You will walk on, twenty yards ahead of us. We
+follow with these girls. No one is to follow us, or accompany us. We
+are to go on like that till we come upon your outposts, and then the
+priest and the two women will bring back Nunez's children."
+
+"You will send them safe back, you swear?" asked Nunez, in tremulous
+tones.
+
+"Psha!" Tom said contemptuously, "you don't suppose we are
+child-murderers, like yourself."
+
+"Remember!" the guerilla said, in a sudden burst of passion, "if you
+ever cross my path again, I will--"
+
+"Do terrible things no doubt," Tom said scornfully; "and do you
+beware, too. It is wild beasts like yourself who have brought disgrace
+and ruin on Spain. No defeat could dishonor and disgrace her as much
+as your fiendish cruelty. It is in revenge for the deeds that you and
+those like you do, that the French carry the sword and fire to your
+villages. We may drive the French out, but never will a country which
+fights by murder and treachery become a great nation. Are you ready,
+Garcias!"
+
+"I am ready," the muleteer said, stepping forward from the silent and
+scowling throng.
+
+"We can trust you," Tom said heartily; "take us the short way straight
+down into the valley; we may have the luck to come upon a passing
+French troop in an hour. Think of that, madam," he said to the French
+lady, "let that give you strength and courage."
+
+So saying, the procession set out in the order Tom had indicated,
+amidst the curses of the guerillas, who were furious at seeing
+themselves thus bearded. At the brow of the hill Tom looked back, and
+saw that the guerillas were still standing in a group, in front of
+which he could distinguish the figure of Nunez. Taking off his hat,
+he waved an ironical farewell, and then followed the party down
+the hillside into the broad valley below. They could see the road
+stretching like a thread along it, but to their disappointment, not
+a figure was visible upon it. Now that there was no longer danger of
+treachery, the party closed up together.
+
+"How far is it to Vittoria, Garcias?"
+
+"Twenty good miles, señor."
+
+"But we shall never get there," Tom said in dismay. "I am sure the
+lady could not walk another five miles; she is quite exhausted now."
+
+"You will not have to go five miles, señor. There is a body of four
+or five hundred French in that large village you see there; it is not
+more than three miles at most."
+
+It was a weary journey, for the French lady, exhausted by fatigue
+and excitement, was often obliged to stop and sit down to rest, and,
+indeed, could not have got on at all had not Garcias on one side and
+the padre on the other helped her on. At last, just as the sun was
+setting, they approached the village, and could see the French
+sentries at its entrance. When within a hundred yards they paused.
+
+"We are safe now," Tom said; "it is not necessary for you to go
+farther. Good-by, little ones; I am sorry we have given you such a
+fright, but it was not our fault. Good-by, padre; I know that you will
+not grudge your walk, for the sake of its saving the lives of these
+unfortunates. Good-by, Garcias; thanks for your kindness and fidelity.
+I will report them when I return, and will, if I get a chance, send
+you a remembrance of our journey together."
+
+"Good-by, señors," Garcias said, shaking them by the hand; "you
+English are different to us, and I am not surprised now at your
+General holding Portugal against all the French armies." Then he
+lowered his voice, so that the Spanish women standing by could not
+hear him. "Be on your guard, señors; don't move on from the village
+without a strong convoy is going on; change your disguise, if
+possible; distrust every one you come across, and, in heaven's name,
+get back to your lines as soon as possible, for you may be assured
+that your steps will be dogged, and that you will be safe nowhere in
+Spain from Nunez's vengeance. The guerillas communicate with each
+other, and you are doomed if you fall into the hands of any, except,
+perhaps, one or two of the greater chiefs. Be always on your guard;
+sleep with your eyes open. Remember, except in the middle of a French
+regiment, you will never be really safe."
+
+"Thanks, Garcias!" the boys said earnestly, "we will do our best to
+keep our throats safe. At any rate, if we go down, it shall not be for
+want of watchfulness!"
+
+Another shake of the hands, and the party separated. The Spanish woman
+who was carrying the sleeping French child handed her over to Tom, who
+took her without waking her while Peter lent his arm to the French
+lady.
+
+"Madam," Tom said in English, "you will soon be among your friends. I
+know that you will keep your promise not to divulge the situation of
+the village you have left. I must ask you, also, to promise me not
+to say that we speak English, or to say anything which may create a
+suspicion that we are not what we seem. You will, of course, relate
+your adventures, and speak of us merely as Spanish boys, who acted as
+they did being moved by pity for you. We must accompany you for some
+time, for Nunez will move heaven and earth to get us assassinated, and
+all we want is that you shall obtain permission for us to sleep in the
+guard-room, so as to be under shelter of French bayonets until we can
+decide upon our course of action."
+
+The lady assented with a gesture, for she was too exhausted to speak,
+and as they reached the French sentries she tottered and sank down on
+the ground insensible.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+MADRID.
+
+
+The French sentries, who had been watching with surprise the slow
+approach of two peasant boys, the one carrying a child, the other
+assisting a woman clad in handsome, but torn and disheveled clothes,
+on seeing the latter fall, called to their comrades, and a sergeant
+and some soldiers came out from a guard-room close by.
+
+"Hallo!" said the sergeant. "What's all this? Who is this woman? And
+where do you come from?"
+
+The boys shook their heads.
+
+"Of course," the sergeant said, lifting the lady, "they don't
+understand French; how should they? She looks a lady, poor thing. Who
+can she be, I wonder?"
+
+"General Reynier," Tom said, touching her.
+
+"General Reynier!" exclaimed the sergeant to his comrades. "It must be
+the general's wife. I heard she was among those killed or carried off
+from that convoy that came through last night. Jacques, fetch out
+Captain Thibault, and you, Noel, run for Dr. Pasques."
+
+The officer on guard came out, and, upon hearing the sergeant's
+report, had Madame Reynier at once carried into a house hard by, and
+sent a message to the colonel of the regiment. The little girl, still
+asleep, was also carried in and laid down, and the regimental doctor
+and the colonel soon arrived. The former went into the house, the
+latter endeavored in vain to question the boys in French. Finding it
+useless, he walked up and down impatiently until a message came down
+from the doctor that the lady had recovered from her fainting fit, and
+wished to see him at once.
+
+Tom and Peter, finding that no one paid any attention to them, sat,
+quietly down by the guard-house.
+
+In a few minutes the French colonel came down. "Where are those boys?"
+he exclaimed hastily. There was quite a crowd of soldiers round the
+house, for the news of the return of General Reynier's wife and child
+had circulated rapidly and created quite an excitement. "Where are
+those boys?" he shouted again.
+
+The sergeant of the guard came forward.
+
+"I had no orders to keep them prisoners, sir," he said in an
+apologetic tone, for he had not noticed the boys, and thought that
+he was going to get into a scrape for not detaining them; but he
+was interrupted by one of the soldiers who had heard the question,
+bringing them forward.
+
+To the astonishment of the soldiers, the colonel rushed forward, and,
+with a Frenchman's enthusiasm, actually kissed them. "Mes braves
+garçons!" he exclaimed. "Mes braves garçons! Look you, all of you,"
+he exclaimed to the soldiers, "you see these boys, they are heroes,
+they have saved, at the risk of their own lives, mark you, General
+Reynier's wife and daughter; they have braved the fury of that
+accursed Nunez and his band, and have brought them out from that den
+of wolves." And then, in excited tones, he described the scene as he
+had heard it from Madame Reynier.
+
+At this relation the enthusiasm of the French soldiers broke out in
+a chorus of cheers and excited exclamations. The men crowded round
+the boys, shook them by the hands, patted them on the back, and in a
+hundred strange oaths vowed an eternal friendship for them.
+
+After a minute or two, the colonel raised his hand for silence. "Look
+you," he said to the men. "You can imagine that, after what these boys
+have done, their life is not safe for a moment. This accursed Nunez
+will dog them and have them assassinated if he can. So I leave them to
+you; you will take care of them, my children, will you not?"
+
+A chorus of assurances was the reply, and the boys found themselves as
+it were adopted into the regiment. The soldiers could not do enough
+for them, but, as neither party understood the other's language,
+the intercourse did not make much progress. They had, however, real
+difficulty in refusing the innumerable offers of a glass of wine or
+brandy made to them by every group of soldiers as they moved about
+through the village.
+
+The boys felt that their position was a false one; and although, in
+point of fact, they had no report to make upon the regiment, still
+the possibility that if discovered they might be thought to have been
+acting as spies on men who treated them with so much friendliness was
+repugnant to them. However, their stay was not to be prolonged, for
+the regiment had already been stationed for a month at the village,
+and was to be relieved by another expected hourly from France, and was
+then to go on to Madrid. This they learned from one of the soldiers
+who could speak a few words of Spanish.
+
+It was upon the third day after their arrival that the expected
+regiment came in, and next morning the boys started soon after
+daybreak with their friends. They had not seen Madame Reynier during
+their stay in the village, for she was laid up with a sharp attack of
+illness after the excitement she had gone through. She was still far
+from fit to travel, but she insisted on going on, and a quantity of
+straw was accordingly laid in a cart, pillows and cushions were heaped
+on this, and an awning was arranged above to keep off the sun. The
+regiment had taken on the transport animals which had come in with the
+baggage of the troops the night before; hence the mule drivers and
+other followers were all strangers. The boys were marching beside the
+regiment, talking with one of the sergeants who had been previously
+for two years in Spain, and spoke a little Spanish, when the colonel,
+who had been riding alongside Madame Reynier, told them as he passed
+on to the head of the regiment, that she wished to speak to them.
+
+The boys fell out, and allowed the troops and the line of baggage
+animals and carts to pass them. As the latter came along, Tom observed
+one of the Spanish drivers glance in their direction, and immediately
+avert his head.
+
+"Peter, that fellow is one of Nunez's band; I will almost swear to his
+face. No doubt he has joined the convoy for the purpose of stabbing us
+on the first opportunity. I expected this. We must get rid of them at
+once."
+
+The boys had both been furnished with heavy cavalry pistols by order
+of the colonel, to defend themselves against any sudden attack, and,
+placing his hand on the butt in readiness for instant use, Tom,
+accompanied by his brother walked up to the Spaniard.
+
+"You and those with you are known," he said. "Unless you all fall out
+at the next village we come to, I will denounce you, and you haven't
+five minutes to live after I do so. Mind, if one goes on you all
+suffer."
+
+The Spaniard uttered a deep execration, and put his hand on his knife,
+but seeing that the boys were in readiness, and that the French
+baggage guard marching alongside would certainly shoot him before he
+could escape, he relinquished his design.
+
+"Mind," Tom said, "the first village; it is only a mile ahead, and
+we shall probably halt there for five minutes; if one of you goes a
+single foot beyond it, you will swing in a row."
+
+So saying, the boys dropped behind again until Madame Reynier's cart
+came along. The sides were open, and the lady, who was sitting up,
+supported by pillows, with her child beside her, saw them, and called
+to them to climb up to her. They did so at once, and she then poured
+forth her thanks in tones of the deepest gratitude.
+
+"My husband is not at Madrid," she said when she saw by the boys'
+confusion that they would be really glad if she would say no more;
+"but when he hears of it he will thank you for saving his wife and
+child. Of course," she went on, "I can see that you are not what you
+seem. Spanish boys would not have acted so. Spanish boys do not speak
+English. That makes it impossible for me in any way to endeavor to
+repay my obligation. Had you been even Spanish peasants, the matter
+would have been comparatively easy; then my husband could have made
+you rich and comfortable for life; as it is--"
+
+She paused, evidently hoping that they would indicate some way in
+which she could serve them.
+
+"As it is, madam," Tom said, "you can, if you will, be of great
+service to us by procuring for us fresh disguises in Madrid, for I
+fear that after what happened with Nunez our lives will not be safe
+from his vengeance anywhere in Spain. Already we have discovered that
+some of his band are accompanying this convoy with the intention of
+killing us at the first opportunity."
+
+"Why do you not denounce them instantly?" Madame Reynier said, rising
+in her excitement and looking round.
+
+"We cannot well do that," Tom said, "at least not if it can be
+avoided. They know already that we have recognized them, and will
+leave at the next village; so we are safe at present, but in Madrid we
+shall be no longer so. We cannot remain permanently under the guard of
+the bayonets of the 63d Line; and indeed our position is as you may
+guess, a false and unpleasant one, from which we would free ourselves
+at the first opportunity. We shall therefore ask you, when you get to
+Madrid, to provide us with fresh disguises and a pass to travel west
+as far as the limits of the French lines."
+
+"You can consider that as done," Madame Reynier answered; "I only
+regret that it is so slight a return. And now," she said lightly, to
+change the conversation, "I must introduce you to this young lady.
+Julie," she asked in French, "do you remember those boys?"
+
+"Yes," Julie said; "these are the boys who gave mamma and Julie water
+when those wicked men would not give us anything to drink when we were
+thirsty; and it was these boys that mamma said prevented the wicked
+men from killing us. They are good boys, nice boys, but they are very
+ragged and dirty."
+
+Madame Reynier smiled, and translated Julie's answer.
+
+"You know," she went on, hesitatingly, "that I know that--that you are
+English officers. I heard you say so when you saved us. But how is it
+that you can be officers so very young?"
+
+Tom explained that in England the officers entered for the most part
+directly, and not, as in the French army, by promotion from the ranks,
+and that, consequently, the junior officers were much younger than
+those of equal rank in the French service.
+
+The convoy had now reached the village, and a halt was ordered,
+and the boys alighting, walked forward to see that their unwelcome
+attendants quitted them. As the soldiers fell out from their order of
+march and sat down under the shade of the houses many of the Spaniards
+with the baggage-train followed their example, and the boys saw the
+man to whom they had spoken go up to four others, and in a short time
+these separated themselves from the rest, went carelessly round a
+corner, and when the order came to continue the march, failed to make
+their appearance. Their absence passed unnoticed save by the boys,
+for the natives frequently took advantage of the passage of troops
+and convoys to travel from one part of the country to another, for
+the guerillas were for the most part little better than brigands,
+and would plunder their own countrymen without scruple whenever the
+opportunity was favorable.
+
+The march to Madrid was accomplished without adventure, and the boys
+improved the occasion by endeavoring to pick up as many French phrases
+as they could, as they marched along by the side of the sergeant who
+had specially taken them under his charge. He knew a little Spanish,
+so they managed to keep up a conversation with him in a strange medley
+of the two languages, which helped to pass the time away merrily. At
+Madrid they took up their quarters in the barracks with the regiment;
+they had already explained their plan of disguise to Madame Reynier,
+and she had promised to provide all that was necessary and to obtain
+the military pass for them.
+
+They had soon reason to congratulate themselves that their stay
+in Madrid was under the protection of French bayonets. During the
+day after their arrival they remained quietly in barracks, as the
+appearance of two Spanish peasants walking about the street with
+French soldiers would have excited comments. In the evening, however,
+they agreed with their friend the sergeant, who was going into the
+town with three or four of his comrades, that they should accompany
+them, not, however, walking actually with them, but following a few
+paces behind, so as to be within reach of their assistance should any
+one molest them.
+
+They reached the Piazza del Sol, the great central square of Madrid,
+without incident, and amused themselves with the sight of the constant
+stream of people passing to and fro, the ladies in their graceful
+black mantillas, the men in cloaks and Spanish sombreros, or round
+felt hats. Presently the sergeant and his companions left the square,
+and turning down one of the narrow streets which run into it, amused
+themselves by looking into the shops, with their gay fans, bright
+handkerchiefs, and other articles of Spanish manufacture.
+
+Tom and Peter followed their example, keeping some ten paces behind
+them. It was now nearly dark, and the streets were but badly lighted
+except by the lamps in the shop windows.
+
+"It may be all fancy, Tom," Peter said, "but I can't help thinking
+that we are followed. There are three follows who have passed us
+twice, and I am pretty sure they are particularly noticing us. Keep
+your hand on your pistol."
+
+As the boys paused at another shop window, the three men again
+approached, this time from ahead.
+
+"Look out, Tom," Peter said sharply.
+
+As the men came up to them, one of them exclaimed,
+
+"Now!"
+
+The boys faced round, pistol in hand, with a cry to their friends,
+just as the three Spaniards, with drawn knives, were upon them.
+
+The sudden movement disconcerted them, and two sprang back from the
+leveled tubes of the pistols, with fierce oaths of surprise, the
+third, however, rushed in and struck at Tom; the latter instinctively
+moved aside, and the knife inflicted a heavy gash on the shoulder, and
+almost at the same moment Peter's bullet crashed through the fellow's
+skull.
+
+His comrades, with a cry of rage, rushed in, but before they could
+strike, the sergeant was up and ran one through the body with his
+sword, whereon the other fled. The whole affair lasted only three
+or four seconds. In less than a minute the street was absolutely
+deserted, for rows and fights were so common between the soldiers and
+the people, that all prudent people got out of the way the moment a
+knife was drawn.
+
+"Well done, lad," the sergeant said to Peter, "I thought your brother
+was done for. Luckily I had faced your way when the fellow attacked
+you, and was on my way to help you before they began, but I feared I
+should be too late. That was a wonderfully pretty snap shot of yours,
+and you were as cool as old hands. Peste! I don't know what to make
+of you boys. Now come along, we had better get away from this carrion
+before any one comes up and asks questions. First, though, let me tie
+up your shoulder."
+
+This was soon done, and while the sergeant was engaged upon it, his
+comrades, old soldiers, turned over the dead Spaniards, searched their
+pockets, and chuckled as they found several gold pieces.
+
+One or two French soldiers alone came near them before they left the
+spot, attracted by the sound of the pistol. A word from the sergeant,
+"These scoundrels attacked us, they have got their _coup_," satisfied
+them, and the boys and their friend soon regained the crowded main
+street, leaving the bodies for the watch to find and bury.
+
+Arrived at the barracks, Tom's arm was examined by the surgeon, and
+the cut pronounced a deep flesh wound, but of no consequence; it was
+soon strapped up, and with his arm in a sling Tom went down to the
+sergeant's quarters, where they slept. Here they had to go through
+much patting on the back, for their friend had described the readiness
+and coolness with which they stood at bay, and popular as they were
+before they were now more so than ever. For the rest of their stay in
+Madrid the boys did not stir out of barracks. One at least of Nunez's
+envoys they knew to be alive, and he could enlist any number of the
+lower class against them, so they resolved not to go out until they
+should finally start.
+
+After a fortnight's stay they were sent for to the colonel's quarters,
+where they found Madame Reynier and her child. "I had a letter from my
+husband this morning," she said, "from his camp near Cordova, thanking
+you with all his heart for the inestimable service you rendered him,
+and begging me to tell you that you can count on his gratitude to the
+extent of his life at any and all times. You need no assurance of
+mine. And now about your journey. All is prepared for you to leave
+to-morrow morning. You are to come here to the colonel's quarters soon
+after daybreak. Here are your two disguises, for the one as a young
+bachelor of medicine, for the other as a young novice. Here is your
+pass, signed by the minister, authorizing you both to pass on to your
+relations at Ciudad Rodrigo, and to go unmolested thence where you
+choose, also recommending you to the care of all French and Spanish
+authorities. A regiment marches to-morrow morning for the frontier;
+the colonel is a cousin of my husband. I have told him that some
+friends of yours rendered me much kindness and service on my way down,
+and that I particularly commend you to his care. He has promised to
+allow you to follow the regiment, and to see that you get quarters at
+each halting-place. He does not know you for anything but what you
+appear to be. When you have put on these dresses to-morrow morning,
+step out by the private door from these quarters, looking carefully
+when you start to see that there is no one in the street. Then go
+boldly to No. 15, Rue St. Geronimo; go into the courtyard, there you
+will see two stout mules with all necessaries, under charge of a
+soldier, who will have instructions to hand them over to you without
+asking any questions; then go down to the Retiro and wait till the
+16th come along. The Colonel will be on the look-out for you, and you
+will ride up to him and hand him this note. And now farewell, dear
+boys; never shall I forget you, or cease to pray for you, and may be
+when this terrible war is over we may meet as friends again. Keep
+these little tokens of remembrance of your grateful friends." So
+saying, Madame Reynier pressed into the boys' hands two magnificent
+gold watches and chains, held her child up for each of them to kiss,
+threw her arms round their necks and kissed them herself, and then
+drawing down her veil to conceal the tears which were standing in her
+eyes, left them hastily.
+
+That night the boys said good-by to their friend the sergeant, and
+to those soldiers with whom they had most companionship. "You have
+guessed, no doubt, sergeant," Tom said, in his mixture of Spanish and
+French, "that we are not exactly what we seem to be, but if we should
+ever meet again, under different circumstances, I want you to remember
+that our connection with the regiment has been in a way forced upon
+us. I should not like you to think, that is that under the pretence
+of friendship, we have been treacherously learning things. Do you
+understand?"
+
+"I understand, mes braves," the sergeant said, "Jacques Pinteau is no
+fool, and he saw from the first that you were not two ragged Spanish
+peasant boys by birth. I daresay I can guess what you are, but there
+need be no ill-will for that, and as you only came among us by
+accident, as it were, there is no more to be said either way. There is
+one thing certain, wherever or however we meet, we shall be friends."
+
+So well were Madame Reynier's plans arranged that the boys passed from
+Madrid to the frontier without a single hitch or unpleasantness. Tom
+was soberly attired as a student at the university, Peter was muffled
+up to the eyes as a timid young novice, going from school to enter a
+convent, of which his aunt was lady superior, at Ciudad Rodrigo. The
+colonel, and, following his example, the officers of the regiment were
+polite and civil. The marches were of easy length, the mules stout
+and smooth-going, with well-filled traveling sacks. The weather was
+delightful, and the boys enjoyed the fortnight's march exceedingly.
+Upon the road they learned that Massena had laid siege to Ciudad
+Rodrigo, and that the 16th was on its way to join the besieging army.
+
+It was the end of June, 1810, when the 16th joined Massena's force
+before Ciudad Rodrigo. The siege had continued for some time, the
+British light division, under General Craufurd, lay upon the other
+side of the river Agueda, which separated them alike from the town and
+the French army. The colonel of the 16th politely expressed to Tom his
+regret that he could not, for the present, conduct them to their final
+destination, but that he hoped that the gate would soon be open for
+them. Tom thanked him for the civility which he had shown them upon
+the road, and said that he would, with his sister, take up his abode
+for the present a few miles from the beleaguered fortress. On leaving
+the regiment the boys went higher up the Agueda to the little town of
+Villar, where there was a bridge. This however, was watched by the
+troops of both armies, and there was, at present, no chance of
+affecting a passage.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+THE FIGHT ON THE COA.
+
+
+All through the winter of 1809-1810, Wellington had remained quietly
+on the frontier of Portugal, engaged in disciplining his troops, many
+of whom were raw drafts from the militia, in urging upon the home
+Government the necessity of fresh reinforcements, if the war was to be
+carried on with the smallest hopes of success, and in controversies
+and disputes with the Portuguese regency. This body of incapables
+starved their own army, refused supplies and transport to the British,
+and behaved with such arrogance and insolence that Wellington was
+several times driven to use the threat that, unless measures were
+taken to keep the Portuguese troops from starving, and to supply food
+to the British, he would put his army on board the transports at
+Lisbon, and give up the struggle altogether.
+
+Spring found the army still on the frontier, and when the French
+advanced in force in May to lay siege to the Spanish frontier fortress
+of Ciudad Rodrigo, Wellington to the intense disappointment of his own
+troops, and the bitter anger of the Portuguese and Spaniards, refused
+to fight a battle to save the fortress, which, under its gallant old
+governor, Andrea Hernati, was defending itself nobly.
+
+Wellington's position was, however, a very difficult one, and his
+responsibilities were immense. Allowing for the detachments which were
+massing to check three other French columns advancing in different
+directions, he had but 25,000 men with which to attempt to raise the
+siege of Ciudad Rodrigo, or to draw off the besieged garrison. Massena
+had under him 60,000 French veterans, and was desiring nothing more
+than that Wellington should attack him. The chances of victory then
+were by no means strong, and in any case victory could only have been
+purchased by a loss of men which would have completely crippled the
+British general, and would have rendered it absolutely necessary for
+him to fall back again at once. A defeat or even a heavy loss of
+men, would have so dispirited the faint-hearted Government at home
+that they would undoubtedly have recalled the whole expedition, and
+resigned Portugal to its fate. Thus Wellington decided not to risk the
+whole fate of the British army and of Portugal for merely a temporary
+advantage, and so stood firm against the murmurs of his own troops,
+the furious reproaches of the Portuguese and Spaniards, and the moving
+entreaties for aid of the gallant governor of the besieged town.
+
+At the same time that he refused to risk a general battle, he kept
+Craufurd's division in advance of the Coa, and within two hours' march
+of the enemy, thereby encouraging the garrison of Ciudad Rodrigo, and
+preventing Massena from pushing forward a portion of his army while
+the rest pursued the siege.
+
+Craufurd's front was guarded by the Agueda, a river only passable by
+two or three bridges and fords in wet weather, but fordable in many
+places in the dry season. At the commencement of June the Agueda
+fell, and the French crossed in strength at various places. Craufurd,
+however, still maintained his position in front of the Coa with great
+skill and boldness. He had under his command only 4000 infantry, 1100
+cavalry, and six guns, and his maintenance of his position, almost
+within gun-shot of an enemy's army, 60,000 strong, for three months,
+is one of the finest feats of military audacity and ability ever
+performed.
+
+Until the 11th of July the boys remained quietly at a cottage occupied
+by peasants, who believed their story that they were only waiting
+to proceed when the French army advanced. They were freed from
+molestation or inquiry upon the part of the French by the pass with
+which Madame Reynier had supplied them.
+
+Upon that day Ciudad Rodrigo surrendered, and Massena prepared at once
+to enter Portugal. Upon the 21st the cavalry advanced in great force,
+and upon the following day the boys resolved upon endeavoring to
+rejoin the British army. The Agueda was now easily fordable in many
+places, but the boys determined to swim across, at a distance from the
+point at which the French army was now pouring forward.
+
+As evening came on they left the cottage, and walked two miles up
+the stream, and, as soon as night fell, took off the costumes which
+had proved of such service to them and left them on the bank; then
+fastening their peasants' suits upon two bundles of rushes to keep
+them dry, entered the little river, and were soon upon the opposite
+shore. They knew, from what they had heard in the afternoon, that
+Craufurd had fallen back upon Almeida, a fortified town, and that it
+was probable he would at once cross the Coa, as resistance to the
+force now approaching him seemed nothing short of madness.
+
+No good, indeed, could be gained by a fight in such a position, with a
+deep river in the rear, crossed by only a narrow bridge, and commanded
+by both banks, and Wellington's orders had been imperative "that, upon
+no account whatever was Craufurd to fight beyond the Coa."
+
+Craufurd, however, a rash and obstinate, although a skilful general,
+was determined upon having a brush with the enemy before he fell back.
+He anticipated, no doubt, that only an advanced guard of the enemy
+would come up at first, and his intention was to inflict a severe
+check upon them with the magnificent little division under his
+command, and then fall back triumphantly across the Coa. Massena,
+however, was well aware of the fighting powers of the light division,
+and was preparing to hurl suddenly upon him a force more than
+sufficient to crush it.
+
+The Scudamores had but little fear of meeting with any large body of
+the enemy, as the main French advance was direct from Ciudad Rodrigo;
+their cavalry would, however, be scattered all over the country, and
+were they to fall into the hands of any of these parties they would
+have been shot instantly, upon suspicion of endeavoring to convey news
+of the French movements to Craufurd.
+
+The point where they crossed the river was between Villar and Naves
+Frias, and, after an hour's walking, they struck the little rivulet
+called Duas Casas. This they crossed at once, as they knew that by
+following its southern bank until they saw some high ground to their
+left they would find themselves near Almeida, which they hoped to
+reach before the English retreated.
+
+All night they tramped through the fields of stubble, where the corn
+had been long since cut for the use of Craufurd's cavalry, but walking
+at night through an unknown country is slow work, and when day began
+to break they entered a small wood just beyond the point where the
+Turones, as the southern arm of the Duas Casas is called, branches off
+from the main stream. Several times in the course of the day bodies
+of the enemy's cavalry came near their place of concealment, and the
+Scudamores congratulated themselves that they had not given way to
+their impatience, and tried to push on across the twenty miles that
+alone separated them from their friends.
+
+At nightfall the wind rose, and a heavy rain began to fall. They had
+no stars by which to steer their course, and were, therefore, forced
+to follow the bank of the Turones, although they knew that it would
+lead them some distance to the north of Almeida. It was slow work,
+indeed, for they had to grope their way along in the storm, following
+every turn and bend of the river, which formed their only guide. After
+several hours' toil they came into a road running north and south.
+This they knew was the road leading from Guarda to Almeida, and it
+gave them a clue as to the distance they had come. Still following the
+river, they continued their course until they approached San Pedro,
+whence they knew that a road ran directly to the British position
+in front of Almeida, that is if the British still maintained their
+position there.
+
+As they approached the village, they heard a deep, hollow sound,
+and stopping to listen, and laying their ears to the ground, could
+distinguish the rumble of heavy carriages.
+
+"The French are advancing in force, Peter; we are just in time;
+they are going to attack us in the morning at daybreak. We know the
+direction now; let us turn to the left, and try to get on in advance
+of them. They probably will not push on much farther until there
+is light enough to permit them to form order of battle; they are
+evidently, by the sound, going to the left, rather than straight on."
+
+The Scudamores now hurried on, and presently the rumbling of the
+artillery died away, and they ventured to push to their left, and to
+get on the road, which they found deserted. Half an hour's run, for
+they knew that every minute was of importance, and they heard the
+welcome challenge, "Who comes there?" "Two British officers," they
+answered, and in a few minutes they were taken to the officer in
+charge of the picket, and having once convinced him of their identity,
+were heartily greeted and welcomed.
+
+"The French are advancing in great force to attack," Tom said; "please
+forward us instantly to the general."
+
+The matter was too important for an instant's delay, and a sergeant
+was at once told off to accompany them.
+
+The first faint blush of daylight was in the east when they arrived
+at the cottage which served as General Craufurd's quarters, and, upon
+their speaking to the sentinel at the door, a window was thrown open,
+and a deep voice demanded "What is it?"
+
+"We have just arrived through the French lines," Tom said, "the enemy
+are at hand in force."
+
+The casement closed, and an instant afterwards the general came out.
+"Who are you?"
+
+"We belong to the Norfolk Rangers, general, and have been detached on
+service in the interior; we have only just made our way back."
+
+"How am I to know your story is true?" the general asked sharply.
+
+"You may, perhaps, remember, sir, we landed from the 'Latona,' and you
+kindly lent us horses to accompany you."
+
+"Aha! I remember," the general said. "Well, your news?"
+
+"The French have crossed the Turones in force, sir; at least they have
+a good many guns with them."
+
+"Which way were they going?"
+
+"As far as we could judge by the sound, sir, they were taking up a
+position between Villa Formosa and Fort Conception."
+
+"Good," the general said shortly; then turning to three or four of his
+staff who had followed him from the cottage, "Get the troops under
+arms at once. Come in here, gentlemen."
+
+The Scudamores entered, and as they came into the light of a candle
+which stood on the table the general smiled grimly.
+
+"It is lucky you were able to recall yourselves to my memory, for
+I should have needed some strong evidence to persuade me you were
+British officers had I seen you before you spoke. You are wet to the
+skin; there is a brandy bottle, and you will find some bread and cold
+fowl in that cupboard."
+
+Five minutes later the boys followed General Craufurd from his hut.
+
+Short as was the time which had elapsed since their arrival, the
+troops were already under arms, for three months of incessant alarm
+and watchfulness had enabled this splendid division to act as one man,
+and to fall in at any hour of the day or night in an incredibly short
+time. Ten minutes later and the ramble of the baggage wagons was
+heard along the road towards the bridge. The morning was clearing
+fast, the clouds lifted, and the daylight seemed to break with unusual
+suddenness.
+
+The dark masses of the French became visible forming up before the
+Turones, and Craufurd hurried forward his cavalry and guns to check
+their advance.
+
+"Hurry the infantry up, hurry them up," the general said urgently to
+the officers by him. "Let them take post along the ridge, and then
+fall back fighting towards the bridge. Major MacLeod," he said to an
+officer of the 43d, "take these gentlemen with you; they are officers
+of the Norfolk Rangers. They will join your regiment for the present.
+When your regiment falls back, occupy that stone inclosure a little
+way down the slope at the left of the road, and hold the enemy in
+check while the troops file over the bridge."
+
+The officer addressed looked with surprise at the boys, and signing to
+them to follow, hurried off to his regiment, which was on the left of
+the British line.
+
+Next to them came a regiment of Portuguese riflemen, with a wing of
+the 95th upon either flank, while the 52d formed the right of the
+line.
+
+Upon reaching the regiment, Major MacLeod briefly introduced the boys
+to the colonel, who said, "As you have no arms, gentlemen, I think you
+had better make for the bridge at once."
+
+"Thank you, sir," Tom replied, "there will be some muskets disposable
+before long, and directly they are so we will take our place in the
+ranks."
+
+They had now leisure to look round and examine their position, and a
+glance was sufficient to show how great was the peril in which General
+Craufurd's obstinacy had placed his little force. In front of them
+were 24,000 French infantry, 5000 cavalry, and 30 pieces of artillery.
+An overwhelming force indeed, and one which could scarcely have been
+withstood by the 4000 British infantry, even under the most favorable
+conditions of position. The position, however, was here wholly against
+the British. They stood at the edge of a plateau, and behind them the
+ground fell away in a steep hillside to the Coa, a mile distant, and
+across the Coa there was but a single bridge.
+
+The enemy was approaching fast. Ney's great brigade of cavalry swept
+the British horse before them, and the infantry were following at a
+run.
+
+Resistance on the edge of the plateau was hopeless, and Craufurd
+ordered the infantry to fall back at once. The 43d filed into the
+inclosure, rapidly cut loopholes in the wall, and as the enemy
+appeared on the crest above opened a tremendous fire, under cover of
+which the cavalry and artillery trotted briskly and in good order down
+the road to the bridge.
+
+The Scudamores, having no duty, stood at the entrance to the inclosure
+and watched the fight on their right. As the masses of French infantry
+appeared on the edge of the plateau they made no pause, but opening
+a heavy fire pressed forward on the retiring British troops, who
+were falling back in open order, contesting every inch of ground. So
+rapidly and hotly, however, did the French press after them that the
+British were soon pushed back beyond the line of the inclosure, and as
+the French followed closely, it was evident that the 43d would be cut
+oft and surrounded.
+
+Their colonel saw their danger, and called upon them to fall in and
+retreat, but the entrance was so narrow that it was clear at a glance
+that ere one company could pass through it the French would be upon
+them, and the regiment caught like rats in a trap.
+
+Officers and men alike saw the danger, and there was a pause of
+consternation.
+
+Peter was standing next to the colonel, and said suddenly as the idea
+flashed across him, "The wall is not very strong, sir, if the men mass
+against it and push together I think it will go."
+
+The colonel caught at the idea. "Now, lads, steady, form against the
+rear wall four deep, close together, shoulder to shoulder, as close
+as you can pack; now get ready, one, two, three!" and at the word the
+heavy mass of men swung themselves against the wall; it swayed with
+the shock, and many stones were displaced; another effort and the
+wall tottered and fell, and with a glad shout the 43d burst out, and
+trotting on at the double soon joined the rifles and 95th.
+
+The ground was rough and broken with rocks, vineyards and inclosures,
+and the troops, fighting with admirable coolness and judgment, took
+advantage of every obstacle and fell back calmly and in good order
+before the overwhelming force opposed to them.
+
+Fortunately the jealousies of the French generals, which throughout
+the campaign contributed in no slight degree to the success of
+the British, was now the cause of their safety, for Montbrun, who
+commanded the French heavy cavalry, refused to obey Ney's order to
+charge straight down to the bridge, in which case the whole English
+infantry would have been cut off; the French hussars, however, being
+on the British rear, charged among them whenever the ground permitted
+them to do so.
+
+Upon the British right the ground was more open than upon the left,
+and the 52d was therefore obliged to fall back more quickly than the
+rest of the line, and were the first to arrive at the bridge head,
+which was still choked with artillery and cavalry. This was the most
+dangerous moment, the rest of the infantry could not retreat until the
+bridge was clear, and the French with exulting shouts pressed hard
+upon them to drive them back upon the river.
+
+Major MacLeod, seeing the urgent danger, rallied four companies of his
+regiment upon the little hill on the right of the road, while Major
+Rowan collected two companies on another to the left. Here they were
+joined by many of the riflemen, and for a while the French advance was
+checked.
+
+The Scudamores had remained throughout close to Major MacLeod, and had
+long since armed themselves with the muskets and pouches of fallen
+men, and with 43d shakoes on their heads, were fighting among the
+ranks.
+
+The cloud of French skirmishers pressed hotly forward, and MacLeod,
+seeing that the bridge was still blocked, resolved suddenly upon
+a desperate measure. Taking off his cap, he pointed to the enemy,
+and calling upon his men to follow him, rode boldly at them. Peter
+Scudamore caught up a bugle which had fallen from a dead bugler by his
+side, blew the charge, and the soldiers, cheering loudly, followed
+MacLeod against the enemy.
+
+Astounded at this sudden and unexpected attack, the French skirmishers
+paused, and then fell back before the furious charge of the 43d, who
+pressed after them with loud and continuous cheering. Looking back,
+MacLeod saw that the bridge was now clear, and recalled the troops,
+who fell back rapidly again before the French infantry had recovered
+sufficiently from their surprise to press them.
+
+The hussars were, however, again forward, and were galloping down the
+road, which was here sunken between somewhat high banks. Tom and Peter
+were with the last company, which turned and prepared to receive them,
+when Tom, pointing to a coil of rope upon a cart which had broken
+down, shouted, "Quick, tie it to these posts across the road." Two or
+three men sprang to assist him, and in a minute the rope was stretched
+across the road at a foot from the ground, and fastened round a stone
+post on either side. They had scarcely seized their muskets and leapt
+on the bank again, when the French cavalry came thundering down the
+road. "Fire, a few of you," Tom said, "so as to call their attention
+up here," and in accordance with his order a dropping fire was opened.
+The French came along at a gallop; a few of the leading horses saw
+the rope and leapt it, but those behind caught it and fell, the mass
+behind pressed on, and in an instant the lane was choked with a
+confused mass of men and horses. "Now a volley," Tom cried, "and then
+to the bridge."
+
+Every musket was emptied in to the struggling mass, and then with a
+cheer, the men ran briskly down to the bridge, and crossed--the last
+of the British troops over the Coa.
+
+The rest of the infantry and artillery had already taken ground on the
+heights behind the river, and these opened fire upon the French as
+they approached the head of the bridge in pursuit. The British were
+now, however, safe in the position which they ought to have taken up
+before the advance of the French, and had General Craufurd obeyed his
+orders not to fight beyond the Coa, the lives of 306 of his gallant
+troops, including the officers, would have been saved.
+
+The battle, however, was not yet over. The artillery on both sides
+played across the ravine, the French skirmishers swarmed down to the
+river bank, and between them and the British infantry a rapid fire was
+exchanged, while a heavy column marched down to the bridge. With a
+deep-sounding cheer they advanced upon it, while with answering cheers
+the British opened fire upon them. The depth of the ravine at first
+deceived the British marksmen, and the column pressed on until its
+head was three-quarters across the bridge. Then the shower smote it,
+and beneath that terrible fire the head of the column melted away.
+Still it pressed on until across the bridge the corpses lay piled in a
+mass as high as the parapet, and beyond this heap, this terrible line,
+there was no living. Then sullenly and slowly the French fell back,
+while the British cheers rose exultingly along the hillside.
+
+Twice again did fresh columns pour on to the bridge, but only to melt
+away under the British fire, neither of them reaching the dreadful
+line which marked the point reached by the head of the first. The
+artillery and musketry fire on both sides continued until four in the
+afternoon, when a heavy rain set in, and the fire ceased altogether.
+
+As the Coa was fordable at several points lower down, and the French
+could therefore have turned the position next day, the British troops
+fell back during the night behind the Pinhel river, where Picton's
+division was also encamped.
+
+Next morning the boys exchanged their Spanish suits for the uniform
+of British officers, which they obtained from the effects of some of
+those who had fallen upon the previous day, these being, as is usual
+in a campaign, at once sold by auction, the amount realized being
+received by the paymaster for the benefit of the dead men's relatives.
+Major MacLeod had witnessed their ready presence of mind in throwing
+the rope across the road, and so checking the French charge, and
+giving time to the rear-guard to cross the bridge, and had made a very
+favorable report upon the subject.
+
+Two days later and they joined the Rangers, who were stationed at
+Guarda, and were received with the greatest heartiness by their
+brother officers, with warm but respectful greetings by the men, and
+with uproarious demonstrations of gladness on the part of Sambo.
+
+"The betting was two to one that you had gone down, boys," Captain
+Manley said, after the first greetings; "but Carruthers and myself
+have taken up all offers, and win I don't know how many dinners and
+bottles of wine. I had the strongest faith you would get through
+somehow. You will take up your quarters with me. I have two bedrooms
+upstairs there, which Sam has taken possession of in your name. He
+would have it that you were sure to be back in time for the first
+fight. Dinner will be ready at six, and after that there will be a
+general gathering round the fire in the open to hear your adventures.
+No doubt you would be dining with the colonel, but I know he is
+engaged to the general."
+
+"Yes, he told us so," Tom said, "and we are to dine with him
+to-morrow."
+
+"All right, then; we'll make a night of it. Carruthers is coming to
+dine, and Burke and Lethbridge; but the room won't hold more than six.
+We are going to have a feast, for Sam has got hold of a sucking-pig;
+where he got it from I dare not inquire, and Lethbridge said his
+fellow had, somehow or other, found a turkey; as to wine, we shall
+have it of the best, for Burke is quartered at the monastery, and the
+monks are so delighted at finding him a good Catholic that they have
+given him the run of their cellar."
+
+It was a jovial dinner, and no words can express the satisfaction and
+delight which beamed on Sam's face as he stood behind his master, or
+the grin of pride with which he placed the sucking-pig on the table.
+
+"Sam, Sam!" Captain Manley said reprovingly, "I fear that pig is not
+honestly come by, and that one of these days we shall hear that you
+have come to a bad end."
+
+"No, no, Massa Captain Manley, sar," Sam said, "dat pig come quite
+honest, dat pig made present to Sam."
+
+"A likely story that, Sam. Come, out with it. I have no doubt it was
+quite as honest as Lethbridge's turkey anyhow. Come, tell us how it
+was."
+
+Thus invoked, Sam's face assumed the pompons air with which he always
+related a story, and he began,--
+
+"Well, sar, de affair happened in dis way. When de massas arribe, two
+o'clock, and went in for long talk wid de colonel, dis chile said to
+himself, 'Now what am I going to get them for dinner?' De rations
+sarve out dis morning war all skin and bone, and war pretty nigh
+finished at lunch. Sam say to himself, 'Captain Manley's sure to say,
+'You dine wid me;' but as Captain Manley hadn't got no food himself,
+de invitation was berry kind, berry kind indeed; but massa wasn't
+likely to get fat on dat invitation."
+
+Sam's narrative was interrupted by a perfect shout of laughter upon
+the part of all at table, Captain Manley joining heartily in the laugh
+against himself. When they had a little recovered again, Sam went on
+as gravely as ever. "Dis struck Sam berry serious, not to have nothing
+for dinner after being away seben months; presently idea occur to dis
+chile, and he stroll permiscuous up to big farm-house on hill. When
+Sam got near house, kept out of sight of window; at last got quite
+close, took off shako, and put head suddenly in at window. Sure
+enough, just what Sam expected, dere sat missus of farm, fat ole
+woman, wid fat ole servant opposite her. De door was open, and dis
+little pig and several of his broders and sisters was a frisking in
+and out. De old women look up bofe togeder, and dey give a awful
+shriek when dey saw dis chile's head; dey fought it were de debil,
+sure enough. Dey drop down on dere knees, and begin to pray as fast as
+maybe. Den I give a loud 'Yah! yah!' and dey screams out fresh. 'Oh!
+good massa debil!' says the ole woman, 'what you want? I been berry,
+berry bad, but don't take me away.' You see, Massa Tom, I pick up
+little Spanish, 'nuff to understand since you been gone. I not say
+nuffin, and de ole woman den go on, 'If you want one soul Massa Debil,
+take dis here,' pointing to her serbant;' she been much more wicked
+nor me.' Den de serbant she set up awful shriek, and I says, 'Dis time
+I hab pity on you, next time I come, if you not good I carry you bofe
+away. But must take soul away to big debil 'else he neber forgibe me.
+Dere, I will carry off soul of little pig. Gib it me.' De serbant she
+gives cry ob joy, jump up, seize little pig, and berry much afraid,
+bring him to window. Before I take him I say to old missus, 'Dis a
+free gibt on your part?' and she say, 'Oh, yes, oh, yes, good Massa
+Debil, you can take dem all if you like.' I say, 'No; only one--and
+now me gib you bit advice. My Massa down below hear you very bad ole
+women, never gib noting to de poor, berry hard, berry hard. Me advise
+you change your conduct, or, as sure as eggs is eggs, he send me up
+again for you no time.' Den I gave two great 'Yah! yah's!' again berry
+loud, and showed de white ob my eyes, and dey went down on to knees
+again, and I go quietly round corner ob house, and walk home wid de
+pig which was giben to me. Noting like stealing about dat, Massa
+Manley, sar!"
+
+Sam's story was received with roars of laughter, and when they had
+recovered themselves a little, Captain Manley said, "It is lucky we
+march to-morrow, Sam, for if the good woman were to catch a glimpse of
+you in uniform, and were to find she had been tricked, she might lay
+a complaint against you, and although, as you say, the pig was freely
+given to you, I imagine the Provost Marshal might consider that it was
+obtained under false pretences. But here are the other men outside, we
+had better adjourn, for every one is longing to hear your adventures."
+
+It was a lovely evening, and as the officers of the Norfolk Rangers
+sat or lay round the fire, which was lit for light and cheerfulness
+rather than warmth, the boys, after their long wanderings among
+strangers, felt how pleasant and bright life was among friends
+and comrades. They had first to relate their adventures with the
+guerillas, after which it was agreed that they had earned the right to
+be silent for the rest of the evening, and song, and jest, and merry
+story went round the ring.
+
+Sam was installed under the direction of the doctor, a jovial
+Irishman, as concocter of punch, and his office was by no means a
+sinecure.
+
+"Now, major, give us the song of the regiment," Captain Manley said,
+and, as he spoke, there was a general cry round the circle of "The
+Rangers, the Rangers." "I'm agreeable," the major said. "Give me
+another tumbler of punch to get my pipes in order. Make it a little
+sweeter than the last brew, Sam; yes, that's better. Well, here
+goes--full chorus, and no shirking."
+
+THE RANGERS.
+
+  "Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah!
+    Here's to the corps that we love so well;
+  Ever the first in the deadly fray,
+    Steady and firm amid shot and shell.
+  Scattered as skirmishers out in the front,
+    Contesting each foot of the ground we hold,
+  Nor yielding a step though we bear the brunt
+    Of the first attack of the foeman bold.
+
+      Hurrah for the Rangers, hurrah! hurrah!
+      Here's to the corps that we love so well;
+      Ever the first in the deadly fray,
+      Steady and firm amid shot and shell.
+
+  "Steady boys, steady, the foe falls back,
+    Sullenly back to the beat of the drum,
+  Hark to the thunder that nears our flank
+    Rally in square, boys, their cavalry come.
+  Squadron on squadron, wave upon wave,
+    Dashing along with an ocean's force,
+  But they break into spray on our bayonets' points,
+    And we mock at the fury of rider and horse.
+
+      Hurrah for the Rangers, &c.
+
+  "The gunner may boast of the death he deals
+    As he shatters the foe with his iron hail,
+  And may laugh with pride as he checks the charge,
+    Or sees the dark column falter and quail.
+  But the gunner fights with the foe afar,
+    In the rear of the line is the battery's place,
+  The Ranger fights with a sterner joy
+    For he strives with his foemen face to face.
+
+      Hurrah for the Rangers, &c.
+
+  "The cavalry man is dashing and gay,
+    His steed is fast, and his blade is fine,
+  He blithely rides to the fiercest fray,
+    And cuts his way through the foeman's line,
+  But the wild, fierce joys of the deadly breach,
+    Or the patient pluck of the serried square
+  Are far away from the horseman's reach,
+    While the Norfolk Rangers are sure to be there.
+
+      Hurrah for the Rangers, &c."
+
+Long, loud, and hearty was the cheering as the last chorus concluded.
+"Very good song, very well sung, jolly companions every one," shouted
+the doctor. "Now, Manley, keep the ball rolling, give us the 'The
+Bivouac,'" Captain Manley emptied his glass, and, without hesitation,
+began--
+
+THE BIVOUAC.
+
+  "The weary march is over, boys, the camp fire's burning bright,
+  So gather round the blazing logs, we'll keep high feast to-night,
+  For every heart is full of joy, and every cheek aglow,
+  That after months of waiting, at last we meet the foe.
+  To-morrow's sun will see the fight, and ere that sun goes down,
+  Our glorious flag another wreath of victory shall crown.
+
+    Hurrah, hurrah for the bivouac,
+    With comrades tried and true,
+    With faces bright, and spirits light,
+    And the foemen's fires in view.
+
+  "Then fill your cups with Spanish wine, and let the toast go round,
+  Here's a health to all who love us on dear old England's ground.
+  Be their tresses gold or auburn, or black as ebon's hue,
+  Be their eyes of witching hazel, loving gray, or heaven's blue,
+  Here's to them all, the girls we love, God bless them every one;
+  May we all be here to toast them when to-morrow's work is done.
+
+    Hurrah, hurrah, &c.
+
+  "But whate'er to-morrow bring us, it shall shed no gloom to-night,
+  For a British soldier does not flinch from thought of death in fight;
+  No better ending could we wish, no worthier do we know,
+  Than to fall for King and country, with our face towards the foe;
+  And if we go, our friends who stay will keep our memory bright,
+  And will drink to us in silence by many a camp-fire's light.
+
+    Hurrah, hurrah, &c."
+
+When the last chorus had ceased, the boys, who had had a long march
+that morning, and were thoroughly tired, stole quietly off to bed,
+but it was not till long after they had gone to sleep that the jovial
+party round the fire broke up, and that Sam was relieved from his
+duties of concocter of punch.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+BUSACO AND TORRES VEDRAS.
+
+
+Instead of pressing forward upon his invasion of Portugal, Massena
+prepared to besiege Almeida, and for a month the British and
+Portuguese army remained in their position within a few hours' march
+of that town. Wellington expected that Almeida would be able to
+resist for two months, and hoped to find some opportunity for falling
+suddenly upon the besiegers; but even a resistance of two months would
+have made it so late in the season that Massena must have postponed
+his invasion until the next spring.
+
+Upon the morning of the 26th of August the French batteries opened
+fire, and from Guarda the dull, heavy roar of artillery could be heard
+all day. As darkness fell, the officers of the Rangers were, as usual,
+assembling round their fire, when the earth seemed to shake beneath
+their feet, and a flash like that of summer lightning lit the eastern
+sky. "What can that be?" was the general exclamation. A minute later,
+and a deep, heavy, prolonged roar sounded in their ears--then all was
+quiet.
+
+"That is a big magazine," Captain Manley said, "and I'm afraid it's
+the town, for it sounded too heavy for a mere field magazine. If it be
+the town, you'll see it won't hold out much longer; even if the actual
+damage is not very great, a great explosion always damages the morale
+of a defense, and in that case we shall have Massena upon us, and
+there will be wigs on the green ere many days are over."
+
+Captain Manley's conclusions were correct. The magazine of Almeida had
+exploded with terrific effect. Only six houses were left standing in
+the town, a considerable portion of the ramparts was thrown down, and
+five hundred people killed on the spot. The stones were hurled in all
+directions with such force that forty of the besiegers were hurt in
+the trenches.
+
+Colonel Cox, who commanded, endeavored to rally the panic-stricken
+garrison, and upon the following morning attempted to negotiate with
+Massena, who sent an officer to demand instant surrender.
+
+Defense was, in fact, impossible, but Colonel Cox attempted to
+negotiate, because he hoped that Wellington would at once advance to
+his rescue. His intentions were frustrated, however, by the treachery
+and mutiny of the principal Portuguese officers under him, and the
+French at once took possession of the ruins.
+
+The British army fell back a short distance when the news of the
+disaster arrived, and a fortnight of great anxiety and watchfulness
+passed, as it was not certain by which road or roads Massena would
+advance.
+
+It was not until the 18th of September that Massena fairly commenced
+his march, having chosen the road from Visen through Martagoa, and the
+next day the news reached the Rangers that the British army was to
+concentrate on the heights of Busaco.
+
+"So we are going to have a fight for it," Carruthers said to the boys,
+as the officers assembled in readiness to take their places when the
+troops had fallen in. "What will be the end of it?"
+
+"We shall lick them," an old captain said, "though they are two to
+one, and then they will march round us somehow, and then we shall have
+to fall back in all haste on Lisbon, and embark there, and we shall
+eat our Christmas dinner in England."
+
+There was a general murmur of assent, for at that time the belief was
+almost universal in the British army that they would be forced to
+abandon Portugal.
+
+"I do not know," Major Fanshawe said. "I heard last night, from a
+man who has just returned from sick leave at Lisbon, that there are
+thousands of peasants employed under our engineers in getting up some
+tremendous works some fifteen miles this side of Lisbon. I should not
+be surprised yet if Massena finds the chief a nut too hard to crack,
+with all his force."
+
+"I have heard something about these works at Torres Vedras," Captain
+Manley said, "a mere rumor; still I believe there must be something in
+it. Wellington has only some twenty-five thousand British troops, and
+as many Portuguese, while Massena has over a hundred thousand veterans
+at his command. Our game would be hopeless unless we have something to
+fall back on. No; I have every faith in our general. But there goes
+the bugle."
+
+On the 24th the Rangers, with the rest of Picton's division, arrived
+on the crest of Busaco, where Cole's and Craufurd's divisions arrived
+on the same day. This position was one of immense strength, being a
+long ridge, with a very deep valley in front. Upon the opposite side
+of this ravine the slope was as steep and sharp as that of Busaco
+itself, so that the opposite crest was within easy cannon shot.
+The enemy, in order to attack the British position, would have to
+descend into the bottom of this steep ravine, and then climb up the
+precipitous ascent, to meet the British soldiers awaiting them, fresh
+and unshaken, at the top. So strong, indeed, was the position that
+the English generals were doubtful whether Massena would venture to
+attack.
+
+Upon the 25th Craufurd moved his division forward, and would have
+repeated his mistake of the Coa had not Wellington himself gone
+forward and recalled the troops, bringing them off with difficulty
+in the face of the advancing masses of the French. By three in the
+afternoon, 40,000 French infantry were on the ridge opposite Busaco,
+and it appeared probable that the battle would take place that
+afternoon, in which case the British position would have been
+precarious, for neither Spencer's, Hill's, nor Leith's divisions were
+up.
+
+Massena, however, was miles behind, and Ney, who commanded the
+advance, could not attack without orders; thus, the moment favorable
+for the French passed by. When Massena arrived next day, the British
+divisions were all up and in their places, and the long crest of
+Busaco swarmed with troops. Hill occupied the right across the road to
+Pena Cova, then came Leith's 5th division, then came Picton with the
+3d division, with Spencer's division, the 1st, next to him. On a
+plateau in front of a convent lay Craufurd and Pack, while Cole, with
+the 4th division, was on the left.
+
+The 27th and 28th were passed in comparative tranquillity, the rival
+armies surveying each other across the chasm. From the woods far below
+came up the constant crack of the rifle, as the skirmishers on either
+side pushed each other backwards; and on the evening of the 28th this
+fighting increased so much in strength and intensity, that the British
+troops were some time under arms in expectation of a night attack, for
+the enemy's riflemen had pressed far up on the hill-side towards the
+British lines. As the night went on, however, the fire ceased, and the
+dark ravine between the two long lines of bright watch-fires became
+hushed and still.
+
+The Rangers were with Picton's division, and were out as an advance
+half way down the ravine, two companies being down in the bottom as
+skirmishers. Morning was but just breaking when a heavy fire burst out
+in front. The regiment sprang to its feet, and prepared for action.
+It was not long in coming, for the fire rolled rapidly up the hill
+towards them, and the skirmishing companies came running back, pressed
+by a heavy column of the enemy. Reynier had formed in two divisions,
+one of which was now pressing forward against Picton's right, while
+the object of the other was to gain the crest still farther to the
+right, and so place themselves between Picton and Leigh. The whole
+regiment was at once engaged, but the French assault was too powerful
+to be resisted, and the Rangers and the other regiments of the
+advanced brigade gave way sullenly, while the French eagerly pressed
+up the hill, although a battery opened upon them from the crest, while
+they were unsupported by their own artillery.
+
+"Golly, Massa Peter, dese fellows fight berry hard; look as if dey
+lick us dis time," the black, who was in Peter's company, said to him
+as the regiment retreated.
+
+"The battle has only begun yet, Sam. We have plenty of fresh troops at
+the top of the hill."
+
+"Good ting, dat, Massa Peter. Berry hard work, dis--climb hill, carry
+kit, fire gun, dodge de bullets, all sam time."
+
+"You didn't dodge that bullet sharp enough, Sam," Peter said with a
+laugh, as the negro's shako was carried off with a ball.
+
+"Him cum too fast. Dere, you frog-eating thief." he said angrily as he
+fired his musket at an advancing foe. "Dat serve you right," he went
+on to himself as the Frenchman fell. "You spoil Sam's hat. Dis colored
+gentleman catch cold first time him come on to rain."
+
+The French continued their impetuous advance. Picton's right, as they
+climbed the hill, fell back towards his center, and in half an hour
+from the first shot being fired the head of the French column had won
+the crest, and, being between Leigh and Picton's divisions, had cut
+the British position. Then the column nearest to Picton's division
+began to wheel to its right, so as to sweep the crest.
+
+"Lie down, the Rangers; every man down," shouted the colonel, and the
+breathless men threw themselves panting on the ground. A wild Irish
+shout was heard behind them as they did so, and a tremendous volley of
+musketry rang over their heads, and then the 88th and a wing of the
+45th dashed across them, and, with fierce cheers, charged that portion
+of the column engaged in wheeling. Breathless and in disorder from
+their prodigious efforts, the French were unable to resist this fresh
+attack. In an instant the British were among them, and mixed up in
+wild confusion, fighting hand to hand, the mass of combatants went
+mingled together down the hill. Nor was the success of the French
+column which had gained the crest of long duration, for Leith brought
+up one of his brigades; Colonel Cameron, with the 9th Regiment, dashed
+at the enemy with the bayonet, without firing a single shot, while
+the 38th attacked their flank; and the French, unable to resist the
+onslaught, relinquished their position and retreated down the hill.
+Nor upon the French right had Ney's attack proved more successful.
+
+Napier thus describes the combat in this quarter of the field:--"When
+the light broke, three heavy masses detached from the sixth corps were
+seen to enter the woods below, and to throw forward a profusion of
+skirmishers; one of them, under General Marchand, emerging from the
+dark chasm and following the main road, seemed intent to turn the
+right of the light division; a second, under Loison, made straight up
+the mountain against the front; the third remained in reserve. Simon's
+brigade, leading Loison's attack, ascended with a wonderful alacrity,
+and though the light troops plied it incessantly with musketry, and
+the artillery bullets swept through it from the first to the last
+section, its order was never disturbed, nor its speed in the least
+abated. Ross's guns were worked with incredible quickness, yet their
+range was palpably contracted every round; the enemy's shots came
+ringing up in a sharper key, the English skirmishers, breathless
+and begrimed with powder, rushed over the edge of the ascent, the
+artillery drew back, and the victorious cries of the French were heard
+within a few yards of the summit. Craufurd, standing alone on one of
+the rocks, had been intently watching the progress of their attack,
+and now, with a shrill tone, ordered the two regiments in reserve to
+charge. The next moment a horrid shout startled the French column, and
+eighteen hundred British bayonets went sparkling over the hill. Yet so
+brave, so hardy were the leading French, that each man of the first
+section raised his musket, and two officers and ten men fell before
+them. Not a Frenchman had missed his mark. They could do no more. The
+head of their column was violently thrown back upon the rear, both
+flanks were overlapped at the same time by the English wings, three
+terrible discharges at five yards' distance shattered the wavering
+mass, and a long line of broken arms and bleeding carcases marked the
+line of flight."
+
+Ney did not renew the attack, and with some desultory skirmishing the
+battle ended at two o'clock, and an hour's truce enabled both parties
+to carry off their wounded.
+
+Small parties of the French came in contact with the English
+skirmishers during the afternoon, but the battle of Busaco was over.
+
+"Don't call dat much of battle," Sam said discontentedly. "Just little
+fierce fight, berry out of bref, and den, just as second wind came,
+all ober."
+
+The battle of Busaco was indeed one of secondary importance. The
+losses were not great on either side, although that of the French was
+fully threefold greater than that of the British, as the former were
+exposed during their attack to the grape and shell of the British
+guns, while the French guns afforded no assistance to their infantry.
+The French loss, in killed and wounded and prisoners, did not exceed
+4000, of which only 800 were killed. Nor was any strategical advantage
+gained by the battle, for the French, upon the following day, found
+a road across the hills to the British left from Martagoa through
+Bonzalva.
+
+Throughout the day they made feints of renewing the attack upon the
+English position, and it was not until late in the afternoon that long
+columns of men were seen crossing the hill to the left; and Wellington
+discovered that Busaco had been won in vain, for that his flank was
+turned, and there was nothing for it but to fall back upon Torres
+Vedras. Before night the whole British army was in retreat.
+
+"What a horrible scene of confusion," Tom remarked, as they marched
+into the town of Coimbra next day.
+
+"Confusion!" Captain Manley said; "it is enough to drive a
+commander-in-chief out of his mind. Here Wellington has for weeks
+been endeavoring to get the Portuguese Government to compel all the
+population to retire upon Lisbon, carrying all they can, destroying
+the mills, and burning all the corn they could not carry off. The
+Government did issue the order, but it has taken no steps whatever to
+carry it out, although they knew all along that we could never repel
+the invasion in the open. As it is, the greater portion of these poor
+wretches will lose all they possess, which they might have carried
+off quietly enough during the last two months. Many of them will lose
+their lives, and they will block the roads so that we shall have the
+French down on us to a certainty."
+
+Nothing could be more sad than the scene. The streets of Coimbra were
+crowded with fugitives from the country round, and these, as well as
+the inhabitants, were all preparing to push onwards towards Lisbon.
+Bullock carts and carriages, mules, donkeys, and horses were crowded
+together, all laden with the aged, the children, the sick, and such
+property as was most portable and valuable. Happily Massena had
+a circuitous detour to make; the road in the mountain defile was
+scarcely passable, and throughout the march he displayed but little
+energy; consequently it was not until the morning of the first of
+October that his cavalry engaged those of the light division which was
+covering the retreat. The division fell back through the town, and the
+inhabitants, who had lingered to the last in some vague hope that the
+French would not come, now rushed out again. The bridge behind the
+town was choked, and the troops had to halt for some time. In the rear
+the pistol shots of the cavalry told of the approach of the French,
+and the din made by the panic-stricken fugitives was increased by the
+yells of the prisoners shut up and forgotten in the prison hard by.
+Their cries and supplications were too painful to be resisted, and the
+British forced the prison doors and let them free. Once across the
+bridge, the troops found the defile of Condeixa so choked up that it
+was impossible to effect a passage, and, had the French pressed them
+the division must have been destroyed.
+
+The French infantry, however, had not arrived, and by night the road
+was cleared, and the troops passed on.
+
+There was no pursuit, for Massena allowed his troops to halt and
+plunder Coimbra, and the British by easy marches, fell back to
+Torres Vedras; but though unpursued, the disorder and relaxation of
+discipline which always marks a retreat, showed itself, and Wellington
+was obliged to hang several plunderers, and to resort to other severe
+measures to restore to discipline that army which, only a week before,
+had repulsed the best troops of France. Towards the end of the march
+the French pressed them again, and Craufurd, with his light division,
+had a narrow escape of being cut off.
+
+Great was the satisfaction of the British troops when they took up the
+position so carefully prepared for them; equally great the surprise of
+Massena and the French army when they beheld the almost impregnable
+line of redoubts and fortresses of whose very existence they had only
+heard a confused rumor two or three days before. And yet formidable
+as was the chain of forts occupied by the British, this was weak in
+comparison to the second line, some five or six miles in the rear,
+to which Wellington would have fallen back if driven from his first
+position. This second position was indeed that which he had originally
+intended to have taken up, the redoubts on the exterior range of hills
+being intended as outposts; but, while Massena delayed his advance,
+the outside line of fortifications had so grown and increased in
+strength, that Wellington resolved to hold them in the first place.
+
+There were, therefore, as will be seen by the plan, three lines of
+defense. The first from Alhandra on the Tagus to Zizandre on the
+sea-coast. This, following the windings of the hills, was twenty-nine
+miles long; the second and main line was from Quintella on the Tagus
+to the mouth of the San Lorenza, twenty-four miles in length; the
+third, intended to cover an embarkation, in case of necessity,
+extended from Passo d'Arcos on the Tagus to the town of Junquera on
+the coast.
+
+Massena spent some days in surveying the British position, and came to
+the conclusion that it was too strong to be attacked. Had the order
+of Wellington been carried out, and the whole country wasted of
+provisions, the French army must have made a precipitate retreat to
+avoid starvation, for they had no provisions or connection with Spain.
+Wilson and Trant, with Portuguese levies, hung upon their rear, and
+captured Coimbra, where Massena had left his sick and wounded, 5000 in
+number, upon the very day after the main French army advanced from the
+town. So vast were the supplies, however, left in the country that
+Massena was able to take up his position, first immediately in front
+of the British lines, and afterwards at Santarem, within a day's march
+of them, and to maintain his army in food throughout the winter until
+the beginning of March.
+
+"Have you seen the _Gazette_, Scudamore?" Carruthers asked, rushing
+into the tent one morning about a week after the regiment had settled
+down in its tents on the heights of Torres Vedras.
+
+"No; what's up?" Tom replied.
+
+"There you are; you have both got your steps. Thomas Scudamore,
+ensign, Norfolk Rangers, to be lieutenant, for distinguished services
+in the field. Peter Scudamore, ditto, ditto. I wondered the chief had
+done nothing for you after your journey through Spain."
+
+"I am sure I did not expect anything," Tom answered, "and was quite
+content when the colonel told us that Lord Wellington had said he was
+pleased with the manner we had done our work. However, I am very glad;
+but it is not pleasant going over five or six fellows' heads."
+
+"Fortune of war," Carruthers said laughing. "Besides, two of them are
+at the depôt, Sankey is away on sick leave, and none of the three who
+are senior to you here will ever set the Thames on fire. No, no, you
+have fairly earned your step and no one can say a word against it."
+
+The news soon spread, and the boys were heartily congratulated by all
+the officers of the regiment on their promotion, which placed them
+next on the list to Carruthers, who had previously been the junior
+lieutenant. Promotion in those days was rapid, and after a severe
+engagement an ensign only joined upon the previous week might find
+himself a lieutenant, from the number of death vacancies caused in
+the ranks above him. The Norfolk Rangers had not suffered heavily at
+Talavera, or the boys might have had their lieutenant's rank before
+this, without performing any exceptional services.
+
+"I wish we could get two months' leave, Tom," Peter said that night.
+"Of course it is impossible, but it would be jolly to drop in upon
+Rhoda. By her letter she seems well and happy, and aunt is very kind
+to her. It would be nice; and now we are lieutenants, aunt wouldn't
+tell us to rub our shoes."
+
+"No," Tom laughed, "or be afraid of our pelting her pigeons and
+Minnie."
+
+"No," Peter said. "Evidently she is coming round. Rhoda said that
+since she has heard that we have got our commissions she has given
+up prophesying once or twice a day that we shall come to a bad
+end--probably hanging."
+
+"Yes, and Rhoda said in her letter yesterday that aunt was quite
+touched with those lace mantillas we got at Madrid, and sent off the
+day after we rejoined, and actually remarked that, although we could
+no longer be looked upon as boys, and seemed really as hair-brained
+and fond of getting into scrapes as ever, yet it was evident that we
+were good, kindly lads, and meant well at heart."
+
+"I wish," Tom said, with a sudden burst of laughter, "that we could
+dress in our old disguises, I as a student of theology you as a mild
+young novice; what a lark we would have with her!" and the boys went
+off into such shouts of laughter, that their aunt would have thought
+them more scatter-brained than ever if she had heard them, while from
+the tent of Captain Manley on one side, and of Carruthers and another
+young officer on the other, came indignant expostulations, and
+entreaties that they would keep quiet, and let other people go to
+sleep.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+ALBUERA.
+
+
+Very heavily did five months in the lines of Torres Vedras pass to the
+Norfolk Rangers. When, in the beginning of November, Massena fell back
+to Sautarem, the greater portion of the army followed him in readiness
+for attack should any openings be found. Massena, however, entrenched
+himself in a very strong position, and Wellington could no more attack
+him than he could attack the lines of Torres Vedras; so that both
+armies faced each other in inactivity until the beginning of March,
+when Massena broke up his camp and began to retreat.
+
+The Norfolk Rangers had been one of the regiments which had remained
+in their quarters on Torres Vedras throughout the winter, and great
+was the joy with which they received orders to strike their tents
+and push on in pursuit. The retreat of Massena was masterly. Ney's
+division covered the rear, and several sharp fights took place which
+are known in history as the combats of Pombal, Redinha, Cazal Nova,
+Foz d'Aronce, and Sabugal.
+
+In most of these the enemy were driven from their position by the
+British outflanking them and threatening their line of retreat; but in
+the last, by a mistake of General Erskine, a portion of his division
+attacked the enemy in rear, and, although vastly outnumbered, drove
+him off from the crest he held with desperate valor. Wellington
+himself said, "This was one of the most glorious actions British
+troops were ever engaged in."
+
+The next day the French crossed the Coa and Turones, and took up their
+position under the guns of Ciudad Rodrigo, which they had left six
+months before with the full assurance that they were going to conquer
+Portugal, and drive the British into the sea. The invasion cost
+Massena thirty thousand men, killed in battle, taken prisoners, or
+dead from hardships, fatigues and fevers.
+
+The Scudamores were not present at the battle of Sabugal, for on the
+afternoon after the combat of Foz d'Aronce an orderly rode up to the
+regiment and handed a note to the colonel. He read it, and at once
+summoned the Scudamores at his side.
+
+"An order from the commander-in-chief," he said, "for you to go to him
+at once."
+
+Following the orderly, the boys soon arrived at the cottage at which
+Lord Wellington had established his headquarters.
+
+"His lordship is with Lord Beresford," the aide-de-camp to whom they
+gave their names said, "but the orders are that you are to be shown in
+at once."
+
+The lads were ushered into a small room, where, seated at a table,
+were the commanders-in-chief of the British and the Portuguese troops.
+
+"Young gentlemen," the former said, looking up with his keen piercing
+eyes, "I have not seen you since your return from Spain. I am content
+with what you did, and with the detailed report you sent me in. I
+shall keep my eye upon you. Lord Beresford has asked me for two
+officers as aides-de-camp, and he specially requires them to have a
+perfect knowledge of Spanish. I have mentioned your names to him. It
+is not often that I confidently recommend young officers, but from
+what I know of you I have felt able to do so in the present case. You
+will, with him, have opportunities of distinguishing yourselves
+such as you could not have with your regiment. You accept the
+appointments?"
+
+Tom and Peter would far rather have remained with their regiment,
+but they felt that, after what Lord Wellington had said, they could
+not refuse; they consequently expressed at once their willingness
+to serve, and their thanks to the general for his kindness in
+recommending them.
+
+"You can ride, I hope?" Lord Beresford, a powerfully-built,
+pleasant-looking man, said.
+
+"Yes, sir, we can both ride, but at present--"
+
+"You have no horses, of course?" Lord Beresford put in. "I will
+provide you with horses, and will assign servants to you from one of
+the cavalry regiments with me. Will you join me at daybreak to-morrow?
+we shall march at once."
+
+There was a general expression of regret when the Scudamores informed
+their comrades that they were again ordered on detached duty. As
+to Sam, when Tom told him that he could not accompany them, he was
+uproarious in his lamentations, and threatened to desert from his
+regiment in order to follow them. At this the boys laughed, and told
+Sam that he would be arrested and sent back before he had gone six
+hours.
+
+"I tink, Massa Tom, dat you might hab told de general dat you hab got
+an fust-class serbent, and dat you bring him wid you."
+
+"But we shall be mounted now, Sam, and must have mounted men with us.
+You can't ride, you know."
+
+"Yes, massa, dis child ride first-rate, he can."
+
+"Why, Sam, I heard you say not long ago you had never ridden on a
+horse all your life."
+
+"Never hab, massa, dat's true 'nuff; but Sam sure he can ride. Berry
+easy ting dat. Sit on saddle, one leg each side--not berry difficult
+dat. Sam see tousand soldiers do dat ebery day; dey sit quite easy on
+saddle; much more easy dat dan beat big drum."
+
+The boys laughed heartily at Sam's notion of riding without practice,
+and assured him that it was not so easy as he imagined.
+
+"Look here, Sam," Peter said at last, "you practice riding a little,
+and then next time we get away we will ask for you to go with us." And
+with this Sam was obliged to be content.
+
+Half an hour later, when the boys were chatting with Captain Manley,
+Carruthers, and two or three other officers, in the tent of the
+first-named officer, they heard a commotion outside, with shouts of
+laughter, in which they joined as soon as they went out and saw what
+was going on.
+
+Sam, upon leaving the Scudamores, determined at once upon trying the
+experiment of riding, in order that he might--for he had no doubt all
+would be easy enough--ride triumphantly up to his masters' tent and
+prove his ability to accompany them at once. He was not long before
+he saw a muleteer coming along sitting carelessly on his mule, with
+both legs on one side of the animal, side-saddle fashion, as is the
+frequent custom of muleteers. It was evident, by the slowness of his
+pace, that he was not pressed for time.
+
+Sam thought that this was a fine opportunity.
+
+"Let me have a ride?" he said to the muleteer in broken Portuguese.
+
+The man shook his head. Sam held out a quarter of a dollar. "There,"
+he said, "I'll give you that for a hour's ride."
+
+The muleteer hesitated, and then said, "The mule is very bad tempered
+with strangers."
+
+"Oh, dat all nonsense," Sam thought, "he only pretend dat as excuse;
+any one can see de creature as quiet as lamb; don't he let his master
+sit on him sideways?"
+
+"All right," he said aloud, "I try him."
+
+The muleteer dismounted, and Sam prepared to take his place on the
+saddle. By this time several of the Rangers had gathered round, and
+these foreseeing, from the appearance of the mule and the look of sly
+amusement in the face of the muleteer, that there was likely to be
+some fun, at once proposed to assist, which they did by giving advice
+to Sam of the most opposite nature. Sam was first going to mount on
+the off side, but this irregularity was repressed, and one wag, taking
+the stirrup of the near side in his hand, said, "Now, Sam, up you go,
+never mind what these fellows say, you put your right foot in the
+stirrup, and lift your left over the saddle."
+
+Sam acted according to these instructions, and found himself, to his
+intense amazement and the delight of the bystanders, sitting with his
+face to the mule's tail.
+
+"Hullo," he exclaimed in astonishment, "dis all wrong; you know noting
+about de business, you Bill Atkins."
+
+And Sam prepared to descend, when, at his first movement, the mule put
+down his head and flung his heels high in the air. Sam instinctively
+threw himself forward, but not recovering his upright position before
+the mule again flung up her hind quarters, he received a violent
+blow on the nose. "Golly!" exclaimed the black in a tone of extreme
+anguish, as, with water streaming from his eyes, he instinctively
+clutched the first thing which came to hand, the root of the mule's
+tail, and held on like grim death. The astonished mule lashed out
+wildly and furiously, but Sam, with his body laid close on her back,
+his hands grasping her tail, and his legs and feet pressing tight to
+her flanks, held on with the clutch of despair.
+
+"Seize de debil!--seize him!--he gone mad!"--he shouted frantically,
+but the soldiers were in such fits of laughter that they could do
+nothing.
+
+Then the mule, finding that he could not get rid of this singular
+burden by kicking, started suddenly off at full gallop.
+
+"Stop him--stop him," yelled Sam. "Gracious me, dis am drefful."
+
+This was the sight which met the eyes of the Scudamores and their
+brother officers as they issued from their tents. The soldiers were
+all out of their tents now, and the air rang with laughter mingled
+with shouts of "Go it, moke!" "Hold on, Sam!"
+
+"Stop that mule," Captain Manley shouted, "or the man will be killed."
+
+Several soldiers ran to catch at the bridle, but the mule swerved and
+dashed away out of camp along the road.
+
+"Look, look," Tom said, "there are the staff, and Lord Wellington
+among them. The mule's going to charge them."
+
+The road was somewhat narrow, with a wall of four feet high on either
+side, and the general, who was riding at the head of the party, drew
+his rein when he saw the mule coming along at a furious gallop. The
+staff did the same, and a general shout was raised to check or divert
+her wild career. The obstinate brute, however, maddened by the shouts
+which had greeted her from all sides, and the strange manner in which
+she was being ridden, never swerved from her course. When she was
+within five yards of the party, the general turned his horse, touched
+him with his spur, and leaped him lightly over the wall; one or two
+others followed his example, but the others had not time to do so
+before the mule was among them. Two horses and riders were thrown
+down, one on either side, with the impetus of the shock, and then,
+kicking, striking and charging, the animal made its way past the
+others and dashed on in despite of the attempts to stop her, and
+the cries of "Shoot the brute," "Ride him down," and the angry
+ejaculations of those injured in its passage. Thirty yards behind the
+group of officers were the escort, and these prepared to catch the
+mule, when turning to the left she leaped the wall, eliciting a scream
+of terror from Sam, who was nearly shaken from his hold by the sudden
+jerk.
+
+The anger of the officers was changed into a burst of amusement at
+seeing Sam's dark face and staring eyes over the mule's crupper, and
+even Lord Wellington smiled grimly. An order was hastily given, and
+four troopers detached themselves from the escort and started off in
+pursuit. The mule was, however, a fast one, and maddened by fright,
+and it was some time before the foremost of the troopers was up to
+her. As he came alongside, the mule suddenly swerved round and lashed
+out viciously, one of her heels coming against the horse's ribs, and
+the other against the leg of the rider, who, in spite of his thick
+jack-boot, for some time thought that his leg was broken.
+
+He fell behind, and the others, rendered cautious by the lesson, came
+up but slowly, and prepared to close upon the animal's head, one
+from each side. Just as they were going to do so, however, they were
+startled by a scattered fire of musketry, and by the sound of balls
+whizzing about their ears, and discovered that in the ardor of the
+chase they had passed over the space which separated the French from
+the English lines, and that they were close to the former. At the same
+moment they saw a party of cavalry stealing round to cut off their
+retreat. Turning their horses, the dragoons rode off at full speed,
+but the French cavalry, on fresher horses, would have caught them
+before they reached the English lines had not a troop of British horse
+dashed forward to meet them upon seeing their danger. As to the mule,
+she continued her wild gallop into the French lines, where she was
+soon surrounded and captured.
+
+The boys were greatly vexed at the loss of their faithful black, but
+they had little time for grieving, for an hour after they rode off
+with General Beresford's division. Three days' march brought them
+to Campo Mayor, a town which had, two days before, surrendered to
+the French, who, surprised by the sudden appearance of the British,
+evacuated the place hastily and retreated, after suffering much from
+a brilliant charge of the 13th Hussars, who, although unsupported,
+charged right through the French cavalry, and Beresford then prepared
+to lay siege to Badajos. Had he pushed forward at once, he would have
+found the place unprepared for a siege, but, delaying a few days at
+Elvas to give his tired troops repose, the French repaired the walls,
+and were in a position to offer a respectable defense, when he made
+his appearance under its walls. The army was very badly provided with
+heavy guns, but the approaches were opened and the siege commenced in
+regular form, when the news arrived that Soult was marching with a
+powerful army to its relief. The guns were therefore withdrawn, the
+siege raised, and Beresford marched to meet Soult at Albuera.
+
+On the 15th of May he took up his position on rising ground looking
+down on Albuera, having the river in his front. Acting with him, and
+nominally under his orders, was a Spanish force under Blake. This
+was intended to occupy the right of the position, but with the usual
+Spanish dilatoriness, instead of being upon the ground, as he had
+promised, by noon, Blake did not arrive until past midnight; the
+French accordingly crossed the river unmolested, and the British
+general found his right turned.
+
+Beresford's position was now a very faulty one, as the woods
+completely hid the movements of the enemy, and a high hill, which they
+had at once seized, flanked the whole allied position and threatened
+its line of retreat.
+
+When the morning of the 16th dawned the armies were numerically very
+unequal. The British had 30,000 infantry, 2,000 cavalry, and 38 guns;
+the French, 19,000 infantry, 4,000 cavalry, and 40 guns; but of these
+the French were all veteran troops, while Beresford had but 6,000
+British troops, the remainder being Spanish and Portuguese, upon
+whom no reliance whatever was to be placed. The British officers
+present were all of opinion that their chances of success, under
+the circumstances, were slight indeed.
+
+The battle commenced at nine in the morning by an attack by the French
+general Godinot upon the bridge of Albuera. Their columns were,
+however, so completely plowed by the guns of the Portuguese upon
+the eminence behind it, that they made no progress, and Beresford
+perceived at once that the main attack would be made on his right. He
+despatched Tom Scudamore with orders to Blake to throw back his troops
+at right angles to the main front. The pig-headed Spaniard refused to
+obey, asserting that the main attack was in front. Colonel Hardinge
+was sent to insist upon the order being carried out, but Blake still
+refused, and Beresford himself rode furiously across and took the
+command just as the French column debouched from the wood on the
+right.
+
+Before the Spanish movement was completed the French were among them.
+Their cavalry swept round to the right rear, and menaced the line of
+retreat, the infantry charged the wavering Spanish battalions, and the
+latter at once fell into confusion and began to fall back. William
+Stewart now arrived with a brigade of the second division to endeavor
+to retrieve the day; but as they were advancing into position, four
+regiments of French cavalry, whose movements were hidden in the
+driving rain until they were close at hand, fell upon them and rode
+down two-thirds of the brigade, the 31st regiment alone having time
+to form square and repulse the horsemen.
+
+Beresford himself, with his staff, was in the middle of the mélée, and
+the lads found themselves engaged in hand-to-hand combats with the
+French troopers. All was confusion. Peter was unhorsed by the shock
+of a French hussar, but Tom shot the trooper before he could cut Peter
+down. Free for a moment, he looked round, and saw a French lancer
+charging, lance at rest, at Lord Beresford. "Look out, sir!" he
+shouted, and the general, turning round, swept aside the lance thrust
+with his arm; and as the lancer, carried on by the impetus of his
+charge, dashed against him, he seized him by the throat and waist,
+lifted him bodily from his saddle, and hurled him insensible to
+the ground. Just at this moment General Lumley arrived with some
+Portuguese cavalry, and the French lancers galloped off.
+
+The Spanish cavalry, who had orders to charge the French cavalry in
+flank, galloped up until within a few yards of them, and then turned
+and fled shamefully.
+
+Beresford, now furious at the cowardice of the Spanish infantry,
+seized one of their ensigns by the shoulder, and dragged him, with his
+colors, to the front by main force, but the infantry would not even
+then advance.
+
+The driving rain saved the allied army at this critical moment, for
+Soult was unable to see the terrible confusion which reigned in their
+ranks, and kept his heavy columns in hand when an attack would have
+carried with it certain victory.
+
+In the pause which ensued, the British regiments began to make their
+way to the front. Colbourn, with the 31st Regiment, was already there;
+Stewart brought up Haughton's brigade; and the 29th burst its way
+through the flying Spaniards and joined the 31st, these movements
+being made under a storm of shot and shell from the French artillery.
+Colonel Hartman brought up the British artillery, and the Spanish
+generals Zayas and Ballesteros succeeded in checking and bringing
+forward again some of the Spanish infantry.
+
+The French advanced in great force, the artillery on both sides poured
+in grape at short distance, and the carnage was terrible. Still the
+little band of British held their ground. Stewart was twice wounded,
+Haughton and Colonels Duckworth and Inglis slain. Of the 57th Regiment
+twenty-two officers and four hundred men fell out of the five hundred
+that had mounted the hill, and the other regiments had suffered nearly
+as severely. Not a third were standing unhurt, and fresh columns of
+the French were advancing.
+
+The battle looked desperate, and Beresford made preparations for a
+retreat. At this moment, however, Colonel Hardinge brought up General
+Cole with the fourth division, and Colonel Abercrombie with the third
+brigade of Colbourn's second division. Beresford recalled his order
+for retreat, and the terrible fight continued. The fourth division was
+composed of two brigades, the one, a Portuguese under General Harvey,
+was pushed down to the right to keep off the French cavalry, while the
+Fusilier brigade, composed of the 7th and 23rd fusilier regiments,
+under Sir William Myers, climbed the desperately contested hill, which
+Abercombie ascended also, more on the left.
+
+It was time, for the whole of the French reserves were now coming into
+action; six guns were already in the enemy's possession, the remnant
+of Haughton's brigade could no longer sustain its ground, and the
+heavy French columns were advancing exultantly to assured victory.
+
+Suddenly, through the smoke, Cole's fusilier brigade appeared on
+the right of Haughton's brigade, just as Abercrombie came up on its
+left. Startled by the sight, and by the heavy fire, the French column
+paused, and, to quote Napier's glowing words, "hesitated, and then,
+vomiting forth a storm of fire, hastily endeavored to enlarge their
+front, while a fearful discharge of grape from all their artillery
+whistled through the British ranks. Myers was killed, Cole and the
+three colonels, Ellis, Blakeney and Hawkshawe, fell wounded; and the
+fusilier battalions, struck by the iron tempest, reeled and staggered
+like sinking ships; but suddenly and sternly recovering, they closed
+with their terrible enemies, and then was seen with what a strength
+and majesty the British soldier fights. In vain did Soult with voice
+and gesture animate his Frenchmen; in vain did the hardiest veterans
+break from the crowded columns and sacrifice their lives to gain time
+for the mass to open out on such a fair field; in vain did the mass
+itself bear up, and, fiercely striving, fire indiscriminately upon
+friends and foes, while the horsemen hovering on its flank threatened
+to charge the advancing line. Nothing could stop that astonishing
+infantry; no sudden burst of undisciplined valor, no nervous
+enthusiasm weakened the stability of their order; their flashing eyes
+were bent on the dark columns in their front, their measured tread
+shook the ground, their dreadful volleys swept away the head of every
+formation, their deafening shouts overpowered the dissonant cries that
+broke from all parts of the tumultuous crowd, as, slowly and with
+horrid carnage, it was pushed by the incessant vigor of the attack to
+the farthest edge of the hill. In vain did the French reserves mix
+with the struggling multitude to sustain the fight; their efforts only
+increased the irremediable confusion, and the mighty mass breaking off
+like a loosened cliff, went headlong down the steep; the rain flowed
+after in streams discolored with blood, and eighteen hundred unwounded
+men, the remnant of six thousand unconquerable British soldiers, stood
+triumphant on the fatal hill."
+
+While this dreadful fight was going on, Hamilton's and Collier's
+Portuguese divisions, ten thousand strong, marched to support the
+British, but they did not reach the summit of the hill until the
+battle was over; they suffered, however, a good deal of loss from the
+French artillery, which, to cover the retreat, opened furiously upon
+them.
+
+The French were in no position to renew the attack, the allies quite
+incapable of pursuit, and when night fell the two armies were in the
+same position they had occupied twenty-four hours before.
+
+Never was British valor more conspicuously displayed than at the
+battle of Albuera. Out of 6,000 infantry they lost 4,200 killed and
+wounded, while the Spanish and Portuguese had but 2,600 killed and
+wounded out of a total of 34,000; the French loss was over 8,000.
+
+This desperate fight had lasted but four hours, but to all engaged
+it seemed an age. The din, the whirl, the storm of shot, the fierce
+charges of the cavalry, the swaying backwards and forwards of the
+fight, the disastrous appearance of the battle from the first, all
+combined to make up a perfectly bewildering confusion.
+
+The Scudamores, after its commencement, had seen but little of each
+other. Whenever one or other of them found their way to the general,
+who was ever in the thickest of the fray, it was but to remain there
+for a moment or two before being despatched with fresh messages.
+
+Tom's horse was shot under him early in the day, but he obtained a
+remount from an orderly and continued his duty until, just as the day
+was won, he received a musket ball in the shoulder. He half fell, half
+dismounted, and, giddy and faint, lay down and remained there until
+the cessation of the fire told him that the battle was over. Then he
+staggered to his feet and sought a surgeon. He presently found one
+hard at work under a tree, but there was so large a number of wounded
+men lying or sitting round, that Tom saw that it would be hours before
+he could be attended to. As he turned to go he saw an officer of the
+staff ride by.
+
+"Ah, Scudamore! Are you hit too?--not very badly, I hope? The chief
+was asking after you just now."
+
+"My shoulder is smashed, I think," Tom said, "and the doctor has his
+hands full at present; but if you will tie my arm tight across my
+chest with my sash, I shall be able to get on."
+
+The officer at once leapt from his horse, and proceeded to bind Tom's
+arm in the position he requested.
+
+"Have you seen my brother," Tom asked.
+
+"No, I have not; he was close to Beresford when the fusiliers dashed
+up the hill; his horse fell dead, but he was not hit, for I saw him
+jump up all right. I did not see him afterwards. As he could not have
+got a fresh mount then, I expect he joined the fusiliers and went up
+the hill."
+
+"Is the loss heavy?" Tom asked.
+
+"Awful--awful," the officer said. "If it had lasted another quarter of
+an hour, there would have been nobody left alive; as it is, there are
+not 2,000 men at the outside on their feet."
+
+"What, altogether?" Tom exclaimed.
+
+"Altogether," the officer answered sadly. "We have lose two men out of
+every three who went into it."
+
+"Thank you," Tom said. "Now where shall I find the general?"
+
+"Up on the hill. I shall see you there in a few minutes. I hope you
+will find your brother all right."
+
+Very slowly did Tom make his way up the steep slope, sitting down to
+rest many times, for he was faint from loss of blood and sick with the
+pain of his wound, and it was a long half hour before he joined the
+group of officers clustered round the commander-in-chief.
+
+He was heartily greeted; but in answer to his question as to whether
+any one had seen his brother, no one could give a satisfactory reply.
+One, however, was able to confirm what had been before told to him,
+for he had seen Peter on foot advancing with the fusilier brigade.
+Tom's heart felt very heavy as he turned away towards the front, where
+the fusiliers were standing on the ground they had so hardly won.
+The distance he had to traverse was but short, but the journey was a
+ghastly one. The ground was literally heaped with dead. Wounded men
+were seen sitting up trying to stanch their wounds, others lay feebly
+groaning, while soldiers were hurrying to and fro from the water
+carts, with pannikins of water to relieve their agonizing thirst.
+
+"Do you know, sergeant, whether they have collected the wounded
+officers, and, if so, where they are?"
+
+"Yes, sir, most of them are there at the right flank of the regiment."
+
+Tom made his way towards the spot indicated, where a small group of
+officers were standing, while a surgeon was examining a long line of
+wounded laid side by side upon the ground. Tom hardly breathed as
+he ran his eye along their faces, and his heart seemed to stop as
+he recognized in the very one the surgeon was then examining the
+dead-white face of Peter.
+
+He staggered forward and said in a gasping voice, "He is my
+brother--is he dead?"
+
+The surgeon looked up. "Sit down," he said sharply, and Tom, unable to
+resist the order, sank rather than sat down, his eyes still riveted on
+Peter's face.
+
+"No," the surgeon said, answering the question, "he has only fainted
+from loss of blood, but he is hit hard, the bullet has gone in just
+above the hip, and until I know its course I can't say whether he has
+a chance or not."
+
+"Here, sergeant, give me the probe," and with this he proceeded
+cautiously to examine the course of the ball. As he did so his anxious
+face brightened a little.
+
+"He was struck slantingly," he said, "the ball has gone round by the
+back; turn him over, sergeant. Ah, I thought so; it has gone out on
+the other side. Well, I think it has missed any vital part, and in
+that case I can give you hope. There," he said after he had finished
+dressing the wound and fastening a bandage tightly round the body;
+"now pour some brandy-and-water down his throat, sergeant, and
+sprinkle his face with water. Now, sir, I will look at your shoulder."
+
+But he spoke to insensible ears, for Tom, upon hearing the more
+favorable report as to Peter's state, had fainted dead off.
+
+The surgeon glanced at him. "He'll come round all right," he said.
+"I will go on in the mean time," and set to work at the next in the
+ghastly line.
+
+It was some time before Tom recovered his consciousness; when he did
+so, it was with a feeling of intense agony in the shoulder.
+
+"Lie quiet," the surgeon said, "I shan't be long about it."
+
+It seemed to Tom, nevertheless, as if an interminable time passed
+before the surgeon spoke again.
+
+"You'll do," he said. "It is an awkward shot, for it has broken the
+shoulder bone and carried a portion away, but with quiet and care you
+will get the use of your arm again. You are lucky, for if it had gone
+two inches to the left it would have smashed the arm at the socket,
+and two inches the other way and it would have been all up with you.
+Now lie quiet for awhile; you can do nothing for your brother at
+present. It may be hours before he recovers consciousness."
+
+Tom was too faint and weak to argue, and a minute later he dropped off
+to sleep, from which he did not wake until it was dusk. Sitting up, he
+saw that he had been aroused by the approach of an officer, whom he
+recognized as one of General Beresford's staff.
+
+"How are you, Scudamore?" he asked. "The general has just sent me to
+inquire."
+
+"He is very kind," Tom said. "I think that I am all right, only I am
+horribly thirsty."
+
+The officer unslung a flask from his shoulder. "This is weak
+brandy-and-water. I have brought it over for you. I am sorry to hear
+your brother is so bad, but the doctor gives strong hopes of him in
+his report."
+
+Tom bent down over Peter. "He is breathing quietly," he said. "I hope
+it is a sort of sleep he has fallen into. What are we doing?"
+
+"Nothing," the officer answered; "there is nothing to do; every
+unbounded man is under arms in case the French attack us in the night.
+I expect, however, they will wait till morning, and if they come on
+then, I fear our chance is a slight one indeed. We have only 1,800 of
+our infantry; the German regiments and the Portuguese will do their
+best; but the Spanish are utterly useless. Soult has lost more men
+than we have, but we are like a body which has lost its back-bone; and
+if the French, who are all good soldiers, renew the battle, I fear it
+is all up with us."
+
+"Have you got all our wounded in?" Tom asked.
+
+"No," the officer said bitterly. "Our unwounded men must stand to
+arms, and Lord Beresford sent over to Blake just now to ask for the
+assistance of a battalion of Spaniards to collect our wounded, and the
+brute sent back to say that it was the custom in allied armies for
+each army to attend to its own wounded."
+
+"The brute!" Tom repeated with disgust. "How the poor fellows must be
+suffering!"
+
+"The men who are but slightly wounded have been taking water to all
+they can find, and the doctors are at work now, and will be all night
+going about dressing wounds. The worst of it is, if the fight begins
+again to-morrow, all the wounded who cannot crawl away must remain
+under fire. However, the French wounded are all over the hill too, and
+perhaps the French will avoid a cannonade as much as possible, for
+their sake. It is a bad look-out altogether; and between ourselves,
+Beresford has written to Lord Wellington to say that he anticipates a
+crushing defeat."
+
+"Is there any chance of reinforcements?" Tom asked.
+
+"We hope that the third brigade of the fourth division will be up
+to-morrow by midday; they are ordered to come on by forced marches.
+If Soult does not attack till they arrive, it will make all the
+difference, for 1,500 fresh men will nearly double our strength. But I
+must be going now. Good-bye."
+
+The surgeon presently came round again to see how the wounded officers
+were getting on. Tom asked him whether there was anything he could do
+for Peter; but the surgeon, after feeling his pulse, said: "No, not as
+long as he breathes quietly like this; but if he moves pour a little
+brandy-and-water down his throat. Now gentlemen, all who can must look
+after the others, for there is not an available man, and I must be at
+work all night on the field."
+
+There were many of the officers who were not hit too severely to move
+about, and these collected some wood and made a fire, so as to enable
+them to see and attend to their more severely wounded comrades.
+Tom took his place close to Peter, where he could watch his least
+movement, and once or twice during the night poured a little
+brandy-and-water between his lips. The other officers took it by turns
+to attend to their comrades, to keep up the fire, and to sleep. Those
+whose turn it was to be awake sat round the fire smoking, and talking
+as to the chances of the morrow, getting up occasionally to give drink
+to such of the badly wounded as were awake.
+
+Tom, faint with his wound, found it, towards morning, impossible to
+keep awake, and dozed off, to wake with a start and find that it was
+broad daylight. Soon afterwards, to his intense satisfaction, Peter
+opened his eyes. Tom bent over him. "Don't try to move, Peter; lie
+quiet, old boy."
+
+"What's the matter?" Peter asked with a puzzled look.
+
+"You have been hit in the body, Peter, but the doctor means to get you
+round in no time. Yes," he continued, seeing Peter's eyes fixed on his
+bandaged shoulder, "I have had a tap too, but there's no great harm
+done. There, drink some brandy-and-water, and go off to sleep again,
+if you can."
+
+The morning passed very slowly, the troops being all under arms,
+expecting the renewed attack of Soult, but it came not; and when early
+in the afternoon, the third brigade of the fourth division marched
+into camp, they were received with general cheering. A heavy load
+seemed taken off every one's heart, and they felt now that they could
+fight, if fight they must, with a hope of success.
+
+The new-comers, wearied as they were with their long forced marches,
+at once took the outpost duties, and those relieved set about the duty
+of collecting and bringing in all the wounded.
+
+Next morning the joyful news came that Soult was retiring, and all
+felt with a thrill of triumph that their sacrifices and efforts had
+not been in vain, and that the hard-fought battle of Albuera was
+forever to take its place among the great victories of the British
+army.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+INVALIDED HOME.
+
+
+Two days after the battle of Albuera, Lord Wellington himself arrived,
+and from the officers of his staff Tom heard the details of the battle
+of Fuentes d'Onoro, which had been fought a few days previously, and
+which had been nearly as hardly contested as had Albuera itself, both
+sides claiming the victory.
+
+The next day, the bulk of Beresford's army returned to the
+neighborhood of Badajos, which they again invested, while a long
+convoy of wounded started for Lisbon. The Scudamores accompanied it
+as far as Campo Major, where a large hospital had been prepared for
+those too ill to bear the journey. Peter was still unconscious. Fever
+had set in upon the day after the battle, and for three weeks he lay
+between life and death. Tom's arm was mending very slowly, and he
+would have had hard work indeed in nursing Peter had it not been for
+the arrival of unexpected assistance. A large villa had been taken
+close to the main hospital for the use of officers, and one of the
+rooms was allotted to the Scudamores.
+
+Upon the evening of the second day after their arrival, Tom was
+sitting by Peter's bedside, when, after a preliminary tap, the door
+opened, and to Tom's perfect amazement Sambo entered. The negro
+hurried forward, threw himself on his knees, seized Tom's hand and
+kissed it passionately, and then looking at the thin and fever-flushed
+face of Peter, he hid his face in his hands and sobbed unrestrainedly.
+
+"Hush, Sam, hush," Tom said soothingly. "My poor fellow, why, where
+have you come from? I thought you were a prisoner with the French."
+
+"I knew how it would be, Massa Tom," the black said, paying no
+attention to the questions. "First thing Sam said to himself when he
+got among French fellows, 'Dere, dose young gentlemen dey get into
+all sorts of danger widout Sam, sartin sure dey get hurt widout Sam
+to look after dem.' Dat idea troubled Sam berry much, took away Sam's
+sleep altogether."
+
+"Well it turned out so, as you see, Sam," Tom said with a smile, "but
+tell me how did you get away? But first give me some lemonade out of
+that jug, then you can tell me all about it."
+
+"Why, Massa Tom," Sam said, when he had complied with the request,
+"you didn't think dat dis chile was going to stop prisoner with dose
+French chaps; Sam not such a fool as dat, nohow. When dat cussed
+mule--I tell you fair, Massa Tom, dis chile conclude dat riding not
+such a berry easy ting after all--when dat cussed mule ran into French
+camp, de soldiers dey catch him, and dey take Sam off, and den dey
+jabber and laugh for all de world like great lots of monkeys. Well,
+for some time Sam he didn't say nothing, all de wind shook out of his
+body. Besides which he couldn't understand what dey say. Den all of
+a sudden, to Sam's surprise, up came a colored soldier, and he speak
+to Sam in de English tongue. 'Holla, broder, how you come here?" I
+ask. 'I been cook on board English merchant ship,' he say. 'Ship she
+taken by French privateer. When dey come to port dey say to me, "You
+not Englishman, you hab choice, you go to prison, or you be French
+soldier." Natural, I not want go prison, so I conclude be French
+soldier. I daresay dey gib you choice too.' Well, massa, a wink as
+good as a nod to blind hoss. So dey take me to tent, put me under
+guard, and next day a French officer come dat speak English. He ask
+me all sorts ob questions, and at last he ask me why I list English
+soldier. So you see I had got a little lie all ready, and me tell him,
+me one poor Melican negro man, cook on board Melican ship. Ship taken
+by English man-ob-war. Put Sam in prison and give him choice to go as
+soldier. "Den you not care about English,' de officer say, and Sam
+draw hisself up and pat his chest and say, 'Me Melican citizen, me no
+Britisher's slave, some day me go back States, go on board Melican
+man-ob-war, me pay out dese Britishers for make Sam slave.' Den de
+officer laugh, and say dat if I like I could fight dem now; and if I
+prefer French uniform to French prison, me could have him. Ob course
+I accep' offer, and harp an hour after me in French uniform. French
+officer try to make joke ob Sam, and ask whether I like cavalry or
+foot soldier. Sam say he had enuff of quadruples at present. Me remain
+French soldier three weeks, den cum great battle, dey call him Fuentes
+donory. Sam's regiment fight. Sam not like fire at red coats, so break
+bullet off catridge, neber put him in gun. We charge right into middle
+of village full of English soldiers, de bullets fly all about. Sam not
+see de point ob getting kill by mistake, so he tumble down, pretend to
+be dead. Presently French beaten back; when English soldier wid doctor
+cum look at wounded, dey turn Sam ober, and dey say, 'Hullo, here dead
+nigger.' 'Nigger yourself, John Atkins,' I say for sure enuff it's de
+ole regiment--'you say dat once again me knock your head off;' me jump
+up, and all de world call out, 'Hullo, why it's Sam.' Den me splain
+matter, and all berry glad, cept John Atkins, and next morning me gib
+him licking he member all his life, me pound him most to a squash.
+Four days ago colonel send for Sam, say, 'Sam, berry bad job, bofe
+Massas wounded bad, send you to nurse dem;' so dis chile come. Dat
+all, Massa Tom. Here letter for you from colonel, now you read dis
+letter, den you get in bed, you sleep all night, Sam watch Massa
+Peter."
+
+Greatly relieved to have his faithful servant again, and to know that
+Peter would be well cared for, instead of being left in charge of the
+Spanish hospital orderly, whenever weakness and pain obliged him to
+lie down, Tom abandoned his place by the bedside, and prepared for a
+tranquil night's rest, first reading the colonel's letter.
+
+"We are all grieved, my dear Scudamore, at hearing that you are both
+wounded, and that your brother is at present in a serious state. We
+trust, however, that he will pull through. I hear that Beresford has
+praised you both most highly in despatches, and that your names are
+sent home for companies. I heartily congratulate you. We have had some
+tough work at Fuentes d'Onoro, although nothing to what yours must
+have been at Albuera, still it was hot enough in all conscience, and
+we had over a hundred casualties in the regiment. Carruthers and
+Manley were both slightly wounded. Jones, Anstruther, Palmer, and
+Chambers were killed, and several of the others hit more or less hard.
+Sam has leave to remain with you until you rejoin, which will not, I
+fear, be for some little time. Every one sends kind messages. Yours
+truly, J. Tritton."
+
+Nothing could exceed the care and devotion with which Sam nursed his
+two masters, and Tom had the greatest difficulty in persuading him to
+lie down and get a short sleep each day while he sat by Peter's bed.
+At the end of three weeks Peter took a favorable turn. His fever
+abated, and he awoke to consciousness. Another fortnight and he was
+sufficiently convalescent to be moved, and accordingly they started to
+travel by very easy stages to Lisbon, there to take ship for England,
+as the doctor ordered Tom as well as his brother to go home for a
+while to recruit. Tom was the less reluctant to do so, as it was
+evident that with the force at his command Wellington would not be
+able to undertake any great operation, and that the siege and capture
+of Badajoz was the utmost likely to be accomplished in that season's
+campaign. The mails in due course had brought out the _Gazette_,
+and in it Tom and Peter Scudamore were promoted to be captains,
+unattached.
+
+Colonel Tritton, upon being applied to, readily gave leave for Sam
+to accompany his masters. It was a long journey to Lisbon, but the
+jolting of the country cart was made bearable by a layer of hay,
+two feet deep, upon which the mattresses were laid, Sam seeing that
+at each night's halt the hay was taken out, well shaken, and then
+returned to the cart, so as to preserve it light and elastic. A thick
+canopy of boughs kept off the heat of the sun, and under it, within
+reach of the invalids hung a gourd of fresh water, and a basket of
+fruit. Several other cart-loads of wounded officers accompanied them,
+and at night they would draw up by a grove of trees where water was
+handy, those who could walk would get out, the others would be lifted
+out on their mattresses, a great fire made, and round it the beds laid
+in a circle, and then the evening would be spent in pleasant chat,
+with many an anecdote and an occasional song, until the fire burnt
+low, the talk died away, and each, covered in his blankets to keep off
+the night dew, fell asleep. Pleasant as was the journey, however, it
+was with a thrill of delight that they caught their first sight of
+Lisbon, with its broad river, and the blue line of the sea beyond. A
+few days later, and they embarked on board a transport, which seven
+days afterwards, after a calm passage, arrived at Spithead.
+
+Peter was by this time gaining strength fast, but his back was so
+stiff and sore that he was unable to move it, and was obliged to swing
+himself along on crutches. The next day the coach took them to London,
+and they started the morning after for Marlborough. This time they had
+to go inside the coach, two gentlemen, who had previously secured the
+seats, kindly giving them up in favor of the wounded young officers,
+while Sam took his place on the roof, and amused his fellow-passengers
+with wonderful accounts of his adventures at the war. At the inn
+at which they took dinner, they alighted, and Tom recognized in the
+driver the same coachman who had driven them upon the memorable
+occasion of their being stopped by highwaymen three years before. "You
+don't remember us, coachman, do you?"
+
+"No, gentlemen, I can't say as how,--but eh! no, why you're the werry
+boys as shot the highwaymen. Well, I am glad to see you again, though
+you do look white and bad, both of you. I heard as how there were
+two wounded officers inside, and that black soldier has been telling
+all sorts of tales of the wonderful things as his masters had done,
+but not knowing as how it was you, I didn't much believe all he was
+telling. Now I quite see as how it was true; and how are you both?"
+
+"Getting on all right," Tom said, returning the warm shake of the
+coachman's hand, "and do you know, those pistols have saved our lives
+more than once."
+
+"Have they now," the coachman said, in high admiration, "but there, we
+most be moving, we are three minutes after time as it is; I shall see
+you again next time we stop, gentlemen."
+
+During the next stage the coachman and guard recounted to the outside
+passengers the affair of the stopping the coach, and Sam's black face
+shone with delight at the tale. Then he had his say, and related the
+story of his falling overboard and being rescued, and in consequence
+the lads were quite embarrassed when they next halted, by the
+attention of their fellow-travelers, who could scarcely understand how
+it was possible that two mere boys should have performed such feats of
+bravery.
+
+Arrived at Marlborough they looked round in vain for the one-horsed
+vehicle which had before met them. "I expect that aunt has not got
+our letter, Peter," Tom said. "It would probably go up to town in the
+coach with us, and is likely enough in the letter-bag in the boot.
+Well, we must have a post-chaise. Won't aunt and Rhoda be surprised;
+but they must be expecting us, because they will have had our letter
+from Lisbon."
+
+The horses were soon in, Sam took his seat in the rumble, and in a few
+minutes they were bounding over the road at a very different pace to
+that at which they had before traversed it. "There's the house among
+the trees," Peter said at last, "with aunt's pigeons on the roof as
+usual, and there's Minnie asleep on the window-sill, and there! yes,
+there's Rhoda."
+
+As he spoke a girl, who was sitting reading under a tree, leapt to her
+feet, on hearing a carriage stop, and then, catching sight of Peter
+waving his hat, while Tom made frantic efforts to open the door, gave
+a scream of delight, and rushed towards them, threw her arms round
+Tom's neck as he jumped out, and then leapt into the chaise and hugged
+and cried over Peter. He was soon helped out, and as they turned to go
+towards the house they saw their aunt coming out to meet them.
+
+Tom ran forward and throwing his arms round her neck kissed her
+heartily, and before she could recover from her surprise, Peter was
+alongside. "Please, aunt, you must kiss me," he said, "for I want my
+arms for my crutches." His aunt leaned forward and kissed him, and
+then wiped the tears from her eyes.
+
+"I am glad to see you back, my dear nephews," she said. "We did not
+understand each other very well before, but we shan't make any more
+mistakes. This is your black servant, I suppose," she said, as Sam
+came along, with a trunk in each hand. "Dear! dear! what a dreadfully
+ugly man."
+
+"How do you do, Sam?" Rhoda said, when he came up. "We have heard so
+much of you, and how kindly you nursed my brothers."
+
+"Sam quite well, tank you, little missy," Sam said, grinning all over
+his face and showing his white teeth.
+
+Miss Scudamore shrank towards Tom as Sam passed on, "Dear me, what
+sharp-looking teeth he has, Tom. They don't eat curious things, these
+black men, do they?"
+
+"What sort of curious things, aunt?"
+
+"Well, my dear, I know that these outlandish people do eat strange
+things, and I have heard the Chinese eat dogs and cats. Now, if he has
+a fancy for cats, I daresay I could buy him some in the village, only
+he will have to cook them himself, I could never ask Hannah to cook
+cats; but please ask him not to touch Minnie."
+
+Peter had to stop in his walk and grasp his crutches tightly, not
+to burst into a scream of laughter, while Tom answered with great
+gravity, "My dear aunt, do not alarm yourself, I will answer for the
+safety of Minnie as far as Sam is concerned."
+
+When they reached the house, Miss Scudamore said--
+
+"I think you young people will enjoy yourselves more if you go and sit
+under the shade of the elm there, you will have a deal to say to each
+other, and had better be alone." They were all glad at the suggestion,
+as they were longing to be alone together.
+
+Sam, by Miss Scudamore's directions, carried out a great easy chair,
+of which Peter took possession. Rhoda sat on the grass at his feet,
+and Tom threw himself down at full length. They were all too happy
+to speak much for a time, and could only look fondly at each other.
+"You have grown a great deal, Rhoda, but I do not think that you are
+altered a bit otherwise."
+
+"You are neither of you altered so much as I expected," Rhoda said. "I
+had made up my mind that you would be changed a great deal. It sounds
+so grand--Captains, indeed! I expected to have curtsey to you and
+treat you with great respect; instead of that you look regular boys,
+both of you. Of course you are big, and Peter looks very tall; how
+tall are you, Peter?"
+
+"Just over six feet," Peter said.
+
+"Yes," Rhoda said, "you are tall enough, and Tom is broad enough for
+men, but somehow you look regular boys still."
+
+"This is very disrespectful Rhoda, to two Captains in His Majesty's
+service."
+
+"It seems ridiculous, doesn't it," Rhoda said.
+
+"It does," Tom said heartily, and the three went off into a shout of
+laughter.
+
+"It isn't really ridiculous you know," Rhoda said, when they had
+recovered their gravity. "To think of all the dangers you have gone
+through. Aunt was as proud as could be when she saw your names over
+and over again in despatches, and I have been like a little peacock.
+Your doings have been the talk of every one round here, and I am sure
+that if they had known you had been coming, the village would have put
+up a triumphal arch, and presented you with an address."
+
+"Thank goodness, they did not know it then," Tom said, "for it would
+have been a deal worse to stand than the fire of a French battery.
+Well, Rhoda, and now as to yourself; so you have really been always
+very happy with aunt?"
+
+"Very happy," Rhoda said; "she is most kind and indulgent, and so that
+I attend to her little fancies, I can do just as I like. I have had
+lessons regularly from the rector's eldest daughter, who has been
+educated for a governess; and in every respect, aunt is all that is
+kind. Fancy her being afraid of Sam eating Minnie."
+
+After chatting for upwards of an hour, they went into the house, and
+the rest of the day was spent in talking over all that had happened
+since they left. Sam was in the kitchen where he made himself very
+much at home, and although Hannah and the cook were at first rather
+awed by his size, his black face and rolling eyes, they were soon
+pacified by his good humor and readiness to make himself useful, and
+were wonderfully interested by his long stories about what "Massas"
+had done in the war.
+
+Miss Scudamore, who was a little uneasy as to how things would go on
+in the kitchen, made some excuse for going in once or twice in the
+course of the evening. She found things going on much better that she
+had expected, indeed so much better, that after Rhoda had gone up to
+bed, where Peter had two hours before betaken himself, she said to Tom
+as he was lighting his candle, "One minute, nephew; I could not speak
+before Rhoda, but I wanted to say something to you about your negro.
+I have heard that all soldiers are very much given to make love, and
+we know from Shakespeare, that Othello, who was black too, you will
+remember, nephew, made love to Desdemona, which shows that color does
+not make so much difference as one would think. Now I do hope your
+man will not make love to Hannah, I don't think she would like it,
+my dear, and yet you know she might; one never knows what women will
+do; they are always making fools of themselves," she added angrily,
+thinking at the moment how a young girl she had trained up as a cook
+had, after being with her three years, left a few weeks before to
+marry the village blacksmith, "and I should be sorry to lose Hannah.
+She has been with us more than twenty years. If he must fall in love
+with one, my dear, let it be the cook."
+
+Tom had a great command of his countenance, but he had great
+difficulty in steadying his muscles. After a moment or two he said,
+"I will give Sam a hint, aunt, if it becomes necessary, but I do not
+think you need fear. I do not fancy Sam is matrimonially inclined at
+present, and he wouldn't leave us even to marry Desdemona herself.
+Good night, aunt."
+
+So saying, Tom went upstairs, where he repeated to Peter, who was
+still awake, his conversation with his aunt, and the two went into
+shouts of laughter over the idea of Sam making love to the prim
+Hannah.
+
+The next six months passed over quietly and happily. The boys
+were made a great deal of by the whole county, and Miss Scudamore
+was greatly gratified at the name and credit they had gained for
+themselves. She no longer worried about them, but as Rhoda declared,
+quite spoiled them, and as Sam made no attempt to win the love of
+the faithful Hannah, there was no cloud to mar the pleasure of the
+holiday.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+CIUDAD RODRIGO AND BADAJOS.
+
+
+It was in the beginning of December, 1811, that the Scudamores again
+sailed up the Tagus to Lisbon, after an absence of just six months.
+When they had passed the medical board, they were transferred from the
+unattached list to the 52d Regiment, which was, fortunately for them,
+also in Spain. No events of great importance had taken place during
+their absence. Wellington, after the battles of Fuentes d'Onoro and
+Albuera, had been compelled to fall back again to the frontier in the
+face of greatly superior forces, and had maintained his old position
+on the Coa till the approach of winter compelled the French to retire
+into the interior, where they had their magazines and depôts.
+
+The Scudamores found that the 52d were encamped on the Agueda,
+and they at once prepared to go up country to join them. Their
+chargers--presents from their aunt on leaving--were fresh and
+vigorous, and they purchased a strong country horse for Sambo, who,
+thanks to some practice which he had had in England, was now able to
+cut a respectable figure on horseback. A few hours were sufficient to
+make their preparations, and at noon on the day after landing, they
+mounted, and, followed by Sam, accompanied by a muleteer and two mules
+carrying their baggage, they started from the hotel at which they had
+put up.
+
+As they rode down the main street they saw several mounted
+officers approaching, and at once recognized in the leader the
+commander-in-chief, who had just arrived from the front to pay one
+of his flying visits, to endeavor to allay the jealousies in the
+Portuguese Council, and to insist upon the food which the British
+Government was actually paying for, being supplied to the starving
+Portuguese soldiers. Drawing their horses aside, they saluted Lord
+Wellington as he rode past. He glanced at them keenly, as was his
+custom, and evidently recognized them as he returned the salute.
+
+When he had passed, they turned their horses and continued their way.
+They had not gone fifty yards, however, when an officer came up at
+a gallop. Lord Wellington wished them to call at his quarters in an
+hour's time.
+
+There are few things more annoying than, after having got through all
+the trouble of packing and getting fairly on the road, to be stopped;
+but there was no help for it, and the boys rode back to their hotel
+again, where, putting up their horses, they told Sam not to let the
+muleteer leave, for they should probably be on the road again in an
+hour.
+
+At the appointed time they called at the head-quarters, and giving
+their cards to two officers on duty, took their seats in the anteroom.
+It now became evident to them that their chance of an early interview
+was not great, and that they would in all probability be obliged to
+pass another night in Madrid. Portuguese grandees passed in and out,
+staff officers of rank entered and left, important business was being
+transacted, and the chance of two Line captains having an interview
+with the commander-in-chief appeared but slight. Two hours passed
+wearily, and then an orderly sergeant came into the room and read out
+from a slip of paper the names "Captain Thomas Scudamore; Captain
+Peter Scudamore. This way, if you please," he added, as the boys rose
+in answer to their names, and he led the way into a room where a
+colonel on the staff was seated before a table covered with papers.
+
+"Gentlemen," he said, "I have news which I think will be pleasant to
+you both. Lord Wellington has not forgotten the services you rendered
+in carrying his communications to the guerilla chiefs. Your reports
+were clear and concise, and your knowledge of Spanish especially
+valuable. Lord Beresford, too, has reported most favorably of your
+conduct while with him. There happen to be two vacancies on his staff,
+and he has desired me to fill them up with your names."
+
+Although the Scudamores would in some respects rather have remained
+with their regiment, yet they could not refuse an honor which was
+generally coveted as being a post in which an active officer had
+plenty of opportunities of distinguishing himself, and which was
+certain to lead to speedy promotion. They accordingly expressed their
+warm thanks for the honor which Lord Wellington had done them.
+
+"Are you well mounted?" Colonel Somerset asked.
+
+"We have one capital charger each," Tom said.
+
+"You will want another," Colonel Somerset remarked. "There are a lot
+of remounts landed to-day. Here is an order to Captain Halket, the
+officer in charge. Choose any two you like. The amount can be stopped
+from your pay. How about servants; you are entitled to two each?"
+
+"We have one man of the Norfolk Rangers--a very faithful fellow, who
+has returned with us from leave; if he could be transferred, he would
+do for us both if we had a cavalry man each for our horses."
+
+The colonel at once wrote an order for Sam's transfer from his
+regiment on detached service, and also one to the officer commanding a
+cavalry regiment stationed in Madrid, to supply them with two troopers
+as orderlies.
+
+"May I ask, sir, if we are likely to stay in Madrid long--as, if so,
+we will look out for quarters?" Tom asked.
+
+"No; the general returns to-morrow, or next day at latest, to Almeida,
+and of course you will accompany him. Oh, by-the-by, Lord Wellington
+will be glad if you will dine with him to-day--sharp six. By-the-way,
+you will want to get staff uniform. There is the address of a Spanish
+tailor, who has fitted out most of the men who have been appointed
+here. He works fast, and will get most of the things you want ready
+by to-morrow night. Don't get more things than are absolutely
+necessary--merely undress suits. Excuse my asking how are you off for
+money? I will give you an order on the paymaster if you like."
+
+Tom replied that they had plenty of money, which indeed they had,
+for their aunt had given them so handsome a present upon starting,
+that they had tried to persuade her to be less generous, urging that
+they really had no occasion for any money beyond their pay. She had
+insisted, however, upon their accepting two checks, saying that one
+never knew what was wanted, and it was always useful to have a sum to
+fall back on in case of need.
+
+Two days later the Scudamores, in their new staff uniforms, were,
+with some six or eight other officers, riding in the suite of Lord
+Wellington on the road to the Coa. The lads thought they had never
+had a more pleasant time, the weather was fine and the temperature
+delightful, their companions, all older somewhat than themselves, were
+yet all young men in high health and spirits. The pace was good, for
+Lord Wellington was a hard rider, and time was always precious with
+him. At the halting-places the senior officers of the staff kept
+together, while the aides-de-camp made up a mess of their own, always
+choosing a place as far away as possible from that of the chief, so
+that they could laugh, joke, and even sing, without fear of disturbing
+his lordship.
+
+Sam soon became a high favorite with the light-hearted young fellows,
+and his services as forager for the mess were in high esteem.
+
+Three days of hard riding took them to Almeida, where the breaches
+caused by the great explosion had been repaired, and the place put
+into a defensible position. Tom and Peter had been afraid that
+there would be at least four months of enforced inactivity before
+the spring; but they soon found that the post of aide-de-camp to
+Wellington was no sinecure. For the next month they almost lived in
+the saddle. The greater portion of the English army was indeed lying
+on the Agueda, but there were detached bodies of British and large
+numbers of Portuguese troops at various points along the whole line
+of the Portuguese frontier, and with the commanders of these Lord
+Wellington was in constant communication.
+
+Towards the end of December some large convoys of heavy artillery
+arrived at Almeida, but every one supposed that they were intended to
+fortify this place, and none, even of those most in the confidence of
+the commander-in-chief, had any idea that a winter campaign was about
+to commence. The French were equally unsuspicious of the truth. Twice
+as strong as the British, they dreamt not that the latter would take
+the offensive, and the French marshals had scattered their troops at
+considerable distances from the frontier in winter quarters.
+
+Upon the last day of the year the Scudamores both happened to have
+returned to the front--Tom from Lisbon, and Peter from a long ride to
+a distant Portuguese division. There was a merry party gathered round
+a blazing fire in the yard of the house where they, with several other
+aides-de-camp, were quartered. Some fifty officers of all ranks were
+present, for a general invitation had been issued to all unattached
+officers in honor of the occasion. Each brought in what liquor he
+could get hold of, and any provisions which he had been able to
+procure, and the evening was one of boisterous fun and jollity. In
+the great kitchen blazed a fire, before which chickens and ducks
+were roasting, turkeys and geese cut up in pieces for greater
+rapidity of cooking, were grilling over the fire, and as they came
+off the gridiron they were taken round by the soldier-servants to
+their masters as they sat about on logs of wood, boxes, and other
+substitutes for chairs. Most of the officers present had already
+supped, and the late-comers were finishing their frugal meal, after
+which the soldiers would take their turn. There was a brewing of punch
+and an uncorking of many a bottle of generous wine; then the song and
+laugh went round, and all prepared to usher in the new year joyously,
+when a colonel of the staff, who had been dining with Lord Wellington,
+entered. "Here's a seat, colonel," was shouted in a dozen places, but
+he shook his head and held up his hand.
+
+"Gentlemen, I am sorry to disturb you, but orders must be obeyed.
+Villiers, Hogan, Scudamores both, Esdaile, Cooper, and Johnson, here
+are despatches which have to be taken off at once. Gentlemen, I
+should recommend you all to look to your horses. All attached to the
+transport had better go to their head-quarters for orders."
+
+"What is up, colonel?" was the general question.
+
+"The army moves forward at daybreak. We are going to take Ciudad."
+
+A cheer of surprise and delight burst from all. There was an emptying
+of glasses, a pouring out of one more bumper to success, and in
+five minutes the court was deserted save by some orderlies hastily
+devouring the interrupted supper, and ere long the tramp of horses
+could be heard, as the Scudamores and their comrades dashed off in
+different directions with their despatches.
+
+The next morning a bridge was thrown over the Agueda at Marialva,
+six miles below Ciudad, but the investment was delayed, owing to the
+slowness and insufficiency of the transport. Ciudad Rodrigo was but
+a third-class fortress, and could have been captured by the process
+of a regular siege with comparatively slight loss to the besiegers.
+Wellington knew, however, that he could not afford the time for a
+regular siege. Long before the approaches could have been made, and
+the breaches effected according to rule, the French marshals would
+have been up with overwhelming forces.
+
+Beginning the investment on the 7th, Wellington determined that it
+must be taken at all costs in twenty-four days, the last day of
+the month being the very earliest date at which, according to his
+calculations, any considerable body of French could come up to its
+relief.
+
+Ciudad lies on rising ground on the bank of the Agueda. The
+fortifications were fairly strong, and being protected by a very high
+glacis, it was difficult to effect a breach in them. The glacis is the
+smooth ground outside the ditch. In well-constructed works the walls
+of the fortification rise but very little above the ground beyond,
+from which they are separated by a broad and deep ditch. Thus the
+ground beyond the ditch, that is, the glacis, covers the walls from
+the shot of a besieger, and renders it extremely difficult to reach
+them. In the case of Ciudad, however, there were outside the place
+two elevated plateaux, called the great and small Teson: Guns placed
+on these could look down upon Ciudad, and could therefore easily
+breach the walls. These, then, were the spots from which Wellington
+determined to make the attack. The French, however, were aware of the
+importance of the position, and had erected on the higher Teson an
+inclosed and palisadoed redoubt, mounting two guns and a howitzer. A
+great difficulty attending the operation was that there were neither
+fuel nor shelter to be obtained on the right bank of the river, and
+the weather set in very cold, with frost and snow, at the beginning
+of the siege. Hence the troops had to be encamped on the left bank,
+and each division, as its turn came, to occupy the trenches for
+twenty-four hours, took cooked provisions with it, and waded across
+the Agueda.
+
+On the 8th, Pack's division of Portuguese and the light division waded
+the river three miles above the fortress, and, making a circuit took
+up a place near the great Teson. There they remained quiet all day.
+The French seeing that the place was not yet entirely invested paid
+but little heed to them. At nightfall, however, Colonel Colborne,
+with two companies from each of the regiments of the light division,
+attacked the redoubt of San Francisco with such a sudden rush that it
+was carried with the loss of only twenty-four men, the defenders, few
+and unprepared, being all taken prisoners. Scarcely, however, was the
+place captured than every gun of Ciudad which could be brought to bear
+upon it opened with fury. All night, under a hail of shot and shell,
+the troops labored steadily, and by daybreak the first parallel, that
+is to say, a trench protected by a bank of earth six hundred yards
+in length was sunk three feet deep. The next day the first division,
+relieved the light division.
+
+Tom and Peter, now that the army was stationary, had an easier time of
+it, and obtained leave to cross the river to see the operations. The
+troops had again to wade through the bitter cold water, and at any
+other time would have grumbled rarely at the discomfort. When they
+really engage in the work of war, however, the British soldier cares
+for nothing, and holding up their rifles, pouches and haversacks, to
+keep dry, the men crossed the river laughing and joking. There was but
+little done all day, for the fire of the enemy was too fast and deadly
+for men to work under it in daylight. At night the Scudamores left
+their horses with those of the divisional officers, and accompanied
+the troops into the trenches, to learn the work which had there to
+be done. Directly it was dusk twelve hundred men fell to work to
+construct their batteries. The night was dark, and it was strange to
+the Scudamores to hear the thud of so many picks and shovels going,
+to hear now and then a low spoken order, but to see nothing save when
+the flash of the enemy's guns momentarily lit up the scene. Every half
+minute or so the shot, shell, and grape came tearing through the air,
+followed occasionally by a low cry or a deep moan. Exciting as it was
+for a time, the boys having no duty, found it difficult long to keep
+awake, and presently dozed off--at first to wake with a start whenever
+a shell fell close, but presently to sleep soundly until dawn. By that
+time the batteries, eighteen feet thick, were completed.
+
+On the 10th the fourth division, and on the 11th the third, carried
+on the works, but were nightly disturbed, not only by the heavy fire
+from the bastions, but from some guns which the French had mounted on
+the convent of San Francisco in the suburb on the left. Little was
+effected in the next two days, for the frost hardened the ground and
+impeded the work. On the night of the 13th the Santa Cruz convent was
+carried and the trenches pushed forward, and on the next afternoon the
+breaching batteries opened fire with twenty-five guns upon the points
+of the wall at which it had been determined to make the breaches,
+while two cannons kept down the fire of the French guns at the convent
+of San Francisco. The French replied with more than fifty pieces,
+and all night the tremendous fire was kept up on both sides without
+intermission. Just at daybreak the sound of musketry mingled with the
+roar of cannon, as the 40th Regiment attacked and carried the convent
+of San Francisco. Through the 16th, 17th, and 18th the artillery
+duel continued, some times one side, sometimes the other obtaining
+the advantage; but during each night the trenches of the besiegers
+were pushed forward, and each day saw the breaches in the ramparts
+grow larger and larger. On the 19th the breaches were reported as
+practicable--that is, that it would be possible for men to scramble up
+the fallen rubbish to the top, and orders were therefore given for the
+assault for that night.
+
+The attack was to be made at four points simultaneously; the 5th,
+94th, and 77th were to attack from the convent of Santa Cruz, to make
+for the ditch, enter it, and work their way along to the great breach;
+Mackinnon's brigade of the third division was to attack the great
+breach from the front; the light division posted behind the convent
+of San Francisco were to attack from the left, and make their way to
+the small breach; while a false attack, to be converted into a real
+one if the resistance was slight, was to be made by Pack's Portuguese
+at the St. Jago gate at the opposite side of the town. As night fell
+the troops moved into their position, and Lord Wellington went to
+the convent of San Francisco, from whose roof he could survey the
+operations. The Scudamores, with the rest of the staff, took up
+their places behind him. Suddenly there was a shout on the far right,
+followed by a sound of confused cheering and firing, while flashes of
+flame leapt out along the walls, and the guns of the place opened fire
+with a crash. Now the 5th, 94th, and 77th rushed with great swiftness
+along the ditch, when, at the foot of the great breach, they were
+met by the third division. Together they poured up the breach, and
+the roar of musketry was tremendous. Once at the top of the breach,
+however, they made no progress. From a trench which had been cut
+beyond it, a ring of fire broke out, while muskets flashed from every
+window in the houses near. It was evident that some serious obstacle
+had been encountered, and that the main attack was arrested.
+
+"This is terrible," Peter said, as almost breathless they watched the
+storm of fire on and around the breach. "This is a thousand times
+worse than a battle. It is awful to think how the shot must be telling
+on that dense mass. Can nothing be done?"
+
+"Hurrah! There go the light division at the small breach," Tom
+exclaimed, as the French fire broke out along the ramparts in that
+quarter. A violent cheer came up even above the din from the great
+breach, but no answering fire lights the scene, for Major Napier,
+who commanded, had forbidden his men to load, telling them to trust
+entirely to the bayonet. There was no delay here; the firing of the
+French ceased almost immediately, as with a fierce rush the men of the
+light division bounded up the ruins and won the top of the breach. For
+a moment or two there was a pause, for the French opened so fierce a
+fire from either side, that the troops wavered. The officers sprang
+to the front, the soldiers followed with the bayonet, and the French,
+unable to stand the fierce onslaught, broke and fled into the town.
+Then the men of the light division, rushing along the walls, took
+the French who were defending the great breach in rear, and as these
+gave way, the attacking party swept across the obstacles which, had
+hitherto kept them, and the town was won. Pack's Portuguese had
+effected an entrance at the St. Jago gate, which they found almost
+deserted, for the garrison was weak, and every available man had been
+taken for the defence of the breaches.
+
+Thus was Ciudad Rodrigo taken after twelve days' siege, with a loss
+of twelve hundred men and ninety officers, of which six hundred and
+fifty men and sixty officers fell in that short, bloody fight at the
+breaches. Among the killed was General Craufurd, who had commanded at
+the fight on the Coa.
+
+Upon entering the town three days afterwards, at the termination of
+the disgraceful scene of riot and pillage with which the British
+soldier, there as at other places, tarnished the laurels won by his
+bravery in battle, the boys went to the scene of the struggle, and
+then understood the cause of the delay upon the part of the stormers.
+From the top of the breach there was a perpendicular fall of sixteen
+feet, and the bottom of this was planted with sharp spikes, and strewn
+with the fragments of shells which the French had rolled down into
+it. Had it not been for the light division coming up, and taking the
+defenders--who occupied the loopholed and fortified houses which
+commanded this breach--in rear, the attack here could never have
+succeeded.
+
+The next few days were employed in repairing the breaches, and putting
+the place again in a state of defence, as it was probable that Marmont
+might come up and besiege it. The French marshal, however, when
+hurrying to the relief of the town, heard the news of its fall, and
+as the weather was very bad for campaigning, and provisions short,
+he fall back again to his winter quarters, believing that Wellington
+would, content with his success, make no fresh movement until the
+spring. The English general, however, was far too able a strategist
+not to profit by the supineness of his adversary, and, immediately
+Ciudad Rodrigo was taken, he began to make preparations for the siege
+of Badajos, a far stronger fortress than Ciudad, and defended by
+strong detached forts. Three days after the fall of Rodrigo General
+Hill came up with his division; to this the Norfolk Rangers now
+belonged, and the Scudamores had therefore the delight of meeting all
+their old friends again. They saw but little of them, however, for
+they were constantly on the road to Lisbon with despatches, every
+branch of the service being now strained to get the battering-train
+destined for the attack on Badajos to the front, while orders were
+sent to Silviera, Trant, Wilson, Lecca, and the other partisan
+leaders, to hold all the fords and defiles along the frontier, so as
+to prevent the French from making a counter-invasion of Portugal.
+
+On the 11th of March the army arrived at Elvas, and on the 15th a
+pontoon bridge was thrown across the Guadiana. The following day the
+British troops crossed the river, and invested Badajos, with fifteen
+thousand men, while Hill and Graham, with thirty thousand more moved
+forward, so as to act as a covering army, in case the French should
+advance to raise the siege. Badajos was defended by five thousand men,
+under General Phillipson, a most able and energetic commander, who had
+in every way strengthened the defences, and put them in a position to
+offer an obstinate resistance.
+
+Before attacking the fortress it was necessary to capture one of the
+outlying forts, and that known as the Picurina was selected, because
+the bastion of the Trinidad, which lay behind it, was the weakest
+portion of the fortress. The trenches were commenced against this on
+the night of the 17th, and, although the French made some vigorous
+sorties, the works progressed so rapidly that all was ready for an
+assault on the forts on the 25th, a delay of two days having been
+occasioned by the French taking guns across the river, which swept
+the trenches, and rendered work impossible, until a division was sent
+round to drive in the French guns and invest the fortress on that
+side. The Picurina was strong, and desperately defended, but it was
+captured after a furious assault, which lasted one hour, and cost
+nineteen officers and three hundred men. It was not, however, until
+next evening that the fort could be occupied, for the guns of the town
+poured such a hail of shot and shell into it, that a permanent footing
+could not be obtained in it. Gradually, day by day, the trenches were
+driven nearer to the doomed city, and the cannon of the batteries
+worked day and night to establish a breach. Soult was known to be
+approaching, but he wanted to gather up all his available forces, as
+he believed the town capable of holding out for another month, at
+least. Still he was approaching, and, although the three breaches
+were scarcely yet practicable, and the fire of the town by no means
+overpowered, Wellington determined upon an instant assault, and on the
+night of the 6th of April the troops prepared for what turned out to
+be the most terrible and bloody assault in the annals of the British
+army. There were no less than six columns of attack, comprising in all
+eighteen thousand men. Picton, on the right with the third division
+was to cross the Rivillas and storm the castle. Wilson, with the
+troops in the trenches, was to attack San Roque. In the center the
+fourth and light division, under Colville and Barnard, were to assault
+the breaches; and on the left Leith, with the fifth division, was to
+make a false attack upon the fort of Pardaleras, and a real attack
+upon the bastion of San Vincente by the river side. Across the river
+the Portugese division, under Power, was to attack the works at the
+head of the bridge. The night was dark and clouded, and all was as
+still as death outside the town, when a lighted carcass, that is a
+large iron canister filled with tar and combustibles, fell close to
+the third division, and, exposing their ranks, forced them to commence
+the attack before the hour appointed. Crossing the Rivillas by a
+narrow bridge, under a tremendous fire, the third division assaulted
+the castle, and, although their scaling-ladders were over and over
+again hurled down, the stormers at last obtained a footing, and the
+rest of the troops poured in and the castle was won. A similar and
+more rapid success attended the assault on San Roque, which was
+attacked so suddenly and violently, that it was taken with scarce
+any resistance. In the mean time the assaults upon the breaches had
+commenced, and it is best to give the account of this terrible scene
+in the words of its eloquent and graphic historian, as the picture is
+one of the most vivid that was ever drawn.
+
+"All this time the tumult at the breaches was such as if the very
+earth had been rent asunder, and its central fires bursting upwards
+uncontrolled. The two divisions had reached the glacis just as the
+firing at the castle commenced, and the flash of a single musket,
+discharged from the covered-way as a signal, showed them that the
+French were ready; yet no stir was heard and darkness covered the
+breaches. Some hay-packs were thrown, some ladders placed, and the
+forlorn hopes and storming parties of the light division, five hundred
+in all, descended into the ditch without opposition; but then a bright
+flame shooting upwards displayed all the terrors of the scene. The
+ramparts, crowded with dark figures and glittering arms were on one
+side, on the other the red columns of the British, deep and broad,
+were coming on like streams of burning lava. It was the touch of the
+magician's wand, for a crash of thunder followed, and with incredible
+violence the storming parties were dashed to pieces by the explosion
+of hundreds of shells and powder-barrels. For an instant the light
+division stood on the brink of the ditch, amazed at the terrific
+sight; but then, with a shout that matched even the sound of the
+explosion, the men flew down the ladders, or, disdaining their aid,
+leaped, reckless of the depth, into the gulf below--and at the same
+moment, amidst a blaze of musketry that dazzled the eyes, the fourth
+division came running in, and descended with a like fury. There were
+only five ladders for the two columns, which were close together;
+and a deep cut, made in the bottom of the ditch as far as the
+counter-guard of the Trinidad, was filled with water from the
+inundation. Into that watery snare the head of the fourth division
+fell, and it is said above a hundred of the fusiliers, the men of
+Albuera, were there smothered. Those who followed checked not, but,
+as if such a disaster had been expected, turned to the left, and thus
+came upon the face of the unfinished ravelin, which, being rough and
+broken, was mistaken for the breach, and instantly covered with men;
+yet a wide and deep chasm was still between them and the ramparts,
+from whence came a deadly fire, wasting their ranks. Thus baffled,
+they also commenced a rapid discharge of musketry and disorder ensued;
+for the men of the light division, whose conducting engineer had been
+disabled early and whose flank was confined by an unfinished ditch
+intended to cut off the bastion of Santa Maria, rushed towards the
+breaches of the curtain and the Trinidad, which were, indeed, before
+them, but which the fourth division had been destined to storm. Great
+was the confusion, for the ravelin was quite crowded with men of both
+divisions; and while some continued to fire, others jumped down and
+ran towards the breach; many also passed between the ravelin and
+the counterguard of the Trinidad, the two divisions got mixed, the
+reserves, which should have remained at the quarries, also came
+pouring in, until the ditch was quite filled, the rear still crowding
+forward, and all cheering vehemently. The enemy's shouts also were
+loud and terrible, and the bursting of shells, and of grenades, and
+the roaring of guns from the flanks, answered by the iron howitzers
+from the battery of the parallel, the heavy roll, and horrid explosion
+of the powder-barrels, the whizzing flight of the blazing splinters,
+the loud exhortations of the officers, and the continual clatter
+of the muskets, made a maddening din. Now a multitude bounded up
+the great breach, as if driven by a whirlwind, but across the top
+glittered a range of sword-blades, sharp-pointed, keen-edged on both
+sides, and firmly fixed in ponderous beams chained together, and set
+deep in the ruins; and for ten feet in front the ascent was covered
+with loose planks, studded with sharp iron points, on which, feet
+being set, the planks moved, and the unhappy soldiers, falling forward
+on the spikes, rolled down upon the ranks behind. Then the Frenchmen,
+shouting at the success of their stratagem, and, leaping forward,
+plied their shot with terrible rapidity, for every man had several
+muskets, and each musket, in addition to its ordinary charge,
+contained a small cylinder of wood, stuck full of wooden slugs,
+which scattered like hail when they were discharged. Once and again
+the assailants rushed up the breaches, but always the sword-blades,
+immovable and impassable, stopped their charge, and the hissing shells
+and thundering powder-barrels exploded unceasingly. Hundreds of men
+had fallen, hundreds more were dropping, still, the heroic officers
+called aloud for new trials, and sometimes followed by many, sometimes
+by a few, ascended the ruins; and so furious were the men themselves,
+that, in one of these charges, the rear strove to push the foremost on
+to the sword-blades, willing even to make a bridge of their writhing
+bodies, but the others frustrated the attempt by dropping down; and
+men fell so fast from the shot, it was hard to know who went down
+voluntarily, who were stricken and many stooped unhurt that never rose
+again. Vain also would it have been to break through the sword-blades,
+for the trench and parapet behind the breach were finished, and the
+assailants, crowded into even a narrower space than the ditch was,
+would still have been separated from their enemies, and the slaughter
+would have continued. At the beginning of this dreadful conflict
+Andrew Barnard had, with prodigious efforts, separated his division
+from the other, and preserved some degree of military array; but now
+the tumult was such, no command would be heard distinctly except by
+those close at hand, and the mutilated carcasses heaped on each other,
+and the wounded struggling to avoid being trampled upon, broke the
+formations; order was impossible! Officers of all ranks, followed more
+or less numerously by the men, were seen to start out as if struck
+by sudden madness, and rash into the breach, which, yawning and
+glittering with steel, seemed like the mouth of a huge dragon belching
+forth smoke and flame. In one of these attempts, Colonel Macleod, of
+the 43rd, a young man whose feeble body would have been quite unfit
+for war if it had not been sustained by an unconquerable spirit, was
+killed; wherever his voice was heard his soldiers had gathered, and
+with such a strong resolution did he lead them up the fatal ruins
+that, when one behind him, in falling, plunged a bayonet into his
+back, he complained, not; but, continuing his course, was shot dead
+within a yard of the sword-blades. Yet there was no want of gallant
+leaders, or desperate followers, until two hours passed in these
+vain efforts had convinced the troops the breach of the Trinidad was
+impregnable; and, as the opening in the curtain, although less strong,
+was retired, and the approach to it impeded by deep holes and cuts
+made in the ditch, the soldiers did not much notice it after the
+partial failure of one attack which had been made early. Gathering in
+dark groups, and leaning on their muskets, they looked up with sullen
+desperation at the Trinidad, while the enemy, stepping out on the
+ramparts, and aiming their shots by the light of the fire-balls which
+they threw over, asked, as their victims fell, 'Why they did not come
+into Badajos?' In this dreadful situation, while the dead were lying
+in heaps, and others continually falling, the wounded crawling about
+to get some shelter from the merciless shower above, and withal a
+sickening stench from the burnt flesh of the slain, Captain Nicholas,
+of the engineers, was observed by Lieutenant Shaw, of the 43rd, making
+incredible efforts to force his way with a few men into the Santa
+Maria Bastion. Shaw immediately collected fifty soldiers, of all
+regiments, and joined him, and although there was a deep cut along
+the foot of that breach also, it was instantly passed, and these two
+young officers led their gallant band, with a rush, up the ruins; but
+when they had gained two-thirds of the ascent, a concentrated fire
+of musketry and grape dashed nearly the whole dead to the earth.
+Nicholas was mortally wounded, and the intrepid Shaw stood alone! With
+inexpressible coolness he looked at his watch, and saying it was too
+late to carry the reaches, rejoined the masses at the other attack.
+After this no further effort was made at any point, and the troops
+remained passive but unflinching beneath the enemy's shot, which
+streamed without intermission; for, of the riflemen on the glacis many
+leaped early into the ditch and joined in the assault, and the rest,
+raked by a cross-fire of grape from the distant bastions, baffled in
+their aim by the smoke and flames from the explosions, and too few in
+number, entirely failed to quell the French musketry. About midnight,
+when two thousand brave men had fallen, Wellington, who was on a
+height close to the quarries, ordered the remainder to retire and
+re-form for a second assault; he had heard the castle was taken,
+but thinking the enemy would still resist in the town, was resolved
+to assail the breaches again. This retreat from the ditch was not
+effected without further carnage and confusion. The French fire never
+slackened. A cry arose that the enemy was making a sally from the
+distant flanks, and there was a rush towards the ladders. Then the
+groans and lamentations of the wounded, who could not move and
+expected to be slain, increased, and many officers who had not heard
+of the order, endeavored to stop the soldiers from going back; some
+would even have removed the ladders but were unable to break the
+crowd."
+
+While this terrible scene was passing, the victory had been decided
+elsewhere. The capture of the castle by Picton would, in itself, have
+caused the fall of the town upon the following day, but Leith, with
+the fifth division, after hard fighting, scaled the St. Vincente
+bastion, and came up through the town and took the defenders of the
+breaches in the rear. Then the French gave way, the British poured in,
+and the dreadful scenes which had marked the fall of Ciudad Rodrigo
+were repeated, and even surpassed. Up to the present day the name of
+an Englishman is coupled with a curse in the town of Badajos. At this
+siege, as at the last, the Scudamores acted the part of lookers on,
+and although they bitterly regretted it, it was well for them that it
+was so. The capture of Badajos cost the allied army five thousand men,
+of whom three thousand five hundred fell on the night of the assault.
+Each of the divisions which attacked the breaches lost over twelve
+hundred men, and the 52nd Regiment, who formed part of the light
+division, lost their full share. Among the ranks of the officers the
+slaughter was particularly great, and scarce one escaped without
+a wound. The Scudamores would fain have volunteered to join their
+regiment in the assault, but it was well known that Lord Wellington
+would not allow staff officers to go outside their own work. Therefore
+they had looked on with beating hearts and pale faces, and with
+tears in their eyes, at that terrible fight at the Triudad, and had
+determined that when morning came they would resign their staff
+appointments and ask leave to join their regiment. But when morning
+came, and the list of the killed and wounded was sent in, and they
+went down with a party to the breach to collect the wounded, they
+could not but feel that they had in all probability escaped death, or
+what a soldier fears more, mutilation. "After all, Tom," Peter said,
+"we have done some active service, and our promotion shows that we
+are not cowards; there can be no reason why we should not do our duty
+as the chief has marked it out for us, especially when it is quite
+as likely to lead to rapid promotion as is such a murderous business
+as this." After this no more was said about resigning the staff
+appointment, which gave them plenty of hard work, and constant change
+of scene, whereas had they remained with the regiment they would often
+have been stationed for months in one place without a move.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+SALAMANCA.
+
+
+The great triumphs of Ciudad Rodrigo and Badajos did not lead to the
+rapid successes which Wellington had hoped. The French generals,
+on hearing of the loss of the latter fortress, again fell back,
+and Wellington was so much hampered by shortness of money, by the
+inefficiency, obstinacy, and intrigues of the Portuguese Government,
+and by want of transport, that it was nearly three months before he
+could get everything in readiness for an advance into Spain. At last
+all was prepared, and on the 13th of June the army once more crossed
+the Agueda and marched towards the Tamar in four columns. On the 17th
+it was within six miles of Salamanca, and Marshal Marmont, unable for
+the moment to stem the tide of invasion, evacuated the city, which
+that evening blazed with illuminations, the people being half wild
+with joy at their approaching deliverance. The French, however, had
+not entirely departed, for eight hundred men still held some very
+strong forts overlooking and guarding the city.
+
+These forts held out desperately; the British battering train
+was weak, and upon the 23d Marmont, having received considerable
+reinforcements, advanced to raise the siege. Wellington, however,
+refused to be tempted to leave his trenches to deliver a general
+battle, but faced the enemy with a portion of his army while he
+continued the siege.
+
+Marmont, upon his part, believing that the forts could hold out for
+fifteen days, put off the attack, as he knew that large reinforcements
+were coming up. His calculations were frustrated by one of the forts
+taking fire on the 27th, when an assault was delivered, and the whole
+of the forts surrendered; Marmont at once fell back across the Douro,
+there to await the arrival of his reinforcements.
+
+Wellington, on his part, followed slowly, and his army took up a
+position between Canizal and Castrejon, thereby covering the roads
+from Toro and Tordesillas, the only points at which the French could
+cross the river. The reports of the spies all agreed that the former
+was the place at which the crossing would be made.
+
+On the 16th of July an officer rode into Canizal, at headlong pace,
+with the news that a reconnoitering party had crossed the Douro that
+morning near Tordesillas, and had found that place deserted, except by
+a garrison; and an hour later the news came in that three divisions of
+the enemy were already across the river at Toro. Five minutes later
+the Scudamores were on horseback, carrying orders that the whole of
+the army, with the exception of the fourth and light divisions, which
+were on the Trabancos, under General Cotton, were to concentrate at
+Canizal that night. By the morning the movement was accomplished.
+
+The day wore on in somewhat anxious expectation, and towards afternoon
+Wellington, accompanied by Lord Beresford, and escorted by Alten's,
+Bock's and Le Marchant's brigades of cavalry, started to make a
+reconnaissance of the enemy's movements. Caution was needed for the
+advance, as it was quite uncertain whether the French were pushing
+on through the open country towards Canizal, or whether they were
+following the direct road from Toro to Salamanca. Evening closed in,
+but no signs of the French army were seen, and the party halted about
+six miles from Toro, and small parties of cavalry were despatched
+right and left to scour the country, and find out where the enemy had
+gone.
+
+"It's very strange where the French can have got to," was the remark
+made, for the fiftieth time among the staff.
+
+The detached parties returned, bringing no news whatever, and Lord
+Wellington again advanced slowly and cautiously towards Toro. Small
+parties were pushed on ahead, and presently an officer rode back
+with the news that he had been as far as the river, and that not a
+Frenchman was to be seen. It was too late to do any more, and they
+remained in uncertainty whether the enemy had recrossed the river
+after making a demonstration, or whether they had marched to their
+right, so as to make a circuit, and throw themselves between Ciudad
+Rodrigo and Salamanca, upon the line of communication of the British
+army.
+
+Lord Wellington, with his staff, took possession of a deserted
+farm-house, the cavalry picketed their horses round it, and the
+Scudamores, who had been more than twenty-four hours in the saddle,
+wrapped themselves in their cloaks, and stretching themselves on the
+floor, were soon asleep. Just at midnight the sound of a horse's
+footfall approaching at a gallop was heard, and an officer, who had
+ridden, without drawing rein, from Canizal, dashed up to the farm.
+
+Five minutes later the whole party were in the saddle again. The news
+was important, indeed. Marmont had drawn his whole army back across
+the Toro on the night of the 16th, had marched to Tordesillas, crossed
+there, and in the afternoon, after a march of fifty miles, had fallen
+upon Cotton's outposts, and driven them across the Trabancos.
+
+Not a moment's time was lost by Wellington after he received the news;
+but, unfortunately, six precious hours had already been wasted, owing
+to the despatches not having reached him at Canizal. With the three
+brigades of cavalry he set off at once towards Alaejos, while an
+officer was despatched to Canizal, to order the fifth division to
+march with all speed to Torrecilla de la Orden, six miles in the rear
+of Cotton's position at Castrejon.
+
+Four hours' riding brought them to Alaejos, where a halt for two or
+three hours was ordered, to rest the weary horses and men. Soon after
+daybreak, however, all thought of sleep was banished by the roar of
+artillery, which told that Marmont was pressing hard upon Cotton's
+troops. "To horse!" was the cry, and Lords Wellington and Beresford,
+with their staff, rode off at full speed towards the scene of action,
+with the cavalry following hard upon their heels. An hour's ride
+brought them to the ground. Not much could be seen, for the country
+was undulating and bare, like the Brighton Downs, and each depression
+was full of the white morning mist, which wreathed and tossed
+fantastically from the effects of the discharges of firearms, the
+movements of masses of men, and the charges of cavalry hidden within
+it. Upon a crest near at hand were a couple of British guns, with a
+small escort of horse.
+
+Suddenly, from the mist below, a party of some fifty French horsemen
+dashed out and made for the guns. The supporting squadron, surprised
+by the suddenness of the attack, broke and fled; the French followed
+hard upon them, and just as Lord Wellington, with his staff, gained
+the crest, pursuers and pursued came upon them, and in pell-mell
+confusion the whole were borne down to the bottom of the hill. For
+a few minutes it was a wild mélée. Lords Wellington, Beresford, and
+their staff, with their swords drawn, were in the midst of the fight,
+and friends and foes were mingled together, when the leading squadrons
+of the cavalry from Alaejos came thundering down, and very few of the
+Frenchmen who had made that gallant charge escaped to tell the tale.
+
+The mists were now rapidly clearing up, and in a short time the whole
+French army could be seen advancing. They moved towards the British
+left, and Wellington ordered the troops at once to retire. The British
+fell back in three columns, and marched for the Guarena, through
+Torrecilla de la Orden. The French also marched straight for the
+river, and now one of the most singular sights ever presented in
+warfare was to be seen.
+
+The hostile armies were marching abreast, the columns being but a few
+hundred yards apart, the officers on either side waving their hands to
+each other. For ten miles the armies thus pressed forward the officers
+urging the men, and these straining every nerve to get first to the
+river. From time to time the artillery of either side, finding a
+convenient elevation, would pour a few volleys of grape into the
+opposing columns, but the position of the two armies, did not often
+admit of this. Gradually Cotton's men, fresher than the French, who
+had, in the two previous days, marched fifty miles, gained ground,
+and, reaching the river, marched across by the ford, the winners of
+the great race by so little that one division, which halted for a
+moment to drink, was swept by forty pieces of French artillery, which
+arrived on the spot almost simultaneously with it.
+
+On the Guarena the British found the remaining divisions of the army,
+which had been brought up from Canizal. These checked Marmont in an
+attempt to cross at Vallesa, while the 29th and 40th Regiments, with
+a desperate bayonet charge, drove Carier's French division back as it
+attempted to push forward beyond Castrillo. Thus the two armies faced
+each other on the Guarena, and Marmont had gained absolutely nothing
+by his false movement at Toro, and his long and skillful detour by
+Tordesillas.
+
+Quickly the rest of the day passed, as did the one which followed, the
+troops on both sides resting after their fatigues. Wellington expected
+to be attacked on the next morning and his army was arranged in two
+lines ready for the combat. At daybreak, however, Marmont moved his
+army up the river, crossed at a ford there, and marched straight
+for Salamanca, thus turning Wellington's right, and threatening his
+communications. The British at once fell back, and the scene of the
+previous day was repeated the armies marching along the crest of two
+parallel hills within musket shot distance of each other.
+
+This time however, the French troops, although they had marched
+considerably farther than the English proved themselves the best
+marchers, and when night fell Wellington had the mortification of
+seeing them in possession of the ford of Huerta on the Tormes, thus
+securing for Marmont the junction with an army which was approaching
+under King Joseph, and also the option of either fighting or refusing
+battle. Wellington felt his position seriously threatened, and sent
+off a despatch to the Spanish General Castanos, stating his inability
+to hold his ground, and the probability that he should be obliged to
+fall back upon Portugal. This letter proved the cause of the victory
+of Salamanca for it was intercepted by the French, and Marmont,
+fearing that Wellington would escape him, prepared at once to throw
+himself upon the road to Ciudad Rodrigo, and thus cut the British line
+of retreat, in spite of the positive order which he had received from
+King Joseph not to fight until he himself arrived with his army.
+
+Upon the 21st both armies crossed the Tormes, the French at Alba and
+Huerta, the British at Aldea Lengua, and San Marta. Upon that day the
+news reached Wellington that General Chauvel, with 2000 cavalry, and
+20 guns, would reach Marmont on the evening of the 22d, or the morning
+of the 23d, and the English general therefore resolved to retreat,
+unless Marmont should, by some mistake, give him a chance of fighting
+to advantage.
+
+Close to the British right, and the French left, were two steep and
+rugged hills, called the Hermanitos, or Brothers, and soon after
+daybreak on the 22d, the French seized upon the one nearest to them,
+while the British took possession of the other. Then, watching each
+other, the two armies remained until noon, for Wellington could not
+commence his retreat by daylight; but a long cloud of dust along the
+road to Ciudad Rodrigo showed that the baggage of the army was already
+_en route_ for Portugal. Marmont now determined to make a bold stroke
+to cut off Wellington's retreat, and, although all his troops had not
+yet arrived, he ordered Maucune, with two divisions, to march round by
+the left and menace the Ciudad road. It was at three o'clock in the
+afternoon, and Wellington, who had been up all night, thinking that
+Marmont would make no move that day, had gone to lie down for an hour
+or two, when Tom Scudamore who, from an elevated point, was watching
+the movements of the enemy, hurried in with the news that the French
+were pushing their left round towards the Ciudad Road.
+
+Wellington leaped to his feet, and hurried to the high ground, where
+he beheld, with stern satisfaction, that Marmont, in his eagerness
+to prevent the British escape, had committed the flagrant error of
+detaching his wing from his main body. Instantly he issued orders
+for an attack, and the great mass of men upon the British Hermanito
+moved down upon the plain to attack Maucune in flank, while the third
+division was ordered to throw itself across his line of march, and to
+attack him in front. As the advance across the plain would be taken in
+flank by the fire from the French Hermanito, General Pack was ordered
+to assail that position directly the British line had passed it.
+
+Marmont, standing on the French Hermanito, was thunder-struck at
+beholding the plain suddenly covered with enemies, and a tremendous
+fire was at once opened upon the advancing British. Officer after
+officer was despatched to hurry up the French troops still upon the
+march, and when Marmont saw the third division dash across Maucune's
+path, he was upon the point of hurrying himself to the spot, when a
+shell burst close to him, and he was dashed to the earth with a broken
+arm, and two deep wounds in his side.
+
+Thus, at the critical point of the battle, the French army was left
+without a head.
+
+It was just five o'clock when Pakenham, with the third division, fell
+like a thunderbolt upon the head of Maucune's troops. These, taken by
+surprise by this attack, on the part of an enemy whom they had thought
+to see in full flight, yet fought gallantly, and strove to gain time
+to open out into order of battle. Bearing onwards, however, with
+irresistible force, the third division broke the head of the column,
+and drove it back upon its supports. Meanwhile, the battle raged all
+along the line; in the plain the fourth division carried the village
+of Arapiles, and drove back Bonnet's division with the bayonet, and
+the fifth division attacked Maucune's command in flank, while Pakenham
+was destroying its front.
+
+Marmont was succeeded in his command by Bonnet, who was also wounded,
+and Clausel, an able general, took the command. He reinforced Maucune
+with his own divisions, which had just arrived, and, for a while,
+restored the battle. Then, past the right and left of Pakenham's
+division, the British cavalry, under Le Marchant, Anson, and D'Urban,
+burst through the smoke and dust, rode down twelve hundred of the
+French infantry, and then dashed on at the line behind. Nobly the
+charge was pressed, the third division following at a run, and the
+charge ceased not until the French left was entirely broken and five
+guns, and two thousand prisoners taken.
+
+But forty minutes had passed since the first gun was fired, and the
+French defeat was already all but irretrievable, and the third,
+fourth, and fifth divisions now in line, swept forward as to assured
+victory. Clausel, however, proved equal to the emergency. He
+reinforced Bonnet's division with that of Fereij, as yet fresh and
+unbroken, and, at the same moment, Sarrut's and Brennier's divisions
+issued from the forest, and formed in the line of battle. Behind them
+the broken troops of Maucune's two divisions re-formed, and the battle
+was renewed with terrible force.
+
+Pack, at the same moment, attempted unsuccessfully to carry the French
+Hermanito by assault with his Portuguese division, and the fate of the
+battle was again in the balance; the British divisions outnumbered,
+and outflanked, began to fall back, Generals Cole, Leith, and Spry,
+were all wounded, and the French cavalry threatened the flank of the
+line. Wellington, however, had still plenty of reserves in hand, and
+at this critical moment he launched them at the enemy. The sixth
+division was brought up from the second line, and hurled at the center
+of the enemy in a fierce and prolonged charge, while the light and
+first divisions were directed against the French divisions which were
+descending from the French Hermanito, and against that of Foy, while
+the seventh division and the Spaniards were brought up behind the
+first line. Against so tremendous an assault as this the French could
+make no stand, and were pushed back in ever increasing disorder to the
+edge of the forest, where Foy's and Maucune's divisions stood at bay,
+and covered their retreat in the fast gathering darkness.
+
+Wellington believed that he should capture a great portion of the
+beaten army, for he relied upon the Castle of Alba de Formes,
+commanding the ford at that place, being held by the Spaniards, but
+these had evacuated the place on the preceding day, and had not even
+informed Wellington that they had done so.
+
+Thus, hidden by the night, the French retreated with but slight loss
+from the pursuing columns. In the battle the French had forty-two
+thousand men and seventy-four guns; the Allies forty-six thousand and
+sixty guns, but of the infantry a division were composed of Spaniards,
+and these could not be relied upon in any way. It was probably the
+most rapidly fought action ever known, and a French officer described
+it as the defeat of forty thousand men in forty minutes. The French
+loss was over twelve thousand in killed, wounded, and prisoners, and
+so completely were they dispersed that Clausel a week afterwards
+could only collect twenty thousand to their standards. It was a great
+victory, and celebrated as the first which Wellington had gained over
+the French, for although at Talavera and Busaco he had repulsed the
+French attack, he was not in either case in a position to do more than
+hold his ground.
+
+Throughout this short and desperate fight the Scudamores had been
+fully engaged in conveying orders from one part of the field to
+another. Shot and shell flew around them in all directions, and yet
+when they met at the end of the action they found that they had
+escaped without a scratch. The day following the battle the pursuit
+began. Had King Joseph's advancing army united with Clausel's broken
+troops, he could have opposed Wellington's advance with a force far
+superior in numbers to that defeated at Salamanca. But Joseph, after
+hesitating, fell back in one direction, Clausel retreated in another,
+the opportunity for concentration was lost, and Wellington found no
+foe to bar his way on his triumphant march upon Madrid.
+
+Joseph fell back from the capital as the English approached, leaving
+some thousands of men in the strong place known as the Retiro,
+together with an immense amount of arms, ammunition, and military
+stores of all kinds, all of which, including the troops, fell into the
+hands of the English within a few days of their arrival at Madrid.
+
+It was a proud moment for the Scudamores, as riding behind Lord
+Wellington they entered Madrid on the 14th August.
+
+The city was half mad with joy. Crowds lined the streets, while every
+window and balcony along the route was filled with ladies, who waved
+their scarves, clapped their hands, and showered flowers upon the
+heads of their deliverers. Those below, haggard and half-starved,
+for the distress in Madrid was intense, thronged round the general's
+horse, a shouting, weeping throng, kissing his cloak, his horse, any
+portion of his equipments which they could touch. Altogether it was
+one of the most glorious, most moving, most enthusiastic welcomes ever
+offered to a general.
+
+The next fortnight was spent in a round of fêtes, bull fights, and
+balls, succeeding each other rapidly, but these rejoicings were but a
+thin veil over the distress which was general throughout the town. The
+people were starving, and many deaths occurred daily from hunger. The
+British could do but little to relieve the suffering which they saw
+around them, for they themselves were--owing to the utter breakdown of
+all the arrangements undertaken by the Portuguese government, and to
+the indecision and incapacity of the Home Government--badly fed, and
+much in arrears of their pay. Nevertheless, the officers did what they
+could, got up soup kitchens, and fed daily many hundreds of starving
+wretches.
+
+The heat was excessive and a very great deal of illness took place
+among the troops. The French were gathering strength in the South,
+and Wellington determined upon marching north and seizing Burgos, an
+important place, but poorly fortified. Leaving General Hill with two
+divisions at Madrid, he marched with the rest of the army upon Burgos.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+CAUGHT IN A TRAP.
+
+
+So much had passed between the first visit of the Scudamores to Madrid
+as Spanish peasant boys, and their second entry as captains upon Lord
+Wellington's staff, that they had scarcely given a thought to the
+dangers they had at that time run, or to the deadly hatred with which
+they had inspired the guerilla chief Nunez. When they first rode
+into the town, indeed, they had spoken of it one to the other, and
+had agreed that it would be pleasant to be able to walk through the
+streets without fear of assassination; for even, as Tom said, if the
+scoundrel had any of his band there, they would not be likely to
+recognize them in their uniforms.
+
+One evening, however, when they had been in Madrid about a fortnight,
+an incident happened which caused them to doubt whether their security
+from the hatred of the guerilla was as complete as they had fancied.
+They were sitting with a number of other officers in a large café in
+the Puerta del Sol, the principal square in Madrid, when a girl came
+round begging; instead of holding out her hand silently with a murmur
+for charity in the name of the holy Virgin, she began a long story,
+poured out in rapid language.
+
+Several of the officers present knew more or less Spanish, but they
+were unable to follow her quick utterances, and one of them said
+laughingly, "Scudamore, this is a case for you, she is beyond us
+altogether."
+
+The girl followed the direction of the speaker's eye, and moved across
+to the brothers, who happened to be sitting next to each other, and
+began her story again. It was a complicated tale of French oppression,
+and the boys, interrupting her here and there to ask for details,
+talked with her for some minutes.
+
+"I believe she is lying," Tom said, in English, "she tells her story
+as if she had learned it by heart, and gets confused whenever we
+cross-question her; there, give her a few coppers, I am out of
+change."
+
+As Peter put his hand into his pocket for the money, Tom glanced
+up sharply at the girl. She was not, as might have been expected,
+watching Peter's movements with interest, but was looking inquiringly
+at some one in the crowd of promenaders. Tom followed her glance, and
+saw a peasant, standing half-hidden behind a group of passers, nod to
+her, and motion her to come to him. She waited until Peter put the
+coins into her hand; then, with a brief word of thanks, she moved away
+into the crowd.
+
+"Peter, I believe those scoundrels are up to their old game, and
+that we are watched. Once or twice since we have been sitting here I
+have noticed a heavy-looking fellow glance at us very closely as he
+passed, and I just saw the same fellow, who was evidently hiding from
+observation, nod to that girl, and beckon her away."
+
+"Her story was a lie from beginning to end," Peter said, "and it is
+quite possible that it was a got-up thing, on purpose to see whether
+we could talk Spanish well. I don't think any one could swear to us
+who only saw us then; but the fact of our speaking Spanish so well
+would go a long way towards settling the point in the mind of any one
+who suspected us!"
+
+"We must be careful in future, Peter, and avoid quiet streets after
+dark, and keep a sharp look-out at all times, or we shall get a knife
+between our ribs, as sure as fate."
+
+Time, however, passed on without anything occurring to give any
+support to their suspicion, they could not discover that they were
+being watched, or their footsteps dogged. They, nevertheless,
+continued to be, to a certain extent, upon their guard after dark; in
+the daytime the number of English soldiers about the streets was so
+large that there was very little danger of any attack.
+
+On the evening before the army marched for Burgos, Tom, whose turn it
+was for duty at head-quarters, received a despatch, to carry to one of
+the generals of division encamped a mile or two out of the town. He
+did not need to go round to his quarters, as his horse was standing
+saddled in readiness in the courtyard. He was but an hour away, and,
+as he knew that he would not be farther required, he rode round to the
+house where he was quartered. His orderly came forward at his shout,
+and took his horse, and he mounted the broad stairs of the house,
+which was a very handsome one, and rang at the door on the second
+floor; for in Spain, as indeed almost all over the Continent, each
+floor is a separate dwelling.
+
+Sam opened it.
+
+"Nothing new, Sam?"
+
+"No, sar, nothing new."
+
+Tom passed through the sitting-room, and entered Peter's bedroom. It
+was in darkness.
+
+"Asleep, old man?" he asked.
+
+There was no answer. He came back into the sitting room, where two
+lamps were burning, and looked at his watch. "Half-past eleven. He is
+off to bed early. Sam, bring me some supper if you have got anything,
+I am hungry."
+
+Sam came in, in a minute, with a small tray.
+
+"How long has my brother been gone to bed?"
+
+"Me did not know he gone to bed at all," Sam said, in surprise. "Me
+thought Massa Peter been reading book."
+
+Tom took up a light, and went into the bedroom, it was empty. "Sam,
+there's something wrong here!" Tom said sharply, for a sudden
+sensation of alarm seized him. "Peter is not here."
+
+Sam came into the bedroom, and looked round in astonishment. "What
+become of him?" he said. "Where de debil he got to?"
+
+"That's what I want to know, Sam. Now, then, just give all your
+attention. What time did he come in?"
+
+"He came in at about nine o'clock, sar, with three other officers,
+Captain Farquharson, Major Heriot, and Captain Brown. Dey have bottle
+wine, and sit here and smoke. Well, Massa Tom, Sam sit in his room,
+and smoke him pipe, and he doze off a little; after a bit, may be
+ten o'clock, Sam hear dem move, and go to door; they were saying
+good-night, when Massa Peter said, 'I will just go down to see that
+the horses are all right.' Den dey all go down togeder."
+
+"Did they shut the door?" Tom asked.
+
+"No, Massa Tom, dey did not shut de door, because, a little while
+after, Sam, he wake up wid little start; he hear de door bang, and
+'spose Massa Peter come back. Sam go off to sleep again till you ring
+bell."
+
+Tom looked very grave. "What can Peter have gone off with Farquharson
+at this time of night for?"
+
+Then he looked round the room, and said, almost with a cry, "Sam,
+look there, there are his cap and sword. He has not gone out with the
+others at all. What can have happened?"
+
+Tom first glanced into his own room, and then ran downstairs in haste,
+followed by Sam, who was now also thoroughly alarmed. The orderly had
+just made the horse comfortable for the night, and was leaving the
+stable.
+
+"Johnstone, when did you see my brother?"
+
+"Well, it may be an hour, or an hour and a half back, sir. He came
+down with some other officers; I did not see them, but I heard them
+talking for a minute or two before he came in to look at the horses,
+and he asked if they were all right, and said they must be saddled by
+half-past five, and then he went up again--at least, I suppose he went
+up, for he had not got his cap on. Is anything wrong, sir?"
+
+"I don't know, I am afraid to think," Tom said, in a dazed way. "He is
+not upstairs; he has not gone out; what can have become of him?"
+
+He stood quiet for a minute or two, and then, with a great effort,
+brought his thoughts within control again. "The first thing is to
+assure ourselves whether he returned upstairs. Sam, fetch a lamp, the
+stairs are not lighted, and I want to examine them."
+
+Sam soon returned with the lamp, and Tom, beginning at the street
+door, examined every step carefully all the way up, Sam and the
+soldier following him.
+
+"There has been no scuffle on the stairs," he said; then he went
+through the little hall into the sitting-room again. Nothing appeared
+to have been disturbed. Then he looked at the floor, which was of
+polished oak, and knelt down to examine it more closely. "There have
+been men with dirty shoes standing here," he cried. "Do you see the
+marks on each side of the door, and there, do you see that scratch and
+that? There has been a scuffle. Good heavens! what has taken place
+here?"
+
+Sam's face was pale with apprehension that something had happened to
+Peter; but, he said, "How dat be, Massa Tom, with Sam in the next room
+all the time?"
+
+Tom made no reply; but was closely examining the floor--back across
+the hall. "There is a mark; there is another," he said, "not made by
+boots, but by their native sandals." Then he went out from the door,
+and up the next flight of stairs.
+
+"There," he said, "just as I thought." Just round the angle of the
+stairs two steps were dirty and stained, as if dirty feet had been
+trampling upon them for some time. "I suppose they knew I was out, and
+watched here, for hours, perhaps. Then, when Peter went down, they
+slipped in through the open door, and then"--without completing the
+sentence, Tom went back into the room, and threw himself into a chair
+in tearless despair.
+
+Sam sobbed loudly. For some time there was silence. "There is no
+blood, sir, that I can see, not a speck," the orderly said. "They
+can't have killed Captain Scudamore, and, if they had, why should they
+have carried his body away?"
+
+This was the question Tom had been asking himself. Assassinations
+were, in Madrid, every-day occurrences, and that Peter and he were
+especially liable to be murdered, owing to the hatred of Nunez and his
+gang, was clear; but, so far as he could see, not a drop of blood had
+been shed here. Presently Sam began to sob more loudly. "Dis break
+my heart, Massa Tom, to tink dat Sam be next door all de time, and,
+instead of watching, he sleep so sound dat Massa Peter carried
+straight away."
+
+"You are not to blame, Sam, there was, probably, no noise whatever.
+But, what can it all mean? Johnstone, you had better go to bed, you
+can do no good now. Sam, give me my pistols; take that big stick of
+yours, and come round with me to head-quarters, we will call in at
+Captain Farquharson's on the way."
+
+That officer, on being roused, and made to understand what was the
+matter, confirmed the account given by the orderly; he and his
+companions had parted at the street door, and Peter had gone down the
+yard to the stable.
+
+"It is clear that Peter has been carried off," Tom said, "and I have
+not the least doubt that it has been done by some of the band of
+Nunez. As you have heard me say, they owe us a grudge, and have, no
+doubt, been on the look-out ever since we came here. We have been
+on guard, and never gave them a chance, and, I suppose, they got
+desperate when they found the army was moving again, and so carried
+out this audacious plan."
+
+"If your brother had been found murdered I should understand it,"
+Captain Farquharson said; "but, what on earth did they carry him off
+for?"
+
+Tom was silent for a minute.
+
+"That fiend, Nunez, would have had us stabbed if he could do nothing
+else; but he would, if I judge him rightly, be really contented with
+nothing short of putting us to death himself in some horrible manner.
+My own idea is, that Peter is hidden away somewhere near, will be kept
+in concealment until the road is clear, and will then be taken to
+Nunez. I must go off and try and save him at all hazards."
+
+Captain Farquharson was silent, while Tom walked up and down the room
+thoughtfully.
+
+"I don't suppose the chief would refuse me leave," Tom said. "If he
+does, I must throw up my commission."
+
+"No, no; you are sure to get leave for such a thing as this, but the
+difficulty of the affair will be to know how to proceed. The country
+will swarm with French, the guerillas are sure to keep a sharp
+look-out, and if you find him, how are you going to rescue him?"
+
+"I don't know," Tom said, "but it's got to be done; that's clear. I
+can't set out as a Spanish peasant," he went on after a pause. "They
+know me as that now. At least, if I do I must get up as an old man
+and change my appearance. I might go as a woman, but I am too tall in
+the first place, and then women don't go wandering over the country
+in such times as this. But there, I have time to think it over before
+morning. I suppose the general will be moving about five o'clock;
+I will see him the first thing, and tell him the whole story.
+Good-night."
+
+And so Tom went back to his quarters, and sat thinking deeply until
+morning, while Sam sat gloomily in his little room, sometimes with
+tears rolling down his cheeks, sometimes muttering terrible threats
+against the guerillas, at other times cursing himself for having been
+asleep instead of watching over his young master's safety. Tom had
+briefly told him that he intended to get leave in order to search
+for Peter. At daybreak, when he heard Tom moving, he went into the
+sitting-room.
+
+"Look here, Massa Tom, Sam only one word to say. He going to look for
+Massa Peter. Sam know dat him color berry spicuous, dat people look
+at him and tink he de debil. Sam don't spect he going wid you. Dat
+wouldn't do. Dese fellows watch him, know dat black fellow here. Only
+Sam go somehow. He trabel night, hide up at day time. He join you de
+last ting when you go to mash up dem guerillas like squash. Anyhow,
+Sam must go. If can get leave, berry well, if not he desert. Anyhow he
+go, dat sartin. Sam kill himself if he stay behind."
+
+Tom had already thought over this. He was sure that the faithful negro
+would not remain behind, but he had seen that his companionship would
+be fatal. He had, therefore, formed some plan in his head similar to
+that which Sam proposed, and he knew that when the moment for action
+came his courage, strength, and devotion would be invaluable.
+
+"You shall go, Sam," he said, holding out his hand to his attached
+follower. "As you say, you can't go with me, but you shall go
+somehow."
+
+"Thank you, Massa Tom," the negro said gratefully, "You berry sure if
+Massa Peter die Sam die too."
+
+Tom now went to head-quarters, and found that Lord Wellington was
+just up. Sending in to say that he wished to speak with him for a few
+minutes on a matter of urgent personal importance, he was admitted,
+and related as concisely as he could Peter's disappearance, and told
+the story of the affair with the guerillas, which accounted for the
+intense desire for vengeance on the part of Nunez. He ended by asking
+for leave of absence.
+
+The general heard him to the end, asking a brief question here and
+there.
+
+"You can have the leave certainly, Captain Scudamore, I know that it
+is needless for me to point out the risks that you will run, both from
+the French and guerillas. I think that it might be an advantage if I
+give you a note which you can, in case of absolute necessity, show to
+any French officer."
+
+So saying, the general sat down and wrote as follows:--
+
+"To the French officer commanding.--The Earl of Wellington,
+commander-in-chief of His Britannic Majesty's forces in Spain, gives
+his assurance that the bearer of this, Captain Scudamore, although not
+in English uniform, is not engaged upon any mission connected with the
+army, or to obtain information respecting the strength and position of
+the French forces. His business is entirely private, and he is engaged
+in an attempt to discover and rescue a brother who has been carried
+off by the guerilla chief Nunez in order to gratify private vengeance.
+The Earl of Wellington, confiding in the natural courtesy of the
+French nation, trusts that officers of that service will, if applied
+to, assist Captain Scudamore in any way in their power, and he will
+feel personally obliged to them by their so doing."
+
+Tom expressed his deep gratitude for this, which might, he foresaw, be
+of inestimable advantage to him.
+
+"I am taking my servant with me, sir--the negro; he will not travel
+with me by day, but will join me wherever I tell him; he is very
+strong and brave, and is deeply attached to us."
+
+"Yes, I remember," the general said; "that is the man whose life you
+saved. Do you leave at once?"
+
+"No, sir; I am thinking of riding with you to-morrow at any rate. The
+route lies on the way I have to go, and I am sure to be watched here."
+
+"Very well," the general said; "I wish you good fortune; but you have
+a difficult, almost a desperate, service before you."
+
+Upon leaving head-quarters, Tom again called on Captain Farquharson.
+
+"Farquharson, I hear that it will be eleven before the chief leaves. I
+wish you would go to that little shop opposite the opera-house; they
+have got wigs and all that sort of thing there. Please get me two
+old men's wigs and beards, and one set of those mutton-chop shaped
+whiskers, and a woman's wig. I haven't made up my mind yet what I am
+going to wear, but I want these things to choose from. I am sure to be
+watched, and if I were to go there they would find out, five minutes
+afterwards, what I had bought. In the meantime I am going to the head
+of the police to give notice of Peter's disappearance, and to ask him
+to have the carts leaving the town for the next few days searched.
+I have no doubt the fellows will outwit the police, but it's no use
+throwing away a chance."
+
+It was six days after this that an old man, with long white hair
+and gray beard, and with a box containing cheap trinkets, beads,
+necklaces, earrings, knives, scissors, and other like articles, was
+sitting at the junction of two roads near the lower slopes of the
+Pyrenees, some twenty miles north of Vittoria. He had one of his
+sandals off, and appeared to have just risen from a bed of leaves in
+the forest behind him. The dawn had broken, but it was still twilight.
+Presently he heard a footstep coming along the road, and at once
+applied himself to wrapping the bandages, which serve for stockings
+to the Spanish peasant, round his leg, looking eagerly from under his
+wide sombrero to see who was approaching. As the new-comer came in
+sight, the pedlar at once ceased his employment and rose to meet him.
+He had recognized the figure, but the face was hidden, the Spanish
+cloak, worn as is usual by peasant and noble alike, with one end
+thrown over the shoulder, hiding the chin and lower part of the face,
+while the wide felt hat, pressed well down in front, allowed scarcely
+a glimpse even of the nose. That, however, would have been sufficient
+in the present case, for the man was a negro.
+
+Upon seeing the pedlar rise, he ran forward to meet him.
+
+"Ah, Massa Tom, tank de Lord me find you safe and sound. I always
+keep on tinking you taken prisoner or killed eider by de French or de
+robbers--one as bad as de oder."
+
+"I have thought the same of you, Sam, for your risk has been far
+greater than mine. Well, thank God, it is all right thus far. But come
+back into the wood, I have got some food there, and here any one might
+come along."
+
+They were soon deep in the wood, where, by a pile of grass and leaves
+which had evidently been used as a bed, was an open wallet, with some
+bread, cheese, cold meat and a small skin of wine.
+
+"Are you hungry, Sam?"
+
+"Downright starving, sar; dis chile eat noting for two days."
+
+"Why, how is that, Sam; you had six days' provision with you when you
+started?"
+
+"Dat true enough, sar, but Sam's appetite bigger than usual, noting to
+do all day sitting in de woods, waiting for night to come so as to go
+on again; so had to eat, and de food all went before Sam thought dat
+dere was two more days before he meet you."
+
+"Well, sit down now, Sam, and eat away; we have plenty of time."
+
+They had much to tell each other. They had traveled by the same road,
+one by night, the other by day--Sam passing the days sleeping in the
+woods, his master traveling by day and at night sleeping in wretched
+village posadas. He, too, would far rather have slept in the woods,
+for the insects and filth made sleep almost impossible in these
+places, besides which he ran a good deal of risk as to the discovery
+of his disguise. He had, however, chosen the inns in hopes of hearing
+something which might give him a clue as to the object of his search.
+The only information, which he had gained was to the effect that Nunez
+still had his quarters at the old place. He had been driven out of it,
+and the village had been burned by the French, but the position was
+a convenient one, and the houses had been cleared and roughly roofed
+with boughs of trees and straw, and the band was still there. This
+much was satisfactory, and he could hardly have expected to learn
+more, unless he had happened to meet some of the members of the band
+itself. They had not traveled by the main road, as upon that large
+forces of the French were collected; and even if Tom could have
+passed through, boldly, Sam could not have made his way. Even by the
+road they had chosen Tom had met several bodies of French, while at
+Vittoria a very large force was assembling, destined for the relief of
+Burgos.
+
+Sam had but few incidents to relate. He had been carefully instructed
+by Tom before starting as to the road he should take, and the position
+and distances apart of the towns and villages upon it. He had traveled
+only at night, and had but once or twice exchanged a word with passers
+by. People did not travel much at night in so disturbed a country,
+and when Sam heard a foot-passenger approaching, or, as was more
+frequently the case, a party of French cavalry, he left the road and
+lay down, until they had passed. The one or two foot-passengers he had
+met suddenly he had passed with the usual Spanish muttered salutation,
+and the darkness and the disguise prevented any recognition of his
+color.
+
+"Now, sar," Sam said, when they had finished breakfast, "what am to be
+done next?"
+
+"I do not think, Sam, that the party who have got Peter have arrived
+yet. They could only have started on the day that we did; they have as
+long a road to go, and most likely they have got a bullock-cart, which
+won't travel more than fifteen miles a day at the outside. They have
+got Peter in a cart covered up with something, we may be sure. I don't
+think they will be here for another day or so at the earliest. If we
+knew what sort of cart it was, we could attack them on the way if
+there are not too many of them; but unfortunately we don't know that;
+and as there are three or four roads up to the village, and they are
+sure to make a detour, we don't know which they will come by. I hope
+to learn at the village. We will stay where we are till dark, then we
+will push on; it is only a couple of miles or so from here. I will
+steal into the place after dark, and try and overhear what is going
+on. You shall remain at a point where you can see down into the
+village and can hear a shout. I will give you this letter of Lord
+Wellington, and if you hear a pistol shot and hear me shout 'Sam!' you
+will know I am caught, and must make off as hard as you can to that
+small town in the plain, where there is a French garrison; ask for the
+commanding-officer, show this letter, and offer to guide them so as
+to surprise Nunez and his band. That is our sole chance. But I don't
+think there is much risk of being caught. I shall be very careful, you
+may rely upon it; and as I know the position of the house, I shall be
+able to make my way about. Once night has fallen they go off to bed;
+and even if I walked boldly about the place I should likely enough
+meet no one all night."
+
+That evening Tom entered the village as soon as it was fairly dark. He
+knew, from his former experience, that sentries were always placed at
+points whence they could get a view of the roads, and he made his way
+so as to avoid any risk of observation by them; but when he reached a
+place whence he could in turn view the posts of the watchers, he found
+that they were deserted, and concluded that the brigands had become
+careless, from the belief that, now the French had once destroyed the
+village, they would not be likely to come up to search for them there
+a second time; besides which, they might reckon that the French had
+their hands much too full with the advance of the Allied Army to spare
+either men or time in raids upon the guerillas. In this particular,
+indeed, they would have argued wrongly, for the French during the
+whole war, however much they were pressed by Wellington, always kept
+sufficient forces in hand to scatter the guerillas as fast as they
+become formidable.
+
+Tom had now taken off his beard and wig, and had put on the small
+whisker, which is the general fashion of wearing the hair throughout
+Spain. Thus he trusted, if surprised in the dark, to pass as one of
+the band. So quiet was the village when he entered, that he at first
+thought it was deserted; at last, however, he saw a light in one of
+the houses in the center of the village. Approaching carefully and
+noiselessly he saw a group of five men sitting and drinking round a
+fire made on the ground, in the center of one of the windowless rooms,
+the smoke finding its way out through the roof.
+
+"I tell you," one said, "I am getting sick of this life; I am ready to
+go and kill the French, but to be left up here, where there is nothing
+to do, no one to talk to, not a roof to cover one; bah! I am sick of
+it. But Nunez will be back in three days, and we shall be merry enough
+then."
+
+"Not we," another said, "this was a pleasant village in the old days,
+what is it now? There are no women, not even old mother Morena, who
+used to cook well, if she was free of her tongue. There is not even a
+priest now to shrive us if one is brought in to die."
+
+"Nunez will come back in a good temper if it is true what Lope said
+yesterday when he came through, that the lads at Madrid had got one
+of those English boys who made a fool of him two years ago. That was
+a go. Demonio! but it was a fine thing. If it is true that they have
+got him and are bringing him here I would not be in his skin for all
+the treasures of King Joseph. Yes, Nunez was always a devil, but he is
+worse now. Somehow we always have bad luck, and the band gets smaller
+and smaller, I don't suppose there's above fifty with him now. I
+expect we shall have them pretty well all here this week."
+
+"No fear of a visit from the French?"
+
+"None; Reynier at Vittoria is busy now in sending every man he can
+spare forward to the army that's gathering near Burgos."
+
+This was enough for Tom, who stole silently away to the spot where Sam
+was anxiously awaiting him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+JUST IN TIME.
+
+
+"I shall go straight back to Vittoria, Sam. By what they say, General
+Reynier is in command there, and as it was through his wife that all
+this terrible business has come about, we have a right to expect him
+to do his best to get us out of it. I will start at once. Now look
+here, Sam. You must put yourself where you can keep watch over the
+village. If you see any party come in, either to-night or to-morrow,
+you must try and discover if Peter is among them. If he is, light a
+fire down in that hollow where it can't be seen from above, but where
+we can see it on that road. It's twenty miles to Vittoria; if I can
+get to see General Reynier to-morrow, I may be back here with cavalry
+by night; if he is out or anything prevents it, I will be here next
+night, as soon after dusk as it will be safe. I will dismount the men
+and take them over the hill, so as to avoid the sentinel who is sure
+to be posted on the road when Nunez arrives. If they come in the
+afternoon, Sam, and you find that anything is going to be done at
+once, do everything you can to delay matters."
+
+"All right, Massa Tom, if, when you come back you find Massa Peter
+dead, you be berry sure you find dis chile gone down too."
+
+It was seven o'clock next morning when Tom entered Vittoria, and
+a few cautious inquiries proved the fact that General Reynier was
+really in command of the French division there. He at once sought his
+head-quarters, and after some talk with a woman selling fruit near the
+house, heard that the general and his staff had started at daybreak,
+but whither of course she knew not. Tom hesitated for some time, and
+then, seeing an officer standing at the door, went up to him and asked
+if the general would be back soon.
+
+"He will be back in an hour or two," the officer replied in Spanish,
+"but it is no use your waiting to see him. He has his hands full and
+can't be bothered with petitions as to cattle stolen or orchards
+robbed. Wait till we have driven the English back, and then we shall
+have time to talk to you."
+
+"Your pardon," Tom said humbly. "It is not a complaint that I have to
+make, it is something of real importance which I have to communicate
+to him."
+
+"You can tell me, I am Colonel Decamps; it will be all the same thing
+if your news is really important."
+
+"Thank you very kindly, señor, it must be the general himself; I will
+wait here." Thereupon Tom sat down with his back to the wall a short
+distance off, pulled out some bread and fruit he had bought in the
+town, and began quietly to eat his breakfast. An hour later a pretty
+carriage with two fine horses drew up to the door. It was empty,
+and was evidently intended for some one in the house. Suddenly, the
+thought flashed across his mind, perhaps Madame Reynier and her child
+were there. It was curious that the thought had not occurred to him
+before, but it had not, and he drew near, when a sentry at the door
+roughly ordered him to stand further back. Presently a lady came to
+the door, accompanied by a little girl. There she stood for a minute
+talking with the officer with whom Tom had spoken. At the moment a
+young officer passed Tom on his way to the house.
+
+"Monsieur," Tom said, in French, "do me the favor to place that ring
+in the hands of Madame Reynier. It is a matter of life and death.
+She will recognize the ring, it is her own," he added, as the young
+officer in surprise hesitated. He was a bright handsome young fellow,
+and after a moment's, pause, he went up to the lady. "My dear aunt,"
+he said, "here is a mystery. An old Spanish beggar speaks French, not
+very good French, but enough to make out, and he begs me to give you
+this ring, which he says is yours, and which, by the way, looks a
+valuable one." Madame Reynier, in some surprise, held out her hand
+for the ring. "It is not mine," she began, when a sudden thought
+struck her, and turning it round she saw "a Louise Reynier, tumors
+reconnaissance," which she had had engraved on it, before giving it to
+Tom. "Who gave it to you, Jules?" she asked eagerly.
+
+"That old pedler," Jules said.
+
+"Bring him in," Madame Reynier said, "the carriage must wait; I must
+speak to him and alone."
+
+"My dear aunt," began her nephew.
+
+"Don't be afraid, Jules, I am not going to run away with him, and if
+you are a good boy you shall know all about it afterwards, wait here,
+Louise, with your cousin;" and beckoning to Tom to follow her, she
+went into the house, the two officers looking astounded at each other
+as the supposed Spanish pedler followed her into her sitting-room.
+
+"What is your message?" she asked.
+
+Tom's answer was to remove his wide hat, wig, and beard.
+
+"Himself!" Madame Reynier exclaimed, "my preserver," and she held out
+both her hands to him. "How glad I am, but oh! how foolish to come
+here again, and--and"--she hesitated at the thought that he, an
+English spy, ought not to come to her, the wife of a French general.
+
+Tom guessed her thought. "Even General Reynier might succor us without
+betraying the interests of his country. Read that, madame; it is an
+open letter," and he handed her Lord Wellington's letter.
+
+She glanced through it and turned pale. "Your brother! is he in the
+hands of the guerillas? Where? How?"
+
+"He is in the hands of that scoundrel Nunez; he swore he would be
+revenged for that day's work, and he has had Peter carried off. No
+doubt to kill him with torture."
+
+"Oh! and it is through me," Madame Reynier exclaimed, greatly
+distressed. "What can we do! Please let me consult with my friends,
+every soldier shall be at your service," and she opened the door.
+"Colonel Deschamps, Jules, come here directly, and bring Louise with
+you." These officers, on entering, were struck dumb with astonishment
+on finding a young peasant instead of an old pedler, and at seeing
+tears standing in Madame Reynier's eyes. "Louise," she said to her
+daughter, "look at this gentleman, who is he?"
+
+The child looked hard at Tom; he was dressed nearly as when she first
+saw him--and as he smiled she recognized him. "Oh, it is the good
+boy!" she cried, and leaped into Tom's arms, and kissed him heartily.
+
+"Do you think we have gone mad, Jules, Louise and I? This is one of
+the young English officers who saved our lives, as you have often
+heard me tell you."
+
+Jules stepped forward, and shook Tom's hand heartily, but Colonel
+Deschamps looked very serious. "But, madame," he began, "you are wrong
+to tell me this."
+
+"No, Colonel;" Madame Reynier said, "here is a letter, of which this
+gentleman is the bearer, from Lord Wellington himself, vouching for
+him, and asking for the help of every Frenchman."
+
+Colonel Deschamps read it, and his brow cleared, and he held out his
+hand to Tom. "Pardon my hesitation, sir," he said in Spanish; "but I
+feared that I was placed in a painful position, between what I owe
+to my country, and what all French soldiers owe to you, for what you
+did for Madame Reynier. I am, indeed, glad to find that this letter
+absolves me from the former duty, and leaves me free to do all I can
+to discharge the latter debt. Where is your brother, and why has he
+been carried off? I have known hundreds of our officers assassinated
+by these Spanish wolves, but never one carried away. An English
+officer, too, it makes it the more strange!"
+
+Tom now related the story of Peter's abduction; the previous attempts
+of members of Nunez's band to assassinate them, and the reasons he
+had for believing that Peter was close to, if not already at, the
+headquarters of that desperado.
+
+"Is he still there?" Jules asked. "We routed him out directly the
+general came up here. My aunt declared herself bound by a promise, and
+would give us no clue as to the position of the village, but he had
+made himself such a scourge, that there were plenty of others ready to
+tell; if we had known the roads, we would have killed the whole band,
+but unfortunately they took the alarm and made off. So he has gone
+back there again. Ah! there is the general."
+
+Madame Reynier went out to meet her husband, and drawing him aside
+into another room, explained the whole circumstance to him, with
+difficulty detaining him long enough to tell her story, as the moment
+he found that his wife and child's deliverer was in the next room, he
+desired to rush off to see him. The story over, he rushed impetuously
+into the room, where Tom was explaining his plans to his French
+friends, seized him in his arms, and kissed him on both cheeks, as if
+he had been his son.
+
+"I have longed for this day!" he said, wiping his eyes. "I have prayed
+that I might some day meet you, to thank you for my wife and child,
+who would have been lost to me, but for you. And now I hear your
+gallant brother is paying with his life for that good deed. Tell me
+what to do, and if necessary I will put the whole division at your
+orders."
+
+"I do not think that he will have above fifty men with him, general;
+say eighty, at the outside. Two squadrons of cavalry will be
+sufficient. They must dismount at the bottom of the hill, and I will
+lead them up. We must not get within sight of the hill till it is too
+dark for their look-out to see us, or the alarm would be given, and we
+should catch no one. We shall know if they have arrived, by a fire my
+man is to light. If they have not come, then I would put sentries on
+guard upon every road leading there, and search every cart that comes
+up; they are sure to have got him hid under some hay, or something of
+that sort, and there are not likely to be more than two or three men
+actually with it, so as not to attract attention. It will be all right
+if they do not arrive there to-day."
+
+"It is about five hours' ride for cavalry," the general said, "that
+is at an easy pace; it will not be dark enough to approach the hill
+without being seen till eight o'clock. Two squadrons shall be paraded
+here at three o'clock. I will go with you myself; yes, and you shall
+go too, Jules," he said, in answer to an anxious look from his nephew.
+"In the mean time you can lend our friend some clothes; you are about
+the same size."
+
+"Come along," Jules said laughing; "I think we can improve your
+appearance," and, indeed, he did so, for in half an hour Tom returned
+looking all over a dashing young French hussar, and little Louise
+clapped her hands and said--
+
+"He does look nice, mamma, don't he? Why can't he stay with us always,
+and dress like that? and we know he's brave, and he would help papa
+and Jules to kill the wicked English."
+
+There was a hearty laugh, and Jules was about to tell her that Tom was
+himself one of the wicked English, but Madame Reynier shook her head,
+for, as she told him afterwards, it was as well not to tell her, for
+little mouths would talk, and there was no occasion to set everyone
+wondering and talking about the visit of an English officer to General
+Reynier. "There is no treason in it, Jules, still one does not want to
+be suspected of treason, even by fools."
+
+Sam watched all night, without hearing any sound of vehicles, but in
+the morning he saw that several more guerillas had come in during the
+night. In the morning parties of twos and threes began to come in
+from the direction of Vittoria, and it was evident from the shouting
+and noise in the village that these brought satisfactory news of
+some kind. In the afternoon most of them went out again in a body
+to the wood at the foot of the hill, and soon afterwards Sam saw a
+cart coming along across the plain. Two men walked beside it, and
+Sam could see one, if not two more perched upon the top of the load.
+Three others walked along at a distance of some fifty yards ahead, and
+as many more at about the same distance behind. He could see others
+making their way through the fields. "Dis berry bad job," Sam said
+to himself; "me berry much afraid dat Massa Tom he not get back in
+time. Der's too many for Sam to fight all by himself, but he must
+do someting." Whereupon Sam set to to think with all his might, and
+presently burst into a broad grin. "Sure enough dat do," he said; "now
+let me arrange all about what dey call de pamerphernalia." First, he
+emptied out the contents of a couple of dozen pistol cartridges; he
+wetted the powder and rolled it up in six cartridges, like squibs,
+three short ones and three much longer. Then he opened Tom's kit,
+and took out a small box of paints, which Tom had carried with him
+for making dark lines on his face, and in other ways to assist his
+disguise. Taking some white paint, Sam painted his eyelids up to his
+eyebrows, and a circle on his cheeks, giving the eyes at a short
+distance the appearance of ghastly saucers.
+
+"Dat will do for de present," he said; "now for business. If dey wait
+till it get dark, all right; if not, Sam do for Nunez and two or three
+more, and den go down with Massa Peter!"
+
+Then carefully examining the priming of the pair of pistols, which
+he carried--the very pistols given to Peter by the passengers of the
+Marlborough coach--he prepared to set out.
+
+It was now six o'clock, and he calculated that the waggon would by
+this time have mounted the hill, and reached the village; he had
+already collected a large heap of dry sticks and some logs, at the
+point Tom had pointed out, these he now lit, and then started for the
+top of the hill. Looking back, just as he reached the crest, he could
+see, knowing where it was, a very light smoke curling up over a clump
+of trees which intervened between him and the fire, but it was so
+slight that he was convinced that it would not be noticed by an
+ordinary observer. Sam saw at once, on reaching the top of the hill,
+that the guerillas were crowded round the waggon, which stood at the
+edge of a small clump of trees in the middle of the village. The
+moment was favourable, and he at once started forward, sometimes
+making a detour, so as to have the shelter of a tree, sometimes
+stooping behind a low stone wall, until he reached the first house
+in the village. It was now comparatively easy work, for there were
+enclosures and walls, the patches of garden-ground were breast-high
+with weeds, and, stooping and crawling, Sam soon reached a house close
+to the waggon. It was a mere hut, and had not been repaired. The roof
+was gone, but the charred shutters and doors still hung on their
+hinges. It was the very place from which to see without being seen.
+Sam entered by a door from behind, and found that, through a slight
+opening in the window-shutter, he could see all that was going on.
+Some fifty guerillas were standing or sitting in groups at a distance
+of twenty yards.
+
+In the centre of the groups, lying on the ground, was a figure which
+he at once recognized as Peter. It was wound round and round with
+ropes; beside it stood, or rather danced, Nunez pouring forth strings
+of abuse, of threats, and of curses, and enforcing them with repeated
+kicks at the motionless figure.
+
+"De debil!" muttered Sam, "me neber able to stand dis. If you not stop
+dat, Massa Nunez, me put a bullet through dat ugly head of yours, as
+sure as you stand dere. But me mustn't do it till last ting; for,
+whether I kill him or not, it's all up with Massa Peter and me if I
+once fire."
+
+Fortunately Nunez was tired, and in a short time he desisted, and
+threw himself down on the ground. "Take off his ropes, one of you," he
+said: "there would be no fear of his running away had he three or four
+days to live, instead of as many hours. Take the gag out of his mouth,
+throw some water over him to bring him round, and pour some wine down
+his throat. I want him to be fresh, so as to be able to enjoy the
+pleasure we have in store for him. And now let's have dinner."
+
+Sam felt that for another hour at least Peter was safe, and
+therefore, with the same precaution as before, he crept away from his
+hiding-place, through the village, and over the hill-crest, to the
+place where he had made his fire. The logs were burning well, but gave
+out but little smoke. Sam looked at the sky. "Dusk cum on berry fast,"
+he said; "another hour Massa Tom come on with soldiers. If he see
+fire, he hurry up sharp." So saying, Sam heaped on a pile of wood,
+and then made his way back. He knew that Tom would not approach until
+it was too dark for the movements of the troops to be seen by the
+look-outs, and that he could not be expected to reach the village
+until fully an hour after dark. "Just another hour and a half," he
+said to himself; "ebery thing depend upon what happen before dat
+time." It was quite dusk before he regained the shelter of the
+cottage. He had gone round by the wagon, and had taken from it a large
+stable-fork, muttering as he did so. "Golly! dis de berry ting."
+Close by he saw the carcase of a bullock which the guerillas had just
+slaughtered, and from this he cut off the horns and tail.
+
+When Sam peeped out through the shutter he saw that something was
+going to be done. Nunez was sitting smoking a cigarette, with a look
+of savage pleasure in his face, while the men heaped up a large fire
+in front of the trees.
+
+"I don't like dat gentleman's look," Sam said to himself. "It's time
+dis chile begin to dress for de pantomime, dat quite plain. Massa Tom
+get here too late." Thus saying, Sam began to deliberately undress.
+
+Peter, his arms and feet still bound, was sitting with his back
+against a tree, watching what were, he was convinced, the preparations
+for his death. For the last ten days he had lived in a sort of
+confused and painful dream. From the moment, when, upon entering his
+room two hands suddenly gripped his throat, others thrust a gag in the
+mouth, and then blindfolded him, while some one from behind lashed his
+arms to his side, and then altogether, lifting him like a log, carried
+him downstairs and threw him into a cart, he had not till now seen
+anything. The bandage had never been removed from his eyes, or the
+cords from his limbs. Sometimes he had been made to sit up, and soup
+and wine had been poured down his throat, or a piece of bread thrust
+into his mouth; then he had been again gagged and thrown into a cart.
+Over him brushwood and fagots had been piled, and there he had lain,
+until at night a stop was made, when he was taken out, fed, and then
+thrust back again and covered over.
+
+From the first he had never doubted who were his captors, or what was
+his destination, and he therefore experienced no surprise whatever,
+when, on his arrival at the village, on the bandage being taken off
+his eyes, he saw where he was. That it was useless to beg for mercy of
+the savages into whose power he had fallen he knew well enough, and he
+looked as calm and indifferent, as if he did not hear a word of the
+threats and imprecations which Nunez was heaping on him.
+
+"You see that fire," the enraged guerilla said, "there you shall be
+roasted! English pig that you are! But not yet. That were too quick
+a death! Here," he said to his followers, "make a little fire by the
+side of the big one--there under the arm of that tree; and put on
+plenty of green leaves: we will smoke our pig a bit before we roast
+him!"
+
+Peter still eyed him unflinchingly. He was determined that no pain
+should wring a complaint or prayer for mercy. Even now he did not
+quite despair, for he thought that he had just one chance of life. He
+was sure that Tom would move heaven and earth to save him. He reckoned
+that he would at once guess who had carried him off, and with what
+object; and he felt that Tom would be certain to set off to his
+rescue. All this he had reflected over in his long days of weary
+suffering, and from the moment that he was unbandaged, and propped
+against the tree, he had listened attentively for any unusual sound.
+How Tom could rescue him he did not see. He was so utterly crippled,
+from his long confinement, that he knew that it would be hours,
+perhaps days, before he could walk a step; yet, still he thought it
+possible that Tom might try; and he feared more than he hoped, for he
+trembled lest, if Tom were really there, that he would do some rash
+thing, which would involve him in his fate. "Whether Tom is here or
+not," Peter thought as he looked unflinchingly at Nunez, "one thing
+is certain, if I know my brother, you will not have many days to live
+after me, for Tom will follow you all over Spain, but he will avenge
+me at last!" Such were Peter's thoughts, and so likely did he think it
+that Tom was present, that he was scarcely surprised when he heard, as
+from the ground behind him, a well-known voice.
+
+"Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam here, Massa Tom he be here
+in another half hour with French soldiers. If dey go to kill you
+before dat, Sam play dem trick. Can you run, Massa Peter, if I cut de
+cord?"
+
+"No, Sam."
+
+"Dat bad job. Neber mind, Massa Peter, you keep up your heart. Sam
+keep quiet as long as he can, but when de worst come Sam do de trick
+all right."
+
+"Don't show yourself, Sam. It would only cost you your life, and
+couldn't help me; besides, it would put them on their guard. They
+won't kill me yet. They will smoke me, and so on, but they will make
+it last as long as they can."
+
+Peter was able to say this, for at the moment Nunez was occupied in
+rolling and lighting a second cigarette. Peter received no answer, for
+Sam, seeing some guerillas bringing sticks and leaves to make a fire,
+as Nunez, had ordered, crept back again into the deep shadow behind.
+The fire was now giving out volumes of smoke, a guerilla climbed up
+the tree and slung a rope over it, and three others approached Peter.
+His heart beat rapidly; but it was with hope, not fear. He knew, from
+the words of Nunez, that at present he was not going to be burned,
+but, as he guessed, to be hung over the smoke until he was insensible,
+and then brought to life again with buckets of water, only to have the
+suffocation repeated, until it pleased Nunez to try some fresh mode of
+torture.
+
+It was as he imagined. The rope was attached to his legs, and amid
+the cheers of the guerillas, two men hauled upon the other end until
+Peter swung, head downwards, over the fire. There was no flame, but
+dense volumes of pungent smoke rose in his face. For a moment his eyes
+smarted with agony, then a choking sensation seized him, his blood
+seemed to rush into his head, and his veins to be bursting: and there
+was a confused din in his ears and a last throb of pain, and then he
+was insensible.
+
+"That's enough for the present," Nunez said; "cut him down."
+
+The men advanced to do so, but paused, with astonishment, for from
+behind the great fire was a loud yell--"Yah, yah, yah!"--each louder
+than the last, and then, leaping through the flames appeared, as they
+supposed, the devil. Sam's appearance was indeed amply sufficient to
+strike horror in the minds of a band of intensely superstitious men.
+He had entirely stripped himself, with the exception of his sandals,
+which he had retained in order to be able to run freely; on his head
+were two great horns; in one hand he held a fork, and in the other
+what appeared to be his tail, but which really belonged to the
+slaughtered bullock. From his month, his horns, and the end of his
+tail poured volumes of fire, arising, it needs not to say, from the
+squibs he had prepared. The great white circles round the eyes added
+to the ghastliness of his appearance, and seeing the terrible figure
+leap apparently from the flames, it is no wonder that a scream of
+terror rose from the guerillas. Whatever a Spanish peasant may believe
+about saints and angels, he believes yet more implicitly in a devil.
+Black, with horns, and a tail--and here he was--with these appendages
+tipped with fire! Those who were able turned and fled in terror, those
+who were too frightened to run fell on their knees and screamed for
+mercy, while one or two fell insensible from fear. Taking the squibs
+from his mouth, and giving one more startling yell, to quicken the
+fugitives, Sam made two strides to where Peter was hanging, cut the
+rope, and lowered him down.
+
+Nunez had at first joined in the flight, but looking over his shoulder
+he saw what Sam was doing. His rage and frenzy, at the thought of
+being cheated of his victim, even by the evil one himself, overcame
+his fear, and he rushed back, shouting, "He is mine! He is mine! I
+won't give him to you!" and fired a pistol almost in Sam's face. The
+ball carried away a portion of one of Sam's ears, and with a yell,
+even more thrilling than those he had given before, he plunged his
+pitchfork into the body of the guerilla, then, exerting all his
+immense strength, he lifted him upon it, as if he had been a truss of
+straw, took three steps to the great bonfire and cast the brigand into
+it.
+
+There was a volume of sparks, a tumbling together of big logs, and the
+most cruel of the Spanish guerillas had ceased to exist.
+
+This awful sight completed the discomfiture of the guerillas--some
+hearing their chief's shouts and the sound o his pistol had looked
+round, but the sight of the gigantic fiend casting him into the fire
+was too much for them. With cries of horror and fear they continued
+their flight; a few of them, who had fallen on their knees, gained
+strength enough, from fear, to rise and fly; the rest lay on their
+faces. Sam saw that for the present all was clear, and lifting up
+Peter's still insensible body, as if it had no weight whatever, he
+turned and went at a brisk trot out of the village, then over the
+crest and down towards the fire.
+
+Then he heard a ring of metal in front of him, and a voice said, "_Qui
+vive_!" while another voice said, "Is that you, Sam?"
+
+"Bress de Lord! Massa Tom, dis is me sure enough: and what is much
+better, here is Massa Peter."
+
+"Thank God!" Tom said fervently. "Is he hurt? Why don't you speak,
+Peter?"
+
+"He all right, Massa Tom. He talk in a minute or two. Now smoke choke
+him, he better presently. Here, massa, you take him down to fire, pour
+a little brandy down his throat. Now, massa officer, I lead de way
+back to village."
+
+As Tom took Peter in his arms a sudden fire of musketry was heard down
+on the road.
+
+"Our fellows have got them," Jules said. "I don't know what has
+alarmed them, but they are running away!"
+
+"Push forward," General Reynier said, "and give no quarter! Jules,
+keep by the negro, and see that he comes to no harm. The men might
+mistake him for a guerilla."
+
+The night was pitch dark, and the extraordinary appearance of Sam
+could not be perceived until after scouring the village and shooting
+the few wretches whom they found there, they gathered round the
+fire. Before reaching it, however, Sam had slipped away for a moment
+into the hut where he had stripped; here he quickly dressed himself,
+removed the paint from his face, and rejoined the group, who were not
+a little surprised at seeing his black face.
+
+In a short time the parties who had been posted on all the various
+roads came in, and it was found that they had between them killed
+some thirty or forty of the brigands, and had brought in two or three
+prisoners.
+
+"Have you killed or taken Nunez?" General Reynier asked. "Our work is
+only half done if that scoundrel has escaped."
+
+"I have asked the prisoners," one of the officers said, "and they tell
+an extraordinary story, that the devil has just thrown him into the
+fire!"
+
+"What do they mean by such folly as that," the general asked angrily.
+"Were they making fun of you?"
+
+"No, sir, they were certainly serious enough over it, and they were
+all running for their lives when they fell into our hands; they had
+been horribly frightened at something."
+
+"Ask that fellow there," the general said, pointing to a prisoner who
+had been brought in by another detachment, "he cannot have spoken to
+the others."
+
+The man was brought forward, and then Jules asked him in Spanish:
+"What were you all running away for?"
+
+The man gave a glance of horror at the fire. "The devil came with his
+pitchfork, fire came out of his mouth, his tail and his horns were
+tipped with sparks, the captain fired at him, of course the bullet did
+no good, and the devil put his fork into him, carried him to the fire,
+and threw him in."
+
+Jules and some of the other young officers burst out laughing, but the
+general said:--
+
+"Humph! We can easily prove a portion of the story. See if there are
+any human remains in that fire."
+
+The wind was blowing the other way, but as a sergeant went up to the
+fire in obedience to the general's order, he said:--
+
+"There is a great smell of burnt flesh here, and, sapristi, yes," as
+he tossed over the logs with his foot "there is a body here, sir,
+pretty well burnt up."
+
+"It's a curious story," the general said. "Where is that negro,
+perhaps he can enlighten us?"
+
+But Sam had already left to look after Peter.
+
+"Jules, put these fellows against that wall and give them a volley,
+then march the men down to the wood where their horses are. We will
+bivouac here for the night."
+
+A party now brought up Peter, who had quite come round, but was unable
+to stand, or indeed to move his arms, so injured was he by the ropes,
+which had completely cut their way into his flesh. However, he was
+cheerful and bright, and able really to enjoy the supper which was
+soon prepared. That done, General Reynier said:--
+
+"Captain Scudamore, will you call your black man when he has finished
+his supper, which, no doubt, he needs? I want him to tell me what took
+place before we arrived. The prisoners were full of some cock-and-bull
+story, that the devil had stuck his fork into their captain and
+pitched him into the fire, and the story is corroborated, at least to
+the extent of the fact that, on turning the fire over, we found a body
+there."
+
+Sam, called and questioned, told the whole story, which Tom translated
+as he went on to the French officers, and it was received with a
+chorus of laughter at the thought of the oddity of Sam's appearance,
+and of the brigands' terror, and with warm admiration for the able
+stratagem and courage shown by the black.
+
+Tom was delighted, and Peter, who had until now been entirely ignorant
+of the manner in which he had been saved, feebly pressed Sam's hand
+and said a few words of gratitude and thanks, which so delighted Sam
+that he retired to cry quietly.
+
+The next day they moved down to Vittoria, where Peter was tenderly
+nursed by Madame Reynier. A week later he was fit to sit on horseback,
+and the next day, after a hearty and affectionate parting, they
+started to rejoin their own army. Both were now dressed as Spanish
+gentlemen, and Jules, with four troopers accompanied them as an
+escort.
+
+They made a long detour to avoid the French army in the field under
+Clausel, and at last came within sight of the British outposts. Here
+Jules and his escort halted, and after a warm embrace with the merry
+young Frenchman, they rode forward, and, after the usual parleying
+with the pickets, were passed forward to the officer commanding the
+post. He happened to be well known to them, and after the first
+surprise, and a few words of explanation, they rode on towards the
+head-quarters of the army besieging Burgos.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+VITTORIA.
+
+
+General Clausel fell back as Wellington advanced to Burgos, and the
+British laid siege to the castle of that place. Like all Wellington's
+sieges this was commenced with a wholly insufficient train of
+artillery, and without the time necessary to carry out regular siege
+operations. A considerable portion of the army were posted so as to
+watch Clausel. The place was badly fortified, but the French under
+Governor Dubreton defended themselves with immense skill and courage,
+the English assaults were repulsed, successful sorties were made by
+the garrison, and at last, after the failure of the fourth assault,
+the siege was given up, and the allied armies turned their faces once
+more towards Portugal.
+
+It was time; the operations in the south upon which Wellington had
+relied to keep at least a portion of the French forces engaged, had
+failed signally, and the French generals were bringing up their
+troops from all parts of Spain, and General Souham, having under him
+Generals Clausel, Maucune, and Foy, with a force far superior to
+that of the British, advanced to give battle. Then Wellington, whose
+Anglo-Portuguese troops were much weakened by sickness, fell back
+rapidly, sending orders to General Hill, who commanded the troops left
+behind in Madrid, to evacuate that city, and to fall back and unite
+with him on the Tormes.
+
+It was only by some masterly maneuvering and some stiff fighting at
+Venta de Pozo, on the Carrion, and on the Huebra, that Wellington drew
+off his army to Ciudad Rodrigo.
+
+During the retreat the British suffered very severely, and the
+discipline of the army became greatly impaired, so much so that Lord
+Wellington issued a general order rebuking the army, saying that
+"discipline had deteriorated during the campaign in a greater degree
+than he had ever witnessed or read of in any army, and this without
+any unusual privation or hardship, or any long marches."
+
+The number of stragglers may be imagined by the fact that the loss of
+the allied army was upwards of nine thousand, of whom not more than
+two thousand were killed and wounded at Burgos, and in the combats
+during the retreat. This number includes the Spanish as well as the
+Anglo-Portuguese loss.
+
+It was the beginning of December when the allied army reached their
+winter quarters around Ciudad Rodrigo. It was fortunate that the
+season of the year, and the necessity which the French had to refill
+their magazines, and collect food, gave breathing time and rest to
+the British. Although strengthened by his junction with Hill, and by
+the arrival of reinforcements from the coast, Wellington was not in a
+position to have made a stand against such a force as the French could
+have brought against him.
+
+Tom and Peter Scudamore had rejoined the army at the hottest part
+of the siege of Burgos, and had taken up their work at once. Lord
+Wellington heard from Tom a brief account of what had taken place,
+and said a few kind words expressive of his pleasure at their both
+having escaped from so great a peril, and, grave and preoccupied as
+he was with the position of his army, he yet laughed at the account
+of the scare Sam had given the guerillas. Among their friends nothing
+was talked of for a day or two but their adventure. The times were
+stirring, however, and one event rapidly drove out another. Sam
+became a greater favorite than ever among the officers of the staff,
+while the orderlies were never tired of hearing how he pretty nearly
+frightened a band of guerillas to death by pretending to be the evil
+one in person.
+
+The next four months were passed in preparations for the grand attack
+with which Wellington confidently hoped to drive the French out of
+Spain. The news of the defeat of Napoleon in Russia had cheered the
+hearts of the enemies of France, and excited them to make a great
+effort to strike a decisive blow. The French army was weakened by the
+withdrawal of several corps to strengthen the armies which Napoleon
+was raising for his campaign in Germany, and British gold had been so
+freely spent, that the Portuguese army was now in a really efficient
+state; a portion of the Spanish army had been handed over to
+Wellington, and were now in a far more trustworthy condition than
+they had been heretofore, while the whole of the north of Spain was
+in a state of insurrection, which the French, in spite of all their
+efforts, were unable to repress.
+
+The invasion was delayed until the end of May, in order that the crops
+might be in a fit state for the subsistence of the cavalry and baggage
+animals; but in the last week in that month all was ready, and, in
+several columns, the allied army poured into Spain nearly a hundred
+thousand strong. The French, ignorant alike of Wellington's intentions
+and preparations, were in no position to stem effectually this mighty
+wave of war, and were driven headlong before it, with many fierce
+skirmishes, until their scattered forces were, for the most part,
+united on the Ebro.
+
+Here Joseph occupied a strong position, which he thought to hold until
+the whole of his troops could come up; but Wellington made a detour,
+swept round his right, and the French fell back in haste, and took
+up their position in the basin of Vittoria, where all the stores and
+baggage which had been carried off as the army retreated from Madrid,
+Valladolid, Burgos, and other towns, were collected. At Vittoria were
+gathered the Court, and an enormous mass of fugitives, as all the
+Spaniards who had adhered to the cause of Joseph had, with their
+wives and families, accompanied the French in their retreat. Hence
+the accumulation of baggage animals, and carts, of stores of all
+descriptions, of magazines, of food and artillery, of helpless,
+frightened people, was enormous, and, for the retreat of the army in
+case of defeat, there was but one good road, already encumbered with
+baggage and fugitives!
+
+This terrible accumulation arose partly from the fault of Joseph, who
+was wholly unequal to the supreme command in an emergency like the
+present. Confused and bewildered by the urgency of the danger, he had
+hesitated, wavered, and lost precious time. By resistance at any of
+the rivers, which Wellington had passed unopposed, he might easily
+have gained a few days, and thus have allowed time for the great mass
+of fugitives to reach the French frontier, and for Foy and Clausel,
+each of whom were within a day's march upon the day of the battle, to
+have arrived with a reinforcement of 20,000 good fighting men. Instead
+of this, he had suffered himself to be outflanked day after day, and
+his army forced into retreat, without an effort at resistance--a
+course of action irritating and disheartening to all troops, but
+especially to the French, who, admirable in attack, are easily
+dispirited, and are ill suited to defensive warfare.
+
+The position which he had now chosen for the battle, on which his
+kingdom was to be staked, was badly selected for the action. The front
+was, indeed, covered by the river Zadora, but this was crossed by
+seven available bridges, none of which had been broken down, while
+there was but the one good line of retreat, and this, besides being
+already encumbered with baggage-wagons, could be easily turned by the
+allies. The French army, weakened by 5000 men, who had marched upon
+the preceding days, in charge of convoys for France, were still about
+70,000 strong, the allies--British, Portuguese, and Spanish--about
+80,000. The French were the strongest in artillery.
+
+Wellington, seeing that Joseph had determined to stand at bay, made
+his arrangements for the battle. On the left, Graham, with 20,000 men,
+was to attempt to cross the Zadora at Gamara Mayor, when he would
+find himself on the main road, behind Vittoria, and so cut the French
+line of retreat. Hill, with a like force, was to attack on the right,
+through the defile of Puebla, and so, entering the basin of Vittoria,
+to threaten the French right, and obtain possession of the bridge of
+Nanclares. In the center, Wellington himself, with 30,000 troops,
+would force the four bridges in front of the French center, and attack
+their main position.
+
+At daybreak on the 21st of June, 1813, the weather being rainy with
+some mist, the troops moved from their quarters on the Bayas, passed
+in columns over the bridges in front, and slowly approached the
+Zadora. About ten o'clock, Hill seized the village of Puebla, and
+commenced the passage of the defile, while one of the Portuguese
+battalions scaled the heights above. Here the French met them, and a
+fierce fight ensued; the French were reinforced on their side, while
+the 71st Regiment and a battalion of light infantry joined the
+Portuguese.
+
+Villette's division was sent from the French center to join the fray,
+while Hill sent up reinforcements. While the fight on the heights
+still raged, the troops in the defile made their way through, and,
+driving the French back, won the village of Subijano de Alava, in
+front of the French main position.
+
+Meanwhile, far to the left, Graham came into action with Reille's
+division at Gamara Mayor. The French here, knowing the vital
+importance of the position, fought desperately, and the village of
+Gamara was taken and retaken several times, but no effort upon the
+part of the allies sufficed to carry either the bridge at this place
+or that by which the main road crossed the river higher up. A force,
+however, was pushed still farther to the left, and there took up a
+position on the road at Durana, drove back a Franco-Spanish force
+which occupied it, and thus effectively cut the main line of retreat
+to France for Joseph's army. The main force under Wellington himself
+was later in coming into action, the various columns being delayed by
+the difficulties of making their way through the defiles.
+
+While waiting, however, for the third and seventh divisions, which
+were the last to arrive, a peasant informed Wellington that the bridge
+of Tres Puentes was unbroken and unguarded. Kempt's brigade of the
+light division were immediately ordered to cross, and, being concealed
+by the inequalities of the ground, they reached it and passed over
+unobserved, taking their place under shelter of a crest within a few
+hundred yards of the French main line of battle, and actually in rear
+of his advanced posts.
+
+Some French cavalry now advanced, but no attack was made upon this
+isolated body of British troops, for the French were virtually without
+a commander.
+
+Joseph, finding his flank menaced by the movements of Graham and Hill,
+now ordered the army to fall back to a crest two miles in the rear,
+but at this moment the third and seventh divisions advanced at a run
+towards the bridge of Mendoza, the French artillery opened upon them,
+the British guns replied, a heavy musketry fire broke out on both
+sides, and the battle commenced in earnest. Now the advantage gained
+by the passage of Kempt's brigade became manifest, for the riflemen
+of his division advanced and took the French advanced cavalry and
+artillery in flank. These, thus unexpectedly attacked, fell back
+hastily, and a brigade of the third division took advantage of the
+moment and crossed the bridge of Mendoza. The other brigade forded the
+river a little higher up, the seventh division and Vandeleur's brigade
+of the light division followed, Hill pushed the enemy farther back,
+and the fourth division crossed by the bridge of Nanclares; other
+troops forded the river, and the battle became general all along the
+line.
+
+Seeing that the hill in front of Arinez was nearly denuded of troops
+by the withdrawal of Villette's division earlier in the day to oppose
+Hill, Wellington launched Picton with the third division and Kempt's
+brigade against it, and the French, thus attacked with great strength
+and fury, and dispirited by the order to retreat, began to fall back.
+Fifty pieces of artillery and a cloud of skirmishers covered the
+movement, and the British guns answering, the whole basin became
+filled with a heavy smoke, under cover of which the French retired
+to the heights in front of Gomecha, upon which their reserves were
+posted. Picton and Kempt carried the village of Arinez with the
+bayonet, Vandeleur captured the village of Margarita, and the 87th
+Regiment won that of Hermandad.
+
+This advance turned the flank of the French troops near Subijana de
+Alava, and of those on the Puebla mountain, and both fell back in
+disorder for two miles, until they made a junction with the main body
+of their army. Still the British troops pressed forward, the French
+again fell back, and for six miles a running fight of musketry and
+artillery was kept up, the ground being very broken, and preventing
+the concerted action of large bodies of troops. At six o'clock in the
+afternoon the French stood at bay on the last heights before Vittoria,
+upon which stood the villages of Ali and Armentia. Behind them was
+the plain upon which the city stood, and beyond the city thousands
+of carriages, animals, and non-combatants, women, and children, were
+crowded together in the extremity of terror as the British shots rang
+menacingly over their heads.
+
+The French here defended themselves desperately, and for a while the
+allied advance was checked by the terrible fire of shot and shell.
+Then the fourth division with a rush carried a hill on the left, and
+the French again commenced their retreat. Joseph, finding the great
+road absolutely blocked up, gave orders for a retreat by the road to
+Salvatierra, and the army, leaving the town of Vittoria on its left,
+moved off in a compact mass towards the indicated road. This, however,
+like the other, was choked with carriages. It led through a swamp,
+and had deep ditches on each side; the artillery, therefore, had to
+cut their traces and leave their guns behind them, the infantry and
+cavalry thrust aside the encumbrances and continued their march.
+Reille, who had defended the upper bridges nobly until the last
+moment, now came up, and his division acting as a rear guard, covered
+the retreat, and the French retired with little further loss.
+
+They had lost the battle solely and entirely from the utter incapacity
+of their general, for their loss had been but little greater than
+that of the allies, and they fell back in perfect order and full of
+fighting. The French loss, including prisoners, was not more than
+6000, and that of the allies exceeded 5000. The French loss, however,
+in material was enormous. They carried off two guns only, and 143
+fell into the hands of the British. They lost all their parks of
+ammunition, all their baggage, all their stores, all their treasures,
+all their booty. Last of all, they lost Spain.
+
+The British pursued the French army for some days, and then invested
+the two fortresses of San Sebastian and Pampeluna.
+
+Ten days after the battle of Vittoria, Napoleon despatched Soult, one
+of the best of his generals, to displace Joseph and assume the supreme
+command of the French troops. Traveling with great speed, he reached
+the frontier upon the 11th of July and took command. He soon collected
+together the divisions which had retired beaten but not routed from
+Vittoria, drew together the troops from Bayonne and the surrounding
+towns, and in a few days found himself at the head of an army,
+including the garrisons, of 114,000 men. Besides these there were the
+armies of Aragon and Catalonia, numbering 60,000 men.
+
+After spending a few days in organizing the army, Soult moved forward
+to relieve Pampeluna, and then in the heart of the Pyrenees were
+fought those desperate combats at Maya, Roncevalles, Buenza, Sauroren,
+and Dona Maria, which are known in history as the battles of the
+Pyrenees. In these terrible nine days' fighting there were ten serious
+combats, in which the allies lost 7300 men, the French, including
+prisoners, over 15,000, and Soult fell back baffled and beaten across
+the frontier.
+
+Throughout this account of the short and sanguinary campaign by which
+in two short months Wellington shattered the power of the French and
+drove them headlong from the Peninsula, but little has been said
+respecting the doings of the Scudamores. Their duties had been heavy,
+but devoid of any personal achievements or events. Wellington, the
+incarnation of activity himself, spared no one around him, and from
+early dawn until late at night they were on horseback, carrying orders
+and bringing back reports. At night their quarters were sometimes
+in a village hut, sometimes in a straggling château, which afforded
+accommodation to the commander-in-chief and his whole staff.
+
+Sam, a good horseman now, was in the highest of spirits at being able
+to accompany his masters, and, although the Spanish women crossed
+themselves in horror when they first saw his black face, the boys
+would hear shouts of laughter arising before they had been a quarter
+of an hour in fresh quarters. He was a capital cook, and a wonderful
+hand at hunting up provisions.
+
+There might not be a sign of a feathered creature in a village when
+the staff came in, but in half an hour Sam would be sure to return
+from foraging with a couple of fowls and his handkerchief full of
+eggs. These were, of course, paid for, as the orders against pillaging
+were of the strictest character, and the army paid, and paid
+handsomely for everything it ate.
+
+It was, however, difficult to persuade the peasants that payment was
+intended, and they would hide everything away with vigilant care at
+the approach of the troops. When by the display of money they were
+really persuaded that payment was intended, they would produce all
+that they had willingly enough, but the number of officers wanting
+to purchase was so great and the amount of live stock so small in
+the war-ravaged country, that few indeed could obtain even for money
+anything beside the tough rations of freshly-killed beef issued by the
+commissariat.
+
+Let the supply be ever so short, however, Sam never returned
+empty-handed, and the fowls were quickly plucked and on the fire
+before any one else had succeeded in discovering that there was a bird
+in the village.
+
+Sam's foraging powers passed into a joke with the staff, and the
+Scudamores became so curious to discover the reason of his success,
+that after repeated questioning they persuaded him to tell them.
+
+"Well, massa, de matter berry simple--just easy as fallin' off log.
+Sam go along, look into yard ob de cottages, presently see feather
+here, feather there. Dat sign ob fowl. Den knock at door. Woman open
+always, gib little squeak when she see dis gentleman's colored face.
+Den she say, 'What you want? Dis house full. Quarter-master take him
+up for three, four officer.' Den Sam say, 'Illustrious madam, me want
+to buy two fowls and eggs for master,' and Sam show money in hand. Den
+she hesitate a little, and not believe Sam mean to pay. Den she say,
+'No fowls here.' Den Sam point to de feathers. Den she get in rage and
+tell lie and say, 'Dem birds all stole yesterday.' Den Sam see it time
+to talk to de birds--he know dem shut up somewhere in de dark, and Sam
+he begin to crow berry loud; Sam berry good at dat. He crow for all
+de world like de cock. Dis wake dem up, and a minute one, two, three,
+half a dozen cock begin to answer eider from a loft ober house, or
+from shed, or from somewhere. Den de woman in terrible fright, she
+say, 'Me sell you two quick, if you will go away and swear you tell no
+one.' Den Sam swear. Den she run away, come back wid de fowls and some
+eggs, and always berry much astonished when Sam pay for dem. After dat
+she lose her fear, she see me pay, and she sells de chickens to oders
+when they come till all gone. Dat how dis chile manage de affairs,
+Massa Tom."
+
+The Scudamores had a hearty laugh, and were well pleased to find that
+Sam's method was one to which not even the strictest disciplinarian
+could object, a matter concerning which they had previously had grave
+doubts.
+
+While the battles of the Pyrenees were being fought, the siege of
+St. Sebastian had continued, and once again the British troops had
+suffered a terrible loss, from the attempt to carry a fortress with
+an insufficient siege-train, and without the time necessary to drive
+the trenches forward in regular form. St. Sebastian stood upon a
+peninsula. In front of the neck of this peninsula was the hill of San
+Bartholomeo, on which stood the convent of that name. At the narrowest
+part of the neck stood a redoubt, which was called the Cask Redoubt,
+because it was constructed of casks filled with stand. Behind this
+came the horn-work and other fortifications. Then came the town, while
+at the end of the peninsula rose a steep rock, called Mount Orgullo,
+on which stood the citadel. Upon its left side this neck of land was
+separated from the mainland by the River Urumea; and upon the heights
+of Mount Olia and the Chofres, across the Urumea, were placed the
+British batteries, which breached the fortifications facing the river.
+
+General Graham commanded the allied forces, which were detached to
+undertake the siege, and on the 10th of July batteries were commenced
+against the convent of San Bartholomeo, which had been fortified by
+the French. On the 17th the convent was in ruins, and an assault was
+made upon the position. The 9th Regiment took the place in gallant
+style, but an attempt being made to carry the cask redoubt, with a
+rush, the assault was repulsed, the British remaining possessors of
+San Bartholomeo.
+
+On the 24th the batteries on Mount Olia, having effected what was
+believed to be a practicable breach, 2000 men of the fifth division,
+consisting of the 3d battalion of the Royals, the 38th, and the 9th,
+made an assault at night. To arrive at the breach they had to make
+their way along the slippery rocks on the bed of the Urumea, exposed
+to a flank-fire from the river-wall of the town. The breachers had
+been isolated from the town, and guns placed to take the stormers in
+flank. The confusion and slaughter were terrible, and at daybreak the
+survivors fell back, with a loss of forty-nine officers and 520 men.
+
+The whole arrangement of the siege was bad. The plan of Major Smith,
+of the engineers, a most excellent officer, which had been approved
+by Wellington, was not followed, and the assault, contrary to
+Wellington's explicit order, took place at night, instead of by day,
+the consequence being confusion, delay, and defeat. The total loss to
+the allies of this first siege of St. Sebastian was 1300 men.
+
+Neither of the Scudamores were present at the first siege, but both
+witnessed the second assault, of the 31st of August, as Wellington
+himself was present on the 30th, to see to the execution of the
+preparation for attack, and they obtained leave to remain for the next
+day to witness the assault. The siege had been resumed on the 5th of
+that month, and on the 23d the batteries had opened fire in earnest,
+and immense damage was done to the defenses and garrison. But upon
+this occasion, as upon the former one, the proper precautions were not
+taken; no lodgment had been effected in the horn-work, and, worst of
+all, the blockade had been so negligently conducted by the fleet, that
+large bodies of fresh troops, guns, and ammunition had been passed
+in, and the defense was even stronger than it had been when the first
+assault was delivered.
+
+General Graham took up his position on the heights of the Chofres to
+view the assault, and the Scudamores stationed themselves near him.
+A dense mist hid the fortress from view, and it was not until eight
+o'clock that the batteries were able to open. Then for three hours
+they poured a storm of shot and shell upon the defences. The
+Scudamores sat down in one of the trenches, where they were a little
+sheltered from the blazing heat of the sun, and Sam took his place at
+a short distance from them.
+
+As the clock struck eleven the fire slackened, and at that moment Sam
+exclaimed, "Grolly, Massa Tom, dere dey go." As he spoke Robinson's
+brigade poured out from the trenches, and, passing through the
+openings in the sea-wall, began to form on the beach.
+
+It was known that the French had mined the angle of the wall
+overhanging the beach, and a sergeant, followed by twelve men, dashed
+gallantly forward to try to cut the train leading to the mine. He was
+unsuccessful, but the suddenness of the rush startled the French, who
+at once fired the mine, which exploded, destroying the brave sergeant
+and his party, and thirty of the leading men of the column, but not
+doing a tithe of the damage which it would have inflicted had the
+column been fairly under it.
+
+"Hurrah! dere dey go," Sam exclaimed as the column clambered over
+the ruins and pursued its way unchecked along the beach. They had,
+however, to make their way under a storm of fire.
+
+The French, as before, lined the wall, and poured a tremendous
+musketry fire into their flank, and the batteries of Mount Orgullo and
+St. Elmo plied them with shot and shell, while two pieces of cannon on
+the cavalier and one on the horn-work raked them with grape.
+
+Still the column neither halted nor faltered, but dashed, like a wave,
+up the breach. When, however, they reached the top they could go no
+farther. A deep gulf separated them from the town, while from every
+loop-hole and wall behind, the French musketry swept the breach. The
+troops could not advance and would not retreat, but sullenly stood
+their ground, heaping the breach with their dead. Fresh bodies of men
+came up, and each time a crowd of brave men mounted the breach, only
+to sink down beneath the storm of fire.
+
+"This is awful, horrible, Tom!" Peter said in a choked voice. "Come
+away, I can't look at this slaughter, it is a thousand times worse
+than any battle."
+
+Tom made no reply, his own eyes were dim with tears, and he rose to
+go, taking one more look at the deadly breach, at whose foot the
+survivors of the last attempt had sunk down, and whence the mass of
+soldiers were keeping up a musketry fire against the guns and unseen
+foes who were sweeping them away, when an officer ran up from General
+Graham's side, and in a minute fifty guns from the Chofres batteries
+opened a storm of fire upon the curtain and the traverses behind the
+breach.
+
+It was a terrible trial to the nerves of the assaulting columns when
+this terrific fire was poured upon a spot only twenty feet above them;
+but they were not men to shrink, and the men of the light division
+seized the opportunity to pull up the broken masonry and make a
+breastwork, known in military terms as a lodgment.
+
+For half an hour the iron storm poured overhead unchecked, smashing
+the traverse, knocking down the loop-holed walls, and killing numbers
+of the defenders. Then it ceased, and the troops leapt to their feet,
+and again rushed up the breach, while the 13th Portuguese Regiment,
+followed by a detachment of the 24th, waded across the Urumea under a
+heavy fire from the castle, and attacked the third breach.
+
+But still no entry could be effected. The French fire was as heavy as
+ever, and the stormers again sank baffled to the foot of the great
+breach. The assault seemed hopeless, the tide was rising, the reserves
+were all engaged, and the men had done all that the most desperate
+courage could do. For five hours the battle had raged, when, just as
+all appeared lost, one of those circumstances occurred which upset all
+calculations and decide the fate of battles.
+
+Behind the traverses the French had accumulated a great store of
+powder barrels, shells, and other combustibles. Just at this moment
+these caught fire. A bright flame wrapped the whole wall, followed by
+a succession of loud explosions; hundreds of French grenadiers were
+destroyed, and before the smoke had cleared away, the British burst
+like a flood through the first traverse.
+
+Although bewildered by this sudden disaster, the French rallied, and
+fought desperately; but the British, desperate with the long agony
+of the last five hours, would not be denied; the light division
+penetrated on the left, the Portuguese on the right. The French, still
+resisting obstinately, were driven through the town to the line of
+defense at the foot of Mount Orgullo, and the town of St. Sebastian
+was won.
+
+"Will you go across, Peter, and enter the town?"
+
+"No, no, Tom; the sight of that horrible breach is enough for me.
+Let us mount, and ride off at once. I am quite sick after this awful
+suspense."
+
+It was as well that the Scudamores did not enter the town, as, had
+they done so, they might have shared the fate of several other
+officers, who were shot down while trying to stop the troops in their
+wild excesses. No more disgraceful atrocities were ever committed by
+the most barbarous nations of antiquity than those which disgraced the
+British name at the storming of St. Sebastian. Shameful, monstrous as
+had been the conduct of the troops at the storming of Ciudad Rodrigo
+and at Badajos, it was infinitely worse at St. Sebastian. As Rapin
+says, hell seemed to have broken loose.
+
+The castle held out until the 9th, when it surrendered, and the
+governor and his heroic garrison marched out with the honors of war.
+The British loss in the second siege exceeded 2500 men and officers.
+
+There was a pause of two months after the fall of St. Sebastian,
+and it was not until the 10th of November that Wellington hurled
+his forces against the lines which, in imitation of those of Torres
+Vedras, Soult had formed and fortified on the river Nivelle to
+withstand the invasion of France. After a few hours' desperate
+fighting the French were turned out of their position with a loss of
+killed, wounded, and prisoners, of 4265 men and officers, the loss of
+the allies being 2694.
+
+Now the army of invasion poured into France. The French people,
+disheartened by Napoleon's misfortunes in Germany, and by the long and
+mighty sacrifices which they had for years been compelled to make, in
+order to enable Napoleon to carry out his gigantic wars, showed but
+slight hostility to the invaders.
+
+Wellington enforced the severest discipline, paid for everything
+required for the troops, hanging marauders without mercy, and, finding
+that it was impossible to keep the Spanish troops in order, he sent
+the whole Spanish contingent, 20,000 strong, back across the Pyrenees.
+
+He then with the Anglo-Portuguese army moved on towards Bayonne, and
+took up a position on both sides of the river Nive, driving the French
+from their position on the right bank on December 9th. On the 13th,
+however, Soult attacked that portion of the army on the right of the
+river, and one of the most desperate conflicts of the war took place,
+known as the battle of St. Pierre. General Hill commanded at this
+battle, and with 14,000 Anglo-Portuguese, with 14 guns, repulsed the
+furious and repeated attacks of 16,000 French, with 22 guns.
+
+In five days' fighting on the river the French lost more than as many
+thousand men.
+
+The weather now for a time interrupted operations, but Wellington was
+preparing for the passage of the Adour. Soult guarded the passages
+of the river above Bayonne, and never dreamed that an attempt would
+be made to bridge so wide and rough a river as is the Adour below
+the town. With the assistance of the sailors of the fleet the great
+enterprise was accomplished on the 13th of February, and leaving
+General Hope to contain the force in the entrenched camp at Bayonne,
+Wellington marched the rest of the army to the Gave.
+
+Behind this river Soult had massed his army. The British crossed by
+pontoon bridges, and before the operation was concluded, and the
+troops united, Soult fell upon them near Orthes.
+
+At first the French had the best of the fight, driving back both
+wings of the allied forces, but Wellington threw the third and sixth
+divisions upon the left flank of the attacking column and sent the
+52nd Regiment to make a detour through a marsh and fall upon their
+other flank. Taken suddenly between two fires the French wavered,
+the British pressed forward again, and the French fell back fighting
+obstinately, and in good order. The allies lost 2300 men, and the
+French 4000. Soult fell back towards Toulouse, laying Bordeaux open to
+the British.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+TOULOUSE.
+
+
+Promotion for those who have the good fortune to have a post upon the
+commander-in-chief's staff is rapid. They run far less risk than do
+the regimental officers, and they have a tenfold better chance of
+having their names mentioned in despatches. The Scudamores were so
+mentioned for their conduct at Vittoria, the Pyrenees, and Orthes,
+and shortly after the last-named battle the _Gazette_ from England
+announced their promotion to majorities. This put an end to
+their service as aides-de-camp, and they were attached to the
+quarter-master's branch of the staff of Lord Beresford, who was upon
+the point of starting with a small force to Bordeaux, where the
+authorities, thinking more of party than of patriotism, had invited
+the English to enter and take possession, intending to proclaim their
+adhesion to the Bourbon dynasty.
+
+The boys were sorry at the exchange, as they feared that they should
+lose the crowning battle of the campaign. It was evident that the
+resistance of France was nearly at an end, the allies were approaching
+Paris in spite of the almost superhuman efforts of Napoleon; the
+people, sick of the war, refused all assistance to the military
+authorities, and were longing for peace, and the end of the struggle
+was rapidly approaching.
+
+Lord Beresford, however, divining their thoughts, assured them that
+his stay at Bordeaux would be but short, and that they might rely
+upon being present at the great battle which would probably be fought
+somewhere near Toulouse, towards which town Soult had retreated after
+the battle of Orthes.
+
+Upon the 8th of March, Beresford marched with 12,000 men for Bordeaux,
+and meeting with no opposition by the way, entered that city on the
+12th. The mayor, a royalist, came out to meet them, and by the upper
+classes of the town they were received as friends rather than foes.
+Handsome quarters were assigned to Lord Beresford and his staff, and
+the Scudamores for a day or two enjoyed the luxury of comfortable
+apartments and of good food after their hard fare for nine months.
+
+The day after they entered Bordeaux Tom had occasion to call at
+the office of a banker in order to get a government draft cashed,
+to pay for a number of wagons which had been purchased for the
+quarter-master's department. The banker's name was Weale, an American,
+said to be the richest man in Bordeaux. His fortune had been made, it
+was said, by large government contracts.
+
+When Tom returned, Peter was surprised to see him looking pale and
+excited.
+
+"What is the matter, Tom?"
+
+"Do you know, Peter, I am convinced that that American banker I have
+been to see to-day is neither more nor less than that scoundrel,
+Walsh, who bolted with all the bank funds, and was the cause of our
+father's death."
+
+"You don't say so, Tom."
+
+"It is a fact, Peter, I could swear to him."
+
+"What shall we do, Tom?"
+
+"I only cashed one of the two drafts I had with me this morning;
+Peter, you go this afternoon with the other, and, if you are as
+certain as I feel about it, we will speak to Beresford at dinner."
+
+Peter returned in the afternoon satisfied that his brother's surmises
+were correct, and that in the supposed American Weale they had really
+discovered the English swindler Walsh.
+
+After dinner they asked Lord Beresford to speak to them for a few
+minutes alone.
+
+The general was greatly surprised and interested at their
+communication.
+
+"Of how much did this fellow rob your father's bank?" he asked.
+
+"The total defalcation, including money borrowed on title-deeds
+deposited in the bank, which had to be made good, was, I heard, from
+75,000_l._ to 80,000_l._," Tom said.
+
+"Very well," said Lord Beresford, "we will make the scoundrel pay up
+with interest. Order out thirty men of the 13th."
+
+While the men were mustering, the general returned to the dining-room
+and begged the officers who were dining with him to excuse him for
+half an hour, as he had some unexpected business to perform. Then he
+walked across with the Scudamores to the banker's house, which was
+only in the next street.
+
+Twenty of the men were then ordered to form a cordon round the house
+and to watch the various entrances. The other ten, together with the
+officer in command, the general told to follow him into the house. The
+arrangements completed, he rang at the bell, and the porter at once
+opened the gate.
+
+He started and would have tried to shut it again, on seeing the armed
+party. But Lord Beresford said, "I am the general commanding the
+British troops here. Make no noise, but show me directly to your
+master."
+
+The man hesitated, but seeing that the force was too great to be
+resisted, led the way through the courtyard into the house itself.
+
+Some servants in the hall started up with amazement, and would have
+run off, but Lord Beresford cried, "Stay quiet for your lives. No one
+will be hurt; but if any one moves from the hall, he will be shot."
+Then, followed by Tom and Peter only, he opened the door which the
+porter pointed out to him as that of the room where the banker was
+sitting.
+
+He was alone, and started to his feet upon beholding three British
+officers enter unannounced. "What means this?" he demanded angrily.
+"I am a citizen of the United States, and for any outrage upon me
+satisfaction will be demanded by my Government."
+
+"I am Lord Beresford," the general said quietly, "and quite know what
+I am doing. I do not quite agree with you that the Government of the
+United States will make any demand for satisfaction for any outrage
+upon your person, nor, if they do so, will it benefit you greatly;
+for I am about, in five minutes' time, to order you to be shot, Mr.
+Walsh."
+
+As the name was uttered the banker, who had listened with increasing
+pallor to the stern words of the general, started violently, and
+turned ghastly white. For a minute or so he was too surprised and
+confounded to speak. Then he said, in a husky tone, "It is false; I am
+an American citizen. I know nothing whatever about James Walsh."
+
+"James Walsh!" the general said; "I said nothing about James. It is
+you who have told us his Christian name, which is, I have no doubt,
+the correct one."
+
+He looked to Tom, who nodded assent.
+
+"I know nothing about any Walsh," the banker said doggedly. "Who says
+I do?"
+
+"We do, James Walsh," Tom said, stepping forward. "Tom and Peter
+Scudamore, the sons of the man you robbed and ruined."
+
+The banker stared at them wildly, and then, with a hoarse cry, dropped
+into his chair.
+
+"James Walsh," the general said sternly, "your life is doubly forfeit.
+As a thief and a swindler, the courts of law will punish you with
+death;" for in those days death was the penalty of a crime of this
+kind. "In the second place, as a traitor. As a man who has given aid
+and assistance to the enemies of your country, your life is forfeit,
+and I, as the general in command here, doom you to death. In five
+minutes you will be shot in your courtyard as a thief and a traitor."
+
+"Spare me!" the wretched man said, slipping off his chair on to his
+knees. "Spare my life, and take all that I have. I am rich, and can
+restore much of that which I took. I will pay 50,000_l._"
+
+"Fifty thousand pounds!" the general said; "you stole 80,000_l._,
+which, with interest, comes up to 100,000_l._, besides which you must
+pay for acting as a traitor. The military chest is empty, and we want
+money. I will value your wretched life at 25,000_l._ If you make that
+sum a present to our military chest, and pay Major Scudamore the
+100,000_l._ of which you swindled his father, I will spare you."
+
+"One hundred and twenty-five thousand pounds!" the banker said
+fiercely. "Never, I will die first."
+
+"Very well," Lord Beresford said quietly. "Major Scudamore, please
+call in the officer and four men." Tom did as requested, and Lord
+Beresford then addressed the officer. "You will take this man, who is
+an Englishman, who has been acting as a traitor, and giving assistance
+to the French army, you will take a firing party, place him against
+the wall of the yard, give him five minutes to make his peace with
+God, and when the five minutes are up, unless he tells you before that
+that he wishes to see me, shoot him."
+
+Pale and desperate, the banker was led out.
+
+"He will give way, I hope," Tom said, as the door closed behind him.
+
+"He will give way before the time is up," Lord Beresford said. "He is
+a coward; I saw it in his face."
+
+Four minutes passed on, the door opened again, and the officer
+returned with his prisoner. "He says he agrees to your terms, sir"
+
+"Very well" Lord Beresford answered; "remain outside with your men;
+they may be wanted yet."
+
+The prisoner, without a word, led the way into an adjoining room,
+which communicated with the public office. This was his private
+parlor, and in a corner stood a safe. He unlocked it, and, taking out
+some books and papers, sat down to the table.
+
+His mood had evidently changed. "I was a fool to hold out," he said,
+"for I had my name for wealth against me, and might have known you
+would not give way. After all, I do not know that I am altogether
+sorry, for I have always had an idea that some day or other the thing
+would come out, and now I can go back and be comfortable for the rest
+of my life. How will you have the money, gentlemen? I have 50,000_l._
+in cash, and can give you a draft on the Bank of England for the rest.
+You look surprised, but I have always been prepared to cut and run
+from this country at the shortest notice, and every penny I have
+beyond the cash absolutely required is in England or America."
+
+"I will take 25,000_l._ in cash for the use of the army," Lord
+Beresford said. "I will send an officer of the commissariat to-morrow
+for it. The 100,000_l._ you may pay these gentlemen in drafts on
+England. Until I hear that these drafts are honored, I shall keep you
+under surveillance, and you will not be suffered to leave your house."
+
+"It will be all right," Walsh said. "There--is my Bank of England
+pass-book; you will see that I have 120,000_l._ standing to the credit
+of J. Weale there. I have as much in America. I should not tell you
+this did I not know that you are a gentleman, and therefore will not
+raise terms now that you see I can pay higher. There, Mr. Scudamore,
+is the draft, and, believe me or not, I am glad to repay it, and to
+feel, for the first time for many years, a free man. Please to give
+me a receipt for the 80,000_l._ due by me to the Bank, and for
+20,000_l._, five years' interest on the same."
+
+Tom did as he was desired without speaking. There was a tone of
+effrontery mingled with the half-earnestness of this successful
+swindler that disgusted him.
+
+"There," the general said, as the receipts were handed over; "come
+along, lads, the business is over, and I do not think that we have any
+more to say to Mr. Weale."
+
+So saying, without further word, the three went out.
+
+Upon rejoining the officer without, Lord Beresford directed that a
+sergeant and ten men were to be quartered in the house, and that a
+sentry was to be placed at each entrance night and day, and that the
+banker was not to be permitted to stir out under any pretence whatever
+until further orders.
+
+"There, lads, I congratulate you heartily," he said as they issued
+from the gate, in answer to the warm thanks in which the boys
+expressed their gratitude to him; "it is a stroke of luck indeed that
+you came with me to Bordeaux. It was rough-and-ready justice, and I
+don't suppose a court of law in England would approve of it; but we
+are under martial law, so even were that fellow disposed to question
+the matter, which you may be very sure he will not, we are safe
+enough. They say 'ill-gotten gains fly fast' but the scamp has
+prospered on the money he stole. He owned to having another hundred
+thousand safe in the States, and no doubt he has at least as much more
+in securities of one sort or other here. I daresay he was in earnest
+when he said that he did not mind paying the money to get rid of the
+chance of detection and punishment, which must have been ever in his
+mind. The best thing you can do, Scudamore, is to write to James
+Pearson--he's my solicitor in London--and give him authority to
+present this draft, and invest the sum in your joint names in good
+securities. Inclose the draft. I shall be sending off an orderly with
+despatches and letters at daybreak, and if you give me your letter
+to-night, I will inclose it in a note of my own to Pearson."
+
+Five days later an order arrived for Lord Beresford to leave the
+seventh division under Lord Dalhousie, in Bordeaux, and to march with
+the fourth division to join the Commander-in-Chief, who was gradually
+drawing near to Toulouse, beneath whose walls Soult was reorganizing
+his army. The position was a very strong one, and had been rendered
+almost impregnable by fortifications thrown upon the heights.
+Wellington had, too, the disadvantage of having to separate his army,
+as the town lay upon both sides of the Garonne.
+
+On the 10th of April the allied army attacked. Hill attacked the
+defences of the town on the left bank, while Freyre's Spaniards,
+Picton, with the third and light divisions, and Beresford with the
+fourth and the sixth divisions, assaulted a French position. The
+entrenchments in front of Picton were too strong to be more than
+menaced. Freyre's Spaniards were repulsed with great loss, and the
+brunt of the battle fell upon Beresford's division, which nobly
+sustained the character of the British soldier for stubborn valor
+in this the last battle of the war. The French fought stubbornly
+and well, but fort by fort the British drove them from their strong
+positions, and at five in the afternoon Soult withdrew the last of his
+troops in good order across the canal which separated the position
+they had defended from the town itself. The French lost five generals
+and 3000 killed and wounded; the allies four generals and 4659 killed
+and wounded, of which 2000 were Spaniards, for they upon this occasion
+fought bravely, though unsuccessfully.
+
+On the 11th all was quiet, Wellington preparing for an attack upon the
+city on the following day. Soult, however, finding that the British
+cavalry had been sent off so as to menace his line of retreat,
+evacuated the city in the night, drew off his army with great order
+and ability, and by a march of twenty-two miles placed it in safety.
+Upon the morning of the 12th Wellington entered Toulouse, and the
+same afternoon two officers, one British, the other French, arrived
+together from Paris, with the news of the abdication of Napoleon, and
+the termination of the war.
+
+These officers had been detained for two days at Blois by the
+officials there, and this delay had cost the blood of 8000 men, among
+whom was Tom Scudamore, who had his left arm carried away by a cannon
+ball. Sam, in the act of carrying his master from the field, was also
+severely wounded in the head with a musket ball.
+
+Before the battle was fought they had received news from England that
+the draft had been paid at the Bank of England, and that their future
+was in consequence secure. The war being over, officers unattached to
+regiments had little difficulty in getting leave of absence, as the
+troops were to be embarked for England as soon as possible. Peter's
+application, therefore, to accompany his brother was acceded to
+without hesitation, and ten days after the battle of Toulouse he was
+on board ship with Tom and Sam, both of whom were doing well. Three
+days afterwards they landed in England.
+
+Rhoda met them, with Miss Scudamore, at Portsmith, having received a
+letter telling them of Tom's wound, and of their being upon the point
+of sailing. There was a great reduction of the army at the end of the
+war, and the Scudamores were both placed upon half pay. This was a
+matter of delight to Rhoda, and of satisfaction to themselves. They
+had had enough of adventure to last for a life-time; and with the
+prospect of a long peace the army no longer offered them any strong
+attraction.
+
+When they returned to Miss Scudamore's their old friend Dr. Jarvis
+came to visit them, and a happier party could not have been found in
+England. The will of Mr. Scudamore, made before he was aware of his
+ruin, was now acted upon. He had left 20,000_l._ to Rhoda, and the
+rest of his fortune in equal parts between his boys. Both Tom and
+Peter were fond of a country life, and they bought two adjoining
+estates near Oxford, Rhoda agreeing to stop with them and Miss
+Scudamore alternately.
+
+For a brief time there was a break in their happiness, Napoleon
+escaped from Elba, and Europe was in a flame again. All the officers
+on half pay were ordered to present themselves for duty, and the
+Scudamores crossed with the army to Belgium, and fought at Waterloo.
+Neither were hurt, nor was Sam, who had of course accompanied them.
+Waterloo gave them another step in rank, and the Scudamores returned
+as colonels to England.
+
+It was their last war. A few years afterwards they married sisters,
+and Rhoda having the year previous married a gentleman whose estate
+was in the same county, they remained as united as ever. Sambo held
+for many a year the important position of butler to Tom, then he found
+that one of the housemaids did not regard his color as any insuperable
+obstacle, and they were accordingly married. It was difficult to say
+after this exactly the position which Sam held. He lived at a cottage
+on the edge of the estate, where it joined that of Peter, and his time
+was spent in generally looking after things at both houses, and as
+years went on his great delight was, above all things, to relate to
+numerous young Scudamores the adventures of their father and uncle
+when he first knew them as the Young Buglers.
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Young Buglers, by G.A. Henty
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE YOUNG BUGLERS ***
+
+This file should be named 8ybug10.txt or 8ybug10.zip
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, 8ybug11.txt
+VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 8ybug10a.txt
+
+Produced by Ted Garvin, Suzanne Shell, William Flis,
+and PG Distributed Proofreaders
+
+Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we usually do not
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance
+of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing.
+Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections,
+even years after the official publication date.
+
+Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til
+midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement.
+The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at
+Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month.  A
+preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment
+and editing by those who wish to do so.
+
+Most people start at our Web sites at:
+http://gutenberg.net or
+http://promo.net/pg
+
+These Web sites include award-winning information about Project
+Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new
+eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!).
+
+
+Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement
+can get to them as follows, and just download by date.  This is
+also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the
+indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an
+announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter.
+
+http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or
+ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03
+
+Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90
+
+Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want,
+as it appears in our Newsletters.
+
+
+Information about Project Gutenberg (one page)
+
+We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work.  The
+time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours
+to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright
+searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc.   Our
+projected audience is one hundred million readers.  If the value
+per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2
+million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text
+files per month:  1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+
+We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002
+If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total
+will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end.
+
+The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks!
+This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers,
+which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users.
+
+Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated):
+
+eBooks Year Month
+
+    1  1971 July
+   10  1991 January
+  100  1994 January
+ 1000  1997 August
+ 1500  1998 October
+ 2000  1999 December
+ 2500  2000 December
+ 3000  2001 November
+ 4000  2001 October/November
+ 6000  2002 December*
+ 9000  2003 November*
+10000  2004 January*
+
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created
+to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people
+and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut,
+Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois,
+Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts,
+Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New
+Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio,
+Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South
+Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West
+Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming.
+
+We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones
+that have responded.
+
+As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list
+will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states.
+Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state.
+
+In answer to various questions we have received on this:
+
+We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally
+request donations in all 50 states.  If your state is not listed and
+you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have,
+just ask.
+
+While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are
+not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting
+donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to
+donate.
+
+International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about
+how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made
+deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are
+ways.
+
+Donations by check or money order may be sent to:
+
+Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+PMB 113
+1739 University Ave.
+Oxford, MS 38655-4109
+
+Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment
+method other than by check or money order.
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by
+the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN
+[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154.  Donations are
+tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law.  As fund-raising
+requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be
+made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+You can get up to date donation information online at:
+
+http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html
+
+
+***
+
+If you can't reach Project Gutenberg,
+you can always email directly to:
+
+Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com>
+
+Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message.
+
+We would prefer to send you information by email.
+
+
+**The Legal Small Print**
+
+
+(Three Pages)
+
+***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START***
+Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers.
+They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with
+your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from
+someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our
+fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement
+disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how
+you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to.
+
+*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK
+By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
+eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept
+this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive
+a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by
+sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person
+you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical
+medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request.
+
+ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS
+This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks,
+is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart
+through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project").
+Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright
+on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and
+distribute it in the United States without permission and
+without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth
+below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook
+under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark.
+
+Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market
+any commercial products without permission.
+
+To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable
+efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain
+works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any
+medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other
+things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
+intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged
+disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer
+codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
+
+LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES
+But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below,
+[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may
+receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims
+all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including
+legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR
+UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT,
+INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE
+OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of
+receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any)
+you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that
+time to the person you received it from. If you received it
+on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and
+such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement
+copy. If you received it electronically, such person may
+choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to
+receive it electronically.
+
+THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS
+TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
+PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or
+the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the
+above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you
+may have other legal rights.
+
+INDEMNITY
+You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation,
+and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated
+with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
+texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including
+legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the
+following that you do or cause:  [1] distribution of this eBook,
+[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook,
+or [3] any Defect.
+
+DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm"
+You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by
+disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this
+"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg,
+or:
+
+[1]  Only give exact copies of it.  Among other things, this
+     requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the
+     eBook or this "small print!" statement.  You may however,
+     if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable
+     binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form,
+     including any form resulting from conversion by word
+     processing or hypertext software, but only so long as
+     *EITHER*:
+
+     [*]  The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and
+          does *not* contain characters other than those
+          intended by the author of the work, although tilde
+          (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may
+          be used to convey punctuation intended by the
+          author, and additional characters may be used to
+          indicate hypertext links; OR
+
+     [*]  The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at
+          no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent
+          form by the program that displays the eBook (as is
+          the case, for instance, with most word processors);
+          OR
+
+     [*]  You provide, or agree to also provide on request at
+          no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the
+          eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC
+          or other equivalent proprietary form).
+
+[2]  Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this
+     "Small Print!" statement.
+
+[3]  Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the
+     gross profits you derive calculated using the method you
+     already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  If you
+     don't derive profits, no royalty is due.  Royalties are
+     payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation"
+     the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were
+     legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent
+     periodic) tax return.  Please contact us beforehand to
+     let us know your plans and to work out the details.
+
+WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO?
+Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of
+public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
+in machine readable form.
+
+The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time,
+public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses.
+Money should be paid to the:
+"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or
+software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at:
+hart@pobox.com
+
+[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only
+when distributed free of all fees.  Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by
+Michael S. Hart.  Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be
+used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be
+they hardware or software or any other related product without
+express permission.]
+
+*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END*
+
diff --git a/old/8ybug10.zip b/old/8ybug10.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..63c3b2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/8ybug10.zip